心义灯疏(第二分)显示巴利原文
Sāratthadīpanī-ṭīkā (dutiyo bhāgo)
一、巴拉基咖篇显示巴利原文
1. Pārājikakaṇḍaṃ
一、第一波罗夷显示巴利原文
1. Paṭhamapārājikaṃ
苏定那诵品解释显示巴利原文
Sudinnabhāṇavāravaṇṇanā
24 逐句注释,即逐词注释,或依词序而注释。所谓“以物品使用、提取、提醒等事”,物品使用是指售卖品的贩卖,提取是指于约定之日前往取回,提醒是指生起“应于某日交付”的意念。所谓四种:指依刹帝利、婆罗门、居士、沙门而有四种,或依比丘、比丘尼、优婆塞、优婆夷而有四种。见后,他心生此念——“见已”一词在此处表因义,主语不同,如“饮酥后得力,见狮后生怖”。确实因为见而产生了这样的思惟。虽然此处说的是“贤善家子”,但有些具足亲依止的人,如阿阇世王那样,也会生起障碍;据说这位长老也因对所作恶业的追悔,而在证得时生起障碍。显示巴利原文
24.Anupadavaṇṇananti padaṃ padaṃ paṭivaṇṇanaṃ, padānukkamena vaṇṇanaṃ vā. Bhaṇḍappayojanauddhārasāraṇādinā kiccenāti ettha vikkāyikabhaṇḍassa vikkiṇanaṃ bhaṇḍappayojanaṃ, dātuṃ saṅketite divase gantvā gahaṇaṃ uddhāro, ‘‘asukasmiṃ divase dātabba’’nti satuppādanaṃ sāraṇaṃ. Catubbidhāyāti khattiyabrāhmaṇagahapatisamaṇānaṃ vasena catubbidhāya, bhikkhubhikkhunīupāsakaupāsikānaṃ vasena vā. Disvānassa etadahosīti hetuattho ayaṃ disvāna-saddo asamānakattuko yathā ‘‘ghataṃ pivitvā balaṃ hoti, sīhaṃ disvā bhayaṃ hotī’’ti. Dassanakāraṇā hi evaṃ parivitakkanaṃ ahosi. Kiñcāpi ettha ‘‘bhabbakulaputtassā’’ti vuttaṃ, tathāpi upanissayasampannassapi ajātasattuno viya antarāyo bhavissatīti imassa therassapi katapāpakammamūlavippaṭisāravasena adhigamantarāyo ahosīti vadanti.
然而,那些具有道果亲依止的人,即使当着诸佛的面,也会有障碍吗?是的,会有。但这并非因为佛。诸佛为了使他人证得道果,常怀精进,在救度众生上无有间断、专精相应,因此,依佛而言,他们不会有障碍。其实,或因行持退失,或因恶友,才会有障碍。行持退失,应知有时是因说法者,有时是因那人自己缺乏相应的精勤;这里就说法者来说,退失只有依声闻才可知晓,并非依诸佛。例如,如果法将(舍利弗)了知达南阇尼婆罗门的意乐而说法,婆罗门本可证得须陀洹。这样,因说法者的行持退失而有了障碍。又如,驯象师之子佩沙在世尊面前闻法时小坐片刻,当世尊为他详细分别四种人,讲到自苦自励者时,他本可以证得须陀洹果。这样,因个人的行持退失而有了障碍。这位优婆塞就是因为行持退失,在说法尚未结束时便起座离开的缘故。假如阿阇世王不听从提婆达多的话,不行弑父之业,那么在说《沙门果经》的那天,他本可成为须陀洹,然而因为听从了那话、行了弑父之业,所以未能证得。这样,因恶友而有了障碍。苏定那也应视为因恶友而有了障碍。如果他听从父母之言,不与前妻行淫法,就不会以他作为根源而生起追悔,从而在证得时产生障碍。显示巴利原文
Kiṃ pana yesaṃ maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo atthi, buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāvepi tesaṃ antarāyo hotīti? Āma hoti, na pana buddhe paṭicca. Buddhā hi paresaṃ maggaphalādhigamāya ussāhajātā tattha nirantaraṃ yuttapayuttā eva honti, tasmā te paṭicca tesaṃ antarāyo na hoti, atha kho kiriyāparihāniyā vā pāpamittatāya vā hoti, kiriyāparihāni ca desakassa tasseva vā puggalassa tajjapayogābhāvato veditabbā, desakavasena panettha parihāni sāvakānaṃ vaseneva veditabbā, na buddhānaṃ vasena. Tathā hi sace dhammasenāpati dhanañjāniyassa brāhmaṇassa āsayaṃ ñatvā dhammaṃ desayissa, brāhmaṇo sotāpanno abhavissa. Evaṃ tāva desakassa vasena kiriyāparihāniyā antarāyo hoti. Sace pesso hatthārohaputto bhagavato sammukhā dhammaṃ suṇanto muhuttaṃ nisīdeyya, yāva tassa bhagavā attantapādike cattāro puggale vitthārena vibhajitvā deseti, sotāpattiphalena saṃyutto abhavissa. Evaṃ puggalassa vasena kiriyāparihāniyā antarāyo hoti nāma. Imassa hi upāsakassa kiriyāparihāni jātā apariniṭṭhitāya desanāya uṭṭhahitvā pakkantattā. Sace ajātasattu devadattassa vacanaṃ gahetvā pitughātakammaṃ nākarissa, sāmaññaphalasuttakathitadivase sotāpanno abhavissa, tassa vacanaṃ gahetvā pitughātakammassa katattā pana nāhosi. Evaṃ pāpamittatāya antarāyo hoti. Sudinnassapi pāpamittavasena antarāyo ahosīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yadi hi tena mātāpitūnaṃ vacanaṃ gahetvā purāṇadutiyikāya methunadhammo paṭisevito nābhavissa, na taṃmūlavippaṭisāravasena adhigamantarāyo abhavissa.
“yannūna”(何不)是个不变词,表思惟义,因此说“这是表示思惟”。“听法”是用动词所表达的意义,而用“yannūna”这个不变词将其显明。串联起来是:“我何不听闻法?”“yannūna”的意思是“假若那样的话”。“假若那样的话”与它含义相同。“他所听闻的法”是关联。大众,是指刹帝利大家等高贵大众聚集。如果他早于他人而来,适宜靠近世尊而坐,因此称为“后来者”。与三学相应,即与增上戒学、增上心学、增上慧学所统摄的三学相应。听闻少许法教后,心生此念,这是关联。此处“闻已”一词也应视为表因义,即因听闻而生此念。如果这样,那为什么又说“退坐一面……乃至……心生此念”?因此说“然彼因”等。其中,“彼”是指思惟。显示巴利原文
Yannūnāti parivitakkanatthe nipātoti āha ‘‘parivitakkadassanameta’’nti. ‘‘Dhammaṃ suṇeyya’’nti kiriyāpadena vuccamāno eva hi attho ‘‘yannūnā’’ti nipātapadena jotīyati. Ahaṃ yannūna dhammaṃ suṇeyyanti yojanā. Yannūnāti ca yadi panāti attho. Yadi panāti idampi hi tena samānatthameva. Yaṃ dhammaṃ suṇātīti sambandho. Uḷāruḷārajanāti khattiyamahāsālādiuḷāruḷārajanākiṇṇā . Sace ayampi paṭhamaṃ āgaccheyya, bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamitvā nisīdituṃ araharūpoti āha ‘‘pacchā āgatenā’’ti. Sikkhattayūpasaṃhitanti adhisīlaadhicittaadhipaññāsaṅkhātasikkhattayayuttaṃ. Thokaṃ dhammakathaṃ sutvā ahosīti sambandho. Idhāpi sutvā-saddo hetuatthoti daṭṭhabbo, savanakāraṇā etadahosīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yadi evaṃ atha kasmā ‘‘ekamantaṃ nisinnassa…pe… etadahosī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘taṃ panassa yasmā’’tiādi. Tattha tanti parivitakkanaṃ.
“略说”指不逐词析出,而以总括的方式解释义理。“以种种方式”即通过种种途径。“对我审察”意为:世尊以种种方式教导了阐明欲的过患、卑劣与杂染,以及与之相反的出离功德与利益之法,例如“这些欲称为无常、苦、变坏法,如骨骸之喻”(中部1.234;2.42;波逸提417;大义释3;小义释·犀角经义释147)等;我这般理解、了知;当我对这些法如此审察、探究时,便生起了这样的认知、这样的现起。“三学梵行”是指含摄增上戒学等三学的殊胜行。“即使一日”指哪怕仅仅一日。“无有毁坏”指通过不犯哪怕微细的恶作而不令毁坏,或者通过成就无毁坏、无穿孔等状态而无有毁坏。这其实是对“无毁坏”特征的解说。“临终心”指死心。“绝对圆满”指不遗留任何一分,完整地圆满。“不为烦恼垢所染”指不为渴爱杂染等所染污,不令哪怕一念杂染垢生起。“绝对清净”指必须保持完全清净。由此,如同洗净的螺贝般被刻画,故称“螺贝刻画”。因此说“如刻画之螺贝”。以其洁白清净之义,如同已刻画并洗净的螺贝,故说“如洗净螺贝之容色”。此处“居住”一词的用法,表示“在家”是处。显示巴利原文
Saṅkhepakathāti visuṃ visuṃ paduddhāraṃ akatvā samāsato atthavaṇṇanā. Yena yena ākārenāti yena yena pakārena. Tena tena me upaparikkhatoti ‘‘kāmā nāmete aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammā aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.234; 2.42; pāci. 417; mahāni. 3; cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 147) ca ādinā yena yena ākārena kāmesu ādīnavaṃ okāraṃ saṃkilesaṃ, tabbipariyāyato nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ guṇaṃ pakāsentaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi avabujjhāmi, tena tena pakārena upaparikkhato vīmaṃsantassa mayhaṃ evaṃ hoti evaṃ upaṭṭhāti. Sikkhattayabrahmacariyanti adhisīlasikkhādisikkhattayasaṅgahaṃ seṭṭhacariyaṃ. Ekampi divasanti ekadivasamattampi. Akhaṇḍaṃ katvāti dukkaṭamattassapi anāpajjanena akhaṇḍitaṃ katvā, akhaṇḍaacchiddādibhāvāpādanena vā. Akhaṇḍalakkhaṇavacanañhetaṃ. Carimakacittanti cuticittaṃ. Kiñcipi ekadesaṃ asesetvā ekanteneva paripūretabbatāya ekantaparipuṇṇaṃ. Kilesamalena amalīnaṃ katvāti taṇhāsaṃkilesādinā asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ katvā, cittuppādamattampi saṃkilesamalaṃ anuppādetvā. Accantameva visuddhaṃ katvā pariharitabbatāya ekantaparisuddhaṃ. Tato eva saṅkhaṃ viya likhitanti saṅkhalikhitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘likhitasaṅkhasadisa’’nti. Pariyodātaṭṭhena nimmalabhāvena saṅkhaṃ viya likhitaṃ dhotanti saṅkhalikhitanti āha ‘‘dhotasaṅkhasappaṭibhāga’’nti. ‘‘Ajjhāvasatā’’ti padappayogena agāranti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘agāramajjhe’’ti. Dāṭhikāpi massuggahaṇeneva gahetvā ‘‘massu’’tveva vuttaṃ, uttarādharamassunti attho. Kasāyena rattānīti kāsāyānīti āha ‘‘kasāyarasapītatāyā’’ti. Paridahitvāti nivāsetvā ceva pārupitvā ca. Agārassa hitanti agāravāso agāraṃ uttarapadalopena, tassa vaḍḍhiāvahaṃ agārassa hitaṃ.
25 关于“亲戚、血亲”等词:“此是内在者”故知,或被称为“亲戚”;因血而关联者为“血亲”。父方的亲属为“亲戚”,母方的血亲为“血亲”。母方或父方的亲属为“亲戚”,翁姑方的为“血亲”。以友爱相待者为“友”,或谓在所有秘密中都能被纳入内部者为“友”。在应作之事中,以共同存在的意义而为“同僚”。执取“我”者为母,执取“爱”者为父。“身体作业的污秽”指大小便等身体的排泄物。不允许未得父母许可的儿子出家,是为了“不让父母及世间大众心生变异”而不允许。也正因此,净饭大王得到了那样的恩许。显示巴利原文
25.Ñātisālohitātiādīsu ‘‘ayaṃ ajjhattiko’’ti jānanti, ñāyanti vāti ñātī, lohitena sambandhāti sālohitā. Pitupakkhikā ñātī, mātupakkhikā sālohitā. Mātupakkhikā pitupakkhikā vā ñātī , sassusasurapakkhikā sālohitā. Mittāyantīti mittā, minanti vā sabbaguyhesu anto pakkhipantīti mittā. Kiccakaraṇīyesu sahabhāvaṭṭhena amā hontīti amaccā. Mamāyatīti mātā, piyāyatīti pitā. Sarīrakiccalesenāti uccārapassāvādisarīrakiccalesena. Ananuññātaṃ puttaṃ na pabbājetīti ‘‘mātāpitūnaṃ lokiyamahājanassa ca cittaññathattaṃ mā hotū’’ti na pabbājeti. Tatoyeva ca suddhodanamahārājassa tathā varo dinno.
26 “以卸下重担”指在货物用途等方面卸下重担。因此说“不……”等。“应被喜爱者”为可爱,故说“生喜悦者”。“令意满足者”为可意,故说“令意增长者”。在幼年时期以安乐养育,此后又以酥、乳等美味可意的饮食等丰足供给而安乐养护。或者,以坚固忠诚的仆从等眷属的圆满以及领土的圆满,并以殊胜妙乐的资具供给而安乐养育;以毫不费力地消除苦因而安乐养护。或者,以内在支分的圆满而安乐养育,以外在支分的圆满而安乐养护。显示巴利原文
26.Dhuranikkhepenāti bhaṇḍappayojanādīsu dhuranikkhepena. Tenāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādi. Piyāyitabboti piyoti āha ‘‘pītijananako’’ti. Manassa appāyanato manāpoti āha ‘‘manavaḍḍhanako’’ti. Sukhedhito taruṇadārakakāle, tato parañca sappikhīrādisādurasamanuññabhojanādiāhārasampattiyā sukhaparihato. Atha vā daḷhabhattikadhātijanādiparijanasampattiyā ceva paricchedasampattiyā ca uḷārapaṇītasukhapaccayūpahārehi ca sukhedhito, akiccheneva dukkhapaccayavinodanena sukhaparihato. Ajjhattikaṅgasampattiyā vā sukhedhito, bāhiraṅgasampattiyā sukhaparihato.
“些许”的解释是“即便极少的部分”。当“知道”一词并非表示觉知义时,在其用法中——如“知道酥、知道蜜”等——语法学者主张属格用于工具义,故说“不以任何苦而觉受”。因此说“工具义用属格,而‘知道’用于觉受义”。在此,“不以任何苦而觉受”应理解为:不以任何作为工具的苦而经历觉受。因为在这里,“些许”一词中工具义的属格也被省略了。因此会说:“在两种解释中,前词与后词相同的格省略应被理解。”然而,当“知道”一词表示忆念义时,在忆念义的词根用法中——如“忆念母、忆念父、知道兄弟”等——语法学者说属格用于受格义,故说“或者,义为‘你不忆念任何苦’”,即由于从未经历过任何苦,即使寻找自己曾经历过的哪怕极少苦,也因不存在而不忆念。两种解释,即是依觉受义与依忆念义所说的第二、第三种解释。“前词”指“些许”一词,“后词”指“苦”一词,“相同格省略”指与后词相同的属格省略。在应说“任何苦”时,两种解释中前词的属格都被省略,而表述为“些许苦”。“不欲者”指不愿意者。如此存在时:难道我们不会在善施等中,以任何方法、无挽回地……显示巴利原文
Kiñcīti etassa vivaraṇaṃ ‘‘appamattakampi kalabhāga’’nti. Yadā jānāti-saddo bodhanattho na hoti, tadā tassa payoge ‘‘sappino jānāti, madhuno jānātī’’tiādīsu viya karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ saddatthavidū icchantīti āha ‘‘kiñci dukkhena nānubhosī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘karaṇatthe sāmivacanaṃ, anubhavanatthe ca jānanā’’ti. Ettha ca kiñci dukkhena nānubhosīti kenaci dukkhena karaṇabhūtena visayaṃ nānubhosīti evamattho veditabbo. ‘‘Kiñcī’’ti etthāpi hi karaṇatthe sāmivacanassa lopo kato. Teneva ca vakkhati ‘‘vikappadvayepi purimapadassa uttarapadena samānavibhattilopo daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Yadā pana jānāti-saddo saraṇattho hoti, tadā saraṇatthānaṃ dhātusaddānaṃ payoge ‘‘mātu sarati, pitu sarati, bhātu jānātī’’tiādīsu viya upayogatthe sāmivacanaṃ saddasatthavidū vadantīti āha ‘‘atha vā kiñci dukkhaṃ nassarasīti attho’’ti, kassaci dukkhassa ananubhūtattā attanā anubhūtaṃ appamattakampi dukkhaṃ pariyesamānopi abhāvatoyeva nassarasīti attho . Vikappadvayepīti anubhavanasaraṇatthavasena vutte dutiyatatiyavikappadvaye. Purimapadassāti ‘‘kiñcī’’ti padassa. Uttarapadenāti ‘‘dukkhassā’’ti padena. Samānavibhattilopoti uttarapadena samānassa sāmivacanassa lopo. ‘‘Kassaci dukkhassā’’ti vattabbe vikappadvayepi purimapade sāmivacanassa lopaṃ katvā ‘‘kiñci dukkhassā’’ti niddeso kato. Anicchakāti anicchantā. Evaṃ santeti nanu mayaṃ sudinna sāmādīsu kenacipi upāyena appaṭisādhanena appaṭikārena maraṇenapi tayā akāmakāpi vinā bhavissāma, evaṃ sati. Yenāti yena kāraṇena. Kiṃ panāti ettha kinti karaṇatthe paccattavacananti dassento āha ‘‘kena pana kāraṇenā’’ti.
28 「乾闼婆、舞者、剧者等」:此处「乾闼婆」指歌唱者,「舞者」指舞台表演者,「剧者」指跳跃杂耍等艺人。「以诸侍奉」:此处意为「在周围各处,随其各自的境界而行」,故说「调御诸根」等。或者,「以诸侍奉」意为「以安乐资具侍奉自己,令自己得到侍奉」。由于如此状态即是嬉戏、游乐,故说「嬉戏」等。「应受用、应享用故,五种欲乐特称为财物」,故说「享用财物」。「施与、特施」:此处,常施称为「施」,在布萨日等应施的额外之施称为「特施」。或者,为守护传统而施称为「施」,自己设立后而施称为「特施」。或者,众人共有、非极殊胜之施称为「施」,非他人共有、极为殊胜之施称为「特施」。以「等」字包含持戒等。没有所谓言语问答的交谈,故为「无交谈」。显示巴利原文
28.Gandhabbanaṭanāṭakādīnīti ettha gandhabbā nāma gāyanakā, naṭā nāma raṅganaṭā, nāṭakā laṅghanakādayo. Paricārehīti ettha parito tattha tattha yathāsakaṃ visayesu cārehīti atthoti āha ‘‘indriyāni cārehī’’tiādi. Paricārehīti vā sukhūpakaraṇehi attānaṃ paricārehi attano paricaraṇaṃ kārehi. Tathābhūto ca yasmā laḷanto kīḷanto nāma hoti, tasmā ‘‘laḷā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhuñjitabbato paribhuñjitabbato visesato pañca kāmaguṇā bhogā nāmāti āha ‘‘bhoge bhuñjanto’’ti. Dānappadānānīti ettha niccadānaṃ dānaṃ nāma, uposathadivasādīsu dātabbaṃ atirekadānaṃ padānaṃ nāma. Paveṇīrakkhaṇavasena vā dīyamānaṃ dānaṃ nāma, attanāva paṭṭhapetvā dīyamānaṃ padānaṃ nāma. Pacurajanasādhāraṇaṃ vā nātiuḷāraṃ dānaṃ nāma, anaññasādhāraṇaṃ atiuḷāraṃ padānaṃ nāma. Ādi-saddena sīlādīni saṅgaṇhāti. Natthi etassa vacanappaṭivacanasaṅkhāto ālāpasallāpoti nirālāpasallāpo.
30 「执取力量」:此处执取力量即是产生身力,故说「产生身力」。「泪面」:泪水在脸上者,称为泪面,即泪湿面庞。村庄本身即是村庄范围内的住处,因为包含在村庄内,故称「村庄范围的住处」。「以拒绝额外所得」:即拒绝「依止团食」(《大品》128)中比丘乞食所得之外的额外所得,如僧团食等额外所得,故说「拒绝十四种食」。僧团食、指定食、邀请食、筹食、半月食、布萨食、月朔食、来客食、去客食、病者食、病者侍者食、寺院食、常设食、轮值食,此为十四种食。其中,应施与全体僧团的食物为僧团食。指定若干比丘而施的食物为指定食。于一个半月中的一天应施的食物为半月食。于布萨日应施的食物为布萨食。于月朔日应施的食物为月朔食。为寺院而施的食物为寺院食。常设于固定家中的食物为常设食。由村民等轮流施与的食物为轮值食。显示巴利原文
30.Balaṃ gāhetvāti ettha balaggahaṇaṃ nāma kāyabalassa uppādanamevāti āha ‘‘kāyabalaṃ janetvā’’ti. Assumukhanti assūni mukhe etassāti assumukho, taṃ assumukhaṃ, assukilinnamukhanti attho. Gāmoyeva gāmantasenāsanaṃ gāmapariyāpannattā gāmantasenāsanassa. Atirekalābhapaṭikkhepenāti ‘‘piṇḍiyālopabhojanaṃ nissāyā’’ti (mahāva. 128) evaṃ vuttabhikkhāhāralābhato adhikalābho saṅghabhattādiatirekalābho, tassa paṭikkhepenāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘cuddasabhattāni paṭikkhipitvā’’ti. Saṅghabhattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ nimantanabhattaṃ salākabhattaṃ pakkhikaṃ uposathikaṃ pāṭipadikaṃ āgantukabhattaṃ gamikabhattaṃ gilānabhattaṃ gilānupaṭṭhākabhattaṃ vihārabhattaṃ dhurabhattaṃ vārabhattanti imāni cuddasa bhattāni. Tattha sakalassa saṅghassa dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ saṅghabhattaṃ. Katipaye bhikkhū uddisitvā dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ uddesabhattaṃ. Ekasmiṃ pakkhe ekadivasaṃ dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ pakkhikaṃ. Uposathe dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ uposathikaṃ. Pāṭipadadivase dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ pāṭipadikaṃ. Vihāraṃ uddissa dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ vihārabhattaṃ. Dhurageheyeva ṭhapetvā dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ dhurabhattaṃ. Gāmavāsīādīhi vārena dātabbaṃ bhattaṃ vārabhattaṃ.
又,为何说‘拒绝居士衣’呢?若曾经有所接受,拒绝方谈得上合理;然而,世尊成佛之初并未开许接受居士衣,直至后来耆婆迦事中方开许。因此,在耆婆迦事(《大品注》337)中将说:‘世尊自成佛以来,至此为止,二十年中无有比丘接受居士衣,皆持粪扫衣。’而苏定那正是成佛之初出家。故将说:‘苏定那于世尊成佛第十二年出家,第二十年时入亲族家乞食,彼时出家已八年。’既然如此,为何还说‘拒绝居士衣’呢?答:虽当时未开许居士衣,然依受持粪扫衣支,即名为拒绝居士衣,故说‘拒绝居士衣’。显示巴利原文
Atha ‘‘gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhipitvā’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ. Gahaṇe hi sati paṭikkhepo yujjeyya, na ca paṭhamabodhiyaṃ gahapaticīvarassa paṭiggahaṇaṃ anuññātaṃ parato jīvakavatthusmiṃ anuññātattā. Teneva vakkhati jīvakavatthusmiṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 337) ‘‘bhagavato hi buddhabhāvappattito paṭṭhāya yāva idaṃ vatthaṃ, etthantare vīsati vassāni na koci gahapaticīvaraṃ sādiyi, sabbe paṃsukūlikāva ahesu’’nti. Sudinno ca paṭhamabodhiyaṃyeva pabbajito. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘sudinno hi bhagavato dvādasame vasse pabbajito, vīsatime vasse ñātikulaṃ piṇḍāya paviṭṭho, sayaṃ pabbajjāya aṭṭhavassiko hutvā’’ti. Tasmā ‘‘gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhipitvā’’ti kasmā vuttanti? Vuccate – ananuññātepi gahapaticīvare paṃsukūlikaṅgasamādānavasena gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhittaṃ nāma hotīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘gahapaticīvaraṃ paṭikkhipitvā’’ti.
‘拒绝贪行’:因(贪爱)具猛烈劫夺善财之义,贪爱称为‘贪’;依贪而行,则为‘贪行’,即依贪爱而超越次第家宅行乞;拒绝这种行为,是为此语之义。故说‘依次第家宅而入乞食’。应知,此处依阿兰若支等头陀支的摄持,其余头陀支亦已包含在内。‘跋耆人’:是以国王义所作的主格形式,意为跋耆诸王。而‘地方’一词亦指其地居民,故‘于跋耆人中’是依地方而作的位格,意指在称为跋耆的地方。显示巴利原文
Loluppacāraṃ paṭikkhipitvāti kusalabhaṇḍassa bhusaṃ vilumpanaṭṭhena loluppaṃ vuccati taṇhā, loluppena caraṇaṃ loluppacāro, taṇhāvasena gharapaṭipāṭiṃ atikkamitvā bhikkhāya caraṇaṃ, taṃ paṭikkhipitvāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘gharapaṭipāṭiyā bhikkhāya pavisatī’’ti. Ettha ca āraññikaṅgādipadhānaṅgavasena sesadhutaṅgānipi gahitāneva hontīti veditabbaṃ. Vajjīnanti rājāno apekkhitvā sāmivacanaṃ kataṃ, vajjīrājūnanti attho. Janapada-saddassa taṃnivāsīsupi pavattanato ‘‘vajjīsū’’ti janapadāpekkhaṃ bhummavacanaṃ, vajjināmake janapadeti attho.
「以受用、资具之广大」:即五种欲乐所摄的受用,以及象、马、车、妇女等受用资具的广大。此处即以「资具」一词指受用资具。故说:「他们的受用及受用资具,皆是广大。」亦有人说:「受用指象、马、车、妇女等,受用资具即他们之金等器具。」「坚实」:即坚实之物。「储藏」:即收藏,作储藏之意。「以日常消费所摄财物的广大」:即日日应受用的财物之广大。「以生金、生银的丰足」:即依块金、块银及金币、银币等,生金、生银的丰足。「喜」:即喜悦,喜悦的资具为喜具,他们有众多种种庄严之喜具,故为「多喜具」。故说「庄严之物」等。「依商贾等」:即依贸易、增长等。「以财谷的丰足」:即七宝所摄之财,及包含一切初熟、后熟谷物的丰足。其中,有人说:「金、银、摩尼、珍珠、琉璃、钻石、珊瑚为七宝。」应知稻、麦等为初熟,因先熟之谷果;反之,绿豆、黄豆等为后熟。「因是上等次第乞食者」:即被其余头陀支所围绕的上等次第乞食头陀支所具足。故说「欲行次第乞食」。显示巴利原文
Upabhogaparibhogūpakaraṇamahantatāyāti pañcakāmaguṇasaṅkhātānaṃ upabhogānañceva hatthiassarathaitthiyādiupabhogūpakaraṇānañca mahantatāya. Upabhogūpakaraṇāneva hi idha paribhogūpakaraṇasaddena vuttāni. Tenevāha ‘‘ye hi tesaṃ upabhogā, yāni ca upabhogūpakaraṇāni, tāni mahantānī’’ti. ‘‘Upabhogā hatthiassarathaitthīādayo, upabhogūpakaraṇāni tesameva suvaṇṇādiupakaraṇānī’’tipi vadanti. Sārakānīti sārabhūtāni. Nidhetvāti nidahitvā, nidhānaṃ katvāti attho. Divasaparibbayasaṅkhātabhogamahantatāyāti divase divase paribhuñjitabbasaṅkhātabhogānaṃ mahantatāya. Jātarūparajatasseva pahūtatāyāti piṇḍapiṇḍavasena ceva suvaṇṇamāsakarajatamāsakādivasena ca jātarūparajatasseva pahūtatāya. Vittīti tuṭṭhi, vittiyā upakaraṇaṃ vittūpakaraṇaṃ, pahūtaṃ nānāvidhālaṅkārabhūtaṃ vittūpakaraṇametesanti pahūtavittūpakaraṇā. Tenāha ‘‘alaṅkārabhūtassā’’tiādi. Vohāravasenāti vaṇijjāvasena vaḍḍhikatādivasena. Dhanadhaññassa pahūtatāyāti sattaratanasaṅkhātassa dhanassa sabbapubbaṇṇāparaṇṇasaṅgahitassa dhaññassa ca pahūtatāyāti attho. Tattha ‘‘suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimuttāveḷuriyavajirapavāḷāni satta ratanānī’’ti vadanti. Sālivīhiādi pubbaṇṇaṃ purakkhataṃ sassaphalanti katvā, tabbipariyāyato muggamāsādi aparaṇṇanti veditabbaṃ. Ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātikattāti sesadhutaṅgaparivāritena ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātadhutaṅgena samannāgatattā. Tenāha ‘‘sapadānacāraṃ caritukāmo’’ti.
31 因生于家中而类同亲属的女仆,故称亲属女仆。或者,以腐坏为特征的过失,称为隔夜食;或已过夜、达凌晨时分而超限者,称为隔夜食。因此说“已过一夜者”等。因已腐坏而不堪受用,故为不堪受用者。纵使可弃性已定,于询问时,仍可依世俗的疑惑表达方式来问,故说“假如”。以圣者的通行语,即依圣者惯用的言说。因为圣者们称呼女性为“姐妹”。已舍断的执取物,即已放弃执著之物。显示巴利原文
31. Antojātatāya vā ñātisadisī dāsīti ñātidāsī. Pūtibhāveneva lakkhitabbadoso vā ābhidosiko, abhidosaṃ vā paccūsakālaṃ gato patto atikkantoti ābhidosiko. Tenāha ‘‘ekarattātikkantassa vā’’tiādi. Pūtibhūtabhāvena paribhogaṃ nārahatīti aparibhogāraho. Chaḍḍanīyasabhāve nicchitepi pucchākāle sandehavohāravaseneva pucchituṃ yuttanti āha ‘‘sace’’ti. Ariyavohārenāti ariyasamudācārena. Ariyā hi mātugāmaṃ bhaginivādena samudācaranti. Nissaṭṭhapariggahanti pariccattālayaṃ.
因说“Ākirā”,故说“或为暗示”;依照未舍弃“若彼为可弃法”这一同义语而说,故说“或为已发之言”;与因缘相关的话语即是已发之言。说“可以讲述”,是就无所牵挂的状态而说;但于此处,则是特别就物品已不堪受用而说。最上圣传承者,即在圆满圣传承修行者中的最上、最高者。被标记、被识知,是为相;如所善加辨识的相貌,故说“在家时曾善加辨识的相貌”。她观察手背等处,心想:“我儿苏定那的手足背,如金龟壳背;手指圆润如雌黄粉条;声音甜美。”她执取、认知、辨识了在家时曾善加辨识的相貌。为何她见到那位亲属女仆却未能辨识?故说“因为苏定那……”等。以已出家者,即已进入出家者,指比丘。进入屋内,即进入作为女主人应坐之处的中庭。Yagghe 意为“我告知”,此即其义,故为“告知义的不变词”。也有说其义为:“Yagghe jāneyyāsi,即善加了知”。于称呼中,即对女仆的称呼。因此说“如此……”等。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ākirā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘viññatti vā’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘sace taṃ chaḍḍanīyadhamma’’nti pariyāyaṃ amuñcitvā vuttattā ‘‘payuttavācā vā’’ti vuttaṃ, paccayapaṭisaṃyuttā vācā payuttavācā. Vattuṃ vaṭṭatīti nirapekkhabhāvato vuttaṃ , idha pana visesato aparibhogārahattāva vatthuno. Aggaariyavaṃsikoti ariyavaṃsapaṭipattipūrakānaṃ aggo uttamo. Nimīyati saññāyatīti nimittaṃ, yathāsallakkhito ākāroti āha ‘‘gihikāle sallakkhitapubbaṃ ākāra’’nti. Hatthapiṭṭhiādīni olokayamānā ‘‘sāmiputtassa me sudinnassa viya suvaṇṇakacchapapiṭṭhisadisā imā hatthapādapiṭṭhiyo, haritālavaṭṭiyo viya suvaṭṭitā aṅguliyo, madhuro saro’’ti gihikāle sallakkhitapubbaṃ ākāraṃ aggahesi sañjāni sallakkhesi. Kasmā pana sā ñātidāsī disvāva na sañjānīti āha ‘‘sudinno hī’’tiādi. Pabbajjupagatenāti pabbajjaṃ upagatena, pabbajitenāti attho. Gharaṃ pavisitvāti gehasāminiyā nisīditabbaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ antogehaṃ pavisitvā. Yaggheti imassa ārocayāmīti ayamatthoti āha ‘‘ārocanatthe nipāto’’ti. ‘‘Yagghe jāneyyāsīti suṭṭhu jāneyyāsī’’tipi atthaṃ vadanti. Ālapaneti dāsijanassa ālapane. Tenāha ‘‘evañhī’’tiādi.
32 屋中有堂,即屋中一侧有食堂,以墙围绕,门窗善加安置,沙庭善加清扫。水与粥,即水及粥。为何此处说“堂”为“某墙根”,此义已予解说?故说“因为出家者……”等。于不适宜之处,即对比丘不适宜之处。Atthi nu kho 句中,nu 字表询问,kho 字为令语词流畅而用。或 nukho 为一表询问义的不变词组。由此显示 nāma 字有询问义。Yesaṃ no tvam,即“你是我们谁的儿子”。在此种处所,他虽知该处对比丘并无不妥,但仍想:“像我这样大富家之子,于他人客堂中安坐用餐,实为不雅。”故如此说。因此说:“亲爱的苏定那,回自己家用餐,岂不更好吗?”又以另一方式显示 nāma 字唯是询问义,故说“同样,是否有,诸君……”等。同样,为总括义。今为显示 nāma 字有思量义,故说“同样,我想是有……”等。显示巴利原文
32.Gharesu sālā hontīti gharesu ekamante bhojanasālā honti pākāraparikkhittā susaṃvihitadvārabandhā susammaṭṭhavālikaṅgaṇā. Udakakañjiyanti udakañca kañjiyañca. Kasmā pana īdisāyameva sālāya aññataraṃ kuṭṭamūlanti ayamattho vuttoti āha ‘‘na hi pabbajitā’’tiādi. Asāruppe ṭhāneti bhikkhūnaṃ ananucchavike padese. Atthi nu khoti nu-saddo pucchanatthe, kho-saddo vacanasiliṭṭhatāya vutto. Nukhoti vā nipātasamudāyo pucchanattho. Tena nāma-saddassa pucchanatthataṃ dasseti. Yesaṃ no tvanti yesaṃ no putto tvaṃ. Īdise ṭhāneti kiñcāpi taṃ ṭhānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ananurūpaṃ na hoti, tathāpi mādisānaṃ mahābhogakulānaṃ puttassa parakule āsanasālāyaṃ nisīditvā bhojanaṃ nāma ayuttarūpanti maññamāno āha. Tenevāha ‘‘nanu nāma, tāta sudinna, sakaṃ gehaṃ gantabba’’nti. Aññenapi pakārena nāmasaddassa pucchanatthatameva dassento āha ‘‘tathā atthi nu kho tātā’’tiādi. Tathāti samuccayattho. Idāni nāmasaddassa maññanatthataṃ dassento āha ‘‘tathā atthi maññe’’tiādi.
为苦所逼恼,即是被意所生之苦所压迫。此中所说的义理,如“亲爱的苏定那,我们家中可有财物?”等语所阐明的那样。依不信受与不忍耐之义,此处的anokappana为不信受,amarisana为不忍耐。“未然之语”虽用了未来时的表达,但其义实属现在时。因此说“现前亦”。不忍受,即不能堪忍。说彼为不善,是针对“tadāya”这一读法而说的。够了,居士,我今日的食事已办——长老依最上的一坐食而如此拒绝。而说“最上的一坐食”,是依实况而说,以显示长老确是如此。即使是较温和的一坐食者,若于某坐处已用些许食物,即便依义务起身后,亦不得再食。是故三藏小无畏长老说:“应守护座,或守护食。”即使是最上的常乞食者,此处也仅是举其一例;长老于次第乞食者中亦为最上。作为最上的次第乞食者,即使对从前后送来的施食亦不纳受,唯立于家门口舍下钵盂。因此,长老亦因是最上次第乞食者,而不接受明日的请食。若如是,为何又说“接受了”呢?故有此言:“若我连一餐亦不取……”等。因为智者不会忽视对父母、师长、和尚所应作的摄益,而唯独追求头陀支的清净。显示巴利原文
Dukkhābhitunnatāyāti mānasikena dukkhena abhipīḷitattā. Etamatthanti ‘‘atthi nu kho, tāta sudinna, amhākaṃ dhana’’ntiādinā yathāvuttamatthaṃ. Anokappanāmarisanatthavasenāti ettha anokappanaṃ asaddahanaṃ. Amarisanaṃ asahanaṃ. Anāgatavacanaṃ anāgatasaddappayogo, attho pana vattamānakālikova. Tenāha ‘‘paccakkhampī’’ti. Na marisayāmīti na visahāmi. Taṃ na sundaranti ‘‘tadāya’’nti pāṭhaṃ sandhāyāha. Alaṃ, gahapati, kataṃ me ajja bhattakiccanti thero ukkaṭṭhaekāsanikatāya paṭikkhipanto evamāha. Ukkaṭṭhaekāsanikatāyāti ca idaṃ bhūtakathanavasena vuttaṃ therassa tathābhāvadīpanatthaṃ. Mudukassapi hi ekāsanikassa yāya nisajjāya kiñcimattampi bhojanaṃ bhuttaṃ, vattasīsenapi tato vuṭṭhitassa puna bhuñjituṃ na vaṭṭati. Tenāha tipiṭakacūḷābhayatthero ‘‘āsanaṃ vā rakkheyya bhojanaṃ vā’’ti. Ukkaṭṭhapiṇḍapātikopi samānoti nidassanamattamidaṃ, thero sapadānacārikesupi ukkaṭṭhoyeva. Ukkaṭṭhasapadānacārikopi hi purato ca pacchato ca āhaṭabhikkhampi aggahetvāva gharadvāre ṭhatvā pattavissajjanameva karoti, tasmā thero ukkaṭṭhasapadānacārikattāpi svātanāya bhikkhaṃ nādhivāseti. Atha kasmā ‘‘adhivāsesī’’ti āha ‘‘sace ekabhattampi na gahessāmī’’tiādi. Paṇḍitā hi mātāpitūnaṃ ācariyupajjhāyānaṃ vā kātabbaṃ anuggahaṃ ajjhupekkhitvā dhutaṅgavisuddhikā na bhavanti.
33 33. 中等量者,即身高四肘之人,是为中等量。也有说“六肘”的。依此而作遮蔽,故为遮蔽物——此tirokaraṇī一词意指布幔、围墙等,因此说:“tirokaraṇiyanti,是在作格的意义上用作处格”。本应说“tirokaraṇiyā”,却说为“tirokaraṇiya”,这是在作格的意义上说了处格。又或者,为显示此tirokaraṇī一词即是布幔、围墙的同义词,故说“或者”等语。将其围起,即是将其从四周抛散、周匝捆束,作如此说。因此说“周匝而作”。有虽似语尾变化而实为不变词者,故说“tena 此亦或”等。显示巴利原文
33.Majjhimappamāṇoti catuhattho puriso majjhimappamāṇo. ‘‘Chahattho’’tipi keci. Tiro karonti etāyāti tirokaraṇīti sāṇipākāravacano ayaṃ tirokaraṇī-saddoti āha ‘‘tirokaraṇiyanti karaṇatthe bhumma’’nti. ‘‘Tirokaraṇiyā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘tirokaraṇiya’’nti karaṇatthe bhummaṃ vuttaṃ. Tirokaraṇīya-saddo vā ayaṃ sāṇipākārapariyāyoti dassento āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Taṃ parikkhipitvāti taṃ samantato khipitvā, parito bandhitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘samantato katvā’’ti. Vibhattipatirūpakopi nipāto hotīti āha ‘‘tenāti ayampi vā’’tiādi.
34 34. “那时,具寿苏定那的父亲在自己的住处,令人准备了美味的嚼食与啖食后,告知具寿苏定那时至:‘是时候了,亲爱的苏定那,饭食已备好。’”由于在巴利圣典中未见收录这样告知时辰的文句,因此说:“虽然在圣典中没有提到告知时辰。”所谓“在告知时”,即是在告知“是时候了,亲爱的苏定那,饭食已备好”之时。“两堆”,是指一堆积攒的铜币与一堆黄金。显示巴利原文
34. ‘‘Atha kho āyasmato sudinnassa pitā sake nivesane paṇītaṃ khādanīyaṃ bhojanīyaṃ paṭiyādāpetvā āyasmato sudinnassa kālaṃ ārocesi – ‘kālo, tāta sudinna, niṭṭhitaṃ bhatta’nti’’ evaṃ kālārocanassa pāḷiyaṃ anāruḷhattā āha – ‘‘kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ kālārocanaṃ na vutta’’nti. Ārociteyeva kāleti ‘‘kālo, tāta sudinna, niṭṭhitaṃ bhatta’’nti kāle ārociteyeva. Dve puñjeti kahāpaṇapuñjañca suvaṇṇapuñjañca.
“Pettika”意指从父亲得来、属于父亲的。“Nihita”指埋入地下的。“Payutta”指通过增值而运用的。应知这是省略了派生词缀的说法,正如别处所说“得到祖父的财富后,桑阇耶快乐地生活”那样,应视为省略了派生词缀的说法。从祖父得来或属于祖父的,称为“petāmaha”(祖父的)。“Pabbajitaliṅga”(出家相)指出家人的装束。“Na rājabhīto”(不因国王而恐惧)指不因犯罪而畏惧王族。那些财产被人取走的人,便是“iṇāyika”(债权人)。“Palibuddho”(被障碍的)指被压迫、被困扰。显示巴利原文
Pettikanti pitito āgataṃ pettikaṃ. Nihitanti bhūmigataṃ. Payuttanti vaḍḍhivasena payojitaṃ. Taddhitalopaṃ katvā veditabbanti yathā aññatthāpi ‘‘pitāmahaṃ dhanaṃ laddhā, sukhaṃ jīvati sañjayo’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ taddhitalopaṃ katvā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pitāmahato āgataṃ, pitāmahassa vā idaṃ petāmahaṃ. Pabbajitaliṅganti samaṇavesaṃ. Na rājabhītoti aparādhakāraṇā na rājakulā bhīto. Yesaṃ santakaṃ dhanaṃ gahitaṃ, te iṇāyikā. Palibuddho pīḷito.
“Vibhattipatirūpaka”(像语尾变化的)是针对“tena”一词而言的。“Taṃnidāna”(以此为因)意指以那财产为因、为缘由。“Assa”表示主语格,或指该词。“Bhaya”(恐惧)指以内心惊恐状态而生起的恐惧,并非指智恐惧,也不是指“由此而恐惧”那样的所缘恐惧,因此说“意思是心的惊恐”。“Chambhitatta”(战栗)即由此内心惊恐恐惧而导致的全身战栗状态,特别是心脏肌肉的颤动,因此说“身体颤抖、心脏肌肉颤动”。“Lomahaṃsa”(身毛竖立)即因那恐惧、那战栗而导致的全身毛发竖立的状态,这意味着毛发如同墙上挂钉般向上竖立,因此说“毛发的竖立、向上竖立的状态”。显示巴利原文
Vibhattipatirūpakoti ‘‘tenā’’ti padaṃ sandhāyāha. Taṃnidānanti taṃ dhanaṃ nidānaṃ kāraṇamassāti taṃnidānaṃ. Assāti paccattavacanassa, padassa vā. Bhayanti cittassa utrastākārena pavattabhayaṃ adhippetaṃ, na ñāṇabhayaṃ, nāpi ‘‘bhāyati etasmā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ ārammaṇabhayanti āha ‘‘cittutrāsoti attho’’ti. Chambhitattanti teneva cittutrāsabhayena sakalasarīrassa chambhitabhāvo. Visesato pana hadayamaṃsacalananti āha ‘‘kāyakampo hadayamaṃsacalana’’nti. Lomahaṃsoti tena bhayena tena chambhitattena sakalasarīralomānaṃ haṭṭhabhāvo, so pana nesaṃ bhittiyaṃ nāgadantānaṃ viya uddhaṃmukhatāti āha ‘‘lomānaṃ haṃsanaṃ uddhaggabhāvo’’ti.
35 35. “Attanā”是表示主体的工具格,意思是“自己”。“Devaccharānaṃ”(天女们)指舞女。“Devanāṭakānaṃ”(天舞者)即舞女,或者是天女的同义词。“生起了强烈的忧悲后”:这世间的人通常只顾念自己,因此她也只顾念自己:“如今我成了无依无靠的人”,她想着“他今天会来,今天会来”,如此八年未曾外出,以此因缘连孩子也未曾得到;我本可依靠其威德而安住,而今我从此处失坏,又未能从别处获得,因此生起了强烈的忧悲。在建立宗族谱系时,能延续家族传承的儿子在这里被喻为“种子”,因此说“一个作为家族传承种子的儿子”。“Saṃ”意为财富,拥有它的人称为“saṃpati”(财富主),即富有、具足财富者。由于能带来现世与来世的利益,故而它是他的利益,即“sāpateyya”(财产),也就是财富、资财,因此说:“这财产,我们如此巨大的资财”。显示巴利原文
35.Attanāti paccatte karaṇavacanaṃ, sayanti attho. Devaccharānanti anaccantiyo sandhāyāha. Devanāṭakānanti naccantiyo, pariyāyavacanaṃ vā etaṃ devakaññānaṃ. Samuppannabalavasokā hutvāti ayaṃ loko nāma attānaṃva cinteti, tasmā sāpi ‘‘idāni ahaṃ anāthā jātā’’ti attānaṃva cintayamānā ‘‘ayaṃ ajja āgamissati, ajja āgamissatī’’ti aṭṭha vassāni bahi na nikkhantā etaṃ nissāya mayā dārakopi na laddho, yassa ānubhāvena jīveyyāmi, ito cāmhi parihīnā aññato cāti samuppannabalavasokā hutvā. Kularukkhapatiṭṭhāpane bījasadisattā kulavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpako putto idha bījakoti adhippetoti āha ‘‘kulavaṃsabījakaṃekaṃ putta’’nti. Saṃ nāma dhanaṃ, tassa patīti saṃpati, dhanavā vibhavasampanno. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikahitāvahattā tassa hitanti sāpateyyaṃ, tadeva dhanaṃ vibhavoti āha – ‘‘imaṃ sāpateyyaṃ evaṃ mahantaṃ amhākaṃ vibhava’’nti.
36 女人从达成少女期开始,至晚年之前,若无障碍,每隔七天,在称为子宫的第三转处,会有少许血滴凝结,未及被执取便即破裂,随后血液流出。对此,有‘经期’的通称与‘花’的通称,故说:‘花’是经期所生之血的名称。于胚胎着床之处:即在那个孩子投生的处所、那个区域。‘凝结后’即产生后。‘破裂’即未及执取便破裂,因为这确实是她们的生理特性。‘由病素’指由于血液的污秽。‘在清净的基处’:由于血液已流出且已无病,从沐浴后的第四天起,在清净的子宫中。而在清净的基处,当父母一次交会时,最多七天,仅为田地,因为存在着胚胎凝结所需的微量血液涂层。然而,有些人说:‘乃至半月也仅为田地。’‘在手臂上’是处格,因此说:‘在前妻的手臂上,于彼处捉住他。’用作受格的处格亦属合理,例如‘捉住苏定那的双足’。显示巴利原文
36. Itthīnaṃ kumārībhāvappattito paṭṭhāya pacchimavayato oraṃ asati vibandhe aṭṭhame aṭṭhame sattāhe gabbhāsayasaññite tatiye āvatte katipayā lohitapīḷakā saṇṭhahitvā aggahitapubbā eva bhijjanti, tato lohitaṃ paggharati, tattha utusamaññā pupphasamaññā cāti āha – ‘‘pupphanti utukāle uppannalohitassa nāma’’nti. Gabbhapatiṭṭhānaṭṭhāneti yasmiṃ okāse dārako nibbattati, tasmiṃ padese. Saṇṭhahitvāti nibbattitvā. Bhijjantīti aggahitapubbā eva bhijjanti. Ayañhi tāsaṃ sabhāvo. Dosenāti lohitamalena. Suddhe vatthumhīti paggharitalohitattā anāmayattā ca nahānato paraṃ catutthadivasato paṭṭhāya suddhe gabbhāsaye. Suddhe pana vatthumhi mātāpitūsu ekavāraṃ sannipatitesu yāva satta divasāni khettameva hoti gabbhasaṇṭhahanassa parittassa lohitalepassa vijjamānattā. Keci pana ‘‘aḍḍhamāsamattampi khettamevā’’ti vadanti. Bāhāyanti adhikaraṇe bhummanti āha ‘‘purāṇadutiyikāya yā bāhā, tatra naṃ gahetvā’’ti. Upayogatthe bhummavacanampi yujjatiyeva yathā ‘‘sudinnassa pādesu gahetvā’’ti.
由于此前已有制定的学处存在,所谓‘于学处未制定时’乃是就波罗夷而言,故说:‘在第一波罗夷学处尚未制定时。’为阐明已说之义,而说:‘据说世尊于初成道时’等。‘如是’指与波罗夷的制定相应。而这仅是举例,他们亦未犯下与桑喀地谢沙制定相应的不当行为。因此他说:‘其余的五篇小罪,他只是制定。’而这是就偷兰遮等五种轻罪篇的存在而言,并非指五罪篇悉数被制定。应当了知,于初成道时,五种轻罪存在之说,正是促使法将(舍利弗)请求制定学处、特别是制定重罪并诵出巴帝摩卡的原因。然而,有些人说:‘在第十二年于毘兰阇雨安居后,世尊从此以后于八年内所制定的学处,即是就“于种种事缘中,唯是制定了其余五篇小罪”这句话而说。’此说不妥,因为在此之前亦有学处的制定存在。正因如此,在毘兰阇品中才有‘纵使一位比丘,亦无作“隔夜”或“我等将于后安居时,于此入雨安居”的雨安居中断’以及‘自己煮食,既非沙门所宜,亦不许可’之说。‘令欢喜’即他们摄受了心,令意愿满足,实践了能抓住内心的行持,此为彼义。‘一时’即于一个时候,意。显示巴利原文
Pubbepi paññattasikkhāpadānaṃ sabbhāvato apaññatte sikkhāpadeti pārājikaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha – ‘‘paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpade aṭṭhapite’’ti. Vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvento āha – ‘‘bhagavato kira paṭhamabodhiya’’ntiādi. Evarūpanti pārājikapaññattiyā anurūpaṃ. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ, saṅghādisesapaññattiyā anurūpampi ajjhācāraṃ nākaṃsuyeva. Tenevāha – ‘‘avasese pañca khuddakāpattikkhandhe eva paññapesī’’ti. Idañca thullaccayādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ lahukāpattikkhandhānaṃ sabbhāvamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pañcāpattikkhandhānaṃ anavasesato paññattattāva. Paṭhamabodhiyaṃ pañcannaṃ lahukāpattīnaṃ sabbhāvavacaneneva dhammasenāpatissa sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanā visesato garukāpattipaññattiyā pātimokkhuddesassa ca hetubhūtāti daṭṭhabbā. Keci pana ‘‘tasmiṃ tasmiṃ pana vatthusmiṃ avasesapañcakhuddakāpattikkhandhe eva paññapesīti idaṃ dvādasame vasse verañjāyaṃ vutthavassena bhagavatā tato paṭṭhāya aṭṭhavassabbhantare paññattasikkhāpadaṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ tato pubbepi sikkhāpadapaññattiyā sabbhāvato. Teneva verañjakaṇḍe ‘‘ekabhikkhunāpi ratticchedo vā pacchimikāya tattha vassaṃ upagacchāmāti vassacchedo vā na kato’’ti ca ‘‘sāmampi pacanaṃ samaṇasāruppaṃ na hoti, na ca vaṭṭatī’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Ārādhayiṃsūti cittaṃ gaṇhiṃsu, ajjhāsayaṃ pūrayiṃsu, hadayagāhiniṃ paṭipattiṃ paṭipajjiṃsūti attho. Ekaṃ samayanti ekasmiṃ samaye, paṭhamabodhiyanti attho.
‘Yaṃ ādīnavanti’是关联词。‘制定学处’指制定第一波罗夷学处。‘将显示过患’即通过‘愚人!宁可把你的男根放入剧毒蝮蛇的口中,也绝不可把男根放入女人的女根中’等语句,将要显示的过患。‘Abhiviññāpesi’意为‘使生起’,为了说明如何获此含义,而说‘因为即使生起……’等。‘以身表而动’指以身表的方式生起动摇。然而,为何他虽于淫欲法无欲求,却三次使之生起呢?为此而说‘而这三次令生起……’等。其中,‘三次令生起’是指为达释放的目的,于三次机会中使淫欲法生起。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ ādīnavanti sambandho. Sikkhāpadaṃ paññapentoti paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadaṃ paññapento. Ādīnavaṃ dassessatīti ‘‘varaṃ te, moghapurisa, āsīvisassa ghoravisassa mukhe aṅgajātaṃ pakkhittaṃ, na tveva mātugāmassa aṅgajāte aṅgajātaṃ pakkhitta’’ntiādinā yaṃ ādīnavaṃ dassessati. Abhiviññāpesīti imassa ‘‘pavattesī’’ti ayamattho kathaṃ laddhoti āha ‘‘pavattanāpi hī’’tiādi. Kāyaviññatticopanatoti kāyaviññattivasena pavattacalanato. Kasmā panesa methunadhammena anatthikopi samāno tikkhattuṃ abhiviññāpesīti āha – ‘‘tikkhattuṃ abhiviññāpanañcesā’’tiādi. Tattha tikkhattuṃ abhiviññāpananti muttipāpanavasena tīsu vāresu methunadhammassa pavattanaṃ.
因为一切词语皆具决定义,即使没有‘eva’字,限定的含义也能被了知,因此说“正是由于那种邪行”。因为有八种成胎之因。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Sabbesampi padānaṃ avadhāraṇaphalattā vināpi evakāraṃ avadhāraṇattho viññāyatīti āha ‘‘teneva ajjhācārenā’’ti. Aṭṭha hi gabbhakāraṇāni. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“执取交合布、微细的身触、脐部的抚摩、
饮、见、闻、嗅——这即是八种成胎之因。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Methunacoḷaggahaṇaṃ, tanusaṃsaggo ca nābhiāmasanaṃ; Pānaṃ dassanasavanaṃ, ghāyanamiti gabbhahetavo aṭṭhā’’ti.
现在,为显示通过简别而被遮止的含义,问道:“然而,还有其他方式成胎吗?”等等。难道触脐不也是身触吗?为何将它单独开示呢?应这样理解:身触是就双方有欲贪而说的,触脐是就女人有欲贪而说的,或者依事由而将它单独开示。那么,如何以身触而成胎,其中又如何有精血的存在呢?为此说“因为女人……”等。意思是:由于欲贪生起,女人的精分发生动摇,这也成为成胎的一个条件。因为在女人相续中,确实也有味等七界。因此说:“即使只是贪著肢节的抚摸,也会成胎。”然而,在《摄论》等处则说:“以身触等七种方式成胎时,若无父精,仅由母亲的欲贪所变异的血,便成为成胎的条件。”他们说:“如果通过贪著肢节的抚摸,母亲得了儿子,而那个儿子日后诸根成熟,杀害了那样的人类的父亲,他便是杀父者。”显示巴利原文
Idāni avadhāraṇena nivattitamatthaṃ dassetukāmo āha – ‘‘kiṃ pana aññathāpi gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hotī’’tiādi. Nanu ca nābhiparāmasanampi kāyasaṃsaggoyeva, kasmā naṃ visuṃ vuttanti? Ubhayesaṃ chandarāgavasena kāyasaṃsaggo vutto, itthiyā chandarāgavasena nābhiparāmasanaṃ, vatthuvasena vā taṃ visuṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kathaṃ pana kāyasaṃsaggena gabbhaggahaṇaṃ hoti, kathañca tattha sukkasoṇitassa sambhavoti āha ‘‘itthiyo hī’’tiādi . Chandarāguppattivasena itthiyā sukkakoṭṭhāso calito hoti, sopi gabbhasaṇṭhānassa paccayo hotīti adhippāyo. Itthisantānepi hi rasādisattadhātuyo labbhantiyeva. Tenāha – ‘‘aṅgapaccaṅgaparāmasanaṃ sādiyantiyopi gabbhaṃ gaṇhantī’’ti. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana ‘‘kāyasaṃsaggādinā sattappakārena gabbhaggahaṇe pitu sukkakoṭṭhāsaṃ vinā chandarāgavasena mātu vikārappattaṃ lohitameva gabbhasaṇṭhānassa paccayo hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yassa aṅgapaccaṅgaparāmasanaṃ sādiyitvā mātā puttaṃ paṭilabhati, sace so aparena samayena paripuṇṇindriyo hutvā tādisaṃ pitaraṃ manussajātikaṃ jīvitā voropeti, pitughātakova hotī’’ti vadanti.
“她用嘴取了一部分彼不净物”,意思是:她在洗涤旧衣时,在那里见到了不净物,便饮用了那部分不净物。当被问“你们可以行淫法吗?”时,为了表明“不论是否允许,我们对此都无希求”,而说“我们对此无希求”。虽然触脐时并无淫事之欲,但应理解为:在触脐那一刻,由于贪著触感,她生起了若干味著,否则就不会成胎。由于一位信吉兆的女人触脐,而有曼达维亚的出生;旃陀巴乔特的母亲肚脐为蝎所爬,由此而有旃陀巴乔特的出生,因此说“依此理……”等。“凝视男子”是指透过窗牖等看见,或凝视先前见过的男子。“如王宫中的女人”是指:据说在锡兰岛有女人曾如此,所以这样说。显示巴利原文
Taṃasuciṃ ekadesaṃ mukhena aggahesīti purāṇacīvaraṃ dhovantī tattha yaṃ asuciṃ addasa, taṃ asuciṃ ekadesaṃ pivi. ‘‘Vaṭṭati tumhākaṃ methunadhammo’’ti puṭṭho ‘‘kappatu vā mā vā kappatu, mayaṃ tena anatthikā’’ti dassento āha ‘‘anatthikā mayaṃ etenā’’ti. Kiñcāpi nābhiparāmasane methunarāgo natthi, tathāpi nābhiparāmasanakāle phassasādiyanavasena assādamattaṃ tassā ahosīti gahetabbaṃ, aññathā gabbhasaṇṭhahanaṃ na siyā. Diṭṭhamaṅgalikāya nābhiparāmasanena maṇḍabyassa nibbatti ahosi, caṇḍapajjotamātu nābhiyaṃ vicchikā pharitvā gatā, tena caṇḍapajjotassa nibbatti ahosīti āha ‘‘eteneva nayenā’’tiādi. Purisaṃ upanijjhāyatīti vātapānādinā disvā vā diṭṭhapubbaṃ vā purisaṃ upanijjhāyati. Rājorodhā viyāti sīhaḷadīpe kira ekissā itthiyā tathā ahosi, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ.
“Idha”是指在此事上。“Ayaṃ”是指苏定那的前妻。“Yaṃ sandhāya”是指针对哪种邪行而说。“父母亦聚集”是就精而言的,“母亲正当经期”是就血而言的。其中,“聚集”是指依非法的做法,在同一处会遇、和合。“母亲正当经期”是就以经期而言,并非指世俗通称的经血附着之日。“乾闼婆”是指将往生那里的有情,即所谓“应往”之义。应知此处‘ta’音变为‘dha’音。或者,由于以香(业)为名,即依生起诸趣的相状现前而显示、照亮,被称为“香”的趣向业而运作,故为“乾闼婆”,即在那里将出生的有情。“现前”是指已至于近处。在这里,并非指有一个有情在旁观看父母和合,而是指一个被业力所驱使的有情,在往昔生中即已住立于那方,通过以趣相为所缘等的方式,而面向投生。显示巴利原文
Idhāti imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ. Ayanti sudinnassa purāṇadutiyikā. Yaṃ sandhāyāti yaṃ ajjhācāraṃ sandhāya. Sukkaṃ sandhāya ‘‘mātāpitaro ca sannipatitā hontī’’ti vuttaṃ, mātā ca utunī hotīti lohitaṃ sandhāya. Tattha sannipatitā hontīti asaddhammavasena ekasmiṃ ṭhāne samāgatā saṅgatā honti. Mātā ca utunī hotīti idaṃ utusamayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na lokasamaññākarajassa lagganadivasamattaṃ. Gandhabboti tatrūpagasatto, gantabboti vuttaṃ hoti. Ta-kārassa dha-kāro katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā gandhanato uppajjanagatiyā nimittupaṭṭhānena sūcanato dīpanato gandhoti laddhanāmena bhavagāmikammunā abbati pavattatīti gandhabbo, tattha uppajjanakasatto. Paccupaṭṭhito hotīti upagato hoti. Ettha ca na mātāpitūnaṃ sannipātaṃ olokayamāno samīpe ṭhito nāma hoti, kammayantayantito pana eko satto tasmiṃ okāse nibbattanako purimajātiyaṃ ṭhitoyeva gatinimittādiārammaṇakaraṇavasena upapattābhimukho hotīti adhippāyo.
“和合”:指通过结合、交合。“胎”:指在胎中出生的有情,因为在胎中出生的有情也称作“胎”。正如所说:“阿难,如同某些女人怀胎九月或十月后便分娩。”(中部3.205)然而在某些地方,“胎”是指母胎。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Sannipātāti samodhānena samāgamena. Gabbhassāti gabbhe nibbattanakasattassa. Gabbhe nibbattanakasattopi hi gabbhoti vuccati. Yathāha – ‘‘yathā kho panānanda, aññā itthikā nava vā dasa vā māse gabbhaṃ kucchinā pariharitvā vijāyantī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.205). Katthaci pana gabbhoti mātukucchi vutto. Yathāha –
童子初住胎中的第一夜,
起身即行,一去不复返。”(本生经1.15.363)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yamekarattiṃ paṭhamaṃ, gabbhe vasati māṇavo; Abbhuṭṭhitova so yāti, sa gacchaṃ na nivattatī’’ti. (jā. 1.15.363); –
在此,“胎”是指以自体状态流转的,故称为“胎”,即从凝滑等阶段开始的法相续;但有情相续因依止于它,也名为“胎”,如同说“床铺们在高声喧哗”。由于是所依止之处,母胎应知为“胎”。或者,如同“胎”。正如众生的内室因为是居住之处而称“胎”,同样地,直至出生为止,母胎是胎生众生的居所,故应知为“胎”。所谓“入胎”,即是出生。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca gabbhati attabhāvabhāvena pavattatīti gabbho, kalalādiavattho dhammappabandho, taṃnissitattā pana sattasantāno ‘‘gabbho’’ti vutto yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti. Taṃnissayabhāvato mātukucchi ‘‘gabbho’’ti veditabbo. Gabbho viyāti vā. Yathā hi nivāsaṭṭhānatāya sattānaṃ ovarako ‘‘gabbho’’ti vuccati, evaṃ gabbhaseyyakānaṃ sattānaṃ yāva abhijāti nivāsaṭṭhānatāya mātukucchi ‘‘gabbho’’ti vuttoti veditabbo. Avakkanti hotīti nibbatti hoti.
守护天即是为守护他而住立的天神。“assā taṃ ajjhācāranti”是句法关联。“如是发出”即发出如此大的音声。虽然此处巴利原文中“空中天”并未单独出现,但为了显示音声传报的次第,将四天王天分为两类,而单独列出“空中天”。因此,由于此处单独摄取了“空中天”,“四天王天”应理解为住在栏楯山的天神。“Itihā”是语词组合,应视为与“evaṃ”一词同义,所以说“正是如此”。“刹那、须臾”二词因为是同义词,应视为意义相同。“唯有一片喧哗”即在天界、梵天界中唯有一片喧哗。虽然那个声音上达梵天界,但它并不在人间境界之内,如同他们的色身一样不可见,因此比丘们问道:“贤友苏定那,你是否不喜梵行?”显示巴利原文
Ārakkhadevatāti tassa ārakkhatthāya ṭhitā devatā. Assa taṃ ajjhācāranti sambandho. Tathā nicchāresunti tathā mahantaṃ saddaṃ katvā nicchāresuṃ. Kiñcāpi idha pāḷiyaṃ ākāsaṭṭhadevatā visuṃ na āgatā, tathāpi saddassa anussāvane ayamanukkamoti dassetuṃ cātumahārājikadevatāyo dvidhā katvā ākāsaṭṭhadevatā visuṃ vuttā. Tenettha ākāsaṭṭhakānaṃ visuṃ gahitattā cātumahārājikāti paribhaṇḍapabbataṭṭhakā veditabbā. Itihāti nipātasamudāyo evaṃsaddassa atthe daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘eva’’nti. Khaṇena muhuttenāti padadvayaṃ vevacanabhāvato samānatthamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ekakolāhalamahosīti devabrahmalokesu ekakolāhalamahosi. Kiñcāpi hi so saddo yāva brahmalokā abbhuggacchi, tathāpi na so manussānaṃ visayo tesaṃ rūpaṃ viya, teneva bhikkhū pucchiṃsu – ‘‘kacci no tvaṃ, āvuso sudinna, anabhirato’’ti.
37 37. “如是,母子二人的出家获得成果,但父亲却为追悔所压倒而住。”由此语可知,苏定那在那一生中并未证得阿罗汉果。然而有些人说:“由于过去所修福德的催迫,这位堪能良家子苏定那消除了那追悔,证得了阿罗汉果,因此出家才被允许。”此说与巴利原文及注疏不符。因为过去所修福德并非决定性的,即使是这样的人,也会由于其间所造恶业的力量,如同阿阇世王一样,可见证悟会受到障碍。这里所指的追悔,其特征是懊悔已作或未作之事,故说“因犯戒而生的后悔”。由于依犯戒之事而追悔,生起歪曲的忆念与思虑,即是追悔,故说“追悔也是它的名称”。“所作是卑劣的”即“卑作”,卑作本身就是追悔,故说“因为是卑劣行为的状态,所以是追悔”。“血肉耗尽”即血肉枯竭。“不作用”即在诵出等中无所作为,意为不参与。“负重断裂”即断负,意为因负重而肩断。“他种种思虑”即“如果我未造那恶业,便会如同这些比丘一样戒行圆满”等,他如此种种思虑。显示巴利原文
37.‘‘Evaṃ mātāputtānaṃ pabbajjā saphalā ahosi, pitā pana vippaṭisārābhibhūto vihāsī’’ti vacanato sudinnassa tasmiṃ attabhāve arahattādhigamo nāhosīti viññāyati. Keci pana ‘‘pubbekatapuññatāya codiyamānassa bhabbakulaputtassāti vuttattā sudinno taṃ kukkuccaṃ vinodetvā arahattaṃ sacchākāsi, teneva pabbajjā anuññātā’’ti vadanti. Taṃ pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca na sameti. Pubbekatapuññatā ca appamāṇaṃ tādisassapi antarākatapāpakammassa vasena ajātasattuno viya adhigamantarāyadassanato. Katākatānusocanalakkhaṇaṃ kukkuccaṃ idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘ajjhācārahetuko pacchānutāpo’’ti. Kataṃ ajjhācāraṃ paṭicca anusocanavasena virūpaṃ saraṇaṃ cintanaṃ vippaṭisāroti āha ‘‘vippaṭisārotipi tasseva nāma’’nti. Kucchitaṃ kataṃ kiriyāti kukataṃ, kukatameva kukkuccanti āha ‘‘kucchitakiriyābhāvato kukkucca’’nti. Pariyādinnamaṃsalohitattāti parikkhīṇamaṃsalohitattā. Avipphārikoti uddesādīsu byāpārarahito, abyāvaṭoti attho. Vahacchinnoti chinnavaho, bhāravahanena chinnakkhandhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Taṃ taṃ cintayīti ‘‘yadi ahaṃ taṃ pāpaṃ na karissaṃ, ime bhikkhū viya paripuṇṇasīlo assa’’ntiādinā taṃ taṃ cintayi.
38 38. ‘成为如此状态’即达到消瘦、粗陋等状态。‘以众会喧杂的戏论’:于众人集会中聚集即众会,众会本身即是戏论,故称众会喧杂的戏论,以此为因。‘那些’即那些(比丘)。‘谈话安乐’意为:由于亲信的状态,谈话时安乐,能轻松地说话,指易于交谈。‘净信的量度无有不足或过度,于一切时、于一切人皆无’,因此说‘因为净信安立处的圆满’。‘dāni’在此义中有‘etarahi’一词,故说‘dāni是语词’。‘no’一词也如同‘nu’一词,含询问义,故说‘你是否’。‘正是那不喜’即那些比丘所问的、正是那期待在家状态的不喜。为显示以‘正是那’的限定而排除的意义,而说‘更善的法’等。更善的法是止、观等。‘存在’是就所缘状态在心中转起而言,并非就恶的现行而言,意为以所缘状态在心中转起。因此说:‘恒时如同现前而立。’显示巴利原文
38.Evaṃbhūtanti kisalūkhādibhāvappattaṃ. Gaṇasaṅgaṇikāpapañcenāti gaṇe janasamāgame sannipatanaṃ gaṇasaṅgaṇikā, gaṇasaṅgaṇikāyeva papañco gaṇasaṅgaṇikāpapañco, tena. Yassāti ye assa. Kathāphāsukāti vissāsikabhāveneva kathākaraṇe phāsukā, sukhena vattuṃ sakkuṇeyyā, sukhasambhāsāti attho. Pasādassa pamāṇato ūnādhikattaṃ sabbadā sabbesaṃ natthīti āha ‘‘pasādapatiṭṭhānokāsassa sampuṇṇattā’’ti. Dānīti imasmiṃ atthe etarahi-saddo atthīti āha ‘‘dānīti nipāto’’ti. No-saddopi nu-saddo viya pucchanatthoti āha ‘‘kaccinu tva’’nti. Tameva anabhiratinti tehi bhikkhūhi pucchitaṃ tameva gihibhāvapatthanākāraṃ anabhiratiṃ. ‘‘Tamevā’’ti avadhāraṇena nivattitamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘adhikusalāna’’ntiādi. Adhikusalā dhammā samathavipassanādayo. Atthīti visayabhāvena citte parivattanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na pāpassa vattamānataṃ sandhāya, atthi visayabhāvena citte parivattatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘niccakālaṃ abhimukhaṃ viya me tiṭṭhatī’’ti.
‘Yaṃ tvaṃ’中,‘yaṃ’是表原因的助词,或是表具格的、与主语同格的词,故说‘以那恶’。‘以种种方式’中,‘方式’一词是表原因的词,故说‘以种种原因’。‘为了离欲’即为了于有、诸欲中离染。‘非为了以贪染着’即非为了于有、诸欲中以贪而染着。因此说‘因为世尊’等。‘此理则于一切句中’,即于一切句中,仅以意趣而通达显示。然而此处,‘这只是同义语’,是就‘为了离系’等一切句中,以‘为了从烦恼离系’等显示词义的方式所说的同义语而言。‘非为了系缚’即非为了以烦恼系缚。‘为了不执取’即为了不执取烦恼,或为了不以渴爱、邪见执取有、诸欲。‘非为了摄受’中,也应以同样的理则了知意义。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ tvanti ettha yanti hetuatthe nipāto, karaṇatthe vā paccattavacananti āha ‘‘yena pāpenā’’ti. Anekapariyāyenāti ettha pariyāya-saddo kāraṇavacanoti āha ‘‘anekakāraṇenā’’ti. Virāgatthāyāti bhavabhogesu virajjanatthāya. No rāgena rajjanatthāyāti bhavabhogesuyeva rāgena arañjanatthāya. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavatā hī’’tiādi. Esa nayo sabbapadesūti adhippāyikamattaṃ sabbapadesu atidissati. Idaṃ panettha pariyāyavacanamattanti ‘‘visaṃyogāyā’’tiādīsu sabbapadesu ‘‘kilesehi visaṃyujjanatthāyā’’tiādinā padatthavibhāvanavasena vuttapariyāyavacanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Na saṃyujjanatthāyāti kilesehi na saṃyujjanatthāya. Aggahaṇatthāyāti kilese aggahaṇatthāya, bhavabhoge vā taṇhādiṭṭhivasena aggahaṇatthāya. Na saṅgahaṇatthāyāti etthāpi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.
‘所生起的出世间涅槃本身’即从诸行中出离、远离,且因此超越世间,故为出世间涅槃。‘为了摧破骄慢等’中,以表未说之集合义的‘vā’字,或以表起始义的‘iti’字,摄取了‘为了消除渴爱’等一切,应如此看待。以涅槃为所缘而生起的圣道所断除的贪、慢、骄等,其断除即名为到达彼(涅槃),故说‘然而因为到达彼’等。其中,‘到达彼’即依止、缘于涅槃,以圣道的所缘缘状态为因。‘慢骄、人骄等’中,依于出身等,对于胜者生起‘我是胜者’等的慢,此慢本身因能生骄而称为‘骄’,即慢骄。‘人骄’即人慢,是生起‘我是人’的慢。有些人说:依于能行非法而起的慢,或贪本身就是人骄。以‘等’字摄取了力骄、青春骄等。然而在《大结节》和《中结节》中,说‘人骄名为生起’,这在此处看来并不恰当,因为不能说‘世尊为摧毁生起而说法’。‘无骄’即离骄的状态。正是为了显示此义,而说‘无骄’。‘诸骄于此被摧破’即在此处,诸骄达到无骄的状态、灭尽,故为‘摧破骄慢’。此理则于其余诸句亦然。显示巴利原文
Nibbattitalokuttaranibbānamevāti saṅkhārehi nikkhantaṃ vivittaṃ, tatoyeva lokato uttiṇṇattā lokuttaraṃ nibbānaṃ. Madanimmadanāyāti vāti ettha avuttasamuccayatthena vā-saddena ādiatthena iti-saddena vā ‘‘pipāsavinayāyā’’tiādi sabbaṃ saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānena ariyamaggena pahīyamānā rāgamānamadādayo taṃ patvā pahīyanti nāmāti āha ‘‘yasmā pana taṃ āgammā’’tiādi. Tattha taṃ āgammāti nibbānaṃ āgamma paṭicca ariyamaggassa ārammaṇapaccayabhāvahetu. Mānamadapurisamadādayoti ettha jātiādiṃ nissāya seyyassa ‘‘seyyohamasmī’’tiādinā uppajjanakamānoyeva madajananaṭṭhena madoti mānamado. Purisamado vuccati purisamāno, ‘‘ahaṃ puriso’’ti uppajjanakamāno. ‘‘Asaddhammasevanasamatthataṃ nissāya pavatto māno, rāgo eva vā purisamado’’ti keci. Ādi-saddena balamadayobbanamadādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti . Mahāgaṇṭhipade pana majjhimagaṇṭhipade ca ‘‘purisamado nāma sambhavo’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ idha yuttaṃ viya na dissati. Na hi ‘‘bhagavatā sambhavassa vināsāya dhammo desito’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭati. Nimmadāti vigatamadabhāvā. Imameva hi atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘amadā’’ti vuttaṃ. Madā nimmadīyanti ettha amadabhāvaṃ vināsaṃ gacchantīti madanimmadano. Esa nayo sesapadesupi.
“欲渴”意为对诸欲的希求,即欲爱之义。“所依”指以应受乐之义而被依止的对象,故说“五种欲功德所依”;因为在五种欲功德中,断除对其的欲贪,五种欲功德便称为已断除,所以经中说:“比丘们,若于色有欲贪……”等(相应部3.323)。另一种解释:“五种欲功德所依”是指对五种欲功德的依止、附着,即以享乐而依止,这是对渴爱活动的称谓。“三地轮转”是指在三地中,业、烦恼、果报以轮转之义而称为轮转。“离染”即坏灭。《结集论》中说:“‘离染’指欲的灭尽,‘寂灭’指一次断除即令灭尽。”在普遍教示中,因为“渴爱灭尽”更为殊胜,所以也说“离染即灭尽”,即渴爱的离染与寂灭。显示巴利原文
Kāmapipāsāti kāmānaṃ pātukamyatā, kāmataṇhāti attho. Ālīyanti abhiramitabbaṭṭhena sevīyantīti ālayā, pañca kāmaguṇāti āha ‘‘pañca kāmaguṇālayā’’ti. Pañcasu hi kāmaguṇesu chandarāgappahāneneva pañca kāmaguṇāpi pahīnā nāma honti, teneva ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, rūpesu chandarāgo’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 3.323) vuttaṃ. Pañcakāmaguṇesu vā ālayā pañcakāmaguṇālayā. Ālīyanti allīyanti abhiramanavasena sevantīti ālayāti hi taṇhāvicaritānaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Tebhūmakavaṭṭanti tīsu bhūmīsu kammakilesavipākā vaṭṭanaṭṭhena vaṭṭaṃ. Virajjatīti palujjati. ‘‘Virajjatīti kāmavināso vutto, nirujjhatīti ekappahārena vināso’’ti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Virāgo nirodhoti sāmaññacodanāyapi ‘‘taṇhākkhayo’’ti adhikatattā taṇhāya eva virajjanaṃ nirujjhanañca vuttaṃ.
“四生”中的“生”,可指蕴的部分、原因,也可指尿道。在“四种龙生、四种金翅鸟生”(相应部3.342-343)中,蕴的部分——即种类——称为“生”。在“布弥迦,这生正是证得果报的原因”(中部3.226)中,是指原因。在“我不称由母胎出生者为婆罗门”(中部2.457;法句396)中,是指尿道。而此处应理解为蕴的部分。所谓“生”,是指有情虽各各别异,但由相同的种类特性而合为一类。从义理上说,它是区别于卵等不同出生处、诸蕴分类转起的差别,共分四种:卵生、胎生、湿生、化生。如经中说:“舍利弗,有此四生。哪四种?卵生、胎生、湿生、化生。”(中部1.152)显示巴利原文
Catasso yoniyoti ettha yonīti khandhakoṭṭhāsassapi kāraṇassapi passāvamaggassapi nāmaṃ. ‘‘Catasso nāgayoniyo (saṃ. ni. 3.342-343) catasso supaṇṇayoniyo’’ti ettha hi khandhakoṭṭhāso yoni nāma. ‘‘Yoni hesā bhūmija phalassa adhigamāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.226) ettha kāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Na cāhaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ brūmi, yonijaṃ mattisambhava’’nti (ma. ni. 2.457; dha. pa. 396) ettha passāvamaggo. Idha pana khandhakoṭṭhāso ‘‘yonī’’ti adhippeto. Yavanti tāya sattā amissitāpi samānajātitāya missitā hontīti yoni. Sā pana atthato aṇḍādiuppattiṭṭhānavisiṭṭho khandhānaṃ bhāgaso pavattiviseso, sā ca aṇḍajajalābujasaṃsedajaopapātikavasena catubbidhā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘catasso kho imā, sāriputta, yoniyo. Katamā catasso? Aṇḍajā yoni jalābujā yoni saṃsedajā yoni opapātikā yonī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.152).
其中,于卵中出生者为卵生,于胎中出生者为胎生,于湿处出生者为湿生,不依这些原因而像突然出现般出生者为化生。在此,饿鬼道、畜生道及人道中,卵生等四生皆有。然而,人类中只有某些是化生,如大莲华王子等;卵生者如孔塔子、二老比丘等;湿生者如生于莲胎的波拘沙提婆罗门、莲华妃等,也仅有某些,而大多数人是胎生。饿鬼中,被烧渴的饿鬼因常受痛苦折磨,没有欲乐享受,因此他们没有胎生。由于身有火焰,胎儿不能在其腹中安住,因此他们只是化生,湿生也不可能;其余饿鬼则四生皆有。如同饿鬼,夜叉以及所有四足、鸟类、长类等也都是四生。一切地狱有情,以及从四大王天以上的天众,都是化生;地居天则是四生。其中,天与人类中的湿生与化生有这种差别:湿生者出生时幼小羸弱,化生者则如十六岁模样出生。显示巴利原文
Tattha aṇḍe jātā aṇḍajā. Jalābumhi jātā jalābujā. Saṃsede jātā saṃsedajā. Vinā etehi kāraṇehi uppatitvā viya nibbattāti opapātikā. Ettha ca petaloke tiracchāne manussesu ca aṇḍajādayo catassopi yoniyo sambhavanti, manussesu panettha kecideva opapātikā honti mahāpadumakumārādayo viya. Aṇḍajāpi kontaputtā dvebhātiyatherā viya, saṃsedajāpi padumagabbhe nibbattapokkharasātibrāhmaṇapadumavatīdevīādayo viya kecideva honti, yebhuyyena pana manussā jalābujāva. Petesupi nijjhāmataṇhikapetānaṃ niccadukkhāturatāya kāmasevanā natthi, tasmā te gabbhaseyyakā na honti. Jālāvantatāya na tāsaṃ kucchiyaṃ gabbho saṇṭhāti, tasmā te opapātikāyeva saṃsedajatāyapi asambhavato, avasesapetā pana catuyonikāpi honti. Yathā ca te, evaṃ yakkhāpi sabbacatuppadapakkhijātidīghajātiādayopi sabbe catuyonikāyeva. Sabbe nerayikā ca catumahārājikato paṭṭhāya uparidevā ca opapātikāyeva, bhummadevā pana catuyonikāva honti. Tattha devamanussesu saṃsedajaopapātikānaṃ ayaṃ viseso – saṃsedajā mandā daharā hutvā nibbattanti, opapātikā soḷasavassuddesikā hutvā.
“五趣”之中,以善业、恶业为因,应往生、应投生之处,称为“趣”。正如业有,于究竟意义上虽无作者,却依缘和合而成立,被假名为具足相续特征的有情所作;同样,具有投生体性特征的诸趣,于究竟意义上虽无去者,却也依各自业而被假名为那些业的所有者应去之处。再者,趣有多种:去趣、生趣、意乐趣、灭趣、成就趣。其中,“我死后去往彼趣”(增支部4.184)及“诸天、乾闼婆、人不知其趣”(法句420;经集649),这是去趣。“比丘们,我不知这些具戒者的来处或去处”(中部1.508),这是生趣。“梵天,我如此了知你的意乐趣,也了知你的死处”(中部1.503),这是意乐趣。“诸法灭为趣,阿罗汉趣涅槃”(《无碍解道》339),这是灭趣。“唯有二趣生起,无有其他”(长部1.258;2.34;3.200),这是成就趣。在这些趣中,此处所指是去趣。去趣依地狱、畜生、饿鬼、人、天而分为五种,如所说:“舍利弗,有此五趣。哪五种?地狱、畜生、饿鬼、人、天。”(中部1.153)显示巴利原文
Pañca gatiyoti ettha sukatadukkaṭakammavasena gantabbā upapajjitabbāti gatiyo. Yathā hi kammabhavo paramatthato asatipi kārake paccayasāmaggiyā siddho, taṃsamaṅginā santānalakkhaṇena sattena katoti voharīyati, evaṃ upapattibhavalakkhaṇagatiyo paramatthato asatipi gamake taṃtaṃkammavasena yesaṃ tāni kammāni tehi gantabbāti voharīyanti. Apica gatigati nibbattigati ajjhāsayagati vibhavagati nipphattigatīti bahuvidhā gati nāma. Tattha ‘‘taṃ gatiṃ pecca gacchāmī’’ti (a. ni. 4.184) ca ‘‘yassa gatiṃ na jānanti, devā gandhabbamānusā’’ti (dha. pa. 420; su. ni. 649) ca ayaṃ gatigati nāma. ‘‘Imesaṃ kho panāhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ sīlavantānaṃ neva jānāmi āgatiṃ vā gatiṃ vā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.508) ayaṃ nibbattigati nāma. ‘‘Evampi kho te ahaṃ brahme gatiñca pajānāmi cutiñca pajānāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.503) ayaṃ ajjhāsayagati nāma. ‘‘Vibhavo gati dhammānaṃ, nibbānaṃ arahato gatī’’ti (pari. 339) ayaṃ vibhavagati nāma. ‘‘Dveyeva gatiyo sambhavanti anaññā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.258; 2.34; 3.200) ayaṃ nipphattigati nāma. Tāsu idha gatigati adhippetā, sā pana nirayatiracchānayonipettivisayamanaussadevānaṃ vasena pañcavidhā hoti. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘pañca kho imā, sāriputta, gatiyo. Katamā pañca? Nirayo tiracchānayoni pettivisayo manussā devā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.153).
其中,所谓“铁”(ayo),是指当它生起时,唯令增长而生起,即乐。此处无此铁,故称“无铁”(nirayo,地狱);又,应可喜乐、应可品尝之处,在那里并不存在,故以无乐(nirati)之义及无味(nirassāda)之义,称为地狱(nirayo)。横着伸展的,名为畜生(tiracchāna):不像天、人等那样向上直长,而是横向生长,此为其义。明显地从乐离去、消失,是死后(peccabhāva);到达死后状态者的境界,故为饿鬼境(pettivisayo),即饿鬼生(petayoni)。由于心的增盛而为人(manussā):即由于具足念、勇猛、堪能梵行等功德而令心累积增盛,因为具有殊胜功德的心而称为人,这是所说之义;然而,此义从严格意义上说,应依赡部洲的居民来理解。如所说:“比丘们,以三处,赡部洲的人胜过北俱卢洲的人及三十三天。哪三处?勇猛、具念、在此修梵行。”(增支部9.21)同样,诸佛世尊、独觉佛、上首弟子、大弟子、转轮王及其他有大威力的众生,就在那里(赡部洲)生起;然而,由于与那显示巴利原文
Tattha yassa uppajjati, taṃ brūhentoyeva uppajjatīti ayo, sukhaṃ. Natthi ettha ayoti nirayo, tato eva ramitabbaṃ assādetabbaṃ tattha natthīti niratiatthena nirassādaṭṭhena ca nirayoti vuccati. Tiriyaṃ añcitāti tiracchānā, devamanussādayo viya uddhaṃ dīghā ahutvā tiriyaṃ dīghāti attho. Pakaṭṭhato sukhato ayanaṃ apagamo peccabhāvo, taṃ peccabhāvaṃ pattānaṃ visayoti pettivisayo, petayoni. Manassa ussannatāya manussā, satisūrabhāvabrahmacariyayogyatādiguṇavasena upacitamānasatāya ukkaṭṭhaguṇacittatāya manussāti vuttaṃ hoti, ayaṃ panattho nippariyāyato jambudīpavāsīvasena veditabbo. Yathāha – ‘‘tīhi, bhikkhave, ṭhānehi jambudīpakā manussā uttarakuruke ca manusse adhiggaṇhanti deve ca tāvatiṃse. Katamehi tīhi? Sūrā satimanto idha brahmacariyavāso’’ti (a. ni. 9.21). Tathā hi buddhā ca bhagavanto paccekabuddhā aggasāvakā mahāsāvakā cakkavattino aññe ca mahānubhāvā sattā tattheva uppajjanti, tehi samānarūpāditāya pana saddhiṃ parittadīpavāsīhi itaramahādīpavāsinopi manussātveva paññāyiṃsu.
另有一些人说:“由于伴随着贪等以及无贪等的心增盛而为人。因为属于人种的众生,在他们的心中,贪等与无贪等尤其增盛。他们由于贪等增盛而圆满恶趣之道,由于无贪等增盛而圆满善趣之道及趣向涅槃之道,因此,由于与贪等、无贪等相伴的心增盛,小洲居民以及四大洲的居民这些殊胜众生被称为人。”然而,世间人则说:“由于是摩奴(Manu)的后代而为人。”名为摩奴者,是劫初之始,为世间规范的创始者,为众生分别利与不利,依应作与不应作而处于父亲之位,他在教法中被称“大选出”(Mahāsammata),即我们的菩萨;那些直接或间接遵循其教诫而住的众生,由于如同其子,故被称为“人”(manussā)、“人类”(mānusā)。正因如此,他们也被称为“摩奴之子”(mānavā)、“人生者”(manujā)。显示巴利原文
Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘lobhādīhi alobhādīhi ca sahitassa manassa ussannatāya manussā. Ye hi sattā manussajātikā, tesu visesato lobhādayo alobhādayo ca ussannā. Te lobhādiussannatāya apāyamaggaṃ, alobhādiussannatāya sugatimaggaṃ nibbānagāmimaggañca paripūrenti, tasmā lobhādīhi alobhādīhi ca sahitassa manassa ussannatāya parittadīpavāsīhi saddhiṃ catumahādīpavāsino sattavisesā manussāti vuccantī’’ti. Lokiyā pana ‘‘manuno apaccabhāvena manussā’’ti vadanti. Manu nāma paṭhamakappiko lokamariyādāya ādibhūto sattānaṃ hitāhitavidhāyako kattabbākattabbatāvasena pituṭṭhāniyo, yo sāsane mahāsammatoti vuccati amhākaṃ bodhisatto, paccakkhato paramparāya ca tassa ovādānusāsaniyaṃ ṭhitā sattā puttasadisatāya ‘‘manussā, mānusā’’ti ca vuccanti. Tato eva hi te ‘‘mānavā manujā’’ti ca voharīyanti.
以五欲功德及各自天威神力、神通殊胜而嬉戏、游乐、照耀者,名为天。其中,欲界天既以欲功德亦以神通殊胜而嬉戏,其余诸天唯以神通殊胜而嬉戏,应如是知。或谓,可往皈依、可被称扬赞叹者,为天。此处,地狱趣、天趣、人趣与其生处(色身)合说为蕴;而畜生界、饿鬼境,应知唯是取蕴,以其无有如此确定之生处故。或复,凡他们所依之处,如森林、大海、山麓等处,有其固定住处,依彼住处亦可取为生处。七识住、九有情居,如前已释。为种种不同之状态,即为从一种生起状态至另一种生起状态。系缚者,结缚也;缝合者,缝纫也。渴爱既已出离,于彼处全然无存,而此出离正是脱离渴爱之系缚,故说‘离系’。显示巴利原文
Pañcahi kāmaguṇehi attano attano devānubhāvasaṅkhātehi iddhivisesehi ca dibbanti kīḷanti laḷanti jotantīti devā. Tattha kāmadevā kāmaguṇehi ceva iddhivisesehi ca, itare iddhiviseseheva dibbantīti veditabbā. Saraṇanti vā gamiyanti abhitthavīyantīti vā devā. Ettha ca nirayagatidevagatimanussagatīhi saddhiṃ okāsena khandhā vuttā. Tiracchānayonipettivisayaggahaṇena khandhānaṃ eva gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ tesaṃ tādisassa paricchinnassa okāsassa abhāvato. Yattha yattha vā te araññasamuddapabbatapādādike nibaddhavāsaṃ vasanti, tādisassa ṭhānassa vasena okāsopi gahetabbo. Satta viññāṇaṭṭhitiyo nava sattāvāsā ca heṭṭhā saṃvaṇṇitanayā eva. Aparāparabhāvāyāti aparāparaṃ yoniādito yoniādibhāvāya. Ābandhanaṃ gaṇṭhikaraṇaṃ, saṃsibbanaṃ tunnakaraṇaṃ. Taṇhāya nikkhantaṃ tattha tassā sabbaso abhāvato, nikkhamanañcassa taṇhāya visaṃyogo evāti āha ‘‘visaṃyutta’’nti.
“断除诸欲”一句,此处的“欲”字,兼摄“可欲者名为欲”与“能欲者名为欲”两种含义,故说“断除所依欲与烦恼欲”。而此中所说断除所依欲,应知是透过断除对于他们之欲贪而达成。诸欲想,即于诸欲所起之想,或与欲相应之想。遍知,此处指三种遍知,故说“知遍知、度遍知、断遍知,是为三种遍知”。什么是知遍知?即对于一切三地所摄的名色,依“此为色,色唯此量,更无多余;此为名,名唯此量,更无多余”,将色依四大及所造色予以分别,将名依触等予以分别,从相、味、现起、足处而确定,并把握其业、无明等缘,此即知遍知。显示巴利原文
Kāmānaṃ pahānanti ettha kāmaggahaṇena kāmīyatīti kāmo, kāmetīti kāmoti duvidhassapi kāmassa saṅgaho katoti āha ‘‘vatthukāmānaṃ kilesakāmānañca pahāna’’nti. Vatthukāmappahānañcettha tesu chandarāgappahānenāti veditabbaṃ. Kāmasaññānanti kāmesu, kāmasahagatānaṃ vā saññānaṃ. Pariññāti tividhāpi pariññā idhādhippetāti āha ‘‘ñātatīraṇapahānavasena tividhā pariññā’’ti. Tattha katamā ñātapariññā? Sabbaṃ tebhūmakaṃ nāmarūpaṃ ‘‘idaṃ rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpaṃ, na ito bhiyyo, idaṃ nāmaṃ, ettakaṃ nāmaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti bhūtupādāyabhedaṃ rūpaṃ phassādibhedaṃ nāmañca lakkhaṇarasapaccupaṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānato vavatthapeti, kammāvijjādikañcassa paccayaṃ pariggaṇhāti, ayaṃ ñātapariññā.
什么是度遍知?如是了知之后,以无常、苦、病等四十二行相,对彼一切加以审度,即名度遍知。什么是断遍知?如是审度之后,以最上道断除于一切之欲贪,此即断遍知。或谓,见清净与度疑清净为知遍知;从道非道智见清净等,或从聚观照等乃至随顺智所摄之慧,为度遍知;圣道智,特为断遍知。然于此经中,对于诸欲想,依通达自相及无常等共相而转起的知遍知与度遍知,其作用之成就亦唯依道而完成,故唯约道刹那而说三种遍知。是故言:‘于此五处,所说唯是能尽诸漏的出世间道。’显示巴利原文
Katamā tīraṇapariññā? Evaṃ ñātaṃ katvā taṃ sabbaṃ tīreti aniccato dukkhato rogatoti dvācattālīsāya ākārehi, ayaṃ tīraṇapariññā nāma. Katamā pahānapariññā? Evaṃ tīrayitvā aggamaggena sabbasmiṃ chandarāgaṃ pajahati, ayaṃ pahānapariññā. Diṭṭhivisuddhikaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhiyo vā ñātapariññā, maggāmaggapaṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhiādayo, kalāpasammasanādianulomapariyosānā vā paññā tīraṇapariññā, ariyamagge ñāṇaṃ nippariyāyena pahānapariññā. Idha pana kāmasaññānaṃ sabhāvalakkhaṇapaṭivedhavasena aniccādisāmaññalakkhaṇavasena ca pavattamānānaṃ ñātatīraṇapariññānampi kiccanipphattiyā maggeneva ijjhanato maggakkhaṇaṃyeva sandhāya tividhāpi pariññā vuttā. Teneva ‘‘imesu pañcasu ṭhānesu kilesakkhayakaro lokuttaramaggova kathito’’ti vuttaṃ.
所谓“欲渴”,即对诸欲的想饮,或于欲中想饮;故说“对诸欲有饮求者,或于欲中想饮者”。此处“五处”,指依“断除诸欲已说”等所阐述的五处。“三处”,指依“法为离欲而说,非为具欲;为离系而说,非为具系;为无取着而说,非为有取着”这样所说的三处。“作追悔”:即令该恶业生起追悔。作了怎样的追悔呢?因此说“竟有如此……”等。显示巴利原文
Kāmesu, kāme vā pātumicchā kāmapipāsāti āha – ‘‘kāmesu pātabyatānaṃ, kāme vā pātumicchāna’’nti. Imesu pañcasu ṭhānesūti ‘‘kāmānaṃ pahānaṃ akkhāta’’ntiādinā vuttesu pañcasu ṭhānesu. Tīsu ṭhānesūti ‘‘virāgāya dhammo desito, no sarāgāya, visaṃyogāya dhammo desito, no saṃyogāya, anupādānāya dhammo desito, no saupādānāyā’’ti evaṃ vuttesu ṭhānesu. Vippaṭisāraṃ karotīti evaṃ taṃ pāpaṃ vippaṭisāraṃ uppādeti. Kīdisaṃ vippaṭisāraṃ karotīti āha ‘‘īdisepi nāmā’’tiādi.
39 “非出于喜爱欲”:指对自己导师不怀喜爱之情。“非以分裂为先导”:指不是以制造分裂的意图为先导,来对待那位比丘。“非为施加诽谤”:指不是为施加嗔怒。“卡利”是愤怒的别称,依于愤怒而说的指责过失,便称为“卡利教说”。“维拉”指学处的界限,“马里亚达”是其同义词。因为学处不可逾越,故称为“时限、界限”。显示巴利原文
39.Nevapiyakamyatāyāti attani satthu neva piyabhāvakāmatāya. Na bhedapurekkhāratāyāti na satthu tena bhikkhunā bhedanādhippāyapurekkhāratāya. Na kalisāsanāropanatthāyāti na dosāropanatthāya. Kalīti kodhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tassa sāsanaṃ kalisāsanaṃ, kodhavasena vuccamāno garahadoso. Velanti sikkhāpadavelaṃ. Mariyādanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Sikkhāpadañhi anatikkamanīyaṭṭhena ‘‘velā, mariyādā’’ti ca vuccati.
“行邪淫的违犯”:即以淫欲方式发生的、名为行邪淫的违犯。在“pakaraṇe”一词中,“pa”前缀表示开始,故说“开始做”。有些情况下,前缀只表达词根自身的意义,不示特殊含义,故说“或者只是做”。“以出身”:指刹帝利等出身。“以姓氏”:指乔达摩、迦叶等姓氏。“以望族子弟身份”:指在刹帝利等出身中,作为释迦族、须陀夷族等殊胜家族的子弟。“有名望”:指拥有众多随从。“可爱”:指具足可爱的戒行。“以不动摇”:指不被嗔恚和贪爱所动摇。若某人在那一生中没有证得道果的因缘,诸佛便称其为“无用之人”,如阿利吒、拉鲁陀夷等。即使有因缘,若在那一刻没有证得道或果,也仍称其为“无用之人”,如达尼耶、优波斯那长老等。然而苏定那在那一生中证得道果的因缘已完全断绝,因此称他为“无用之人”。显示巴利原文
Ajjhācāravītikkamoti methunavasena pavattaajjhācārasaṅkhāto vītikkamo. Pakaraṇeti ettha pa-saddo ārambhavacanoti āha ‘‘kattuṃ ārabhatī’’ti. Katthaci upasaggo dhātuatthameva vadati, na visesatthajotakoti āha ‘‘karotiyeva vā’’ti. Jātiyāti khattiyādijātiyā. Gottenāti gotamakassapādigottena. Kolaputtiyenāti khattiyādijātīsuyeva sakkakulasotthiyakulādivisiṭṭhakulānaṃ puttabhāvena. Yasassīti mahāparivāro. Pesalanti piyasīlaṃ. Avikampamānenāti paṭighānunayehi akampamānena. Yassa tasmiṃ attabhāve uppajjanārahānaṃ maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo natthi, taṃ buddhā ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti vadanti ariṭṭhalāḷudāyīādike viya. Upanissaye satipi tasmiṃ khaṇe magge vā phale vā asati ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti vadantiyeva dhaniyaupasenattherādike viya. Sudinnassa pana tasmiṃ attabhāve maggaphalānaṃ upanissayo samucchinnoyeva, tena naṃ ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti āha.
“沙门性之法”指惭、愧等。由于证悟之教以道、果、涅槃所摄持,故应知“诸教”涵盖了行道之教与教理之教。“皮肤”是指令他们有光泽的皮肤。何以故?答:“色泽”,即照亮他们的光辉之义。何以故?答:“美好状态”。“随顺皮肤的”意为合适的。在“恰当的”等词中,应加入“他们的”来连接。沙门之业即是沙门业,非沙门之业即是非沙门业。与“如何”一词关联,令“你将不能”成为未来时态。也有说“与‘名为’一词关联”的。显示巴利原文
Samaṇakaraṇānaṃ dhammānanti hirottappādīnaṃ. Maggaphalanibbānaggahaṇena paṭivedhasāsanassa gahitattā sāsanānanti paṭipattipariyattisāsanānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Chavinti tesaṃ pabhassarakaraṇaṃ chaviṃ. Kiṃ tanti āha ‘‘chāya’’nti, tesaṃ pakāsakaṃ obhāsanti attho. Kiṃ tanti āha ‘‘sundarabhāva’’nti. Chavimanugataṃ anucchavikaṃ. Patirūpantiādīsupi ‘‘tesa’’nti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Samaṇānaṃ kammaṃ sāmaṇakaṃ, na sāmaṇakaṃ assāmaṇakaṃ. Kathaṃ-saddayogena ‘‘na sakkhissasī’’ti anāgatavacanaṃ kataṃ. ‘‘Nāma-saddayogenā’’ti ca vadanti.
“具悲悯者”指怀有同情心者。“斥责”指责备。依词源学显示“āsīvisa(毒蛇)”一词的含义,而说“迅速”等。此毒蛇的(毒)会到来:被它所咬者,毒会向他袭来。“注入毒者”也是毒蛇,意指其毒仿佛灌注全身、并能注入他人身体。“食毒者”也是毒蛇:凡被它所食、所享用者,都变成毒,故应说“所食为毒者”,而依词源学称为“āsīvisa”。“有剑般毒者”也是毒蛇,指其毒如剑般锋利,能割断他人要害。或者,“āsī”指牙,毒藏于其中者即是毒蛇。在其余蛇中,因黑蛇毒性猛烈,故在毒蛇之后紧接着说黑蛇。蛇口亦如炭火坑般可怖,因此不是生起不善之处;为了显示遮止恶业的意图,并表明即使破戒,对于安住净戒者,死反而更胜,故说“将男根放入毒蛇之口、黑蛇之口更胜”。因为出家者所造的恶业,由于违背世尊教令且事态严重,故成重罪。“kāsu”既指坑穴,也指堆聚。显示巴利原文
Dayālukenāti anukampāya sahitena. Paribhāsantoti garahanto. Niruttinayena āsīvisa-saddassa atthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘āsu sīgha’’ntiādi. Etassāti āsīvisassa. Āgacchatīti yo tena daṭṭho, taṃ patiāgacchati. Āsittavisotipi āsīviso, sakalakāye āsiñcitvā viya ṭhapitaviso parassa ca sarīre āsiñcanavisoti attho. Asitavisotipi āsīviso. Yaṃ yañhi etena asitaṃ hoti paribhuttaṃ, taṃ visameva sampajjati, tasmā asitaṃ visaṃ etassāti asitavisoti vattabbe ‘‘āsīviso’’ti niruttinayena vuttaṃ. Asisadisavisotipi āsīviso, asi viya tikhiṇaṃ parassa mammacchedanasamatthaṃ visaṃ etassāti āsīvisoti vuttaṃ hoti. Āsīti vā dāṭhā vuccati, tattha sannihitavisoti āsīviso. Sesasappehi kaṇhasappassa mahāvisattā āsīvisassānantaraṃ kaṇhasappo vutto. Sappamukhampi aṅgārakāsu viya bhayāvahattā akusaluppattiyā ṭhānaṃ na hotīti akusalakammato nivāraṇādhippāyena sīlabhedatopi suddhasīle ṭhitassa maraṇameva varataranti dassetuṃ ‘‘āsīvisassa kaṇhasappassa mukhe aṅgajātaṃ pakkhittaṃ vara’’nti vuttaṃ. Pabbajitena hi katapāpakammaṃ bhagavato āṇātikkamanato vatthumahantatāya mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kāsunti āvāṭopi vuccati rāsipi.
‘‘Kinnu santaramānova, kāsuṃ khaṇasi sārathi; Puṭṭho me samma akkhāhi, kiṃ kāsuyā karissasī’’ti. (jā. 2.22.3) –
此处所说的『āvāṭa』,即是坑穴。显示巴利原文
Ettha hi āvāṭo kāsu nāma.
“另一些人坠入炭火坑,人们哭泣着,肢体被烧焦”——此处“kāsu”为堆聚之义。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Aṅgārakāsuṃ apare phuṇanti, narā rudantā paridaḍḍhagattā’’ti (jā. 2.22.462) –
此处指堆聚。然而在这里,两者皆有所指,故说“在充满炭火的坑穴中,或在炭火堆聚中”。“kāsu”者,意为被挖掘而成者,即坑穴;亦意为被积聚而成者,即堆聚。“padittāya”者,即正在燃烧。“saṃ”字在这里是周遍的同义词,故说“从四面八方熊熊燃烧”。显示巴利原文
Ettha rāsi. Idha pana ubhayampi adhippetanti āha ‘‘aṅgārapuṇṇakūpe aṅgārarāsimhi vā’’ti. Kassati khaṇīyatīti kāsu, āvāṭo. Kasīyati cīyatīti kāsu, rāsi. Padittāyāti dippamānāya. Saṃ-saddo ettha samantapariyāyoti āha ‘‘samantato pajjalitāyā’’ti.
将男根插入女根之生门,是堕生地狱的因缘与原因,故说“以此为缘”;此词亦是中性名词。于此处,以“to”代替了体格语尾,且在复合词中亦不省略该“to”。其中,“tattha nāma tvanti”一句里的“tvaṃ”一词,因与“samāpajjissasi”(你将行)相关联而有意义,故说“tvaṃ乃该词之同义词”。至于“yaṃ tan”的读法,在难点释(gaṇṭhipada)中说“此是更合理的文句”。“yaṃ tan”并非一般的举示与解说,而应如世间“无论什么或任何什么”这样的轻蔑语来理解,故说“即表达了无论什么或任何什么,都是被轻贱、被蔑视的意思”。“nīcajanānaṃ”指德行低劣的众生。在“gāmadhamma”一词中,以“gāma”一字通过无差别的转喻来指称村中居民,故说“村中居住之人”。“kilesapaggharaṇakaṃ dhammaṃ”指令贪等烦恼流漏之法,因为淫法确实令贪欲流漏。由于淫法有大罪过、粗显,故说“非微细”。“anipuṇaṃ”是其同义词。“odakaṃ...显示巴利原文
Idaṃ mātugāmassa aṅgajāte aṅgajātapakkhipanaṃ nidānaṃ kāraṇamassa nirayupapajjanassāti itonidānaṃ, bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ. Paccattavacanassa to-ādeso kato, tassa ca samāsepi alopo. Tattha nāma tvanti ettha tvaṃ-saddo ‘‘samāpajjissasī’’ti iminā sambandhamupagacchamāno atthīti āha ‘‘tvanti taṃsaddassa vevacana’’nti. ‘‘Yaṃ tanti pana pāṭho yuttarūpo’’ti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Yaṃ tanti nāyaṃ uddesaniddeso, yathā loke yaṃ vā taṃ vāti avaññātavacanaṃ, evaṃ daṭṭhabbanti āha – ‘‘yaṃ vā taṃ vā hīḷitaṃ avaññātanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Nīcajanānanti nihīnaguṇānaṃ sattānaṃ. Gāmadhammanti ettha gāma-saddena gāmavāsino vuttā abhedūpacārenāti āha ‘‘gāmavāsikamanussāna’’nti. Kilesapaggharaṇakaṃ dhammanti rāgādikilesavissandanakadhammaṃ . Methunadhammo hi rāgaṃ paggharati. Methunadhammassa mahāsāvajjatāya oḷārikattā vuttaṃ ‘‘asukhuma’’nti. Anipuṇanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Udake bhavaṃ odakaṃ. Kiṃ taṃ? Udakakiccanti āha – ‘‘udakakiccaṃ antikaṃ avasānaṃ assā’’ti. Samāpajjissatīti anāgatavacanaṃ nāma-saddayogena katanti āha – ‘‘samāpajjissatīti…pe… nāma-saddenayojetabba’’nti. Loke methunadhammassa ādikattā koci paṭhamakappiko, na panāyanti āha – ‘‘sāsanaṃ sandhāya vadatī’’ti. Bahūnanti puggalāpekkhaṃ, na pana akusalāpekkhanti āha ‘‘bahūnaṃ puggalāna’’nti.
由于不防护,而有难养、难护等;此处以难养等词来说不防护,是依果报而说因,故说“作为难养等之基础的不防护”。“作为基础”即作为原因——因为果报依存于此而转起,故因称为基础。“自我”指身与心,或仅指心。成就难养与难护,意即自己与施主们都难以奉养、难以护持。立于不防护者,有些人于自己是难养的,有些人于侍者是难养的。如何说呢?有人得到酸味等食物后,却寻求非酸味等食物;在另一家得到食物,却在另一家丢弃,游遍全村之后,空钵进入寺院躺下,此人即是于自己难养者。又有人即使得到满钵的米饭、肉食等,仍示现不悦之色、不满之情,或当着他们的面轻蔑该钵食说“你们给了什么”,而将食物给与沙弥、居士等,此人即是于侍者难养者。众人见此,便远远避开,说:“这位比丘难养,无法奉养。”显示巴利原文
Yaṃ asaṃvaraṃ paṭicca dubbharatādupposatādi hoti, so asaṃvaro dubbharatādi-saddena vutto kāraṇe phalūpacārenāti āha – ‘‘dubbharatādīnaṃ vatthubhūtassa asaṃvarassā’’ti. Vatthubhūtassāti kāraṇabhūtassa. Vasati ettha phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti hi kāraṇaṃ vatthu. Attāti cittaṃ sarīrañca, cittameva vā. Dubbharatañceva dupposatañca āpajjatīti attanā paccayadāyakehi ca dukkhena bharitabbataṃ posetabbatañca āpajjati. Asaṃvare ṭhito hi ekacco attanopi dubbharo hoti dupposo, ekacco upaṭṭhākānampi. Kathaṃ? Yo hi ambilādīni laddhā anambilādīni pariyesati, aññassa ghare laddhaṃ aññassa ghare chaḍḍento sabbaṃ gāmaṃ caritvā rittapattova vihāraṃ pavisitvā nipajjati, ayaṃ attano dubbharo. Yo pana sālimaṃsodanādīnaṃ patte pūretvā dinnepi dummukhabhāvaṃ anattamanabhāvameva dasseti, tesaṃ vā sammukhāva taṃ piṇḍapātaṃ ‘‘kiṃ tumhehi dinna’’nti apasādento sāmaṇeragahaṭṭhādīnaṃ deti, ayaṃ upaṭṭhākānaṃ dubbharo. Etaṃ disvā manussā dūratova parivajjenti ‘‘dubbharo bhikkhu na sakkā posetu’’nti.
“大欲”一词中,欲求广大之物,或欲望大,故名“大欲者”,其性为“大欲”,指彰显自身功德与受取时不知量。大欲者立于欲贪行,彰显自身所具备的戒、头陀支等功德,且于受取时亦不知量。即如所说:“此处有具信者,欲令人知‘我是具信者’;有持戒者,欲令人知‘我是持戒者’……”此即大欲之相。具此大欲者难以被满足,纵是亲生母亲亦不能把握其心。因此有言:显示巴利原文
Mahicchatanti ettha mahantāni vatthūni icchati, mahatī vā panassa icchāti mahiccho, tassa bhāvo mahicchatā, santaguṇavibhāvanatā paṭiggahaṇe amattaññutā ca. Mahiccho hi icchācāre ṭhatvā attani vijjamānasīladhutadhammādiguṇe vibhāveti, tādisassa paṭiggahaṇe amattaññutāpi hoti. Yaṃ sandhāya vadanti ‘‘santaguṇasambhāvanatā paṭiggahaṇe ca amattaññutā, etaṃ mahicchatālakkhaṇa’’nti. Sā panesā mahicchatā ‘‘idhekacco saddho samāno ‘saddhoti maṃ jano jānātū’ti icchati, sīlavā samāno ‘sīlavāti maṃ jano jānātū’ti’’ iminā nayena āgatāyeva, tāya samannāgato puggalo dussantappiyo hoti, vijātamātāpissa cittaṃ gahetuṃ na sakkoti. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
“火聚、大海,及大欲之人;
纵以车满载资具供养,此三者亦不知满足。”(中部注 1.252;增支部注 1.1.63;分别论注 850;优陀那注 31;大义释注 85)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Aggikkhandho samuddo ca, mahiccho cāpi puggalo; Sakaṭena paccayaṃ dentu, tayopete atappiyā’’ti. (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.252; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.63; vibha. aṭṭha. 850; udā. aṭṭha. 31; mahāni. aṭṭha. 85);
与众生和烦恼的混杂、共聚,名为‘杂处’,故说‘即众杂处与烦恼杂处’。且为懈怠所随逐,即被懈怠的状态所随逐,懈怠的状态就是‘kosajja(懈怠)’。在‘八懈怠事之圆满’中,‘kusīta(懈怠者)’指卑劣地沉没者,这里将da变为ta。因某一法而使人被称为‘懈怠者’,此处的懈怠状态便以‘kusīta’一词表示。即便没有直接表示状态的词,状态义也可被理解,如说‘布的白’,所以此处义为‘懈怠状态之事’,即懈怠的原因。正如:显示巴利原文
Sattehi kilesehi ca saṅgaṇanaṃ samodhānaṃ saṅgaṇikāti āha – ‘‘gaṇasaṅgaṇikāya ceva kilesasaṅgaṇikāya cā’’ti. Kosajjānugato ca hotīti kusītabhāvena anugato hoti, kusītassa bhāvo kosajjaṃ. Aṭṭhakusītavatthupāripūriyāti ettha kucchitaṃ sīdatīti kusīto da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ katvā. Yassa dhammassa vasena puggalo ‘‘kusīto’’ti vuccati, so kusītabhāvo idha kusīta-saddena vutto. Vināpi hi bhāvajotanasaddaṃ bhāvattho viññāyati yathā ‘‘paṭassa sukka’’nti, tasmā kusītabhāvavatthūnīti attho, kosajjakāraṇānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tathā hi –
“我有应做的工作,而做这些工作时身体会疲劳,那我便躺下吧。”于是他躺下,不为了未得之得、未证之证、未实现之实现而精进努力。这是第一种懈怠事。“我做了工作,而做这些工作时身体已经疲劳,那我便躺下吧。”……“我有应走的道路,而行路时身体会疲劳,那我便躺下吧。”……“我走了道路,而行路时身体已经疲劳,那我便躺下吧。”……“我到村落或城镇托钵乞食,没有得到粗劣或精美食物的饱足,我的身体疲劳、不堪用,那我便躺下吧。”……“我到村落或城镇托钵乞食,得到了粗劣或精美食物的饱足,我的身体沉重、不堪用,如同堆满了豆子一般,那我便躺下吧。”……“我生起了这小小的病,有理由躺下,那我便躺下吧。”……“我已从病中痊愈,病愈不久,我的身体虚弱、不堪用,那我便躺下吧。”于是他躺下,不为了未得之得、未证之证、未实现之实现而精进努力。这是第八种懈怠事。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kammaṃ kho me kattabbaṃ bhavissati, kammaṃ kho pana me karontassa kāyo kilamissati, handāhaṃ nipajjāmīti so nipajjati, na vīriyaṃ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya, idaṃ paṭhamaṃ kusītavatthu. Ahaṃ kho kammaṃ akāsiṃ, kammaṃ kho pana me karontassa kāyo kilanto, handāhaṃ nipajjāmi…pe… maggo kho me gantabbo bhavissati, maggaṃ kho pana me gacchantassa kāyo kilamissati, handāhaṃ nipajjāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho maggaṃ agamāsiṃ, maggaṃ kho pana me gacchantassa kāyo kilanto, handāhaṃ nipajjāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya caranto nālatthaṃ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṃ pāripūriṃ, tassa me kāyo kilanto akammañño, handāhaṃ nipajjāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya caranto alatthaṃ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṃ pāripūriṃ, tassa me kāyo garuko akammañño māsācitaṃ maññe, handāhaṃ nipajjāmi…pe… uppanno kho me ayaṃ appamattako ābādho, atthi kappo nipajjituṃ, handāhaṃ nipajjāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho gilānā vuṭṭhito aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā, tassa me kāyo dubbalo akammañño, handāhaṃ nipajjāmīti so nipajjati, na vīriyaṃ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya. Idaṃ aṭṭhamaṃ kusītavatthu’’nti (dī. ni. 3.334; a. ni. 8.80) –
以上如此生起的沉滞——即以“那我便躺下吧”这样的想法,由于这些是层层递进的懈怠原因,故称为八种懈怠事。这八事的圆满,即导致(懈怠的完成),这就是它的含义。显示巴利原文
Evamāgatāni ‘‘handāhaṃ nipajjāmī’’ti evaṃ pavattaosīdanāni uparūpari kosajjakāraṇattā aṭṭha kusītavatthūni nāma, tesaṃ pāripūriyā saṃvattatīti attho.
“易养”与“易供”,意为对于侍者,能以安乐来奉养、供给。安住于防护中的人,有的自身易养易供,有的则令侍者也易养易供。如何是自身易养?无论得到粗劣或精妙的食物,他都心满意足地食用,而后回到住处,修习自己的业处,这便是自身易养。如何是令侍者易养?对于他人所施的少或多、粗或妙的布施,他不轻视,心满意足、面容澄净,当着他们面受用后离去,这便是令侍者易养。人们见了,便生起极大的信赖,说:“我们的尊者易养,即使一点点也满足,我们应当供养他。”于是允诺并供养他。“少欲”即无欲的状态。此处文句似有余意,然义理实无余。“少”字于此应作“无”解,正如“我知少病”等处用法(《中部》1.225)。故说为“无渴爱的状态”。显示巴利原文
Subharo hoti suposoti attano upaṭṭhākehi ca sukhena bharitabbo posetabboti attho. Saṃvare ṭhito hi ekacco attanopi subharo hoti suposo, ekacco upaṭṭhākānampi. Kathaṃ? Yo hi yaṃ kiñci lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā laddhā tuṭṭhacittova bhuñjitvā vihāraṃ gantvā attano kammaṃ karoti, ayaṃ attano subharo. Yo pana paresampi appaṃ vā bahuṃ vā lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā dānaṃ ahīḷetvā attamano vippasannamukho hutvā etesaṃ sammukhāva paribhuñjitvā yāti, ayaṃ upaṭṭhākānaṃ subharo. Etaṃ disvā manussā ativiya vissatthā honti, ‘‘amhākaṃ bhadanto subharo, thokathokenapi tussati, mayameva naṃ posessāmā’’ti paṭiññaṃ katvā posenti. Appicchatanti icchāvirahitattaṃ. Ettha hi byañjanaṃ sāvasesaṃ viya, attho pana niravaseso. Appa-saddo hettha abhāvatthoti sakkā viññātuṃ ‘‘appābādhatañca sañjānāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.225) viya. Tenevāha ‘‘nittaṇhabhāva’’nti.
“三种差别之知足”,是以“依所得知足”等通称总括而说。但于四种资具中,各有三种知足,故有十二种知足。如何为十二?于衣服,有依所得知足、依力量知足、依适宜知足三种;于饮食、床座、医药等亦复如是。以下解说其差别(《中部注》1.252等):此处,比丘获得衣服,不论好坏,他仅以此维生,不希求其他,即使得到更好的也不取。这是他对衣服的依所得知足。若他本性虚弱,或为病、老所迫,穿着厚重的衣服会感到疲累,他便与同分比丘交换,以轻便的衣服维生,这仍是知足。这是他对衣服的依力量知足。何以故?对于本性虚弱等者,重衣不带来安乐,反生身苦,故以需要为因、以不贪等为因,交换后使用轻衣,并不违知足。另一种是获得优良资具的比丘:他得到细布等某一种贵重衣,或得多件衣后,心想:“这应给于长老、久出家者,这应给于多闻者,这应给于病者,这应给于少得者。”施与之后,他取用他们换下的旧衣,或从垃圾堆等处拾取破布,拼缀成僧伽梨而穿着,这仍是知足。这是他对衣服的依适宜知足。因为虽得多件贵重衣,却能舍弃它们而取用其他,是安立于依适宜之理,故不违知足。显示巴利原文
Tippabhedāya santuṭṭhiyāti yathālābhādisantosasāmaññena vuttaṃ, catūsu pana paccayesu tayo tayo santosāti dvādasavidho hoti santoso. Kathaṃ? Cīvare yathālābhasantoso yathābalasantoso yathāsāruppasantosoti tividho hoti santoso. Evaṃ piṇḍapātādīsu. Tassāyaṃ pabhedasaṃvaṇṇanā (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.252; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.144; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.65) – idha bhikkhu cīvaraṃ labhati sundaraṃ vā asundaraṃ vā, so teneva yāpeti aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhāti. Ayamassa cīvare yathālābhasantoso. Atha pana pakatidubbalo vā hoti ābādhajarābhibhūto vā, garucīvaraṃ pārupanto kilamati, so sabhāgena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ taṃ parivattetvā lahukena yāpentopi santuṭṭhoyeva hoti. Ayamassa cīvare yathābalasantoso. Pakatidubbalādīnañhi garucīvarāni na phāsubhāvāvahāni sarīrakhedāvahāni ca hontīti payojanavasena anatricchatādivasena tāni parivattetvā lahukacīvaraparibhogo na santosavirodhīti. Aparo paṇītapaccayalābhī hoti, so paṭṭacīvarādīnaṃ aññataraṃ mahagghacīvaraṃ bahūni vā pana cīvarāni labhitvā ‘‘idaṃ therānaṃ cirapabbajitānaṃ, idaṃ bahussutānaṃ anurūpaṃ, idaṃ gilānānaṃ, idaṃ appalābhānaṃ hotū’’ti datvā tesaṃ purāṇacīvaraṃ vā saṅkārakūṭādito vā nantakāni uccinitvā tehi saṅghāṭiṃ katvā dhārentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa cīvare yathāsāruppasantoso. Mahagghañhi cīvaraṃ bahūni vā cīvarāni labhitvāpi tāni vissajjetvā tadaññassa gahaṇaṃ yathāsāruppanaye ṭhitattā na santosavirodhīti.
此处,比丘得到饮食,不论粗劣或精妙,他只以此维生,不希求其他,即使另有获得也不取。这是他对饮食的依所得知足。若他得到与自身体质相违,或与疾病相违的饮食,食用后产生不适,他便将它给予同分比丘,并从对方手中接过适宜的食物食用,继续修习沙门法,这仍是知足。这是他对饮食的依力量知足。另一种是获得多而精妙饮食的比丘:如同对衣服那样,他将饮食施予久出家者、多闻者、少得者、病者,自己取用他们的残食,或自行托钵,食混合之食,这仍是知足。这是他对饮食的依适宜知足。显示巴利原文
Idha pana bhikkhu piṇḍapātaṃ labhati lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so teneva yāpeti aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhāti. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana attano pakativiruddhaṃ vā byādhiviruddhaṃ vā piṇḍapātaṃ labhati, yenassa paribhuttena aphāsu hoti, so sabhāgassa bhikkhuno taṃ datvā tassa hatthato sappāyabhojanaṃ bhuñjitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathābalasantoso. Aparo bahuṃ paṇītaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ labhati, so taṃ cīvaraṃ viya cirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhagilānānaṃ datvā tesaṃ vā sesakaṃ piṇḍāya vā caritvā missakāhāraṃ bhuñjantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa piṇḍapāte yathāsāruppasantoso.
在此,比丘获得住处,或合意或不合意,他对此既不生喜悦,也不起嗔恚,即使仅有草席作为铺具,也随所得而满足。这是他对住处的随得满足。若有比丘获得与自己的性情不合或于病体不合的住处,居住其中感到不适,他将那住处给予合适的比丘后,即便住在该比丘所有的适宜住处,也依然满足。这是他对住处的随力满足。另有大福德者,获得众多岩洞、殿堂、楼阁等殊胜住处,他将这些如同衣等那样,施与久出家者、多闻者、少得者、患病者,然后无论住在何处,也依然满足。这是他对住处的随宜满足。又有比丘这样思惟:‘所谓最上的住处,乃是放逸之处,坐在那里便会陷入昏沉睡眠,被睡眠制伏后,醒来时恶不善念便会现起。’因此,即使得到那样的住处也不接受;他拒绝之后,即使住在露天、树下等处,也依然满足。这也是他对住处的随宜满足。显示巴利原文
Idha pana bhikkhu senāsanaṃ labhati manāpaṃ vā amanāpaṃ vā, so tena neva somanassaṃ, na paṭighaṃ uppādeti, antamaso tiṇasantharakenapi yathāladdheneva tussati. Ayamassa senāsane yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana attano pakativiruddhaṃ vā byādhiviruddhaṃ vā senāsanaṃ labhati, yatthassa vasato aphāsu hoti, so taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa santake sappāyasenāsane vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa senāsane yathābalasantoso. Aparo mahāpuñño leṇamaṇḍapakūṭāgārādīni bahūni paṇītasenāsanāni labhati, so tāni cīvarādīni viya cirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhagilānānaṃ datvā yattha katthaci vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso. Yopi ‘‘uttamasenāsanaṃ nāma pamādaṭṭhānaṃ, tattha nisinnassa thinamiddhaṃ okkamati, niddābhibhūtassa puna paṭibujjhato pāpavitakkā pātubhavantī’’ti paṭisañcikkhitvā tādisaṃ senāsanaṃ pattampi na sampaṭicchati, so taṃ paṭikkhipitvā abbhokāsarukkhamūlādīsu vasantopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayampissa senāsane yathāsāruppasantoso.
在此,比丘获得医药,或粗劣或精良,他仅以所得而满足,不希求其他,即便得到更好的也不取用。这是他对病缘的随得满足。若有比丘需要油却得到糖蜜,他将糖蜜给予适当的比丘后,从那位比丘手中取油,或另外寻找药物制作,也依然满足。这是他对病缘的随力满足。另有大福德者,获得许多油、蜜、糖蜜等精良医药,他将这些如同衣等那样,施与久出家者、多闻者、少得者、患病者,然后随他们所带来的任何药物度日,也依然满足。若在一容器中放置牛尿诃子,在另一容器中放置四蜜药,有人对他说:‘尊者,请随意取用您所想要的。’如果他的病能由其中任何一种而平息,他便这样想:‘牛尿诃子是诸佛等所赞叹的。’于是拒绝四蜜药,只以牛尿诃子制药,成为最上的满足者。这是他对病缘的随宜满足。如此,当知依随得等而有三种差别之满足,依四种资具则成十二种。显示巴利原文
Idha pana bhikkhu bhesajjaṃ labhati lūkhaṃ vā paṇītaṃ vā, so yaṃ labhati, teneva tussati aññaṃ na pattheti, labhantopi na gaṇhāti. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathālābhasantoso. Yo pana telena atthiko phāṇitaṃ labhati, so taṃ sabhāgassa bhikkhuno datvā tassa hatthato telaṃ gahetvā aññadeva vā pariyesitvā bhesajjaṃ karontopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathābalasantoso. Aparo mahāpuñño bahuṃ telamadhuphāṇitādipaṇītabhesajjaṃ labhati, so taṃ cīvaraṃ viya cirapabbajitabahussutaappalābhagilānānaṃ datvā tesaṃ ābhatena yena kenaci yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hoti. Yo pana ekasmiṃ bhājane muttaharītakaṃ ṭhapetvā ekasmiṃ catumadhuraṃ ‘‘gaṇha, bhante, yadicchasī’’ti vuccamāno sacassa tesu aññatarenapi rogo vūpasammati, atha ‘‘muttaharītakaṃ nāma buddhādīhi vaṇṇita’’nti catumadhuraṃ paṭikkhipitvā muttaharītakeneva bhesajjaṃ karonto paramasantuṭṭhova hoti. Ayamassa gilānapaccaye yathāsāruppasantoso. Evaṃ yathālābhādivasena tippabhedo santoso catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ vasena dvādasavidho hotīti veditabbo.
以欲寻、嗔恚寻、害寻,是为三种不善寻。以出离寻、无嗔恚寻、无害寻,是为三种善寻。‘一切烦恼损减的回转’,即成为贪等一切烦恼损减之因的涅槃界。‘八精进事的圆满’,即八种精进发动之因的圆满。因为,最初所起的适当策励,是随后精进发动之因。应当知道,伴随着适当审察的策励,或以那策励为根本的审察,即是八精进事。正如——显示巴利原文
Kāmavitakkabyāpādavitakkavihiṃsāvitakkānaṃ vasena akusalavitakkattayaṃ. Nekkhammavitakkaabyāpādavitakkaavihiṃ sāvitakkānaṃ vasena kusalavitakkattayaṃ. Sabbakilesāpacayabhūtāya vivaṭṭāyāti rāgādisabbakilesānaṃ apacayahetubhūtāya nibbānadhātuyā. Aṭṭhavīriyārambhavatthupāripūriyāti aṭṭhannaṃ vīriyārambhakāraṇānaṃ pāripūriyā. Yathā tathā paṭhamaṃ pavattaabbhussahanañhi upari vīriyārambhassa kāraṇaṃ hoti. Anurūpapaccavekkhaṇāsahitāni hi abbhussahanāni tammūlakāni vā paccavekkhaṇāni aṭṭha vīriyārambhavatthūnīti veditabbāni. Tathā hi –
‘我将有应作之事,而作事时不易将诸佛的教法系念于心,我当发起精进,为得未得,为证未证,为作证未作证。我已作事,而作事时未能将诸佛的教法系念于心,我当发起精进……我将有道路要行,而行道时不易将诸佛的教法系念于心,我当发起精进……我已行道路,而行道时未能将诸佛的教法系念于心,我当发起精进……我于村落或城镇乞食,未得粗劣或精良之食而饱足,身体轻安适业,我当发起精进……我于村落或城镇乞食,已得粗劣或精良之食而饱足,身体有力适业,我当发起精进……我生起此微小疾病,而此疾病有可能加重,我当发起精进……我已从病中痊愈不久,而此疾病有可能复发,我当发起精进,为得未得,为证未证,为作证未作证。’显示巴利原文
‘‘Kammaṃ kho me kattabbaṃ bhavissati, kammaṃ kho pana me karontena na sukaraṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ manasi kātuṃ, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāya. Ahaṃ kho kammaṃ akāsiṃ, kammaṃ kho panāhaṃ karonto nāsakkhiṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ manasi kātuṃ, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi…pe… maggo kho me gantabbo bhavissati, maggaṃ kho pana me gacchantena na sukaraṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ manasi kātuṃ, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho maggaṃ agamāsiṃ, maggaṃ kho panāhaṃ gacchanto nāsakkhiṃ buddhānaṃ sāsanaṃ manasi kātuṃ, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya caranto nālatthaṃ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṃ pāripūriṃ, tassa me kāyo lahuko kammañño, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vā piṇḍāya caranto alatthaṃ lūkhassa vā paṇītassa vā bhojanassa yāvadatthaṃ pāripūriṃ, tassa me kāyo balavā kammañño, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi…pe… uppanno kho me ayaṃ appamattako ābādho, ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjati, yaṃ me ābādho pavaḍḍheyya, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi…pe… ahaṃ kho gilānā vuṭṭhito aciravuṭṭhito gelaññā, ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ vijjati, yaṃ me ābādho paccudāvatteyya, handāhaṃ vīriyaṃ ārabhāmi appattassa pattiyā anadhigatassa adhigamāya asacchikatassa sacchikiriyāyā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.335; a. ni. 8.80) –
如此,与相应的审察相伴而生的策励,或以此审察为根本的审察,即名为八精进事。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ pavattaanurūpapaccavekkhaṇāsahitāni abbhussahanāni tammūlakāni vā paccavekkhaṇāni aṭṭha vīriyārambhavatthūni nāma.
‘随宜的、随顺的’:此处‘彼’字既观待将说者,亦观待已说者,故说‘现今将制定之学处’等。因为,总称名词既有指将说之语者,亦有指已说之语者。‘与防护、断除相应’:即与五种防护及五种断除相应。因为,防护有五种:戒防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护。断除亦有五种:彼分断除、镇伏断除、正断断除、止息断除、出离断除。显示巴利原文
Tadanucchavikaṃ tadanulomikanti ettha ta-saddo vakkhamānāpekkho ca atītāpekkho ca hotīti āha ‘‘yaṃ idāni sikkhāpadaṃ paññapessatī’’tiādi. Sabbanāmāni hi vakkhamānavacanānipi honti pakkantavacanānipi. Saṃvarappahānapaṭisaṃyuttanti pañcasaṃvarehi ceva pañcapahānehi ca paṭisaṃyuttaṃ. Pañcavidho hi saṃvaro sīlasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaroti. Pahānampi pañcavidhaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nissaraṇappahānanti.
其中,“依此巴帝摩卡律仪防护,具足防护”(《分别论》511)等所说,即名戒律仪;其义为身、语的不违犯。“防护眼根,于眼根生起律仪”(《长部》1.213;《中部》1.295;《相应部》4.239;《增支部》3.16)等所说,即根律仪,名念律仪;其义为如是生起的念本身。至于“诸流之律仪,我以慧遮止”(《经集》1041;《导论》11)等所说,即智律仪。此处先说“诸流之律仪”,后说“以慧遮止”,故将断除名为‘流’之贪爱、邪见、恶行、无明等烦恼的断智,以遮止义而说为律仪。“堪忍寒、热”(《中部》1.24;《中部》3.159;《增支部》4.114)等所说,即安忍,名忍律仪;其义为如是生起的蕴或无嗔。若有人说为‘慧’,此不应取。“不忍受已生起之欲寻”(《中部》1.26)等所说,即以去除欲寻等而发起的精进本身,名精进律仪。如是,这一切律仪,因对各自所应防护的——或称恶戒之身语恶行、或称失念之放逸,或贪等、不忍、无智、懈怠——进行防护、遮止、覆盖,故称为‘律仪’。‘防护’即律仪,意为遮止、阻止、不令。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘iminā pātimokkhasaṃvarena upeto hoti samupeto’’ti (vibha. 511) evamāgato pātimokkhasaṃvaro sīlasaṃvaro nāma, so ca atthato kāyikavācasiko avītikkamo. ‘‘Rakkhati cakkhundriyaṃ, cakkhundriye saṃvaraṃ āpajjatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.213; ma. ni. 1.295; saṃ. ni. 4.239; a. ni. 3.16) evamāgatā indriyārakkhā satisaṃvaro, sā ca atthato tathāpavattā sati eva. ‘‘Sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmi, paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti (su. ni. 1041; netti. 11) evamāgato ñāṇasaṃvaro. Ettha hi ‘‘sotānaṃ saṃvaraṃ brūmī’’ti vatvā ‘‘paññāyete pidhīyare’’ti vacanato sotasaṅkhātānaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhiduccaritaavijjādikilesānaṃ samucchedakañāṇaṃ pidahanaṭṭhena saṃvaroti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Khamo hoti sītassa uṇhassā’’tievamāgatā (ma. ni. 1.24; ma. ni. 3.159; a. ni. 4.114) adhivāsanā khantisaṃvaro, sā ca atthato tathāpavattā khandhā adoso vā. Paññāti eke, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.26) evamāgataṃ kāmavitakkādīnaṃ vinodanavasena pavattaṃ vīriyameva vīriyasaṃvaro. Sabbo cāyaṃ saṃvaro yathāsakaṃ saṃvaritabbānaṃ dussīlyasaṅkhātānaṃ kāyavacīduccaritānaṃ muṭṭhassaccasaṅkhātassa pamādassa abhijjhādīnaṃ vā akkhanti aññāṇakosajjānañca saṃvaraṇato pidahanato chādanato ‘‘saṃvaro’’ti vuccati. Saṃvaratīti saṃvaro, pidahati nivāreti pavattituṃ na detīti attho. Paccayasamavāye uppajjanārahānaṃ kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ tathā tathā anuppādanameva hi idha saṃvaraṇaṃ nāma. Evaṃ tāva pañcavidho saṃvaro veditabbo.
依此一功德分,断除彼一非功德分,即彼分断。于名色分别等内观智中,因对治故,犹如以灯光破除黑暗:以名色确定断除有身见,以缘摄受断除无因见与非正因见,以其后生起之度疑断除犹豫状态,以聚观断除‘我、我所’执,以道非道确定断除于非道生起道想,以生随观断除断见,以灭随观断除常见,以怖畏随观断除于可怖生起无畏想等——依此类推,以彼彼内观智断除彼彼非功德分,当知此为彼分断。其次,以近行定与安止定所摄之定,因遮止转起,犹如以棒击打水面之草,而断除彼彼诸盖等法,此即名为镇伏断:镇伏本身即是断,故为镇伏断。由四圣道之修习,于各证道者相续中,以‘为断诸邪见’(《法集论》277)等方式所说、属于集谛的烦恼群,以毕竟不再生起的方式而断除,此即正断断。在果位刹那,烦恼之止息、寂静的状态,此即止息断。而出离一切行、断除一切行之涅槃,此即出离断。凡此一切,皆以舍离义而称为‘断’。如是,当知与上述律仪及此诸‘断’相应之说法,为‘律仪断相应’。显示巴利原文
Tena tena guṇaṅgena tassa tassa aguṇaṅgassa pahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ. Nāmarūpaparicchedādīsu hi vipassanāñāṇesu paṭipakkhabhāvato dīpālokeneva tamassa nāmarūpavavatthānena sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā, paccayapariggahena ahetuvisamahetudiṭṭhīnaṃ, tasseva aparabhāge uppannena kaṅkhāvitaraṇena kathaṃkathībhāvassa, kalāpasammasanena ‘‘ahaṃ mamā’’ti gāhassa, maggāmaggavavatthānena amagge maggasaññāya, udayadassanena ucchedadiṭṭhiyā, vayadassanena sassatadiṭṭhiyā, bhayadassanena sabhaye abhayasaññāyātiādinā nayena tena tena vipassanāñāṇena tassa tassa aguṇaṅgassa pahānaṃ tadaṅgappahānanti veditabbaṃ. Yaṃ pana upacārappanābhedena samādhinā pavattinivāraṇato ghaṭappahāreneva udakapiṭṭhe sevālassa tesaṃ tesaṃ nīvaraṇādidhammānaṃ pahānaṃ, etaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ nāma. Vikkhambhanameva pahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ. Yaṃ catunnaṃ ariyamaggānaṃ bhāvitattā taṃtaṃmaggavato attano santāne ‘‘diṭṭhigatānaṃ pahānāyā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 277) nayena vuttassa samudayapakkhiyassa kilesagaṇassa accantaṃ appavattibhāvena pahānaṃ, idaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ pana phalakkhaṇe paṭippassaddhattaṃ vūpasantatā kilesānaṃ, etaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nāma. Yaṃ sabbasaṅkhatanissaṭattā pahīnasabbasaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ, etaṃ nissaraṇappahānaṃ nāma. Sabbampi cetaṃ cāgaṭṭhena pahānanti vuccati. Evamimehi yathāvuttasaṃvarehi ceva pahānehi ca paṭisaṃyuttā dhammadesanā ‘‘saṃvarappahānapaṭisaṃyuttā’’ti veditabbā.
“不附于经藏”的意思是:未系属于经典,即未收入圣典。盖杂集法教,不为结集所纳。为阐明其义,故说“脱离圣典”。又或,“不附于经藏”乃就其未收入经藏与论藏圣典而言,“脱离圣典”乃就其未收入律藏圣典而言。“中入法教”意指未以智慧深入、于中途所宣说者,其用意在拒绝,如于跋陀利长老之例。“来世”指死后将往、将去之他方世界。于彼处存在,即“属于来世”。以轮回怖畏来警醒,即“如此,破戒者将在地狱等处受苦”这般方式而警醒。不应说:“于那一刹那、那一须臾,世尊如何能说如此广大法教?因世尊能说长达长部、中部份量之教。”凡夫大众宣说一语之时,阿难长老能说八语;而于阿难长老宣说一语之时,世尊能说十六语。依此类推,于凡夫宣说一语的刹那,世尊能说一千六百语。何以故?因世尊舌根柔韧、齿覆严密、辞令无失、有分心路轻敏迅捷。是故,若一显示巴利原文
Asuttantavinibaddhanti suttantesu anibaddhaṃ, pāḷianāruḷhanti attho. Pakiṇṇakadhammadesanā hi saṅgahaṃ na ārohati. Vuttamevatthaṃ pakāsento āha ‘‘pāḷivinimutta’’nti. Atha vā asuttantavinibaddhanti suttābhidhammapāḷiṃ anāruḷhabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, pāḷivinimuttanti vinayapāḷiṃ anāruḷhabhāvaṃ sandhāya. Okkantikadhammadesanā nāma ñāṇena anupavisitvā antarā kathiyamānā dhammadesanā, paṭikkhipanādhippāyā bhaddālittherasadisā. Samparetabbato pecca gantabbato samparāyo, paraloko. Tattha bhavaṃ samparāyikaṃ. Vaṭṭabhayena tajjentoti ‘‘evaṃ dussīlā nirayādīsu dukkhaṃ pāpuṇantī’’ti tajjento. Dīghanikāyappamāṇampi majjhimanikāyappamāṇampi dhammadesanaṃ karotīti ‘‘tena khaṇena tena muhuttena kathaṃ bhagavā tāvamahantaṃ dhammadesanaṃ karotī’’ti na vattabbaṃ. Yāvatā hi lokiyamahājanā ekaṃ padaṃ kathenti, tāva ānandatthero aṭṭha padāni katheti. Ānandatthere pana ekaṃ padaṃ kathenteyeva bhagavā soḷasa padāni katheti. Iminā nayena lokiyajanassa ekapaduccāraṇakkhaṇe bhagavā aṭṭhavīsasataṃ padāni katheti. Kasmā? Bhagavato hi jivhā mudu, dantāvaraṇaṃ suphusitaṃ, vacanaṃ agaḷitaṃ, bhavaṅgaparivāso lahuko, tasmā sace eko bhikkhu kāyānupassanaṃ pucchati, añño vedanānupassanaṃ, añño cittānupassanaṃ, añño dhammānupassanaṃ, ‘‘iminā puṭṭhe ahaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti eko ekaṃ na oloketi, evaṃ santepi tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ paṭhamaṃ pucchi, ayaṃ dutiya’’ntiādinā pucchanavāro tādisassa paññavato paññāyati sukhumassa antarassa labbhanato. Buddhānaṃ pana desanāvāro aññesaṃ na paññāyateva accharāsaṅghātamatte khaṇe anekakoṭisahassacittappavattisambhavato. Daḷhadhammena dhanuggahena khittasarassa vidatthicaturaṅgulaṃ tālacchāyaṃ atikkamanato puretaraṃyeva bhagavā cuddasavidhena kāyānupassanaṃ, navavidhena vedanānupassanaṃ, soḷasavidhena cittānupassanaṃ, pañcavidhena dhammānupassanaṃ katheti. Tiṭṭhantu vā ete cattāro, sace hi aññe cattāro sammappadhānesu, aññe iddhipādesu, aññe pañcindriyesu, aññe pañcabalesu, aññe sattabojjhaṅgesu, aññe aṭṭhamaggaṅgesu pañhe puccheyyuṃ, tampi bhagavā katheyya. Tiṭṭhantu vā ete aṭṭha, sace aññe sattatiṃsa janā bodhipakkhiyesu pañhe puccheyyuṃ, tampi bhagavā tāvadeva katheyya.
应知:‘根本’、‘依止’、‘住立’,是后后对前前的同义词。其中,‘住立’是指以相应力及亲依止力而成为基础的状态。因为对那些称为‘学’的其他善法而言,或者以离非梵行的相应力为住立,或者以亲依止力为住立。因此他说:‘因为梵行守护……’等。至于‘依所说义’,即依住立、证得、方便之义。为了说明在学处分别中所阐释的离思及其相应法就是学处,他说:‘此义应依学处分别中所说的方法来了知’。因为在学处分别中,离等诸法以非譬喻和譬喻的方式被说为‘学处’。正如所说:显示巴利原文
Mūlaṃ nissayo patiṭṭhāti pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ paṭhamassa paṭhamassa vevacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha patiṭṭhāti sampayogavasena upanissayavasena ca okāsabhāvo. Sikkhāsaṅkhātānañhi avasesakusaladhammānaṃ methunaviratisampayogavasena vā patiṭṭhā siyā upanissayabhāvena vā. Tenevāha ‘‘methunasaṃvaro hī’’tiādi. Vuttatthavasenāti patiṭṭhāadhigamūpāyavasena. Sikkhāpadavibhaṅge niddiṭṭhaviraticetanā taṃsampayuttadhammā ca sikkhāpadanti dassetukāmo āha – ‘‘ayañca attho sikkhāpadavibhaṅge vuttanayena veditabbo’’ti. Sikkhāpadavibhaṅge hi viratiādayo dhammā nippariyāyato pariyāyato ca ‘‘sikkhāpada’’nti vuttā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
其中,什么是离欲邪行学处?当离欲邪行者生起欲界善心,此心与喜俱行、与智相应时,那时具有的对欲邪行的远离、离、别离、离弃、不作、不造、不犯、不越界限、断桥,这称为离欲邪行学处。其余诸法皆与离相应。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī sikkhāpadaṃ? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti somanassasahagataṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ kāmesumicchācārā viramantassa, yā tasmiṃ samaye kāmesumicchācārā ārati virati paṭivirati veramaṇī akiriyā akaraṇaṃ anajjhāpatti velānatikkamo setughāto, idaṃ vuccati kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī sikkhāpadaṃ. Avasesā dhammā veramaṇiyā sampayuttā.
其中,什么是离欲邪行学处?当离欲邪行者生起欲界善心,与喜俱行、与智相应时,那时存在的思、思惟、所思状态,这称为离欲邪行学处。其余诸法与思相应。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī sikkhāpadaṃ? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti somanassasahagataṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ kāmesumicchācārā viramantassa, yā tasmiṃ samaye cetanā sañcetanā cetayitattaṃ, idaṃ vuccati kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī sikkhāpadaṃ. Avasesā dhammā cetanāya sampayuttā.
其中,何等为离欲邪行学处?当离欲邪行者生起欲界善心,与喜俱、与智相应之时,于彼时所有之触……乃至……策励、无散乱,此即名为离欲邪行学处。(《分别论》706)显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī sikkhāpadaṃ? Yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti somanassasahagataṃ ñāṇasampayuttaṃ kāmesumicchācārā viramantassa, yo tasmiṃ samaye phasso…pe… paggāho avikkhepo, idaṃ vuccati kāmesumicchācārā veramaṇī sikkhāpada’’nti (vibha. 706).
于此,因不仅离为学处,思亦是学处,为明示此义故说第二方式。又因不仅此二法是学处,与思相应之其余五十余法,从应学部分而言亦为学处,故说第三方式。实则学处有二:非譬喻学处与譬喻学处。其中,离为非譬喻学处,盖于巴利文中现为“离杀生”等,而非思。而离者恰依此离而于各处远离,非依思远离,然而亦将思及其余与思相应之法引来以明示。是故当知,思及与余相应之法为譬喻学处。显示巴利原文
Ettha hi yasmā na kevalaṃ viratiyeva sikkhāpadaṃ, cetanāpi sikkhāpadameva, tasmā taṃ dassetuṃ dutiyanayo vutto. Yasmā ca na kevalaṃ eteyeva dve dhammā sikkhāpadaṃ, cetanāsampayuttā pana paropaṇṇāsa dhammāpi sikkhitabbakoṭṭhāsato sikkhāpadameva, tasmā tatiyanayo dassito. Duvidhañhi sikkhāpadaṃ nippariyāyasikkhāpadaṃ pariyāyasikkhāpadanti. Tattha virati nippariyāyasikkhāpadaṃ. Sā hi ‘‘pāṇātipātā veramaṇī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ āgatā, no cetanā. Viramanto ca tāya eva tato tato viramati, na cetanāya, cetanampi pana āharitvā dasseti, tathā sesacetanāsampayuttadhamme. Tasmā cetanā ceva avasesasampayuttadhammā ca pariyāyasikkhāpadanti veditabbaṃ.
今为显示不仅此处离等诸法为学处,且阐明其义理之制戒亦是学处,故云“复次”等。或谓:“其中,所谓名身、句身者,此出于《大注疏》。”名身者,即名称之集合,名称施设也。句、词、字皆是名称之同义词,如“名、名业、名说”等(《法集论》1313-1315)。学处之分即所说之离等法,而阐明其义理之语句亦是学处,于此亦可获得此义。显示巴利原文
Idāni na kevalaṃ idha viratiādayo dhammāva sikkhāpadaṃ, atha kho tadatthajotikā paññattipīti dassento āha ‘‘apicā’’tiādi. ‘‘Yo tattha nāmakāyo padakāyoti idaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti. Nāmakāyoti nāmasamūho nāmapaṇṇattiyeva. Padaniruttibyañjanāni nāmavevacanāneva ‘‘nāmaṃ nāmakammaṃ nāmaniruttī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1313-1315) viya. Sikkhākoṭṭhāsoti viratiādayova vuttā, tadatthajotakaṃ vacanampi sikkhāpadanti idampi ettha labbhateva.
“义利”指增长的殊胜、功德的殊胜。然而,由于它们是制定学处的原因,故说“十种原因”,意指十种原因殊胜,因此说“利益殊胜”。或者,“义利”即是义本身,十种义即十种原因。又或者,“义”为果,由果依因而有,故将因称为“义利”;此处亦应作如是解。“善哉,诸天”一语出自《入王宫学处》(《波逸提》494等)。其中说:“凡对我所说生净信者,于彼则有长夜的利益与安乐”,故而说:“凡接受如来语者,于彼则有长夜的利益与安乐。”如《跋陀利经》(《中部》2.134等)所示,指出不接受的过患。若无安乐住,则无共住者,故共住即是安乐住。所谓安乐住,即四种威仪之安适。显示巴利原文
Atthavaseti vuddhivisese ānisaṃsavisese. Tesaṃ pana sikkhāpadapaññattikāraṇattā āha ‘‘dasa kāraṇavase’’ti, dasa kāraṇaviseseti attho. Tenāha ‘‘hitavisese’’ti. Atthoyeva vā atthavaso, dasa atthe dasa kāraṇānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā attho phalaṃ tadadhīnavuttitāya vaso etassāti atthavaso, hetūti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Suṭṭhu devāti idaṃ rājantepurappavesanasikkhāpade (pāci. 494 ādayo) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ye mama sotabbaṃ saddahātabbaṃ maññissanti, tesaṃ taṃ assa dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyā’’ti vuttattā ‘‘yo ca tathāgatassa vacanaṃ sampaṭicchati, tassa taṃ dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāya hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Asampaṭicchane ādīnavanti bhaddālisutte (ma. ni. 2.134 ādayo) viya asampaṭicchane ādīnavaṃ dassetvā. Sukhavihārābhāve sahajīvamānassa abhāvato sahajīvitāpi sukhavihārova vutto. Sukhavihāro nāma catunnaṃ iriyāpathavihārānaṃ phāsutā.
“Maṅkuta”意指失去光彩的状态。“以法”等中,“法”指真实的事理;“律”指举罪与忆念;“师教”指白文成就与甘马语成就。“喜爱戒者”指乐于学处之人。对他们而言,戒是可爱的,故说“为圆满三学而努力者”。“现前者”指生起疑惑者。“被逼迫者”即被压迫者。“僧团行事”中,布萨与自恣虽也是僧团行事,然依“牛与公牛”之喻,应知此处是指除布萨与自恣之外,如具足戒等属于桑喀地谢沙的僧团行事。和合的状态即是和合。显示巴利原文
Maṅkutanti nittejabhāvaṃ. Dhammenātiādīsu dhammoti bhūtaṃ vatthu. Vinayoti codanā ceva sāraṇā ca. Satthusāsananti ñattisampadā ceva anussāvanasampadā ca. Piyasīlānanti sikkhākāmānaṃ. Tesañhi sīlaṃ piyaṃ hoti. Tenevāha ‘‘sikkhattayapāripūriyā ghaṭamānā’’ti. Sandiṭṭhamānāti saṃsayaṃ āpajjamānā. Ubbāḷhā hontīti pīḷitā honti. Saṅghakammānīti satipi uposathapavāraṇānaṃ saṅghakammabhāve gobalibaddañāyena uposathaṃ pavāraṇañca ṭhapetvā upasampadādisesasaṅghakammānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Samaggānaṃ bhāvo sāmaggī.
“纯陀,我并非仅仅为防护现世之漏而说法”(《长部》3.182)——在此处,作为诤论根本的烦恼即称为漏。显示巴利原文
‘‘Na vo ahaṃ, cunda, diṭṭhadhammikānaṃyeva āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya dhammaṃ desemī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.182) ettha vivādamūlabhūtā kilesā āsavāti āgatā.
由此投生天界,或为乾闼婆,或为飞禽;
由此证得夜叉身,并舍离人身;
我的这些诸漏已断尽、已摧毁、已消除。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yena devūpapatyassa, gandhabbo vā vihaṅgamo; Yakkhattaṃ yena gaccheyyaṃ, manussattañca abbaje; Te mayhaṃ āsavā khīṇā, viddhastā vinaḷīkatā’’ti. (a. ni. 4.36) –
在此,三地之业与其余不善法称为漏。而于此处,则指诽谤他人、追悔、杀害、束缚等,以及成为恶趣之苦的种种灾祸,所以经中说:“住于不防护者,即于此自体中获得……”等。如果世尊不制定学处,那么由于行于非法、不与取、杀生等因,便会产生现世的种种不利,如诽谤等,并因此而投生地狱等处,遭受五种系缚、刑罚等大苦的种种灾祸;正是为了防护这些现世之漏,对治来世之漏,经中才如此说。现世,即指当前自体,存在于该自体中的,即是现世的漏,因此说:“即于此自体中获得”。当面呵责是恶名,背后诽谤是恶誉;或者,当面与背后的呵责为恶名,从属的损失为恶誉,应如此理解。为了关闭来路之门:来世是应去、死后当往之处,故称来世,亦即他世,所以说“来世即地狱等”。淫欲等是染着的依处,杀生等是损害的依处。显示巴利原文
Ettha tebhūmakaṃ kammaṃ avasesā ca akusalā dhammā. Idha pana parūpavādavippaṭisāravadhabandhādayo ceva apāyadukkhabhūtā ca nānappakārā upaddavā āsavāti āha – ‘‘asaṃvare ṭhitena tasmiṃyeva attabhāve pattabbā’’tiādi. Yadi hi bhagavā sikkhāpadaṃ na paññapeyya, tato asaddhammapaṭisevanaadinnādānapāṇātipātādihetu ye uppajjeyyuṃ parūpavādādayo diṭṭhadhammikā nānappakārā anatthā, ye ca taṃnimittameva nirayādīsu nibbattassa pañcavidhabandhanakammakāraṇādivasena mahādukkhānubhavananānappakārā anatthā, te sandhāya idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāyā’’ti. Diṭṭhadhammo vuccati paccakkho attabhāvo , tattha bhavā diṭṭhadhammikā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tasmiṃyeva attabhāve pattabbā’’ti. Sammukhā garahaṇaṃ akitti, parammukhā garahaṇaṃ ayaso. Atha vā sammukhā parammukhā ca garahaṇaṃ akitti, parivārahāni ayasoti veditabbaṃ. Āgamanamaggathakanāyāti āgamanadvārapidahanatthāya. Samparetabbato pecca gantabbato samparāyo, paralokoti āha ‘‘samparāye narakādīsū’’ti. Methunādīni rajjanaṭṭhānāni, pāṇātipātādīni dussanaṭṭhānāni.
所谓十四犍度行仪,是指在《行仪犍度》中所说的:客比丘行仪、住者行仪、出行者行仪、随喜行仪、食堂行仪、乞食行仪、阿兰若行仪、住处行仪、温室行仪、厕所行仪、和尚行仪、弟子行仪、阿阇梨行仪、门徒行仪,这十四种行仪。除此之外,有时仅在受到呵责羯磨等时才应行的八十二种大行仪,并非在一切情况下都应行,因此不计入十四犍度行仪中。然而,那些行仪从“我将制定别住比丘的行仪”(《小品》75等)开始,到“不应授具足戒……乃至……不应在地上经行时经行”(《小品》76)为止,所说的有六十三种。此后,“诸比丘,别住比丘不应与较年长的别住比丘、应退回本初者、应行敬悦者、正行敬悦者、应出罪者共住同一覆处”(《小品》82)等所说的行仪,由于与清净比丘所应行的没有不同,不单独计算,而依较年长的别住比丘等不同人分别应行,将其归纳为每一种,共五种,这样总计七十一行仪。在受举羯磨者行仪中所说的:“不应接受清净比丘的问候、起迎……乃至……沐浴时的擦背服务”(《小品》75),这不接受问候等为一种;“不应以戒坏而诽谤清净比丘”等(《小品》51)十种,如此这些共八十二种行仪。然而,在这些当中,有些是呵责羯磨等行仪,有些是别住等行仪,以未取则取的方式计为八十二。但在其他注疏的引用中,稍有增减并不计入数目,所以说“八十犍度行仪”。显示巴利原文
Cuddasa khandhakavattāni nāma vattakkhandhake vuttāni āgantukavattaṃ āvāsikagamikaanumodanabhattaggapiṇḍacārikaāraññikasenāsanajantāgharavaccakuṭiupajjhāyasaddhivihārikaācariyaantevāsikavattanti imāni cuddasa vattāni. Tato aññāni pana kadāci tajjanīyakammakatādikāleyeva caritabbāni dveasīti mahāvattāni, na sabbāsu avatthāsu caritabbāni, tasmā cuddasakhandhakavattesu agaṇitāni, tāni pana ‘‘pārivāsikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vattaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti (cūḷava. 75 ādayo) ārabhitvā ‘‘na upasampādetabbaṃ…pe… na chamāyaṃ caṅkamante caṅkame caṅkamitabba’’nti (cūḷava. 76) vuttāvasānāni chasaṭṭhi, tato paraṃ ‘‘na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ, mūlāyapaṭikassanārahena, mānattārahena, mānattacārikena, abbhānārahena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne āvāse vatthabba’’ntiādinā (cūḷava. 82) vuttavattāni pakatattacaritabbehi anaññattā visuṃ agaṇetvā pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarādīsu puggalantaresu caritabbattā tesaṃ vasena sampiṇḍetvā ekekaṃ katvā gaṇitāni pañcāti ekasattati vattāni, ukkhepanīyakammakatavattesu vuttaṃ ‘‘na pakatattassa bhikkhuno abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ…pe… nahāne piṭṭhiparikammaṃ sāditabba’’nti (cūḷava. 75) idaṃ abhivādanādīnaṃ asādiyanaṃ ekaṃ, ‘‘na pakatatto bhikkhu sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṃsetabbo’’tiādīni (cūḷava. 51) dasāti evametāni dvāsīti vattāni. Etesveva pana kānici tajjanīyakammādivattāāni, kānici pārivāsikādivattānīti aggahitaggahaṇena dvāsīti eva, aññattha pana aṭṭhakathāpadese appakaṃ ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti ‘‘asīti khandhakavattānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“律之防护”者,即戒防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护,这五种防护也依各自应防护的与应调伏的身恶行等,由防护而称为“防护”,由调伏而称为“律”。“断之律”者,即彼分断、镇伏断、正断、止息断、出离断,这五种断也由于舍断之义而为“断”,由于调伏之义而为“律”,因此称为“断之律”。“止之律”者,即七种灭诤法。“制之律”者,即学处本身。因为有了学处的制定,才有学处的生起,所以“制之律”也是由学处的制定所摄持的。显示巴利原文
Saṃvaravinayoti sīlasaṃvaro satisaṃvaro ñāṇasaṃvaro khantisaṃvaro vīriyasaṃvaroti pañcavidhopi saṃvaro yathāsakaṃ saṃvaritabbānaṃ vinetabbānañca kāyaduccaritādīnaṃ saṃvaraṇato saṃvaro, vinayanato vinayoti vuccati. Pahānavinayoti tadaṅgappahānaṃ vikkhambhanappahānaṃ samucchedappahānaṃ paṭippassaddhippahānaṃ nissaraṇappahānanti pañcavidhampi pahānaṃ yasmā cāgaṭṭhena pahānaṃ , vinayanaṭṭhena vinayo, tasmā pahānavinayoti vuccati. Samathavinayoti satta adhikaraṇasamathā. Paññattivinayoti sikkhāpadameva. Sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hi vijjamānāya eva sikkhāpadasambhavato paññattivinayopi sikkhāpadapaññattiyā anuggahito hoti.
凡能助益僧伽之善净,即能助益僧伽之安乐;凡能助益僧伽之安乐,即是为了折伏无惭之人;凡为折伏无惭之人,即是为了善比丘之安乐住;凡为善比丘之安乐住,即是为了防护现法之漏;凡为防护现法之漏,即是为了遮止当来之漏;凡为遮止当来之漏,即是为了令未信者生信;凡为令未信者生信,即是为了令已信者增长;凡为令已信者增长,即是为了正法久住;凡为正法久住,即是为了律的摄持。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, yaṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, taṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāya, yaṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāya, taṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, yaṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, taṃ samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāya, yaṃ samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāya, taṃ appasannānaṃ pasādāya, yaṃ appasannānaṃ pasādāya, taṃ pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāya, yaṃ pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāya, taṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā, yaṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā, taṃ vinayānuggahāya.
凡能助益僧伽之善净,即能助益僧伽之安乐;凡能助益僧伽之善净,即是为了折伏无惭之人;凡能助益僧伽之善净,即是为了善比丘之安乐住;凡能助益僧伽之善净,即是为了防护现法之漏;凡能助益僧伽之善净,即是为了遮止当来之漏;凡能助益僧伽之善净,即是为了令未信者生信;凡能助益僧伽之善净,即是为了令已信者增长;凡能助益僧伽之善净,即是为了正法久住;凡能助益僧伽之善净,即是为了律的摄持。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāya, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāya, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ appasannānaṃ pasādāya, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāya, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ vinayānuggahāya.
凡有助于僧伽之安乐,即是为了折伏无惭之人;凡有助于僧伽之安乐,即是为了善比丘之安乐住;凡有助于僧伽之安乐,即是为了防护现法之漏;凡有助于僧伽之安乐,即是为了遮止当来之漏;凡有助于僧伽之安乐,即是为了令未信者生信;凡有助于僧伽之安乐,即是为了令已信者增长;凡有助于僧伽之安乐,即是为了正法久住;凡有助于僧伽之安乐,即是为了律之摄持;凡有助于僧伽之安乐,即是为了僧伽之善净。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ appasannānaṃ pasādāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ vinayānuggahāya, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ saṅghasuṭṭhutāya.
凡为了折伏无惭之人……(中略)……凡为了善比丘之安乐住……(中略)……凡为了防护现法之漏……(中略)……凡为了遮止当来之漏……(中略)……凡为了令未信者生信……(中略)……凡为了令已信者增长……(中略)……凡为了正法久住……(中略)……凡为了律之摄持,即是为了僧伽之善净;凡为了律之摄持,即是为了僧伽之安乐;凡为了律之摄持,即是为了折伏无惭之人;凡为了律之摄持,即是为了善比丘之安乐住;凡为了律之摄持,即是为了防护现法之漏;凡为了律之摄持,即是为了遮止当来之漏;凡为了律之摄持,即是为了令未信者生信;凡为了律之摄持,即是为了令已信者增长;凡为了律之摄持,即是为了正法久住。(《附随》334)显示巴利原文
‘‘Yaṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya…pe… yaṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāya…pe… yaṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya…pe… yaṃ samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāya…pe… yaṃ appasannānaṃ pasādāya…pe… yaṃ pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāya…pe… yaṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā…pe… yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ saṅghasuṭṭhutāya , yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ saṅghaphāsutāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ pesalānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ phāsuvihārāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ diṭṭhadhammikānaṃ āsavānaṃ saṃvarāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ samparāyikānaṃ āsavānaṃ paṭighātāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ appasannānaṃ pasādāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ pasannānaṃ bhiyyobhāvāya, yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ saddhammaṭṭhitiyā (pari. 334).
义有百种,法有百种,言辞有二百种;
“此《义释》中,有四百种智。”(《附随》334)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Atthasataṃ dhammasataṃ, dve ca niruttisatāni; Cattāri ñāṇasatāni, atthavase pakaraṇe’’ti (pari. 334) –
为显示《附随》中所说的内容,而说“复次,在此”等语。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ vuttaṃ parivāre, taṃ dassento ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādimāha.
其中,所谓“凡有助于僧伽之善净,即有助于僧伽之安乐;凡有助于僧伽之安乐,即为折伏无惭之人”等,依此次第而说,由于将前后相邻的文句与更上的文句相连,如同锁链相扣一般,故称为“锁链理趣”。“作锁链理趣”即是连接。所谓“凡有助于僧伽之善净,即有助于僧伽之安乐;凡有助于僧伽之善净,即为折伏无惭之人”,依此方式,于十处之中,将每一句与其余九句相连接而说,即称为“以每一句为根本,作十次连接”。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyā’’ti iminā anukkamena yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ sandhāya āsannāsannapadānaṃ uparūparipadehi saddhiṃ yojitattā saṅkhalikabandhanasadisattā ‘‘saṅkhalikanaya’’nti vuttaṃ. Saṅkhalikanayaṃ katvāti sambandho. ‘‘Yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyā’’ti evamādinā dasasu padesu ekamekaṃ padaṃ tadavasesehi navanavapadehi yojetvā yaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekekapadamūlikaṃ dasakkhattuṃ yojanaṃ katvā’’ti vuttaṃ.
在“义百”等之中:首先,在锁链法中,应以前前句了知“法百”,以后后句了知“义百”。这是如何的呢?虽然《附随》中只以“凡对僧伽善,即对僧伽乐”等,在锁链法中说明了断轮,但依此理,也给出了结轮的方法。因此,在说了“凡对僧伽善,即对僧伽乐”等之后,应当连结“凡有助于律者,即对僧伽善”而构成结轮。同样,在说了“凡对僧伽乐,即为折伏恶人”等之后,也应当连结“凡有助于律者,即对僧伽善;凡对僧伽善,即对僧伽乐”而构成结轮。按此次第,将其余各句也如此连结时,依锁链法则有十个结轮。其中每一轮里,依前前句而有十法,依后后句而有十义。如此,在锁链法中便成就了义百与法百。然而,在一根本法中,例如“凡对僧伽善,即对僧伽乐;凡对僧伽善,即为折伏恶人”等,仅以一句与其余九句连结。由于前句只有一句,故唯有一法句,而有九义句。因此,在一根本法中,于十处各以一句为根本,作十次连结时,依法句而有十法句,依义句而有九十义句,所以不能成就义百与法百。因此,在一根本法中,不取锁链法所说的义百与法百,而是取其中依十法句与九十义句所成的百句,总为“法百”;为阐明其义,将注释……显示巴利原文
Atthasatantiādīsu saṅkhalikanaye tāva purimapurimapadānaṃ vasena dhammasataṃ veditabbaṃ, pacchimapacchimānaṃ vasena atthasataṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Kiñcāpi parivāre ‘‘yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsū’’tiādinā saṅkhalikanaye khaṇḍacakkameva vuttaṃ, tathāpi teneva nayena baddhacakkassapi nayo dinno, tasmā ‘‘yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsū’’tiādiṃ vatvā ‘‘yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ saṅghasuṭṭhū’’ti yojetvā baddhacakkaṃ kātabbaṃ. Evaṃ ‘‘yaṃ saṅghaphāsu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyā’’tiādiṃ vatvāpi ‘‘yaṃ vinayānuggahāya, taṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsū’’ti yojetvā baddhacakkaṃ kātabbaṃ. Iminā anukkamena sesapadesupi yojitesu saṅkhalikanayena dasa baddhacakkāni honti. Tesu ekekasmiṃ cakke purimapurimapadānaṃ vasena dasa dasa dhammā, pacchimapacchimapadānaṃ vasena dasa dasa atthāti saṅkhalikanaye atthasataṃ dhammasatañca sampajjati. Ekamūlakanaye pana ‘‘yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ saṅghaphāsu, yaṃ saṅghasuṭṭhu, taṃ dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggahāyā’’ti evamādinā ekameva padaṃ sesehi navahi padehi yojitanti purimapadassa ekattā ekameva dhammapadaṃ naveva atthapadāni honti, tasmā ekamūlakanaye dasasu padesu ekamekaṃ mūlaṃ katvā dasakkhattuṃ yojanāya katāya dhammapadānaṃ vasena dhammapadāni dasa, atthapadāni navutīti atthasataṃ dhammasatañca na sampajjati, tasmā ekamūlakanaye saṅkhalikanaye vuttanayena atthasataṃ dhammasatañca aggahetvā yaṃ tattha dasadhammapadānaṃ navutiatthapadānañca vasena padasataṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ dhammasatanti gahetvā tadatthajotanavasena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttāni saṅghasuṭṭhubhāvādīni atthapadāni atthasatanti evaṃ gahite atthasataṃ dhammasatañca sampajjati. Evaṃ tāva atthasataṃ dhammasatañca veditabbaṃ. Dve ca niruttisatānīti ettha pana atthajotikānaṃ niruttīnaṃ vasena niruttisataṃ, dhammabhūtānaṃ niruttīnaṃ vasena niruttisatanti dve niruttisatāni ca veditabbāni. Cattāri ñāṇasatānīti atthasate ñāṇasataṃ, dhammasate ñāṇasataṃ, dvīsu niruttisatesu dve ñāṇasatānīti cattāri ñāṇasatāni.
在“诸比丘,如是当诵”这句中,ca字应以错序来连接,因此说“且当诵”。然而,此处说“当诵”时,如何能有“当学得”等含义呢?所以说“此处的ca字有引出额外义的作用”。将已说之义以外的额外义引出来,称为“引出额外”;此字具有此义,故为“有引出额外义之用”,也就是指“未说的合集义”。因为已经说了“不共住”,所以此处说“坚固作”。显示巴利原文
Evañca pana, bhikkhaveti ettha ca-saddo bhinnakkamena yojetabboti āha ‘‘uddiseyyātha cā’’ti. Kathaṃ panettha ‘‘uddiseyyāthā’’ti vutte pariyāpuṇeyyāthātiādi atthasambhavoti āha ‘‘atirekānayanattho hi ettha ca-saddo’’ti. Vuttatthato atirekassa atthassa ānayanaṃ atirekānayanaṃ, so attho etassāti atirekānayanattho, avuttasamuccayatthoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Asaṃvāso’’ti vuttattā ‘‘daḷhaṃ katvā’’ti vuttaṃ.
猕猴事缘起说解释显示巴利原文
Makkaṭivatthukathāvaṇṇanā
40 第四十:不显句解释。所谓“显”,即明显;其反义为“不显”,即不明显、不普遍、难以理解。对不显之句所作的解释,称为不显句解释。因为显句的解释没有特别需要,所以只取“不显”。“常习近”即多多习近,也就是日日无间断地习近。此处使用现在时语,是依多数情况而说,就像“此处末罗人战斗”等,虽非一切时都习近,但也依多数情况而用现在时语。“游行”即漫游。“于其他”即对于其他比丘。显示巴利原文
40.Anuttānapadavaṇṇanāti uttānaṃ vuccati pākaṭaṃ, tappaṭipakkhena anuttānaṃ apākaṭaṃ appacuraṃ duviññeyyañca, anuttānānaṃ padānaṃ vaṇṇanā anuttānapadavaṇṇanā. Uttānapadavaṇṇanāya payojanābhāvato anuttānaggahaṇaṃ. Pacurapaṭisevano hotīti bahulapaṭisevano hoti, divase divase nirantaraṃ paṭisevatīti attho. Pacuratthe hi vattamānavacananti sabbadā paṭisevanābhāvepi ‘‘iha mallā yujjhantī’’tiādīsu viya bāhullavuttiṃ upādāya vattamānavacanaṃ. Āhiṇḍantāti vicarantā. Aññesupīti aññesupi bhikkhūsu.
41 第四十一:与财物同捉。即连同物品一起被捉。以自身的邪执或诡辩,将意义完整的初制另行解说,而说:“但那是针对人女,并非对畜生女。”“见”指带有染着的看。“捉”指因染着而以手捉取。“触”只是以自身触碰她身体之上;“摩”是比触更重地摩擦;“揉”则比摩更重地以身揉身。“彼一切”即指上述见等一切。显示巴利原文
41.Sahoḍḍhaggahitoti saha bhaṇḍena gahito. Attano micchāgāhena lesaoḍḍanena vā paripuṇṇatthampi paṭhamapaññattiṃ aññathā karonto ‘‘tañca kho manussitthiyā, no tiracchānagatāyā’’ti āha. Dassananti sānurāgadassanaṃ. Gahaṇanti anurāgavaseneva hatthena gahaṇaṃ. Āmasanaṃ attano sarīrena tassā sarīrassa upari āmasanamattaṃ, phusanaṃ tato daḷhataraṃ katvā saṃphusanaṃ, ghaṭṭanaṃ tatopi daḷhataraṃ katvā sarīrena sarīrassa ghaṭṭanaṃ. Taṃ sabbampīti dassanādi sabbampi.
42 “制定更坚固的学处”:在此情形中,为了将随制中学处的坚固与宽松依其关联而分别显示,于是说“学处有二种”等语。其中,凡是有心的学处,其心必定是不善的,名为世间罪。凡是兼具有心与无心之分以及无心的学处,在有心的方面,其心必定是不善的,如饮酒等,也是世间罪。为总摄此义而示,故说“凡在有心的方面,心必定是不善的,名为世间罪”。此“在有心的方面”一语,是就无心的方面而说的。因为纯粹有心的学处,并无以“在有心的方面”来简别的必要。而且,“在有心的方面”应当依对违犯事的了知心而取,不应依对制戒的了知心。如果依据“不可为”的制戒了知心,也说一切学处在有心的方面心必定是不善的为世间罪,那么一切制罪的学处也都成了世间罪,因为知道“不可为”而违犯时,也唯有不善心生起。因为了知世尊的教法而故意违犯者,善心不会生起,只以不恭敬而生嗔心。显示巴利原文
42.Daḷhataraṃ sikkhāpadamakāsīti imasmiṃ adhikāre anupaññattiyā sikkhāpadassa daḷhīkaraṇaṃ sithilakaraṇañca pasaṅgato āpannaṃ vibhajitvā dassetukāmo ‘‘duvidhañhi sikkhāpada’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yassa sacittakassa sikkhāpadassa cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, taṃ lokavajjaṃ. Yassa sacittakācittakapakkhasahitassa acittakassa ca sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, tampi surāpānādi lokavajjanti imamatthaṃ sampiṇḍetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yassa sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, taṃ lokavajjaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sacittakapakkhe’’ti hi idaṃ vacanaṃ acittakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Na hi ekaṃsato sacittakassa ‘‘sacittakapakkhe’’ti visesane payojanaṃ atthi. Sacittakapakkheti ca vatthuvītikkamavijānanacittena ‘‘sacittakapakkhe’’ti gahetabbaṃ, na paṇṇattivijānanacittena. Yadi hi ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti paṇṇattivijānanacittenapi yassa sikkhāpadassa sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva, tampi lokavajjanti vadeyya, sabbesaṃ paṇṇattivajjasikkhāpadānampi lokavajjatā āpajjeyya paṇṇattivajjānampi ‘‘na vaṭṭatī’’ti jānitvā vītikkame akusalacittasseva sambhavato. Na hi bhagavato āṇaṃ jānitvā maddantassa kusalacittaṃ uppajjati anādariyavasena paṭighacittasseva uppajjanato.
此外,在这里,由于“在有心的方面,心必定是不善的”这句话,可以理解:对于无心的戒条,因为不了知事由,所以并不存在“在无心的方面,心必定是不善的”这一决定。因为,如果对于无心的戒条,在无心的方面心也必定是不善的,那么“在有心的方面”这一限定就成了无意义的。当只说“若谁的心是不善的,那即是世间所呵责”时,若不知是酒而饮用的人,以及不知是香、颜料等而涂抹那些物品的比丘尼们,即使没有不善心也会犯戒。因此,除了必定不善的有心学处之外,饮酒等无心学处就不会是世间所呵责的了。正是为了也涵盖这些,才说“若谁在有心的方面,心必定是不善的,那即是世间所呵责”。正因如此,在《小结》和《中结》中说:“‘我要杀这个有情’,却杀了躺在同一地方的另一个有情,由于有情的共通性存在,这同样属于杀生;同样,‘我要饮这种酒’,却饮了另一种酒,由于酒的共通性存在,心必定是不善的。然而,如同以木头的想而杀蛇,不构成杀生;同样,以椰子汁的想而饮酒,心不是不善的。”显示巴利原文
Apicettha ‘‘sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalamevā’’ti vacanato acittakassa vatthuajānanavasena acittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalamevāti ayaṃ niyamo natthīti viññāyati. Yadi hi acittakassa acittakapakkhepi cittaṃ akusalameva siyā, ‘‘sacittakapakkhe’’ti idaṃ visesanaṃ niratthakaṃ siyā. ‘‘Yassa cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, taṃ lokavajja’’nti ettake vutte surāti ajānitvā pivantassa gandhavaṇṇakādibhāvaṃ ajānitvā tāni limpantīnaṃ bhikkhunīnañca vināpi akusalacittena āpattisambhavato ekantākusalaṃ sacittakasikkhāpadaṃ ṭhapetvā surāpānādiacittakasikkhāpadānaṃ lokavajjatā na siyāti tesampi saṅgaṇhatthaṃ ‘‘yassa sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalameva hoti, taṃ lokavajja’’nti vuttaṃ. Teneva cūḷagaṇṭhipade majjhimagaṇṭhipade ca vuttaṃ ‘‘etaṃ sattaṃ māressāmīti tasmiṃyeva padese nipannaṃ aññaṃ mārentassa pāṇasāmaññassa atthitāya yathā pāṇātipāto hoti, evaṃ etaṃ majjaṃ pivissāmīti aññaṃ majjaṃ pivantassa majjasāmaññassa atthitāya akusalameva hoti. Yathā pana kaṭṭhasaññāya sappaṃ ghātentassa pāṇātipāto na hoti, evaṃ nāḷikerapānasaññāya majjaṃ pivantassa akusalaṃ na hotī’’ti.
然而,有些人认为:“沙弥若不知是酒而饮用,则无波罗夷罪,但其心仍属不善。”这只不过是他们的个人见解。因为注释书中仅说到此限:“比丘即使不知情,但凡饮用从种子所起的酒类,即犯波逸提;沙弥知而饮者,犯破戒,不知则不犯。”并未提及“但其心属不善”。又有人认为:“即使是不知道而饮用,酒也不可能进入须陀洹的口中,因为必须依靠达到业道程度的不善心,方能将酒饮下。”这种说法也并不正确。应当知道,这如同菩萨处于母胎时,其母亲所自然持守的净戒一样,是属于圣弟子们“法性成就”的范畴。显示巴利原文
Keci pana vadanti ‘‘sāmaṇerassa surāti ajānitvā pivantassa pārājiko natthi, akusalaṃ pana hotī’’ti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhuno ajānitvāpi bījato paṭṭhāya majjaṃ pivantassa pācittiyaṃ, sāmaṇero jānitvā pivanto sīlabhedaṃ āpajjati, na ajānitvā’’ti ettakameva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘akusalaṃ pana hotī’’ti na vuttanti. Aparampi vadanti ‘‘ajānitvā pivantassapi sotāpannassa mukhaṃ surā na pavisati kammapathappattaakusalacitteneva pātabbato’’ti, tampi na sundaraṃ. Bodhisatte kucchigate bodhisattamātu sīlaṃ viya hi idampi ariyasāvakānaṃ dhammatāsiddhanti veditabbaṃ. Teneva dīghanikāye kūṭadantasuttaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.352) vuttaṃ –
即便在另一期生命中,圣弟子也不会为了活命而杀生,也不会饮酒。即使有人将酒与牛奶混合后灌入他的口中,也唯有牛奶能进入,酒不能进入。好比什么呢?正如鹳鸟在混合了牛奶的水中觅食时,唯有牛奶会被摄入,水则不进入。这算是“起源成就”吗?应当知道,这同样属于“法性成就”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhavantarepi hi ariyasāvako jīvitahetupi neva pāṇaṃ hanati, na suraṃ pivati. Sacepissa surañca khīrañca missetvā mukhe pakkhipanti, khīrameva pavisati, na surā. Yathā kiṃ? Yathā koñcasakuṇānaṃ khīramissake udake khīrameva pavisati, na udakaṃ. Idaṃ yonisiddhanti ce? Idampi dhammatāsiddhanti veditabba’’nti.
若是如此,为何在饮酒学处的注释中说:“在此,由于不知事物本身,故属无心的;但因其必须由不善心才能得饮,故为世间所呵责”?这并无过失。因为此处真正的意趣是:在有心(犯罪)的判定范畴内,正是由于它必须凭借不善心才能饮下,所以说它为“世间所呵责”。正是基于这一意趣,在其余判定为世间呵责的无心学处中,也仅仅说其为不善心,而并未确立其是有心的。也正因此,在比丘尼分别的注释中才说。显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ surāpānasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 329) ‘‘vatthuajānanatāya cettha acittakatā veditabbā, akusaleneva pātabbatāya lokavajjatā’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ? Nāyaṃ doso. Ayañhettha adhippāyo – sacittakapakkhe akusalacitteneva pātabbatāya lokavajjatāti. Imināyeva hi adhippāyena aññesupi lokavajjesu acittakasikkhāpadesu akusalacittatāyeva vuttā, na pana sacittakatā. Teneva bhikkhunīvibhaṅgaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 1227) vuttaṃ –
“观看歌舞表演、高楼学处、僧伽尼衣、妇女装饰、颜料、香粉、由比丘尼等按摩按压”——这十条学处,是无犯意之罪、世间所呵责的、不善心的。显示巴利原文
‘‘Giraggasamajjaṃ cittāgārasikkhāpadaṃ saṅghāṇi itthālaṅkāro gandhakavaṇṇako vāsitakapiññāko bhikkhunīādīhi ummaddanaparimaddanāti imāni dasa sikkhāpadāni acittakāni lokavajjāni akusalacittānī’’ti,
但此处的意趣是:由于这些罪即使无犯意也会违犯,故说‘无犯意’;然而,当有心念时,必定由不善心而违犯,故说它们是‘世间所呵责’且‘不善心的’。因此,为了显示在比丘分别中提到的饮酒、劝酒、嗜酒三条学处,以及在比丘尼分别中提到的观看歌舞表演等十条学处——这十三条无犯意学处的‘世间所呵责’性,才作了‘在心念的方面’这一限定,应如此确定。然而,对于制定所呵责的戒条,以不了知违犯事由的心,在心念方面,此心可能是善的、可能是不善的、可能是无记的。因此,对于它,在心念方面并不存在‘心必定是不善’的决定性,故说其余的是‘制定所呵责’。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo – vināpi cittena āpajjitabbattā acittakāni, citte pana sati akusaleneva āpajjitabbattā lokavajjāni ceva akusalacittāni cāti. Tasmā bhikkhuvibhaṅge āgatāni surāpānauyyuttauyyodhikasikkhāpadāni tīṇi, bhikkhunīvibhaṅge āgatāni giraggasamajjādīni dasāti imesaṃ terasannaṃ acittakasikkhāpadānaṃ lokavajjatādassanatthaṃ ‘‘sacittakapakkhe’’ti idaṃ visesanaṃ katanti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Yasmā pana paṇṇattivajjassa vatthuvītikkamavijānanacittena sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ siyā kusalaṃ, siyā akusalaṃ, siyā abyākataṃ, tasmā tassa sacittakapakkhe cittaṃ akusalamevāti ayaṃ niyamo natthīti sesaṃ paṇṇattivajjanti vuttaṃ.
“阻止”:即阻止违犯的发生。“关闭门户”:即关闭导致违犯垢秽的门户。“截断流”:即截断层层相续的违犯之流。或者,“阻止”:即阻止任何无犯之行的残留。“关闭门户”:即关闭通向无犯垢秽的门户。“截断流”:即截断无犯之行相续的流注,其意为:正在造作犯行。
难道不是这样吗:对于世间罪,当某种随制生起时,是令其变得宽松而制定的?既然如此,为何又说‘对于世间罪,随制将其……变得更严格而制定’?所以,才有“除了增上慢之外,除了梦中之外”等说法。
“除了增上慢之外”这一随制,其制定的理由被解释为‘由于无有违犯’;“除了梦中之外”这一随制,其制定的理由被解释为‘由于无关连’。其中,‘由于无有违犯’是指没有‘恶欲、被欲所败坏’等违犯状态。因为对于上人法,由‘恶欲、被欲所败坏者虚诳上人法’之规定,以欺诳意图而说妄语者,犯波罗夷。然而,此人是以增上慢,自以为证得而虚诳,并非想要违犯学处,因此当‘除了增上慢之外’这一随制生起时,便由于其无有违犯,而成为无罪。
‘由于无关连’是指,即使在梦中存在思惟、违犯的欲望,也由于其心不相关联。因为虽然在梦中有对释放的味著之思,有时甚至有加行,但由于被惛沉睡眠所征服,其心是不相关联的;由于心显示巴利原文
Rundhantīti vītikkamaṃ rundhantī. Dvāraṃ pidahantīti vītikkamalesassa dvāraṃ pidahantī. Sotaṃ pacchindamānāti uparūpari vītikkamasotaṃ pacchindamānā. Atha vā rundhantīti anāpattilesaṃ rundhantī. Dvāraṃ pidahantīti anāpattilesassa dvāraṃ pidahantī. Sotaṃ pacchindamānāti anāpattisotaṃ pacchindamānā, āpattimeva kurumānāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nanu ca lokavajje kāci anupaññatti uppajjamānā sithilaṃ karontī uppajjati, tasmā ‘‘lokavajje anupaññatti uppajjamānā…pe… gāḷhataraṃ karontī uppajjatī’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttanti āha ‘‘aññatra adhimānā aññatra supinantā’’tiādi. ‘‘Aññatra adhimānā’’ti imissā anupaññattiyā ‘‘vītikkamābhāvā’’ti kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, ‘‘aññatra supinantā’’ti imissā ‘‘abbohārikattā’’ti kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Tattha vītikkamābhāvāti pāpiccho icchāpakatotiādivītikkamābhāvā. Uttarimanussadhamme hi ‘‘pāpiccho icchāpakato uttarimanussadhammaṃ ullapatī’’ti (mahāva. 129) vacanato visaṃvādanādhippāyena musā bhaṇanto pārājiko hoti. Ayaṃ pana adhimānena adhigatasaññī hutvā ullapati, na sikkhāpadaṃ vītikkamitukāmo, tasmā ‘‘aññatra adhimānā’’ti ayaṃ anupaññatti uppajjamānā vītikkamābhāvā anāpattikarā jātā. Abbohārikattāti supinante vijjamānāyapi cetanāya vītikkamicchāya ca abbohārikattā. Kiñcāpi hi supinante mocanassādacetanā saṃvijjati, kadāci upakkamanampi hoti, tathāpi thinamiddhena abhibhūtattā taṃ cittaṃ abbohārikaṃ, cittassa abbohārikattā upakkamakiriyāsaṃvattanikāpi cetanā abbohārikā. Teneva ‘‘atthesā bhikkhave cetanā, sā ca kho abbohārikā’’ti (pārā. 235) bhagavatā vuttā, tasmā ‘‘aññatra supinantā’’ti ayaṃ anupaññatti abbohārikattā anāpattikarā jātā.
“于未作之违犯”:指违犯尚未发生之时,例如“比丘们因恶作而不食”等情形。“令松弛”:先解除大众共结之学处,随后于各自范围内,以开许无犯的方式使之松弛。“给予方便”:即开许无犯的方便。因此说“再三行无犯”。若非如此,于媒嫁学处,“乃至暂时的”这一随制生起时,岂非令犯行生起?为何言“行无犯而生起”?故说“乃至暂时的”等。因优陀夷比丘于暂时媒嫁的犯行中而制,故说“于已作之违犯”。成为随制所摄者,即摄于根本制中。显示巴利原文
Akate vītikkameti ‘‘kukkuccāyantā na bhuñjiṃsū’’tiādīsu viya vītikkame akate. Sithilaṃ karontīti paṭhamaṃ sāmaññato baddhasikkhāpadaṃ mocetvā attano attano visaye anāpattikaraṇavasena sithilaṃ karontī. Dvāraṃ dadamānāti anāpattiyā dvāraṃ dadamānā. Tenevāha ‘‘aparāparampi anāpattiṃ kurumānā’’ti. Nanu ca sañcarittasikkhāpade ‘‘antamaso taṅkhaṇikāyapī’’ti anupaññatti uppajjamānā āpattimeva karontī uppannā, atha kasmā ‘‘anāpattiṃ kurumānā uppajjatī’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘antamaso taṅkhaṇikāyapī’’tiādi. Udāyinā bhikkhunā taṅkhaṇikāya sañcarittaṃ āpannavatthusmiṃ paññattattā ‘‘kate vītikkame’’ti vuttaṃ. Paññattigatikāva hotīti mūlapaññattiyaṃyeva antogadhā hoti.
敷具诵品显示巴利原文
Santhatabhāṇavāro
瓦基子事缘起解释显示巴利原文
Vajjiputtakavatthuvaṇṇanā
43 “其住处为毘舍离”故为毘舍离者,因此说“毘舍离之居民”。“住于跋耆国者”为跋耆人,跋耆人之子为跋耆子,因此说“跋耆国毘舍离城中诸家族之子”。“亲属之灾祸”即亲属之毁灭。而此亲属之毁灭乃因王罚等缘故,故说“以王罚、病、死、离别为因”。“财富之灾祸”即财富之毁灭。此乃金银、奴婢等受用资具因王罚等而毁灭,故说“此理亦适用于第二句”。非谤佛者:不以“佛非一切知者”等而谤佛。非谤法者:不以“法非出离”等而谤法。非谤僧者:不以“僧为恶行者”等而谤僧。三十八所缘,即十遍、十不净、十随念、四梵住、四无色、四界差别、食厌想。在此四十业处中,因巴利语未提及光明遍与虚空遍,故除去此二,取余者说之。“所分别之善法”:即依“于此所缘而有此”所分别的近行定、初禅等大善法。“他们的法”:即他们的善法。中夜是比丘消除睡眠疲劳之时分,故未取,因此说“初夜与后夜”。觉悟通达诸谛者为菩提,即阿拉汉道智。以助益故,属于其分者为菩提分,故说“属于菩提之分者,即助益阿拉汉道智者”。四念处、四正勤、四神足、五根、五显示巴利原文
43. Vesālī nivāso etesanti vesālikāti āha ‘‘vesālivāsino’’ti. Vajjīsu janapade vasantā vajjino, vajjīnaṃ puttakā vajjiputtakāti āha ‘‘vajjiraṭṭhe vesāliyaṃ kulānaṃ puttā’’ti. Ñātīnaṃ byasananti ñātīnaṃ vināso. So pana ñātīnaṃ vināso rājadaṇḍādikāraṇena hotīti āha ‘‘rājadaṇḍabyādhimaraṇavippavāsanimittenā’’ti. Bhogānaṃ byasanaṃ vināso bhogabyasanaṃ. Tañca hiraññasuvaṇṇadāsidāsādīnaṃ upabhogaparibhogavatthūnaṃ rājadaṇḍādinā vināsoti āha ‘‘esa nayo dutiyapadepī’’ti. Na buddhaṃ garahāmāti ‘‘asabbaññu buddho’’tiādinā buddhaṃ na garahāma. Na dhammagarahinoti ‘‘aniyyāniko dhammo’’tiādinā dhammaṃ na garahāma. Na saṅghagarahinoti ‘‘duppaṭipanno saṅgho’’tiādinā saṅghaṃ na garahāma. Aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesūti dasa kasiṇā dasa asubhā dasānussatiyo cattāro brahmavihārā cattāro āruppā catudhātuvavatthānaṃ āhāre paṭikūlasaññāti imesu cattālīsakammaṭṭhānesu pāḷiyaṃ anāgatattā ālokākāsakasiṇadvayaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesāni gahetvā vuttaṃ. Vibhattā kusalādhammāti ‘‘imasmiṃ ārammaṇe idaṃ hotī’’ti evaṃ vibhattā upacārajjhānena saddhiṃ paṭhamajjhānādayo mahaggatakusalā dhammā . Teva dhammeti te eva kusale dhamme. Majjhimayāmo bhikkhūnaṃ niddākilamathavinodanokāsattā na gahitoti āha ‘‘paṭhamayāmañca pacchimayāmañcā’’ti. Saccāni bujjhati paṭivijjhatīti bodhi, arahattamaggañāṇaṃ. Upakārakattena tassa pakkhe bhavā bodhipakkhiyāti āha ‘‘bodhissa pakkhe bhavānaṃ, arahattamaggañāṇassa upakārakāna’’nti. Cattāro satipaṭṭhānā, cattāro sammappadhānā, cattāro iddhipādā, pañcindriyāni, pañca balāni, satta bojjhaṅgā, ariyo aṭṭhaṅgiko maggoti ime sattatiṃsa bodhipakkhiyadhammā. ‘‘Gihipalibodhaṃ āvāsapalibodhañca pahāyā’’ti imesaṃyeva dvinnaṃ palibodhānaṃ upacchedassa sudukkarabhāvato vuttaṃ. Yuttapayuttāti sammadeva yuttā.
“意乐”者,即志向。世尊若允许那些不舍学处、住于比丘位而从事淫欲法的跋耆子们受具足戒,即名为废除“是波罗夷,不共住”如是所制之学处,故说:“若世尊……则废除所制。”然而,由于说“若比丘”,故允许舍学处后从事淫欲法者受具足戒,则不名为废除,因为此人并非作为比丘而从事。由于说“来者不得受具足戒”,故允许沙弥位,因此说“然而住于沙弥位者”等。最上义者,即阿拉汉或涅槃。显示巴利原文
Āsayanti ajjhāsayaṃ. Sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya bhikkhubhāve ṭhatvā paṭisevitamethunānaṃ tesaṃ vajjiputtakānaṃ upasampadaṃ anujānanto bhagavā ‘‘pārājiko hoti asaṃvāso’’ti evaṃ paññattasikkhāpadaṃ samūhanati nāmāti āha – ‘‘yadi hi bhagavā…pe… paññattaṃ samūhaneyyā’’ti. ‘‘Yo pana bhikkhū’’ti vuttattā pana sikkhaṃ paccakkhāya paṭisevitamethunassa upasampadaṃ anujānanto na samūhanati nāma. Na hi so bhikkhu hutvā paṭisevati. ‘‘So āgato na upasampādetabbo’’ti vacanato sāmaṇerabhūmi anuññātāti āha ‘‘sāmaṇerabhūmiyaṃ pana ṭhito’’tiādi. Uttamatthanti arahattaṃ nibbānameva vā.
四种律论说注释显示巴利原文
Catubbidhavinayakathāvaṇṇanā
45 “弃置”,即从教法中除去。正如:“优波离,具足五支的比丘不应被诘问。哪五支?不知经,不知随顺经……”(《附随》442)等,这便是从教理教法中除去经与随顺经之后所作的阐明;“无犯,我等师长的学习与遍问如此执取”等,这便是从教理教法中除去师说之后所作的阐明;在婆卢羯车事(《波罗夷》78)中,“具寿优波离如是说:贤友,梦中无犯”等,这便是从教理教法中除去自意之后所作的阐明。正是依于此自意,长老获得了第一之位。显示巴利原文
45.Nīharitvāti sāsanato nīharitvā. Tathā hi ‘‘pañcahupāli aṅgehi samannāgatena bhikkhunā nānuyuñjitabbaṃ. Katamehi pañcahi? Suttaṃ na jānāti, suttānulomaṃ na jānātī’’ti (pari. 442) evamādipariyattisāsanato suttaṃ suttānulomañca nīharitvā pakāsesuṃ, ‘‘anāpatti evaṃ amhākaṃ ācariyānaṃ uggaho paripucchāti gaṇhātī’’ti evamādipariyattisāsanato ācariyavādaṃ nīharitvā pakāsesuṃ, bhārukacchakavatthusmiṃ (pārā. 78) ‘‘āyasmā upāli evamāha anāpatti āvuso supinantenā’’ti evamādipariyattisāsanato eva attanomatiṃ nīharitvā pakāsesuṃ. Tāya hi attanomatiyā thero etadaggaṭṭhānaṃ labhi.
“已说”,是那先长老所说。“句”,是以义而通达者,即世尊以喉等发声之处为依,特别区分而说的话语,称为“亲说句”,乃世尊亲口所说。故说:“‘亲说句’即指经”。“诸比丘,凡我未以‘此不可’遮止者,若彼随顺不可,违逆可,则彼于汝等不可”等(《大品》305)所开示的通相,此处指“味”,故说:“‘味’即随顺经”。由结集法者等师资相承传来之注释书,此处指“师承”,故说:“‘师承’即师说”。显示巴利原文
Vuttanti nāgasenattherena vuttaṃ. Pajjate anena atthoti padaṃ, bhagavatā kaṇṭhādivaṇṇappavattiṭṭhānaṃ āhacca visesetvā bhāsitaṃ padaṃ āhaccapadaṃ, bhagavatoyeva vacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘āhaccapadanti suttaṃ adhippeta’’nti. ‘‘Idaṃ kappati, idaṃ na kappatī’’ti evaṃ avisesetvā ‘‘yaṃ, bhikkhave, mayā ‘idaṃ na kappatī’ti appaṭikkhittaṃ, tañce akappiyaṃ anulometi, kappiyaṃ paṭibāhati, taṃ vo na kappatī’’tiādinā (mahāva. 305) vuttaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ idha ‘‘raso’’ti adhippetanti āha ‘‘rasoti suttānuloma’’nti. Dhammasaṅgāhakappabhutiācariyaparamparato ānītā aṭṭhakathātanti idha ‘‘ācariyavaṃso’’ti adhippetāti āha ‘‘ācariyavaṃsoti ācariyavādo’’ti.
此处因以律裁决为主,故显示与之相应的经,而说:“所谓经,即整部律藏中的巴利”。大处,即大依据,是安立律的大处,依此安立的律,得以无惑地作出裁决。或者说,大因即是大处,是律裁决的大因。又说:“然就义而言,‘诸比丘,凡……’等所说带有意图的巴利,即是大处”。因此说:“凡世尊如是所说……”等。而且这些大处见于犍度中,故他们裁决之论将于彼处显明,此处不述。虽然各处世尊所说的杂教便是注释书,但那是由结集法者先结集三藏之后,依其义释相应而安立诵道,故称为“师说”,因为师长以此说而解释巴利。因此说:“所谓师说……即注释书的传承”。并且,三次结集所登载的佛陀语义释之道,由玛欣德长老携至铜掌岛,其后铜掌岛的诸大长老以锡兰语加以安立,为免异部见解混杂。虽然自意可与经等相合而作思择,然在经等中并未特别指出,故说:“舍经、随顺经、师说”。随觉,即随顺经等而起的觉了。理趣执,即对从经等所得理趣的执持。显示巴利原文
Idha vinayavinicchayassa adhikatattā tadanucchavikameva suttaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘suttaṃ nāma sakale vinayapiṭake pāḷī’’ti. Mahāpadesāti mahāokāsā, mahantāni vinayassa patiṭṭhāpanaṭṭhānāni yesu patiṭṭhāpito vinayo vinicchayati asandehato. Mahantāni vā kāraṇāni mahāpadesā, mahantāni vinayavinicchayakāraṇānīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Atthato pana ‘yaṃ, bhikkhave’tiādinā vuttā sādhippāyā pāḷiyeva mahāpadesā’’ti vadanti. Tenevāha ‘‘ye bhagavatā evaṃ vuttā’’tiādi. Ime ca mahāpadesā khandhake āgatā, tasmā tesaṃ vinicchayakathā tattheva āvi bhavissatīti idha na vuccati. Yadipi tattha tattha bhagavatā pavattitā pakiṇṇakadesanāva aṭṭhakathā, sā pana dhammasaṅgāhakehi paṭhamaṃ tīṇi piṭakāni saṅgāyitvā tassa atthavaṇṇanānurūpeneva vācanāmaggaṃ āropitattā ‘‘ācariyavādo’’ti vuccati ācariyā vadanti saṃvaṇṇenti pāḷiṃ etenāti katvā. Tenāha – ‘‘ācariyavādo nāma…pe… aṭṭhakathātantī’’ti. Tisso saṅgītiyo āruḷhoyeva ca buddhavacanassa atthasaṃvaṇṇanābhūto kathāmaggo mahāmahindattherena tambapaṇṇidīpaṃ ābhato, pacchā tambapaṇṇiyehi mahātherehi sīhaḷabhāsāya ṭhapito nikāyantaraladdhisaṅkarapariharaṇatthaṃ. Kiñcāpi attanomati suttādīhi saṃsanditvāva parikappīyati, tathāpi sā na suttādīsu visesato niddiṭṭhāti āha ‘‘suttasuttānulomaācariyavāde muñcitvā’’ti. Anubuddhiyāti suttādīniyeva anugatabuddhiyā. Nayaggāhenāti suttādito labbhamānanayaggahaṇena.
先总说自意,今再别显,故说“复次……”等。今为说明彼中应行之方式,而说:“然取彼自意而说者……”等。“以义”,即以自己确定之义。“应导入师说”,即应以智令入师说。“一切羸弱”,指由个人自有辩才,自己的见解最为薄弱。因放逸之文本故,师说有时亦可能与随顺经不合,彼不应取;为明此义,故说:“师说亦……唯合者应取”。“唯合者应取”,即如与经相合,应从大处引出义理,此即显示。随顺经虽为经之一分,然经中并无“此可,此不可”等亲口区分,故说:“随顺经较经更强”。“不可转”,即不可拒。“如结集僧团”,即以结集僧团为准量。“如佛住世时”,即以此说为由佛亲说,故如佛在世。若拒经,即拒佛。“自宗者取经而说”,即自宗者取自经而说。“他宗者取随顺经”,即他部派者取自部之随顺经而说。“不作轻蔑或呵责”,即不作“以此何为”之轻蔑,亦不作“此愚者何说”之呵责。“随顺经”,即他宗者所说他部之随顺经。“应导入经”,即自宗者应导入自经。“应住于经”,即应住于自经。如是,其余诸句亦应作义理连结。此即自宗者。他,即他部派者。如是其余。显示巴利原文
Attanomatiṃ sāmaññato paṭhamaṃ dassetvā idāni tameva visesetvā dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Idāni tattha paṭipajjitabbākāraṃ dassento āha – ‘‘taṃ pana attanomatiṃ gahetvā kathentenā’’tiādi. Atthenāti attanā sallakkhitena atthena. Ācariyavāde otāretabbāti ācariyavāde ñāṇena anuppavesetabbā. Sabbadubbalāti puggalassa sayaṃ paṭibhānabhāvato. Pamādapāṭhavasena ācariyavādassa kadāci suttānulomena asaṃsandanāpi siyā, so na gahetabboti dassento āha – ‘‘ācariyavādopi…pe… samento eva gahetabbo’’ti. Samentameva gahetabbanti yathā suttena saṃsandati, evaṃ mahāpadesato atthā uddharitabbāti dasseti. Suttānulomassa suttekadesattepi sutte viya ‘‘idaṃ kappati, idaṃ na kappatī’’ti paricchinditvā āhaccabhāsitaṃ kiñci natthīti āha – ‘‘suttānulomato hi suttameva balavatara’’nti. Appaṭivattiyanti appaṭibāhiyaṃ. Kārakasaṅghasadisanti pamāṇattā saṅgītikārakasaṅghasadisaṃ. Buddhānaṃ ṭhitakālasadisanti iminā buddheheva kathitattā dharamānabuddhasadisanti vuttaṃ hoti. Sutte hi paṭibāhite buddhova paṭibāhito hoti. Sakavādī suttaṃ gahetvā kathetīti sakavādī attano suttaṃ gahetvā voharati. Paravādī suttānulomanti aññanikāyavādī attano nikāye suttānulomaṃ gahetvā katheti. Khepaṃ vā garahaṃ vā akatvāti ‘‘kiṃ iminā’’ti khepaṃ vā ‘‘kimesa bālo vadatī’’ti garahaṃ vā akatvā. Suttānulomanti paravādinā vuttaṃ aññanikāye suttānulomaṃ. Sutte otāretabbanti sakavādinā attano sutte otāretabbaṃ. Suttasmiṃyeva ṭhātabbanti attano sutteyeva ṭhātabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesavāresupi atthayojanā kātabbā. Ayanti sakavādī. Paroti aññanikāyavādī. Evaṃ sesesupi.
难道前文不是已说过“依顺经来说,经本身更有力”,而此处却又说“在顺经中应将经纳入”等?为何如此?这并无矛盾。因为“依顺经来说,经本身更有力”一语,是就自己宗派所持之经而说。在那里,是针对属于自宗见解范围内的经等,而说:“自己的见解一切最弱;比自见解,师说更有力;比师说,顺经更有力;比顺经,经本身更有力。”而此处,是针对其他论师从其余部派引来之经,而说“在顺经中应将经纳入”等。因此,将其他论师引来之经等,纳入自宗的顺经、师说及自见解中,只取相符合者,不符合者则不予采纳——此处所说的正是此理趣,所以前后毫无矛盾。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca ‘‘suttānulomato suttameva balavatara’’nti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ, idha pana ‘‘suttānulome suttaṃ otāretabba’’ntiādi kasmā vuttanti? Nāyaṃ virodho. ‘‘Suttānulomato suttameva balavatara’’nti hi idaṃ sakamateyeva suttaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tattha hi sakamatipariyāpannameva suttādiṃ sandhāya ‘‘attanomati sabbadubbalā, attanomatito ācariyavādo balavataro, ācariyavādato suttānulomaṃ balavataraṃ, suttānulomato suttameva balavatara’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Idha pana paravādinā ānītaṃ aññanikāye suttaṃ sandhāya ‘‘suttānulome suttaṃ otāretabba’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tasmā paravādinā ānītaṃ suttādiṃ attano suttānulomaācariyavādaattanomatīsu otāretvā samentaṃyeva gahetabbaṃ, itaraṃ na gahetabbanti ayaṃ nayo idha vuccatīti na koci pubbāparavirodho.
所谓外部经典,是指未收入三次结集、为大众部等部派所持的《隐秘须大拏》等经典。“吠陀罗等”中的“等”字,应知包含了《隐秘邪道》等,其余应受呵责的经典则不应采纳。“应仅立足于自己的见解”——以此表明,即使是从其他部派引来经典,在自己部派中,自己的见解亦更有力。自宗论师引经而说,他宗论师亦依经而说——这些并非依同类而解说论门;将经纳入经中,看似支离而不明显,但依所述之方法,即可贯通。显示巴利原文
Bāhirakasuttanti tisso saṅgītiyo anāruḷhaguḷhavessantarādīni mahāsaṅghikanikāyavāsīnaṃ suttāni. Vedallādīnanti ādi-saddena guḷhaummaggādiggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, itaraṃ gārayhasuttaṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Attanomatiyameva ṭhātabbanti iminā aññanikāyato ānītasuttatopi sakanikāye attanomatiyeva balavatarāti dasseti. Sakavādī suttaṃ gahetvā katheti, paravādīpi suttamevātievamādinā samānajātikānaṃ vasena vāro na vutto, suttassa sutteyeva otāraṇaṃ bhinnaṃ viya hutvā na paññāyati, vuttanayeneva ca sakkā yojetunti.
现在,为了说明自宗论者与他宗论者之间,就适合与不适合等问题产生争论时应当如何应对,而说:“然而,若此人执取‘这是适合的’而说”等。其中,“应纳入经与顺经中”,是指自宗论者应将其纳入自己一方的经与顺经中。“对方找不到理由”,是说对方——他宗论者找不出理由。“他从经中出示众多理由与决断”,则指他宗论者从自己的经中引来众多理由与决断,加以展示。在说“善哉”而接受之后,“应坚持为不适合”——此句意为:当自宗论者在自己部派中找不到经等依据时,应依他宗论者之言而立。“双方都看到理由的影子”,是指自宗论者与他宗论者双方,都看到了能够成立适合或不适合的理由的相似相。若问:“如果双方都看到了理由的影子,为何又说‘应坚持为不适合’呢?”——“因为触及了律”等。为了让“触及了律”这一说法的意义更加清晰,而说:“基于对适合与不适合的审察”。“应阻断”等的意思是:在难以了知的决断中,若出现适合与不适合的情况,对“适合”的执取应当阻断,而对“不适合”的执取则应当牢固确立。也就是说,应当截断那相续生起的执取适合之流,安住于称为重相的“不适合”性本身——这便是其义。显示巴利原文
Idāni sakavādīparavādīnaṃ kappiyākappiyādibhāvaṃ sandhāya vivāde uppanne tattha paṭipajjitabbavidhiṃ dassento āha – ‘‘atha panāyaṃ kappiyanti gahetvā kathetī’’tiādi. Tattha sutte ca suttānulome ca otāretabbanti sakavādinā attanoyeva sutte ca suttānulome ca otāretabbaṃ. Paro kāraṇaṃ na vindatīti paravādī kāraṇaṃ na labhati. Suttato bahuṃ kāraṇañca vinicchayañca dassetīti paravādī attano suttato bahuṃ kāraṇaṃ vinicchayañca āharitvā dasseti. Sādhūti sampaṭicchitvā akappiyeva ṭhātabbanti iminā attano nikāye suttādīni alabhantena sakavādinā paravādīvacaneyeva ṭhātabbanti vadati. Dvinnampi kāraṇacchāyā dissatīti sakavādīparavādīnaṃ ubhinnampi kappiyākappiyabhāvasādhakaṃ kāraṇapatirūpakaṃ dissati. Yadi dvinnampi kāraṇacchāyā dissati, kasmā ‘‘akappiyeva ṭhātabba’’nti āha ‘‘vinayañhi patvā’’tiādi. ‘‘Vinayaṃ patvā’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ katvā dassento āha ‘‘kappiyākappiyavicāraṇamāgammā’’ti. Rundhitabbantiādīsu dubbiññeyyavinicchaye kappiyākappiyabhāve sati kappiyanti gahaṇaṃ rundhitabbaṃ, akappiyanti gahaṇaṃ gāḷhaṃ kātabbaṃ. Aparāparaṃ pavattakappiyagahaṇasotaṃ pacchinditabbaṃ, garukabhāvasaṅkhāte akappiyabhāveyeva ṭhātabbanti attho.
“众多经与经之决断理由”,是指以众多经典,以及从中引出的决断理由。“不应放弃自己的执取”,是说自宗论者不应放弃自己那“不适合”的执取。现在,为总结上述之义,而说“如是”等。其中的“凡”,是指自宗论者与他宗论者中的任何一位。然而,有些人说:“此处所指的,只是自宗论者中的任何一位。”若如此,那么在“然而,若此人执取‘这是适合的’而说”等所有场合,双方岂不都应只是自宗论者了吗?因为“如是”等正是为了总结前文所说而说的,因此那说法不应采纳。“获得更多理由”——在此,于经等之中,前者相对于后者,称为更多理由;或者,在经等四种之中,获得更多理由者,即称为获得更多理由。显示巴利原文
Bahūhi suttavinicchayakāraṇehīti bahūhi suttehi ceva tato ānītavinicchayakāraṇehi ca. Attano gahaṇaṃ na vissajjetabbanti sakavādinā attano akappiyanti gahaṇaṃ na vissajjetabbaṃ. Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ nigamento ‘‘eva’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yoti sakavādīparavādīsu yo koci. Keci pana ‘‘sakavādīsuyeva yo koci idhādhippeto’’ti vadanti, evaṃ sante ‘‘atha panāyaṃ kappiyanti gahetvā kathetī’’tiādīsu sabbattha ubhopi sakavādinoyeva siyuṃ heṭṭhā vuttasseva nigamanavasena ‘‘eva’’ntiādīnaṃ vuttattā, tasmā taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Atirekakāraṇaṃ labhatīti ettha suttādīsu purimaṃ purimaṃ atirekakāraṇaṃ nāma, yo vā suttādīsu catūsu bahutaraṃ kāraṇaṃ labhati, so atirekakāraṇaṃ labhati nāma.
“善行”:指此人有善行,或因戒而善行。因此说“‘善行’即善行”。“语上升”:意为由语而上升,也就是以言语善加执持。“从经”——对此的解释是“从巴利”。而此处,因为说“所谓经,即整个律藏”,所以“从巴利”应理解为阐明其意义的另一巴利语。“随文”——对此的解释是“从请问与从注释书”。因为随顺巴利语而阐明义理,故请问与注释书称为“随文”。在此,由于注释书被单独列出,所以“请问”是指长老部之说。僧团分裂之前阶段所起的争论,其别名即是“僧团裂缝”。“恶作”:是指对微细的过失,也因见其怖畏而生起恶作。“不违本”:即不改变巴利语。“不逾越”:即不超越。显示巴利原文
Suṭṭhu pavatti etassāti suppavatti, suṭṭhu pavattati sīlenāti vā suppavatti. Tenāha ‘‘suppavattīti suṭṭhu pavatta’’nti. Vācāya uggataṃ vācuggataṃ, vacasā suggahitanti vuttaṃ hoti. Suttatoti imassa vivaraṇaṃ ‘‘pāḷito’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘suttaṃ nāma sakalaṃ vinayapiṭaka’’nti vuttattā pāḷitoti tadatthadīpikā aññāyeva pāḷi veditabbā. Anubyañjanasoti imassa vivaraṇaṃ ‘‘paripucchato ca aṭṭhakathāto cā’’ti. Pāḷiṃ anugantvā atthassa byañjanato pakāsanato anubyañjananti hi paripucchā aṭṭhakathā ca vuccati. Ettha ca aṭṭhakathāya visuṃ gahitattā paripucchāti theravādo vutto. Saṅghabhedassa pubbabhāge pavattakalahassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ saṅgharājīti. Kukkuccakoti aṇumattesupi vajjesu bhayadassanavasena kukkuccaṃ uppādento. Tantiṃ avisaṃvādetvāti pāḷiṃ aññathā akatvā. Avokkamantoti anatikkamanto.
“呻吟”,指不见义理而呻吟。“挣扎”,指颤动。“不能安立”,指不能安住于单一义理。因此说:“凡他人所说,他都随许。”“执取他宗之说”,即如同其他宗派论师说:“甘蔗中,渣滓是尽形寿的,汁液是七日限的,而离此二者,别无所谓甘蔗之物,所以甘蔗在非时也可用”,他也执取此说。“一一毛”,是针对白发而说。“于彼”,即对于此人。“耗尽、穷尽”,义理上是同一回事。显示巴利原文
Vitthunatīti atthaṃ adisvā nitthunati. Vipphandatīti kampati. Santiṭṭhituṃ na sakkotīti ekasmiṃyeva atthe patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkoti. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃyaṃ parena vuccati, taṃ taṃ anujānātī’’ti. Paravādaṃ gaṇhātīti ‘‘ucchumhi kasaṭaṃ yāvajīvikaṃ, raso sattāhakāliko, tadubhayavinimutto ca ucchu nāma visuṃ natthi, tasmā ucchupi vikāle vaṭṭatī’’ti paravādinā vutte tampi gaṇhāti. Ekekalomanti palitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yamhīti yasmiṃ puggale. Parikkhayaṃ pariyādānanti atthato ekaṃ.
他的“师承传承”是善加领受的——在此,“师承传承”指诸阿阇梨的决断传承。因此,他将会说:“正如阿阇梨及阿阇梨的阿阇梨所说,以及圣典与问难所说,应当那样去了知。”“前后关联”,是指“这是前文,这是后文,这是关联”,如此从前后的关联来了知。“师承传承”正是“上座部教说”的同义词,意为“长老的次第”。“两三轮转”,指两或三种传承。显示巴利原文
Ācariyaparamparā kho panassa suggahitā hotīti ettha ācariyaparamparāti ācariyānaṃ vinicchayaparamparā. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘yathā ācariyo ca ācariyācariyo ca pāḷiñca paripucchañca vadanti, tathā ñātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Pubbāparānusandhitoti ‘‘idaṃ pubbavacanaṃ, idaṃ paravacanaṃ, ayamanusandhī’’ti evaṃ pubbāparānusandhito. Ācariyaparamparanti imasseva vevacanaṃ theravādaṅganti, therapaṭipāṭinti attho. Dve tayo parivaṭṭāti dve tisso paramparā.
又,以此三种特相——即前文所说“他的经是善来的”等三种特相。其中,第一特相说明律的善加领受状况;第二特相说明所领受者不动摇、善安立的状况;第三特相说明即使圣典与注释中不存的内容,也能以阿阇梨的言教来决断的能力。“当事情被提交时”,是指当名为举罪或名为违犯的事情被提交到僧团中时,意为被提出。为了阐明已说的内容,他说:“当举罪者与被举罪者已说时,应说者当说。”然而,有些人这样连接:“当举罪者将事情提交,且被举罪者已说时,应说者当说。”另一些人则这样连接:“当举罪者与被举罪者已说时,持律者应说。”但应知,“当举罪者与被举罪者已说时,应说者当说”这一连接才是更善妙的。应观察事由——即应观察每一学处的事由。因为“以草或叶……若来者,恶作罪”这条是在舍堕的向非亲属乞求学处的事由中制定的,而由于偷兰遮、恶说等罪在总目中没有出现,所以说“五种罪中任何一种”。或者说“某一种罪”——这是针对“于时作非时想,恶作罪;于时疑惑,恶作罪”等所说的恶作而言。“在各学处之间”,即包括附随事例在内的每一学处之间。显示巴利原文
Imehi ca pana tīhi lakkhaṇehīti ‘‘suttamassa svāgataṃ hotī’’tiādinā heṭṭhā vuttehi tīhi lakkhaṇehi. Ettha ca paṭhamena lakkhaṇena vinayassa suṭṭhu uggahitabhāvo vutto, dutiyena uggahitena acalatā suppatiṭṭhitatā vuttā, tatiyena yaṃ pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca natthi, tampi ācariyavacanena vinicchinituṃ samatthatā vuttā. Otiṇṇe vatthusminti codanāsaṅkhāte vītikkamasaṅkhāte vā vatthusmiṃ saṅghamajjhe otiṇṇe, osaṭeti attho. Vuttameva vibhāvento ‘‘codakena ca cuditakena ca vutte vattabbe’’ti āha. Keci pana ‘‘codakena otiṇṇe vatthusmiṃ cuditakena ca vutte vattabbe’’ti evaṃ yojenti. Apare pana ‘‘codakena ca cuditakena ca vutte vinayadharena ca vattabbe’’ti evampi yojenti. ‘‘Codakena ca cuditakena ca vutte vattabbe’’ti ayameva pana yojanā sundaratarāti veditabbā. Vatthu oloketabbanti tassa tassa sikkhāpadassa vatthu oloketabbaṃ. ‘‘Tiṇena vā paṇṇena vā…pe… yo āgaccheyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (pārā. 517) hi idaṃ nissaggiye aññātakaviññattisikkhāpadassa vatthusmiṃ paññattaṃ, thullaccayadubbhāsitāpattīnaṃ mātikāya anāgatattā ‘‘pañcannaṃ āpattīnaṃ aññatara’’nti vuttaṃ. Aññataraṃ vā āpattinti ‘‘kāle vikālasaññī āpatti dukkaṭassa, kāle vematiko āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti evamādinā (pāci. 250) āgataṃ dukkaṭaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sikkhāpadantaresūti vinītavatthuṃ antokatvā ekekasmiṃ sikkhāpadantare.
“微细”是就心自身难以了知、轻快转变的迅速转变而言的。因此他说“心轻快者”。“心轻快者”指那些心轻快、转变迅速的人。“那些”指那些违犯。“以彼为事由”指那些不与取、杀人等违犯,以此违犯为事由、依处、原因,故称“以彼为事由”。“净化诸戒后”指以某事为由而生起恶作,对此不作意,而净化其余诸戒之后。由于三十二身分明了且易于运用,所以说“你先作意三十二身分”。然而,若于其他业处已有修习,则应作意彼业处。“业处相续结合”指不使中间间断,以所缘的状态与心长时间结合。“诸行明显而现前”指若是修观业处者,他的诸行便明显而现前。若曾违犯波罗夷,即使他不愿忆念,也会以追悔事为由,一再现前,因此不得心一境性。由此而说“业处不结合”等。“自己知道”指自己知道。这是反身语的业格用法,意指“自己知道”。“其他诸天也知道”指除了守护神之外,其他能知他心的天女们也知道。显示巴利原文
Sukhumāti attanopi duviññeyyasabhāvassa lahuparivattino cittassa sīghaparivattitāya vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘cittalahukā’’ti. Cittaṃ lahu sīghaparivatti etesanti cittalahukā. Teti te vītikkame. Taṃvatthukanti te adinnādānamanussaviggahavītikkamā vatthu adhiṭṭhānaṃ kāraṇametassāti taṃvatthukaṃ. Sīlāni sodhetvāti yaṃvatthukaṃ kukkuccaṃ uppannaṃ, taṃ amanasikaritvā avasesasīlāni sodhetvā. Pākaṭabhāvato sukhavaḷañjanatāya ca ‘‘dvattiṃsākāraṃ tāva manasi karohī’’ti vuttaṃ. Aññasmiṃ pana kammaṭṭhāne kataparicayena tadeva manasi kātabbaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ ghaṭayatīti antarantarā khaṇḍaṃ adassetvā cittena saddhiṃ ālambanabhāvena cirakālaṃ ghaṭayati. Saṅkhārā pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahantīti vipassanākammaṭṭhāniko ce, tassa saṅkhārā pākaṭā hutvā upaṭṭhahanti. Sace katapārājikavītikkamo bhaveyya, tassa satipi asaritukāmatāya vippaṭisāravatthuvasena punappunaṃ taṃ upaṭṭhahatīti cittekaggataṃ na vindati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ na ghaṭayatī’’tiādi. Attanā jānātīti sayameva jānāti. Paccatte cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ, attā jānātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Aññā ca devatā jānantīti ārakkhadevatāhi aññā paracittaviduniyo devatā ca jānanti.
比丘词义分别注释。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhupadabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
“因此”——因为去除了“然而”一词,以不定的方式说出了指示人的“凡”一词,所以是“因此”。“在此”——即在此“凡”一词中。由于“然而”一词仅是语助词,注释者阐明“凡”一词的意义,说:“即谓‘无论何人’。”“所谓无论何人”——即无论是谁、无论哪一位,都称为“无论何人”。“或从事于止之职事者”——即或从事于观之职事者。“于诸戒”——即于平常所受持的戒。显示巴利原文
Tasmāti yasmā pana-saddaṃ apanetvā aniyamena puggaladīpakaṃ yo-saddameva āha, tasmā. Etthāti imasmiṃ yo-sadde. Pana-saddassa nipātamattattā yo-saddasseva atthaṃ pakāsento ‘‘yo kocīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti āha. Yo koci nāmāti yo vā so vā yo kocīti vutto. Vāsadhurayutto vāti vipassanādhurayutto vā. Sīlesūti pakatīsu.
“乞食”——即乞求。无论得或不得——即任何人乞食、寻求、遍求食物,无论他得到或没有得到,尽管如此,因为乞食,所以是比丘——这是此处的意旨。以圣者的乞求——即如所说“圣者们为布施而住立,这是圣者们的乞求”,是以这样的圣者乞求,而非如贫穷者、乞丐、乞讨者那样说“给!给!”的乞求。“以乞食行”——即以捡拾落穗之行。“由于已近住”——即由于已实践。“以扁担带来的食物”——即用扁担挑来的食物。“以价值、触感、颜色的差别”——即价值等失去了先前的本性。在此,失去先前的本性即称为差别。不能洗去的污垢,以及能那样去除的尘垢。“穿破衣者”——这是对穿破衣者的词源解释,因为比丘一词在穿破衣者上已约定俗成。显示巴利原文
Bhikkhatīti yācati. Labhanto vā alabhanto vāti yo koci bhikkhati bhikkhaṃ esati gavesati, so taṃ labhatu vā mā vā, tathāpi bhikkhatīti bhikkhūti ayamettha adhippāyo. Ariyāya yācanāyāti ‘‘uddissa ariyā tiṭṭhanti, esā ariyāna yācanā’’ti evaṃ vuttāya ariyayācanāya, na kapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṃ viya ‘‘dehi dehī’’ti evaṃ pavattayācanāya. Bhikkhācariyanti uñchācariyaṃ. Ajjhupagatattāti anuṭṭhitattā. Kājabhattanti kājehi ānītaṃ bhattaṃ. Agghaphassavaṇṇabhedenāti agghādīnaṃ purimapakativijahena. Purimapakativijahanañhettha bhedoti adhippetaṃ. Dhovitvā apanetuṃ asakkuṇeyyasabhāvaṃ malaṃ, tathā apanetuṃ sakkuṇeyyasabhāvā jallikā. Bhinnapaṭadharoti nibbacanaṃ bhinnapaṭadhare bhikkhu-saddassa niruḷhattā kataṃ.
“具足资具者”,指往昔具足八种资具布施之资粮者。若有人将衣、钵等八种资具,或仅将钵与衣,布施给须陀洹等圣者或具戒的凡夫,并发愿道:“愿以此资具布施,成为来世‘善来比丘’身份的助缘”,当知在具足胜行、得遇诸佛之时,此布施便将令他获得神通所成的资具。“梵音”,指最殊胜之音,或与梵天之音相似之音。“梵行”,指教法梵行与道梵行。应结合“苦的彻底终结”来理解。“Bhaṇḍū”,指剃发者、秃顶者。“Vāsī”,指削齿木的小刀。“Bandhanaṃ”,指腰带。“Yutto bhāvanānuyogo assāti yuttayogo”,意为“他致力于修习,故为具修习者”,即说“具修习者”是精勤于修习之人。为彰显其威仪具足,故说“如六十岁的长老”。“Buddhācariyako”,指以佛陀为出家师与受具戒师者。因在初成道时那段时期,尚无其他受具戒者,故说“于初成道时的一个时期”。“Pañca pañcavaggiyattherā”,即五位五群长老。“Tīṇi satanti”,即三百,为便于偈颂结集而用。显示巴利原文
Upanissayasampannanti pubbe aṭṭhaparikkhāradānūpanissayasampannaṃ. Yo hi cīvarādike aṭṭha parikkhāre pattacīvarameva vā sotāpannādiariyassa puthujjanasseva vā sīlasampannassa datvā ‘‘idaṃ parikkhāradānaṃ anāgate ehibhikkhubhāvāya paccayo hotū’’ti patthanaṃ paṭṭhapesi, tassa taṃ sati adhikārasampattiyaṃ buddhānaṃ sammukhībhāve iddhimayaparikkhāralābhāya saṃvattatīti veditabbaṃ. Brahmaghosanti uttamaghosaṃ, brahmuno ghosasadisaṃ vā ghosaṃ. Brahmacariyanti sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ maggabrahmacariyañca. Dukkhassa sammā antakiriyāyāti yojetabbaṃ. Bhaṇḍūti muṇḍo. Vāsīti dantakaṭṭhacchedanavāsi. Bandhananti kāyabandhanaṃ. Yutto bhāvanānuyogo assāti yuttayogo, tassa yuttayogassa, bhāvanānuyogamanuyuttassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Iriyāpathasampannatāvibhāvanatthaṃ ‘‘saṭṭhivassikatthero viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Buddhova pabbajjācariyo upasampadācariyo ca assāti buddhācariyako. Paṭhamabodhiyampi paṭhamakāleyeva sesaupasampadānaṃ abhāvoti āha ‘‘paṭhamabodhiyaṃ ekasmiṃ kāle’’ti. Pañca pañcavaggiyattherāti pañcavaggiyattherā pañca. Tīṇi satanti tīṇi satāni, gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ vacanavipallāso kato. Eko ca theroti aṅgulimālattheraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Na vuttāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na vuttā. Tatthāti vinayapāḷiyaṃ.
世尊坐在竹林大精舍的香室中,了知大迦叶尊者为己而出家后,为了迎接他,便独自步行了三伽浮他的路程,在多子榕树根处结跏趺坐。大迦叶长老来到世尊跟前,示现了最上的恭敬,三次自陈:“世尊是我的导师,我是弟子;世尊是我的导师,我是弟子。”为彰显大迦叶长老的恭敬殷重,及自身的广大威德,世尊说道:“迦叶,若有全然心净信的外道导师之弟子,对不知而自称‘我知’、不见而自称‘我见’的导师,行如此最上的恭敬,其头颅将如从蒂断落的棕榈果一般,从颈脱落,或裂为七瓣。迦叶,我则是知而说‘我知’,见而说‘我见’。”随后,为令大迦叶长老断除对出身、傲慢、容貌的骄慢,世尊以三则教诫教导他,说道:“因此,迦叶,你应当……”显示巴利原文
Veḷuvanamahāvihāre gandhakuṭiyaṃ nisinnoyeva bhagavā mahākassapattherassa attānaṃ uddissa pabbajitabhāvaṃ viditvā tassa paccuggamanaṃ karonto tigāvutaṃ maggaṃ ekakova gantvā bahuputtanigrodhamūle pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisinno attano santikaṃ āgantvā paramanipaccakāraṃ dassetvā ‘‘satthā me bhante bhagavā, sāvakohamasmi, satthā me bhante bhagavā, sāvakohamasmī’’ti tikkhattuṃ attano sāvakattaṃ sāvetvā ṭhitassa mahākassapattherassa nipaccakāramahattataṃ attano ca mahānubhāvataṃ dīpetuṃ yassa aññassa ajānaṃyeva ‘‘jānāmī’’ti paṭiññassa bāhirakassa satthuno evaṃ sabbacetasā samannāgato pasannacitto sāvako evarūpaṃ paramanipaccakāraṃ kareyya, tassa vaṇṭacchinnatālapakkaṃ viya gīvato muddhāpi vipateyya, sattadhā vā phaleyyāti dassento ‘‘yo kho, kassapa, evaṃ sabbacetasā samannāgataṃ sāvakaṃ ajānaṃyeva vadeyya ‘jānāmī’ti, apassaṃyeva vadeyya ‘passāmī’ti, muddhāpi tassa vipateyya, sattadhā vā phaleyya, ahaṃ kho, kassapa, jānaṃyeva vadāmi ‘jānāmī’ti, passaṃyeva vadāmi ‘passāmī’’’ (saṃ. ni. 2.154) ti vatvā jātimadamānamadarūpamadappahānatthaṃ tīhi ovādehi mahākassapattheraṃ ovadanto ‘‘tasmātiha te kassapā’’tiādimāha.
其中,“tasmātihā”即“tasmā icceva”,意为“因此”,因我知而说“我知”,见而说“我见”,故如此说。ti、ha为小品词。“ihā”指“在此教法中”,ta为连音所增。“Evaṃ sikkhitabbaṃ”,指应依下文所述的方式修学。“Tibbaṃ”,指深厚、广大。“Hirottappañca”,指惭与愧。“Paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissati”,指在前往之前就已现前。如此,他对那些长老便具足恭敬尊重而安住。若有人对长老等生起惭、愧而前往,长老等也会具惭具愧地接待他,这便是此中的利益。“Kusalūpasaṃhitaṃ”,指依止于善、依止于无过失法。“Aṭṭhiṃ katvā”,指将自己以该法作为骨干,或将该法视为“这是我的法”而作为骨干。“Manasi katvā”,指置于心中。“Sabbacetasā samannāharitvā”,指不让心稍有外散,以全部作意之心而作意。“Ohitasoto”,指倾耳谛听,即于法专注而听。“Evañhi te sikkhit”显示巴利原文
Tattha (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.154) tasmātihāti tasmā icceva vuttaṃ hoti, yasmā ahaṃ jānantova ‘‘jānāmī’’ti passanto eva ca ‘‘passāmī’’ti vadāmi, tasmāti attho. Ti-kāra ha-kārā nipātā. Ihāti vā imasmiṃ sāsane, ta-kāro padasandhivasena āgato. Evaṃ sikkhitabbanti idāni vuccamānākārena sikkhitabbaṃ. Tibbanti bahalaṃ mahantaṃ. Hirottappañcāti hirī ca ottappañca. Paccupaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissatīti upasaṅkamanato paṭhamatarameva upaṭṭhitaṃ bhavissati. Tathā hi sati tesaṃ purato assa sagāravasappatissavatā saṇṭhāti. Yo ca therādīsu hirottappaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā upasaṅkamati, therādayopi taṃ sahirikā saottappā ca hutvā upasaṅkamantīti ayamettha ānisaṃso. Kusalūpasaṃhitanti kusalanissitaṃ, anavajjadhammanissitanti attho. Aṭṭhiṃ katvāti attānaṃ tena dhammena aṭṭhikaṃ katvā, taṃ vā dhammaṃ ‘‘esa mayhaṃ dhammo’’ti aṭṭhiṃ katvā. Manasi katvāti citte ṭhapetvā. Sabbacetasā samannāharitvāti cittassa thokampi bahi gantuṃ adento sabbena samannāhāracittena samannāharitvā. Ohitasototi ṭhapitasoto, dhamme nihitasototi attho. Evañhi te sikkhitabbanti ñāṇasotañca pasādasotañca odahitvā ‘‘mayā desitaṃ dhammaṃ sakkaccameva suṇissāmī’’ti evañhi te sikkhitabbaṃ. Sātasahagatā ca me kāyagatāsatīti asubhesu ceva ānāpāne ca paṭhamajjhānavasena sukhasampayuttā kāyagatāsati. Yo ca panāyaṃ tividho ovādo, therassa ayameva pabbajjā ca upasampadā ca ahosi.
以色界禅那而言,以遍为所缘的,称为“色想”。此处以“想”为首来指称禅那,又因该禅那以膨胀相作为似相所缘,所以称为“膨胀想”。沙弥索波迦被世尊问及时,答道:“这两者同属于色界,所以意义相同,只是文句有别。”“Āraddhacitto”,意为心意满足而得喜悦之心。至于通过敬受八敬法等所受的具足戒,将在后文自行详细显现。显示巴利原文
Kasiṇārammaṇaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānaṃ rūpasaññā. Saññāsīsena hettha jhānaṃ vuttaṃ, tadeva ca uddhumātakapaṭibhāgārammaṇattā ‘‘uddhumātakasaññā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sopākasāmaṇero bhagavatā puṭṭho ‘‘ete dve rūpāvacarabhāvena ekatthā, byañjanameva nāna’’nti āha. Āraddhacittoti ārādhitacitto. Garudhammapaṭiggahaṇādiupasampadā upari vitthārato sayameva āvi bhavissati.
所谓“善凡夫等”:由于未能破除众多、种种的有身见等,这些见等故能生起;或者,被这些见等所生起的人,称为“凡夫”。既是善的又是凡夫,便名为“善凡夫”。以须陀洹等为其起始者,即称为“善凡夫等”。此处用“善”一词,是为了排除“盲凡夫”。凡夫实有两种:盲凡夫与善凡夫。诚如所说——显示巴利原文
Kalyāṇaputhujjanādayoti ettha bahūnaṃ nānappakārānaṃ sakkāyadiṭṭhiādīnaṃ avihatattā janeti, tāhi vā janitoti puthujjano, kalyāṇo ca so puthujjano cāti kalyāṇaputhujjano, so ādi yesaṃ sotāpannādīnaṃ te kalyāṇaputhujjanādayo. Kalyāṇaggahaṇena cettha andhaputhujjanaṃ nivatteti. Dvidhā hi puthujjanā andhaputhujjano kalyāṇaputhujjanoti. Vuttañhetaṃ –
“两种凡夫,为日种亲佛陀所说;
一是盲凡夫,一是善凡夫。(《长部注》1.7;《中部注》1.2;《相应部注》2.2.61;《增支部注》1.1.51)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Duve puthujjanā vuttā, buddhenādiccabandhunā; Andho puthujjano eko, kalyāṇeko puthujjano’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.61; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.51);
应以“善慧、善解脱”来连接。在“以戒”等句中,“戒”指四遍净戒;“定”指作为观基础的八种等至;“慧”指出世间与世间智;“解脱”指圣果解脱;“解脱智见”指十九种省察智。此处随其所应而连接。善凡夫唯具戒等前三法,圣者则戒等一切法皆具。“以戒为心材的比丘”等,亦指善凡夫等,故说“即以彼戒材等”。或从不迂回的意义说,唯漏尽者名为心材比丘,故说“或因已离烦恼肤材的状态”等。显示巴利原文
Bhadrāya paññāya bhadrāya vimuttiyāti yojetabbaṃ. Sīlenātiādīsu sīlanti catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Samādhīti vipassanāpādakā aṭṭha samāpattiyo. Paññāti lokiyalokuttarañāṇaṃ. Vimuttīti ariyaphalavimutti. Vimuttiñāṇadassananti ekūnavīsatividhaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Yathāsambhavena cettha yojanā veditabbā. Kalyāṇaputhujjanassa hi sīlādayo tayo eva sambhavanti, ariyānaṃ pana sabbepi sīlādayo. Sāro bhikkhūtipi kalyāṇaputhujjanādayova vuttāti āha ‘‘tehiyeva sīlasārādīhī’’tiādi. Atha vā nippariyāyato khīṇāsavova sāro bhikkhu nāmāti āha ‘‘vigatakilesapheggubhāvato vā’’tiādi.
若有善凡夫圆满随顺行道,具足戒,守护根门,饮食知量,专修警寤,于初夜后夜专修菩提分法的修习而住,心想“今日或明日我将证得某一沙门果”,他也被称为“学习”,即“有学”,故说“与善凡夫一起”。七圣者指四位住于道者与三位住于下果者,这七位圣者。三学指增上戒等三学。或由生于学中而为“有学”。因为圣者以圣生而生时,是生于学中,而非生于母胎。或因有学习之习性而为“有学”。在以人为根本的论说中,“有学的”这些不与其他人共通的、三道果法,以有学的同义语而说。“无学”一词,是在有有学性之疑处,对此的否定,故应知在世间与涅槃中,无学性之不可得。因为名为戒定慧的学,由于已从各自的敌对烦恼中解脱而清净,且不成为随烦恼的所缘,故适合称为“学”;它们存在于八种道果中,因此,如同具足四道与下三果者一样,具足阿罗汉果者也生于彼学中,若如此,则具足彼的阿罗汉也像其他人一样有有学性,便可说“有学的这些”,以及“此有学,即有此学之戒”,故为遮止此义,而说“无学”,以否定如上所说的有学性。在阿罗汉果中现起的学,由于已完成了学的作用,故不再作学的作用,唯以学果的状态而现起,因此它们不配称为“学”,其具足者也不配称为“有学”,也不配说为“有学习之习性”或“生于学中”。然而,在下果中,学由于是斯陀含道观等的亲依止缘,而作学的作用,故配称为“学”,其具足者也配称为“有学”,配说为“有学习之习性”及“生于学中”。因为“学习者,即有学”显示了学未圆满者,而“不学习,即无学”则显示了学已圆满者,并非无学,故说:“超越有学法……漏尽者称为无学。”或者,增长已达之学为“无学”,在此义上,是否有某位住于有学法的圣者获得无学性?即阿罗汉道法,依前说诸义而为有学,其具足者——住于最上道者,是否获得无学性?否,因于相似者而用彼名称。因为阿罗汉果与阿罗汉道,除了遍知作用之完成与异熟性外,无有差别,故可说他们有学即成为最上果法的状态。又,异熟乐比善乐更寂静、更殊胜,故他们法成为增长已达者,其具足者称为“无学”。显示巴利原文
Yopi kalyāṇaputhujjano anulomapaṭipadāya paripūrakārī sīlasampanno indriyesu guttadvāro bhojane mattaññū jāgariyānuyogamanuyutto pubbarattāpararattaṃ bodhipakkhiyānaṃ dhammānaṃ bhāvanānuyogamanuyutto viharati ‘‘ajja vā sve vā aññataraṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ adhigamissāmī’’ti, sopi vuccati sikkhatīti sekhoti āha ‘‘puthujjanakalyāṇakena saddhi’’nti. Satta ariyāti cattāro maggaṭṭhā, heṭṭhimā ca tayo phalaṭṭhāti ime satta ariyā. Tisso sikkhāti adhisīlādikā tisso sikkhā. Sikkhāsu jātoti vā sekho. Ariyapuggalo hi ariyāya jātiyā jāyamāno sikkhāsu jāyati, na yoniyaṃ. Sikkhanasīloti vā sekho, puggalādhiṭṭhānāya vā kathāya sekhassa ayanti anaññasādhāraṇā maggaphalattayadhammā sekhapariyāyena vuttā. Asekhoti ca yattha sekhabhāvāsaṅkā atthi, tatthāyaṃ paṭisedhoti lokiyanibbānesu asekhabhāvānāpatti daṭṭhabbā. Sīlasamādhipaññāsaṅkhātā hi sikkhā attano paṭipakkhakilesehi vimuttattā parisuddhā, upakkilesānaṃ ārammaṇabhāvampi anupagamanato etā sikkhāti vattuṃ yuttā, aṭṭhasupi maggaphalesu vijjanti, tasmā catumaggaheṭṭhimaphalattayasamaṅgino viya arahattaphalasamaṅgīpi tāsu sikkhāsu jātoti taṃsamaṅgino arahato itaresaṃ viya sekhatte sati sekhassa ayanti, sikkhā sīlaṃ etassāti ca sekhoti vattabbo siyāti taṃ nivattanatthaṃ ‘‘asekho’’ti yathāvuttasekhabhāvapaṭisedho kato. Arahattaphalehi pavattamānā sikkhā pariniṭṭhitasikkhākiccattā na sikkhākiccaṃ karonti, kevalaṃ sikkhāphalabhāveneva pavattanti, tasmā tā na sikkhāvacanaṃ arahanti, nāpi taṃsamaṅgī sekhavacanaṃ, na ca sikkhanasīlo, sikkhāsu jātoti ca vattabbataṃ arahati, heṭṭhimaphalesu pana sikkhā sakadāgāmimaggavipassanādīnaṃ upanissayabhāvato sikkhākiccaṃ karontīti sikkhāvacanaṃ arahanti, taṃsamaṅgino ca sekhavacanaṃ sikkhanasīlā, sikkhāsu jātāti ca vattabbataṃ arahanti ‘‘sikkhantīti sekhā’’ti apariyositasikkhānaṃ dassitattā, ‘‘na sikkhatīti asekho’’ti iminā pariyositasikkho dassito, na sikkhāya rahitoti āha – ‘‘sekkhadhamme atikkamma…pe… khīṇāsavo asekhoti vuccatī’’ti. Vuddhippattasikkho vā asekhoti etasmiṃ atthe sekhadhammesu eva ṭhitassa kassaci ariyassa asekhabhāvāpattīti arahattamaggadhammā vuddhippattā ca yathāvuttehi atthehi sekhāti katvā taṃsamaṅgino aggamaggaṭṭhassa asekhabhāvo āpannoti? Na, taṃsadisesu tabbohārato. Arahattamaggato hi ninnānākaraṇaṃ arahattaphalaṃ ṭhapetvā pariññākiccakaraṇaṃ vipākabhāvañca, tasmā te eva sekhā aggaphaladhammabhāvaṃ āpannāti sakkā vattuṃ. Kusalasukhato ca vipākasukhaṃ santataratāya paṇītataranti vuddhippattā ca te dhammā hontīti taṃsamaṅgī asekhoti vuccatīti.
“以最下限的方式”,即指以最低限度的界定。由于具足戒羯磨有增上作用,故说为“应作五众之事”。五人的团体或集合,称为“五众”;或者具足五人之量的团体,称为“五众”;由此应作之羯磨,即称为“应作五众之事”。“诸比丘,无论多少”,即指所有的比丘。“已达至羯磨者”,指适合行羯磨者,即未犯波罗夷、未被举罪者。因为具足戒羯磨是应作五众之事,所以仅五位比丘为达至羯磨者,由这些人便能成办羯磨;其余人则为适合受委托者。“以白四甘马”:在此处,虽白首先被宣说,但由于三遍甘马语在义理与文句上并无差别,而白在义理与文句上与之有别,故将白作为它们的第四,而说为“白四”。在义注中,是随顺文句而说“以三遍甘马语与一次白”,但若依义理生起的次第,则应说“以一次白与三遍甘马语”。在“由于事、白、甘马语、界场、众会的具足”这句话中,“事”指求受具足戒的人,他应被理解为除了未满二十岁者、曾犯终极事者,以及黄门等十一种不能者之外的人。因为未满二十岁者等十三种人,是具足戒的非事;除这些人以外,若另有求受具足戒者,则具足戒羯磨即名为事具足成就。显示巴利原文
Sabbantimena pariyāyenāti sabbantimena paricchedena. Upasampadākammassa adhikārattā ‘‘pañcavaggakaraṇīye’’ti vuttaṃ. Pañcannaṃ vaggo samūhoti pañcavaggo, pañcaparimāṇayutto vā vaggo pañcavaggo, tena kattabbaṃ kammaṃ pañcavaggakaraṇīyaṃ. Yāvatikā bhikkhūti yattakā bhikkhū. Kammappattāti kammārahā pārājikaṃ anāpannā anukkhittā ca. Upasampadākammassa pañcavaggakaraṇīyattā pañceva bhikkhū kammappattā ettakehipi kammasiddhito, itare chandārahā. Ñatticatutthenāti ettha kiñcāpi ñatti sabbapaṭhamaṃ vuccati, tissannaṃ pana anussāvanānaṃ atthabyañjanabhedābhāvato atthabyañjanabhinnā ñatti tāsaṃ catutthāti katvā ‘‘ñatticatuttha’’nti vuccati. Byañjanānurūpameva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘tīhi anussāvanāhi ekāya ca ñattiyā’’ti vuttaṃ, atthappavattikkamena pana ‘‘ekāya ñattiyā tīhi anussāvanāhī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Vatthuñattianaussāvanasīmāparisasampattisampannattāti ettha vatthūti upasampadāpekkho puggalo, so ṭhapetvā ūnavīsativassaṃ antimavatthuṃ ajjhāpannapubbaṃ paṇḍakādayo ca ekādasa abhabbapuggale veditabbo. Ūnavīsativassādayo hi terasa puggalā upasampadāya avatthu, ime pana ṭhapetvā aññasmiṃ upasampadāpekkhe sati upasampadākammaṃ vatthusampattisampannaṃ nāma hoti.
未提及事、未提及僧、未提及人、未提及动议,以及事后安立动议——这五种是动议的过失。其中,未陈述“这位名为某某”的求受具足戒者,名为未提及事。在“请僧团听我说”这一句中,说了“请听我说”而未说“僧团”,名为未提及僧。未陈述“名为某某的求受具足戒者”的戒师,名为未提及人。完全未诵出动议,名为未提及动议。在完成第一遍甘马语后,才说“这是动议”,而后说“僧团同意”,这样在事后宣说动议,名为事后安立动议。如此,远离这些过失的动议,即成就动议的圆满。显示巴利原文
Vatthusaṅghapuggalañattīnaṃ aparāmasanāni pacchā ñattiṭṭhapanañcāti ime tāva pañca ñattidosā. Tattha ‘‘ayaṃ itthannāmo’’ti upasampadāpekkhassa akittanaṃ vatthuaparāmasanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Suṇātu me, bhante, saṅgho’’ti ettha ‘‘suṇātu me, bhante’’ti vatvā ‘‘saṅgho’’ti abhaṇanaṃ saṅghaaparāmasanaṃ nāma. ‘‘Itthannāmassa upasampadāpekkho’’ti upajjhāyassa akittanaṃ puggalaaparāmasanaṃ nāma. Sabbena sabbaṃ ñattiyā anuccāraṇaṃ ñattiaparāmasanaṃ nāma. Paṭhamaṃ kammavācaṃ niṭṭhāpetvā ‘‘esā ñattī’’ti vatvā ‘‘khamati saṅghassā’’ti evaṃ ñattikittanaṃ pacchā ñattiṭṭhapanaṃ nāma. Iti imehi dosehi vimuttāya ñattiyā sampannaṃ ñattisampattisampannaṃ nāma.
未提及事、僧、人,遗漏宣告,以及非时宣告——这五种是随宣告的过失。其中,未提及事等过失,与动议过失中所说的相同。在三遍随宣告中,任何一处未提及这些,即属未提及;完全不诵甘马语,而仅四次宣说动议;或者在甘马语中漏诵、错诵字母或词语,则称为遗漏宣告。在不当宣告的时机,先不安立动议而作随宣告,称为非时宣告。如此,远离这些过失的随宣告,即成就随宣告的圆满。显示巴利原文
Vatthusaṅghapuggalānaṃ aparāmasanāni sāvanāya hāpanaṃ akāle sāvananti ime pañca anussāvanadosā. Tattha vatthādīnaṃ aparāmasanāni ñattiyaṃ vuttasadisāneva. Tīsu pana anussāvanāsu yattha katthaci etesaṃ aparāmasanaṃ aparāmasanameva, sabbena sabbaṃ pana kammavācaṃ avatvā catukkhattuṃ ñattikittanameva. Atha vā pana kammavācabbhantare akkharassa vā padassa vā anuccāraṇaṃ vā duruccāraṇaṃ vā sāvanāya hāpanaṃ nāma. Sāvanāya anokāse paṭhamaṃ ñattiṃ aṭṭhapetvā anussāvanakaraṇaṃ akāle sāvanaṃ nāma. Iti imehi dosehi vimuttāya anussāvanāya sampannaṃ anussāvanasampattisampannaṃ nāma.
若已离开有过失的界相,在如法界内所作,即名为成就界圆满。应参与羯磨的比丘未到场,应送意欲者未送意欲,在场者提出异议——此三种为众的过失。远离这些过失之众所作,即名为成就众圆满。显示巴利原文
Vipattisīmālakkhaṇaṃ samatikkantāya pana sīmāya kataṃ sīmāsampattisampannaṃ nāma. Yāvatikā bhikkhū kammappattā, tesaṃ anāgamanaṃ, chandārahānaṃ chandassa anāharaṇaṃ, sammukhībhūtānaṃ paṭikkosananti ime pana tayo parisadosā, tehi vimuttāya parisāya kataṃ parisasampattisampannaṃ nāma.
名为“具足戒甘马语”的世尊言教,是成办具足戒羯磨的因,故称为“处”;依世尊教导如理而作,故如法无缺的动议与随宣告,按次第而说,即名“处所应”。若不如世尊所说而作,则不能成为具足戒羯磨之因,故非“处所应”。因此说“以应因、应师教”。这应当理解为动议与随宣告的圆满。而“以和合僧”是说众的圆满。“以不动”是说其余的界圆满与事圆满。在注疏中,为将不动的特相合于一处显示,解释“以不动”为“事、动议、随宣告、界、众圆满成就,故具不可动摇性、不可异议性”。有些人则说:“处所应”中的“处”,是指“不得令断手者出家”等师教。显示巴利原文
Upasampadākammavācāsaṅkhātaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ upasampadākammakaraṇassa kāraṇattā ṭhānaṃ, yathā ca taṃ kattabbanti bhagavatā anusiṭṭhaṃ, tathā katattā tadanucchavikaṃ yathāvuttaṃ anūnaṃ ñattianussāvanaṃ uppaṭipāṭiyā ca avuttaṃ ṭhānārahaṃ. Yathā kattabbanti hi bhagavatā vuttaṃ, tathā akate upasampadākammassa kāraṇaṃ na hotīti na taṃ ṭhānārahaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kāraṇārahena satthusāsanārahenā’’ti. Iminā ñattianussāvanasampatti kathitāti veditabbā. ‘‘Samaggena saṅghenā’’ti iminā pana parisasampatti kathitāva. ‘‘Akuppenā’’ti iminā pārisesato vatthusīmāsampattiyo kathitāti veditabbā. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana akuppalakkhaṇaṃ ekattha sampiṇḍetvā dassetuṃ akuppenāti imassa ‘‘vatthuñattianussāvanasīmāparisasampattisampannattā akopetabbataṃ appaṭikkositabbataṃ upagatenā’’ti attho vutto. Keci pana ‘‘ṭhānārahenātiettha ‘na hatthacchinno pabbājetabbo’tiādi (mahāva. 119) satthusāsanaṃ ṭhāna’’nti vadanti.
在“以白四甘马”这一章节中,因事缘而引出,欲将一切注疏中详述的羯磨特相就在其出现之处显示,故说“然而,站在此处”等语,以说明此处不说而于彼处说的用意。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ñatticatutthena kammenā’’ti imasmiṃ adhikāre pasaṅgato āharitvā yaṃ kammalakkhaṇaṃ sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu papañcitaṃ, taṃ yathāāgataṭṭhāneyeva dassetukāmo idha tassa avacane tattha vacane ca payojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne ṭhatvā’’tiādimāha.
在八种具足戒中,善来比丘具足戒、皈依具足戒、受教诫具足戒与答问具足戒——以这四种具足戒受具者,不可能违犯世间罪的学处;而受重法具足戒、遣使具足戒与八语具足戒,唯比丘尼可受。因此应知,此处所取,唯以白四甘马受具者。正如善来比丘具足戒唯最后生者得,皈依具足戒唯清净者得,受教诫具足戒与答问具足戒唯大迦叶尊者与索帕卡得,他们不可能犯波罗夷等世间罪;而受重法等唯比丘尼得,此处所说乃是比丘。故应知,此处唯以白四甘马受具者为所指。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhasu upasampadāsu ehibhikkhūpasampadā saraṇagamanūpasampadā ovādapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā pañhabyākaraṇūpasampadāti imāhi upasampadāhi upasampannānaṃ lokavajjasikkhāpadavītikkame abhabbattā garudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā dūtenūpasampadā aṭṭhavācikūpasampadāti imāsañca tissannaṃ upasampadānaṃ bhikkhunīnaṃyeva anuññātattā ñatticatuttheneva kammena upasampanno gahitoti veditabbo. Tathā hi ehibhikkhūpasampadā antimabhavikānaṃyeva, saraṇagamanūpasampadā parisuddhānaṃ, ovādapaṭiggahaṇapañhabyākaraṇūpasampadā mahākassapasopākānaṃ, na ca te bhabbā pārājikādilokavajjaṃ āpajjituṃ, garudhammapaṭiggahaṇādayo ca bhikkhunīnaṃyeva anuññātā, ayañca bhikkhu, tasmā ettha ñatticatutthena upasampannova gahitoti veditabbo.
然而,在制定遮止的学处中,如善来比丘具足戒等其他方式受具者,也包含在内,因为他们同样会违犯如共宿等制定遮止的罪。既然如此,为何在制定遮止的学处中,却说「在此意义上,所指的比丘唯以白四甘马受具者」?因为只有白四甘马受具者堪能违犯一切学处,并且此法遍通一切时;而善来比丘具足戒等其余方式并非堪能违犯一切学处,也不遍通一切时。在八种具足戒中,唯有白四甘马具足戒、遣使具足戒与八语具足戒这三者长存,其余唯在佛陀住世时方有。也正因如此,在比丘尼分别(波逸提658)中说:「此处,由和合的二部僧众,通过不可动摇、堪任其位的白四甘马而受具足戒的比丘尼,即是此意义下所指的比丘尼。」这是将遣使具足戒与八语具足戒受具者含摄在内后,唯指由二部僧众通过白四甘马受具的比丘尼,而不含摄敬受八重法受具者,因为她的受戒方式是特定的,不遍通一切时。敬受八重法具足戒唯为摩诃波阇波提所开许,是特定的。因此应理解为:显示巴利原文
Paṇṇattivajjesu pana sikkhāpadesu aññepi ehibhikkhūpasampadāya upasampannādayo saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Tepi hi sahaseyyādipaṇṇattivajjaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjantiyeva. Yadi evaṃ paṇṇattivajjesupi sikkhāpadesu ‘‘ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippeto bhikkhū’’ti ñatticatuttheneva kammena upasampanno kasmā vuttoti? Sabbasikkhāpadavītikkamārahattā sabbakālikattā ca. Ehibhikkhūpasampadādayo hi na sabbasikkhāpadavītikkamārahā asabbakālikā ca. Tathā hi aṭṭhasu upasampadāsu ñatticatutthakammūpasampadā dūtenūpasampadā aṭṭhavācikūpasampadāti imā tissoyeva thāvarā, sesā buddhe dharamāneyeva ahesuṃ. Teneva ca bhikkhunīvibhaṅgepi (pāci. 658) ‘‘tatra yāyaṃ bhikkhunī samaggena ubhatosaṅghena ñatticatutthena kammena akuppena ṭhānārahena upasampannā, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā bhikkhunī’’ti dūtenūpasampadāya aṭṭhavācikūpasampadāya ca upasampannaṃ antokatvā ubhatosaṅghena ñatticatuttheneva kammena upasampannā bhikkhunī vuttā, na garudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadāya upasampannā tassā upasampadāya pāṭipuggalikabhāvato asabbakālikattā. Garudhammapaṭiggahaṇūpasampadā hi mahāpajāpatiyā eva anuññātattā pāṭipuggalikāti, tasmā sabbasikkhāpadavītikkamārahaṃ sabbakālikāya ñatticatutthakammūpasampadāya upasampannameva gahetvā sabbasikkhāpadāni paññattānīti gahetabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ paṇṇattivajjesu sikkhāpadesu ca ehibhikkhūpasampannādīnampi saṅgaho kathaṃ viññāyatīti? Atthato āpannattā. Tathā hi ‘‘dve puggalā abhabbā āpattiṃ āpajjituṃ buddhā ca paccekabuddhā ca, dve puggalā bhabbā āpattiṃ āpajjituṃ bhikkhū ca bhikkhuniyo cā’’ti (pari. 322) sāmaññato vuttattā ehibhikkhūpasampannādayopi asañcicca assatiyā acittakaṃ paṇṇattivajjaṃ sahaseyyādiāpattiṃ āpajjantīti atthato āpannanti ayamettha sāro. Yaṃ panettha ito aññathā kenaci papañcitaṃ, na taṃ sārato paccetabbaṃ.
「依词源」者,即依语词解释而说。「依表达」者,即依惯用言说而说。「在甘马语尚未生起时」者,即在白四甘马语尚未确立之时。「依功德」者,即依与戒等彼彼功德相应而说。在此,应知「比丘」的词源解释是:他破坏诸恶不善法,故称比丘。显示巴利原文
Niruttivasenāti nibbacanavasena. Abhilāpavasenāti vohāravasena. Anuppannāya kammavācāyāti anuppannāya ñatticatutthakammavācāya. Guṇavasenāti sīlāditaṃtaṃguṇayogato. Ettha ca bhindati pāpake akusale dhammeti bhikkhūti nibbacanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
学与共同生活之词义分别注释显示巴利原文
Sikkhāsājīvapadabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
「应学」者,谓应修习。「最上」者,谓殊胜。当有增上戒等时,亦应具备戒等。正如依一把较小尺寸的伞或旗,而称超过尺寸者为「过大的伞」「过大的旗」,此处亦应作意:「依不超胜的戒,而应具备增上戒;同样,依不超胜的心与慧,而应具备增上心与增上慧。」为依自性阐明戒等,故说:「在此,什么是戒?」等。八支戒已包含在十支戒中,故不另列出,仅说「五支戒、十支戒」等。别解脱律仪戒,指依行持与遮止二种方式,包含于律藏中的学处戒。此戒能护持守者,令其解脱恶趣等苦,故称「别解脱」。防护为「律仪」,即不以身语违犯。别解脱即是律仪,故为「别解脱律仪」。此本身即是戒,故为「别解脱律仪戒」。显示巴利原文
Sikkhitabbāti āsevitabbā. Uttamanti visiṭṭhaṃ. Adhisīlādīsu vijjamānesu sīlādīhipi bhavitabbaṃ. Yathā hi omakatarappamāṇaṃ chattaṃ vā dhajaṃ vā upādāya atirekappamāṇaṃ ‘‘atichattaṃ atidhajo’’ti vuccati, evamihāpi ‘‘anukkaṭṭhasīlaṃ upādāya adhisīlena bhavitabbaṃ, tathā anukkaṭṭhaṃ cittaṃ paññañca upādāya adhicittena adhipaññāya ca bhavitabba’’nti manasi katvā sīlādiṃ sarūpato vibhāvetukāmo ‘‘katamaṃ panettha sīla’’ntiādimāha. Aṭṭhaṅgasīlaṃ dasaṅgasīlesveva antogadhattā visuṃ aggahetvā ‘‘pañcaṅgadasaṅgasīla’’nti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlanti cārittavārittavasena duvidhaṃ vinayapiṭakapariyāpannaṃ sikkhāpadasīlaṃ. Tañhi yo naṃ pāti rakkhati, taṃ mokkheti moceti āpāyikādīhi dukkhehīti pātimokkhanti vuccati. Saṃvaraṇaṃ saṃvaro , kāyavācāhi avītikkamo. Pātimokkhameva saṃvaro pātimokkhasaṃvaro. So eva sīlanaṭṭhena sīlanti pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ.
另一种解释:因烦恼强盛、易于造恶、难于行善,而屡屡堕于恶趣,故为「堕者」,即凡夫。或因无常性,于诸有中被业力之流抛掷,如机器般不安住而流转,故具「行」性,名为「堕者」;或因死亡,于种种众生聚落中,身命坏灭,故为「堕者」,指众生相续,或即心本身。此别解脱能令彼堕者从轮回之苦中解脱,故为「别解脱」。以心解脱故,众生得名解脱。如经中说:「由心清净而得清净」,以及「心无取著,从诸漏中解脱」。显示巴利原文
Aparo nayo (udā. aṭṭha. 31; itivu. aṭṭha. 97) – kilesānaṃ balavabhāvato pāpakiriyāya sukarabhāvato puññakiriyāya ca dukkarabhāvato bahukkhattuṃ apāyesu patanasīloti pātī, puthujjano. Aniccatāya vā bhavābhavādīsu kammavegakkhitto ghaṭiyantaṃ viya anavaṭṭhānena paribbhamanato gamanasīloti pātī, maraṇavasena vā tamhi tamhi sattanikāye attabhāvassa patanasīloti pātī, sattasantāno, cittameva vā. Taṃ pātinaṃ saṃsāradukkhato mokkhetīti pātimokkhaṃ. Cittassa hi vimokkhena satto vimuttoti vuccati. Vuttañhi ‘‘cittavodānā visujjhantī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.100), ‘‘anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimutta’’nti (mahāva. 28) ca.
或者,以无明等为因,在轮回中堕、行、转起,故名为「堕」。如经中说:「为无明所覆、为渴爱所缚的众生,流转轮回。」那「堕者」众生,由此而从渴爱等三种杂染中解脱,故称「别解脱」。应知此复合词的构成,如同「喉黑」等词。显示巴利原文
Atha vā avijjādinā hetunā saṃsāre patati gacchati pavattatīti pāti. ‘‘Avijjānīvaraṇānaṃ sattānaṃ taṇhāsaṃyojanānaṃ sandhāvataṃ saṃsarata’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.124) hi vuttaṃ. Tassa pātino sattassa taṇhādisaṃkilesattayato mokkho etenāti pātimokkho. ‘‘Kaṇṭhekāḷo’’tiādīnaṃ viyassa samāsasiddhi veditabbā.
或者,“堕”意指令堕、令没于诸苦;此“堕者”即是心。正如经中所说:“世间为心所引导,为心所牵引。”那个“堕者”由此而得解脱,故名“别解脱”。或者,由此而堕入恶趣之苦与轮回之苦,故称为“堕”,即渴爱杂染。正如经中所说:“渴爱产生人,人以渴爱为第二伴侣”等。从此“堕”中解脱,故名“别解脱”。显示巴利原文
Atha vā pāteti vinipāteti dukkhehīti pāti, cittaṃ. Vuttañhi ‘‘cittena nīyati loko, cittena parikassatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.62). Tassa pātino mokkho etenāti pātimokkho. Patati vā etena apāyadukkhe saṃsāradukkhe cāti pāti, taṇhāsaṃkileso. Vuttañhi ‘‘taṇhā janeti purisaṃ (saṃ. ni. 1.55-57), taṇhādutiyo puriso’’ti (a. ni. 4.9; itivu. 15, 105) ca ādi. Tato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkho.
或者,于其中堕落,故称为“堕”,即内六入处与外六入处。正如经中所说:“世间于六处生起,于六处作亲昵。”从此称为内六入处与外六入处的“堕”中解脱,故名“别解脱”。显示巴利原文
Atha vā patati etthāti pāti, cha ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni. Vuttañhi ‘‘chasu loko samuppanno, chasu kubbati santhava’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.70; su. ni. 171). Tato chaajjhattikabāhirāyatanasaṅkhātato pātito mokkhoti pātimokkho.
或者,具有堕落与没灭,故称为“堕者”,即轮回。从中解脱,故名“别解脱”。显示巴利原文
Atha vā pāto vinipāto assa atthīti pātī, saṃsāro. Tato mokkhoti pātimokkho.
再者,由于是一切世界之主的缘故,世尊被称为“主”(pati);由此而解脱,故称为“解脱”(mokkho);因是主(pati)的解脱(mokkho),依此而施设,故为“主解脱”(patimokkho);主解脱即是“巴帝摩卡”(pātimokkho)。又或,因是一切功德之根本,以最上义而为“主”(pati),且依前说之义而为“解脱”(mokkho),故为“主解脱”(patimokkho);主解脱即是“巴帝摩卡”。正如所说:“巴帝摩卡者,此是入口,此是首要入口”(《大品》135),于此有详细说明。显示巴利原文
Atha vā sabbalokādhipatibhāvato dhammissaro bhagavā patīti vuccati, muccati etenāti mokkho, patino mokkho tena paññattattāti patimokkho, patimokkho eva pātimokkho. Sabbaguṇānaṃ vā mūlabhāvato uttamaṭṭhena pati ca so yathāvuttena atthena mokkho cāti patimokkho, patimokkho eva pātimokkho. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘pātimokkhanti mukhametaṃ pamukhameta’’nti (mahāva. 135) vitthāro.
再者,“pa”表示方式(pakāra),“ati”是表示极尽义的助词,因此,以种种方式极尽解脱,故为“巴帝摩卡”(pātimokkho)。因为此戒自身,当与定相应、与慧相应时,以彼分断、镇伏断及正断的方式,极尽地解脱,故为“巴帝摩卡”。显示巴利原文
Atha vā pa-iti pakāre, atīti accantatthe nipāto, tasmā pakārehi accantaṃ mokkhetīti pātimokkho. Idañhi sīlaṃ sayaṃ tadaṅgavasena samādhisahitaṃ paññāsahitañca vikkhambhanavasena samucchedavasena ca accantaṃ mokkheti mocetīti pātimokkho.
或者,“各别、各别解脱”故为“主解脱”(patimokkho),即从各别、各别的违犯之过失中,各别地解脱之义;主解脱即是“巴帝摩卡”。或者,解脱即涅槃,为彼涅槃之影像,故为“主解脱”(patimokkho)。因为别解脱律仪,犹如太阳将升起的曙光,是涅槃生起的先兆且与其相似,因能相应地熄灭烦恼;主解脱即是“巴帝摩卡”。或者,转向而面向解脱,故为“主解脱”(patimokkha);主解脱即是“巴帝摩卡”。于此,先应如此了知“巴帝摩卡”一词的含义。显示巴利原文
Pati pati mokkhoti vā patimokkho, tamhā tamhā vītikkamadosato paccekaṃ mokkhetīti attho, patimokkho eva pātimokkho. Mokkho vā nibbānaṃ, tassa mokkhassa paṭibimbabhūtoti patimokkho. Sīlasaṃvaro hi sūriyassa aruṇuggamanaṃ viya nibbānassa udayabhūto tappaṭibhāgo ca yathārahaṃ kilesanibbāpanato, patimokkhoyeva pātimokkho. Pativattati mokkhābhimukhanti vā patimokkhaṃ, patimokkhameva pātimokkhanti evaṃ tāvettha pātimokkhasaddassa attho veditabbo.
由此能防护、关闭,故称为‘律仪’(saṃvaro);巴帝摩卡本身就是律仪,故为‘巴帝摩卡律仪’(pātimokkhasaṃvaro)。它即是戒,也就是‘巴帝摩卡律仪戒’(pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ);从义理上说,则是于种种应避免违犯处的远离及思心所。显示巴利原文
Saṃvarati pidahati etenāti saṃvaro, pātimokkhameva saṃvaro pātimokkhasaṃvaro. So eva sīlaṃ pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ, atthato pana tato tato vītikkamitabbato viratiyo ceva cetanā ca.
之所以称为‘增上戒’(adhisīla),是因为它无遗地成为身、语律仪的状态,并且是道戒的足处(近因),所以巴帝摩卡律仪戒是更上、殊胜的戒,故称‘增上戒’。‘Pajjotānaṃ’(诸光明)……难道独觉佛们不也是依于法而具备巴帝摩卡律仪戒吗?既然如此,为何限定说‘唯佛出世时方有流布,非离佛出世’呢?因此说:‘并非除去那施设……’等等。虽然独觉佛们亦具备巴帝摩卡律仪戒,但并非依于他们而得以广行流布,这是意旨。‘对于此事、此违犯,有此名称’的施设,非他人所能及,唯是诸佛的境界,是诸佛的力量,故说:‘然而唯诸佛……’等。世间戒被称为增上戒,是就权说而言;为显示其实说,则说:‘比巴帝摩卡律仪更上的,即与道果相应的戒,才是增上戒。’所谓‘成就此的比丘’,是针对居士中的须陀洹可能发生对妻子的违犯而说的。因为他们确实与妻子儿女共住于家中。显示巴利原文
Adhisīlanti vuccatīti anavasesato kāyikavācasikasaṃvarabhāvato ca maggasīlassa padaṭṭhānabhāvato ca pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ adhikaṃ visiṭṭhaṃ sīlaṃ adhisīlanti vuccati. Pajjotānanti ālokānaṃ. Nanu ca paccekabuddhāpi dhammatāvasena pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlena samannāgatāva honti, evaṃ sati kasmā ‘‘buddhuppādeyeva pavattati, na vinā buddhuppādā’’ti niyametvā vuttanti āha – ‘‘na hi taṃ paññattiṃ uddharitvā’’tiādi. Kiñcāpi paccekabuddhā pātimokkhasaṃvarasampannāgatā honti, na pana tesaṃ vasena vitthāritaṃ hutvā pavattatīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Imasmiṃ vatthusmiṃ imasmiṃ vītikkame idaṃ nāma hotī’’ti paññapanaṃ aññesaṃ avisayo, buddhānaṃyeva esa visayo, buddhānaṃ balanti āha – ‘‘buddhāyeva panā’’tiādi. Lokiyasīlassa adhisīlabhāvo pariyāyenāti nippariyāyameva taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pātimokkhasaṃvaratopi ca maggaphalasampayuttameva sīlaṃ adhisīla’’nti vuttaṃ. Na hi taṃ samāpanno bhikkhūti gahaṭṭhesu sotāpannānaṃ sadāravītikkamasambhavato vuttaṃ. Tathā hi te saputtadārā agāraṃ ajjhāvasanti.
“令他人受持与自受持”:令他人受持,以及自己受持。“增上心”(adhicittaṃ)被称为:由于是道定的近依止的状态,故被称为“增上心”。“非离佛出世”:虽然独觉佛们确实有作为观近因的八等至心,但他们不能令他人于此受持,故非依于他们而广为流布、流转,这是意旨。关于观慧的增上慧性成就中,“非离佛出世”一语,也应知是依此意旨而说。世间心的增上心性,是就权说而言;为了显示其就实说,而说:“比那更上的,即道果心才是增上心。”然而,依此注释书之语“但此(世间心)于此非所意许”,可知依世间心而说的增上心学,于此也是所意许的。而“成就此的比丘,不行淫欲法”一语,则导致“成就世间增上心者,行淫欲法”的过失。在增上慧的解释中,说了“比那更上的,即道果慧才是增上慧”之后,又说“但彼(道果慧)于此非所意许。因为成就此的比丘,不行淫欲法”,由此可知,依世间慧而说的增上慧学,于此也是所意许的,且注释书中允许成就彼者行淫欲法。然而,这一切与“其中,此增上戒学,是于此义中所意许之学”的这段圣典不相符合。因为这段圣典阐明:唯增上戒学是于此所意许的,而非其他。因此,圣典与注释书的意旨应如此了知:当成就世间增上心、增上慧者,依于那样的缘而生起“我将行淫欲法”的心时,可能从那增上心、增上慧退失,因此,成就那两者者,不可能行淫欲法,故圣典中唯说了增上戒学。因为增上戒学,只要不造作违犯,就仍是成就的状态。并非仅凭心生起,巴帝摩卡防护戒就称为已破。而在注释书中,则说:比丘即使从世间增上心、增上慧退失,也可能有时行淫欲法,故不否定那两者;但由于道果法有不可动摇的本质,成就彼的比丘,绝不可能从彼退失而行淫欲法,故应知唯对出世间增上心、增上慧作了否定。显示巴利原文
Samādāpanaṃsamādānañcāti aññesaṃ samādāpanaṃ sayaṃ samādānañca. Adhicittanti vuccatīti maggasamādhissa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato adhicittanti vuccati. Na vinā buddhuppādāti kiñcāpi paccekabuddhānaṃ vipassanāpādakaṃ aṭṭhasamāpatticittaṃ hotiyeva, na pana te tattha aññe samādāpetuṃ sakkontīti na tesaṃ vasena vitthāritaṃ hutvā pavattatīti adhippāyo. Vipassanāpaññāyapi adhipaññatāsādhane ‘‘na vinā buddhuppādā’’ti vacanaṃ imināva adhippāyena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Lokiyacittassa adhicittatā pariyāyenāti nippariyāyameva taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatopi ca maggaphalacittameva adhicitta’’nti āha. Taṃ pana idha anadhippetanti iminā aṭṭhakathāvacanena lokiyacittassa vasena adhicittasikkhāpi idha adhippetāti viññāyati. Na hi taṃ samāpanno bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevatīti ca iminā lokiyaadhicittaṃ samāpanno methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevatīti āpannaṃ. Adhipaññāniddese ca ‘‘tatopi ca maggaphalapaññāva adhipaññā’’ti vatvā ‘‘sā pana idha anadhippetā. Na hi taṃ samāpanno bhikkhu methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevatī’’ti vuttattā lokiyapaññāvasena adhipaññāsikkhāyapi idhādhippetabhāvo taṃ samāpannassa methunadhammapaṭisevanañca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ anuññātanti viññāyati. Idañca sabbaṃ ‘‘tatra yāyaṃ adhisīlasikkhā, ayaṃ imasmiṃ atthe adhippetā sikkhā’’ti imāya pāḷiyā na sameti. Ayañhi pāḷi adhisīlasikkhāva idha adhippetā, na itarāti dīpeti, tasmā pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathāya ca evamadhippāyo veditabbo – lokiyaadhicittaadhipaññāsamāpannassa tathārūpapaccayaṃ paṭicca ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevissāmī’’ti citte uppanne tato adhicittato adhipaññato ca parihāni sambhavatīti taṃ dvayaṃ samāpannena na sakkā methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitunti pāḷiyaṃ adhisīlasikkhāva vuttā. Adhisīlasikkhañhi yāva vītikkamaṃ na karoti, tāva samāpannova hoti. Na hi cittuppādamattena pātimokkhasaṃvarasīlaṃ bhinnaṃ nāma hotīti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana lokiyaadhicittato adhipaññato ca parihāyitvāpi bhikkhuno methunadhammapaṭisevanaṃ kadāci bhaveyyāti taṃ dvayaṃ appaṭikkhipitvā maggaphaladhammānaṃ akuppasabhāvattā taṃ samāpannassa bhikkhuno tato parihāyitvā methunadhammapaṭisevanaṃ nāma na kadāci sambhavatīti lokuttarādhicittaadhipaññānaṃyeva paṭikkhepo katoti veditabbo.
“有布施,有供养”等教法的流传——以此为:显示巴利原文
Atthi dinnaṃ atthi yiṭṭhantiādinayappavattanti iminā –
其中,何为业自属智?‘有布施,有供养,有献祭,有善业恶业之果报,有此世,有他世,有母,有父,有化生有情,世间有正行、正修习的沙门婆罗门,他们亲自以胜智证知此世与他世后宣说’——像这样的慧、了知……乃至……无痴、择法、正见,这称为业自属智。除了随顺谛智之外,一切有漏善慧都是业自属智。显示巴利原文
‘‘Tattha katamaṃ kammassakataññāṇaṃ? ‘Atthi dinnaṃ, atthi yiṭṭhaṃ, atthi hutaṃ, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṃ kammānaṃ phalaṃ vipāko, atthi ayaṃ loko, atthi paro loko, atthi mātā, atthi pitā, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi loke samaṇabrāhmaṇā sammaggatā sammā paṭipannā, ye imañca lokaṃ parañca lokaṃ sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedentī’ti yā evarūpā paññā pajānanā…pe… amoho dhammavicayo sammādiṭṭhi, idaṃ vuccati kammassakataññāṇaṃ. Ṭhapetvā saccānulomikaṃ ñāṇaṃ sabbāpi sāsavā kusalā paññā kammassakataññāṇa’’nti (vibha. 793) –
此句涵盖了《分别论》的巴利原文。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ vibhaṅgapāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
其中(《分别论注》793),在‘有布施’等句中,应以‘由布施为缘而有果报’之理来理解其义。‘布施’是以所施之物为名而说布施;‘供养’指大祭祀,即众人共享的大布施;‘献祭’指充分的恭敬供养。‘有母、有父’是说对父母的正行与邪行会有果报。所谓‘此称为’的意思是:能了知‘此业属己,此业不属己’的智慧,即称为业自属智。其中,三种身恶行、四种语恶行、三种意恶行,这些称为不属己业;于三门中的十种善行,则称为属己业。无论自己还是他人,一切不善都称为不属己业。何以故?因其破坏利益、出生非利益故。无论自己还是他人,一切善都称为属己业。何以故?因其破坏非利益、出生利益故。安住于能如此了知的业自属智中,广行布施、圆满戒行、受持布萨,从乐至乐、从成就至成就地受用之后,证得涅槃的众生,其数量无法计算。‘除了随顺谛智’的意思是:除了那因随顺道谛与胜义谛而得名为‘随顺谛’的观智之外,其余一切有漏善慧都是业自属智。显示巴利原文
Tattha (vibha. aṭṭha. 793) atthi dinnantiādīsu dinnapaccayā phalaṃ atthīti iminā upāyena attho veditabbo. Dinnanti ca deyyadhammasīsena dānaṃ vuttaṃ. Yiṭṭhanti mahāyāgo, sabbasādhāraṇaṃ mahādānanti attho. Hutanti pahonakasakkāro adhippeto. Atthi mātā, atthi pitāti mātāpitūsu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattiādīnaṃ phalasambhavo vutto. Idaṃ vuccatīti yaṃ ñāṇaṃ ‘‘idaṃ kammaṃ sakaṃ, idaṃ no saka’’nti jānāti, idaṃ kammassakataññāṇaṃ nāma vuccatīti attho. Tattha tividhaṃ kāyaduccaritaṃ catubbidhaṃ vacīduccaritaṃ tividhaṃ manoduccaritanti idaṃ na sakakammaṃ nāma, tīsu dvāresu dasavidhampi sucaritaṃ sakakammaṃ nāma. Attano vāpi hotu parassa vā, sabbampi akusalaṃ na sakakammaṃ nāma. Kasmā? Atthabhañjanato anatthajananato ca. Attano vā hotu parassa vā, sabbampi kusalaṃ sakakammaṃ nāma. Kasmā? Anatthabhañjanato atthajananato ca. Evaṃ jānanasamatthe imasmiṃ kammassakataññāṇe ṭhatvā bahuṃ dānaṃ datvā sīlaṃ pūretvā uposathaṃ samādiyitvā sukhena sukhaṃ sampattiyā sampattiṃ anubhavitvā nibbānaṃ pattānaṃ sattānaṃ gaṇanaparicchedo natthi. Ṭhapetvā saccānulomikaṃ ñāṇanti maggasaccassa paramatthasaccassa ca anulomanato saccānulomikanti laddhanāmaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesā sabbāpi sāsavā kusalā paññā kammassakataññāṇamevāti attho.
‘能分别三相行相者’,是指能分别无常等三种特相的、已生后即坏灭等行相的智慧。‘称为增上慧’是说:观智由于是道慧的依止处而称为增上慧。显示巴利原文
Tilakkhaṇākāraparicchedakanti aniccādilakkhaṇattayassa hutvā abhāvādiākārapaacchindanakaṃ. Adhipaññāti vuccatīti maggapaññāya adhiṭṭhānabhāvato vipassanāñāṇaṃ adhipaññāti vuccati.
‘二者俱受用,且追随作者。’(《相应部》1.256)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Kalyāṇakārī kalyāṇaṃ, pāpakārī ca pāpakaṃ; Anubhoti dvayametaṃ, anubandhati kāraka’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 1.256);
如此,业自属慧——因观察过去与未来轮回根本之苦而成为悚惧事,因渴望解脱而成为缘——也称为增上慧。世俗慧的增上慧性仅是方便说;为显示那并非究竟义,故说:‘其中,道果慧方为增上慧。’显示巴利原文
Evaṃ atīte anāgate ca vaṭṭamūlakadukkhasallakkhaṇavasena saṃvegavatthutāya vimuttiākaṅkhāya paccayabhūtā kammassakatapaññā adhipaññātipi vadanti. Lokiyapaññāya adhipaññābhāvo pariyāyenāti nippariyāyameva taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tatopi ca maggaphalapaññāva adhipaññā’’ti vuttaṃ.
‘他们共同依此而活’,因此称为‘共活’,这是说一切学处,故言:‘一切……乃至……因此称为共活。’其中,‘学处’是指佛陀所说的言教,即所谓‘名身、句身、词身、字身’。‘同分活命者’意为相同活命者、相似而行者。于‘于彼学’中,由于依处有待于所依,为说明依处依于何所依而说‘于彼’,故云‘以彼学处为心之依处’。意即:以那称为共活的学处为所缘,依‘我是否依学处而学、未学’这样的运作,以学处为境,以彼为所依之心即为依处。难道不应当如此解释‘学与共活具足者’一词?即,在显示所学与共活二者之后,以‘于他们中学,故名为学与共活具足者’。为何不如此说,而仅仅说‘于彼学,故名为共活具足者’这么一点?针对这内在的诘问,才说:‘并非仅此……’等。显示巴利原文
Saha ājīvanti etthāti sājīvoti sabbasikkhāpadaṃ vuttanti āha – ‘‘sabbampi…pe… tasmā sājīvanti vuccatī’’ti. Tattha sikkhāpadanti ‘‘nāmakāyo padakāyo niruttikāyo byañjanakāyo’’ti vuttaṃ bhagavato vacanasaṅkhātaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ. Sabhāgavuttinoti samānavuttikā, sadisappavattikāti attho. Tasmiṃ sikkhatīti ettha ādheyyāpekkhattā adhikaraṇassa kimādheyyamapekkhitvā ‘‘tasmi’’nti adhikaraṇaṃ niddiṭṭhanti āha – ‘‘taṃ sikkhāpadaṃ cittassa adhikaraṇaṃ katvā’’ti, taṃ sājīvasaṅkhātaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ ‘‘yathāsikkhāpadaṃ nu kho sikkhāmi, na sikkhāmī’’ti evaṃ pavattivasena sikkhāpadavisayattā tadādheyyabhūtassa cittassa adhikaraṇaṃ katvāti attho. Nanu ca ‘‘sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’ti imassa padabhājanaṃ karontena ‘‘yaṃ sikkhaṃ sājīvañca samāpanno, tadubhayaṃ dassetvā tesu sikkhati, tena vuccati sikkhāsājīvasamāpanno’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, evamavatvā ‘‘tasmiṃ sikkhati, tena vuccati sājīvasamāpanno’’ti ettakameva kasmā vuttanti antolīnacodanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘na kevalañcāyametasmi’’ntiādi.
‘以及那学’者,即那称为增上戒的学。‘圆满学’者,显示巴利原文
Tassā ca sikkhāyāti tassā adhisīlasaṅkhātāya sikkhāya. Sikkhaṃ paripūrentoti
圆满防护戒,意思是:依止持戒,令与远离相应的思在心中生起;依作持戒,令与远离不相应的思在心中生起。而“于彼学处不违犯而学”,是指于佛陀所说的言教——即所谓“名身、句身、词身、字身”的学处,成为不违犯者而学。圆满防护戒与不违犯俱行——这两者即是此处所说的“学”,此为要旨。其中,不违犯俱行是学处圆满的缘,因为从不违犯俱行乃至证道之间,皆有学处圆满。此处,“以圆满学而学”特指防护戒的远离思在相续中生起之时;而“以不违犯而学”则也含摄不生起之时。因为即使以圆满的方式令学在心中生起,或由于睡眠等缘故而不生起,由于并无违犯,所以称为“不违犯而学”。显示巴利原文
Sīlasaṃvaraṃ paripūrento, vārittasīlavasena viratisampayuttaṃ cetanaṃ cārittasīlavasena virativippayuttaṃ cetanañca attani pavattentoti attho. Tasmiñca sikkhāpade avītikkamanto sikkhatīti ‘‘nāmakāyo padakāyo niruttikāyo byañjanakāyo’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ bhagavato vacanasaṅkhātaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ avītikkamanto hutvā tasmiṃ yathāvuttasikkhāpade sikkhatīti attho. Sīlasaṃvarapūraṇaṃ sājīvānatikkamanañcāti idameva ca dvayaṃ idha sikkhanaṃ nāmāti adhippāyo. Tattha sājīvānatikkamo sikkhāpāripūriyā paccayo. Sājīvānatikkamato hi yāva maggā sikkhāpāripūrī hoti. Apicettha ‘‘sikkhaṃ paripūrento sikkhatī’’ti iminā viraticetanāsaṅkhātassa sīlasaṃvarassa visesato santāne pavattanakālova gahito, ‘‘avītikkamanto sikkhatī’’ti iminā pana appavattanakālopi. Sikkhañhi paripūraṇavasena attani pavattentopi niddādivasena appavattentopi vītikkamābhāvā ‘‘avītikkamanto sikkhatī’’ti vuccatīti.
舍弃学处之分别注释显示巴利原文
Sikkhāpaccakkhānavibhaṅgavaṇṇanā
“Appaccakkhāya appaccakkhātāyā”这两种读法,三部《结句》中均有提及。“即使表露了懦弱时”,是指如“我何不弃佛”等语,将内心的软弱显露出来时。而“学处被舍弃时”,则指如“我弃佛”等语,学处被舍弃之时。当采用“隔日说”时,前后的文句会因此连贯;若不采用,则不会。因此,“隔日说”只是为了文句的连贯,故说“为了文句的连贯”。“因为口头流传”,是指这样的说法在世间口耳相传,所以如此说,这是其含义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Appaccakkhāya appaccakkhātāyā’’ti ubhayathāpi pāṭho tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vutto. Dubbalye āvikatepīti ‘‘yaṃnūnāhaṃ buddhaṃ paccakkheyya’’ntiādinā dubbalabhāve pakāsitepi. Sikkhāya pana paccakkhātāyāti ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā sikkhāya paccakkhātāya. Yasmā dirattavacane gahite tena purimapacchimapadāni saṃsiliṭṭhāni honti, na tasmiṃ aggahite, tasmā dirattavacanena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattameva payojananti āha ‘‘byañjanasiliṭṭhatāyā’’ti. Mukhāruḷhatāyāti yasmā evarūpaṃ vacanaṃ lokassa mukhamāruḷhaṃ, tasmāti attho.
“令文句圆满”:由于该词没有独立的意义,是藉由另一个词来阐明已说的意义,从而使文句圆满。为了以理由阐明已说的意义,他说:“因为缺少随转词……”等。能阐明意义的词,称为义理词。显示巴利原文
Byañjanaṃsampādetīti tassa visuṃ atthābhāvato vuttamevatthaṃ aññapadena dīpento byañjanaṃ sampādeti. Vuttamevatthaṃ kāraṇena vibhāvento āha ‘‘parivārakapadavirahitañhī’’tiādi. Atthadīpakaṃ padaṃ atthapadaṃ.
关于“学处舍弃”,即是指诸如“我弃佛”等一类表达舍弃学处的话语。在“我弃佛”等语句中,由于经中曾有开示:“诸比丘,如是,此既是示弱的表现,也是已舍弃学处”,可见两者皆成立,故说:“其中一部分具有示弱的意义。”虽然像“我弃佛”这类舍学处的言辞,其词义本身并非示弱,但当说出“我弃佛”时,其于学处圆满上的软弱性也会被领会,因此说:“学处舍弃之语中,有一部分是示弱的意义。”“就此而言”,是指就那个作为其含义的示弱来说的。显示巴利原文
Sikkhāpaccakkhānassāti ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādisikkhāpaccakkhānavacanassa. ‘‘Buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādīsu ‘‘evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, dubbalyāvikammañceva hoti sikkhā ca paccakkhātā’’ti vuttattā ubhayampi hotīti āha – ‘‘ekaccaṃ dubbalyāvikammaṃ attho hotī’’ti. Kiñcāpi ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādisikkhāpaccakkhānavacanassa dubbalyāvikammapadattho na hoti, tathāpi ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vutte sikkhāparipūraṇe dubbalyāvibhāvassapi gamyamānattā ‘‘sikkhāpaccakkhānassa ekaccaṃ dubbalyāvikammaṃ attho hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Naṃ sandhāyāti naṃ atthabhūtaṃ dubbalyāvikammaṃ sandhāya.
关于“差别与无差别”:在此处,应作如此理解:在那些仅仅是示弱、而非舍弃学处的情形中,学处舍弃与示弱之间是存在差别的;而在那些既是学处舍弃、又是示弱的情形中,两者则没有差别。“生活艰难者”:因在诸根本处已有研习,故说“已陷入艰难维生者”。“ukkaṇṭhana”(厌倦)即是指这种艰难的生活,从此状态中而来的人,便称为“厌倦者”。“从此处”指从此住处、从此寺院。“此处”则指其所想去的地方。因为被不乐所逼迫,心神涣散,抬头仰面,四处张望而行,故说其“伸颈而住”。显示巴利原文
Visesāvisesanti ettha yena dubbalyāvikammameva hoti, na sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ, tattha sikkhāpaccakkhānadubbalyāvikammānaṃ atthi viseso. Yena pana sikkhāpaccakkhānañceva dubbalyāvikammañca hoti, tattha nevatthi visesoti veditabbaṃ. Kaṭhakicchajīvaneti dhātūsu paṭhitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘kicchajīvikappatto’’ti. Ukkaṇṭhanaṃ ukkaṇṭhā, kicchajīvikā, taṃ ito pattoti ukkaṇṭhito. Itoti ito ṭhānato, ito vihārato vā. Etthāti gantumicchitaṃ padesaṃ vadati. Anabhiratiyā pīḷito vikkhittacitto hutvā sīsaṃ ukkhipitvā uddhaṃmukho ito cito ca olokento āhiṇḍatīti āha ‘‘uddhaṃ kaṇṭhaṃ katvā viharamāno’’ti.
关于“aṭṭīyamāno”(正被折磨者):此处,aṭṭīyati 意指像对待一件折磨人的事一样对待自己。由于 aṭṭīya 一词内部包含了一个作为比喻来源的行为,因此它是以那个作为比喻对象的自身为及物宾语,而非以比丘身份为及物宾语,故注释说“比丘身份——以比丘身份”。他并非如同对待折磨一样对待比丘身份,而是如此对待自身。因此,应将“比丘身份”理解为完成此行为的工具,即工具格意义上的业格,故说“折磨自己”这一含义。而在“被如鲠在喉的事物所折磨”这样的表达中,则是纯粹的工具格,故说“依其特征,唯以工具格表述”。或者,也可以将其视为主动意义的业格,故说“或以那比丘身份”等,意思是以比丘身份作为行为的主动者。在此义中,aṭṭīyati 由 aṭṭaṃ karoti(制造折磨)派生,然后加上被动分词后缀 māna,构成“aṭṭīyamāno”,应如此理解词句的构成。因此他说:“正被折磨、正被逼迫”。“jigucchamāno”(正厌恶者):在此处的上下文中,比丘身份处于业格的意义,故说“如厌恶不净物般厌恶于彼”,意思是厌恶那比丘身份。“若我”:意即如果我。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭīyamānoti ettha aṭṭamiva attānamācarati aṭṭīyatīti aṭṭīyasaddassa antogadhaupamānabhūtakammattā upameyyabhūtena attanāva sakammakattaṃ, na bhikkhubhāvenāti āha ‘‘bhikkhubhāvanti bhikkhubhāvenā’’ti. Na hi so bhikkhubhāvaṃ aṭṭamiva ācarati, kiñcarahi attānaṃ tasmā bhikkhubhāvena karaṇabhūtena attānaṃ aṭṭīyamānoti evamettha attho daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘karaṇatthe upayogavacana’’nti. Kaṇṭhe āsattena aṭṭīyeyyāti ettha pana karaṇattheyeva karaṇavacananti āha – ‘‘yathālakkhaṇaṃ karaṇavacaneneva vutta’’nti. Kattuatthe vā upayogavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbanti āha – ‘‘tena vā bhikkhubhāvenā’’tiādi, tena kattubhūtena bhikkhubhāvenāti attho. Imasmiṃ panatthe aṭṭaṃ karotīti aṭṭīyatīti aṭṭīya-saddaṃ nipphādetvā tato kammani māna-sadde kate ‘‘aṭṭīyamāno’’ti padasiddhi veditabbā. Tenevāha – ‘‘aṭṭo kariyamāno pīḷiyamāno’’ti. Jigucchamānoti iminā pana sambandhe kariyamāne bhikkhubhāvanti upayogatthe eva upayogavacananti āha – ‘‘asuciṃ viya taṃ jigucchanto’’ti, taṃ bhikkhubhāvaṃ jigucchantoti attho. Sacāhanti sace ahaṃ.
“以捨棄方式所說”,是指由於(經中)說“應捨棄、應捨棄”,因此是依與捨棄行為相關的方式而說。“以狀態分別方式”,則指因出現“assaṃ assaṃ”(我願成為)之語,故對於所欲成就的種種狀態,以分別的方式而說;也就是說,以比丘身分之外的其他狀態的分別方式而說——此處意旨如此。显示巴利原文
Paccakkhānākārena vuttānīti ‘‘paccakkheyyaṃ paccakkheyya’’nti vuttattā paccakkhānākārasambandhena vuttāni. Bhāvavikappākārenāti ‘‘assaṃ assa’’nti āgatattā yaṃ yaṃ bhavitukāmo, tassa tassa bhāvassa vikappākārena, bhikkhubhāvato aññabhāvavikappākārenāti adhippāyo.
50 “我不堪”,顯示自己於各處無有努力。“我不能”,顯示對一食等事不堪承受。“我不樂”,顯示“出家根本,我無有樂”。“我不喜”,顯示對出家自身無有喜足。显示巴利原文
50.Na ussahāmīti attano tattha tattha ussahābhāvaṃ dasseti. Na visahāmīti ekabhattādīnaṃ asayhabhāvaṃ dasseti. Na ramāmīti ‘‘pabbajjāmūlakaṃ natthi me sukha’’nti dasseti. Nābhiramāmīti pabbajjāya attano santosābhāvaṃ dasseti.
現在,在捨戒的部分,應知如是論決——其中,以“欲捨沙門性”等語,顯示心的決定。以“佛、法”等語,顯示所緣的決定。正如世間將穀物生長之處稱為“田”,此處亦因是捨戒生起之處而稱為“田”。以“我捨,請記住我”等語,顯示時間的決定。以“說”一詞,顯示方式的決定。以“我已不需要佛,佛於我何用,佛對於我無益,我已從佛善解脫”等語,顯示即使不涉及特定時態,捨戒亦可成立。以“告知”一詞,顯示了知的決定。以“瘋癲者捨戒,在瘋癲者面前捨戒”等語,顯示人的決定。以“以聖典語在蠻族人面前捨戒,而他不解,戒未捨”等語,顯示即使具備人等的決定,若缺乏了知的決定,亦不成立。以“以嬉戲捨戒,戒未捨”等語,顯示即使具備所緣等的決定,若缺乏心的決定,亦不生起。以“欲告知而未告知,戒未捨”等語,顯示即使具備心的決定,若缺乏方式的決定,亦不生起。以“對不解者告知,對解者不告知”等語,顯示即使心、所緣、時間、方式、人、了知等決定皆已具備,亦唯有當事人親聞方能生起,非由他人。而“或完全不告知,戒未捨”一語,是為了說明唯有……显示巴利原文
Idāni sikkhāpaccakkhānavāre ṭhatvā ayaṃ vinicchayo veditabbo – tattha ‘‘sāmaññā cavitukāmo’’tiādīhi padehi cittaniyamaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Buddhaṃ dhamma’’ntiādīhi padehi khettaniyamaṃ dasseti. Yathā hi loke sassānaṃ ruhanaṭṭhānaṃ ‘‘khetta’’nti vuccati, evamidampi sikkhāpaccakkhānassa ruhanaṭṭhānattā ‘‘khetta’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Paccakkhāmi dhārehī’’ti etena kālaniyamaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Vadatī’’ti iminā payoganiyamaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Alaṃ me buddhena, kinnu me buddhena, na mamattho buddhena, sumuttāhaṃ buddhenā’’tiādīhi anāmaṭṭhakālavasenapi paccakkhānaṃ hotīti dasseti. ‘‘Viññāpetī’’ti iminā vijānananiyamaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ummattako sikkhaṃ paccakkhāti, ummattakassa santike sikkhaṃ paccakkhātī’’tiādīhi puggalaniyamaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ariyakena milakkhassa santike sikkhaṃ paccakkhāti, so ca nappaṭivijānāti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā’’tiādīhi puggalādiniyame satipi vijānananiyamāsambhavaṃ dasseti . ‘‘Davāya sikkhaṃ paccakkhāti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā’’tiādīhi khettādiniyame satipi cittaniyamābhāvena na ruhatīti dasseti. ‘‘Sāvetukāmo na sāveti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā’’ti iminā cittaniyamepi sati payoganiyamābhāvena na ruhatīti dasseti. ‘‘Aviññussa sāveti, viññussa na sāvetī’’ti etehi cittakhettakālapayogapuggalavijānananiyamepi sati yaṃ puggalaṃ uddissa sāveti, tasseva savanena ruhati, na aññassāti dasseti. ‘‘Sabbaso vā pana na sāveti, appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā’’ti idaṃ pana cittādiniyameneva sikkhā paccakkhātā hoti, na aññathāti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Tasmā cittakhettakālapayogapuggalavijānananiyamavasena sikkhāya paccakkhānaṃ ñatvā tadabhāvena appaccakkhānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
为何如此?因为舍戒唯依欲舍弃具足戒身份之心而生起,并非出于嬉笑或喧扰而说。因此,舍戒依心而成就,非无此心。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Upasampannabhāvato cavitukāmatācitteneva hi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na davā vā ravā vā bhaṇantassa. Evaṃ cittavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
同样,如说“我舍佛、我舍法、我舍僧、我舍学、我舍律、我舍巴帝摩卡、我舍诵戒、我舍和尚、我舍阿阇梨、我舍共住弟子、我舍近住弟子、我舍同和尚者、我舍同阿阇梨者、我舍梵行同伴”等佛等十四种对象,以及“请记住我是居士、优婆塞、园民、沙弥、外道、外道弟子、非沙门、非释子”等居士等八种对象,在这二十二种对象词中,无论对其中任何一种,以任何同义词,且想说任何内容而说出任何言语,舍戒都成立;而非取树木等其他名称来舍戒者。因此,舍戒依对象而成就,非无此对象。显示巴利原文
Tathā ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmi, dhammaṃ paccakkhāmi, saṅghaṃ paccakkhāmi, sikkhaṃ, vinayaṃ, pātimokkhaṃ, uddesaṃ, upajjhāyaṃ, ācariyaṃ, saddhivihārikaṃ, antevāsikaṃ, samānupajjhāyakaṃ, samānācariyakaṃ, sabrahmacāriṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ catuddasannaṃ, ‘‘gihīti maṃ dhārehi, upāsako, ārāmiko, sāmaṇero, titthiyo, titthiyasāvako, assamaṇo, asakyaputtiyoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ gihiādīnaṃ aṭṭhannañcāti imesaṃ dvāvīsatiyā khettapadānaṃ yassa kassaci savevacanassa vasena tesu ca yaṃkiñci vattukāmassa yaṃkiñci vadatopi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na rukkhādīnaṃ aññatarassa nāmaṃ gahetvā sikkhaṃ paccakkhantassa. Evaṃ khettavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
其中,“我舍”与“请记住我”是现在时态的表达;而以“我已不需要佛,佛于我何用,佛于我无益,我已从佛善得解脱”等为例,不特指某一时态,与前面十四词结合而说的“我已不需要”等四词,以及它们的同义词,舍戒亦得以成立。而非说“你已舍”、“你将舍”、“你已记住”、“你将记住”或“我何不舍”等过去、未来或假设的表达者。因此,舍戒依现在时态及不特定时态而成就,非无此。显示巴利原文
Tattha yadetaṃ ‘‘paccakkhāmī’’ti ca ‘‘maṃ dhārehī’’ti ca vuttaṃ vattamānakālavacanaṃ, yāni ca ‘‘alaṃ me buddhena, kinnu me buddhena, na mamattho buddhena, sumuttāhaṃ buddhenā’’tiādinā nayena ākhyātavasena kālaṃ anāmasitvā purimehi cuddasahi padehi saddhiṃ yojetvā vuttāni ‘‘alaṃ me’’tiādīni cattāri padāni, tesaṃyeva ca savevacanānaṃ vasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na ‘‘paccakkhāsi’’nti vā ‘‘paccakkhissa’’nti vā ‘‘maṃ dhāresī’’ti vā ‘‘dhāressasī’’ti vā ‘‘yanūnāhaṃ paccakkheyya’’nti vātiādīni atītānāgataparikappavacanāni bhaṇantassa. Evaṃ vattamānakālavasena ceva anāmaṭṭhakālavasena ca paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
然而,方式有两种:身表与语表。其中,以“我舍佛”等方式,用任何语言发出言语,唯依语表方式而舍戒;而非以书写文字或展示手势等身表方式舍戒。如是,唯依语表方式而舍戒,并非无此语表便能舍戒。显示巴利原文
Payogo pana duvidho kāyiko vācasiko. Tattha ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā nayena yāya kāyaci bhāsāya vacībhedaṃ katvā vācasikapayogeneva paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na akkharalikhanaṃ vā hatthamuddādidassanaṃ vā kāyapayogaṃ karontassa. Evaṃ vācasikapayogeneva paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
人则有二种:舍戒者与所对舍戒者。其中,舍戒者必须不是疯癫者、心乱者、受剧痛者中的任何一种。而所对舍戒者,须是人类,且非疯癫等中的任何一种,并在面前,舍戒才得成立。若所对者不在面前,即使通过信使或书信告知,舍戒也不生起。如此,依所说之人而舍戒,并非无此所对人便能舍戒。显示巴利原文
Puggalo pana duvidho yo ca paccakkhāti, yassa ca paccakkhāti. Tattha yo paccakkhāti, so sace ummattakakhittacittavedanāṭṭānaṃ aññataro na hoti. Yassa pana paccakkhāti, so sace manussajātiko hoti, na ca ummattakādīnaṃ aññataro, sammukhībhūto ca sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti. Na hi asammukhībhūtassa dūtena vā paṇṇena vā ārocanaṃ ruhati. Evaṃ yathāvuttapuggalavasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena.
认知也分为指定与未指定两种。其中,若指定某人或某些人而说“我告知此人或这些人”,如果他们如同世间常人,在听到话语后作意时即能了知,那么在其话语刚说完时,他们以“此人厌离”或“此人希求在家状态”等任何方式了知舍戒之状,则戒已舍。若过后思维“此人说了什么”而后了知,或由他人了知,则戒未舍。若未指定而告知,则依前述方式,若有任何人类了知话语之义,戒即已舍。如此,依认知而舍戒,并非无此认知便能舍戒。如是,唯依如前所述之心等而舍戒,非以其他方式,应当如此看待。显示巴利原文
Vijānanampi niyamitāniyamitavasena duvidhaṃ. Tattha yassa yesaṃ vā niyametvā ‘‘imassa imesaṃ vā ārocemī’’ti vadati, sace te yathā pakatiyā loke manussā vacanaṃ sutvā āvajjanasamaye jānanti, evaṃ tassa vacanānantarameva tassa ‘‘ayaṃ ukkaṇṭhito’’ti vā ‘‘gihibhāvaṃ patthayatī’’ti vā yena kenaci ākārena sikkhāpaccakkhānabhāvaṃ jānanti, paccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. Atha aparabhāge ‘‘kiṃ iminā vutta’’nti cintetvā jānanti, aññe vā jānanti, appaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Aniyametvā ārocentassa pana sace vuttanayena yo koci manussajātiko vacanatthaṃ jānāti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Evaṃ vijānanavasena paccakkhānaṃ hoti, na tadabhāvena. Iti imesaṃ vuttappakārānaṃ cittādīnaṃ vaseneva sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na aññathāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
51 第五十一句:指明“说”为运用言词表达之后,紧接着又说“令知”,因此这里所指的是以同样的言词表达来传达意图,而非其他任何方式,故说“以同样的言词表达”。“将词倒转”即颠倒词序。这是因词句的运用并无固定规则而说。正如世间所见,以不固定的词句运用,如“拿钵来,钵拿来”这样来传达其义;同样,这里也是以不固定的词句运用,如“我舍佛,舍佛我”来传达其义,这正是意旨所在。“我舍佛”这一解说以义为主,不以音声为主,故说“或以蛮语等任何一种语言说出其义”。应知除摩揭陀语之外的一切语言,如安达罗语、达弥罗语等,皆为蛮语。为了显示:即使想说出某一所缘事,却说成了别的,由于仍属于所缘事的范围,学处仍算已舍,故说“想说‘我舍佛’时”等。即使心中不想说“我舍佛”,心存排斥而想说别的,却失误而说出了口,只要心中有想脱离教法的意愿,由于所说的仍是所缘事,条件已圆满,应知即成就舍学处。“落入所缘”即落入了构成舍学处成立之处的所缘事。显示巴利原文
51. ‘‘Vadatī’’ti vacībhedappayogaṃ dassetvā tadanantaraṃ ‘‘viññāpetī’’ti vuttattā teneva vacībhedena adhippāyaviññāpanaṃ idhādhippetaṃ, na yena kenaci upāyenāti āha ‘‘teneva vacībhedenā’’ti. Padapaccābhaṭṭhaṃ katvāti padaviparāvuttiṃ katvā. Idañca padappayogassa aniyamitattā vuttaṃ. Yathā hi loke ‘‘āhara pattaṃ, pattaṃ āharā’’ti aniyamitena padappayogena tadatthaviññāpanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ, evamidhāpi ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmi, paccakkhāmi buddha’’nti aniyamitena padappayogena tadatthaviññāpanaṃ hotiyevāti adhippāyo. Buddhaṃ paccakkhāmīti atthappadhāno ayaṃ niddeso, na saddappadhānoti āha ‘‘milakkhabhāsāsu vā aññatarabhāsāya tamatthaṃ vadeyyā’’ti. Māgadhabhāsato avasiṭṭhā sabbāpi andhadamiḷādibhāsā milakkhabhāsāti veditabbā. Khettapadesu ekaṃ vattukāmo sacepi aññaṃ vadeyya, khettapadantogadhattā paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhāti dassento āha ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmīti vattukāmo’’tiādi. Yadipi ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vattuṃ anicchanto cittena taṃ paṭikkhipitvā aññaṃ vattukāmo puna virajjhitvā tameva vadeyya, tathāpi sāsanato cavitukāmatācitte sati khettapadasseva vuttattā aṅgapāripūrisambhavato hotveva sikkhāpaccakkhānanti veditabbaṃ. Khettameva otiṇṇanti sikkhāpaccakkhānassa ruhanaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ khettameva otiṇṇaṃ.
为了显示:由于意在表达现在时为主,因此用过去或未来的假设说法,舍学处并不成立,故说“然而若‘舍佛’或……”等。“说、令知”中,以“说”限定了方式,因此只有在某人面前以自身的言词表达运用,舍学处方告成立,而不是通过派遣使者、传话等方式。为显此义,故说“或派遣使者”等。其中,“或派遣使者”是指口头传话说“请告知我舍学处的情况”。“或送信”是指写信送出。“或刻字”是指在树上等处刻字展示。“或以手印告知其义”是指用手势来传达意图。能传达意图的手势变化即是手印。这里的“手”一词,应如“我不会把整只手放进嘴里”等语句那样,理解为手指等部分。因此,这里应理解为:以能传达意图的屈指等手势变化来告知其义。显示巴利原文
‘‘Paccakkhāmi dhārehī’’ti vattamānakālassa padhānabhāvena vattumicchitattā atītānāgataparikappavacanehi nevatthi sikkhāpaccakkhānanti dassento āha ‘‘sace pana buddhaṃ paccakkhinti vā’’tiādi. Vadati viññāpetīti ettha vadatīti iminā payogassa niyamitattā ekassa santike attano vacībhedappayogeneva sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na dūtasāsanādippayogenāti dassento āha ‘‘dūtaṃ vā pahiṇātī’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘mama sikkhāpaccakkhānabhāvaṃ kathehī’’ti mukhasāsanavasena ‘‘dūtaṃ vā pahiṇātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṇṇe likhitvā pahiṇanavasena ‘‘sāsanaṃ vā pesetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Rukkhādīsu akkharāni likhitvā dassanavasena ‘‘akkharaṃ vā chindatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Hatthamuddāya vā tamatthaṃ ārocetīti hatthena adhippāyaviññāpanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Adhippāyaviññāpako hi hatthavikāro hatthamuddā. Hattha-saddo cettha tadekadesesu aṅgulīsu daṭṭhabbo ‘‘na sabbaṃ hatthaṃ mukhe pakkhipissāmī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 618) viya. Tasmā adhippāyaviññāpakena aṅgulisaṅkocādinā hatthavikārena tamatthaṃ ārocetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“与心相应”即与欲舍之心相应。现在,为了显示从认知的角度,舍学处应知分为限定与不限定两类,故说“若只让此人知”等。这一分类应知是依“说、令知是同一对象,因此对谁说,就只让他认知,而非他人”这一理则而得。因为不可能存在对某人说却让另一人知的道理。“只有他知”这一限定,排除了他不知而其他人知的情形。因此说:“若他不知,近旁另一人知,学处未舍。”所以,若限定一人而告知“只让此人知”,即便他也知、他人也知,由于被限定者依限定而认知是可能的,舍学处仍然成立。“不令他人知”则是不限定。所谓“对二人限定而说”,是指这样限定而告知:“让两人知,或一人知,我只告知这两人。”因此说:“或一人知时,或两人知时。”所以,若限定两人而告知“只让这两人知,不让一人知”,则只有在两人都知时舍学处方成立,若只有一人知则不成立,诸师如是说。显示巴利原文
Cittasampayuttanti paccakkhātukāmatācittasampayuttaṃ. Idāni vijānanavasena sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ niyamitāniyamitavasena dvidhā veditabbanti dassento āha – ‘‘yadi ayameva jānātū’’tiādi. Ayañca vibhāgo ‘‘vadati viññāpetīti ekavisayattā yassa vadati, tasseva vijānanaṃ adhippetaṃ, na aññassā’’ti iminā nayena laddhoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi yassa vadati, tato aññaṃ viññāpetīti ayamattho sambhavati. Soyeva jānātīti avadhāraṇena tasmiṃ avijānanteyeva aññassa jānanaṃ paṭikkhipati. Tenevāha – ‘‘atha so na jānāti, añño samīpe ṭhito jānāti, apaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā’’ti. Tasmā ‘‘ayameva jānātū’’ti ekaṃ niyametvā ārocite yadipi sopi jānāti aññopi, niyamitassa pana niyamitavasena vijānanasambhavato sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘añño mā jānātū’’ti aniyamitattā. Dvinnampi niyametvāti idaṃ ‘‘dve vā jānantu eko vā, imesaṃyeva dvinnaṃ ārocemī’’ti evaṃ niyametvā ārocanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘ekasmiṃjānantepi dvīsu jānantesupī’’ti. Tasmā ‘‘dveyeva jānantu, eko mā jānātū’’ti evaṃ dvinnaṃ niyametvā ārocite dvīsuyeva jānantesu sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hoti, na ekasmiṃ jānanteti vadanti.
“对同法者”即对可信赖者。“担心被阻止”指担心“若他们知道了,便会拦阻我”。“知时者”是说通达教法与行持的人,但此处只凭了知对方用心,亦可称为知时者。因此说:“了知‘此人已厌离……已脱离教法’。”所以,即使明白“我舍佛”这句话的字面意思,若不了知“此比丘想舍离比丘身份,或想做在家人”这一用心,学处依然未舍。反之,即便不明“我舍佛”的字面意思,只要知其用心是“已厌离,想做在家人”,学处便已舍断。因为某一刹那耳识路取声,另一刹那意识路了知其义,所以说:“然而,要在同一刹那不先不后地了知,是极难的。”实不可能在同一刹那既听闻声音又通达其义。譬如有人说“罐”或“布”时,对于当下所取的“gha”声,一个耳识路生起即灭,紧接着一个意识路取彼已灭之声而生起。如此,对于所说的语词,有多少字母,便一一取每个字母的当下与过去,耳识路与意识路不断地生起灭去;最后将这些字母总合,取字母集合,又一个意识路生起后灭去。紧接着,以取名概念的方式——“此字母集合即名此”,另一意识路生起灭去;随后生起的意识路,依习惯而了知其义:“此是彼之义”,这才成为可能。显示巴利原文
Sabhāgeti vissāsike. Parisaṅkamānoti ‘‘sace te jāneyyuṃ, maṃ te vāressantī’’ti āsaṅkamāno. Samayaññūti sāsanācārakusalo, idha pana tadadhippāyajānanamattenapi samayaññū nāma hoti. Teneva āha – ‘‘ukkaṇṭhito ayaṃ…pe… sāsanato cutoti jānātī’’ti. Tasmā ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti imassa atthaṃ ñatvāpi sace ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhubhāvato cavitukāmo, gihī vā hotukāmo’’ti na jānāti, appaccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Sace pana ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’ti vacanassa atthaṃ ajānitvāpi ‘‘ukkaṇṭhito gihī hotukāmo’’ti adhippāyaṃ jānāti, paccakkhātāva hoti sikkhā. Aññasmiṃ khaṇe sotaviññāṇavīthiyā saddaggahaṇaṃ, aññasmiṃyeva ca manoviññāṇavīthiyā tadatthavijānananti āha – ‘‘taṅkhaṇaññeva pana apubbaṃ acarimaṃ dujjāna’’nti. Na hi ekasmiṃyeva khaṇe saddasavanaṃ tadatthavijānanañca sambhavati. Tathā hi ‘‘ghaṭo’’ti vā ‘‘paṭo’’ti vā kenaci vutte tattha gha-saddaṃ paccuppannaṃ gahetvā ekā sotaviññāṇavīthi uppajjitvā nirujjhati, tadanantaraṃ ekā manoviññāṇavīthi tameva atītaṃ gahetvā uppajjati. Evaṃ tena vuttavacane yattakāni akkharāni honti, tesu ekamekaṃ akkharaṃ paccuppannamatītañca gahetvā sotaviññāṇavīthiyā manoviññāṇavīthiyā ca uppajjitvā niruddhāya avasāne tāni akkharāni sampiṇḍetvā akkharasamūhaṃ gahetvā ekā manoviññāṇavīthi uppajjitvā nirujjhati. Tadanantaraṃ ‘‘ayamakkharasamūho etassa nāma’’nti nāmapaññattiggahaṇavasena aparāya manoviññāṇavīthiyā uppajjitvā niruddhāya tadanantaraṃ uppannāya manoviññāṇavīthiyā ‘‘ayametassa attho’’ti pakatiyā tadatthavijānanaṃ sambhavati.
“在转向之时”:此处为处格表工具格义,意为“在作意之时”。今为阐明彼转向之时,说道:“如通常地……了知。”正因为此处是以言辞表达其用意为目的,所以在后文当有人对此生疑——“这话是什么意思?”,需经过长时间才能了解其用意,或者也可能通过其他某种方式了解,而不单靠言辞表达,因此说道:“那么,在后文部分……戒学并未舍断。”“若说‘我将成为在家者’”,由于意义与时间皆有差异,故戒学未舍。因为“你记住”一词的意义与时间,与“我将成为”一词的意义与时间是不同的。然而若说“我是在家者”,则唯有意义的差异,没有时间的差异,因为“我是”是以现在时说的。在“我已生为在家者,我是在家者”中,也因意义与时间的差异,戒学未舍。“从今天起”这句话,即便已如此宣说,由于有过失,故是完整地说了。“你记住”:由于是以义理为主作说明,因此即使以同义词表达,也构成舍戒。为明此义,遂说“你知晓”等语。因为“你记住、你知晓、你了知、你作意”这些词,在意义与时间上并无不同。显示巴利原文
Āvajjanasamayenāti bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, atthābhogasamayeti attho. Idāni tameva āvajjanasamayaṃ vibhāvento āha – ‘‘yathā pakatiyā…pe… jānantī’’ti. Teneva vacībhedena adhippāyaviññāpanassa idhādhippetattā aparabhāge ‘‘kiṃ iminā vutta’’nti taṃ kaṅkhantassa cirena adhippāyavijānanaṃ aññenapi kenaci upāyantarena sambhavati, na kevalaṃ vacībhedamattenāti āha – ‘‘atha aparabhāge…pe… appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā’’ti. ‘‘Gihī bhavissāmī’’ti vutte atthabhedo kālabhedo ca hotīti appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. ‘‘Dhārehī’’ti hi imassa yo attho kālo ca, na so ‘‘bhavissāmī’’ti etassa. ‘‘Gihī homī’’ti vutte pana atthabhedoyeva, na kālabhedo ‘‘homī’’ti vattamānakālasseva vuttattā. ‘‘Gihī jātomhi, gihīmhī’’ti etthāpi atthassa ceva kālassa ca bhinnattā appaccakkhātā hoti sikkhā. ‘‘Ajja paṭṭhāyā’’ti idaṃ tathā vuttepi dosabhāvato paripuṇṇaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dhārehī’’ti atthappadhānattā niddesassa pariyāyavacanehipi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hotiyevāti dassento āha ‘‘jānāhī’’tiādi. Dhārehi jānāhi sañjānāhi manasi karohīti hi etāni padāni atthato kālato ca abhinnāni.
52 “前面那十四种”:即从佛陀开始,乃至同梵行者。说“hotu bhavatu”,这也仅仅表示拒绝,因此说:“hotu,意思是‘够了’。”显示巴利原文
52.Purimāneva cuddasāti buddhādisabrahmacārīpariyantāni. Hotu bhavatūti idampi paṭikkhepamattamevāti āha ‘‘hotu, pariyattanti attho’’ti.
53 所谓“功德篇章”,大众部称其为阐明佛陀功德的一部经。“优婆离偈颂”中(《中部》第2品第76经)云:显示巴利原文
53.Vaṇṇapaṭṭhānanti mahāsaṅghikānaṃ buddhaguṇaparidīpakaṃ ekaṃ suttanti vadanti. Upāligāthāsūti (ma. ni. 2.76) –
无诸苦恼、心意善平静者;
戒行增长、具足善慧者;
超越差别、无垢秽者;
我是彼世尊的声闻。
无疑惑者、满足者;
已吐弃世间利养者、喜悦者;
对于已完成沙门之行的人,
对于最后身之人,
对于无有譬喻、远离尘垢者,
我是彼世尊的声闻弟子。
无疑惑者、善巧者;
调伏者、最胜御者;
无上者、具妙法者
无疑者、光照者
断慢者、勇者
我是世尊的弟子。
人牛王、不可衡量者;
甚深者、证得牟那者;
安稳的造作者、明智通达者
安住于法者、善自调御者
超越执着者、解脱无碍者
我是彼世尊的声闻弟子。
龙象,住于远离处者;
已尽诸结缚者、解脱者;
能应答者、清净者
已倒幢幡者、离贪者
已调伏者、无戏论者
我是彼世尊的声闻。
第七仙人、无诈者;
三明者、得梵者;
沐浴者、通达文句者
轻安者、通达吠陀者
施主、帝释
我是彼世尊的声闻弟子。
圣者、已修习成就者;
得达彼岸者、授记说者;
具念者、观察者
不倾向者、不远离者
不动者、得自在者
我乃彼世尊的声闻。
善升起者、禅修者;
内心无随著的清净者;
无依者、利乐者
远离者、证最上者
已度者、令度者
我是彼世尊的声闻弟子。
寂静者、广慧者;
大慧者、离贪者;
如来、善逝;
无与伦比者、无能胜者;
无畏者、善巧者;
我即是彼世尊的声闻。
断除了渴爱者、佛陀;
离烟者、无所染著者;
应受供养者、应请者;
最上士、无比者;
大雄、得名声之最上者;
“我是世尊的声闻。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dhīrassa vigatamohassa, Pabhinnakhīlassa vijitavijayassa; Anīghassa susamacittassa; Vuddhasīlassa sādhupaññassa; Vesamantarassa vimalassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Akathaṃkathissa tusitassa; Vantalokāmisassa muditassa; Katasamaṇassa manujassa; Antimasārīrassa narassa; Anopamassa virajassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Asaṃsayassa kusalassa; Venayikassa sārathivarassa; Anuttarassa ruciradhammassa; Nikkaṅkhassa pabhāsakassa; Mānacchidassa vīrassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Nisabhassa appameyyassa; Gambhīrassa monappattassa; Khemaṅkarassa vedassa; Dhammaṭṭhassa saṃvutattassa; Saṅgātigassa muttassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Nāgassa pantasenassa; Khīṇasaṃyojanassa muttassa; Paṭimantakassa dhonassa; Pannaddhajassa vītarāgassa; Dantassa nippapañcassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Isisattamassa akuhassa; Tevijjassa brahmappattassa; Nhātakassa padakassa; Passaddhassa viditavedassa; Purindadassa sakkassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Ariyassa bhāvitattassa; Pattippattassa veyyākaraṇassa; Satimato vipassissa; Anabhinatassa no apanatassa; Anejassa vasippattassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Samuggatassa jhāyissa; Ananugatantarassa suddhassa; Asitassa hitassa; Pavivittassa aggappattassa; Tiṇṇassa tārayantassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Santassa bhūripaññassa; Mahāpaññassa vītalobhassa; Tathāgatassa sugatassa; Appaṭipuggalassa asamassa; Visāradassa nipuṇassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmi. ‘‘Taṇhacchidassa buddhassa; Vītadhūmassa anupalittassa; Āhuneyyassa yakkhassa; Uttamapuggalassa atulassa; Mahato yasaggappattassa; Bhagavato tassa sāvakohamasmī’’ti. –
这些是优婆离居士所说、收录于《优婆离经》中的偈颂。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ upāligahapatinā vuttāsu upālisutte āgatagāthāsu.
“如所闻”:即如所说,意为如巴利圣典中所载。因为“正自觉者、无边智者、无上智者、菩提智慧者”这些名称出自《功德篇章》,而“智者”等名称则出自《优婆离经》的偈颂。其中,菩提即是一切知智,由于以此智而了知,所以他具有此智,故名菩提智慧者,也就是世尊。以慧执持,或以慧为依止,故名智者。由于断尽了一切内心的障碍,故为破障碍者。已胜、正胜、当胜一切凡夫,故为胜利者。何者?即死魔、烦恼魔、天子魔。他已战胜它们,故为已战胜胜利者,也就是世尊。在此,由于战胜了烦恼魔与死魔,蕴魔也应视为已被战胜。显示巴利原文
Yathārutamevāti yathāvuttameva, pāḷiyaṃ āgatamevāti adhippāyo. Yasmā ‘‘sammāsambuddhaṃ anantabuddhiṃ anomabuddhiṃ bodhipaññāṇa’’nti imāni vaṇṇapaṭṭhāne āgatanāmāni, ‘‘dhīra’’ntiādīni pana upāligāthāsu āgatanāmāni. Tattha bodhi vuccati sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, taṃ sañjānanahetuttā paññāṇaṃ etassāti bodhipaññāṇo, bhagavā. Dhiyā paññāya rāti gaṇhāti , sevatīti vā dhīro. Samucchinnasabbacetokhīlattā pabhinnakhīlo. Sabbaputhujjane vijiniṃsu vijayanti vijinissanti cāti vijayā. Ke te? Maccumārakilesamāradevaputtamārā. Te vijitā vijayā etenāti vijitavijayo, bhagavā. Kilesamāramaccumāravijayeneva panettha abhisaṅkhārakkhandhamārāpi vijitāva hontīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
就“善说”等词而言(《清净道论》1.147):因为开显了具足意义、具足文句、完全圆满、完全清净的梵行,所以是善说法;又因为没有意义的颠倒,所以是善说。正如其他外道的法,其意义会产生颠倒:因为他们所说的“障碍法”并非真实的障碍,所说的“导出法”并非真实的导出,因此那些外道是恶说法者。而世尊的法,其意义不会产生颠倒,因为那些被说为“这些是障碍法、这些是导出法”的法,确实如其所说,不会偏离真实。如此,教法即是善说法。显示巴利原文
Svākkhātantiādīsu (visuddhi. 1.147) sātthasabyañjanakevalaparipuṇṇaparisuddhabrahmacariyassa pakāsanato svākkhāto dhammo, atthavipallāsābhāvato vā suṭṭhu akkhātoti svākkhāto. Yathā hi aññatitthiyānaṃ dhammassa attho vipallāsaṃ āpajjati ‘‘antarāyikā’’ti vuttadhammānaṃ antarāyikattābhāvato, ‘‘niyyānikā’’ti ca vuttadhammānaṃ niyyānikattābhāvato, tena te aññatitthiyā durakkhātadhammāyeva honti, na tathā bhagavato dhammassa attho vipallāsaṃ āpajjati ‘‘ime dhammā antarāyikā niyyānikā’’ti evaṃ vuttadhammānaṃ tathābhāvānatikkamanatoti. Evaṃ tāva pariyattidhammo svākkhāto dhammo.
至于出世间法,则因为开显了与涅槃相应的行道,以及与行道相应的涅槃,故为善说。如所说:显示巴利原文
Lokuttaradhammo pana nibbānānurūpāya paṭipattiyā paṭipadānurūpassa ca nibbānassa akkhātattā svākkhāto. Yathāha –
再者,世尊为弟子们善巧施设的导向涅槃的行道,是令涅槃与行道相契合。恰如恒河之水与阎牟那河之水合流相融,同样地,世尊为弟子们善巧施设的导向涅槃的行道,也是令涅槃与行道相契合。显示巴利原文
‘‘Supaññattā kho pana tena bhagavatā sāvakānaṃ nibbānagāminī paṭipadā saṃsandati nibbānañca paṭipadā ca. Seyyathāpi nāma gaṅgodakaṃ yamunodakena saṃsandati sameti, evameva supaññattā tena bhagavatā sāvakānaṃ nibbānagāminī paṭipadā saṃsandati nibbānañca paṭipadā cā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.296).
在此,圣道不落于两边,即是中道,故被宣说为‘中道’,是善说的。沙门果唯是止息烦恼,故被宣说为‘止息烦恼者’,是善说的。涅槃具有常、不死、洲、庇护等自性,即以常等自性而被宣说,是善说的。如是,出世间法也是善说的。显示巴利原文
Ariyamaggo cettha antadvayaṃ anupagamma majjhimāpaṭipadābhūtova ‘‘majjhimā paṭipadā’’ti akkhātattā svākkhāto. Sāmaññaphalāni paṭippassaddhakilesāneva ‘‘paṭippassaddhakilesānī’’ti akkhātattā svākkhātāni. Nibbānaṃ sassatāmatatāṇaleṇādisabhāvameva sassatādisabhāvavasena akkhātattā svākkhātanti evaṃ lokuttaradhammopi svākkhāto.
圣道应由圣者自己观察,即由圣者在自相续中令贪等灭尽之后自己观察:‘我的贪等已被圣道断除’,应由自己、不由他人引导而观察,故为现见。现见即是现见者。又,九种出世间法,无论由哪位圣弟子所证得,都应舍弃依信他而行,而以现量智自己观察,故为现见的。或者,殊胜之见为现见,由现见而战胜故为现见的。于此,圣道以相应的现见,圣果以作为因的现见,涅槃以作为所缘的现见而战胜烦恼,因此,如同由车战胜而称车士,九种出世间法也由现见战胜,故为现见的。或者,‘见’名为观看,所见即是现见,意为显现。值得现见故为现见的。因为出世间法确实在由修习现观与作证现观而正在被观看时,便能遮止轮回怖畏,因此,如同值得衣而称衣者,值得现见故为现见的。显示巴利原文
Ariyamaggo attano santāne rāgādīnaṃ abhāvaṃ karontena ariyapuggalena sāmaṃ daṭṭhabbo ‘‘ariyamaggena mama rāgādayo pahīnā’’ti sayaṃ attanā anaññaneyyena passitabboti sandiṭṭhi, sandiṭṭhi eva sandiṭṭhiko. Apica navavidho lokuttaradhammo yena yena adhigato hoti, tena tena ariyasāvakena parasaddhāya gantabbataṃ hitvā paccakkhañāṇena sayaṃ daṭṭhabboti sandiṭṭhiko. Atha vā pasatthā diṭṭhi sandiṭṭhi, sandiṭṭhiyā jayatīti sandiṭṭhiko. Tathā hettha ariyamaggo sampayuttāya, ariyaphalaṃ kāraṇabhūtāya, nibbānaṃ visayibhūtāya sandiṭṭhiyā kilese jayati, tasmā yathā rathena jayatīti rathiko, evaṃ navavidhopi lokuttaradhammo sandiṭṭhiyā jayatīti sandiṭṭhiko. Atha vā diṭṭhanti dassanaṃ vuccati, diṭṭhameva sandiṭṭhaṃ, sandassananti attho. Sandiṭṭhaṃ arahatīti sandiṭṭhiko. Lokuttaradhammo hi bhāvanābhisamayavasena sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena ca dissamānoyeva vaṭṭabhayaṃ nivatteti, tasmā yathā vatthamarahatīti vatthiko, evaṃ sandiṭṭhaṃ arahatīti sandiṭṭhiko.
就自己受果而言,没有应等待的时节,故为无时的。如同世间善法有‘往生后、或后后时’等应等待方才受果的时节,而此法并非如此,这是其义。无时即是无时的——并非经过五日、七日等时节之后方受果报,而是在自己生起的刹那间即受果报。或者,在受自己果报方面,有间隔、遥远的时节已到达、已临近,故为有时的,即异时受果者。那是什么?是世间善法。而此法因是等无间受果者,故非有时的,即是无时的。此‘无时的’一词正是针对圣道而说。显示巴利原文
Attano phaladānaṃ sandhāya nāssa āgametabbo kālo atthīti akālo. Yathā hi lokiyakusalassa upapajjaaparāpariyāyetiādinā phaladānaṃ pati āgametabbo kālo atthi, na evametassāti attho. Akāloyeva akāliko, na pañcāhasattāhādibhedaṃ kālaṃ khepetvā phalaṃ deti, attano pana pavattisamanantarameva phaladoti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā attano phalappadāne vippakaṭṭho dūro kālo patto upanīto assāti kāliko, kālantaraphaladāyī. Ko so? Lokiyo kusaladhammo. Ayaṃ pana samanantaraphaladāyakattā na kālikoti akāliko. Maggameva hi sandhāya ‘‘akāliko’’ti idaṃ vuttaṃ.
“来,看此法!”——如此生起的“来看”之仪轨,此法堪能承受,故为“来见的”。为何此法堪能承受这些仪轨?因从胜义上真实存在,且清净无染。譬如,若空拳之中,纵使宣称有金银或黄金,也不能说“来,看这个”。何以故?因其并不存在。即便存在,如粪尿等,若为令心欢喜而显示其可意相,亦不能说“来,看这个”,反而须以草叶等将其遮盖。何以故?因其不清净。然而,此九种出世间法,体性既真实存在,又如无云晴空中的满月轮、置于红毯上的天宝一般,清净无瑕。因此,正因真实存在且清净,堪能承受“来见”之仪轨,故为“来见的”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ehi passa imaṃ dhamma’’nti evaṃ pavattaṃ ehipassavidhiṃ arahatīti ehipassiko. Kasmā panesa taṃ vidhiṃ arahatīti? Paramatthato vijjamānattā parisuddhattā ca. Rittamuṭṭhiyañhi hiraññaṃ vā suvaṇṇaṃ vā atthīti vatvāpi ‘‘ehi passa ima’’nti na sakkā vattuṃ. Kasmā? Avijjamānattā. Vijjamānampi ca gūthaṃ vā muttaṃ vā manuññabhāvappakāsanena cittasampahaṃsanatthaṃ ‘‘ehi passa ima’’nti na sakkā vattuṃ, apica kho naṃ tiṇehi vā paṇṇehi vā paṭicchādetabbameva hoti. Kasmā? Aparisuddhattā. Ayaṃ pana navavidhopi lokuttaradhammo sabhāvato ca vijjamāno vigatavalāhake ca ākāse sampuṇṇacandamaṇḍalaṃ viya paṇḍukambale nikkhittajātimaṇi viya ca parisuddho, tasmā vijjamānattā parisuddhattā ca ehipassavidhiṃ arahatīti ehipassiko.
应被引入,故为“能引入的”。此处抉择如下:引入即是引导;纵使不顾衣燃或头燃,也值得以修习之力于自心中引入、令其生起,故为“能引入的”。此义适用于有为的出世间法;而无为法则值得以所缘的方式于自心中引入,故亦为“能引入的”,意即值得以作证的方式依止。又,涅槃能引导圣者,故圣道是“应被引入的”;果与涅槃法应被引入作证,故为“应被引入的”;应被引入的,即是“能引入的”。显示巴利原文
Upanetabboti opaneyyiko. Ayaṃ panettha vinicchayo – upanayanaṃ upanayo, ādittaṃ celaṃ vā sīsaṃ vā ajjhupekkhitvāpi bhāvanāvasena attano citte upanayanaṃ uppādanaṃ arahatīti opaneyyiko. Idaṃ saṅkhate lokuttaradhamme yujjati, asaṅkhato pana attano citte ārammaṇabhāvena upanayanaṃ arahatīti opaneyyiko, sacchikiriyāvasena allīyanaṃ arahatīti attho . Atha vā nibbānaṃ upaneti ariyapuggalanti ariyamaggo upaneyyo, sacchikātabbataṃ upanetabboti phalanibbānadhammo upaneyyo, upaneyyo eva opaneyyiko.
应为一切智者——如利根知者等——各自于内心中了知:“我的道已修习,果已证得,灭已作证”,故为“智者各自了知的”。因为并非依戒师所修之道,其共住弟子的烦恼便得断除;弟子并不因戒师的果等至而得安乐住;他亦不能作证由戒师所证悟的涅槃。因此,此法不应如他人头上的庄严具般旁观,而应唯于自心中亲见、亲证,这就是智者各自了知的意义。显示巴利原文
Sabbehi ugghaṭitaññūādīhi viññūhi ‘‘bhāvito me maggo, adhigataṃ phalaṃ, sacchikato nirodho’’ti attani attani veditabboti paccattaṃ veditabbo viññūhi. Na hi upajjhāyena bhāvitena maggena saddhivihārikassa kilesā pahīyanti, na so tassa phalasamāpattiyā phāsu viharati, na tena sacchikataṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikaroti, tasmā na esa parassa sīse ābharaṇaṃ viya daṭṭhabbo, attano pana citteyeva daṭṭhabbo, anubhavitabbo viññūhīti vuttaṃ hoti.
‘无为’:以和合、聚集——即以因缘和合为相的和合,聚集后并非由相应的因缘所造作、所生起,故称无为。于此中无死,故为无死;或者,证得此者,其人不再有死、不再有死亡,故为无死。虽然此处通过‘我舍离善说之法’等语,处处显示了‘法’一词的使用,然而即使不以‘法’一词连接而说同义词,也并非不名为舍离;因此应知,即便说‘我舍离善说’等,也即是舍离学处。而如‘善说之法’等中的‘法’一词,应知是为了表明‘善说’等词是‘法’的定语。即使单单一法蕴,也有其名称,这里所说的‘第一法蕴、第二法蕴、问法蕴、答法蕴’等,应知即是法蕴的名称。显示巴利原文
Asaṅkhatanti saṅgamma samāgamma paccayasamodhānalakkhaṇena saṅgamena sannipatitvā anurūpehi paccayehi akataṃ anibbattitanti asaṅkhataṃ. Natthi ettha matanti amataṃ, etasmiṃ vā adhigate natthi puggalassa mataṃ maraṇanti amataṃ. Kiñcāpi ettha ‘‘svākkhātaṃ dhammaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā sabbattha dhamma-saddappayogo dassito, tathāpi dhamma-saddena ayojetvā vutte vevacane na paccakkhānaṃ nāma na hotīti ‘‘svākkhātaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā vuttepi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Svākkhātaṃ dhamma’’ntiādinā pana dhamma-saddappayogo svākkhātā-disaddānaṃ dhamma-visesanabhāvadassanatthaṃ katoti veditabbaṃ. Ekadhammakkhandhassapi nāmanti ettha ‘‘paṭhamadhammakkhandhaṃ dutiyadhammakkhandhaṃ pucchādhammakkhandhaṃ vissajjanādhammakkhandha’’ntiādinā dhammakkhandhanāmāni veditabbāni.
‘善行道’者,因于善说的法与律中依教奉行,故为善行道。因依中道而行,不落入二边,且为断除身、语、意之弯曲、扭曲、不实等过失而行,故为正直行道。‘理趣’即指涅槃,因由圣道等而被了知、被证得、被作证,为彼义理而行,故为依理趣行道。因如此行道者,堪受他人出于对功德的敬重而行的起迎、合掌等如法仪礼,故为如仪行道。显示巴利原文
Suppaṭipannanti svākkhāte dhammavinaye yathānusiṭṭhaṃ paṭipannattā suppaṭipannaṃ. Majjhimāya paṭipadāya antadvayaṃ anupagamma paṭipannattā kāyavacīmanovaṅkakuṭilajimhadosappahānāya paṭipannattā ca ujuppaṭipannaṃ. Ñāyo vuccati nibbānaṃ ariyamaggādīhi ñāyati paṭivijjhīyati sacchikarīyatīti katvā, tadatthāya paṭipannattā ñāyappaṭipannaṃ. Yathā paṭipannā guṇasambhāvanāya parehi kariyamānaṃ paccuṭṭhānādisāmīcikammaṃ arahanti, tathā paṭipannattā sāmīcippaṭipannaṃ.
以成对的方式,初道住者与初果住者为一对,如此共为四对人。在此,本应说‘四对人僧’,却说为‘四’,应视为不作格尾省略的表述。所谓‘四对人僧’,即指有此四对人者,故称为僧。‘八人补特伽罗’:依人补特伽罗而言,初道住者为一,初果住者为一,依此理则恰好有八人补特伽罗。有此八人补特伽罗者,即八人补特伽罗僧。在此,‘人’与‘补特伽罗’二词同义,然为适应化导者而作如是说。显示巴利原文
Yugaḷavasena paṭhamamaggaṭṭho phalaṭṭhoti idamekaṃ yugaḷanti evaṃ cattāri purisayugāni honti. Ettha pana ‘‘catupurisayugaṃ saṅgha’’nti vattabbe ‘‘cattārī’’ti vibhattilopaṃ akatvā niddeso katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Cattāri purisayugāni etthāti catupurisayugoti hi saṅgho vuccati. Aṭṭhapurisapuggalanti purisapuggalavasena eko paṭhamamaggaṭṭho, eko phalaṭṭhoti iminā nayena aṭṭheva purisapuggalā honti. Aṭṭha purisapuggalā etthāti aṭṭhapurisapuggalo, saṅgho. Ettha ca purisoti vā puggaloti vā ekatthānetāni padāni, veneyyavasena panetaṃ vuttaṃ.
在“应供”等词中,所谓“供物”,即从远处带来而应供养之物,这是对四种资具中应施予具戒者的称呼。僧团堪能接受此供物,因其能令供养产生大果报,故为“应供”。或者,从远方而来,一切所有物亦应在此供养,故为“应供”;或堪受诸天等供养,故为“应供”。而婆罗门们认为,他们所供奉的火是应供者,于彼处供养能得大果报。若因供养能得大果报而称为应供者,则僧团才是真正的应供者,因为于僧团中所作供养能生大果报。如说:显示巴利原文
Āhuneyyantiādīsu (visuddhi. 1.156) ānetvā hunitabbanti āhunaṃ, dūratopi ānetvā sīlavantesu dātabbānaṃ catunnaṃ paccayānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ āhunaṃ paṭiggahetuṃ yutto tassa mahapphalabhāvakaraṇatoti āhuneyyo, saṅgho. Atha vā dūratopi āgantvā sabbasāpateyyampi ettha hunitabbanti āhavanīyo, sakkādīnampi vā āhavanaṃ arahatīti āhavanīyo. Yo cāyaṃ brāhmaṇānaṃ āhavanīyo aggi, yattha hutaṃ mahapphalanti tesaṃ laddhi. Sace hutassa mahapphalatāya āhavanīyo, saṅghova āhavanīyo. Saṅghe hutañhi mahapphalaṃ hoti. Yathāha –
若有人百年间,于林中奉事火;
而仅以须臾之间,供养一位修治自心者;
那样的供养才更为殊胜,远胜于百年之祭祀。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yo ca vassasataṃ jantu, aggiṃ paricare vane; Ekañca bhāvitattānaṃ, muhuttamapi pūjaye; Sāyeva pūjanā seyyo, yañce vassasataṃ huta’’nti. (dha. pa. 107);
在其他部类中,“āhavanīya”一词与此处的“āhuneyya”一词,于义理上实为同一,仅在文辞上略有少许差别。显示巴利原文
Tadetaṃ nikāyantare ‘‘āhavanīyo’’ti padaṃ idha ‘‘āhuneyyo’’ti iminā padena atthato ekaṃ, byañjanato panettha kiñcimattameva nānaṃ.
关于“应宾客”:此处所谓“宾客物”,是指为来自诸方、可爱可意的亲友,以恭敬而准备的待客之施物。即使将那些可爱的亲友等宾客放置一旁,也唯独适合施予僧团,唯有僧团堪能接受此物。因为没有与僧团相等的宾客。确实,他唯有在隔一佛世时才能得见,且恒常具足可爱、可意之戒等功德,因此,既适合对他施予宾客物,也适合他接受宾客物,故称“应宾客”。显示巴利原文
Pāhuneyyanti ettha pana pāhunaṃ vuccati disāvidisato āgatānaṃ piyamanāpānaṃ ñātimittānaṃ atthāya sakkārena paṭiyattaṃ āgantukadānaṃ. Tampi ṭhapetvā te tathārūpe piyamittādike pāhunake saṅghasseva dātuṃ yuttaṃ, saṅghova taṃ paṭiggahetuṃ yutto. Saṅghasadiso hi pāhunako natthi. Tathā hesa ekabuddhantare vītivatteyeva dissati, abbokiṇṇañca piyamanāpattakarehi sīlādidhammehi samannāgatoti evaṃ pāhunamassa dātuṃ yuttaṃ, pāhunañca paṭiggahetuṃ yuttoti pāhuneyyo.
“供养”是指众生依此增长所欲的成就,故称供养,也就是相信他世而应施的布施。僧团堪受此供养,或因供养而有利益,由于能令其生大果报而净化它,故为“应供养”。值得一切世间以合掌置于头顶的合掌礼,故为“应合掌”。无上福田,即是一切世间无与伦比的生长福德之处。正如国王或大臣的稻谷或大麦生长之处,称为国王的稻田、麦田,同样,僧团是一切世间生长福德之处。因为依托僧团,世间能生长种种利益安乐的福德,故僧团是世间的无上福田。这里,诸如“善行道僧”等,一切处使用“僧”字,是为了表明“善行道”等是僧的修饰语,因此,即使说“我舍善行道”等,也应当视为即构成舍戒。显示巴利原文
Dakkhanti etāya sattā yathādhippetāhi sampattīhi vaḍḍhantīti dakkhiṇā, paralokaṃ saddahitvā dātabbadānaṃ. Taṃ dakkhiṇaṃ arahati, dakkhiṇāya vā hito yasmā naṃ mahapphalakaratāya visodhetīti dakkhiṇeyyo. Ubho hatthe sirasi patiṭṭhāpetvā sabbalokena kariyamānaṃ añjalikammaṃ arahatīti añjalikaraṇīyo. Anuttaraṃ puññakkhettanti sabbalokassa asadisaṃ puññaviruhanaṭṭhānaṃ . Yathā hi rañño vā amaccassa vā sālīnaṃ vā yavānaṃ vā viruhanaṭṭhānaṃ rañño sālikkhettaṃ yavakkhettanti vuccati, evaṃ saṅgho sabbalokassa puññānaṃ viruhanaṭṭhānaṃ. Saṅghaṃ nissāya hi lokassa nānappakārahitasukhasaṃvattanikāni puññāni viruhanti, tasmā saṅgho anuttaraṃ puññakkhettaṃ lokassa. Etthāpi ‘‘suppaṭipannaṃ saṅgha’’ntiādinā sabbattha saṅgha-saddappayogo suppaṭipannā-disaddānaṃ saṅghavisesanabhāvadassanatthaṃ kato, tasmā ‘‘suppaṭipannaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā vuttepi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hotiyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在戒的异名中,如果离开“戒”字,单用“比丘”、“比丘尼”等词,并非戒的异名,因此唯有说出“比丘戒”、“比丘尼戒”时,才成为首要;而增上戒等即是戒,所以即使说“我舍增上戒”等,也成为首要。应知“初波罗夷”等,只是学处的摄持,并非罪过的摄持。显示巴利原文
Sikkhāvevacanesu pana sikkhā-saddaṃ vinā kevalaṃ bhikkhu-saddo bhikkhunī-saddo ca sikkhāya adhivacanaṃ na hotīti ‘‘bhikkhusikkhaṃ bhikkhunīsikkha’’nti vutteyeva sīsaṃ eti, adhisīlādayo pana sikkhā evāti ‘‘adhisīlaṃ paccakkhāmī’’tiādinā vuttepi sīsaṃ eti. Paṭhamaṃ pārājikantiādinā sikkhāpadānaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, na āpattīnaṃ.
在和尚的异名中,针对作为和尚而令其出家并授予具足戒的那位,说“令我出家者”等。“以谁为根本”,即以谁为增上因或因缘。所谓“以谁为根本”,是指出家与具足戒以他为根本、增上因或因缘。虽然“根本”一词有相对关系,但因恒常相对而能表达意义,故应视为派生词用法。显示巴利原文
Upajjhāyavevacanesu upajjhāyo hutvā yo pabbājesi ceva upasampādesi ca, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘yo maṃ pabbājesī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yassa mūlenāti yassa padhānabhāvena kāraṇabhāvena vā. Yassa mūlaṃ padhānabhāvo kāraṇabhāvo vā etissāti yassamūlikā, pabbajjā upasampadā ca. Mūla-saddassa sāpekkhabhāvepi niccasāpekkhatāya gamakattā taddhitavutti daṭṭhabbā.
在阿阇梨的诸多异名中,若有人未担任和尚而仅以阿阇梨身份为人出家,或以甘马语阿阇梨身份为人授具足戒,即针对此人说“令我出家者”“令我受教诫者”。以此二语,显示了出家阿阇梨与授具戒阿阇梨。“我依彼而住”,显示依止阿阇梨。“我令彼诵”等,则指教法阿阇梨。其中,“我令彼诵”是我令其诵习文句;“我遍问”是我遍问所学文句之义。在弟子等异名中,亦应依所说之理了知其义趣。而“以彼为根本”应知义为“于彼近处”。显示巴利原文
Ācariyavevacanesu pana yo upajjhaṃ adatvā ācariyova hutvā pabbājesi, kammavācācariyo hutvā upasampādesi ca, taṃ sandhāya ‘‘yo maṃ pabbājesi, yo maṃ anusāvesī’’ti vuttaṃ. Imehi dvīhi vacanehi pabbajjācariyo ca upasampadācariyo ca dassito. Yāhaṃ nissāya vasāmīti nissayācariyaṃ dasseti. Yāhaṃ uddisāpemītiādinā pana dhammācariyo vutto. Tattha uddisāpemīti pāṭhaṃ uddisāpemi. Paripucchāmīti uggahitapāṭhassa atthaṃ paripucchāmi. Saddhivihārikavevacanādīsu ca vuttānusāreneva attho veditabbo. Tassa mūleti ettha pana tassa santiketi attho daṭṭhabbo.
“Okallaka”是对那些为饥渴等苦所逼迫、快乐耗尽、不沐浴亦不顾惜身体的悲惨之人的称呼。“Moḷibaddha”意为束发髻或除去冠冕者。虽然二语近事男在初成道时即已存在,但为了显示即便以当时可得之名来称呼亦构成舍戒,故说“二语近事男”。而此处“二语”即是其同义词,应作如是解。因此,即使只说“请记住我是二语者”,也构成舍戒。其余诸词也是如此。显示巴利原文
Okallakoti khuppipāsādidukkhaparetānaṃ khīṇasukhānaṃ nahānādisarīrapaṭijagganarahitānaṃ kapaṇamanussānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Moḷibaddhoti sikhābaddho omukkamakuṭo vā. Kiñcāpi dvevāciko upāsako paṭhamabodhiyaṃyeva sambhavati, tathāpi tadā labbhamānanāmaṃ gahetvā vuttepi sikkhāpaccakkhānaṃ hotiyevāti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘dvevāciko upāsako’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Dvevāciko’’ti idameva panettha vevacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tasmā ‘‘dvevācikoti maṃ dhārehī’’ti ettakepi vutte sīsaṃ eti. Evaṃ sesesupi.
“Kumāraka”指尚在童稚阶段、极为年幼的沙弥。“Cellaka”指较其稍大的小沙弥。“Ceṭaka”指中等沙弥。“Moḷigalla”指大沙弥。而“Samaṇuddesa”则是沙弥的总称。“Nigaṇṭhupaṭṭhāka”等也应视为外道弟子的异名。显示巴利原文
Kumārakoti kumārāvattho ativiya daharasāmaṇero. Cellakoti tato mahantataro khuddakasāmaṇero. Ceṭakoti majjhimo. Moḷigalloti mahāsāmaṇero. Samaṇuddesoti pana avisesato sāmaṇerādhivacanaṃ. Nigaṇṭhupaṭṭhākotiādīnipi titthiyasāvakavevacanānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“Dussīla”意为无戒者、远离戒者。“Pāpadhamma”意为因恶戒而具有低劣志趣的鄙恶本性。“Asucisaṅkassarasamācāra”即由于身业等不清净,成为不净、令人疑惧而忆念的行径。恶戒者一见到什么不适当的事,便会被他人怀疑:“这一定是某某干的。”当他见到比丘们为某事商议时,自己便惊疑而想:“这些比丘莫非是知道了我的所作所为而在商议?”其行径就是如此令人疑惧而忆念。“Paṭicchannakammanta”即因应感羞耻而必须隐藏的行为。“Assamaṇa”即非沙门。在取筹等场合,以“我也是沙门”的邪妄自称而成为自称沙门者;因无殊胜行而成为非梵行者;在布萨等场合,以“我也是梵行者”的邪妄自称而成为自称梵行者;由于戒行的腐臭败坏而从内部渗漏,故为内腐者;由于从六门流出贪等烦恼而湿润,故为漏泄者;由于生起贪等垃圾,应被具戒者弃除,故为垃圾所生者。“Koṇṭha”即是恶戒者的称呼。显示巴利原文
Dussīloti nissīlo sīlavirahito. Pāpadhammoti dussīlattā eva hīnajjhāsayatāya lāmakasabhāvo. Asucisaṅkassarasamācāroti aparisuddhakāyakammāditāya asuci hutvā saṅkāya saritabbasamācāro. Dussīlo hi kiñcideva asāruppaṃ disvā ‘‘idaṃ asukena kataṃ bhavissatī’’ti paresaṃ āsaṅkanīyo hoti. Kenacideva karaṇīyena mantayante bhikkhū disvā ‘‘kacci nu kho ime mayā katakammaṃ jānitvā mantentī’’ti attanoyeva saṅkāya saritabbasamācāro. Paṭicchannakammantoti lajjitabbatāya paṭicchādetabbakammanto. Assamaṇoti na samaṇo. Salākaggahaṇādīsu ‘‘ahampi samaṇo’’ti micchāpaṭiññāya samaṇapaṭiñño, aseṭṭhacāritāya abrahmacārī, uposathādīsu ‘‘ahampi brahmacārī’’ti micchāpaṭiññāya brahmacāripaṭiñño, pūtinā kammena sīlavipattiyā anto anupaviṭṭhattā antopūti, chahi dvārehi rāgādikilesānussavanena tintattā avassuto, sañjātarāgādikacavarattā sīlavantehi chaḍḍetabbattā ca kasambujāto. Koṇṭhoti dussīlādhivacanametaṃ.
“或者还有其他佛陀的同义词”等句,是通过“ya”字所指的佛陀等同义词,再用“ta”字来指称,因此说“以那些形态……佛陀等的同义词”。然而,那些又如何以形态等言辞来称谓呢?因此说“因为同义词”等。对于有形态的佛陀等,以形态来表明是合适的,但对于无形态的法与学等,又该如何呢?因此说“或者正因为是舍戒的形态”。因为舍戒的同义词被称为“舍戒的形态”。“Evaṃ kho”中,“kho”是表示决定的助词,故说“正是如此”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yāni vā panaññānipi atthi buddhavevacanāni vā’’tiādinā yaṃ-saddaparāmaṭṭhānaṃ buddhādivevacanānaṃyeva taṃ-saddena parāmasanaṃ hotīti āha – ‘‘tehi ākārehi…pe… buddhādīnaṃ vevacanehī’’ti. Kathaṃ pana tāni ākārādisaddehi voharīyantīti āha ‘‘vevacanāni hī’’tiādi. Saṇṭhānavantānaṃ buddhādīnaṃ saṇṭhānadīpanaṃ tāva hotu, saṇṭhānarahitānaṃ pana dhammasikkhādīnaṃ kathanti āha ‘‘sikkhāpaccakkhānasaṇṭhānattā eva vā’’ti. Sikkhāpaccakkhānarūpāni hi vevacanāni ‘‘sikkhāpaccakkhānasaṇṭhānānī’’ti vuccanti. Evaṃ khoti ettha khoti avadhāraṇatthe nipātoti āha ‘‘evamevā’’ti.
54 “Mucchāpareta”意为被痴迷所征服。为了显示畜生也能理解词义,便举出“龙王子”等例子。“三因结生”是就多数而言,因为并非所有天神都是三因结生,也有二因结生的情形。“极速了知”是说天神的果报心相续不像人类那样迟缓,所以能极速了知。显示巴利原文
54.Mucchāparetoti mucchāya abhibhūto. Vacanatthavijānanasamatthaṃ tiracchānagataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nāgamāṇavakassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tihetukapaṭisandhikāti yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ. Na hi sabbāpi devatā tihetukapaṭisandhikāva honti dvihetukānampi sambhavato. Atikhippaṃ jānantīti devatānaṃ bhavaṅgaparivāsassa manussānaṃ viya adandhabhāvato vuttaṃ.
“Sabhāgassa”指男性。“Visabhāgassa”指女性。“Anariyaka”指摩揭陀语以外的方言。“Davā”意为突然。“Ravā”意为偏离。“Aññaṃ bhaṇissāmīti”应理解为:本想说别的,却说出了“我舍佛”。或者,由于不精通字母的组合,或因表达能力欠缺,无法说出应说之语,转而说其他,也称为依“ravā”而说。这两种情况,想说明别的事却说了别的,道理是相同的,故说“与前有何差别”。显示巴利原文
Sabhāgassāti purisassa. Visabhāgassāti mātugāmassa. Anariyakoti māgadhavohārato añño. Davāti sahasā. Ravāti virajjhitvā. Aññaṃ bhaṇissāmīti aññaṃ bhaṇanto buddhaṃ paccakkhāmīti bhaṇatīti yojetabbaṃ. Akkharasamayānabhiññatāya vā karaṇasampattiyā abhāvato vā kathetabbaṃ kathetuṃ asakkonto hutvā aññaṃ kathento ravā bhaṇati nāma. Ubhayathāpi aññaṃ bhaṇitukāmassa aññabhaṇanaṃ samānanti āha ‘‘purimena ko viseso’’ti.
“Vāceti”指诵出圣典,或教他人学习。“Paripucchati”指询问圣典之义,或询问圣典。“Uggaṇhāti”指在他人跟前学习圣典。“Sajjhāyaṃ karoti”指诵习已学的圣典。“Vaṇṇeti”指解释圣典之义,从而解说圣典。“如陶器形状”意为如同某种形状的泥土,以此形容年老者由于一无所知,或根门迟钝,犹如未成器的泥土。“Garumedhasa”指由于心对所缘不能轻快地运作而迟钝,故称钝慧者,即愚钝者。“Sabbaso vā”显示“我将让人听到‘我舍学’这句话”的心念完全不存在。因为若无这样的心念,以任何方式做出那样的语表并使人闻知,是根本不可能发生的,故说“在‘我舍佛’等语中……作语表而不令人闻知”。显示巴利原文
Vācetīti pāḷiṃ kathento aññaṃ uggaṇhāpento vā vāceti. Paripucchatīti pāḷiyā atthaṃ paripucchanto pāḷiṃ paripucchati. Uggaṇhātīti aññassa santike pāḷiṃ uggaṇhāti. Sajjhāyaṃ karotīti uggahitapāḷiṃ sajjhāyati. Vaṇṇetīti pāḷiyā atthaṃ saṃvaṇṇento pāḷiṃ vaṇṇeti. Mahallakassa kiñci ajānanato aviditindriyatāya vā ‘‘potthakarūpasadisassā’’ti vuttaṃ, mattikāya katarūpasadisassāti attho. Garumedhassāti ārammaṇesu lahuppavattiyā abhāvato dandhagatikatāya garupaññassa, mandapaññassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sabbaso vāti iminā ‘‘idaṃ padaṃ sāvessāmi ‘sikkhaṃ paccakkhāmī’’’ti evaṃ pavattacittuppādassa abhāvaṃ dasseti. Yasmā pana asati evarūpe cittuppāde kenaci pariyāyena tathāvidhaṃ vacībhedaṃ katvā sāvanaṃ nāma neva sambhavati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhaṃ paccakkhāmītiādīsu…pe… vacībhedaṃ katvā na sāvetī’’ti.
根本制定注释显示巴利原文
Mūlapaññattivaṇṇanā
55 “应被指出者”即应当被揭示、应当被宣说者。“以诸烦恼”即依无惭等烦恼。“从此开始”即从“粗恶”一词开始。“彼之业”即名为行淫法的业。“见”等内容如前文所说的方法。“彼之”即指淫法。显示巴利原文
55.Niddisitabbassāti vivaritabbassa pakāsetabbassa. Kilesehīti ahirikādīhi kilesehi. Ito paṭṭhāyāti duṭṭhulla-padato paṭṭhāya. Tassa kammassāti methunadhammapaṭisevanasaṅkhātassa kammassa. Dassanantiādi vuttanayameva. Assāti methunadhammassa.
“应两两入定”即“双双入定”,故说“因应以两两入定故”。因达到与贪欲缠缚相似的状态,两者之间的此事称为淫,淫即是法,故名淫法,所以说“两者染著”等。其中,“染著”指以淫欲之贪而染著。“深染著”指以彼贪而极度染著。“漏泄”指因世间乐味、交友亲近而生起的淫欲贪所浸湿。“缠缚”指因淫欲贪生起而心被覆盖。“相似”指以染著等而相似。显示巴利原文
Dvīhi dvīhi samāpajjitabbā dvayaṃdvayasamāpattīti āha ‘‘dvayena dvayena samāpajjitabbato’’ti. Rāgapariyuṭṭhānena sadisabhāvappattiyā mithunānaṃ idaṃ methunaṃ, methunameva dhammo methunadhammoti āha ‘‘ubhinnaṃ rattāna’’ntiādi. Tattha rattānanti methunarāgena rattānaṃ. Sārattānanti teneva rāgena ativiya rattānaṃ. Avassutānanti lokassādamittasanthavavasena uppannamethunarāgena tintānaṃ. Pariyuṭṭhitānanti methunarāguppattiyā pariyonaddhacittānaṃ. Sadisānanti rattatādīhi sadisānaṃ.
由于“行淫者”一词在论母中并无此句,因此,为说明那些认为“为何将‘行淫者’提出”者的缘由,便说“于此‘应行淫’……乃至……论母语句”。“以女根”者,此应如“经由道路而行”等语句来理解。正如说“经由道路而行”时,可得“行于道路,或行于道中”之义;同理,说“以女根而插入”时,也得“插入女根,或插入于根中”之义。这大多是为了说明男性的行为而说。“根”与“男根”,其义相同。所谓“插入”并非仅指在外部接触,所以说“于风所不及之空处”。插入内部者方称“插入”,而非仅仅接触外部者。所谓“内部”,就通常情况而言,是指完全封闭的根内风所不及的空处。显示巴利原文
Yasmā ‘‘paṭisevati nāmā’’ti padaṃ mātikāya natthi, tasmā ‘‘paṭisevati nāmāti kasmā uddhaṭa’’nti yo maññati, tassa kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘paṭiseveyyāti ettha…pe… mātikāpada’’nti āha. Itthiyā nimittenāti idaṃ ‘‘maggena gacchatī’’tiādi viya daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yathā hi ‘‘maggena gacchatī’’ti vutte ‘‘maggaṃ gacchati, magge vā gacchatī’’ti ayamattho labbhati, evaṃ ‘‘itthiyā nimittena pavesetī’’ti vutte ‘‘itthiyā nimittaṃ paveseti, nimitte vā pavesetī’’ti ayamattho labbhati. Idañca yebhuyyena purisapayogadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Nimittaṃ aṅgajātanti atthato ekaṃ. Pavesanaṃ nāma na bahi chupanamattanti āha ‘‘vātena asamphuṭṭhe allokāse’’ti. Abbhantarañhi pavesento ‘‘pavesetī’’ti vuccati, na bahi chupanto. Abbhantaranti ca pakatiyā sabbaso pihitassa nimittassa vātena asamphuṭṭhokāso vuccatīti.
现在,为了完全杜绝任何可乘之机,将女根与男根中,进入时彼此应接触的特定部位分别解说,便说“女根有四边”等。凡在风所不及的空处,以任一边接触而进入者,即称为“插入”。所谓“中间”,就女根而言,指其下底面,即如不接触四边而进入时,所开张的女根下底面;而于男根,则指顶端而说“中间”。所谓“上方”,指从顶端向上的部位。这是针对以中间弯曲进入者,或如以某处进入时,手指中节弯曲,类似手指中节背面的男根上方中间部位而说。“以下方进入”指接触女根的下部而进入。“以中间进入”指接触内底面而以中间进入。若有人不接触任何处而进入后抽出,则不犯波罗夷,但犯恶作,如同断头事中,在瓦塔卡鸟的口中不接触而进入后抽出者。“仅以中间接触而进入”指以顶端接触而进入。“以中节背面、弯曲手指”为其关联。或应连接为“如以弯曲手指的中节背面进入”。所谓“收缩”指以根中间分开。所谓“以上方”指收缩后的上方顶端。现在,对于男根,在下方所说六处之上方,依所说处之次第,别取四边,显示男根有十种部位差别,故说“其中”等。而下方尚未……显示巴利原文
Idāni sabbathā lesokāsapidahanatthaṃ itthinimitte purisanimitte ca labbhamānaṃ pavesakāle aññamaññaṃ phassārahaṃ padesavisesaṃ vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘itthinimitte cattāri passānī’’tiādimāha. Vātena hi asamphuṭṭhe allokāse yattha katthaci ekenapi padesena chupitvā pavesento ‘‘pavesetī’’ti vuccati. Vemajjhanti yathā cattāri passāni asamphusanto paveseti, evaṃ katavivarassa itthinimittassa heṭṭhimatalaṃ vuccati , purisanimitte pana majjhanti aggakoṭiṃ sandhāya vadati. Uparīti aggakoṭito uparibhāgappadeso. Idañca majjhena samiñjitvā pavesentassa majjhimapabbasamiñjitaṅguliṃ katthaci pavesentassa aṅguliyā majjhimapabbapiṭṭhisadisaṃ aṅgajātassa uparibhāgavemajjhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhā pavesentoti itthinimittassa heṭṭhimabhāgena chupantaṃ pavesento. Majjhena pavesentoti abbhantaratalaṃ chupitvā majjhena pavesento. Katthaci acchupantaṃ pavesetvā nīharantassa hi natthi pārājikaṃ, dukkaṭaṃ pana hoti chinnasīsavatthusmiṃ vaṭṭakate mukhe acchupantaṃ pavesetvā nīharantassa viya. Majjheneva chupantaṃ pavesentoti aggakoṭiyā chupantaṃ pavesento. Majjhimapabbapiṭṭhiyā samiñjitaṅgulinti sambandho. Atha vā samiñjitaṅguliṃ majjhimapabbapiṭṭhiyā pavesento viyāti yojetabbaṃ. Saṅkocetvāti nimittamajjhena bhinditvā. Uparibhāgenāti saṅkocitassa uparibhāgakoṭiyā. Idāni purisanimittassa heṭṭhā vuttesu chasu ṭhānesu uparīti vuttaṭṭhānantarassa vasena visuṃ cattāri passāni gahetvā purisanimitte dasadhā ṭhānabhedaṃ dassento ‘‘tatthā’’tiādimāha. Heṭṭhā pana visuṃ tāni aggahetvā ‘‘cattāri passānī’’ti vacanasāmaññatopi visuṃ visuṃ labbhamānāni ekaccaṃ gahetvā cha ṭhānāni vuttāni. Tulādaṇḍasadisaṃ pavesentassāti ujukaṃ pavesentassa.
“于根中生起”是指在自己的根中生起。“皮栓”是指于根上生起的皮,亦称为“疣块”。虽然于根中生起,但皮栓等本身即是根,因此说“犯波罗夷”。不说“已损坏的身净色”而说“已坏灭的身净色”,是为了显示没有执受。因此说“死皮或干痂”。若有执受,即便身净色已损坏,也如同损坏根依处,唯犯波罗夷;然而死皮与干痂没有执受,唯于有执受处犯波罗夷,因此说“犯恶作”。并非说这样做的人无罪,故说恶作。然而,女根即便坏灭,若执受尚存,仍唯犯波罗夷。对于死尸、对大部分已消尽者,说犯波罗夷,以此借淫欲乐遮止身触贪。若存在身触贪,则唯犯桑喀地谢沙;种子亦不属根的范围,故只说恶作。所谓“以根入根”。显示巴利原文
Nimitte jātanti attano nimitte jātaṃ. Cammakhīlanti nimitte uṭṭhitaṃ cammameva. ‘‘Uṇṇigaṇḍo’’tipi vadanti. Nimitte jātampi cammakhīlādi nimittamevāti āha ‘‘āpatti pārājikassā’’ti. ‘‘Upahatakāyappasāda’’nti avatvā ‘‘naṭṭhakāyappasāda’’nti vacanaṃ upādinnabhāvassa natthitādassanatthaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘matacammaṃ vā sukkhapīḷakaṃ vā’’ti. Sati hi upādinnabhāve upahatepi kāyappasāde upahatindriyavatthusmiṃ viya pārājikāpattiyeva siyā, matacammaṃ pana sukkhapīḷakañca anupādinnakaṃ upādinnakeyeva ca pārājikāpatti. Tenevāha ‘‘āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti. Na ca evaṃ karontassa anāpatti sakkā vattunti dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, itthinimittassa pana naṭṭhepi upādinnabhāve pārājikāpattiyeva. Mate akkhāyite yebhuyyena akkhāyite pārājikāpattivacanato methunassādenāti iminā kāyasaṃsaggarāgaṃ nivatteti. Sati hi kāyasaṃsaggarāge saṅghādisesova siyā, bījānipi nimittasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchantīti dukkaṭameva vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nimittena nimittaṃ pavesetī’’ti hi vuttaṃ.
如今,由于此淫欲论属非善之相,为教导“凡讲说与听闻此类事者,应如此行持”,故说“此名为淫欲论”等。淫欲论是增长贪欲之因,又是嬉笑之境,为遮止此二者,故教令致力于不净作意等。以不净作意,贪欲得以遮止;当沙门想等现前时,嬉笑便得以遮止。“出于对众生的怜悯”是指为保护众生免于恶趣之苦等。“出于对世间的慈愍”是指对有情世间的慈愍。显示巴利原文
Idāni imissā methunakathāya asabbhirūpattā ‘‘īdisaṃ ṭhānaṃ kathentehi suṇantehi ca evaṃ paṭipajjitabba’’nti anusāsanto ‘‘ayañca methunakathā nāmā’’tiādimāha. Methunakathāya rāgavuddhihetuttā hāsavisayattā ca tadubhayanivattanatthaṃ paṭikūlamanasikārādīsu niyojeti. Paṭikūlamanasikārena hi rāgo nivattati, samaṇasaññādīsu paccupaṭṭhitesu hāso nivattati. Sattānuddayāyāti sattānaṃ apāyadukkhādīhi anurakkhaṇatthaṃ. Lokānukampāyāti sattalokavisayāya anukampāya.
“遮口”意为掩住口,即用某物掩住口。若因某种放逸而偶尔露出微笑,彼时会破坏对师长的恭敬;因此,为了在那种时刻不损及恭敬,应以扇掩口而坐,这是其意旨。再者,“遮口”的意思就是掩住口。此处意旨为:用扇掩口而笑者,不应安坐。所谓“露齿”,意为露出牙齿、张口而笑。所谓“以热忱”,即不陷入畏缩,依已生起的精进力。如果因想“我竟说出了如此不善之语”而畏缩,便不能阐明义理,因此应以这样的精进力说道:“即便是那样的正自觉者也说了如此之语,何况我呢?”这是其意旨。所谓“与师相应”,意为与师类似、与师相等。显示巴利原文
Mukhaṃ apidhāyāti mukhaṃ apidahitvā, yena kenaci pamādena kadāci mandahāso bhaveyya, tadā garuttaṃ kuppeyya, tasmā tādise kāle garubhāvassa avikopanatthaṃ bījakena mukhaṃ paṭicchādetvā nisīditabbanti adhippāyo. Atha vā mukhaṃ apidhāyāti mukhaṃ pidahitvāti attho. Bījakena mukhaṃ paṭicchādetvā hasamānena na nisīditabbanti ayamettha adhippāyo. Dantavidaṃsakanti dante dassetvā vivaritvā cāti attho. Gabbhitenāti saṅkocaṃ anāpajjantena, ussāhajātenāti attho. Yadi hi ‘‘īdisaṃ nāma asabbhiṃ kathemī’’ti saṅkocaṃ āpajjeyya, atthavibhāvanaṃ na siyā, tasmā ‘‘tādisena sammāsambuddhenapi tāva īdisaṃ kathitaṃ, kimaṅgaṃ panāhaṃ kathemī’’ti evaṃ ussāhajātena kathetabbanti adhippāyo. Satthupaṭibhāgenāti satthukappena, satthusadisenāti attho.
随制的解释显示巴利原文
Anupaññattivaṇṇanā
“于畜生中”,意为生于畜生之中。由于名为畜生者亦有极微小的种类,其道中连芝麻粒大小的进入都无法容纳,因此并非一切畜生女皆属波罗夷事。为简别出能容纳进入的畜生女,而说“此处唯是波罗夷事”等。关于“无足者、蛇、鱼”等偈颂,是古德为显示波罗夷事的下限区分而设立的。其中,“蛇”是依种类之说而总括一切蛇类,故说“以蛇一词……总括长种类”。其中,贡那萨(gonasa)是蛇的一种,背上可见大圆纹。“鱼”一词是水族的表征词,故说“以鱼一词……总括水族”。因此,蛙与龟虽是有足者,但因属水族而被总括在内。显示巴利原文
Tiracchānesu gatāyāti tiracchānesu uppannāya. Yasmā tiracchānagatā nāma atikhuddakāpi honti, yesaṃ maggesu tilaphalamattampi pavesanaṃ nappahoti, tasmā na sabbāva tiracchānagatitthiyo pārājikavatthubhūtāti pavesanappahonakavasena labbhamānakatiracchānagatitthiyo paricchinditvā dassento ‘‘pārājikavatthubhūtā eva cetthā’’tiādimāha. Apadānaṃ ahimacchātiādigāthā pārājikavatthūnaṃ heṭṭhimaparicchedadassanatthaṃ porāṇehi ṭhapitā. Tattha ahīti jātiniddesena sabbāpi sappajāti saṅgahitāti āha – ‘‘ahiggahaṇena…pe… dīghajāti saṅgahitā’’ti. Tattha gonasāti sappavisesā, yesaṃ piṭṭhīsu mahantāni maṇḍalāni sandissanti. Macchaggahaṇaṃ odakajātiyā upalakkhaṇapadanti āha – ‘‘macchaggahaṇena…pe… odakajāti saṅgahitā’’ti. Teneva maṇḍūkakacchapānaṃ sapādakattepi odakajātikattā saṅgaho kato.
“口形”,意为唇皮之形。“入于伤口之略摄”,意为入于伤口的归类,因被摄入九种伤口门中故——此即其意旨。关于伤口的偷兰遮,应依“以非道入非道,犯偷兰遮”之句而了知。因为在该经中,对于两处破裂的伤口,若从一道口入、从另一道口出,则说为偷兰遮。并将说:“依此经的随顺方式,于一切伤口略摄中,应知为偷兰遮。”“鸡”一词也是一切鸟类的表征词,故说“以鸡一词……总括鸟类”。“猫”一词应视为四足类的表征词,故说“以猫一词……总括四足类”。所谓“树狗”,即松鼠。所谓“獴”,即有尾者。显示巴利原文
Mukhasaṇṭhānanti oṭṭhacammasaṇṭhānaṃ. Vaṇasaṅkhepaṃ gacchatīti vaṇasaṅgahaṃ gacchati navasu vaṇamukhesu saṅgahitattāti adhippāyo. Vaṇe thullaccayañca ‘‘amaggena amaggaṃ paveseti, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti imassa vasena veditabbaṃ. Tasmiñhi sutte dvīsu sambhinnavaṇesu ekena vaṇena pavesetvā dutiyena nīharantassa thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ. Vakkhati ca ‘‘imassa suttassa anulomavasena sabbattha vaṇasaṅkhepe thullaccayaṃ veditabba’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.66). Kukkuṭiggahaṇampi sabbāya pakkhijātiyā upalakkhaṇapadanti āha – ‘‘kukkuṭiggahaṇena…pe… pakkhijāti saṅgahitā’’ti. Majjāriggahaṇampi catuppadajātiyā upalakkhaṇapadanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘majjāriggahaṇena…pe… catuppadajāti saṅgahitā’’ti. Rukkhasunakhā nāma kalandakātipi vadanti. Maṅgusāti naṅgulā.
“波罗夷”(pārājika)一词,是将前缀作增广、再将字母ta变为ka而说为pārājika,故说“pārājika即parājita(败亡)”。在《结文》中说道:“有处指罪,如‘以波罗夷法不得举罪’等处;有处指学处,此应见而知。”为显示依作者而成就,pārājika一词即指学处与罪,故说“凡违越彼者”等。为显示依业而成就,pārājika一词则指人,故说“人因败亡”等。显示巴利原文
Parājita-saddo upasaggassa vuddhiṃ katvā ta-kārassa ca ka-kāraṃ katvā pārājikoti niddiṭṭhoti āha ‘‘pārājikoti parājito’’ti. ‘‘Katthaci āpattīti ‘pārājikena dhammena anuddhaṃseyyā’tiādīsu (pārā. 384, 391), katthaci sikkhāpadanti idaṃ pana disvā jānitabba’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Parājayatīti pārājikaṃ, pārājikāti ca kattusādhanena pārājika-saddena sikkhāpadaṃ āpatti ca vuccatīti dassento āha ‘‘yo taṃ atikkamatī’’tiādi. Puggalo pana kammasādhanena pārājika-saddena vuccatīti dassento āha ‘‘puggalo yasmā parājito’’tiādi.
正是为了说明这一含义——即“犯此罪的人,是为败亡者、已至败亡”这个含义。因为通过“已退堕、已失败”等语,可知犯此罪的人是已退堕者、是败亡者、是已至败亡者,而非指“波罗夷”是用来称呼犯戒者的名称;正是为了说明此义,应作如是理解。因为在《附随》中,那些偈颂也并非为了显示指人的“波罗夷”一词的语源而说,而是在论及指罪、指学处等的“波罗夷”这类词的语源分别时所说。此《附随》偈颂的意义是:在所谓指人、指罪、指学处的波罗夷中,所谓指罪的波罗夷,是指犯此罪的人因为成为败亡者、已至败亡,从正法退堕、毁败、坏灭、被摒弃——当此人尚未被驱摈时,便再无布萨、自恣等类的共住,因此,以此因缘,此指罪的波罗夷被称为波罗夷。此处略义为:因为由此而成为败亡者,所以此被称为波罗夷。“已退堕”意为从教法中毁坏,即已退失。“已断”意为中间被截断。显示巴利原文
Etameva hi atthaṃ sandhāyāti ‘‘taṃ āpattiṃ āpanno puggalo parājito hoti parājayamāpanno’’ti etamatthaṃ sandhāya. Cuto paraddhotiādinā hi taṃ āpattiṃ āpannapuggalo cuto hoti parājito parājayaṃ āpannoti ayamattho viññāyati, na pana puggalo pārājiko nāma hotīti etamatthaṃ sandhāyāti evamattho gahetabbo. Na hi parivārepi gāthā puggalavuttipārājikasaddanibbacanadassanatthaṃ vuttā āpattivuttīnaṃ pārājikā-disaddānaṃ nibbacanavibhāgappasaṅge vuttattā. Ayañhi parivāragāthāya attho (pari. aṭṭha. 339) – yadidaṃ puggalāpattisikkhāpadapārājikesu āpattipārājikaṃ nāma vuttaṃ, taṃ āpajjanto puggalo yasmā parājito parājayamāpanno saddhamā cuto paraddho bhaṭṭho niraṅkato ca hoti, anīhaṭe tasmiṃ puggale puna uposathapavāraṇādibhedo saṃvāso natthi, tenetaṃ iti vuccati tena kāraṇena etaṃ āpattipārājikaṃ iti vuccatīti. Ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho – yasmā parājito hoti etena, tasmā etaṃ pārājikanti vuccatīti. Paribhaṭṭhoti sāsanato bhaṭṭho, parihīnoti attho. Chinnoti antarā khaṇḍito.
“与连接一起”意为连同词语的连接。“四种僧伽业”指以白二甘马等方式所分的四种业。“以界所限者”指同一界内所限定的范围者。“本性者”指未犯波罗夷且未被举罪者。“五种”指以因缘诵出等方式而分的五种。如同先前对理发匠等人的旧例,除了特别开许的之外,其余一切学处,一切有惭比丘皆不可违越,因此说:“因一切有惭比丘皆应平等修学。”“同”意为一起,或同时。“应修学”意为以不违越的方式,及以学习、请问等方式而应修学。在共同学处中,不可对其说“你不应修学此”而将其排斥在外,故说“无一人被见于其外”。所谓“凡彼所说”则是一个连接词。显示巴利原文
Saddhiṃ yojanāyāti padayojanāya saddhiṃ. Catubbidhaṃ saṅghakammanti apalokanādivasena catubbidhaṃ kammaṃ. Sīmāparicchinnehīti ekasīmāpariyāpannehi. Pakatattā nāma pārājikaṃ anāpannā anukkhittā ca. Pañcavidhopīti nidānuddesādivasena pañcavidhopi. Nahāpitapubbakānaṃ viya odhisaanuññātaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesaṃ sabbampi sikkhāpadaṃ sabbehipi lajjīpuggalehi anatikkamanīyattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbehipi lajjīpuggalehi samaṃ sikkhitabbabhāvato’’ti. Samanti saddhiṃ, ekappahārena vā. Sikkhitabbabhāvatoti anatikkamanavasena uggahaparipucchādinā ca sikkhitabbabhāvato. Sāmaññasikkhāpadesu ‘‘idaṃ tayā na sikkhitabba’’nti evaṃ abahikātabbato ‘‘na ekopi tato bahiddhā sandissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ taṃ vuttanti sambandho.
56 “并非仅以女性为根门事是波罗夷事”——此句是为了显示:并非只有以女性为根门事才是波罗夷事,而是以双性人、黄门、男性为根门事也是波罗夷事。而“并非仅以人类女性”——此句则是为了显示:并非只有以人类女性为根门事才是波罗夷事,以非人女性、畜生女性、非人男性、双性人等为根门事也是波罗夷事。三部《结文》中说:“‘唯事不成’,这是指由非人女性的连带关系而涉及的金、银等所造之物,予以遮止。”这看起来似乎不合道理。因为在此之前,并未提及非人女性,又怎能建立其连带关系?就在刚才,才以“三位女性”等语提及非人女性,而仅由提及非人女性来连带涉及金、银等所造之物,是不合理的。事实上,通过依人、非人、畜生之生类而分为三种,来解说作为波罗夷事的众生,就已排除了对金、银等所造之物的连带关系。而在《本母》中,并未特别指定女性、男性等,或人类、非人等,只是笼统地说:“若行淫欲法”,仅此一句。在其《分别》中,虽举出《本母》之句“行淫者”,并显示了行淫的方式:“以根门入根门,以生殖器入生殖器,乃至仅入芝麻果量者,此名为行淫”,但并未将作为波罗夷事的根门限定于任何特定的对象。显示巴利原文
56.Na kevalaṃ itthiyā eva nimittaṃ pārājikavatthūti iminā kevalaṃ itthiyā eva nimittaṃ pārājikavatthu na hoti, atha kho ubhatobyañjanakapaṇḍakapurisānampi nimittaṃ pārājikavatthūti dasseti. Na ca manussitthiyā evāti iminā pana manussitthiyā eva nimittaṃ pārājikavatthu na hoti, amanussitthitiracchānagatitthiamanussubhatobyañjanakādīnampi nimittaṃ pārājikavatthūti dasseti. ‘‘Vatthumeva na hotīti amanussitthipasaṅgena āgataṃ suvaṇṇarajatādimayaṃ paṭikkhipatī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ, taṃ yuttaṃ viya na dissati. Na hi ito pubbe amanussitthiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ atthi, yena tappasaṅgo siyā. Idāneva hi ‘‘tisso itthiyo’’tiādinā amanussitthiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, na ca amanussitthiggahaṇena suvaṇṇarajatādimayānaṃ pasaṅgo yutto. Manussāmanussatiracchānajātivasena tividhā katvā pārājikavatthubhūtasattānaṃ niddesena suvaṇṇarajatādimayānaṃ pasaṅgassa nivattitattā. Tathā hi itthipurisādīsu manussāmanussādīsu vā kañci anāmasitvā avisesena ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭiseveyyā’’ti ettakameva mātikāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Tassa padabhājane ca ‘‘paṭisevati nāmā’’ti mātikaṃ padaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘yo nimittena nimittaṃ aṅgajātena aṅgajātaṃ antamaso tilaphalamattampi paveseti, eso paṭisevati nāmā’’ti paṭisevanākārova dassito, na pana pārājikavatthubhūtanimittanissayā manussāmanussatiracchānagatā itthipurisapaṇḍakaubhatobyañjanakā niyametvā dassitā, tasmā ‘‘itthiyā eva nu kho nimittaṃ pārājikavatthu, udāhu aññesampī’’ti evamādi sandeho siyā, nimittavohāro ca suvaṇṇarajatādimayarūpakesu ca labbhatiyeva. Teneva vinītavatthūsu (pārā. 71) ‘‘lepacittassa nimittaṃ aṅgajātena chupi, dārudhītalikāya nimittaṃ aṅgajātena chupī’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā nimittasāmaññato ‘‘suvaṇṇarajatādimayānampi nimittaṃ pārājikavatthu hoti, na hotī’’ti kassaci āsaṅkā siyā. Teneva ‘‘lepacittādivatthūsu tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā tadāsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ pārājikavatthubhūtasattaniyamanatthañca jātivasena manussāmanussādito tidhā katvā pārājikavatthubhūte satte bhagavā vibhajitvā dasseti, tasmā ‘‘vatthumeva na hotī’’ti nimittasāmaññato pasaṅgāgataṃ suvaṇṇarajatādimayānaṃ nimittaṃ paṭikkhipatīti vattabbaṃ.
“三道”是处格意义的业格形式,故说:“应知其意为‘于三道中’。”“如此,于一切处”这一句,即暗示“二道”也应作“于二道中”解。显示巴利原文
Tayo maggeti bhummatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘tīsu maggesūti attho veditabbo’’ti. Evaṃ sabbatthāti iminā ‘‘dve magge’’ti etthāpi dvīsu maggesūti attho veditabboti atidissati.
第一四法论的解释显示巴利原文
Paṭhamacatukkakathāvaṇṇanā
57 “Assā”是动词词根,为显示其含义,故说“hoti”。然而在《结文》中,也给出了一种释义:“把握‘人’后,显示‘hoti’为省略之语”,但此说并不更好。因为如果意在省略之语,便应当说“hoti”;正因如此,在另一种释义中才将“hoti”作为省略之语。显示巴利原文
57.Assāti ākhyātikapadanti tassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘hotī’’ti āha. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana ‘‘assāti puggalaṃ parāmasitvā hotīti vacanaseso dassito’’tipi atthavikappo dassito, na so sundarataro. Yadi hi vacanaseso adhippeto siyā, ‘‘hotī’’ti vattabbaṃ, teneva aññasmiṃ atthavikappe hotīti vacanaseso kato.
58 “正在受用者”在此处,所谓“受用”是指生起欲从事之心,故说“具足从事之心者”。《结文》中说:“‘寻求敌对者’,是指寻求那些希望学戒的比丘的敌对者,即破戒的状态。”然而,此处应理解为:寻求自己怨敌个人的某个敌对者,即某个敌人。因为敌对者想要消灭自己的怨敌,所以希望其怨敌的某个敌人成为自己的盟友。由于下文将述及国王敌对者等,为了显示与之相应的含义,故说:“比丘们本身就是敌对者,故为比丘敌对者。”但如果表述为“比丘的敌对者是比丘敌对者”,则比丘的敌对者,如国王等,也会被包含在内,如此一来,国王敌对者等就不应被单独列出了。然而在其他地方,“比丘的敌对者是比丘敌对者”这一含义是成立的,正如“教法敌对者”一样。被嫉妒所败者,即被以不能忍受他人获得利养恭敬等为特征的嫉妒所压倒者。不动摇,即无动摇,意为像那样抓住,使其不能移动、翻转。令结合,即令与大便道结合。显示巴利原文
58.Sādiyantassevāti ettha sādiyanaṃ nāma sevetukāmatācittassa upaṭṭhāpananti āha ‘‘paṭisevanacittasamaṅgissā’’ti. ‘‘Paṭipakkhaṃ atthayantīti sikkhākāmānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ paṭipakkhaṃ dussīlabhāvaṃ atthayantī’’ti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Attano veripuggalassa pana paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ kañci amittaṃ atthayanti gavesantīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Paccatthikā hi attano veriṃ nāsetukāmā tassa paṭipakkhabhūtaṃ kañci amittaṃ attano sahāyabhāvamupagacchantaṃ icchanti. Rājapaccatthikādīnaṃ upari vakkhamānattā tadanurūpavasena atthaṃ dassento ‘‘bhikkhū eva paccatthikā bhikkhupaccatthikā’’ti āha. ‘‘Bhikkhussa paccatthikā bhikkhupaccatthikā’’ti evaṃ pana vuccamāne bhikkhussa paccatthikā rājādayopi ettheva saṅgayhantīti rājapaccatthikādayo visuṃ na vattabbā siyuṃ, aññattha pana bhikkhussa paccatthikā bhikkhupaccatthikāti ayamattho labbhateva ‘‘sāsanapaccatthikā’’ti yathā. Issāpakatāti paresaṃ lābhasakkārādiasahanalakkhaṇāya issāya abhibhūtā. Nipparipphandanti paripphandavirahitaṃ, yathā calituṃ parivattituṃ na sakkoti, tathā gahetvāti attho. Sampayojentīti vaccamaggena saddhiṃ yojenti.
在那刹那,即进入的刹那——从顶端到根部完全进入的那一刻,称为“进入刹那”。“受用”,是指生起受用之心,故说“受用之心现起”。“于已进入时”,指男根无余地完全进入应入之处的时候。如此进入后,在开始拔出之前中间安住的那一刻,名为“停留”。而在《义注》中,是针对妇女达到泄精、一切努力停息而安住之时,说为“于泄精时”。“拔出”,是指直到顶端完全取出之时,故说“于取出时,受用之心现起”。“火坑”,即火炭堆。在这样的时刻,不受用并非一切人都办得到,所以说“对于这样的、已开始修观者……”等。以十一种火,即:贪、嗔、痴、生、老、死、愁、悲、苦、忧、恼。因为贪等具有燃烧之义,故称为“火”——它们若存在于谁,就会烧灼谁,成为大热恼,且难以熄灭。世尊正是想要惩治那些顽劣之人,所以说“他正在破坏那些敌对者的心愿”。“Assā”,即指那不受用者,具足如前所述功德之人。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ khaṇeti tasmiṃ pavesanakkhaṇe, aggato yāva mūlā pavesanakālo ‘‘pavesanakkhaṇo’’ti vuccati. Sādiyanaṃ nāma sevanacittassa uppādananti āha ‘‘sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpetī’’ti. Paviṭṭhakāleti aṅgajātassa yattakaṃ ṭhānaṃ pavesanārahaṃ, tattakaṃ anavasesato paviṭṭhakāle. Evaṃ paviṭṭhassa uddharaṇārambhato antarā ṭhitakālo ṭhitaṃ nāma. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana mātugāmassa sukkavissaṭṭhiṃ patvā sabbathā vāyamato oramitvā ṭhitakālaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sukkavissaṭṭhisamaye’’ti vuttaṃ. Uddharaṇaṃ nāma yāva aggā nīharaṇakāloti āha – ‘‘nīharaṇakāle paṭisevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhāpetī’’ti. Aṅgārakāsunti aṅgārarāsiṃ. Evarūpe kāle asādiyanaṃ nāma na sabbesaṃ visayoti āha ‘‘imañhi evarūpaṃ āraddhavipassaka’’ntiādi . Ekādasahi aggīhīti rāgadosamohajātijarāmaraṇasokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsasaṅkhātehi ekādasahi aggīhi. Rāgādayo hi anuḍahanaṭṭhena ‘‘aggī’’ti vuccanti. Te hi yassa santi , taṃ niḍahanti, mahāpariḷāhā ca honti dunnibbāpayā ca. Bhagavatā ca dummaṅkūnaṃ puggalānaṃ niggaho icchitoyevāti āha – ‘‘paccatthikānañcassa manorathavighātaṃ karonto’’ti. Assāti asādiyantassa yathāvuttaguṇasamaṅgissa.
二百六十九种四法论的解释显示巴利原文
Ekūnasattatidvisatacatukkakathāvaṇṇanā
59-60 第五十九至六十条。“以被食为相”者,是由“被食”一词所说,省略了后分,故说“如被狗、豺等所食为相”。凡以被食为相者,即称为“以被食为相”。“醒觉”等词因无修饰语,故说为“纯粹四句”。显示巴利原文
59-60. Akkhāyitanimittā akkhāyita-saddena vuttā uttarapadalopenāti āha ‘‘soṇasiṅgālādīhi akkhāyitanimitta’’nti. Akkhāyitaṃ nimittaṃ yassā sā akkhāyitanimittā. ‘‘Jāgaranti’’ntiādi visesanarahitattā ‘‘suddhikacatukkānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“同师长老”,即同一阿阇梨的诵经弟子。“大怖畏”,指婆罗门提舍之怖畏。恒河的对岸,称为“对岸恒河”。“vata re”是表示呵责的不变词。若不舍弃,当作何?故说“应常时听闻”等。由此,“尊重律者”一句,说明了此后他们所作判决应受尊重的原因。“遍取一切”,即无余地遍取一切波罗夷领域。“断流”,即于波罗夷领域断除违犯之流。由于既未制定,又不合理,故说“然此处不见波罗夷之影”。然而有些人说:“因半食状态难以判决,所以世尊未在此制定波罗夷。”此说无理,难以判决并非不制定的原因,因为在多分食等中,同样存在难以判决的情况。饮食时稍多于半食或稍少于半食者,便入多分食或未食的范围,因此如同半食一样,多分食等实际上也难以判决。再者,如果半食自性上属于波罗夷范畴,世尊绝不会因为难以判决就不制定波罗夷。显示巴利原文
Samānācariyakā therāti ekācariyassa pāṭhakantevāsikā. Mahābhayeti brāhmaṇatissabhaye. Gaṅgāya aparabhāgo aparagaṅgaṃ. Vata reti garahatthe nipāto. Avissajjantena kiṃ kattabbanti āha ‘‘niccakālaṃ sotabba’’ntiādi. Evaṃ vinayagarukānanti iminā upari tehi vuccamānavinicchayassa garukaraṇīyatāya kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Sabbaṃ pariyādiyitvāti sabbaṃ pārājikakkhettaṃ anavasesato gahetvā. Sotaṃ chinditvāti pārājikakkhette vītikkamasotaṃ chinditvā. Apaññattabhāvato yuttiabhāvato ca ‘‘pārājikacchāyā panettha na dissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘upaḍḍhakkhāyitabhāvassa dubbinicchayattā tattha pārājikaṃ na paññapesī’’ti vadanti, taṃ akāraṇaṃ, na ca dubbinicchayatā apaññattikāraṇaṃ yebhuyyakkhāyitādīsupi dubbinicchayabhāvassa samānattā. Upaḍḍhakkhāyitato hi kiñcideva adhikaṃ ūnaṃ vā yadi khāyitaṃ siyā, tampi yebhuyyena khāyitaṃ akkhāyitanti saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti upaḍḍhakkhāyitamiva yebhuyyakkhāyitādīnipi dubbinicchayāneva. Apica upaḍḍhakkhāyitaṃ yadi sabhāvato pārājikakkhettaṃ siyā, na tattha bhagavā dubbinicchayanti pārājikaṃ na paññapeti.
现在,长老为支持已作出的判决,又举出其他理由,说“再者”等。若相上尚有少许肉纹残留,那便是多分食;自此以后,相若被完全食尽,则唯是恶作。为说明这一点,他说“自此以后无偷兰遮”。或者,所谓多分食,应知是指在粪道、尿道、口这四分之中,越过二分,食至第三分尽;自此以后,再越过第三分,食至第四分尽,为恶作。这些只是在死尸的情况下才作了知,因为经中有“死尸多分未食”等语。然而《大结品》中说:“即使相被完全食尽等一切,都是就活身而说。”有人写道:“应审察后再取。”对此有什么可审察的呢?因为活身是主要的所依,而且对于死尸所得的判决将另作说明。因此,《本母注释》中亦说:显示巴利原文
Idāni therena katavinicchayameva upatthambhetvā aparampi tattha kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Nimitte appamattikāpi maṃsarāji sace avasiṭṭhā hoti, taṃ yebhuyyakkhāyitameva hoti, tato paraṃ pana sabbaso khāyite nimitte dukkaṭamevāti dassento āha ‘‘tato paraṃ thullaccayaṃ natthī’’ti. Atha vā yebhuyyena khāyitaṃ nāma vaccamaggapassāvamaggamukhānaṃ catūsu koṭṭhāsesu dve koṭṭhāse atikkamma yāva tatiyakoṭṭhāsassa pariyosānā khāditaṃ, tato paraṃ pana tatiyakoṭṭhāsaṃ atikkamma yāva catutthakoṭṭhāsassa pariyosānā khāditaṃ dukkaṭavatthūti veditabbaṃ. Matasarīrasmiṃyeva veditabbanti ‘‘mataṃ yebhuyyena akkhāyita’’ntiādivacanato. ‘‘Yadipi nimittaṃ sabbaso khāyitantiādi sabbaṃ jīvamānakasarīrameva sandhāya vutta’’nti mahāgaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘taṃ vīmaṃsitvā gahetabba’’nti likhitaṃ. Kimettha vīmaṃsitabbaṃ jīvamānakasarīrasseva adhikatattā matasarīre labbhamānassa vinicchayassa visuṃ vakkhamānattā ca. Teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyampi (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā) –
在活身所说的道中,若皮等无余全断,仅现相状,此时,乃至以骨、无净色身之干痈或皮栓插入生殖器,若存行淫之心,即犯波罗夷;若插入无净色身之干痈、或死皮、或毛,则为恶作。若相状亦无余全断,道全被拔除,于此,由于努力而结疮,则为偷兰遮。显示巴利原文
‘‘Jīvamānakasarīrassa vuttappakāre magge sacepi tacādīni anavasesetvā sabbaso chinne nimittasaṇṭhānamattaṃ paññāyati, tattha antamaso aṅgajāte uṭṭhikaṃ anaṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ pīḷakaṃ vā cammakhīlaṃ vā pavesentassapi sevanacitte sati pārājikaṃ, naṭṭhakāyappasādaṃ sukkhapīḷakaṃ vā matacammaṃ vā lomaṃ vā pavesentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Sace nimittasaṇṭhānamattampi anavasesetvā sabbaso maggo uppāṭito, tattha upakkamato vaṇasaṅkhepavasena thullaccaya’’nti –
上述判决,唯就活身而说。显示巴利原文
Jīvamānakasarīrasmiṃyeva yathāvuttavinicchayo dassito.
所谓“完全被食”,即于相所及之处,将外覆的皮肉完全割断,令其呈现如被狗、豺等所食之状。因此说“无有皮肉”。然而,由于相肉与内皮尚存,故说“相状可见”。因此说“得入”。而“相状无余”,是指不再残存任何可依相形而立的皮肉等。已显示活身所得之差别后,为显示死尸所得之差别,复说“然于死尸”等。显示巴利原文
Sabbaso khāyitanti nimittappadese bahiṭṭhitaṃ chavicammaṃ sabbaso chinditvā soṇasiṅgālādīhi khāyitasadisaṃ kataṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘chavicammaṃ natthī’’ti. Nimittamaṃsassa pana abbhantare chavicammassa ca vijjamānattā ‘‘nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ paññāyatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘pavesanaṃ jāyatī’’ti. Nimittasaṇṭhānaṃ panaanavasesetvāti nimittākārena ṭhitaṃ chavicammamaṃsādiṃ anavasesetvā. Jīvamānakasarīre labbhamānavisesaṃ dassetvā idāni matasarīre labbhamānavisesaṃ dassento āha ‘‘matasarīre panā’’tiādi.
然依“人之活身”等说,眼等亦归入疮的范畴,故与疮同等判摄,对眼等亦说偷兰遮。他们属疮的范畴,应依“九门大疮”等经教而了知。于畜生眼疮、耳疮,则应以注释为量,判为恶作。正如于人、非人、畜生中,粪道、尿道、口之波罗夷事无有差别,于眼等之偷兰遮等事,亦应无有差别。于疮犯偷兰遮,乃总说为“以非道入非道,犯偷兰遮”,而非独简别“人”而说。若于畜生之疮不应有偷兰遮,则于蝗虫口、蛙口状之疮结,不应说偷兰遮,然既已说之,故注释师于此为量。盖注释师乃了知世尊意趣者。是故言:“佛所说法与律,其弟子如是了知”等。此处所谓“人”,总指女人、男人、黄门及二根。于“膀胱囊”,即于膀胱袋,于男人之男根囊。死尸以至未呈膨胀等腐坏相为止,应知为新鲜身。因此说:“然当身成膨胀时”等。舍波罗夷事及偷兰遮事者,此处应知为舍除波罗夷事性及偷兰遮事性之义。与死畜生相关。显示巴利原文
Manussānaṃ jīvamānakasarīretiādinā pana akkhiādayopi vaṇasaṅgahaṃ gacchantīti vaṇena ekaparicchedaṃ katvā akkhiādīsupi thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ. Tesañca vaṇasaṅgaho ‘‘navadvāro mahāvaṇo’’ti (mi. pa. 2.6.1) evamādisuttānusārena veditabbo. Tiracchānagatānaṃ akkhikaṇṇavaṇesu dukkaṭaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāppamāṇena gahetabbaṃ. Yathā hi manussāmanussatiracchānagatesu vaccamaggapassāvamaggamukhānaṃ pārājikavatthubhāve nānākaraṇaṃ natthi, evaṃ akkhiādīnampi thullaccayādivatthubhāve ninnānākaraṇena bhavitabbaṃ. Vaṇe thullaccayañca ‘‘amaggena amaggaṃ paveseti, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 66) sāmaññato vuttaṃ, na pana ‘‘manussāna’’nti visesanaṃ atthi. Yadi ca tiracchānagatānaṃ vaṇesu thullaccayena na bhavitabbaṃ, pataṅgamukhamaṇḍūkassa mukhasaṇṭhāne vaṇasaṅkhepato thullaccayaṃ na vattabbaṃ, vuttañca, tasmā aṭṭhakathācariyā evettha pamāṇaṃ. Bhagavato adhippāyaññuno hi aṭṭhakathācariyā. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘buddhena dhammo vinayo ca vutto, yo tassa puttehi tatheva ñāto’’tiādi (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.). Manussānanti itthipurisapaṇḍakaubhatobyañjanakānaṃ sāmaññato vuttaṃ. Vatthikosesūti vatthipuṭesu purisānaṃ aṅgajātakosesu. Matasarīraṃ yāva uddhumātakādibhāvena kuthitaṃ na hoti, tāva allasarīranti veditabbaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘yadā pana sarīraṃ uddhumātakaṃ hotī’’tiādi. Pārājikavatthuñca thullaccayavatthuñca vijahatīti ettha pārājikavatthubhāvaṃ thullaccayavatthubhāvañca vijahatīti attho veditabbo. Matānaṃ tiracchānagatānanti sambandho.
以淫欲染,将生支送入阴道囊,犯偷兰遮,故说“不送入产门”。“不送入女根”,即不送入女根之相。且说“不送入”,是表示无有送入的意图。若以送入的意图在外部触碰,则因此是行淫的前方便,应唯犯恶作。以根触根,犯偷兰遮——这是依据“诸比丘,不应以染心触碰生殖器,若触碰者,犯偷兰遮”这一经教而说的。在此,为显示某些人对意义有不同解释的方式,而说“然而在大注疏中……”等。于此处,虽已说“作大注疏之身……”,但为显示在其他注疏中无有“以淫欲染由口……”的说法,而说“然而在大注疏中……”。由于未说“以生殖器……”,故说“无差别地”。显示巴利原文
Methunarāgena vatthikosaṃ pavesentassa thullaccayaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘patthikosaṃ appavesento’’ti. Itthiyā appavesentoti itthiyā nimittaṃ appavesento. Appavesentoti ca pavesanādhippāyassa abhāvaṃ dasseti. Pavesanādhippāyena bahi chupantassa pana methunassa pubbapayogattā dukkaṭeneva bhavitabbaṃ. Nimittena nimittaṃ chupati, thullaccayanti idaṃ ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, rattacittena aṅgajātaṃ chupitabbaṃ, yo chupeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 252) imassa suttassa vasena vuttaṃ. Tattha ca kesañci aññathāpi atthavikappassa vidhiṃ dassento ‘‘mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘katvā mahāaṭṭhakathaṃ sarīra’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā) vuttaṃ, tathāpi sesaaṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘methunarāgena mukhenā’’ti vacanassa abhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ panā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Aṅgajātenā’’ti avuttattā ‘‘avisesenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
现在,为了显示大注疏与巴利圣典的契合,而说“首先,在大注疏中……”等。若非如此,以自然口触碰,则如同执取角等情况,应犯恶作。如此将大注疏与巴利圣典相契合后,现在为说明某些人对此有不同释义,而说“然而有些人……”等。桑喀地谢沙——依身触学处,犯桑喀地谢沙。依前述之理,即唯以淫欲染心。由于提到“以根、以口……”,应知:若以淫欲染心、以自然口触碰畜生女的尿道,犯恶作。以身触欲染犯恶作——无论是以根、以口,或以自然口,以身触欲染而触碰者,唯犯恶作。显示巴利原文
Idāni mahāaṭṭhakathaṃ pāḷiyā saṃsanditvā dassento ‘‘yaṃ tāva mahāaṭṭhakathāya’’ntiādimāha. Itarathā hi dukkaṭaṃ siyāti pakatimukhena chupantassa visāṇādiggahaṇe viya dukkaṭaṃ siyā. Evaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathaṃ pāḷiyā saṃsanditvā idāni tattha kesañci aññathā atthavikappaṃ dassento ‘‘keci panā’’tiādimāha. Saṅghādisesoti kāyasaṃsaggasikkhāpadena saṅghādiseso. Vuttanayenevāti methunarāgeneva. ‘‘Nimittamukhenā’’ti vuttattā tiracchānagatitthiyā passāvamaggaṃ methunarāgena pakatimukhena chupantassa dukkaṭanti veditabbaṃ. Kāyasaṃsaggarāgena dukkaṭanti nimittamukhena vā pakatimukhena vā kāyasaṃsaggarāgena chupantassa dukkaṭameva.
铺展四法分别论释显示巴利原文
Santhatacatukkabhedakathāvaṇṇanā
61-2 “已行道者”指已着手修观者。“执取”是就身根而言。以执取触——意为被执取所触、所碰,应如此依被动语态省略ya-kāra来理解其义。或者,可以这样看待此处含义:如此做时,某种执取并不以执取相触、相碰。“将示现些许”即他们将生起些许、将构想些许,这是所说之义。以铺展等差别而分别——即以铺展等种种简别而简别,以铺展等四种而组合,这是所说之义。显示巴利原文
61-2.Paṭipannakassāti āraddhavipassakassa. Upādinnakanti kāyindriyaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Upādinnakena phusatīti upādinnakena phusīyati ghaṭṭīyatīti evaṃ kammani ya-kāralopena attho veditabbo. Atha vā evaṃ karonto kiñci upādinnakaṃ upādinnakena na phusati na ghaṭṭetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Lesaṃ oḍḍessantīti lesaṃ samuṭṭhāpessanti, parikappessantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Santhatādibhedehi bhinditvāti santhatādivisesanehi visesetvā, santhatādīhi catūhi yojetvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“已铺展”是以部分代整体的称呼,就像“布被烧了”等说法一样。正如布的一部分被烧时,人们说“布被烧了”,同样,在女人的大便道等诸道中,若某一道被铺展,该女人即被称为“已铺展”。因此说“已铺展者,名为……”等。至于将布等不放入内部而置于外部绑缚,则说为“缠绕”。同样,以部分代整体的称呼,比丘也被称为“已铺展”,故说“已铺展者,名为……”等。所入之处——当进入约芝麻果大小时。即使在眼等处铺展,也各依其处而说,故说“在偷兰遮处犯偷兰遮,在恶作处唯犯恶作”。显示巴利原文
Santhatāyāti ekadese samudāyavohāro ‘‘paṭo daḍḍho’’tiādīsu viya. Tathā hi paṭassa ekadesepi daḍḍhe ‘‘paṭo daḍḍho’’ti voharanti , evaṃ itthiyā vaccamaggādīsu kismiñci magge santhate itthī ‘‘santhatā’’ti vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘santhatā nāmā’’tiādi. Vatthādīni anto appavesetvā bahi ṭhapetvā bandhanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘paliveṭhetvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekadese samudāyavohāravaseneva bhikkhupi ‘‘santhato’’ti vuccatīti āha ‘‘santhato nāmā’’tiādi. Yattake paviṭṭheti tilaphalamatte paviṭṭhe. Akkhiādimhi santhatepi yathāvatthukamevāti āha ‘‘thullaccayakkhette thullaccayaṃ, dukkaṭakkhette dukkaṭameva hotī’’ti.
触碰树桩犯恶作:将树桩送入女根内部,触碰平坦或凸出的树桩,因未进入而犯恶作。然而,若稍稍进入内部,以男根触彼竖立之树桩,则犯波罗夷。其底——即竹筒等的内部底面。在《律藏·因缘》中说:“一时,有一比丘往至冢间,见一断头,将男根送入张口欲啄的鸟嘴中。他心生疑惑……比丘不犯波罗夷,犯恶作。”依此经文,随顺而说“作虚空想而送入取出,犯恶作”(《波罗夷》73)。外部树桩——即已送入的竹节等外部突出的树桩。以淫欲染,在根所系、非根所系的相续中,无论于何处作意,都不可能无犯,故说“唯犯恶作”。因此,在《律藏·因缘》中,对于在骨上作意者,说犯恶作。显示巴利原文
Khāṇuṃ ghaṭṭentassa dukkaṭanti itthinimittassa anto khāṇuṃ pavesetvā samatalaṃ atirittaṃ vā khāṇuṃ ghaṭṭentassa dukkaṭaṃ pavesābhāvato. Sace pana īsakaṃ anto pavisitvā ṭhitaṃ khāṇukameva aṅgajātena chupati, pārājikameva. Tassa talanti veḷunaḷādikassa antotalaṃ. Vinītavatthūsu ‘‘tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhu sīvathikaṃ gantvā chinnasīsaṃ passitvā vaṭṭakate mukhe acchupantaṃ aṅgajātaṃ pavesesi. Tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosi…pe… anāpatti bhikkhu pārājikassa, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttattā tassa suttassa anulomato ‘‘ākāsagatameva katvā pavesetvā nīharati, dukkaṭa’’nti (pārā. 73) vuttaṃ. Bahiddhā khāṇuketi antopavesitaveṇupabbādikassa bahi nikkhantakhāṇuke. Methunarāgena indriyabaddhaānindriyabaddhasantānesu yattha katthaci upakkamantassa na sakkā anāpattiyā bhavitunti ‘‘dukkaṭamevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Teneva vinītavatthumhi aṭṭhikesu upakkamantassa dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ.
王敌等四法分别论释显示巴利原文
Rājapaccatthikādicatukkabhedakathāvaṇṇanā
65 65. 此是共通之释,由论而作特别决断,故说“恶棍,即沉溺于淫欲嬉戏者”等。今为显示于通称中亦有义理可得,而说“或即女恶棍、酒恶棍等”。心——即心脏肉。显示巴利原文
65. Sāmaññajotanāya pakaraṇato visesavinicchayoti āha ‘‘dhuttāti methunupasaṃhitakhiḍḍāpasutā’’tiādi. Idāni sāmaññatopi atthasambhavaṃ dassento ‘‘itthidhuttasurādhuttādayo vā’’ti āha. Hadayanti hadayamaṃsaṃ.
犯与不犯品释显示巴利原文
Āpattānāpattivāravaṇṇanā
66 66. 不必认罪——因无可问。确实,污染者不应被如此询问:“你以何心犯戒?是知而犯,还是不知而犯?”即于毘舍离大林中。遍满全身——除头发、体毛、牙齿、指甲等无肉之处,以及僵硬干燥的皮肤外,如油滴于水,遍满其余一切身分而住。身颤等——“等”字包含眼呈黄色等。住于胆囊中——即依于心肺之间的肝脏肉而住,住于如大瓠瓜般的胆囊中。被激怒——即从胆囊中移出外行。显示巴利原文
66.Paṭiññākaraṇaṃnatthīti pucchitabbābhāvato. Na hi dūsako ‘‘kena cittena vītikkamaṃ akāsi, jānitvā akāsi, udāhu ajānitvā’’ti evaṃ pucchāya arahati. Tatthevāti vesāliyaṃ mahāvane eva. Sabbaṅgagatanti ṭhapetvā kesalomadantanakhānaṃ maṃsavinimuttaṭṭhānañceva thaddhasukkhacammañca udakamiva telabindu avasesasabbasarīraṃ byāpetvā ṭhitaṃ. Sarīrakampādīnīti ādi-saddena akkhīnaṃ pītavaṇṇādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Pittakosake ṭhitanti hadayapapphāsānaṃ antare yakanamaṃsaṃ nissāya patiṭṭhite mahākosātakīkosasadise pittakose ṭhitaṃ. Kupiteti pittakosato calitvā bahi nikkhante.
“心已散乱”指心已失去常态。“被亚卡鬼附身而疯狂”指:据说,当亚卡鬼想要扰乱某人的心时,会化现出白脸、蓝腹、鲜红手足、大头、燃烧的眼睛等恐怖身形来示现,或发出恐怖的声音,或就在说话时把手伸进那人的口中揉捏其心脏,由此,该有情便成为疯狂、心念散乱者。因此说“或示现恐怖所缘等”。其中,“恐怖”指仅凭看见就能令有情生起恐惧、战栗、汗毛竖立的事物。“恒常疯狂”是就胆汁从胆囊中动荡而出、流到体外的人而说的。若胆汁虽已动荡但仍停留在胆囊内而未流出体外,则他时而能恢复清醒,并非恒常疯狂,应如此理解。“了知”指通过恢复清醒而了知。“极度”指超过常量的程度。显示巴利原文
Vissaṭṭhacittoti vissaṭṭhapakaticitto. Yakkhummattakoti yakkhā kira yassa cittaṃ khipitukāmā honti, tassa setamukhaṃ nīlodaraṃ surattahatthapādaṃ mahāsīsaṃ pajjalitanettaṃ bheravaṃ vā attabhāvaṃ nimminitvā dassenti, bheravaṃ vā saddaṃ sāventi, kathentasseva vā mukhena hatthaṃ pakkhipitvā hadayamaṃsaṃ maddanti, tena so satto ummattako hoti khittacitto. Tenevāha ‘‘bheravāni vā ārammaṇāni dassetvā’’tiādi. Tattha bheravānīti dassanamatteneva sattānaṃ bhayaṃ chambhitattaṃ lomahaṃsaṃ uppādetuṃ samatthāni. Niccameva ummattako hotīti yassa pittakosato pittaṃ calitvā bahi nikkhantaṃ hoti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yassa pana pittaṃ calitvā pittakoseyeva ṭhitaṃ hoti bahi anikkhantaṃ, so antarantarā saññaṃ paṭilabhati, na niccameva ummattako hotīti veditabbaṃ. Ñatvāti saññāpaṭilābhena jānitvā. Adhimattāyāti adhikappamāṇāya.
杂论的解释显示巴利原文
Pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā
“杂论”指混合的论法。“生起”指产生的因缘。“行为”等只是举例,也应包含非行为等。关于“受”,是伴随关系的具格用法,意为“与受俱的善”等。以“总摄一切”的方式,即总摄所有学处的方式。“六种学处生起”指身、语、身语、身心、语心、身语心这六种犯戒的生起。犯戒本身是以学处为名而说的,因为生起等是就犯戒而言,而非就学处本身。在这六种生起中,前三种是无心的,后三种是有心的。其中,犯戒由一种、二种、三种、四种或六种生起而生起,不存在五种生起的犯戒。其中,单一生起的犯戒由第四、第五和第六种生起而生起,不由其他生起。二种生起的犯戒由第一与第四、第二与第五、第三与第六、第四与第六、第五与第六这些生起而生起,不由其他生起。三种生起的犯戒由前三种和后三种生起而生起,不由其他生起。四种生起的犯戒由第一、第三、第四、第六以及第二、第三、第五、第六这些生起而生起,不由其他生起。六种生起的犯戒则由所有六种生起而生起。显示巴利原文
Pakiṇṇakanti vomissakanayaṃ. Samuṭṭhānanti uppattikāraṇaṃ. Kiriyātiādi nidassanamattaṃ, akiriyādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Vedanāyāti sahayoge karaṇavacanaṃ, vedanāya saha kusalañcāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sabbasaṅgāhakavasenāti sabbesaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ saṅgāhakavasena. Cha sikkhāpadasamuṭṭhānānīti kāyo vācā kāyavācā kāyacittaṃ vācācittaṃ kāyavācācittanti evaṃ vuttāni cha āpattisamuṭṭhānāni. Āpattiyeva hi sikkhāpadasīsena vuttā. Samuṭṭhānādayo hi āpattiyā honti, na sikkhāpadassa, imesu pana chasu samuṭṭhānesu purimāni tīṇi acittakāni, pacchimāni sacittakāni. Tesu ekena vā dvīhi vā tīhi vā catūhi vā chahi vā samuṭṭhānehi āpattiyo samuṭṭhahanti, pañcasamuṭṭhānā āpatti nāma natthi. Tattha ekasamuṭṭhānā catutthena ca pañcamena ca chaṭṭhena ca samuṭṭhānena samuṭṭhāti, na aññena. Dvisamuṭṭhānā paṭhamacatutthehi ca dutiyapañcamehi ca tatiyachaṭṭhehi ca catutthachaṭṭhehi ca pañcamachaṭṭhehi ca samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti, na aññehi. Tisamuṭṭhānā paṭhamehi ca tīhi, pacchimehi ca tīhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti, na aññehi. Catusamuṭṭhānā paṭhamatatiyacatutthachaṭṭhehi ca dutiyatatiyapañcamachaṭṭhehi ca samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti, na aññehi. Chasamuṭṭhānā chahipi samuṭṭhāti.
应知,所谓“有名为六种生起的学处”,此处也是以学处为名而说犯戒。正因如此,下文将说:“这一切都适用于犯戒,但在所有注释书中,是以学处为名而进行解说的。”由身等六门而生起,或具有六种生起,故称“六种生起”。“有四种生起”指身、身语、身心、身语心这四种,或语、身语、语心、身语心这四种为其生起,故称“四种生起”。“有三种生起”指身、语、身语这三种,或身心、语心、身语心这三种为其生起,故称“三种生起”。为了显示二种生起和一种生起以生起类别的方式,而说“有咖提那生起”等。有十三种生起类别:初波罗夷生起、不与取生起、媒嫁生起、呵责生起、咖提那生起、羊毛生起、随句法生起、旅途生起、贼众生起、说法生起、实语生起、举贼生起、未许生起。显示巴利原文
Sikkhāpadaṃ nāma atthi chasamuṭṭhānanti etthāpi sikkhāpadasīsena āpatti vuttāti veditabbā. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘sabbañcetaṃ āpattiyaṃ yujjati, sikkhāpadasīsena pana sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu desanā āruḷhā’’ti. Kāyādīhi chahi samuṭṭhānaṃ uppatti, cha vā samuṭṭhānāni etassāti chasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Atthi catusamuṭṭhānanti kāyo kāyavācā kāyacittaṃ kāyavācācittanti imāni cattāri, vācā kāyavācā vācācittaṃ kāyavācācittanti imāni vā cattāri samuṭṭhānāni etassāti catusamuṭṭhānaṃ. Atthi tisamuṭṭhānanti kāyo vācā kāyavācāti imāni tīṇi, kāyacittaṃ vācācittaṃ kāyavācācittanti imāni vā tīṇi samuṭṭhānāni etassāti tisamuṭṭhānaṃ. Dvisamuṭṭhānaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānañca samuṭṭhānasīsavasena dassento ‘‘atthi kathinasamuṭṭhāna’’ntiādimāha. Terasa hi samuṭṭhānasīsāni paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānaṃ kathinasamuṭṭhānaṃ eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānaṃ bhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānaṃ corivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānaṃ ananuññātasamuṭṭhānanti.
其中,“有六种生起”,是指媒嫁生起;“有四种生起”,则含摄旅途生起与未许生起。凡从第一、第三、第四、第六种生起而生起的,是旅途生起;凡从第二、第三、第五、第六种生起而生起的,是未许生起。“有三种生起”,含摄不与取生起与实语生起。凡从后三种有心生起而生起的,是不与取生起;凡从前三种无心生起而生起的,是实语生起。至于“有咖提那生起”等,则是依其余生起类别来说明含摄二种生起与一种生起的情形。即:凡从第三、第六生起而生起的,称为咖提那生起;凡从第一、第四生起而生起的,是羊毛生起;凡仅从第六生起而生起的,是舍责生起,亦名呵责生起。由“等”字所包含的初波罗夷生起、随句法生起、贼众生起、说法生起、举贼生起中:凡从身、心生起而生起的,是初波罗夷生起;凡从第二、第五生起而生起的,是随句法生起;凡从第四、第六生起而生起的,是贼众生起;凡仅从第五生起而生起的,是说法生起;凡从第五、第六生起而生起的,当知是举贼生起。显示巴利原文
Tattha ‘‘atthi chasamuṭṭhāna’’nti iminā sañcarittasamuṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Atthi catusamuṭṭhāna’’nti iminā pana addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ ananuññātasamuṭṭhānañca saṅgahitaṃ. Yañhi paṭhamatatiyacatutthachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ addhānasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ pana dutiyatatiyapañcamachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ ananuññātasamuṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Atthi tisamuṭṭhāna’’nti iminā adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ bhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānañca saṅgahitaṃ. Yañhi sacittakehi tīhi samuṭṭhānehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ adinnādānasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ pana acittakehi tīhi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ bhūtārocanasamuṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Atthi kathinasamuṭṭhāna’’ntiādinā pana avasesasamuṭṭhānasīsena dvisamuṭṭhānaṃ ekasamuṭṭhānañca saṅgaṇhāti. Tathā hi yaṃ tatiyachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ kathinasamuṭṭhānanti vuccati. Yaṃ paṭhamacatutthehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ eḷakalomasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ chaṭṭheneva samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ dhuranikkhepasamuṭṭhānaṃ, samanubhāsanasamuṭṭhānantipi tasseva nāmaṃ. Ādi-saddasaṅgahitesu pana paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānapadasodhammatheyyasatthadhammadesanācorivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānesu yaṃ kāyacittato samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ paṭhamapārājikasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ dutiyapañcamehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ padasodhammasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ catutthachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ theyyasatthasamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ pañcameneva samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ dhammadesanāsamuṭṭhānaṃ. Yaṃ pañcamachaṭṭhehi samuṭṭhāti, idaṃ corivuṭṭhāpanasamuṭṭhānanti veditabbaṃ.
如是以起源为纲,将一切学处显示为十三种后,现在再依作为方式显示为五种,而说:“其中,也有某些是从作为生起”等。其中,“某些”是以学处为代表而说罪。因此,凡如掘地等,对以身语违犯者所生之罪,即称为从作为生起。凡如第一覆藏罪,对不作应作之身语业者所生之罪,称为从不作为生起。凡如从非亲戚比丘尼手中接受衣之罪,对作者与不作者两者所生之罪,称为从作为与不作为生起。凡如接受金银之罪,有时对作者、有时对不作者所生之罪,称为有时从作为、有时从不作为生起。凡如建造小屋之罪,有时对作者、有时对作者与不作者两者所生之罪,称为有时从作为、有时从作为与不作为生起。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ samuṭṭhānasīsena sabbasikkhāpadāni terasadhā dassetvā idāni kiriyāvasena pañcadhā dassento ‘‘tatrāpi kiñci kiriyato samuṭṭhātī’’tiādimāha. Tattha kiñcīti sikkhāpadasīsena āpattiṃ vadati. Tasmā yā kāyena vā vācāya vā pathavīkhaṇanādīsu viya vītikkamaṃ karontassa hoti, ayaṃ kiriyato samuṭṭhāti nāma. Yā kāyavācāya kattabbaṃ akarontassa hoti paṭhamakathināpatti viya, ayaṃ akiriyato samuṭṭhāti nāma. Yā karontassa ca akarontassa ca hoti aññātikāya bhikkhuniyā hatthato cīvarapaṭiggahaṇāpatti viya, ayaṃ kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhāti nāma. Yā siyā karontassa ca siyā akarontassa ca hoti rūpiyapaṭiggahaṇāpatti viya, ayaṃ siyā kiriyato siyā akiriyato samuṭṭhāti nāma. Yā siyā karontassa ca siyā karontassa ca akarontassa ca hoti kuṭikārāpatti viya, ayaṃ siyā kiriyato siyā kiriyākiriyato samuṭṭhāti nāma.
现在,依想而将一切学处分作二种,示为:“其中,也有想解脱”等。“想解脱”应视为中间词省略复合词:因无想而解脱,故称想解脱。由于没有违犯想而得以解脱的,便名想解脱。它确实获得心支,因为它是由身、心等有心起源而生起的。以“确实获得”这一决定之词,显示并非不获得。因此,凡是获得心支的,以及不获得心支的,那便称为“其他”,因为“其他”一词的所指,乃是已说之词的对反领域。显示巴利原文
Idāni sabbasikkhāpadāni saññāvasena dvidhā katvā dassento ‘‘tatrāpi atthi saññāvimokkha’’ntiādimāha. Saññāya abhāvena vimokkho assāti saññāvimokkhanti majjhepadalopasamāso daṭṭhabbo. Yato hi vītikkamasaññāabhāvena muccati, idaṃ saññāvimokkhanti vuccati. Cittaṅgaṃ labhatiyevāti kāyacittādisacittakasamuṭṭhāneheva samuṭṭhahanato . ‘‘Labhatiyevā’’ti avadhāraṇena no na labhatīti dasseti. Tasmā yaṃ cittaṅgaṃ labhati, na labhati ca, taṃ ‘‘itara’’nti vuttaṃ itara-saddassa vuttapaṭiyogavisayattā.
再次,为依心而将一切学处显示为二类,故说“又有,有心的”等。凡与心一同而犯,即凡唯以有心的起源而犯,非以无心的起源而犯。即便没有心,以‘api’一词也显示与心一同而犯。因为,若有时以无心的起源生起,有时以有心的起源生起,这便称为无心的。在此,应知有想二法是从不犯的角度而说,有心二法是从犯的角度而说,这是它们之间的差别。显示巴利原文
Puna sabbasikkhāpadāni cittavasena dvidhā dassento ‘‘puna atthi sacittaka’’ntiādimāha. Yaṃ saheva cittena āpajjatīti yaṃ sacittakeneva samuṭṭhānena āpajjati, no acittakena. Vināpīti api-saddena sahāpi cittena āpajjatīti dasseti. Yañhi kadāci acittakena, kadāci sacittakena samuṭṭhānena samuṭṭhāti, taṃ acittakanti vuccati. Ettha ca saññādukaṃ anāpattimukhena, sacittakadukaṃ āpattimukhena vuttanti idametesaṃ nānākaraṇanti veditabbaṃ.
世间罪二法的特征前已说明,故不再分析。现在,为显示一切学处依业而分为二种,依善等及依受而分为三种,故说“依业、善、受”等。此处,虽然注释书中的方法是说依业二法为身业与语业,但仅显示三法也合适。因为一切学处,有应在身门犯的,有应在语门犯的,有应在身语门犯的,故有三种。正如《本母注释》所说:“一切学处,依身业、语业及彼二者而有三种。其中,应在身门犯的,即称为身业;应在语门犯的,即称为语业;应在两处犯的,即称为身业与语业。”也正因此,在“不与取学处”等中,依彼二者而显示为身业与语业。显示巴利原文
Lokavajjadukassa heṭṭhā vuttalakkhaṇattā taṃ avibhajitvā idāni sabbasikkhāpadāni kammavasena duvidhāni, kusalādivasena vedanāvasena ca tividhāni hontīti dassento ‘‘kammakusalavedanāvasenā’’tiādimāha. Ettha pana kiñcāpi aṭṭhakathāsu āgatanayena kāyakammaṃ vacīkammanti kammavasena dukaṃ vuttaṃ, tikameva pana dassetuṃ vaṭṭati. Sabbameva hi sikkhāpadaṃ kāyadvāre āpajjitabbato vacīdvāre āpajjitabbato kāyavacīdvāre āpajjitabbato ca tividhaṃ hoti. Teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbāva kāyakammavacīkammatadubhayavasena tividhā honti. Tattha kāyadvāre āpajjitabbā kāyakammanti vuccati, vacīdvāre āpajjitabbā vacīkammanti vuccati, ubhayattha āpajjitabbā kāyakammavacīkamma’’nti. Tatoyeva ca adinnādānasikkhāpadādīsu kāyakammavacīkammanti tadubhayavasena dassitaṃ.
然而,说“有学处是善的”等,是为了显示:犯戒者或具善心而犯,或具不善心而犯,或具无记心而犯;并非说存在善的罪。因为,并不存在名为善的罪,如说:“罪诤或是恶,或是无记,没有罪诤是善。”十种欲界唯作心,即与生笑、威仪路及发语表业一起的八种大唯作心。两种神通心能生起罪的情况,应见于不知制戒而施展神通等时。所谓“凡以善心而犯”,即凡以学处为首而摄的罪,具善心者犯之。然而,以此语,当罪被称为“那是善的”时,是显示善性只是间接的,并非从究竟意义上说。因为,以善心犯戒者,是犯了称为色蕴的无记罪,此罪以有表或无表的违犯学处之行相而生起。以其他(心)而犯其他(罪),即以其他不善、无记心而犯的,那是其他,即不善与无记。这也是为了显示:犯戒者或具不善心而犯,或具善、无记心而犯。即使如此,应知在一切学处中,有些唯是不善心,有些依善与无记而有二心,有些依一切(三心)而有三种心,所得的差别仅此而已,别无其他。显示巴利原文
Atthi pana sikkhāpadaṃ kusalantiādinā āpattiṃ āpajjanto kusalacittasamaṅgī vā āpajjati akusalacittasamaṅgī vā abyākatacittasamaṅgī vāti dasseti, na pana kusalāpi āpatti atthīti. Na hi kusalā āpatti nāma atthi ‘‘āpattādhikaraṇaṃ siyā akusalaṃ siyā abyākataṃ, natthi āpattādhikaraṇaṃ kusala’’nti (pari. 303) vacanato. Dasa kāmāvacarakiriyacittānīti hasituppādavoṭṭhabbanehi saddhiṃ aṭṭha mahākiriyacittāni. Dvinnaṃ abhiññācittānaṃ āpattisamuṭṭhāpakattaṃ paññattiṃ ajānantassa iddhivikubbanādīsu daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ kusalacittena āpajjatīti yaṃ sikkhāpadasīsena gahitaṃ āpattiṃ kusalacittasamaṅgī āpajjati. Iminā pana vacanena taṃ kusalanti āpattiyā vuccamāno kusalabhāvo pariyāyatova, na paramatthatoti dasseti. Kusalacittena hi āpattiṃ āpajjanto saviññattikaṃ aviññattikaṃ vā sikkhāpadavītikkamākārappavattaṃ rūpakkhandhasaṅkhātaṃ abyākatāpattiṃ āpajjati. Itarehi itaranti itarehi akusalābyākatacittehi yaṃ āpajjati, taṃ itaraṃ, akusalaṃ abyākatañcāti attho. Idañca āpattiṃ āpajjanto akusalacittasamaṅgī vā āpajjati kusalābyākatacittasamaṅgī vāti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Evaṃ santepi sabbasikkhāpadesu kiñci akusalacittameva kiñci kusalābyākatavasena dvicittaṃ, kiñci sabbesaṃ vasena ticittanti ayameva pabhedo labbhati, na aññoti veditabbaṃ.
所谓三受、二受、一受,同样只是依前文所述的受而建立,并非依其他,应如此理解。对于躺卧后入灭尽定者,由于同宿的缘,唯有那时生起的行相色蕴构成犯戒,因此也可说“有无受”。但应知,这是不取“有时、偶尔、随意而可能发生”的情形,唯是依多数情况而说。显示巴利原文
Tivedanaṃ dvivedanaṃ ekavedananti idañca yathāvuttavedanāvaseneva labbhati, nāññathāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nipajjitvā nirodhaṃ samāpannassa sahaseyyavasena tadākārappavattarūpakkhandhasseva āpattibhāvato ‘‘atthi avedana’’ntipi vattabbametaṃ, kadāci karahaci yadicchakaṃ sambhavatīti aggahetvā yebhuyyavasena labbhamānaṃyeva gahetvā vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
现在,为了在此注释的学处中分别说明如前所述的起源等,而说“已知此杂集”等。其中,“已知”与表示后时动作的“应知”相关联,应如此理解。“由行为起源”是依多数情况而说,因为在他人攻击时,接受者属于非行为起源。“意识门中并无犯戒”也是依多数情况而说。然而,此处的心只是构成因素,因为第一波罗夷从身与心生起,所以此处的心只是犯戒的构成因素。不依其力而获得业性,意思是:由于依令知者之力而发生于身门,故不依彼心之力而获得此学处的意业性。因为此学处依前文所述方式而制定,所以说“所有这一切在犯戒中都是合理的”。(因为)如前所述的起源等,在制定中并不合理。显示巴利原文
Idāni yathāvuttasamuṭṭhānādīni imasmiṃ saṃvaṇṇiyamānasikkhāpade vibhajitvā dassento ‘‘imaṃ pakiṇṇakaṃ viditvā’’tiādimāha. Tattha viditvāti imassa ‘‘veditabba’’nti iminā aparakālakiriyāvacanena sambandho veditabbo. Kiriyasamuṭṭhānanti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ parūpakkame sati sādiyantassa akiriyasamuṭṭhānabhāvato. ‘‘Manodvāre āpatti nāma natthīti idampi bāhullavaseneva vutta’’nti vadanti. Cittaṃ panettha aṅgamattaṃ hotīti paṭhamapārājikaṃ kāyacittato samuṭṭhātīti cittamettha āpattiyā aṅgameva hoti. Na tassa vasena kammabhāvo labbhatīti viññattijanakavasena kāyadvāre pavattattā tassa cittassa vasena imassa sikkhāpadassa manokammabhāvo na labbhatīti attho. Sikkhāpadassa heṭṭhā vuttanayena paññattibhāvato ‘‘sabbañcetaṃ āpattiyaṃ yujjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi yathāvuttasamuṭṭhānādi paññattiyaṃ yujjati.
判定事注释显示巴利原文
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
这是以“为何”提问,意在讲述。已被引导并决断的事例,称为“已决断事例”。因为那些事例正是由世尊亲自决断的,如:“比丘,你犯了波罗夷罪。比丘,非波罗夷罪,是桑喀地谢沙罪。比丘,对不接受者非罪”等。因此说“由世尊亲自决断”。“摄颂”即结集颂,意为总摄颂。“事例颂”是指“那时,有一位比丘……”等说明缘起事例的已决断事例的巴利经文本身,由于它编集了各个事例,故称为“事例颂”,并非依韵律分别的特征。或者,此处应理解为“诸颂的事例,即事例颂”。此处,指在已决断事例中。第二等,指第二波罗夷等。应连接为“第二等应被决断”。“工匠们”,指画师等工匠们。凡画师等反复观看后,学习并制作绘画等,那被称为“被覆藏的形象”。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ kinti kathetukamyatāya pucchati. Vinītāni vinicchitāni vatthūni vinītavatthūni. Tāni hi ‘‘āpattiṃ tvaṃ bhikkhu āpanno pārājikaṃ. Anāpatti bhikkhu pārājikassa, āpatti saṅghādisesassa. Anāpatti bhikkhu asādiyantassā’’tiādinā bhagavatāyeva vinicchitāni . Tenāha ‘‘bhagavatā sayaṃ vinicchitāna’’nti. Uddānagāthāti uddesagāthā, saṅgahagāthāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vatthugāthāti ‘‘tena kho pana samayena aññataro bhikkhū’’tiādikā nidānavatthudīpikā vinītavatthupāḷiyeva tesaṃ tesaṃ vatthūnaṃ ganthanato ‘‘vatthugāthā’’ti vuttā, na chandovicitilakkhaṇena. Gāthānaṃ vatthu vatthugāthāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Etthāti vinītavatthūsu. Dutiyādīnanti dutiyapārājikādīnaṃ. Dutiyādīni vinicchinitabbānīti yojetabbaṃ. Sippikānanti cittakārādisippikānaṃ. Yaṃ passitvā passitvā cittakārādayo cittakammādīni uggaṇhantā karonti, taṃ ‘‘paṭicchannakarūpa’’nti vuccati.
67 先说前两个事例,即猕猴事例和跋耆子事例。这两则虽是在增制中出现,但由于是世尊亲自决断的事例,因此如同在增制中出现的染衣匠等事例被归入不与取等一样,也再次被收入已决断事例中。若依此说,则“他产生了疑惑”一语似有矛盾,因为在增制中,是其他比丘看见后去指责那位比丘。诚然如此,但应作如是理解:诸比丘依增制中所说的方式指责之后,当说出“贤友,难道不是那样吗”时,他便产生了疑惑。而“他向世尊报告了此事”也应当这样理解:当诸比丘依增制中所说方式向世尊报告后,世尊问:“比丘,听说你真的和母猴行淫了吗?”他回答:“是的,世尊。”如此便向世尊报告了此事。显示巴利原文
67.Purimāni dve vatthūnīti makkaṭivatthuṃ vajjiputtakavatthuñca. Tāni pana kiñcāpi anupaññattiyaṃ āgatāneva, tathāpi bhagavatā sayaṃ vinicchitavatthubhāvato adinnādānādīsu anupaññattiyaṃ āgatāni rajakādivatthūni viya puna vinītavatthūsu pakkhittāni. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosī’’ti idaṃ virujjheyya, anupaññattiyañhi aññe bhikkhū disvā taṃ bhikkhuṃ codesunti? Saccametaṃ, tehi pana bhikkhūhi anupaññattiyaṃ vuttanayena codetvā ‘‘nanu, āvuso, tatheva taṃ hotī’’ti vutte tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosīti gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesī’’ti idañca tehi bhikkhūhi anupaññattiyaṃ vuttanayena bhagavato ārocite ‘‘saccaṃ kira tvaṃ bhikkhu makkaṭiyā methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevī’’ti bhagavatā puṭṭho samāno ‘‘saccaṃ bhagavā’’ti bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesīti gahetabbaṃ.
在跋耆子事例中,有一类人未舍弃学处、也未表明羸弱,便行淫欲法而后还俗,之后去往阿难尊者那里请求再次出家与受具足戒。针对他们,世尊在增制中说:“阿难,如来绝无可能、绝无机会为了跋耆人或跋耆子的缘故,而废除已为弟子们制定的波罗夷学处”等等。而另一类人并未还俗,保持着比丘的身份,产生疑惑后向世尊报告了此事。针对他们,则在此处说:“比丘们,你们犯了波罗夷罪。”然而,有些人不了知此意,便说:“在已决断事例中出现的,是另外一个猕猴事例和另外一个跋耆子事例。”显示巴利原文
Vajjiputtakavatthumhi pana sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya dubbalyaṃ anāvikatvā methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevitvā vibbhamitvā ye ānandattheraṃ upasaṅkamitvā puna pabbajjaṃ upasampadañca yāciṃsu, te sandhāya ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ, ānanda, anavakāso, yaṃ tathāgato vajjīnaṃ vā vajjiputtakānaṃ vā kāraṇā sāvakānaṃ pārājikaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ paññattaṃ samūhaneyyā’’tiādi anupaññattiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Ye pana avibbhamitvā saliṅge ṭhitāyeva uppannakukkuccā bhagavato etamatthaṃ ārocesuṃ, te sandhāya ‘‘āpattiṃ tumhe, bhikkhave, āpannā pārājika’’nti idha vuttaṃ. Keci pana imaṃ adhippāyaṃ ajānantāva ‘‘aññameva makkaṭivatthu vajjiputtakavatthu ca vinītavatthūsu āgata’’nti vadanti.
“用茅草绑缚后”,即用茅草绑缚之后。“以毛发”,指以人的毛发。“那种贪染”,指身触的贪染。“知道后”,即自己知道后。如果此事是由身触贪染所作,为何不收入身触贪染学处的已决断事例中,而在此处宣说?答道:虽然此事是由身触贪染所作,但那位比丘因在波罗夷的界限内作了努力,便对波罗夷产生了疑惑:“我是否犯了波罗夷?”,所以在此处宣说。也正因此,世尊才说:“比丘,非波罗夷罪,而是桑喀地谢沙罪。”显示巴利原文
Kuse ganthetvāti kusatiṇāni ganthetvā. Kesehīti manussakesehi. Taṃ rāganti kāyasaṃsaggarāgaṃ. Ñatvāti sayameva jānitvā. Yadi kāyasaṃsaggarāgena kataṃ, kāyasaṃsaggarāgasikkhāpadassa vinītavatthūsu avatvā idha kasmā vuttanti? Vuccate – kiñcāpi taṃ kāyasaṃsaggarāgena kataṃ, tassa pana bhikkhuno pārājikakkhette katupakkamattā ‘‘pārājikaṃ nu kho ahaṃ āpanno’’ti pārājikavisayaṃ kukkuccaṃ ahosīti idha vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu pārājikassa, āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti.
68 “极为可观”,因为即使观看一整天也不会满足,所以极其值得观看。“以色泽与体形的优美”:此处“体形的优美”(pokkharatā)是指美好状态;色泽的优美即“色泽与体形的优美”,以此色泽与体形的优美,意思是色泽的具足。然而,古人说“体形”(pokkhara)是指身体,“色泽”(vaṇṇa)就是色泽本身。依他们的见解,色泽与体形合称“色泽与体形”,其状态就是“色泽与体形的优美”,因此“以色泽与体形的优美”意为以清净的色泽与身体形态的具足。或者,“色泽与体形”可以理解为“具色泽的体形”,是省略后分的前分依主释,其状态即“色泽与体形的优美”,以此色泽与体形的优美,意思是具色泽的身体状态。“他侵犯了”,意为“他压倒了”。那么,如何在不被接受的情况下坐下呢?答:“以非正法意图……如同木桩一般”。显示巴利原文
68.Atidassanīyāti divasampi passantānaṃ atittikaraṇato ativiya dassanayoggā. Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti ettha pokkharatā vuccati sundarabhāvo, vaṇṇassa pokkharatā vaṇṇapokkharatā, tāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya, vaṇṇasampattiyāti attho. Porāṇā pana pokkharanti sarīraṃ vadanti, vaṇṇaṃ vaṇṇameva. Tesaṃ matena vaṇṇañca pokkharañca vaṇṇapokkharāni, tesaṃ bhāvo vaṇṇapokkharatā, tasmā vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti parisuddhena vaṇṇena ceva sarīrasaṇṭhānasampattiyā cāti attho. Atha vā vaṇṇasampannaṃ pokkharaṃ vaṇṇapokkharanti uttarapadalopo pubbapadassa daṭṭhabbo, tassa bhāvo vaṇṇapokkharatā, tāya vaṇṇapokkharatāya, vaṇṇasampannasarīratāyāti attho. Padhaṃsesīti abhibhavīti attho. Kathaṃ pana asādiyantī nisīdīti āha – ‘‘asaddhammādhippāyena…pe… khāṇukā viyā’’ti.
“不沾染”,即不附着。“于诸欲中”,是指于所缘欲与烦恼欲中。这是说:如同荷叶上的水珠无法停留,又如同针尖上的芥子不能立住,同样地,凡内心对两种欲都不沾染的人,欲便不会住著于他,我称这样的人为婆罗门。显示巴利原文
Nalimpatīti na allīyati. Kāmesūti vatthukāmakilesakāmesu. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā paduminipaṇṇe udakabindu na saṇṭhāti, yathā ca sūcimukhe sāsapo na santiṭṭhati, evameva yo abbhantare duvidhenapi kāmena na limpati, tasmiṃ kāmo na saṇṭhāti, tamahaṃ brāhmaṇaṃ vadāmīti.
69 应知:通过显示果的消失与生起,也说明了因的消失与生起,即“男性特征消失,女性特征生起”。因为当男性根灭时,男性特征便消失;当女性根生起时,女性特征便显现。正如《双论·根双论》中所说:“女性根生起者,男性根生起吗?否。或者,男性根生起者,女性根生起吗?否。”由于二根不可能在同一相续中同时存在,在女性根显现的那一刹那之前,从第十七心识刹那开始,男性根便不再生起。而在那之前已生起的男性根,连同俱生色等渐次灭尽后,女性根才在该相续中生起。此后,当依男性特征形态而转起的业生色及其他色法持续一段时间并灭尽后,依女性特征形态而生起的四因色相续转起时,便说“男性特征消失,女性特征显现”。当女性出现男性相时,也应以同样的方法理解。显示巴利原文
69.Purisasaṇṭhānaṃ antarahitaṃ, itthisaṇṭhānaṃ uppannanti phalassa vināsuppādadassanena kāraṇassapi vināsuppādā vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Purisindriye hi naṭṭhe purisasaṇṭhānaṃ antaradhāyati, itthindriye samuppanne itthisaṇṭhānaṃ pātubhavati. Tathā hi ‘‘yassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa purisindriyaṃ uppajjatīti? No. Yassa vā pana purisindriyaṃ uppajjati, tassa itthindriyaṃ uppajjatīti? No’’ti yamakapakaraṇe (yama. 3. indriyayamaka.188) vuttattā indriyadvayassa ekasmiṃ santāne sahapavattiyā asambhavato yasmiṃ khaṇe itthindriyaṃ pātubhavati, tato pubbe sattarasamacittato paṭṭhāya purisindriyaṃ nuppajjati. Tato pubbe uppannesu ca purisindriyesu sahajarūpehi saddhiṃ kamena niruddhesu tasmiṃ santāne itthindriyaṃ uppajjati. Tato purisasaṇṭhānākārena pavattesu kammajarūpesu sesarūpesu ca kañci kālaṃ pavattitvā niruddhesu itthisaṇṭhānākārena ca catujarūpasantatiyā pavattāya purisasaṇṭhānaṃ antarahitaṃ, itthisaṇṭhānaṃ pātubhūtanti vuccati. Itthiyā purisaliṅgapātubhāvepi ayameva nayo veditabbo.
当知:说“男性相为胜,女性相为劣”,即点明男性根的殊胜与女性根的低劣。若没有根的胜劣,其所依的性相的胜劣便不可能存在。同样,“男性相因强力不善业而消失”等说法,也应理解为是在说明根的消失与生起;因为当根灭去或生起时,其所依的性相才随之消失或建立。那么,这里如何理解“男性相因强力不善业而消失,女性相因弱力善业而建立”呢?答:在结生时,能生起男性根且能力未受损的强力善业,会在整个生命期间持续生起男性根。然而,在生命期间,若因某些因缘成熟的邪淫等强力不善业,使得该结生善业的能力受损而变得羸弱,它便不再生起男性根,而根据自身剩余的能力,在转起中生起女性根。如果在结生之时,能生起男性根的能力就已被某些因缘成熟的邪淫等强力不善业所损害,那么变得羸弱的善业便不在结生中生起男性根,而直接在结生中生起女性根。所以说,“男性相因强力不善业而消失,女性相因弱力善业而建立”。显示巴利原文
Purisaliṅgaṃ uttamaṃ, itthiliṅgaṃ hīnanti iminā ca purisindriyassa uttamabhāvo, itthindriyassa ca hīnabhāvo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi indriyassa hīnukkaṭṭhabhāvaṃ vinā tannissayassa liṅgassa hīnukkaṭṭhatā sambhavati. Purisaliṅgaṃ balavaakusalena antaradhāyatītiādināpi indriyasseva vināsuppādā vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Indriye hi vinaṭṭhe uppanne ca tannissayassa liṅgassapi antaradhānaṃ patiṭṭhānañca sambhavati. Kathaṃ panettha purisaliṅgaṃ balavaakausalena antaradhāyati, itthiliṅgaṃ dubbalakusalena patiṭṭhātīti? Vuccate – paṭisandhiyaṃ tāva purisindriyuppādakaṃ anupahatasāmatthiyaṃ balavakusalakammaṃ yāvatāyukaṃ purisindriyameva uppādeti, antarā pana kenaci laddhapaccayena pāradārikattādinā balavaakusalakammena upahatasāmatthiyaṃ tadeva paṭisandhidāyakaṃ kusalakammaṃ dubbalībhūtaṃ purisindriyaṃ anuppādetvā attano sāmatthiyānurūpaṃ itthindriyaṃ pavatte uppādeti. Yadā pana paṭisandhidānakāleyeva kenaci laddhapaccayena pāradārikattādinā balavaakusalakammena purisindriyuppādanasāmatthiyaṃ upahataṃ hoti, tadā dubbalībhūtaṃ kusalakammaṃ purisindriyaṃ anuppādetvā paṭisandhiyaṃyeva itthindriyaṃ uppādeti. Tasmā ‘‘purisaliṅgaṃ balavaakusalena antaradhāyati, itthiliṅgaṃ dubbalakusalena patiṭṭhātī’’ti vuccati.
“因弱力不善业而消失”是说:当障碍男性根生起的邪淫等强力不善业变得羸弱时,女性相便消失,因此说“女性相因弱力不善业而消失”。具体而言,在结生时,由于被邪淫等强力不善业所障碍,那只能生起女性根的弱力善业,无法生起男性根。在生命转起期间,如果依止梵行、远离邪行,或者依于希求成为男性之愿而造作累计的强力善业赋予它以能力,令其能够生起男性根时,它便不再生起女性根,而根据自身的能力生起男性根。此时,由于障碍男性根生起的强力不善业变得羸弱,该女性根便消失,因此说“女性相因弱力不善业而消失”。同样,由于强力善业生起了男性根,所以说“男性相因强力善业而建立”。对于先前为女性者,在结生时便生起男性根的情形,也应以同样的道理来理解。“两者皆因不善业而消失,因善业而获得”,这是就善趣而言;应知在恶趣中,二者的生起与灭去都唯由不善业所致。显示巴利原文
Dubbalaakusalena antaradhāyatīti pāradārikattādibalavaakusalakammassa purisindriyuppādanavibandhakassa dubbalabhāve sati antaradhāyantaṃ itthiliṅgaṃ dubbalaakusalena antaradhāyatīti vuttaṃ. Tathā hi pāradārikattādinā balavaakusalakammena bāhitattā purisindriyuppādane asamatthaṃ paṭisandhiyaṃ itthiyā itthindriyuppādakaṃ dubbalakusalakammaṃ yadā pavattiyaṃ brahmacariyavāsamicchācārapaṭivirativasena purisattapatthanāvasena vā katupacitabalavakusalakammena āhitasāmatthiyaṃ purisindriyuppādane samatthaṃ itthindriyaṃ anuppādetvā attano sāmatthiyānurūpaṃ purisindriyaṃ uppādeti, tadā purisindriyuppādanavibandhakassa balavaakusalakammassa dubbalabhāve sati taṃ itthindriyaṃ antarahitanti ‘‘itthiliṅgaṃ antaradhāyantaṃ dubbalaakusalena antaradhāyatī’’ti vuccati. Yathāvuttanayeneva balavatā kusalakammena purisindriyassa uppāditattā ‘‘purisaliṅgaṃ balavakusalena patiṭṭhātī’’ti vuccati. Pubbe itthibhūtassa paṭisandhiyaṃ purisindriyuppādepi ayaṃ nayo veditabbo. Ubhayampi akusalena antaradhāyati, kusalena paṭilabbhatīti idaṃ sugatibhavaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, duggatiyaṃ pana ubhinnaṃ uppatti vināso ca akusalakammenevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“两者皆有同宿罪”是说:如“若比丘与女人同宿,犯波逸提。若比丘尼与男人同宿,犯波逸提”所规定,两者皆因同宿而犯波逸提罪。“苦”指由于具足心苦而苦。“忧恼”指因瞋恚而心恶,或因被忧受所胜而心扭曲。在说了“应安慰”之后,为显示安慰的方法,便说“好了,不要忧虑”等语。“无遮”指未被阻挡。“法”指教法、行道、通达这三种正法。“天与道”即天之道,或称天的道为天之道,也就是能成就生天的行道。为显示“若与比丘尼相约同行于道路,应避免犯戒”,故说“除了相约之外”。若未以“我们去某处吧”、“来吧,一起走”等方式相约,则无罪。显示巴利原文
Ubhinnampisahaseyyāpatti hotīti ‘‘yo pana bhikkhu mātugāmena sahaseyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiyaṃ. Yā pana bhikkhunī purisena sahaseyyaṃ kappeyya, pācittiya’’nti vuttattā ubhinnampi sahaseyyavasena pācittiyāpatti hoti. Dukkhīti cetodukkhasamaṅgitāya dukkhī. Dummanoti dosena duṭṭhamano, virūpamano vā domanassābhibhūtatāya. ‘‘Samassāsetabbo’’ti vatvā samassāsetabbavidhiṃ dassento ‘‘hotu mā cintayitthā’’tiādimāha. Anāvaṭoti avārito. Dhammoti pariyattipaṭipattipaṭivedhasaṅkhāto tividhopi saddhammo. Saggo ca maggo ca saggamaggo, saggassa vā maggo saggamaggo, saggūpapattisādhikā paṭipatti. Bhikkhuniyā saddhiṃ saṃvidhāya addhānagamane āpatti pariharitabbāti dassento ‘‘saṃvidahanaṃ parimocetvā’’ti āha. ‘‘Mayaṃ asukaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ gacchāmā’’ti vatvā ‘‘ehi saddhiṃ gamissāmā’’tiādinā asaṃvidahitattā anāpatti.
“出外”指在自己所住的村庄之外。关于“村外、河对岸、夜间、别离、僧团减员”等不犯戒的情形,是依据“第二比丘尼已离去”等(《波逸提》693)所述的不犯戒相而说的。“能令欢喜者”指有能力令心欢喜者。“令她们生气后”指舍弃了她们之后。“有惭耻者……可得”是就摄受而说,意即“若无摄受,可能生厌离心而还俗”。“无惭耻者……可得”是说因为无惭耻而亲近非己方的人。“非亲族……可行”则是将此作为她的特殊开许,注释书中说这是允许的。“即使在比丘身份时”指在身为比丘的时期。“僧众中的近侍者”指成为戒师与教授师以护持僧众者。“应于他人处求取依止”指其门下受具足戒的弟子应于其他阿阇梨处求取依止。“依彼而住者”是就弟子而言。“应求取依止师”指为受具足戒应求取依止师,即应于他人处受具足戒。显示巴利原文
Bahigāmeti attano vasanagāmato bahi. Gāmantaranadīpārarattivippavāsagaṇaohīyanāpattīhi anāpattīti ‘‘dutiyikā bhikkhunī pakkantā vā hotī’’tiādinā (pāci. 693) vuttaanāpattilakkhaṇehi saṃsandanato vuttaṃ. Ārādhikāti cittārādhane samatthā. Tā kopetvāti tā pariccajitvā. Lajjiniyo…pe… labbhatīti ‘‘saṅgahe asati ukkaṇṭhitvā vibbhameyyāpī’’ti saṅgahavaseneva vuttaṃ. Alajjiniyo…pe… labbhatīti alajjibhāvato asantapakkhaṃ bhajantīti vuttaṃ. Aññātikā…pe… vaṭṭatīti idaṃ pana imissā āveṇikaṃ katvā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ anuññātanti vadanti. Bhikkhubhāvepīti bhikkhukālepi. Parisāvacaroti upajjhāyo ca ācariyo ca hutvā parisupaṭṭhāko. Aññassa santike nissayo gahetabboti tassa santike upasampannehi saddhivihārikehi aññassa ācariyassa santike nissayo gahetabbo. Taṃ nissāya vasantehipīti antevāsike sandhāya vadati. Upajjhā gahetabbāti upasampadatthaṃ upajjhā gahetabbā, aññassa santike upasampajjitabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
“律仪业”是就代持而言的。“应重做”指应重新代持。“再次接受后,七日内可用”是为了显示:依据“诸比丘,我允许比丘尼的储存物由比丘们,比丘们的储存物由比丘尼们接受后受用”(《小品》421)的说法,再次接受后,即使当天含有食物的物品也可受用。“第七日”是为了显示:即使未犯舍堕罪,也可再次在七日内受用。然而,由于比丘尼的舍堕物对比丘可用,比丘的舍堕物对比丘尼可用,因此即使到了第八日,若发生性别转变,不必舍弃即可在七日内受用,这是诸师所说。“本性者守护彼”意指未转变性别者因未失去接受而守护,因未分离故未失去接受,这是意旨所在。“自己取后放置”指接受后自己放置。“受用者犯戒”指若发生性别转变,因失去接受,再次接受后受用者犯戒。显示巴利原文
Vinayakammanti vikappanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Puna kātabbanti puna vikappetabbaṃ. Puna paṭiggahetvā sattāhaṃ vaṭṭatīti ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, bhikkhunīnaṃ sannidhi bhikkhūhi, bhikkhūnaṃ sannidhi bhikkhunīhi paṭiggāhāpetvā paribhuñjitu’’nti (cūḷava. 421) vacanato puna paṭiggahitaṃ tadahu sāmisampi vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Sattame divaseti idaṃ tañca nissaggiyaṃ anāpajjitvāva punapi sattāhaṃ paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana bhikkhuniyā nissaggiyaṃ bhikkhussa vaṭṭati, bhikkhussa nissaggiyaṃ bhikkhuniyā vaṭṭati, tasmā aṭṭhamepi divase liṅgaparivatte sati anissajjitvāva antosattāhe paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Taṃ pakatatto rakkhatīti aparivattaliṅgo taṃ paṭiggahaṇavijahanato rakkhati, avibhattatāya paṭiggahaṇaṃ na vijahatīti adhippāyo. Sāmaṃ gahetvāna nikkhipeyyāti paṭiggahetvā sayaṃ nikkhipeyya. Paribhuñjantassaāpattīti liṅgaparivatte sati paṭiggahaṇavijahanato puna paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjantassa āpatti.
“因还俗”指犯巴拉基卡者成为在家者。这在三处《甘提帕达》中都有说,说得很好。因为并非未犯巴拉基卡者未舍弃学处而仅取在家相,就会失去比丘身份。犯巴拉基卡者若仍保持比丘相,只要未承认,其比丘身份就依然存在,不归入未受具足戒者之列。因此,他即使接受共住,也不是贼住者;不产生同宿等罪;但在辱骂语上则产生波逸提罪。正因如此,才说:“若有人不净,犯了某巴拉基卡法,若持净见者令其开许后以辱骂意图说话,则犯辱骂语波逸提”(《巴拉基卡》389)。若无比丘身份,则应是恶作;若有比丘身份,则说接受物的接受已失是不合理的。因此,由于比丘身份已完全不存在,犯巴拉基卡后取在家相而成为在家者,在此被理解为“还俗”,而非本性比丘仅取在家相。正因如此,有些地方因与舍戒性质相同,不将还俗单独列出。因为当说到以舍戒而失去接受时,犯巴拉基卡者因成为在家者而比丘身份完全不存在,便无需再说什么。正如佛陀达塔阿阇梨在其《律决断》中所说:显示巴利原文
‘‘Hīnāyāvattanenāti pārājikaṃ āpannassa gihibhāvūpagamanenā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ, taṃ suvuttaṃ. Na hi pārājikaṃ anāpannassa sikkhaṃ appaccakkhāya ‘‘vibbhamissāmī’’ti gihiliṅgaggahaṇamattena bhikkhubhāvo vinassati. Pārājikaṃ āpanno ca bhikkhuliṅge ṭhito yāva na paṭijānāti, tāva attheva tassa bhikkhubhāvo, na so anupasampannasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati. Tathā hi so saṃvāsaṃ sādiyantopi theyyasaṃvāsako na hoti, sahaseyyādiāpattiṃ na janeti, omasavāde pācittiyañca janeti. Teneva ‘‘asuddho hoti puggalo aññataraṃ pārājikaṃ dhammaṃ ajjhāpanno, tañce suddhadiṭṭhi samāno okāsaṃ kārāpetvā akkosādhippāyo vadeti, āpatti omasavādassā’’ti (pārā. 389) omasavāde pācittiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Asati hi bhikkhubhāve dukkaṭaṃ bhaveyya, sati ca bhikkhubhāve paṭiggahitassa paṭiggahaṇavijahanaṃ nāma ayuttaṃ, tasmā sabbaso bhikkhubhāvassa abhāvato pārājikaṃ āpajjitvā gihiliṅgaggahaṇena gihibhāvūpagamanaṃ idha ‘‘hīnāyāvattana’’nti adhippetaṃ, na pana pakatattassa gihiliṅgaggahaṇamattaṃ. Teneva katthaci sikkhāpaccakkhānena samānagatikattā hīnāyāvattanaṃ visuṃ na gaṇhanti. Sikkhāpaccakkhānena paṭiggahaṇavijahane vutte pārājikaṃ āpannassa gihibhāvūpagamanena sabbaso bhikkhubhāvassa abhāvato vattabbameva natthīti. Tathā hi buddhadattācariyena attano vinayavinicchaye –
由截断执取、无期待而舍、
由弃学、命终,及性别改变;
由施与彼、及非比丘者;
一切接受终归灭坏。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Acchedagāhanirapekkhanisaggato ca, Sikkhāppahānamaraṇehi ca liṅgabhedā; Dānena tassa ca parassa abhikkhukassa, Sabbaṃ paṭiggahaṇameti vināsameva’’nti. –
仅此而已。同样,法喜长老也说:显示巴利原文
Ettakameva vuttaṃ. Tathā dhammasirittherenapi –
由学、死、性别,无期待而舍;
由断取与施予未受具足者,则接受止息。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sikkhāmaraṇaliṅgehi, anapekkhavisaggato; Acchedānupasampanna-dānā gāhopasammatī’’ti. –
已说:若本性比丘仅因取在家相便失去接受,那些阿阇梨也会单独宣说,但并未宣说,由此可知:“本性比丘仅取在家相,在此不被视为还俗。”然而,比丘尼由于不存在舍戒,即使仅取在家相,也会失去接受。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ . Yadi ca pakatattassa gihiliṅgaggahaṇamattenapi paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijaheyya, tepi ācariyā visuṃ tampi vadeyyuṃ, na vuttañca, tato viññāyati ‘‘pakatattassa gihiliṅgaggahaṇamattaṃ idha hīnāyāvattananti nādhippeta’’nti. Bhikkhuniyā pana sikkhāpaccakkhānassa abhāvato gihiliṅgaggahaṇamattenapi paṭiggahaṇaṃ vijahati.
“由无期待而舍”是指不给予他人,因不再需要而对物品作“我今无用,不复受用”想,或对接受作“我将更受后用”想,以此无期待而舍。“由断取”是指被盗贼等强行夺取而失。显示巴利原文
Anapekkhavissajjanenāti aññassa adatvāva anatthikatāya ‘‘natthi iminā kammaṃ, na idāni naṃ paribhuñjissāmī’’ti vatthūsu vā ‘‘puna paṭiggahetvā paribhuñjissāmī’’ti paṭiggahaṇe vā anapekkhavissajjanena. Acchinditvā gāhenāti corādīhi acchinditvā gahaṇena.
“此处”指比丘的住处。“所种植者”指由他所种植的树木丛林。“十三种任命”指:差饭食分配者、差房舍分配者、差库房管理者、差衣接受者、差分衣者、差分粥者、差分果者、差分嚼食者、差分杂物者、差授浴衣者、差授钵者、差使园丁者、差使沙弥者等十三种任命。前安居与后安居的房舍分配均会被取消,然而前安居的房舍分配取消后,于后安居时仍可前往他处;后安居的房舍分配取消后,则不能前往他处。为说明比丘们所应护持之事,而说:“若于后安居时取得了房舍”等等。显示巴利原文
Etthāti bhikkhuvihāre. Uparopakāti tena ropitā rukkhagacchā. Terasasu sammutīsūti bhattuddesakasenāsanapaññāpakabhaṇḍāgārikacīvarapaṭiggāhakacīvarabhājakayāgubhājakaphalabhājakakhajjabhājakaappamattakavissajjakasāṭiyaggāhāpakapattaggāhāpakaārāmikapesakasāmaṇerapesakasammutisaṅkhātāsu terasasu sammutīsu. Kāmaṃ purimikāya pacchimikāya ca senāsanaggāho paṭippassambhatiyeva, purimikāya pana senāsanaggāhe paṭippassaddhe pacchimikāya aññattha upagantuṃ sakkāti purimikāya senāsanaggāhapaṭippassaddhiṃ visuṃ dassetvā pacchimikāya senāsanaggāhe paṭippassaddhe na sakkā aññattha upagantunti tattha bhikkhūhi kattabbasaṅgahaṃ dassento ‘‘sace pacchimikāya senāsane gahite’’tiādimāha.
所谓“应只给与半月敬悦”,是由于允许比丘尼即使对于覆藏罪,也只行敬悦的缘故。又说“应再给与半月敬悦”,是因为在比丘时期未行敬悦。所谓“应由比丘尼作出罪羯磨”,是由于在比丘时期已行敬悦,于比丘尼时期也算作已行敬悦,故作此说。“若不善果报……应只给与六夜敬悦”,这是对正行敬悦者因性别转变而增加夜数的情况而说的。然而,若在比丘时期,对覆藏的共许罪正在别住中但尚未受别住者,发生了性别转变,他在比丘尼时期行半月敬悦时,若不善果报灭尽而性别再次转变,则给与别住;对已住别住者,应给与六夜敬悦。诸师作如是说。显示巴利原文
Pakkhamānattameva dātabbanti bhikkhunīnaṃ paṭicchannāyapi āpattiyā mānattacārasseva anuññātattā. Puna pakkhamānattameva dātabbanti bhikkhukāle ciṇṇamānattābhāvato. Bhikkhunīhi abbhānakammaṃ kātabbanti bhikkhukāle ciṇṇamānattatāya bhikkhunīkālepi ciṇṇamānattā icceva saṅkhyaṃ gacchatīti katvā vuttaṃ. Sace akusalavipāke…pe… chārattaṃ mānattameva dātabbanti mānattaṃ carantassa liṅgaparivattādhikārattā vuttaṃ. Sace pana bhikkhukāle paṭicchannāya sādhāraṇāpattiyā parivasantassa asamādiṇṇaparivāsassa vā liṅgaṃ parivattati, tassa bhikkhunīkāle pakkhamānattaṃ carantassa akusalavipāke parikkhīṇe puna liṅge parivattite parivāsaṃ datvā parivutthaparivāsassa chārattaṃ mānattaṃ dātabbanti vadanti.
“媒介罪”一词,是为显示共许罪而说。所谓“无别住之施与”,是指由于在比丘时期未覆藏,故不施与别住。然而,在比丘尼时期,即使已发露的共许罪,若在比丘时期未曾发露,诸师也说此罪即为覆藏。所谓“比丘未给与敬悦”,指的是在未行敬悦的情况下发生了性别转变。而即使处于比丘尼身份,那些罪也已妥善平息——这是句子的衔接。所谓“先前已平息的罪”,是指那些不共许罪在先前为比丘时便已平息。诸师说:“犯波罗夷者若性别转变,由于相续的同一性,不得再受具足戒;同样,还俗的比丘尼若性别转变,也不得再受具足戒。”显示巴利原文
Sañcarittāpattīti sādhāraṇāpattidassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Parivāsadānaṃ natthīti bhikkhukāle appaṭicchannabhāvato. Bhikkhunīkāle pana ārocitāpi sādhāraṇāpatti sace bhikkhukāle anārocitā, paṭicchannāva hotīti vadanti. Bhikkhūhi mānatte adinneti aciṇṇamānattāya liṅgaparivatte sati. Bhikkhunībhāve ṭhitāyapi tā suppaṭippassaddhā evāti sambandho. Yā āpattiyo pubbe paṭippassaddhāti yā asādhāraṇāpattiyo pubbe bhikkhubhāve paṭippassaddhā. ‘‘Pārājikaṃ āpannassa liṅgaparivatte sati santānassa ekattā na puna so upasampadaṃ labhati, tathā vibbhantāpi bhikkhunī liṅgaparivatte sati puna upasampadaṃ na labhatī’’ti vadanti.
71 “于无执受者”的意思是,由于此为较重之处,于有执受者也是同样道理,此说见于《小结文》与《中结文》,但那说法有误。因为在对无执受的相状起加行时,并不见有恶作。同样,对无执受的相状不入其内而仅于外加行,则说为偷兰遮,正如律藏《大品》所言:“诸比丘,不应以染心触摸生殖器,若触摸者,偷兰遮。”此处所应阐明之义,在注释书中先前已全部审察过了。“只是恶作”是因为未解脱欲。“同样”则暗示了“无论解脱与否”这一意义。显示巴利原文
71. ‘‘Anupādinnakesūti adhikārattā upādinnakepi eseva nayoti vutta’’nti cūḷagaṇṭhipade majjhimagaṇṭhipade ca vuttaṃ, taṃ duvuttaṃ. Na hi upādinnakesu nimitte upakkamantassa dukkaṭaṃ dissati. Tathā hi upādinnakesu nimitte appavesetvā bahi upakkamantassa thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, rattacittena aṅgajātaṃ chupitabbaṃ, yo chupeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (mahāva. 252) vuttattā. Ettha ca yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pubbe vicāritameva. Dukkaṭamevāti mocanarāgassa abhāvato. Tathevāti muccatu vā mā vāti imamatthaṃ atidissati.
“非范围”是指:在这样的情况下不予认可,是因其难以做到,故作此说。“执取女人的话”即执取如“我来努力,你不要努力”等所说的话。“由双方努力而成罪”则是在有“你不要努力”这种想的情况下所说的。显示巴利原文
Avisayoti asādiyanaṃ nāma evarūpe ṭhāne dukkaranti katvā vuttaṃ. Mātugāmassa vacanaṃ gahetvāti ‘‘ahaṃ vāyamissāmi, tvaṃ mā vāyamī’’tiādinā vuttavacanaṃ gahetvā. Ubhayavāyāmeneva āpattīti saññāya ‘‘tvaṃ mā vāyamī’’ti vuttaṃ.
73 “Vaṭṭakateti”:为显示此词含义而说“张开”。诸师说:“因畏惧波罗夷,将根门虚悬而行进入等时,若突然触到上颚、胁侧或生殖器,只是恶作,因为没有淫欲。”“Suphusitā”是紧密闭合。“口中无空间”是因牙齿紧密闭合,故口内无空间可入。然而,若唇肉被翻起,对牙齿本身起加行,则为偷兰遮,如同蚱蜢嘴、青蛙嘴的形状,依伤口的简略判法而说为偷兰遮。或者,依“以淫欲对女人不进入而以相状触相状,偷兰遮”这一特征,因性质相同,此处也说为偷兰遮。对于伸出嘴外的牙齿与舌头,也是同样道理。显示巴利原文
73.Vaṭṭakateti imassa atthaṃ dassento ‘‘vivaṭe’’ti āha. ‘‘Pārājikabhayena ākāsagatameva katvā pavesanādīni karontassa sahasā tālukaṃ vā passaṃ vā aṅgajātaṃ phusati ce, dukkaṭameva methunarāgassa abhāvato’’ti vadanti, upaparikkhitvā gahetabbo. Suphusitāti suṭṭhu pihitā. Antomukhe okāso natthīti dantānaṃ supihitabhāvato antomukhe pavesetuṃ okāso natthi. Uppāṭite pana oṭṭhamaṃse dantesuyeva upakkamantassa thullaccayanti pataṅgamukhamaṇḍūkassa mukhasaṇṭhāne viya vaṇasaṅkhepavasena thullaccayaṃ. ‘‘Methunarāgena itthiyā appavesento nimittena nimittaṃ chupati, thullaccaya’’nti iminā vā lakkhaṇena samānattā idha thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ. Bahi nikkhantadantajivhāsupi eseva nayo.
“若不泄而偷兰遮”,如《波罗夷》262中所说:“思惟、起加行而不泄,偷兰遮罪。”“被烧渴等”:以“等”字应知含摄了饥饿鬼等。“不能靠近”:被烧渴者的身体恒常从毛孔生起火焰,遍体燃烧;饥饿鬼等则形体极为可厌、丑陋、可怖,唯余骨皮,恒常病弱,因此连碰触都不行。“如天女享福”:此处应将属格“yāsaṃ”转为体格“yā”来连接,即“那些如天女般享受福报者”。所谓“见”等之中,“见”是比丘对她们的看见,“执”也是比丘对她们肢节的执取;而“触摸”等则是她们的行为。其中,“触摸”仅是以自己的身体接触到比丘的身体表面;“触”是比“触摸”更紧密的接触;“碰”则是比“触”更紧的以身体撞击身体。“使其昏迷”是指使其不知道所作的加行。虽然触摸等是她的行为,但并非因此即说无犯,而是依据“使那人昏迷后”此语,若未昏迷而知道并认可,则直接是波罗夷。然而,比丘在见与执时,不存在不认可的情况,故在见与执明显时未说无犯。但若先在见与执时,后来使那人昏迷而行触摸等,满足自己的欲望而去,则无波罗夷。显示巴利原文
Amuccante thullaccayanti ‘‘ceteti upakkamati na muccati, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti (pārā. 262) vacanato. Nijjhāmataṇhikādīti ādi-saddena khuppipāsikādipetīnaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Allīyitumpi na sakkāti nijjhāmataṇhikānaṃ lomakūpehi samuṭṭhitaaggijālāhi niccaṃ pajjalitasarīratāya khuppipāsikādīnaṃ ativiya paṭikūlavirūpabībhacchaaṭṭhicammāvasiṭṭhaniccāturasarīratāya āmasitumpi na sakkā. Devatā viya sampattiṃ anubhontīti ettha yāsanti sāmivacanaṃ yāti paccattavacanena vipariṇāmetvā yojetabbaṃ ‘‘yā devatā viya sampattiṃ anubhontī’’ti. Dassanādīsu dassanaṃ nāma bhikkhunā tāsaṃ dassanaṃ, gahaṇampi bhikkhunāva tāsaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgagahaṇaṃ. Āmasanādīni pana tāsaṃ kiccāni. Tattha āmasanaṃ nāma attano sarīrena bhikkhuno sarīrassa upari āmasanamattaṃ, phusanaṃ tato daḷhataraṃ katvā samphusanaṃ, ghaṭṭanaṃ tatopi daḷhataraṃ katvā sarīrena sarīrassa ghaṭṭanaṃ. Visaññaṃ katvāti yathā so katampi upakkamanaṃ na jānāti, evaṃ katvā. Yadipi āmasanādi tassā kiccaṃ, tathāpi teneva anāpattiṃ avatvā ‘‘taṃ puggalaṃ visaññaṃ katvā’’ti vacanato akatavisañño jānitvā sādiyati ce, pārājikameva. Bhikkhuno pana dassanagahaṇesu sati asādiyanaṃ nāma na hotīti dassanagahaṇesu paññāyamānesu anāpatti na vuttā. Yadi pana paṭhamaṃ dassanagahaṇesu sati pacchā taṃ puggalaṃ visaññaṃ katvā āmasanādīni karontī attano manorathaṃ pūretvā gacchati, natthi pārājikaṃ.
“身根受损”:并非没有身根,而是因风、胆汁等令身根不能生起身识,如此称为身根受损。“依受用心而得罪”:如同根据所铺设的相状,即使未产生执受触,也依其受用心而得罪;同样,此处因风、胆汁等使身根受损,即使不觉知,也依其受用心而得罪。显示巴利原文
Upahatakāyappasādoti anaṭṭhepi kāyappasāde kāyaviññāṇuppādane asamatthatāpādanavasena vātapittādīhi upahatakāyappasādo. Sevanacittavasena āpattīti yathā santhatanimittavasena upādinnaphassaṃ avindantassapi sevanacittavasena āpatti, evamidhāpi pittavātādinā upahatakāyappasādattā avediyantassapi sevanacittavasena āpatti.
若有人问:“在仅以触碰为所依的事例中,有‘我将行淫法,仅于触碰时便生追悔’的说法,因此在淫行的前方便中应有恶作罪,为何此处又说‘犯桑喀地谢沙罪’呢?”为了避开这一内在的诘难,经中遂展开“凡有淫行”等论述。其中,“头”是指以道入道(男根入女根)。因为在诸方便中,它犹如顶点,故称为“头”,由此之后便无其他方便。“住立于恶作中”即产生了恶作。因为当恶作生起时,执手等方便即被称为“住立于恶作中”,这是由于它们不依其他罪过的生起而转起。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca chupitamattavatthusmiṃ ‘‘methunaṃ dhammaṃ paṭisevissāmīti chupitamatte vippaṭisārī ahosī’’ti vuttattā methunassa pubbapayoge dukkaṭena bhavitabbaṃ, atha kasmā ‘‘āpatti saṅghādisesassā’’ti vuttanti imaṃ antolīnacodanaṃ manasikatvā taṃ pariharituṃ ‘‘yo methuna’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha sīsanti maggena maggapaṭipādanaṃ. Tañhi payogānaṃ matthakasadisattā ‘‘sīsa’’nti vuttaṃ tato paraṃ payogābhāvato. Dukkaṭe tiṭṭhantīti dukkaṭaṃ janenti. Dukkaṭañhi janentā hatthaggāhādayo payogā ‘‘dukkaṭe tiṭṭhantī’’ti vuttā aññissā āpattiyā janakavasena appavattanato.
74 “Jātipupphagumbānaṃ”指素馨花丛。“Ussannatāya”指由于繁茂众多。“Upacāre”指在邻近区域。“Tena vātupatthambhena”指因所说的“肢节各处因风而僵直”那样的风撑持,由此说明了排出精液的原因。“Ekarasaṃ”指不被转向等路心所间断。显示巴利原文
74.Jātipupphagumbānanti jātisumanagumbānaṃ. Ussannatāyāti bāhullatāya. Upacāreti āsannappadese. Tena vātupatthambhenāti ‘‘aṅgamaṅgāni vātupatthaddhāni hontī’’ti evaṃ vuttavātupatthambhena. Iminā niddokkamanassa kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Ekarasanti āvajjanādivīthicittehi abbokiṇṇaṃ.
76 “Saṅgāmasīsayodhobhikkhu”指这样的比丘:他不被烦恼怨敌所制伏,反而战胜了他们,因此如同身处战场前线的战士。显示巴利原文
76.Saṅgāmasīsayodhobhikkhūti yasmā kilesārīhi anabhibhūto hutvā te parājesi, tasmā saṅgāmamukhe yodhasadiso bhikkhu.
77 “Uppanne vatthusmiṃ”指在淫行所依事生起时。“Parivattakadvārameva”指仅能通过开合而左右转动的门。“Rukkhasūcikaṇṭakadvāraṃ”指木针门与刺门。或者也可读作“木针门、刺门”。所谓木针门,是在两侧竖立木柱,穿孔后中间插入两三根木针而制成的门。所谓刺门,是以一根或多根带刺的树枝制成,出入时必须移开才能通过。“Cakkalakayuttadvāraṃ”指下方装有轮子的大门,一人无法开闭。“Gopphetvā”指用绳索系缚后。“Ekaṃ dussasāṇidvārameva”指仅一扇布幔门,此处也包含席幔门。显示巴利原文
77.Uppanne vatthusminti methunavatthusmiṃ uppanne. Parivattakadvāramevāti saṃvaraṇavivaraṇavasena ito cito ca parivattanayoggadvārameva. Rukkhasūcikaṇṭakadvāranti rukkhasūcidvāraṃ kaṇṭakadvārañca. ‘‘Rukkhasūcidvāraṃ kaṇṭakadvāra’’micceva vā pāṭho. Yaṃ ubhosu passesu rukkhathambhe nikhaṇitvā tattha vijjhitvā majjhe dve tisso rukkhasūciyo pavesetvā karonti, taṃ rukkhasūcidvāraṃ. Yaṃ pavesananikkhamanakāle apanetvā thakanayoggaṃ, ekāya bahūhi vā kaṇṭakasākhāhi kataṃ, taṃ kaṇṭakadvāraṃ. Cakkalakayuttadvāranti heṭṭhā etaṃ cakkaṃ yojetvā kataṃ mahādvāraṃ, yaṃ na sakkā ekena saṃvarituṃ vivarituñca. Gopphetvāti rajjūhi ganthetvā. Ekaṃ dussasāṇidvāramevāti ettha kilañjasāṇidvārampi saṅgahaṃ gacchati.
为了说明在关门后无法躺卧之处应如何行持,而说“若是众人使用之处”等。即使在非众人使用之处,向一人告白后躺卧也是可以的。“而比丘们……坐着”,这是为了显示比丘们在场而说的。“无论坐着或躺着,只要以任何威仪在场,即可作意”,三处结文都这样说。然而有些人说:“因为说‘坐着’,所以若是躺着便不可作意”,这并不妥当。因为如果由于说“坐着”躺着便不可作意,那么站着、经行时也不可作意。实际上,“坐着”一词并非只排除躺着,只是为了显示他们存在,并非排除其他威仪。即便如此,躺卧入睡者由于属于不可信赖的一类,故不应作意,这是我们所认可的。正因属于不可信赖的一类,所以说在屏处坐卧中躺卧入睡者不构成无犯。关门是为了防止比丘尼等进入,故说“不得向比丘尼或女人告白”。“不得向女人、双性人、女黄门告白”,他们这样说。即使知道女人在屋内,在门口依上述方法行持后躺卧者,无犯。“将梯子移去”,是指将上层梯子移去、拆毁、丢在地上或砍断后,也可以躺卧。“两扇门都应守护”,这里如果一扇门没有门板,或无法依前述方法关闭,不关亦可。显示巴利原文
Yattha dvāraṃ saṃvaritvā nipajjituṃ na sakkā hoti, tattha kattabbavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sace bahūnaṃ vaḷañjanaṭṭhānaṃ hotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bahūnaṃ avaḷañjanaṭṭhānepi ekaṃ āpucchitvā nipajjituṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Atha bhikkhū…pe… nisinnā hontīti idaṃ tattha bhikkhūnaṃ sannihitabhāvasandassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nisinno vā pana hotu nipanno vā, yena kenaci iriyāpathena samannāgato sace tattha sannihito hoti, ābhogaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘nisinnā hontīti vacanato sace nipannā honti, ābhogaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Yadi hi ‘‘nisinnā hontī’’ti vacanato nipanne ābhogaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati, ṭhitepi caṅkamantepi ābhogaṃ kātuṃ na vaṭṭati. Na hi nisinnavacanaṃ nipannaṃyeva nivatteti, tasmā ‘‘nisinnā hontī’’ti idaṃ tattha tesaṃ atthitāmattasandassanatthaṃ, na sesairiyāpathasamaṅgitānivattanatthaṃ. Evaṃ santepi nipajjitvā niddāyanto asantapakkhe ṭhitattā ābhogāraho na hotīti amhākaṃ khanti. Asantapakkhe ṭhitattāyeva hi raho nisajjāya nipajjitvā niddāyanto anāpattiṃ na karotīti vuttaṃ. Dvārasaṃvaraṇaṃ nāma bhikkhunīādīnaṃ pavesananivāraṇatthanti āha – ‘‘bhikkhuniṃ vā mātugāmaṃ vā āpucchituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti. ‘‘Itthiubhatobyañjanakaṃ itthipaṇḍakañca āpucchituṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Mātugāmassa antogabbhe ṭhitabhāvaṃ jānitvāpi dvāre yathāvuttavidhiṃ katvā nipajjantassa anāpatti. Nisseṇiṃ āropetvāti uparitalaṃ āropetvā visaṅkharitvā bhūmiyaṃ pātetvā chinditvā vā nipajjitumpi vaṭṭati. Dvepi dvārāni jaggitabbānīti ettha sace ekasmiṃ dvāre kavāṭaṃ vā natthi, heṭṭhā vuttanayena saṃvarituṃ vā na sakkā, itaraṃ dvāraṃ asaṃvaritvāpi nipajjituṃ vaṭṭati.
“bhikkhācārāpaṭikkamma”,是指从乞食处返回后。“dvārapālassa”,是指站在门楼、大门或梯脚处守护门的人。“pacchimānaṃ bhāro”,是就一个接一个跟随而来的人而说的。“asaṃvutadvāre antogabbhe vā”,应连接为“在门未关闭的房内”。“bahi vā”,是指房外。“在躺卧时……也是可以的”,这里他们说:“由于守护门者对其有从属关系,即使不审察他当时是否在场,也可以作意。”显示巴利原文
Bhikkhācārāpaṭikkammāti bhikkhācārato nivattitvā. Dvārapālassāti dvārakoṭṭhake mahādvāre nisseṇimūle vā ṭhatvā dvārarakkhaṇakassa. Pacchimānaṃ bhāroti ekānubandhavasena āgacchante sandhāya vuttaṃ. Asaṃvutadvāre antogabbhe vāti yojetabbaṃ. Bahi vāti gabbhato bahi. Nipajjanakālepi…pe… vaṭṭatiyevāti ettha ‘‘dvārajagganakassa tadadhīnattā tadā tassa tattha sannihitāsannihitabhāvaṃ anupadhāretvāpi ābhogaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti vadanti.
所谓“以任何方式围起”,是指以围墙、篱笆或任何其他方式围起。他们说:“围起的高度标准,应依关于足以共宿的所述方法而了知。”然而,若某处的围起低于所述标准,也是可以的。所谓“有大院落”,是指有大的庭院。说“如大菩提树庭院、铜殿庭院等”,是为了显示有多人往来,而非为了显示区域的广大。在黎明升起时起身,无犯:这是指以清净心躺下、正在睡眠者,仅因睡眠的缘故,在黎明升起时无犯。醒来后再睡,有犯:是指在黎明升起时醒来后,即使不知黎明已至也不起身,继续以躺卧的状态睡眠者,有犯;在黎明前醒来后,即使不知,而以躺卧的状态睡眠者,在黎明升起时也有犯。恰如其分地起身:是指在黎明升起时就起身。他有犯:是指以不清净心躺下,因此即使在睡眠中,当黎明升起时,也有以昼间独处为缘的犯。由于说“如此躺下者,亦不免除不恭敬的恶作”,以不清净心躺下者,无论在黎明前起身还是不起身,在躺下的当下即犯不恭敬的恶作;而以昼间独处为缘的恶作,则在黎明升起时才犯。显示巴利原文
Yena kenaci parikkhitteti pākārena vā vatiyā vā yena kenaci parikkhitte. ‘‘Parikkhepassa uccato pamāṇaṃ sahaseyyappahonake vuttanayena veditabba’’nti vadanti. Yadi pana ekasmiṃ padese parikkhepo vuttappamāṇato nīcataro hoti, vaṭṭati. Mahāpariveṇaṃ hotīti mahantaṃ aṅgaṇaṃ hoti. Mahābodhiyaṅgaṇalohapāsādayaṅgaṇasadisanti bahusañcāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na mahāparicchedadassanatthaṃ. Aruṇe uggate uṭṭhahati, anāpattīti suddhacittena nipannassa niddāyantasseva aruṇe uggateyeva niddāvaseneva anāpatti. Pabujjhitvā puna supati, āpattīti aruṇe uggate pabujjhitvā aruṇuggamanaṃ ajānitvāpi anuṭṭhahitvāva sayitasantānena sayantassa āpatti, purāruṇe pabujjhitvāpi ajānitvā sayitasantānena sayantassapi aruṇe uggate āpattiyeva. Yathāparicchedameva vuṭṭhātīti aruṇe uggateyeva uṭṭhahati. Tassa āpattīti asuddhacitteneva nipannattā niddāyantassapi aruṇe uggate divāpaṭisallānamūlikā āpatti. ‘‘Evaṃ nipajjanto anādariyadukkaṭāpi na muccatī’’ti vuttattā asuddhacittena nipajjanto aruṇuggamanato puretaraṃ uṭṭhahantopi anuṭṭhahantopi nipajjanakāleyeva anādariyadukkaṭaṃ āpajjati, divāpaṭisallānamūlikaṃ pana dukkaṭaṃ aruṇe uggateyeva āpajjati.
然而,在上述三处要点中所说:“夜间关门后躺下,若至黎明时分门虽开而仍躺卧者,无犯,因他是在非田地关门后才躺下的。若有人于黎明时分门已打开时,心想‘我要躺下’,而于前一夜关门后躺下,则因在非田地关门,躺下时有不恭敬的恶作;于黎明升起时,又有以躺卧为缘的恶作。夜间无论关门或未关门而躺下者,仅在黎明升起那一刻:若此时门未关而关上,或先打开再关上,则因在田地关门,故无犯。”此与注疏不符。因为注疏中显示,只有夜间未曾关门而躺下者,在黎明升起时才有犯。因此,无论关门是在田地还是非田地,此处唯有“关闭”才是标准——这是我们的认可。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ panettha tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ ‘‘rattiṃ dvāraṃ saṃvaritvā nipanno sace aruṇuggamanavelāyaṃ dvāre vivaṭepi nipajjati, tassa āpatti akhette saṃvaritvā nipannattā. Aruṇuggamanavelāyaṃ vivaṭepi dvāre ‘‘nipajjissāmī’’ti rattiṃ dvāraṃ saṃvaritvāpi nipannassa akhette pihitattā nipajjanakāle anādariyadukkaṭaṃ, aruṇe uggate nipajjanamūladukkaṭañca hoti. Rattiṃ pihitepi apihitepi dvāre nipannassa aruṇuggamanakkhaṇeyeva apihitadvāre pihite pihitadvāre ca puna vivaritvā pihite khette pihitattā anāpattī’’ti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya na sameti. Rattiṃ dvāraṃ asaṃvaritvā nipannasseva hi aruṇuggamane āpatti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ dassitā, tasmā khette vā pihitaṃ hotu akhette vā, saṃvaraṇamevettha pamāṇanti amhākaṃ khanti.
“因睡眠而躺下”:是指被睡眠所征服故而侧身躺下,但这样的躺下并不称为真正的躺下,故说无犯。“倚靠而睡者”:是指腰与背脊之间,不让任何微小的部位接触地面,倚靠着柱子等而睡的人。“猛然起身”:是指如同绊倒后猛然站起一般。“就在那里睡而不起身”:是指被睡眠所征服而睡着,并不起身,并非昏迷不醒。正因为如此,才没有说“因非其境域,不见有犯”。显示巴利原文
Niddāvasena nipajjatīti niddābhibhūtatāya ekapassena nipajjati, evaṃ pana nipanno nipanno nāma na hotīti anāpatti vuttā. Apassāya supantassāti kaṭiyā piṭṭhivemajjhassa ca antare appamattakampi padesaṃ bhūmiṃ aphusāpetvā thambhādiṃ apassāya supantassa. Sahasāva vuṭṭhātīti pakkhalitvā patito viya sahasā vuṭṭhāti. Tattheva sayati na vuṭṭhātīti niddābhibhūtatāya supanto na vuṭṭhāti, na mucchāpareto. Teneva ‘‘avisayattā āpatti na dissatī’’ti na vuttaṃ.
“以一侧折断”:是指一侧的折断,即依前文所说的方法,脚不离开地面,仅折断、弯下一侧而躺下。而在《大注疏》中,此说与大莲华长老所说相关联。因昏迷而倒下,长老说:“因非其境域,不见有犯。”然而,诸师长们说:犹如被夜叉抓住者、被捆绑而令躺下者,是为他力所控制;同样,昏迷而倒下者并非他力所控,即使有时尚有知觉而躺下,也不应说无犯。然而,被夜叉抓住者以及被捆绑而令躺下者,由于这是《大注疏》之说的最后部分,故应以此为准则。故此将说:“于一切处,凡注疏之说或长老之说中最后所说者,即应视为准则。”(《波罗夷注疏》1.92)在此,“被夜叉抓住”一语即已包含失去知觉者,应如是了知。然而,以一侧折断而躺下者,就义理而言,因非真正的躺下,故得免除——应知依据《大注疏》之说,此义并未被否定。白天关门后躺下者,即使门被谁打开也无犯,因为他在躺下时是关门后才躺下的。若白天关门后在门附近躺下,随后自己又打开门,这样也是可以的。此犯既非有心亦非无心,既是作为又非作为。显示巴利原文
Ekabhaṅgenāti ekassa passassa bhañjanena, heṭṭhā vuttanayena pāde bhūmito amocetvāva ekaṃ passaṃ bhañjitvā nāmetvā nipannoti vuttaṃ hoti. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana mahāpadumattherena vuttanti sambandho. Mucchitvā patitattā therena ‘‘avisayattā āpatti na dissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ācariyā pana yathā yakkhagahitako bandhitvā nipajjāpito ca paravaso hoti, evaṃ aparavasattā mucchitvā patito kañci kālaṃ jānitvāpi nipajjatīti anāpattiṃ na vadanti. Yo ca yakkhagahitako, yo ca bandhitvā nipajjāpitoti imassa mahāaṭṭhakathāvādassa pacchimattā soyeva pamāṇato gahetabbo. Tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘sabbattha yo yo aṭṭhakathāvādo vā theravādo vā pacchā vuccati, sova pamāṇato daṭṭhabbo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.92). Yakkhagahitaggahaṇeneva cettha visaññībhūtopi saṅgahitoti veditabbaṃ. Ekabhaṅgena nipanno pana atthato anipannattā muccatiyevāti mahāaṭṭhakathāvādena so appaṭikkhittova hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Divā saṃvaritvā nipannassa kenaci vivaṭepi dvāre anāpatti nipajjanakāle saṃvaritvā nipannattā. Sace divā saṃvaritvā dvārasamīpe nipanno pacchā sayameva dvāraṃ vivarati, evampi vaṭṭati. Acittakā cāyaṃ āpatti kiriyā ca akiriyā ca.
78 在宣说了“如同于无路处造路”之后,为再度阐明其义,而说“如同于空中示现足迹”。所谓“此为最上”:即此为第一。“所谓此”:即称此。此处余下的内容,文义显明。显示巴利原文
78.‘‘Apade padaṃ karonto viyā’’ti vatvā puna tamevatthaṃ āvikaronto ‘‘ākāse padaṃ dassento viyā’’ti āha. Etadagganti eso aggo. Yadidanti yo ayaṃ. Sesamettha uttānatthameva.
“于彼中”等文,其义如前所述。显示巴利原文
Tatridantiādi heṭṭhā vuttatthameva.
第二波罗夷显示巴利原文
2. Dutiyapārājikaṃ
无等胜者所宣说的第二波罗夷,如今注释的次第已至,因此除去那些易解的以及先前已阐明的内容,这便是该第二波罗夷的注释——此为关联。显示巴利原文
Adutiyena jinena yaṃ dutiyaṃ pārājikaṃ pakāsitaṃ, tassa idāni yasmā saṃvaṇṇanākkamo patto, tasmā yaṃ suviññeyyaṃ, yañca pubbe pakāsitaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ vajjayitvā assa dutiyassa ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā hotīti sambandho.
达尼亚事义注显示巴利原文
Dhaniyavatthuvaṇṇanā
84 “王舍城”此处,因具备难以攻克的国土位置、特殊地理环境等优越条件,故为诸王所特别执取与拥有,由此称为王舍城,所以说“曼陀多王……乃至……被称为”。其中,由大士大典尊所拥有,即是由雷努王所拥有,故说大典尊所拥有。因为宣说大典尊拥有的情况,便是那时由摩揭陀王雷努所拥有的表征,因他是雷努王的国师。又有人说:“大典尊是一位具有大威力的古代摩揭陀王。”由于被拥有,即因作为王都被拥有。“Gayhatī”意为“家”,诸王之家即是王舍城,是依托“城市”一词而作中性词解说。此处还有其他种种解释:“因建城时国王令造一切房屋,故为王舍城;因被鹫峰等群山环绕,如同被山王围绕的家宅,故为王舍城;因宫殿庄严,如同国王所喜乐的舍宅,故为王舍城;因防护完善,来犯的敌王于此不能为害,故为王舍城;因被诸王观察后妥善建立,成为他们自己的家屋,故为王舍城。或因园林美景等而辉耀,或因居住安乐等而被众生以我所执取而执持,故为王舍城。”那个地方作为殊胜之处,是高贵众生的受用之地,所以说“然而那个……”。其中,“在佛世时及转轮王时”显示巴利原文
84.Rājagaheti ettha duggajanapadaṭṭhānavisesasampadādiyogato padhānabhāvena rājūhi gahitaṃ pariggahitanti rājagahanti āha ‘‘mandhātu…pe… vuccatī’’ti. Tattha mahāgovindena mahāsattena pariggahitaṃ reṇunā pariggahitameva hotīti mahāgovindaggahaṇaṃ. Mahāgovindapaaggahitatākittanañhi tadā reṇunā magadharājena pariggahitabhāvūpalakkhaṇaṃ. Tassa hi so purohito. ‘‘Mahāgovindoti mahānubhāvo purātano eko magadharājā’’ti keci. Pariggahitattāti rājadhānībhāvena pariggahitattā. Gayhatīti gaho, rājūnaṃ gahoti rājagahaṃ, nagarasaddāpekkhāya napuṃsakaniddeso. Aññepettha pakāreti ‘‘nagaramāpanena raññā kāritasabbagahattā rājagahaṃ, gijjhakūṭādīhi parikkhittattā pabbatarājehi parikkhittagehasadisantipi rājagahaṃ, sampannabhavanatāya rājamānaṃ gehantipi rājagahaṃ, suvihitārakkhatāya anatthāvahabhāvena upagatānaṃ paṭirājūnaṃ gahaṃ gehabhūtantipi rājagahaṃ, rājūhi disvā sammā patiṭṭhāpitattā tesaṃ gahaṃ gehabhūtantipi rājagahaṃ. Ārāmarāmaṇeyyakādīhi rājate, nivāsasukhatādinā sattehi mamattavasena gayhati pariggayhatīti vā rājagaha’’nti edise pakāre. So padeso ṭhānavisesabhāvena uḷārasattaparibhogoti āha ‘‘taṃ paneta’’ntiādi. Tattha buddhakāle cakkavattikāle cāti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ. Tesanti yakkhānaṃ. Vasanavananti āpānabhūmibhūtaṃ upavanaṃ. Gijjhā ettha santīti gijjhaṃ, kūṭaṃ. Taṃ etassāti gijjhakūṭo. Gijjho viyāti vā gijjhaṃ, kūṭaṃ. Taṃ etassāti gijjhakūṭo, pabbato. Gijjhasadisakūṭoti gijjhakūṭoti vā majjhepadalopīsamāso yathā ‘‘sākapatthavo’’ti, tasmiṃ gijjhakūṭe. Tenāha ‘‘gijjhā’’tiādi.
此后,“僧”是指超过三人的团体,因其达到了可作四人羯磨等事的资格。他们在那座山上聚集后,以诸等至度过时光:即在适宜处乞食、完成食事之后归来,如同打开塔堂的双重大门一般,将那座山分开为两半而进入其中,划定夜宿处与日间住处,在那里以等至安住。显示巴利原文
Tatoparaṃ saṅghoti tiṇṇaṃ janānaṃ upari saṅgho catuvaggakaraṇīyādikammappattattā. Tasmiṃ pabbate sannipatitvā samāpattiyā vītināmentīti yathāphāsukaṭṭhāne piṇḍāya caritvā katabhattakiccā āgantvā cetiyagabbhe yamakamahādvāraṃ vivarantā viya taṃ pabbataṃ dvidhā katvā anto pavisitvā rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānāni māpetvā tattha samāpattiyā vītināmenti.
那么,他们何时住于那里呢?据说在过去,如来尚未出现时,在依止波罗奈的一个村庄里,有一位良家女子守护田地。当她在田边小屋中炒稻谷时,锅中生出了约五百粒大如迦兰迦花、可爱的大炒米。她取了这些炒米,放在一片大莲叶上。那时,有一位独觉佛为了摄受她,在并不太远的田埂上经行。她见到独觉佛后,生起净信,取来一朵盛开的大莲花,将炒米放入其中,前往独觉佛处,将莲花和五百粒炒米一同供养,并以五体投地顶礼,祈愿道:“尊者,以此福德的威力,愿我获得五百位具足威德的儿子。”就在那一刻,有五百位猎鹿人——他们资具完备、独觉智已成熟——供养了那位独觉佛甘美的肉,并祈愿说:“愿我们成为她的儿子。”由于过去多生中他们曾是她的儿子,所以如愿以偿。她住世尽寿后,往生天界;从天界死后,投生在一座生湖的莲花苞中。一位苦行者见到她,便将她抚养长大。当她以足行走时,每踏一步,地上便涌出莲花。一位林居者看见后,禀告波罗奈王。国王将她接来,立为第一王后。她怀了孕,大莲华王子住于母胎之中,其余诸子则依出胎后的胎垢,以湿生方式出生。也有人说:“是以化生方式出生。”他们……显示巴利原文
Kadā panete tattha vasiṃsu? Atīte kira anuppanne tathāgate bārāṇasiṃ upanissāya ekasmiṃ gāmake ekā kuladhītā khettaṃ rakkhati, tassā khettakuṭiyā vīhayo bhajjantiyā tattha mahākarañjapupphappamāṇā mahantamahantā manoharā pañcasatamattā lājā jāyiṃsu. Sā te gahetvā mahati paduminipatte ṭhapesi. Tasmiñca samaye eko paccekasambuddho tassā anuggahatthaṃ avidūre khettapāḷiyā gacchati. Sā taṃ disvā pasannamānasā supupphitaṃ mahantaṃ ekaṃ padumaṃ gahetvā tattha lāje pakkhipitvā paccekabuddhaṃ upasaṅkamitvā pañcahi lājasatehi saddhiṃ taṃ padumapupphaṃ datvā pañcapatiṭṭhitena vanditvā ‘‘imassa, bhante, puññassa ānubhāvena ānubhāvasampanne pañcasataputte labheyya’’nti pañca puttasatāni patthesi. Tasmiṃyeva khaṇe pañcasatā migaluddakā sambhatasambhārā paripakkapaccekabodhiñāṇā tasseva paccekabuddhassa madhuramaṃsaṃ datvā ‘‘etissā puttā bhaveyyāmā’’ti patthayiṃsu. Atītāsu anekāsu jātīsu tassā puttabhāvena āgatattā tathā tesaṃ ahosi. Sā yāvatāyukaṃ ṭhatvā devaloke nibbatti, tato cutā jātassare padumagabbhe nibbatti. Tameko tāpaso disvā paṭijaggi. Tassā padasā vicarantiyā paduddhāre paduddhāre bhūmito padumāni uṭṭhahanti. Eko vanacarako disvā bārāṇasirañño ārocesi. Rājā taṃ ānetvā aggamahesiṃ akāsi, tassā gabbho saṇṭhāti. Mahāpadumakumāro mātukucchiyaṃ vasi, sesā bahi nikkhantaṃ gabbhamalaṃ nissāya saṃsedajabhāvena nibbattā. ‘‘Opapātikabhāvenā’’ti keci. Te vayappattā uyyāne padumassare kīḷantā ekekasmiṃ padume nisīditvā khayavayaṃ paṭṭhapetvā paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ nibbattayiṃsu. Ayaṃ tesaṃ byākaraṇagāthā ahosi –
生于湖中,生于莲叶之上;盛开,为蜂群所追随;
了知这无常与衰灭之后,应当如犀牛角般独自游行。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Saroruhaṃ padumapalāsamatrajaṃ, supupphitaṃ bhamaragaṇānuciṇṇaṃ; Aniccatāyaṃ vayataṃ viditvā, eko care khaggavisāṇakappo’’ti. –
那时候,他们正住在此处。就在那时,这座山得到了‘伊西吉利’的名称。‘这些是仙人’意为这些是独觉佛仙人;‘名称’是指借此而被知晓,也就是名字。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃ kāle te tattha vasiṃsu. Tadā cassa pabbatassa ‘‘isigilī’’ti samaññā udapādi. Ime isayoti ime paccekabuddhaisī. Samā ñāyati etāyāti samaññā, nāmanti attho.
‘茅草顶的小屋’一语,是通过省略中间词的复合词,或是以部分代整体的惯用语,才称为‘茅草屋’。由于经文说‘他们入雨安居’,故应知是指适合入雨安居的、有门闩的茅屋,所以说‘茅草顶、有门闩的小屋’。‘入雨安居者’即进入雨安居的人。那拉卡行道,即‘我将为你开示牟尼行……’这一段,是导师为那拉卡长老所教导的、从凡夫时起便不令烦恼心生起的应修牟尼行道。那拉卡长老听闻此行道后,在三方面成为少欲者:见、闻、问。因为他在说法结束时,心净信,礼敬世尊之后便进入林中。此后,他不生起‘啊,但愿我能见到世尊’的贪求,这便是他在见上的少欲;同样,不生起‘啊,但愿我能再听闻法教’的贪求,是他在闻上的少欲;也不生起‘啊,但愿我能再问牟尼行道’的贪求,是他在问上的少欲。显示巴利原文
Tiṇacchadanā kuṭiyo majjhepadalopīsamāsaṃ katvā, ekadese vā samudāyavohāravasena ‘‘tiṇakuṭiyo’’ti vuttā. ‘‘Vassaṃ upagacchiṃsū’’ti vacanato vassūpagamanārahā sadvārabandhā eva veditabbāti āha ‘‘tiṇacchadanā sadvārabandhā kuṭiyo’’ti. Vassaṃ upagacchantenāti vassāvāsaṃ upagacchantena. Nālakapaṭipadanti ‘‘moneyyaṃ te upaññissa’’ntiādinā (su. ni. 721) satthārā nālakattherassa desitaṃ puthujjanakālato pabhuti kilesacittaṃ anuppādetvā paṭipajjitabbaṃ moneyyapaṭipadaṃ. Taṃ pana paṭipadaṃ sutvā nālakatthero tīsu ṭhānesu appiccho ahosi dassane savane pucchāyāti. So hi desanāpariyosāne pasannacitto bhagavantaṃ vanditvā vanaṃ paviṭṭho. Puna ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ bhagavantaṃ passeyya’’nti lolabhāvaṃ na janesi, ayamassa dassane appicchatā. Tathā ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ puna dhammadesanaṃ suṇeyya’’nti lolabhāvaṃ na janesi, ayamassa savane appicchatā. Tathā ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ puna moneyyapaṭipadaṃ puccheyya’’nti lolabhāvaṃ na janesi, ayamassa pucchāya appicchatā.
他如此少欲知足,进入山脚后,不在同一片树林中住两日,不在同一棵树根下坐两日,也不在同一村庄中为托钵停留两日。这样,他从森林到森林,从树下到树下,从村庄到村庄,随顺着行持适当的行道,最终安住于最上果位。在世尊教法住世之时,未曾有哪位长老能如此圆满地修持清净行。若依此法修习,比丘于成就后可住寿长久:成就下等者,住数月;成就中等者,住七年;成就上等者,住十六年。这位长老正是成就上等者,站住了七个月,自知寿限,便沐浴除垢,回到住处,系好腰带,搭上重衣,由十力所护念,于五处安稳供养,合掌礼敬,犹如倚靠火炬之山巍然而立,无有挂碍,入无余涅槃。世尊了知此长老已般涅槃,便与比丘僧团一同前往,为其净身,收取舍利,起塔供养,而后离去。即使以此法住雨安居,也须住在有门有窗、整洁合宜之处。为了示现不执著此修法,即便修持不出房舍的行道,也有称为‘无住处行道’的说法。显示巴利原文
So evaṃ appiccho samāno pabbatapādaṃ pavisitvā ekavanasaṇḍe dve divasāni na vasi, ekarukkhamūle dve divasāni na nisīdi, ekasmiṃ gāme dve divasāni piṇḍāya na pāvisi. Iti vanato vanaṃ, rukkhato rukkhaṃ, gāmato gāmaṃ āhiṇḍanto anurūpapaṭipadaṃ paṭipajjitvā aggaphale patiṭṭhāsi. Ekassa bhagavato kāle ekoyeva naṃ pūreti. Imañhi moneyyapaṭipadaṃ ukkaṭṭhaṃ katvā pūrento bhikkhu satteva māsāni jīvati, majjhimaṃ katvā pūrento satta vassāni, mudukaṃ katvā pūrento soḷasa vassāni. Ayaṃ pana thero ukkaṭṭhaṃ katvā pūresi, tasmā satta māse ṭhatvā attano āyusaṅkhārassa parikkhayaṃ ñatvā nahāyitvā nivāsetvā kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā diguṇaṃ saṅghāṭiṃ pārupitvā dasabalābhimukho pañcapatiṭṭhitena taṃ vanditvā añjaliṃ paggahetvā hiṅgulakapabbataṃ nissāya ṭhitakova anupādisesāya nibbānadhātuyā parinibbāyi. Tassa parinibbutabhāvaṃ ñatvā bhagavā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ tattha gantvā sarīrakiccaṃ katvā dhātuyo gāhāpetvā cetiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā agamāsi. Evarūpaṃ paṭipadaṃ paṭipannenapi vassaṃ upagacchantena channe sadvārabandheyeva ṭhāne upagantabbaṃ. Appicchataṃ nissāyapi sikkhāpadassa anatikkamanīyattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nālakapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannenapī’’ti vuttaṃ.
所谓五种住处,即由茅草、树叶、砖、石、灰泥等构成的五种住处。有人说:“诸比丘,不应在无卧具的兵营中入雨安居(《大品》第204节)”,这是禁止因言词争论而入雨安居,并非禁止为建造住所而入。然而,巴利圣典中未作区分,注释书中以“无宿处修行法”等方式说明,只在兵营或舟船等无其他住处时才予以容忍。正如《大品》第203节所说“诸比丘,我允许在船上过雨安居”,即使并非兵营,也允许在船上入雨安居,但若为了兵营的目的而住船则不被允许。这是通常的规则。夜间卧处、白昼休息处等,即以“处”字称之。显示巴利原文
Pañcannaṃ chadanānanti tiṇapaṇṇaiṭṭhakasilāsudhāsaṅkhātānaṃ pañcannaṃ chadanānaṃ. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabbanti (mahāva. 204) vacībhedaṃ katvā vassūpagamanaṃ sandhāyeva paṭikkhepo, na ālayakaraṇavasena upagamanaṃ sandhāyā’’ti vadanti. Pāḷiyaṃ pana avisesattā aṭṭhakathāyañca ‘‘nālakapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannenapī’’tiādinā aviseseneva daḷhaṃ katvā vuttattā asenāsanikassa nāvādiṃ vinā aññattha ālayo na vaṭṭatīti amhākaṃ khanti. Nāvāsatthavajesuyeva hi ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, nāvāyaṃ vassaṃ upagantu’’ntiādinā (mahāva. 203) sati asati vā senāsane vassūpagamanassa visuṃ anuññātattā ‘‘na, bhikkhave, asenāsanikena vassaṃ upagantabba’’nti ayaṃ paṭikkhepo tattha na labbhatīti asati senāsane ālayavasenapi nāvādīsu upagamanaṃ vuttaṃ. Anudhammatāti vattaṃ. Rattiṭṭhānadivāṭṭhānādīnīti ādi-saddena vaccakuṭipassāvaṭṭhānādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
奉行规约与犍度所制仪轨,即是所谓教法,由此确立三种正法。因此,应当恭敬地诵习、令他人诵习,应当诵经;住在精舍者勿相触扰,应安坐于寺院内诵习、令他人诵习,应当诵经,使闻法兴盛。未出家者应令出家,出家后应令受具足戒,受具足戒后应给予依止。即使仅有一人具德者出家并受具足戒,亦能使正法兴盛。应依各自的能力修习,精勤断恶,昼夜不懈,努力精进行持。即使年迈的长老,也能一日一行诸法。应熟记律教,能诵持本母、义释及三十年的法句与新经,为外来客比丘作务,为信众说法。莫出恶语、离间语、粗恶语等,日常守护戒律,谨慎守护四种遍净戒。礼敬塔庙、菩提树时,以香花等仪式供养,勿以闲谈破坏庄严,或与村民妄说无益之语。以此奉行规约与犍度学处。显示巴利原文
Katikavattāni ca khandhakavattāni ca adhiṭṭhāyāti pariyattidhammo nāma tividhampi saddhammaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti, tasmā sakkaccaṃ uddisatha uddisāpetha, sajjhāyaṃ karotha, padhānaghare vasantānaṃ saṅghaṭṭanaṃ akatvā antovihāre nisīditvā uddisatha uddisāpetha, sajjhāyaṃ karotha, dhammassavanaṃ samiddhaṃ karotha, pabbājentā sodhetvā pabbājetha, sodhetvā upasampādetha, sodhetvā nissayaṃ detha. Ekopi hi kulaputto pabbajjañca upasampadañca labhitvā sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti. Attano thāmena yattakāni sakkotha, tattakāni dhutaṅgāni samādiyatha, antovassaṃ nāmetaṃ sakaladivasaṃ rattiyā ca paṭhamapacchimayāmesu appamattehi bhavitabbaṃ, vīriyaṃ ārabhitabbaṃ . Porāṇakamahaātherāpi sabbapalibodhe chinditvā antovasse ekacariyavattaṃ pūrayiṃsu. Bhasse mattaṃ jānitvā dasavatthukakathaṃ dasaasubhadasānussatiaṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇakathaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati. Āgantukānaṃ vattaṃ kātuṃ, sattāhakaraṇīyena gatānaṃ apaloketvā dātuṃ vaṭṭati. Viggāhikapisuṇapharusavacanāni mā vadatha, divase divase sīlāni āvajjentā caturārakkhaṃ ahāpentā manasikārabahulā viharatha, cetiyaṃ vā bodhiṃ vā vandantena gandhamālaṃ vā pūjentena pattaṃ vā thavikāya pakkhipantena na kathetabbaṃ, antogāme manussehi saddhiṃ paccayasaṃyuttakathā vā visabhāgakathā vā na kathetabbā, rakkhitindriyehi bhavitabbaṃ, khandhakavattañca sekhiyavattañca pūretabbanti evamādinā katikavattāni khandhakavattāni ca adhiṭṭhahitvā.
『允许,比丘们,解除雨季期间的住止法。』(大部第209章)因雨季解除法未曾允许此经部分日的雨季解除,未到解除日期即解除者,即使是理所当然的解除,也称为应退雨季。又有说法称“本月雨季结束” ,如果雨季解除日未到,则此次雨季称为正常雨季。即便十一天未解除,也因考虑解除部分日,称为应退雨季。应退即不得为不可。『允许,比丘们,解除雨季期间的住止是很困难的。』(大部第306章)此经层面因未完结之雨季解除,基于解除日,称为雨季解除。根据经论第412章说法,须知雨季最后一月为雨季解除的艰难月。所谓“雨季解除”,乃是说明以前诸众会分别会集,虽因某种阻碍未完成解除,仍称为应退雨季。此为行法规定详细说明。显示巴利原文
‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassaṃvuṭṭhānaṃ tīhi ṭhānehi pavāretu’’nti (mahāva. 209) vuṭṭhavassānaṃ pavāraṇāya anuññātattā imassa suttassa vasena pavāraṇādivasassa aruṇuggamanato paṭṭhāya appavāritāpi ‘‘vuṭṭhavassā’’ti vuccanti. Kiñcāpi ‘‘imaṃ temāsaṃ vassaṃ upemī’’ti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 184) vacanato pavāraṇādivasassa temāsantogadhattā taṃ divasaṃ yāva na pavārenti , tāva vassaṃ vasantā nāma honti, tathāpi ekadesena avuṭṭhampi taṃ divasaṃ vuṭṭhabhāgāpekkhāya vuṭṭhameva hotīti katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ katākatabhāgāpekkhāya samudāye pavattakatākatavohāro viya. Vippakatañhi yaṃ kiñci ‘‘katākata’’nti vuccati. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vassaṃvuṭṭhānaṃ kathinaṃ attharitu’’nti (mahāva. 306) imassa pana suttassa vasena nippariyāyato mahāpavāraṇāya pavāritā pāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya ‘‘vuṭṭhavassā’’ti vuccantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘mahāpavāraṇāya pavāritā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pāṭipadadivasato paṭṭhāya hi vassānassa pacchime māse kathinatthāro anuññāto parivāre ‘‘kathinassa atthāramāso jānitabboti vassānassa pacchimo māso jānitabbo’’ti (pari. 412) vuttattā. ‘‘Mahāpavāraṇāya pavāritā’’ti idañca purimikāya vassūpagatānaṃ sabhāvadassanamattaṃ, kenaci antarāyena appavāritāpi ‘‘vuṭṭhavassā’’icceva vuccanti.
说了“应询问”之后,现在为了说明询问的方法,而说“若此小屋……”等。或者,得不到照料者:如果小屋建在寺院边缘,便得不到照料者。然而,那些比丘出发去乡间游行——这是上下文的关联。在教法中,“游行”一词通常用于长途旅行。虽然这种名为“游行”的活动,实际上唯有诸佛为了摄受大众才会获得,但却依于佛陀,借由惯用词的力量,也用来指称声闻弟子的游行,就像用芦苇等做的扇子也被称为“多罗叶扇”一样。收集起来:即集中置于一处。现在为了说明那收集的方法,而说“如所放置……”等。不为漏湿:即“不漏的”,应视为作业中的“不”字。意思是:如所放置的那样,不为漏湿、不为浸湿。显示巴利原文
‘‘Āpucchitabbā’’ti vatvā idāni āpucchanavidhiṃ dassento ‘‘sace imaṃ kuṭi’’ntiādimāha. Paṭijagganakaṃ vā na labhatīti vihārapaccante kate paṭijagganakaṃ na labhati. Te pana bhikkhū janapadacārikaṃ pakkamiṃsūti sambandho. Addhānagamane cārikāvohāro sāsane niruḷho. Kiñcāpi ayaṃ cārikā nāma mahājanasaṅgahatthaṃ buddhānaṃyeva labbhati, buddhe upādāya pana ruḷhīsaddavasena sāvakānampi vuccati kilañjādīhi katabījanīnampi tālavaṇṭavohāro viya. Saṅgopetvāti ekasmiṃ padese rāsiṃ katvā. Idāni tameva saṅgopanavidhiṃ dassento ‘‘yathā ca ṭhapita’’ntiādimāha. Na ovassīyatīti anovassakaṃ, kammani aka-saddo daṭṭhabbo. Yathā ca ṭhapitaṃ na ovassīyati na temīyatīti attho.
“无减损”:此处“减损”意为衰损,如“增长与减损”等词中的用法。此人于自身技艺中没有衰损、没有不足,故说“无减损”,即“无不足、技艺圆满”。老师的工作称为“老师的工作”,故说“在老师的工作上”。肩覆衣是门板,木工活指柱子等。用油混的铜色泥:即混和了油的铜色泥。显示巴利原文
Anavayoti ettha vayoti hāni ‘‘āyavayo’’tiādīsu viya. Natthi etassa attano sippe vayo ūnatāti avayoti āha ‘‘anūno paripuṇṇasippo’’ti. Ācariyassa kammaṃ ācariyakanti āha ‘‘ācariyakamme’’ti. Piṭṭhasaṅghāṭo dvārabāhā, kaṭṭhakammaṃ thambhādi. Telatambamattikāyāti telamissatambamattikāya.
85 “小屋的建造状态”:即小屋已建成的状态。因为精通声明的学者们在与“什么”一词关联时,期望使用未来时态,故说“其特相应从声明学中寻求”。“慈心前行部分”:即慈心禅那的前行部分,仅仅是遍及一切有情的利益祝愿。为何这样说呢?难道“怜悯”一词不是用来指悲心的吗?确实如此,然而此处的“怜悯”一词,是包含了守护的意义而转起的,既可用于慈心,也可用于悲心;在此是就慈心而转起说的,因此说得妙:“以此显示慈心前行部分”。“悲心前行部分”:即悲心禅那的前行部分,仅仅是对有情的同情。泥泞:即泥土;揉捏它:即加水后用双手等揉捏。慈与悲:指达到安止的慈心与悲心。虽然长老并非故意以杀生的意图伤害那些微小的生命,但由于缺乏悲心,没有事先审察“这样做的话,这些生命将会灭亡”便去做了,因此呵责长老。“人群”:即众人的集合,故说“后来的人群”。“应被杀害的状态”:即应被毁灭的状态。“正在杀生的人”:即使长老没有杀生,也显示了被他人注意到的样子。“随此见而行”:即追随此人的见解。“应被摩擦”:即应被撞击,意思是应被毁灭。“不要这样想”:即不要显示巴利原文
85.Kuṭikāya karaṇabhāvanti kuṭiyā katabhāvaṃ. Saddasatthavidūhi kiṃ-saddayoge anāgatavacanassa icchitattā vuttaṃ ‘‘tassa lakkhaṇaṃ saddasatthato pariyesitabba’’nti. Mettāpubbabhāganti mettājhānassa pubbabhāgabhūtaṃ sabbasattesu hitapharaṇamattaṃ. Kasmā panetaṃ vuttaṃ, nanu anuddayā-saddo karuṇāya pavattatīti? Saccametaṃ, ayaṃ pana anuddayāsaddo anurakkhaṇamatthaṃ antonītaṃ katvā pavattamāno mettāya karuṇāya ca pavattatīti idha mettāya pavattamāno vutto, tasmā suvuttametaṃ ‘‘etena mettāpubbabhāgaṃ dassetī’’ti. Karuṇāpubbabhāganti karuṇājhānassa pubbabhāgabhūtaṃ sattesu anukampamattaṃ. Cikkhallaṃ mattikā, tassa maddanaṃ udakaṃ āsiñcitvā hatthādīhi parimaddanaṃ. Mettākaruṇānanti appanāppattamettākaruṇānaṃ. Kiñcāpi therena sañcicca khuddānukhuddakā pāṇā maraṇādhippāyena na byābādhitā, tathāpi karuṇāya abhāvena ‘‘evaṃ kate ime pāṇā vinassissantī’’ti anupaparikkhitvā katattā theraṃ vigarahi. Janānaṃ samūho janatāti āha ‘‘pacchimo janasamūho’’ti. Pātabyabhāvanti vināsetabbataṃ. Pāṇātipātaṃ karontānanti therena akatepi pāṇātipāte parehi sallakkhaṇākāraṃ dasseti. Imassa diṭṭhānugatinti imassa diṭṭhiyā anugamanaṃ. Ghaṃsitabbeti ghaṭṭayitabbe, vināsitabbeti attho. Evaṃ maññīti yathā therena kataṃ, evaṃ mā maññi. ‘‘Mā pacchimā janatā pāṇesu pātabyataṃ āpajjī’’ti vacanato yo bhikkhu iṭṭhakapacanapattapacanakuṭikaraṇavihārakārāpanavihārasammajjanapaṭaggidānakūpapokkharaṇīkhaṇāpanādīsu yattha ‘‘khuddānukhuddakānaṃ pāṇānaṃ vihiṃsā bhavissatī’’ti jānāti, tena tādise padese kappiyavacanaṃ vatvāpi na taṃ kammaṃ kāretabbanti dasseti.
“于各处所说之罪”:即掘地、破坏草木等处所判定的波逸提等罪。“以初犯者故无罪”:即因建造小屋的因缘而无罪。“违越学处”:即违越了“诸比丘,不应建造纯泥小屋,若建造者,犯恶作”这一学处。如果得到他人所建小屋而居住者无罪,那么世尊便不会令人拆毁那小屋了,因此说:“即使得到已建成的而居住其中,也是恶作”。“或以任何方式混合”:即下方为泥、上方为木料等,以任何方式成为混合。“以砖屋为名”:此处,“砖”指砖块,纯用砖块建造的住处称为砖屋。这是纯砖建造的住处的名称。据说那种住处,如同不需要石灰粉刷一样,纯用砖块砌成并覆盖,但梁、门闩、门板等则为木制。“散开”:即碎为粉末。显示巴利原文
Tattha tattha vuttameva āpattinti pathavīkhaṇanabhūtagāmapātabyatādīsu vuttapācittiyādiāpattiṃ. Ādikammikattā anāpattīti kuṭikaraṇapaccayā anāpatti. Sikkhāpadaṃ atikkamitvāti ‘‘na ca, bhikkhave, sabbamattikāmayā kuṭikā kātabbā, yo kareyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti vuttasikkhāpadaṃ atikkamitvā. Yadi aññena kataṃ labhitvā vasantassa anāpatti siyā, na bhagavā taṃ kuṭikaṃ bhindāpeyyāti āha – ‘‘kataṃ labhitvā tattha vasantānampi dukkaṭamevā’’ti. Yathā vā tathā vā missā hotūti heṭṭhā mattikā upari dabbasambhārātiādinā yena kenaci ākārena missā hotu. Giñjakāvasathasaṅkhepenāti ettha giñjakā vuccanti iṭṭhakā, giñjakāhi eva kato āvasatho giñjakāvasatho. Iṭṭhakāmayassa āvasathassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Taṃ kira āvasathaṃ yathā sudhāparikammena payojanaṃ natthi, evaṃ iṭṭhakāhi eva cinitvā chādetvā karonti, tulādaṇḍakavāṭaphalakāni pana dārumayāneva. Vikirantāti cuṇṇavicuṇṇaṃ karontā.
“为何”:即由于什么原因。“也有修缮工作”:即修理门窗等时,也有已经进行的修缮工作。因为对比丘而言不如法,且符合外道的行持,故称为外道之幢。在确定了大注释中所说诸理由中自己所认可的两个理由之后,为了显示其中所说的其他理由,而说:“而注释书中还说了其他理由”等。其中,“为了怜悯众生”:即为了怜悯那些因建造此类小屋而毁灭的众生。“为了守护钵和衣”:因为纯泥小屋容易损坏,放在其中的钵和衣等无法得到守护,可能被贼等偷走,故如此说。“为禁止对坐卧处的贪多”:即为了禁止贪求过多的坐卧处,或者为了禁止比丘们在修缮那样的坐卧处时,舍弃教诫、提问等其他应做之事而终日忙碌。“无可指责”:即不能将过失加于其身而指责。显示巴利原文
Kissāti kena kāraṇena. Vayakammampi atthīti dvārakavāṭādiabhisaṅkharaṇādīsu katavayakammampi atthi. Bhikkhūnaṃ akappiyattā eva titthiyavatānurūpattā titthiyadhajo. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttakāraṇesu attano adhippetakāraṇadvayaṃ patiṭṭhāpetvā aparānipi tattha vuttakāraṇāni dassento āha – ‘‘aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana aññānipi kāraṇāni vuttānī’’tiādi. Tattha sattānuddayāyāti tādisāya kuṭikāya karaṇapaccayā vinassamānasattesu anuddayāya. Yasmā sabbamattikāmayā kuṭi sukarā bhindituṃ, tasmā tattha ṭhapitaṃ pattacīvarādi aguttaṃ hoti, corādīhi avaharituṃ sakkā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘pattacīvaraguttatthāyā’’ti. Senāsanabāhullapaṭisedhanatthāyāti senāsanānaṃ bahubhāvanisedhanatthāya, tādisassa vā senāsanassa abhisaṅkharaṇe bhikkhūnaṃ uddesaparipucchādīni sesakammāni pariccajitvā niccabyāvaṭatānisedhanatthaṃ. Anupavajjoti dosaṃ āropetvā na vattabbo.
圣典之外裁决的解释显示巴利原文
Pāḷimuttakavinicchayavaṇṇanā
在《律藏》之外的判断中,有说:“那也只是……并非为了磨光颜色”,这是指对伞柄、伞骨尖、伞骨、伞骨框架的绑缚。“遍处”者,指伞柄的一切处。“以尖端”者,指以削刀之口。若获得此类不如法之伞,应打破伞顶饰或猛兽形饰,削平后方可持用。或应以线缠绕伞柄,使伞柄上的刻纹不显露,应如此缠绕。“杖底”者,指伞柄根部,即伞柄的下端面。“伞小环”者,指伞内部的小圆环。“挖除”者,指使其凸起。那是允许的,即使不用绳索绑缚,由于是适合绑缚之处,故为允许。显示巴利原文
Pāḷimuttakavinicchayesu tañca kho…pe… na vaṇṇamaṭṭhatthāyāti idaṃ chattadaṇḍaggāhakasalākapañjaravinandhanaṃ sandhāyāti vadanti. Sabbatthāti chattadaṇḍe sabbattha. Āraggenāti nikhādanamukhena. Ghaṭakampi vāḷarūpampi bhinditvā dhāretabbanti sace tādisaṃ akappiyachattaṃ labhati, ghaṭakampi vāḷarūpampi bhinditvā tacchetvā dhāretabbaṃ. Suttakena vā daṇḍo veṭhetabboti yathā chattadaṇḍe lekhā na paññāyati, tathā veṭhetabbo. Daṇḍabundeti daṇḍamūle, chattadaṇḍassa heṭṭhimataleti attho. Chattamaṇḍalikanti chattassa anto khuddakamaṇḍalaṃ. Ukkiritvāti uṭṭhapetvā. Sā vaṭṭatīti yadipi rajjukehi na bandhanti, bandhituṃ pana yuttaṭṭhānattā vaṭṭati.
“以各种线”者,即指以不同颜色的线。此言是为显示那些如此制作之人的制作方式,纵使以单色线,也不得以所述方式缝制。“在布端”,指布片的边缘。这是就两块布片相接触之处而言。“在边缘”,指衣的边缘。这是就衣的纬线方向而言。“辫缝”,指如同黍穗头的形状缝制。“链缝”,指如同缚猫的形状缝制。此处“辫缝、链缝”为被动语态,意指与“制作”这一动作相关的被缝制方式。在“祭坛、杵、锤等”中,所谓祭坛,即缝成塔庙形状;根部细、顶部大,缝如棒槌形状者为杵;根部与顶部粗细一致,缝如锤形状者为锤。“挖出蟹眼”,是指在纽扣带、纽孔带的末端,作出如蟹眼形状的凸起,即是制作之义。“角线疙瘩”,在有关纽扣的三处章节中都说:“即纽扣带、纽孔带从角部抽出的线端。”然而,那些疙瘩应如何作得难以辨认呢?应将从角部抽出的线端,或打一个结,或再反折缝牢,使其隐没难辨,然后将线端剪短。而法喜长老说:显示巴利原文
Nānāsuttakehīti nānāvaṇṇehi suttehi. Idañca tathā karontānaṃ karaṇappakāradassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, ekavaṇṇasuttakenapi vuttappakārena sibbituṃ na vaṭṭatiyeva. Paṭṭamukheti paṭṭakoṭiyaṃ. Dvinnaṃ paṭṭānaṃ saṅghaṭṭitaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Pariyanteti cīvarapariyante. Cīvaraanuvātaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Veṇinti varakasīsākārena sibbanaṃ. Saṅkhalikanti biḷālabandhanākārena sibbanaṃ. ‘‘Veṇiṃ saṅkhalika’’nti cettha upayogavacanaṃ ‘‘karontī’’ti karaṇakiriyāpekkhaṃ. Agghiyagayamuggarādīnīti ettha agghiyaṃ nāma cetiyasaṇṭhānena sibbanaṃ, mūle tanukaṃ agge mahantaṃ katvā gadākārena sibbanaṃ gayā, mūle ca agge ca ekasadisaṃ katvā muggarākārena sibbanaṃ muggaro. Kakkaṭakkhīni ukkirantīti gaṇṭhikapaṭṭapāsakapaṭṭānaṃ ante pāḷibaddhaṃ katvā kakkaṭakānaṃ akkhisaṇṭhānaṃ uṭṭhapenti, karontīti attho. ‘‘Koṇasuttapiḷakāti gaṇṭhikapāsakapaṭṭānaṃ koṇehi nīhaṭasuttānaṃ koṭiyo’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ pana tā piḷakā duviññeyyarūpā kātabbāti? Koṇehi nīhaṭasuttānaṃ antesu ekavāraṃ gaṇṭhikakaraṇena vā puna nivattetvā sibbanena vā duviññeyyasabhāvaṃ katvā suttakoṭiyo rassaṃ katvā chinditabbā. Dhammasirittherena pana –
“角线及疙瘩,二者皆应令难辨。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Koṇasuttā ca piḷakā, duviññeyyāva kappare’’ti –
此言已述。正如阿阇黎佛陀达多尊者亦云:显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ. Tathā ācariyabuddhadattattherenapi –
那里所说的线与疙瘩,被阐释为难以明辨。显示巴利原文
‘‘Suttā ca piḷakā tattha, duviññeyyāva dīpitā’’ti –
如上所说。因此,依据他们的见解,角线与疙瘩,即‘角线疙瘩’,此处当如此理解其义。显示巴利原文
Vuttaṃ . Tasmā tesaṃ matena koṇasuttā ca piḷakā ca koṇasuttapiḷakāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“以宝石”:指以玛瑙等宝石。“不应摩擦”:即不应研磨,但肩带、腰带等则可用贝壳等研磨。“应作成纽孔后绑缚”:指于染色时绑缚,其余时间则应解开安放。“纽扣”:指象牙等制成的纽扣。“疙瘩”:指应作成一粒粒凸起的疙瘩。显示巴利原文
Maṇināti masāragallādipāsāṇena. Na ghaṭṭetabbanti na ghaṃsitabbaṃ, aṃsabaddhakakāyabandhanāni pana saṅkhādīhi ghaṃsituṃ vaṭṭati. Pāsakaṃ katvā bandhitabbanti rajanakāle bandhitabbaṃ, sesakāle mocetvā ṭhapetabbaṃ. Gaṇṭhiketi dantamayādigaṇṭhike. Piḷakāti binduṃ binduṃ katvā uṭṭhāpetabbapiḷakā.
他们说:“‘油色’是就适合沙门的颜色而说的;但若是宝石色的钵,由他人制作而成,则可使用。”所谓“钵环”,是指用锡等材料制成的钵环。因为(世尊)曾说:“诸比丘,不应持用彩绘、布满图像、绘有壁画的钵环”(《小品》253),因此说“壁画是不允许的。”又因为说:“诸比丘,我允许截断鳄鱼齿饰”(《小品》),因此说“但鳄鱼齿饰是允许的。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Telavaṇṇoti samaṇasāruppavaṇṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, maṇivaṇṇaṃ pana pattaṃ aññena kataṃ labhitvā paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Pattamaṇḍaleti tipusīsādimaye pattamaṇḍale. ‘‘Na, bhikkhave, citrāni pattamaṇḍalāni dhāretabbāni rūpakākiṇṇāni bhittikammakatānī’’ti (cūḷava. 253) vuttattā ‘‘bhittikammaṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, makaradantakaṃ chinditu’’nti vacanato ‘‘makaradantakaṃ pana vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“鳄鱼口”是指鳄鱼口的形状。“水蛇头”是指水蛇头的形状。“象眼”是指象眼的形状。对于绳制腰带,仅单条是允许的:绑缚绳腰带时,只应作单股而绑,不应从中间分开作双股而绑;但如果不作双股,即使以同一根绳反复缠绕百次而绑,也是允许的。即便是单股,也不允许:即是说,就连单股的形式也不允许绑缚。多绳所成……是允许的:这是就腰带而言,不是就衣穗而言。因为这样的腰带是允许绑缚的。因此,阿阇梨佛陀达多长老说:显示巴利原文
Makaramukhanti makaramukhasaṇṭhānaṃ. Deḍḍhubhasīsanti udakasappasīsasaṇṭhānaṃ. Acchīnīti kuñjaracchisaṇṭhānāni. Rajjukakāyabandhanaṃ ekameva vaṭṭatīti rajjukaṃ bandhantena ekaguṇameva katvā bandhituṃ vaṭṭati, majjhe bhinditvā diguṇaṃ katvā bandhituṃ na vaṭṭati, diguṇaṃ pana akatvā ekarajjukameva satavārampi punappunaṃ āvijjitvā bandhituṃ vaṭṭati. Ekampi na vaṭṭatīti ekaguṇampi katvā bandhituṃ na vaṭṭati. Bahurajjuke…pe... vaṭṭatīti idaṃ kāyabandhanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na dasā sandhāya. Īdisañhi kāyabandhanaṃ bandhituṃ vaṭṭati. Teneva ācariyabuddhadattattherena vuttaṃ –
“单绳所成的腰带,由牟尼所说;
五种衣穗的形状,即使一条也不允许。
将许多绳合在一起,以一根绳,
持续无间地缠绕而作,这样绑缚是允许的。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Ekarajjumayaṃ vuttaṃ, muninā kāyabandhanaṃ; Pañcapāmaṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ, ekampi ca na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Rajjuke ekato katvā, bahū ekāya rajjuyā; Nirantarañhi veṭhetvā, kataṃ vaṭṭati bandhitu’’nti.
然而,鼓形腰带不可持用,因为世尊曾这样说过:“诸比丘,不应持用种种高低之腰带:葫芦形、水蛇形、鼓形、琵琶形。若持用者,犯恶作。”(《小品》278)但是,如果把多条绳并在一起,再用一根绳无间隔地缠绕而成,这样是否就不称为鼓形?是的,不称为鼓形。因为所谓鼓形,是指用不同颜色的线缠绕成鼓穗的形状。可是,有人说:“鼓形就是将多条绳合拢,再用一根绳缠绕而成的绳。”这种说法不应采纳。如果这就是鼓形,就不应说“把多条绳并在一起,用一根绳无间隔地缠绕而成的多绳者”,那就会与“那是允许的”这句话相违了。然而,鼓形和琵琶形在衣穗上是开许的,因为有这样的说法:“腰带的衣穗破损了。诸比丘,我允许鼓形、琵琶形。”(《小品》278)因此,下文将会说:“‘诸比丘,我允许鼓形、琵琶形’,这只是就衣穗而开许的。显示巴利原文
Murajaṃ pana kāyabandhanaṃ na vaṭṭati ‘‘na, bhikkhave, uccāvacāni kāyabandhanāni dhāretabbāni kalābukaṃ deḍḍhubhakaṃ murajaṃ maddavīṇaṃ, yo dhāreyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 278) vuttattā. Kiṃ pana bahurajjuke ekato katvā ekena nirantaraṃ veṭhetvā kataṃ murajasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatīti? Āma na gacchati. Murajañhi nāma nānāvaṇṇehi suttehi murajavaṭṭisaṇṭhānaṃ veṭhetvā kataṃ. Keci pana ‘‘murajanti bahurajjuke ekato saṅkaḍḍhitvā ekāya rajjuyā paliveṭhetvā katarajjū’’ti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. Yadi cetaṃ murajaṃ siyā, ‘‘bahurajjuke ekato katvā ekena nirantaraṃ veṭhetvā kataṃ bahurajjuka’’nti na vattabbaṃ, ‘‘taṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ virujjheyya. Murajaṃ pana pāmaṅgasaṇṭhānañca dasāsu vaṭṭati ‘‘kāyabandhanassa dasā jīranti. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, murajaṃ maddavīṇa’’nti (cūḷava. 278) vuttattā. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, murajaṃ maddavīṇanti idaṃ dasāsuyeva anuññāta’’nti.
关于腰带的饰具:世尊说“腰带的边缘会磨损。诸比丘,我允许饰具”,因此,为了让腰带牢固,应在它的边缘、衣穗根部,安上以象牙、兽角等制成的饰具。据说,八种吉祥物是:海螺、轮宝、满瓶、伽耶(?)、吉祥纹、钩、幢、卍字。所谓仅作分界之线,是指在两端所作的分界线条而已。又因为说“应笔直”,所以四方形等弯曲的形状是不适宜的。据说,伞柄、水壶、涂药管、各种彩色线条,以及未加装饰的,都不适宜。显示巴利原文
Kāyabandhanavidheti ‘‘kāyabandhanassa pavananto jīrati. Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, vidha’’nti vuttattā kāyabandhanassa pāsante dasāmūle tassa thirabhāvatthaṃ kattabbe dantavisāṇādimaye vidhe. ‘‘Aṭṭha maṅgalāni nāma saṅkho cakkaṃ puṇṇakumbho gayā sirīvaccho aṅkuso dhajaṃ sovatthika’’nti vadanti. Paricchedalekhāmattanti ubhosu koṭīsu kātabbaparicchedarājimattaṃ. ‘‘Ujukamevā’’ti vuttattā caturassādivaṅkagatikaṃ na vaṭṭati. ‘‘Chattadaṇḍadhammakaraṇaañjananāḷikā nānāvaṇṇalekhāpaakammakatā na vaṭṭantī’’ti vadanti.
“Ārakaṇṭaka”是指用来制作书本等的尖长小刀。“Vaṭṭamaṇika”是指将顶端做成圆形后,让它凸起来的泡状装饰。“Aññaṃ vā vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ”这一句,也包含了疙瘩等形状。“Maṇika”是指单一的圆形珠饰。“Piḷaka”是指如同芥子一般大小、像珍珠串那样的许多圆形线条。据说:“因为在此处未被禁止,所以任何平滑的彩色饰纹都是允许的。”“Valitaka”是指在中间做出褶皱。“Maṇḍalaṃ hoti”是指为了安插上面的燧木而设的圆环。显示巴利原文
Ārakaṇṭaketi potthakādiabhisaṅkharaṇatthaṃ kate dīghamukhasatthake. Vaṭṭamaṇikanti vaṭṭaṃ katvā aggakoṭiyaṃ uṭṭhāpetabbapubbuḷaṃ. Aññaṃ vā vaṇṇamaṭṭhanti iminā piḷakādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Maṇikanti ekāvaṭṭamaṇi. Piḷakanti sāsapamattikā muttarājisadisā bahuvaṭṭalekhā. ‘‘Imasmiṃ adhikāre avuttattā lekhaniyaṃ yaṃ kiñci vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Valitakanti majjhe valiṃ uṭṭhāpetvā. Maṇḍalaṃ hotīti uttarāraṇiyā pavesanatthaṃ āhaṭamaṇḍalaṃ hoti.
虽然此处只提到了截断齿木的小刀,但大刀也同样不宜使用。‘应直直地捆绑’是连接语。‘或于两侧,或于一侧’是省略语。在剪刀柄末端所作的铁环,凡是相互碰撞能发出声响的,也都可行。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi ettha dantakaṭṭhacchedanavāsiyeva vuttā, mahāvāsiyampi pana na vaṭṭatiyeva. Ujukameva bandhitunti sambandho. ‘‘Ubhosu vā passesu ekapassevā’’ti vacanaseso. Kattarayaṭṭhikoṭiyaṃ kataayovalayānipi vaṭṭanti, yesaṃ aññamaññasaṅghaṭṭanena saddo niccharati.
“余甘子器”即用余甘子果实制成的容器。“地敷具”指铺设在经过装饰的地面上、带有彩绘图案的席子等敷具。“饮水瓶”以此也包括了水壶等器皿。“扇”指四方形扇子。所谓“一切……皆可”,是说在前面提到的床、椅等物上,除了女人形象之外,一切花鬘纹、蔓草纹等平滑的彩绘装饰,比丘皆可使用。关于住所,除了被禁止的住处本身之外,并无其他应禁止之物——此处意谓:在住所资具中本无应禁止之物,但违制的住所即应拒绝。“其他人”指界主。那些王所宠信者——即国王的亲信、外道或同宗之中,障碍布萨与自恣、无耻、亲近王族之人,称为“王所宠信者”。而他们有耻的众人,是指那些作为界主的同党、能给予支持的有耻者。所谓“善作而已”,是说即使是在他人的所有物上,只要于自己界内依照前述方法如法而作,也同样是善作。显示巴利原文
Āmaṇḍasāraketi āmalakehi katabhājane. Bhūmattharaṇeti cittakaṭasārakacittattharaṇādike parikammakatāya bhūmiyā attharitabbaattharaṇe. Pānīyaghaṭeti iminā kuṇḍikasarakepi saṅgaṇhāti. Bījaneti caturassabījane. Sabbaṃ…pe… vaṭṭatīti yathāvuttesu mañcapīṭhādīsu itthirūpaṃ vinā sabbaṃ mālākammalatākammādi vaṇṇamaṭṭhaṃ bhikkhuno vaṭṭati. Senāsane kiñci paṭisedhetabbaṃ natthi aññatra viruddhasenāsanāti etthāyamadhippāyo – senāsanaparikkhāresu paṭisedhetabbaṃ nāma kiñci natthi, viruddhasenāsanaṃ pana sayameva paṭikkhipitabbanti. Aññesanti sīmasāmino vuttā. Rājavallabhā paranikāyikāpi ekanikāyikāpi uposathapavāraṇānaṃ antarāyakarā alajjino rājakulūpagā vuccanti. Tesaṃ lajjiparisāti tesaṃ sīmasāmikānaṃ pakkhā hutvā anubalaṃ dātuṃ samatthā lajjiparisā. Sukatamevāti aññesaṃ santakepi attano sīmāya antovuttavidhinā kataṃ sukatameva.
86 “国王所取之木材”,即被国王所执取、属于国王所有的木材。“碎碎地截断”,即截成小块与大块。显示巴利原文
86.Devena gahitadārūnīti raññā pariggahitadārūni, rañño santakānīti vuttaṃ hoti. Khaṇḍākhaṇḍaṃ karontoti khuddakaṃ mahantañca khaṇḍaṃ karonto.
87 因族姓、财富、权势等而具有大度量,此即彼之量度,故称大量者。因此说“具足极大权势之量度者”。显示巴利原文
87. Kulabhogaissariyādīhi mahatī mattā pamāṇaṃ etassāti mahāmatto. Tenāha – ‘‘mahatiyā issariyamattāya samannāgato’’ti.
88 “Avajjhāyantī”,是低头看,或于心中思量。因此说“轻蔑者”等。“或以卑劣之心思量”,是指以低劣的心去思量。“议论”,是指彼此互相说道:“这是什么,那又是什么。”显示巴利原文
88.Avajjhāyantīti heṭṭhā katvā olokenti, cintenti vā. Tenāha ‘‘avajānantā’’tiādi. Lāmakato vā cintentīti nihīnato cintenti. Kathentīti ‘‘kiṃ nāmetaṃ kiṃ nāmeta’’nti aññamaññaṃ kathenti.
那么,这里的“木材”(复数)与“未经给予”(单数)如何搭配关联?故说“将取未经给予之物——这是埋怨之义”等。因为埋怨之事属于不与取的范畴,所以说不与取即是埋怨之义。然而此处,虽然守卫已将木材给予,长老却未直接明取,而是以迂回方式取得,故应知长老被视为“取了未经给予之物”。“语词之别”,是指单数与复数的区分。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ panettha ‘‘dārūnī’’ti bahuvacanaṃ ‘‘adinna’’nti ekavacanena saddhiṃ sambandhamupagacchatīti āha – ‘‘adinnaṃ ādiyissatīti ayaṃ ujjhāyanattho’’tiādi. Ujjhāyanassa adinnādānavisayattā adinnādānaṃ ujjhāyanatthoti vuttaṃ. Satipi panettha gopakena dinnadārūnaṃ gahaṇe ujukaṃ avatvā lesena gahitattā thero ‘‘adinnaṃ ādiyī’’ti veditabbo. Vacanabhedeti ekavacanabahuvacanānaṃ bhede.
“Sabbāvantā parisā”指包含比丘、比丘尼等一切组成部分的会众。因四众所摄的一切有情皆在此会众中,故称“sabbāvantā”(具一切众),即指会众。因拥有军队,故称“seniko”(有军者),seniko即是seniyo。“Bimbisāra”是其名字,此处应知“bimbi”意为黄金,因其肤色如同纯金,故称“频婆娑罗”。第四部分当知为“pāda”(四分之一),由此可知,在一切国土中,迦诃波那的二十分之一为摩沙迦,此义已说。应知,具足相好、依古论而铸造者为蓝迦诃波那。由鲁陀罗达摩所铸造者,称为鲁陀罗达摩迦,据说其价值为蓝迦诃波那的三分之一。在没有蓝迦诃波那之处,也应取在蓝迦诃波那通用与不通用处同等价值流通的物品,唯依蓝迦诃波那来判定。诸师如是说。显示巴利原文
Sabbāvantaṃparisanti bhikkhubhikkhunīādisabbāvayavavantaṃ parisaṃ. Sabbā catuparisasaṅkhaātā pajā ettha atthīti sabbāvantā, parisā. Senā etassa atthīti seniko, seniko eva seniyo. Bimbisāroti tassa nāmanti ettha bimbīti suvaṇṇaṃ, tasmā sārasuvaṇṇasadisavaṇṇatāya bimbisāroti vuccatīti veditabbo. Catuttho bhāgo pādoti veditabboti imināva sabbajanapadesu kahāpaṇassa vīsatimo bhāgo māsakoti idañca vuttameva hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Porāṇasatthānurūpaṃ lakkhaṇasampannā uppāditā nīlakahāpaṇāti veditabbā. Rudradāmena uppādito rudradāmako. So kira nīlakahāpaṇassa tibhāgaṃ agghati. Yasmiṃ padese nīlakahāpaṇā na santi, tatthāpi nīlakahāpaṇānaṃ vaḷañjanaṭṭhāne ca avaḷañjanaṭṭhāne ca samānaagghavasena pavattamānaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gahetvā nīlakahāpaṇavaseneva paricchedo kātabboti vadanti.
“其义……应依前说之法而了知”者,是说应依初波罗夷注中所说之法——“世尊为比丘们如此制立了这条学处,又有另一事缘生起”——来了知其义。“为显示那所生起的另一事缘,故说‘那时,世尊……’等语。”同样地,随制的关联亦应依彼处所说之法而了知,这是在此所说明的。显示巴利原文
Tassattho…pe… vuttanayeneva veditabboti iminā ‘‘bhagavatā bhikkhūnaṃ idaṃ sikkhāpadaṃ evaṃ paññattaṃ hoti ca, idañca aññaṃ vatthu udapādī’’ti evaṃ paṭhamapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.39) vuttanayena tassattho veditabbo. ‘‘Idāni yaṃ taṃ aññaṃ vatthu uppannaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘tena kho pana samayenā’tiādimāhā’’ti evaṃ anupaññattisambandho ca tattha vuttanayeneva veditabboti dasseti.
90-91 “漂布者在此铺陈之处”,即称为漂布处;所谓漂布处,就是指漂布渡口,因此说“前往漂布渡口”。为了阐明已说的含义,故说“因为那……”等语。显示巴利原文
90-91. Rajakā attharanti etthāti rajakattharaṇaṃ, rajakattharaṇanti rajakatitthaṃ vuccatīti āha ‘‘rajakatitthaṃ gantvā’’ti. Vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘tañhī’’tiādi.
词句解析的注释显示巴利原文
Padabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
92 所谓“新开垦的单屋等村庄”,据说在人们尚未迁入居住之前,不算是村庄,因此那里也没有入村问询等义务。“被夜叉占有”是就有灾患而言,或者也包括夜叉城等。夜叉城中若可见到商铺等,便算作村庄;若不可见,则不算。因此,进入夜叉城时,若见到商铺等,应履行一切入村义务;若不见,则不应履行,据说如此。再者,“再来客”一词,正以此显示他们对那地方尚有留恋。若毫无留恋而离去,那地方便不算是村庄,因此也没有入村问询等义务。显示巴利原文
92. ‘‘Abhinavaniviṭṭho ekakuṭikādigāmo yāva manussā pavisitvā vāsaṃ na kappenti, tāva gāmasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchatī’’ti vadanti, tasmā tattha gāmappavesanāpucchādikiccampi natthi. Yakkhapariggahabhūtoti saupaddavavasena vuttaṃ, yakkhanagarādiṃ vā saṅgaṇhāti. Yakkhanagarampi āpaṇādīsu dissamānesu gāmasaṅkhyaṃ gacchati, adissamānesu na gacchati, tasmā yakkhanagarampi pavisantena āpaṇādīsu dissamānesu sabbaṃ gāmappavesanavattaṃ kātabbaṃ, adissamānesu na kātabbanti vadanti. Punapi āgantukāmāti iminā tesaṃ tattha sāpekkhabhāvaṃ dasseti. Yato pana nirapekkhāva hutvā pakkamanti, so gāmasaṅkhyaṃ na gacchati, tasmā tattha gāmappavesanāpucchādikiccampi natthi.
难道在总论中不是仅说到“村或林”吗?既然如此,在显示了村的特征之后,按理只应显示林的特征,为何却又说“村界”等呢?回答是:“‘村界’等,是为了显示林的界限而说的。”因为显示了村界之后,除去村与村界,其余的就称为林,这样便能显示林的界限。而且,这也是为了不令村与村界相混而说。然而,在总论中应知,以“村”一词即已包含了村界,因为村界在世间就算作村。如此,总论中无余、无遗地摄尽一切处所,方得成立。“在门槛”是指在门限处。“林的简略”之所以这样说,是因为在阿毗达摩中说:“出到门槛之外,这一切都是林”。“中间即称为门槛”,由于是门槛所在之处,即使没有门槛,中间也如此称呼。若连门扇也没有,则因两侧篱笆或围墙的端头中间即是门槛所在,应取为“门槛”。“驱赶”指赶走。“翻滚”指翻转。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca ‘‘gāmā vā araññā vā’’ti ettakameva mātikāyaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmā gāmalakkhaṇaṃ dassetvā araññameva dassetabbaṃ siyā, gāmūpacāro nāmātiādi pana kasmā vuttanti āha – ‘‘gāmūpacārotiādi araññaparicchedadassanatthaṃ vutta’’nti. Gāmūpacāre hi dassite ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañca avasesaṃ araññaṃ nāmāti araññaparicchedo sakkā dassetuṃ, idañca gāmagāmūpacāre asaṅkarato dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Mātikāyaṃ pana gāmaggahaṇeneva gāmūpacāropi saṅgahitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Gāmūpacāro hi loke gāmasaṅkhyameva gacchati. Evañca katvā mātikāya anavasesaavaharaṇaṭṭhānapariggaho siddho hoti. Indakhīleti ummāre. Araññasaṅkhepaṃ gacchatīti ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā sabbametaṃ arañña’’nti (vibha. 529) abhidhamme vuttattā. Vemajjhameva indakhīloti vuccatīti indakhīlaṭṭhāniyattā asatipi indakhīle vemajjhameva tathā vuccati. Yattha pana dvārabāhāpi natthi, tattha ubhosu passesu vatiyā vā pākārassa vā koṭivemajjhameva indakhīlaṭṭhāniyattā ‘‘indakhīlo’’ti gahetabbaṃ. Uḍḍāpentoti palāpento. Luṭhitvāti parivattetvā.
“中等的人”是指体力中等的人。然而应知,此处即使是扬糠投掷,也是依显示力量而作的。《库伦达注》与《大帕卡利》中,本着“宅界即村”的意旨说:“站在宅界内的人投掷土块,其所及处即为村界”。“在门”是就内面水槽的落水处以内而言。“在内室”是就前厅的内部而言。“已作围障”即是说,房屋四周那样范围的界限称为宅界。若房屋四周为了阻止牛等进入而筑有围墙等围障,那么该围障便是宅界;而扬糠投掷等的界限,应知是就无围障的房屋而言。这便是此处依止的标准,因为在非时入村等戒条中,必须明了村与村界不相混淆的决断。若依《库伦达》等所说的方法,由于宅界成了村,宅与宅界、村与村界便会混淆。“如此,在一切处”这句话,正是显示即使在此之前,也是以后面的说法为标准。有些人说:“这是指从此以后将说的法”,此说不应采纳。显示巴利原文
Majjhimassa purisassāti thāmamajjhimassa purisassa. Iminā pana vacanena suppamusalapātopi baladassanavaseneva katoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ mahāpaccariyañca gharūpacāro gāmoti adhippāyena ‘‘gharūpacāre ṭhitassa leḍḍupāto gāmūpacāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Dvāreti nibbakosassa udakapatanaṭṭhānato abbhantaraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Antogeheti ca pamukhassa abbhantarameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kataparikkhepoti imināva gharassa samantato tattako paricchedo gharūpacāro nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Yassa pana gharassa samantato gorūpānaṃ pavesananivāraṇatthaṃ pākāravatiādīhi parikkhepo kato hoti, tattha sova parikkhepo gharūpacāro, suppapātādiparicchedo pana aparikkhittagharaṃ sandhāya vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ . Idamettha pamāṇanti vikālagāmappavesanādīsu gāmagāmūpacārānaṃ asaṅkarato vinicchayassa veditabbattā. Kurundīādīsu vuttanayena hi gharūpacārassa gāmoti āpannattā gharagharūpacāragāmagāmūpacārānaṃ saṅkaro siyā. Evaṃ sabbatthāti iminā ito pubbepi pacchimasseva vādassa pamāṇabhāvaṃ dasseti . Keci pana ‘‘ito paṭṭhāya vakkhamānavādaṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ.
所谓“其余”,是就村界的特征而言。在那里,指在把握村界之时。“为了显示该村的界限”,意思是显示那个尚未被划分的村的村界。若如此,为何不单独摘出“村”字,而说“站在无围墙村的宅界内的中等身材者的土块投掷”呢?对此回答:“‘村’字此处虽未明说,但依上下文即可获得。”另有人主张:“应以‘村界’一词统摄村与村界。如何理解?若作‘村的界限为村界’的拆解,则‘站在有围墙村庄的门槛内的中等身材者的土块投掷’便显示了有围墙村的村界特征;若作‘称为村的界限为村界’的理解,则‘站在无围墙村的宅界内的中等身材者的土块投掷’便显示了无围墙村的村界,由此可以了知。”他们指出:“‘站在宅界内的中等身材者的土块投掷’,若围墙距土块投掷处很远,即使是有围墙的村庄,也应以土块投掷处作为村界。”即如前文对有围墙的村庄所说明的方法一样。显示巴利原文
Sesampīti gāmūpacāralakkhaṇaṃ sandhāya vadati. Tatrāti tasmiṃ gāmūpacāraggahaṇe. Tassa gāmaparicchedadassanatthanti tassa aparicchedassa gāmassa gāmaparicchedaṃ dassetunti attho. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘gāmo nāmā’’ti padaṃ uddharitvā ‘‘aparikkhittassa gāmassa gharūpacāre ṭhitassa majjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupāto’’ti kasmā na vuttanti? ‘‘Gāmo nāmāti idha avuttampi adhikāravasena labbhatiyevā’’ti vadanti. Apare pana bhaṇanti ‘‘gāmūpacāro nāmāti imināva gāmassa ca gāmūpacārassa ca saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Kathaṃ? ‘Gāmassa upacāro gāmūpacāro’ti evaṃ viggahe kariyamāne ‘parikkhittassa gāmassa indakhīle ṭhitassa majjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupāto’ti iminā parikkhittassa gāmassa gāmūpacāralakkhaṇaṃ dassitaṃ hoti, ‘gāmasaṅkhāto upacāro gāmūpacāro’ti evaṃ pana gayhamāne ‘aparikkhittassa gāmassa gharūpacāre ṭhitassa majjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupāto’ti iminā aparikkhittassa gāmassa gāmaparicchedo dassitoti sakkā viññātu’’nti. ‘‘Gharūpacāre ṭhitassa majjhimassa purisassa leḍḍupāto’’ti iminā parikkhittassapi gāmassa sace leḍḍupātato dūre parikkhepo hoti, leḍḍupātoyeva gāmaparicchedoti gahetabbanti vadanti. Pubbe vuttanayenevāti parikkhittagāme vuttanayeneva.
Saṅkarīyati 意为“被混合”。此处指宅近处与村近处。因为《波逸提》第513条中说:“非时入村,有围墙的村庄,越过围墙者犯波逸提;无围墙的村庄,进入近处者犯波逸提”,所以宅近处与村近处的不相混合性应当被确认,因此说:“在此,不混合的判定应依非时入村等来理解。”在这里,有些人说:“有围墙的村庄,越过围墙;无围墙的村庄,越过应设围墙之处,即犯非时入村罪。”此说不可取,因为《分别》中说:“有围墙的村庄,越过围墙者犯波逸提;无围墙的村庄,进入近处者犯波逸提。”对于无围墙的村庄,从宅近处起,进入被称为第二掷土距离的村近处时,应知为犯。正因如此,在非时入村学处注释中说:“无围墙村庄的近处,应依不与取中所说的方法来理解。”在《本母注释》中也说:“凡所示的无围墙村庄的近处,依此应判定非时入村等的罪。”既然如此,是否与“非时进入村庄”这一说法相违?并不相违,因为村近处也为“村庄”一词所包摄。因此,应在此得出这样的结论:有围墙的村庄,越过围墙者犯非时入村罪;无围墙的村庄,进入近处者犯非时入村罪。显示巴利原文
Saṅkarīyatīti missīyati. Etthāti gharagharūpacāragāmagāmūpacāresu. ‘‘Vikāle gāmappavesane parikkhittassa gāmassa parikkhepaṃ atikkamantassa āpatti pācittiyassa, aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāraṃ okkamantassa āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 513) vuttattā gāmagāmūpacārānaṃ asaṅkaratā icchitabbāti āha – ‘‘asaṅkarato cettha vinicchayo veditabbo vikāle gāmappavesanādīsū’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘parikkhittassa gāmassa parikkhepaṃ, aparikkhittassa parikkhepārahaṭṭhānaṃ atikkamantassa vikālagāmappavesanāpatti hotī’’ti keci vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ padabhājaniyaṃ pana ‘‘parikkhittassa gāmassa parikkhepaṃ atikkamantassa āpatti pācittiyassa, aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāraṃ okkamantassa āpatti pācittiyassā’’ti (pāci. 513) vuttattā. Aparikkhittassa gāmassa gharūpacārato paṭṭhāya dutiyaleḍḍupātasaṅkhātassa gāmūpacārassa okkamane āpatti veditabbā. Teneva vikālagāmappavesanasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 512) ‘‘aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāro adinnādāne vuttanayeneva veditabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Mātikāṭṭhakathāyampi (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dutiyapārājikavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘yvāyaṃ aparikkhittassa gāmassa upacāro dassito, tassa vasena vikālagāmappavesanādīsu āpatti paricchinditabbā’’ti. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘vikāle gāmaṃ paviseyyā’’ti iminā virujjhatīti? Na virujjhati gāmūpacārassapi gāmaggahaṇena gahitattā. Tasmā parikkhittassa gāmassa parikkhepaṃ atikkamantassa, aparikkhittassa upacāraṃ okkamantassa vikālagāmappavesanāpatti hotīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Vikāle gāmappavesanādīsūti ādi-saddena gharagharūpacārādīsu ṭhitānaṃ uppannalābhabhājanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“出外至门柱之外”意为“从门柱向外走出”。在此,先依律的教说:“除了村庄和村近处,其余为阿兰若”(《波罗夷》92)。依经的教说,就阿兰若比丘而言:“称为阿兰若的住所,最远的为五百弓量”(《波罗夷》654)。律与经二说皆为方便说,而阿毗达摩则为非方便说。依非方便说,脱离村庄之处即是阿兰若。为显示依阿毗达摩教说的阿兰若,故说“出外至门柱之外”(《分别》529)。他们说:“所谓师长弓,以自然手量为九搩手,搭上弦则为四肘量。”这样说是为了杜绝借口,令他无机会声称:“我既不在村庄,也不在阿兰若,而是在家、宅近处或村近处的某个地方拿取。”显示巴利原文
Nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlāti indakhīlato bahi nikkhamitvāti attho. Ettha ca vinayapariyāyena tāva ‘‘ṭhapetvā gāmañca gāmūpacārañca avasesaṃ arañña’’nti (pārā. 92) āgataṃ, suttantapariyāyena āraññikaṃ bhikkhuṃ sandhāya ‘‘āraññakaṃ nāma senāsanaṃ pañcadhanusatikaṃ pacchima’’nti (pārā. 654) āgataṃ. Vinayasuttantā ubhopi pariyāyadesanā nāma, abhidhammo pana nippariyāyadesanā. Nippariyāyato ca gāmavinimuttaṃ ṭhānaṃ araññameva hotīti abhidhammapariyāyena araññaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nikkhamitvā bahi indakhīlā’’ti (vibha. 529) vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ācariyadhanu nāma pakatihatthena navavidatthippamāṇaṃ, jiyāya pana āropitāya catuhatthappamāṇa’’nti vadanti. Lesokāsanisedhanatthanti ‘‘mayā neva gāme, na araññe haṭaṃ, ghare vā gharūpacāresu vā gāmūpacāresu vā aññatarasmi’’nti vattuṃ mā labhatūti vuttaṃ hoti.
“Kappiyaṃ”是依适合性而说的。然而,若是不适合且未被接受的,便归入“未与”之列。在未作舍弃等的情况下,即使不知“这是我的所有物”,也如同父母去世后仰卧幼婴的所有物一样,仍属于他人所持有。显示巴利原文
Kappiyanti anurūpavasena vuttaṃ. Akappiyampi pana appaṭiggahitañce, adinnasaṅkhyameva gacchati. Pariccāgādimhi akate ‘‘idaṃ mayhaṃ santaka’’nti aviditampi parapariggahitameva mātāpitūnaṃ accayena mandānaṃ uttānaseyyakānaṃ dārakānaṃ santakamiva.
由于这种心,一个人被称为盗贼,因此这种心被称为“盗”,所以说“这是偷盗心的别名”。“Saṅkhā”一词见于智、部分、施设、计数等义中。例如,在“Saṅkhāya ekaṃ paṭisevati”等句中意为“以智”;在“Papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācaranti”等句中意为“部分”;在“Tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ saṅkhā samaññā”等句中意为“施设”;在“Na sukaraṃ saṅkhātuṃ”等句中意为“计数”。这里就“部分”之义而说“saṅkhā”一词,故言“所谓saṅkhāsaṅkhāta,在义理上是一”。因此说“这是部分的别名”。“Papañcasaṅkhā”即称为贪、慢、见的戏论部分。有些人说:“一个心部分,即先前生起的‘我将盗取’之心,中间成办前往等或成办执取等的心,以及成办移换处所的加行心。在这些当中,唯有这最后一个心部分是此处所指的。”显示巴利原文
Yassa vasena puriso thenoti vuccati, taṃ theyyanti āha ‘‘avaharaṇacittassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Saṅkhā-saddo ñāṇakoṭṭhāsapaññattigaṇanādīsu dissati. ‘‘Saṅkhāyekaṃ paṭisevatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.168) hi ñāṇe dissati. ‘‘Papañcasaññāsaṅkhā samudācarantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.204) koṭṭhāse. ‘‘Tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ saṅkhā samaññā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1313) paññattiyaṃ. ‘‘Na sukaraṃ saṅkhātu’’ntiādīsu (dha. pa. 196; apa. thera. 1.10.2) gaṇanāyaṃ. Tattha koṭṭhāsavacanaṃ saṅkhā-saddaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘saṅkhāsaṅkhātanti atthato eka’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘koṭṭhāsassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Papañcasaṅkhāti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhisaṅkhātā papañcakoṭṭhāsā. ‘‘Eko cittakoṭṭhāsoti yañca pubbabhāge avaharissāmīti pavattaṃ cittaṃ, yañca gamanādisādhakaṃ parāmasanādisādhakaṃ vā majjhe pavattaṃ, yañca ṭhānācāvanappayogasādhakaṃ, tesu ayameveko pacchimo cittakoṭṭhāso idhādhippeto’’ti keci vadanti. Cūḷagaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘ūnamāsakamāsakaūnapañcamāsakapañcamāsakāvaharaṇacittesu eko cittakoṭṭhāso’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Anekappabhedattā cittassa eko cittakoṭṭhāsoti vutta’’nti mahāgaṇṭhipade majjhimagaṇṭhipade ca vuttaṃ. Idamevettha sundarataraṃ ‘‘theyyacittasaṅkhāto eko cittakoṭṭhāso’’ti vuttattā. Theyyasaṅkhātenāti theyyacittakoṭṭhāsena karaṇabhūtena, na vissāsatāvakālikādigāhavasappavattacittakoṭṭhāsenāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“以控告之力”即“以诉讼之力”。“Abhiyuñjati”意为“指责、起诉”,也就是“提起诉讼”之义。“Parikappitaṭṭhānaṃ”指通过空间划定所限定的区域。“Suṅkaghātaṃ”:此处,“suṅka”是应缴纳给国王的份额的别名,它在此处被不付而通行的人所破坏,故称“suṅkaghāta”。这是对以树木、山等为标记所限定的区域——“进入此处者应付税”——的别名。显示巴利原文
Abhiyogavasenāti aḍḍakaraṇavasena. Abhiyuñjatīti codeti, aḍḍaṃ karotīti attho. Parikappitaṭṭhānanti okāsaparikappanavasena parikappitappadesaṃ. Suṅkaghātanti ettha rājūnaṃ deyyabhāgassa etaṃ adhivacanaṃ suṅkoti, so ettha haññati adatvā gacchantehīti suṅkaghāto. ‘‘Ettha paviṭṭhehi suṅko dātabbo’’ti rukkhapabbatādisaññāṇena niyamitappadesassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
二十五种盗取事解说显示巴利原文
Pañcavīsatiavahārakathāvaṇṇanā
“Ākulāti”是混乱、混杂的意思。“Luḷitāti”是被搅乱、被翻动的意思。“Katthacīti”是指在某部注释书中。“Ekaṃ pañcakaṃ dassitaṃ”即显示“一组五事”,内容为:“所取之物为他人所有,且作他人所有想,且该物品是贵重的资具,价值五摩沙迦或超过五摩沙迦,且盗心现前,若触碰则犯恶作;若令动摇则犯偷兰遮;若令离本处则犯波罗夷”(波罗夷122)——如此所说的五种不与取支,被表示为一组五事。“Dve pañcakāni dassitāni”指显示“两组五事”,即:“以六种方式不与取者犯波罗夷:非自己物想、非亲厚取、非暂时借用,且该物品是贵重的资具,价值五摩沙迦或超过五摩沙迦,且盗心现前,若触碰则犯恶作;若令动摇则犯偷兰遮;若令离本处则犯波罗夷。”在这段所说的六项中,除去一项后,剩下的五项为一组五事;如此显示之后,再取前面所说的一组五事,合为两组五事。“Ettha panāti”是指在“以五种方式不与取者……”等语句中。“Sabbehipi padehīti”是指以“所取之物为他人所有……”等所有语句。显示巴利原文
Ākulāti saṅkulā. Luḷitāti viloḷitā. Katthacīti ekissāya aṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Ekaṃ pañcakaṃ dassitanti ‘‘parapariggahitañca hoti, parapariggahitasaññī ca, garuko ca hoti parikkhāro pañcamāsako vā atirekapañcamāsako vā, theyyacittañca paccupaṭṭhitaṃ hoti, āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti (pārā. 122) evaṃ vuttapañcaavahāraṅgāni ekaṃ pañcakanti dassitaṃ. Dve pañcakāni dassitānīti ‘‘chahākārehi adinnaṃ ādiyantassa āpatti pārājikassa. Na ca sakasaññī, na ca vissāsaggāhī, na ca tāvakālikaṃ, garuko ca hoti parikkhāro pañcamāsako vā atirekapañcamāsako vā, theyyacittañca paccupaṭṭhitaṃ hoti, āmasati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Phandāpeti, āpatti thullaccayassa. Ṭhānā cāveti, āpatti pārājikassā’’ti evaṃ vuttesu chasu padesu ekaṃ apanetvā avasesāni pañca padāni ekaṃ pañcakanti dassetvā heṭṭhā vuttapañcakañca gahetvā dve pañcakāni dassitāni. Ettha panāti ‘‘pañcahākārehi adinnaṃ ādiyantassā’’tiādīsu. Sabbehipi padehīti ‘‘parapariggahitañca hotī’’tiādīhi padehi. Labbhamānāniyeva pañcakānīti pañcavīsatiyā avahāresu labbhamānapañcakāni.
五种不与取的集合称为“五事组”。自己的手即是“亲手”,由亲手所生或与之相关者,称为“亲手的不与取”。“亲手等五事组”——应知这一名称是依首词而得,犹如“善等三法”被称为“善三法”的惯用语。依此类推,“前方便等五事组”称为“前方便五事组”,“盗不与取等五事组”称为“盗不与取五事组”——应知这些名称的获得也是如此。“在第三和第五个五事组中”,是指在“亲手五事组”和“盗不与取五事组”中。“依可得之词而说”意为:在“亲手五事组”中,依可得的“舍堕不与取”一词而结合;在“盗不与取五事组”中,依可得的“计谋不与取”一词而结合。显示巴利原文
Pañcannaṃ avahārānaṃ samūho pañcakaṃ, sako hattho sahattho, tena nibbatto, tassa vā sambandhīti sāhatthiko, avahāro. Sāhatthikādi pañcakaṃ sāhatthikapañcakanti ādipadavasena nāmalābho daṭṭhabbo kusalādittikassa kusalattikavohāro viya. Imināva nayena pubbapayogādi pañcakaṃ pubbapayogapañcakaṃ, theyyāvahārādi pañcakaṃ theyyāvahārapañcakanti nāmalābho daṭṭhabboti. Tatiyapañcamesu pañcakesūti sāhatthikapañcakatheyyāvahārapañcakesu. Labbhamānapadavasenāti sāhatthikapañcake labbhamānassa nissaggiyāvahārapadassa vasena theyyāvahārapañcake labbhamānassa parikappāvahārapadassa ca vasena yojetabbanti attho.
由命令所产生的不与取,称为“命令的不与取”。“Nissajjanaṃ nissaggo”指舍弃、投出,即在关税征收处或预设的场所站定后,将物品扔到外面。这种舍弃本身就是“舍堕”。在行为完成之前,就已成就波罗夷罪所摄的含义,故称“义成就者”。因为像“当你能取某人的物品时,就取走它”这样的命令行为,以及放入必定会喝掉他人油瓶中价值一脚价的油的鞋子等物品的行为,在受命者取物之前、在鞋子等使油流出之前,就已经成就了波罗夷罪所摄的含义。即使是亲手的行为,像这样的也称为“义成就者”。这在《本母注释书》中已说。显示巴利原文
Āṇattiyā nibbatto avahāro āṇattiko. Nissajjanaṃ nissaggo, suṅkaghātaṭṭhāne parikappitokāse vā ṭhatvā bhaṇḍassa bahi pātanaṃ. Nissaggova nissaggiyo. Kiriyāsiddhito puretarameva pārājikāpattisaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ sādhetīti atthasādhako. ‘‘Asukassa bhaṇḍaṃ yadā sakkosi, tadā avaharā’’ti evarūpo hi āṇāpanapayogo parassa telakumbhiyā pādagghanakaṃ telaṃ avassaṃ pivanakānaṃ upāhanādīnaṃ nikkhepapayogo ca āṇattassa bhaṇḍaggahaṇato upāhanādīnaṃ telapātanato ca puretarameva pārājikāpattisaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ sādheti. Sāhatthikapayogopi hi evarūpo atthasādhakoti vuccati. Vuttañhetaṃ mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dutiyapārājikavaṇṇanā) –
“义成就者”,即这样命令:“当你能取某人的物品时,就取走它。”在此,若对方无有障碍而取走该物,命令者于命令的刹那便犯波罗夷。又或者,将那些必定会吸收喝掉他人油瓶中价值一脚价之油的鞋子等物放入,当这些物从手中脱离的刹那,即犯波罗夷。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthasādhako nāma ‘asukassa bhaṇḍaṃ yadā sakkosi, tadā taṃ avaharā’ti āṇāpeti. Tattha sace paro anantarāyiko hutvā taṃ avaharati, āṇāpakassa āṇattikkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ. Parassa vā pana telakumbhiyā pādagghanakaṃ telaṃ avassaṃ pivanakāni upāhanādīni pakkhipati, hatthato muttamatteyeva pārājika’’nti.
“放弃责任”(dhuranikkhepo)即是放下负担。在争夺园地等情形中,对自己应给予和他人应接受上,陷入无所作为的状态。“亲手不与取”即亲手拿取。“命令他人:‘取走某人的物品’”——在此,命令者于命令的刹那即应见有罪。既然如此,这与“义成就者”有何差别呢?令其当下即刻取物,是“命令的行为”(āṇattikapayoga);令其在其他时候取物,则是“义成就者”——这就是二者的差别。因此说:“义成就者,即这样命令:‘当你能取某人的物品时,就取走它。’”在此,仅以命令的行为即显示了“义成就者”,而依亲手方式的“义成就者行为”将在后面显现。而“放弃责任”应依所寄存的物品来理解——这仅是举例。在争夺园地等情形中,即使对于暂时使用的物品和应施舍的物品不予给予,也是同样的道理。显示巴利原文
Dhurassa nikkhipanaṃ dhuranikkhepo. Ārāmābhiyuñjanādīsu attano ca parassa ca dānaggahaṇesu nirussāhabhāvāpajjanaṃ. Sahatthā avaharatīti sahatthena gaṇhāti. ‘‘Asukassa bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’’ti aññaṃ āṇāpetīti etthāpi āṇāpakassa āṇattikkhaṇeyeva āpatti daṭṭhabbā. Yadi evaṃ imassa, atthasādhakassa ca ko visesoti? Taṅkhaṇaññeva gahaṇe niyuñjanaṃ āṇattikapayogo, kālantarena gahaṇatthaṃ niyogo atthasādhakoti ayametesaṃ viseso. Tenevāha – ‘‘asukassa bhaṇḍaṃ yadā sakkosi, tadā avaharāti āṇāpetī’’ti. Ettha ca āṇāpanapayogova atthasādhakoti dassito, sāhatthikavasenapi atthasādhakapayogo pana upari āvi bhavissati. Dhuranikkhepo pana upanikkhittabhaṇḍavasena veditabboti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ. Ārāmābhiyuñjanādīsupi tāvakālikabhaṇḍadeyyānaṃ adānepi eseva nayo.
由于说“应知依命令方式的前方便”,对无有障碍而取物者,命令“取走某人的物品”——因在取物之前,故为“前方便”(pubbapayoga)。与方便同时进行的不与取,是“俱方便”(sahapayoga)。共同商议决定“我们将取走某件物品”后而取走,是“共谋不与取”(saṃvidāvahāra)。“约定业”是指依上午等时间分限而作认知的业。“相业”是指为令想生起而做眨眼等相的行为。以令离本处的方式而说“俱方便”——但这仅是举例,应知在越过界桩等情况下,即使没有令离本处,也有“俱方便”。这在《本母注释书》中已说:“应知以令离本处的方式,以及通过越过界桩等夺取田地等方式,均为俱方便”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Āṇattivasenapubbapayogo veditabbo’’ti vuttattā anantarāyena gaṇhantassa ‘asukassa bhaṇḍaṃ avaharā’ti āṇāpanaṃ bhaṇḍaggahaṇato pubbattā pubbapayogo, payogena saha vattamāno avahāro sahapayogo, ‘‘asukaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ harissāmā’’ti saṃvidahitvā sammantayitvā avaharaṇaṃ saṃvidāvahāro. Saṅketakammaṃ nāma pubbaṇhādikālaparicchedavasena sañjānanakammaṃ, nimittakammaṃ nāma saññuppādanatthaṃ akkhinikhaṇanādinimittakaraṇaṃ. Ṭhānācāvanavasena sahapayogoti idaṃ pana nidassanamattaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, khilasaṅkamanādīsupi asati ca ṭhānācāvane sahapayogo daṭṭhabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dutiyapārājikavaṇṇanā) ‘‘ṭhānācāvanavasena khilādīni saṅkāmetvā khettādiggahaṇavasena ca sahapayogo veditabbo’’ti.
“贼”即是盗,其性为偷窃;以偷窃方式而取,名为偷窃取。若有人破门而入等,于不被察觉时取走;或通过秤砣欺诈、量器欺诈、假币欺诈等方式欺骗后获取——如此所得的夺取,称为偷窃取。以强力压制后夺取,名为强夺取。若以强力、暴力夺取他人财物者,如屠村者等,或如前所述凭借自身所得权力而多取者,如国王的差役等——如此所得的夺取,称为强夺取。以物品和地点进行谋划后取走,称为谋划取。用草、叶等遮盖指环等物,之后再取走那被遮盖之物,称为遮盖取。将草转移后取走,称为草转移取。显示巴利原文
Theno vuccati coro, tassa bhāvo theyyaṃ, tena avaharaṇaṃ theyyāvahāro. Yo hi sandhicchedādīni katvā adissamāno avaharati, tulākūṭamānakūṭakūṭakahāpaṇādīhi vā vañcetvā gaṇhāti, tassevaṃ gaṇhato avahāro theyyāvahāro. Pasayha abhibhavitvā avaharaṇaṃ pasayhāvahāro. Yo hi pasayha balakkārena paresaṃ santakaṃ gaṇhāti gāmaghātakādayo viya, attano pattabalito vā vuttanayena adhikaṃ gaṇhāti rājabhaṭādayo viya, tassevaṃ gaṇhato avahāro pasayhāvahāro. Bhaṇḍavasena ca okāsavasena ca parikappetvā avaharaṇaṃ parikappāvahāro. Tiṇapaṇṇādīhi aṅgulimuddikādiṃ paṭicchādetvā pacchā tassa paṭicchannassa avaharaṇaṃ paṭicchannāvahāro. Kusaṃ saṅkāmetvā avaharaṇaṃ kusāvahāro.
“称量”意为仔细检查。“如法行”是指仪则,然而并无罪过,此为意旨。“大众拥挤”即大众的混乱。“于人群散失时”即当人群离去之时。“将此袈裟作为你自己的所有物,交给这位比丘”——为何这样说?因为衣物的主人已放弃了责任,所以不应取用未予之物。取走者从生起追悔之时起,便四处寻找衣物的主人,心想“我要还给他”;而当衣物的主人说“这是我的”时,此取走者也已舍离了执著,因此如此说。既然如此,为何不说“衣物的主人自己取回自己的所有物”呢?这是为了消除双方的疑虑。如何消除?取走者可能会生起疑虑:“并非由我亲手所给,这算是物品的赠与。”另一方则可能会生起疑虑:“我先放弃了责任,此后又取用了未与之物。”显示巴利原文
Tulayitvāti upaparikkhitvā. Sāmīcīti vattaṃ, āpatti pana natthīti adhippāyo. Mahājanasammaddoti mahājanasaṅkhobho. Bhaṭṭhe janakāyeti apagate janakāye. ‘‘Idañca kāsāvaṃ attano santakaṃ katvā etasseva bhikkhuno dehī’’ti kiṃkāraṇā evamāha? Cīvarasāmikena yasmā dhuranikkhepo kato, tasmā tassa adinnaṃ gahetuṃ na vaṭṭati. Avahārakopi vippaṭisārassa uppannakālato paṭṭhāya cīvarasāmikaṃ pariyesanto vicarati ‘‘dassāmī’’ti, cīvarasāmikena ca ‘‘mameta’’nti vutte etenapi avahārakena ālayo pariccatto, tasmā evamāha. Yadi evaṃ cīvarasāmikoyeva ‘‘attano santakaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti kasmā na vuttoti? Ubhinnampi kukkuccavinodanatthaṃ. Kathaṃ? Avahārakassa ‘‘mayā sahatthena na dinnaṃ, bhaṇḍadeyyameta’’nti kukkuccaṃ uppajjeyya, itarassa ‘‘mayā paṭhamaṃ dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā pacchā adinnaṃ gahita’’nti kukkuccaṃ uppajjeyyāti.
“等价的”意指价值低微。“能实现木头的用途”即能达成须以木材所作之事。“关于我存在”等一切话语,皆是国王出于净信而说,不应认为“长老做了不适当之事”。显示巴利原文
Samagghanti appagghaṃ. Dāruatthaṃ pharatīti dārūhi kattabbakiccaṃ sādheti. Mayi santetiādi sabbaṃ raññā pasādena vuttaṃ, ‘‘therena pana ananucchavikaṃ kata’’nti na maññitabbaṃ.
凡前面所说,因一日之中砍取齿木等而造成的价值减损,那一切都由物主……显示巴利原文
Ekadivasaṃ dantakaṭṭhacchedanādinā yā ayaṃ agghahāni vuttā, sā sabbā bhaṇḍasāminā
这是就“买后已取走”而说的,然而这一切都应依义注师所立之量来把握。“石与碎石”即石块与碎石。所谓“智者能持”的解说,即是“有罪或无罪”等。显示巴利原文
Kiṇitvā gahitameva sandhāya vuttā, sabbaṃ panetaṃ aṭṭhakathācariyappamāṇena gahetabbaṃ. Pāsāṇañca sakkharañca pāsāṇasakkharaṃ. Dhāreyyatthaṃ vicakkhaṇoti imasseva vivaraṇaṃ ‘‘āpattiṃ vā anāpattiṃ vā’’tiādi.
“审判官”:此处,据说“akka”一词是指审判堂。坐在那里观察有罪与无罪的人,称为审判官,也就是依法裁判者。“可能伤害”:此处的伤害指用手、脚等打击,以及斩断头等,故说“可能伤害即可能打击及可能斩断”。因此,在分别说中也提到:“可能用手,或用脚,或用鞭,或用杖,或用半杖,或以斩断来伤害。”其中,“用半杖”指用两肘长的短棍或竹片。“以斩断”指斩断手、脚、头等。“可能驱逐”指从村落、城镇等驱逐出去。“你是贼……你是盗”:此处应补充“可能辱骂”一词来理解其含义,故说“说了‘你是贼’等语之后,可能辱骂”。显示巴利原文
Akkhadassāti ettha akkha-saddena kira vinicchayasālā vuccati. Tattha nisīditvā vajjāvajjaṃ passantīti akkhadassā vuccanti dhammavinicchanakā. Haneyyunti ettha hananaṃ nāma hatthapādādīhi pothanañceva sīsādicchedanañca hotīti āha – ‘‘haneyyunti potheyyuñceva chindeyyuñcā’’ti. Teneva padabhājaniyañca ‘‘hatthena vā pādena vā kasāya vā vettena vā aḍḍhadaṇḍakena vā chejjāya vā haneyyu’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha aḍḍhadaṇḍakenāti dvihatthappamāṇena rassamuggarena veḷupesikāya vā. Chejjāyāti hatthapādasīsādīnaṃ chedanena. Nīhareyyunti gāmanigamādito nīhareyyuṃ. Corosi…pe… thenosīti ettha ‘‘paribhāseyyu’’nti padaṃ ajjhāharitvā attho veditabboti āha ‘‘corosīti evamādīni ca vatvā paribhāseyyu’’nti.
93 “那物品被指示了”——这是与前文的连接。“无论放在何处”指放在地上等处,不论置于哪里。“无论以何种方式被取走”指放在地上等处的物品,纵使完全没有实际被取,也以某种方式计为被取。显示巴利原文
93. Yaṃ taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ dassitanti sambandho. Yattha yattha ṭhitanti bhūmiādīsu yattha yattha ṭhitaṃ. Yathā yathā ādānaṃ gacchatīti bhūmiādīsu ṭhitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ sabbaso aggahaṇepi yena yena ākārena gahaṇaṃ upagacchati.
地上物论的注释显示巴利原文
Bhūmaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
94 94.“使之动”——一切处皆犯恶作。此处应知:心想“我要起身”而让身体动了一下,随后并未起身,就这样躺着也不动四肢;以及仅以一次用力便起身者,皆犯恶作。“或对其他移动无帮助”:如同关门时,此动作对前往仓库的移动并无助益而无罪,同样,对其他移动无有帮助的身业、语业亦无罪。“以每一句话”:指表达每一义理的话语。“被得知”:即被知晓。“我们将作福德”:关于此,三本《结文》中说:“说‘我们先妄语,然后作福德’者,犯恶作。”但这与此处注释书之说相违,因为后文将说:“凡是妄语,处处皆是波逸提”,以及“在不与取的前方便中,于波逸提处并无所谓的恶作”。然而,若如此说则不违:“说‘我们先妄语,然后作福德’者,犯波逸提兼恶作。”因为后文将说:“《大护持》中说:‘挖掘不净地者,犯波逸提兼恶作’”,以及“如此处一样,一切处于波逸提处,恶作不免除”。但如果以善心说“我们将作福德”,则无罪,因为后文将说:“‘我们将作佛供养、法供养或僧众食’而生起善心,以善心前往者无罪”,以及“如此处一样,一切处于非盗心者无罪”。显示巴利原文
94.Phandāpeti, sabbattha dukkaṭamevāti ettha ‘‘uṭṭhahissāmī’’ti phandāpetvā puna anuṭṭhahitvā tattheva sayantassapi aṅgapaccaṅgaṃ aphandāpetvā ekapayogena uṭṭhahantassapi dukkaṭamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññasmiṃ vā gamanassaanupakāreti yathā dvārapidahane kumbhiṭṭhānagamanassa anupakārattā anāpatti, evaṃ aññasmiṃ vā gamanassa anupakāre kāyavacīkamme anāpatti. Vācāya vācāyāti ekekatthadīpikāya vācāya vācāya. Upaladdhoti ñāto. Puññāni ca karissāmāti ettha ‘‘musāvādaṃ katvā puññāni karissāmāti vadantassa dukkaṭamevā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ, taṃ imasmiṃyeva padese aṭṭhakathāvacanena virujjhati. Tathā hi ‘‘yaṃ yaṃ vacanaṃ musā, tattha tattha pācittiya’’nti ca ‘‘na hi adinnādānassa pubbapayoge pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭaṃ nāma atthī’’ti ca vakkhati. Evaṃ pana vutte na virujjhati ‘‘musāvādaṃ katvā puññāni ca karissāmāti vadantassa pācittiyena saddhiṃ dukkaṭa’’nti. Tathā hi ‘‘akappiyapathaviṃ khaṇantānaṃ dukkaṭehi saddhiṃ pācittiyānīti mahāpaccariyaṃ vutta’’nti ca ‘‘yathā ca idha, evaṃ sabbattha pācittiyaṭṭhāne dukkaṭā na muccatī’’ti ca vakkhati. Sace pana kusalacitto ‘‘puññāni karissāmā’’ti vadati, anāpatti ‘‘buddhapūjaṃ vā dhammapūjaṃ vā saṅghabhattaṃ vā karissāmāti kusalaṃ uppādeti, kusalacittena gamane anāpattī’’ti ca ‘‘yathā ca idha, evaṃ sabbattha atheyyacittassa anāpattī’’ti ca vakkhamānattā.
“应知为放逸所写”:即应理解为,后来写入书本时,因放逸而书写者。在巴利圣典及其余注释书中,仅提到“锄或筐”两者,未提及斧、凿。为显示这些亦出现于《简略注释》等中,故说“但在《简略注释》和《大护持》中……”。由于是以盗心而作,故说犯“波逸提兼恶作”。“此后一切操作”指从取种子之后应作的一切操作。“一切依前法”:直至用筐取物结束,在每一次手动、每一步中,皆是恶作。显示巴利原文
Pamādalikhitanti veditabbanti aparabhāge potthakāruḷhakāle pamajjitvā likhitanti veditabbaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ sesaaṭṭhakathāsu ca ‘‘kudālaṃ vā piṭakaṃ vā’’ti idameva dvayaṃ vatvā vāsipharasūnaṃ avuttattā tesampi saṅkhepaṭṭhakathādīsu āgatabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkhepaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana mahāpaccariyañcā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Theyyacittena katattā ‘‘dukkaṭehi saddhiṃ pācittiyānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tato paraṃ sabbakiriyāsūti bījaggahaṇato paraṃ kattabbakiriyāsu. Sabbaṃ purimanayenevāti yāva piṭakapariyosānā hatthavārapadavāresu dukkaṭaṃ.
“由他们所示”:为于前加行、俱加行中的恶作不生迷惑,结集法藏的长老们将其合在一起开示。他们说:“由于一切恶作都应摄在这八种之中,故其余七种恶作所不包含者,唯应摄为‘律恶作’。”十种宝是指:“珍珠、摩尼、琉璃、螺贝、石板、珊瑚、银、金、红宝石、猫眼石”——如是所说十种宝。显示巴利原文
Therehi dassitanti pubbapayogasahapayogadukkaṭesu asammohatthaṃ samodhānetvā dhammasaṅgāhakattherehi dassitaṃ. ‘‘Sabbesampi dukkaṭānaṃ imesuyeva aṭṭhasu saṅgahetabbabhāvato itarehi sattahi dukkaṭehi vinimuttaṃ vinayadukkaṭeyeva saṅgahetabba’’nti vadanti. Dasavidhaṃ ratananti ‘‘muttā maṇi veḷuriyo saṅkho silā pavāḷaṃ rajataṃ jātarūpaṃ lohitaṅgo masāragalla’’nti evamāgataṃ dasavidhaṃ ratanaṃ.
摩尼珠、珍珠、琉璃与螺贝,
宝石、珊瑚、白银与黄金,
赤珠与猫眼石,
智者应知此十种为宝。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Maṇi muttā veḷuriyo ca saṅkho, Silā pavāḷaṃ rajatañca hemaṃ; Salohitaṅgañca masāragallaṃ, Daseti dhīro ratanāni jaññā’’ti. –
七种谷物,即:稻、米、大麦、小米、稗子、野豌豆、小麦——此为七种谷物。“武器物品等”:以“等”字摄乐器物品、女人形象等。于不应触摸的事物上犯的恶作,名为“不应触摸恶作”。“恶行恶作”:因做了被禁止的“不应作”之事,即是恶行,于此上的恶作,称为“恶行恶作”。“白恶作”:应通过白(告知)来制定的犯行。听到“他为分裂僧团而努力”之后,为了制止他而对于已知意义却不说者,为“已知恶作”。十一种需经劝谏的罪:比丘巴帝摩卡中有四事需经三次劝谏的桑喀地谢沙,及阿利吒学处,共五条;比丘尼巴帝摩卡中有一事需经三次劝谏的波罗夷、四事桑喀地谢沙,及暴恶迦利学处,共六条。承诺雨安居等后而不履行者,以承诺为缘的恶作,名为“承诺恶作”。显示巴利原文
Sattavidhaṃdhaññanti sāli vīhi yavo kaṅgu kudrūso varako godhumoti idaṃ sattavidhaṃ dhaññaṃ. Āvudhabhaṇḍādinti ādi-saddena tūriyabhaṇḍaitthirūpādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Anāmasitabbe vatthumhi dukkaṭaṃ anāmāsadukkaṭaṃ. Durupaciṇṇadukkaṭanti ‘‘na kattabba’’nti vāritassa katattā duṭṭhu āciṇṇaṃ caritanti durupaciṇṇaṃ, tasmiṃ dukkaṭaṃ durupaciṇṇadukkaṭaṃ. Vinaye paññattaṃ dukkaṭaṃ vinayadukkaṭaṃ. ‘‘Saṅghabhedāya parakkamatī’’ti sutvā taṃnivāraṇatthāya ñāte atthe avadantassa ñātadukkaṭaṃ. Ekādasa samanubhāsanā nāma bhikkhupātimokkhe cattāro yāvatatiyakā saṅghādisesā, ariṭṭhasikkhāpadanti pañca, bhikkhunīpātimokkhe ekaṃ yāvatatiyakaṃ pārājikaṃ, cattāro saṅghādisesā, caṇḍakāḷīsikkhāpadanti cha. Vassāvāsādiṃ paṭissuṇitvā na sampādentassa paṭissavanimittaṃ dukkaṭaṃ paṭissavadukkaṭaṃ.
前俱加行、不可触恶行,
律与所知、白二甘马与承诺——
此八恶作,由知律者于律中所说。
显示巴利原文 Pubbasahapayoge ca, anāmāsadurupaciṇṇe; Vinaye ceva ñāte ca, ñattiyā ca paṭissave; Aṭṭhete dukkaṭā vuttā, vinaye vinayaññunā.
此处,自俱加行开始,先前诸罪便即止息,因此说“若未放弃责任”等。其中,由于说到“若未放弃责任”,应当了知:若放弃责任而挖掘,则先前诸罪不会止息。说到“掩埋恶作止息,而挖出恶作成立”,这是为了依巴利圣典中所说的次第而开示。然而,若在挖出泥土后继续挖掘,则挖出恶作止息,而挖掘恶作成立。显示巴利原文
Sahapayogato paṭṭhāya cettha purimā purimā āpattiyo paṭippassambhantīti āha ‘‘atha dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvā’’tiādi. Tattha ‘‘dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvā’’ti vuttattā dhuranikkhepaṃ katvā khaṇantassa purimāpattiyo na paṭippassambhantīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Viyūhanadukkaṭaṃ paṭippassambhati, uddharaṇadukkaṭe patiṭṭhātīti idaṃ pāḷiyaṃ āgatānukkamena dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Yadi pana paṃsuṃ uddharitvā saussāhova puna khaṇati, uddharaṇadukkaṭaṃ paṭippassambhati, khaṇanadukkaṭe patiṭṭhāti.
“所作、造作、行为”在意义上同一,故说“那行为是丑陋的”。现在为以《附随》巴利圣典显示刚才所说的意义,而说“此亦被说”等。其中,“违犯、偏离、失足”——这一切都是此处所说“恶作”的同义词。因为,凡是做得恶劣,或做得丑陋,那就是恶作。而此恶作,因未随导师所教而行,故为“违犯”;因远离善法而生起,故为“偏离”;因未登上圣种行道,故为“失足”。“若人所作”是此处的譬喻说明。其意义是:如同世间人公开或秘密地作恶,人们便说那是“恶作”;同样,此亦因是佛陀所呵斥的卑劣性而为罪恶,故应知为“恶作”。显示巴利原文
Kataṃ karaṇaṃ kiriyāti atthato ekanti āha ‘‘virūpā sā kiriyā’’ti. Idāni vuttamevatthaṃ parivārapāḷiyā nidassento ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha aparaddhaṃ viraddhaṃ khalitanti sabbametaṃ yañca dukkaṭanti ettha vuttassa dukkaṭassa pariyāyavacanaṃ. Yañhi duṭṭhu kataṃ, virūpaṃ vā kataṃ , taṃ dukkaṭaṃ. Taṃ panetaṃ yathā satthārā vuttaṃ, evaṃ akatattā aparaddhaṃ, kusalaṃ virajjhitvā pavattattā viraddhaṃ, ariyavaṃsappaṭipadaṃ anāruḷhattā khalitaṃ. Yaṃ manusso kareti idaṃ panettha opammanidassanaṃ. Tassattho – yathā yaṃ loke manusso āvi vā yadi vā raho pāpaṃ karoti, taṃ dukkaṭanti pavedenti, evamidampi buddhapaṭikuṭṭhena lāmakabhāvena pāpaṃ, tasmā dukkaṭanti veditabbanti.
如同应说“苦的、或可鄙的去处”为“恶趣”而说为“恶趣”,又如应说“此有苦果”为“苦果”而说为“苦果”;同样,此处为了显示应说“因粗重、因罪过”为“粗罪”而说为“偷兰遮”,故说“于来世亦为恶趣”等。然而,当结合时,结合后的音节缩短是必然成立的,故仅说“应知为结合状态”。“于一根本处”即“于一师处”。没有与此相等的罪过:在可忏悔的罪过中,没有比此更粗重的罪过。因此,此因罪过的粗重而被称为“偷兰遮”。显示巴利原文
Yathā dukkhā, kucchitā vā gati dugatīti vattabbe ‘‘duggatī’’ti vuttaṃ, yathā ca kaṭukaṃ phalametassāti kaṭukaphalanti vattabbe ‘‘kaṭukapphala’’nti vuttaṃ, evamidhāpi thūlattā accayattā ca thūlaccayanti vattabbe ‘‘thullaccaya’’nti vuttanti dassetuṃ ‘‘samparāye ca duggatī’’tiādimāha. Saṃyoge pana kate saṃyogaparassa rassattaṃ siddhamevāti manasi katvā ‘‘saṃyogabhāvo veditabbo’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Ekassa mūleti ekassa santike. Accayo tena samo natthīti desanāgāmīsu accayesu tena samo thūlo accayo natthi. Tenetaṃ iti vuccatīti thūlattā accayassa etaṃ thullaccayanti vuccatīti attho.
他们说:“凡以盗心分别作触摸、摇动之加行者,于一切所触,触摸时皆犯恶作,摇动时皆犯偷兰遮;然而,若以一次加行夺取,举离原处时唯犯波罗夷,不犯恶作及偷兰遮。”至于“若未作俱加行”一句,三本《甘提帕达》皆说:“前加行所犯之罪不止息,故作俱加行后,若生惭耻法,亦应忏悔前加行所犯诸罪。”然注释之语则显示:若作俱加行,前加行所犯诸罪亦得止息;若不尔,“若未作俱加行”这一简别便成无义。又,前文所言“若是,当该处所生草木藤蔓等被砍断时,惭耻法生起,防护生起,则忏悔砍断缘之恶作而得脱”,亦显示若作俱加行,前加行诸罪止息,因其唯说忏悔俱加行中砍断缘所犯之恶作。而“从俱加行开始”一句,则示达到俱加行者,此前所犯前加行诸罪亦止息。由此可知此义:“未达俱加行之前,前所犯诸罪不止息;从达俱加行时起,那些罪亦止息。”故应善加审察,取更合理之说。显示巴利原文
‘‘Sabbatthāpi āmasane dukkaṭaṃ phandāpane thullaccayañca visuṃ visuṃ theyyacittena āmasanaphandāpanapayogaṃ karontasseva hoti, ekapayogena gaṇhantassa pana uddhāre pārājikameva, na dukkaṭathullaccayānī’’ti vadanti. Sahapayogaṃ pana akatvāti ettha ‘‘pubbapayoge āpannāpattīnaṃ paṭippassaddhiyā abhāvato sahapayogaṃ katvāpi lajjidhammaṃ okkantena pubbapayoge āpannāpattiyo desetabbā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ pana kate sahapayoge pubbapayoge āpannāpattīnampi paṭippassaddhiṃ dīpeti, aññathā ‘‘sahapayogaṃ pana akatvā’’ti idaṃ visesanameva niratthakaṃ siyā. Yañca heṭṭhā vuttaṃ ‘‘sace panassa tatthajātake tiṇarukkhalatādimhi chinnepi lajjidhammo okkamati, saṃvaro uppajjati, chedanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ desetvā muccatī’’ti, tampi sahapayoge kate pubbapayoge āpannāpattīnaṃ paṭippassaddhimeva dīpeti sahapayoge chedanapaccayā āpannadukkaṭasseva desanāya vuttattā. Sahapayogato paṭṭhāyevāti ca idaṃ sahapayogaṃ pattassa tato pubbe āpannānaṃ pubbapayogāpattīnampi paṭippassaddhiṃ dīpeti. Tena hi ayamattho viññāyati ‘‘yāva sahapayogaṃ na pāpuṇāti, tāva pubbe āpannāpattīnaṃ paṭippassaddhi na hoti, sahapayogaṃ pattakālato pana paṭṭhāya tāsampi paṭippassaddhi hotī’’ti, tasmā suṭṭhu upaparikkhitvā yuttataraṃ gahetabbaṃ.
即使犯有许多罪,唯发露一种便得解脱——此处意趣如下:若于挖掘、扒开、抬起等行中,以每十次为一聚而犯诸罪,则于那些罪中,唯发露抬起时之十罪便得解脱,因达到不同类行为时,先前各各罪过即止息故。然依种类而言,对于由同类行为所犯之罪,则总为一聚,说为“唯发露一种便得解脱”。由此《库伦达注》之文,正为成立最初《大注》所说先前罪过之止息,并非两部注释于义有异。于此,复有人作余释:“纵于同类行为中,以先前各次挖掘为缘所犯之罪,至后来各次挖掘时即止息——以此意趣,《库伦达注》云:‘于挖土等行中,当可羞耻法生起时,虽有多罪,唯发露一种便得解脱。’”他们亦言:“若如此,则不当言‘虽有多罪’;既已言之,故正是通过达至不同类行为而成立先前罪过止息,从而于有多罪时唯发露一种便得解脱,于此处别示一种发露次第。”这些之意趣为:恰如此处,先前罪过之止息依诸注释师之量而采纳。显示巴利原文
Bahukāpi āpattiyo hontu, ekameva desetvā muccatīti etthāyamadhippāyo – sace khaṇanaviyūhanuddharaṇesu dasa dasa katvā āpattiyo āpannā, tāsu uddharaṇe dasa āpattiyo desetvā muccati visabhāgakiriyaṃ patvā purimāpurimāpattīnaṃ paṭippassaddhattāti. Jātivasena pana samānakiriyāya āpannāpattiyo ekattena gahetvā ‘‘ekameva desetvā’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmā imināpi kurundaṭṭhakathāvacanena paṭhamaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttapurimāpattipaṭippassaddhimeva samatthayati, na pana ubhinnaṃ aṭṭhakathānaṃ atthato nānākaraṇaṃ atthi. Aparampettha pakāraṃ vaṇṇayanti ‘‘samānakiriyāsupi purimapurimakhaṇanapaccayā āpannāpattiyo pacchimapacchimakhaṇanaṃ patvā paṭippassambhantīti iminā adhippāyena ‘paṃsukhaṇanādīsu ca lajjidhamme uppanne bahukāpi āpattiyo hontu, ekameva desetvā muccatīti kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutta’’’nti. ‘‘Evañca sati ‘bahukāpi āpattiyo hontū’ti na vattabbaṃ bhaveyya, vuttañca, tasmā visabhāgakiriyameva patvā purimāpattīnaṃ paṭippassaddhiṃ icchanteneva bahukāsupi āpattīsu ekameva desetvā muccatīti imasmiṃ ṭhāne visuṃyeveko desanākkamo dassito’’tipi vadanti. Ayametesaṃ adhippāyo – yathā idha purimāpattīnaṃ paṭippassaddhi aṭṭhakathācariyappamāṇena gahitā, evaṃ bahukāsupi āpattīsu ekameva desetvā muccatīti idampi idha aṭṭhakathācariyappamāṇatoyeva veditabbaṃ. Yathā ca pāḷiyaṃ pācittiyaṭṭhānepi dukkaṭameva hotīti idha āveṇikaṃ katvā āpattiviseso dassito, evaṃ purimāpattīnaṃ paṭippassaddhiviseso ca desanāviseso ca aṭṭhakathācariyehi dassitoti.
“向下沉入”,谓以“待物主来已、不见而去时我再取”之盗心,向下沉入地中。“以底部”,谓以缸之下底。如是,于安放一处之缸,当知以六种方式令其离位,此为文句连接。“取下边缘”,若犯波罗夷——谓不令缸成虚空之物,而摩擦取下,当从断口处一出便取时,即犯波罗夷。“来回移动”,谓同样于摩擦中,不令缸成虚空之物而移动。显示巴利原文
Heṭṭhato osīdentoti ‘‘sāmikesu āgantvā apassitvā gatesu gaṇhissāmī’’ti theyyacittena heṭṭhābhūmiyaṃ osīdento. Bundenāti kumbhiyā heṭṭhimatalena. Evaṃ ekaṭṭhāne ṭhitāya kumbhiyā ṭhānācāvanaṃ chahi ākārehi veditabbanti sambandho. Valayaṃ nīharati, pārājikanti ākāsagataṃ akatvā ghaṃsitvā nīharantassa chinnakoṭito nīhaṭamatte pārājikaṃ. Ito cito ca sāretīti ghaṃsantoyeva ākāsagataṃ akatvā sāreti.
“刚一断坏即波罗夷”,意谓若必然掉落,则在断坏的当下便犯波罗夷。“分际”,是指所说的“五摩沙迦或超过五摩沙迦”的计数分际。“扒开”,是指以手将“我要拿取下方之物”分成两半。“半缸”,是指半满的缸。然而,依注释师们的权威,难道在《简略注》等中所述也不应采纳吗?因此他说:“在律藏的裁决到来时,应当立足于重要之处。”“律法性”,是指尊重律藏者们的法性。因为尊重律藏者们在律藏的裁决到来时,会立足于重要之处。为显明尊重律藏的意义,此处正是以“律”一词指代尊重律藏者本身;或者,这也是律藏的法性,因为他们所尊重恭敬之处是以律藏为范围的。显示巴利原文
Chinnamattepārājikanti avassaṃ ce patati, chinnamatte pārājikaṃ. Paricchedoti ‘‘pañcamāsakaṃ vā atirekapañcamāsakaṃ vā’’ti vuttagaṇanaparicchedo. Apabyūhantoti ‘‘heṭṭhā ṭhitaṃ gaṇhissāmī’’ti hatthena dvidhā karonto. Upaḍḍhakumbhiyanti upaḍḍhapuṇṇāya kumbhiyā. Nanu ca aṭṭhakathācariyappamāṇena saṅkhepaṭṭhakathādīsu vuttampi kasmā na gahetabbanti āha – ‘‘vinayavinicchaye hi āgate garuke ṭhātabba’’nti. Vinayadhammatāti vinayagarukānaṃ dhammatā. Vinayagarukā hi vinayavinicchaye āgate garuke tiṭṭhanti. Vinayagarukatābyāpanatthañhi vinayagarukoyevettha vinaya-saddena vutto, vinayassa vā esā dhammatā tesaṃ garugāravaṭṭhānassa vinayavisayattā.
现在,为说明《简略注》等中所说也与巴利圣典不符,他说“再者”等。“容器”,指钵等容器。对不装满钵等而取者,即使尚未提起,也已容器口边缘为分际;对装满后取者,则在提起时成立,因此他说“以容器口边缘为分际,或以提起为分际”。然而,当油缸等中的油等因数量少而无法将容器沉入后取时,则唯以容器口边缘为分际。“黏稠的”,指凝固的。“适于拉近拉远的”:此处,向自己面前拉是“拉近”,向对面拉是“拉远”。“取出”,指从自己的容器中取出。“刚一从手中脱离即波罗夷”,是因为以盗心实施了取他人之物的行为。在《大注》中确实说过:“即使将堤坝弄弱,堵塞干涸池塘的出水口或排水管,或在其他通行的道路上设置障碍,或将干涸的水渠弄直,后来天下雨时,水来后冲破了堤坝,在一切情况下都应赔偿物品。”因此说:“然而,这与就在那干涸池塘处将干涸水渠弄直的裁决相矛盾。”显示巴利原文
Idāni saṅkhepaṭṭhakathādīsu vuttaṃ pāḷiyāpi na sametīti dassento āha ‘‘apicā’’tiādi. Bhājananti pattādibhājanaṃ. Pattādiṃ apūretvā gaṇhantassa anuddhaṭepi mukhavaṭṭiparicchedo hoti, pūretvā gaṇhantassa pana uddharaṇakāle hotīti āha ‘‘mukhavaṭṭiparicchedena vā uddhārena vā’’ti. Yadā pana telakumbhīādīsu telādīnaṃ abahubhāvato bhājanaṃ nimujjāpetvā gaṇhituṃ na sakkā hoti, tadā mukhavaṭṭiparicchedeneva hoti. Cikkananti thaddhaṃ. Ākaḍḍhanavikaḍḍhanayogganti ettha abhimukhaṃ kaḍḍhanaṃ ākaḍḍhanaṃ, parato kaḍḍhanaṃ vikaḍḍhanaṃ. Paṭinīharitunti attano bhājanato paṭinīharituṃ. Hatthato muttamatte pārājikanti theyyacittena parasantakaggahaṇapayogassa katattā. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyameva ‘‘sacepi mariyādaṃ dubbalaṃ katvā sukkhataḷākassa udakanibbahanaṭṭhānaṃ udakaniddhamanatumbaṃ vā pidahati, aññato ca gamanamagge vā pāḷiṃ bandhati, sukkhamātikaṃ vā ujuṃ karoti, pacchā deve vuṭṭhe udakaṃ āgantvā mariyādaṃ bhindati, sabbattha bhaṇḍadeyya’’nti vuttattā ‘‘taṃ pana tattheva sukkhataḷāke sukkhamātikāya ujukaraṇavinicchayena virujjhatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
“不与取相”,指二十五种不与取中的任何一种不与取相,或即指使物离位的努力本身。“在提起时”,指从缸所接触处,即使提起如发尖那么一点。“合理的”,是由于使物离位的努力存在,故是合理的。“为了保管”,以此显示其心清净。“将会阻止”,指将会制止。“依前述方式即成波罗夷”,指刚一从手中脱离即波罗夷。“他以清净心提起”,是指在油倒入缸中之前,先以清净心放置,后又以清净心提起。“不是不与取”,是因为没有以盗心实施偷盗的努力。然而,由于是属于自己的容器,所以说“不是咽喉”,这只是表明无罪而已,并非如此审察,这是其意趣。或者,“只是说无罪而已”——以此也因那里没有“咽喉”一词,而确立了先前《大注》中所说的“不是咽喉”的主张,后来所显示的《库伦达注》的说法也证实了《大注》的主张。“自己的物品”,是指在倒油之前,先以清净心放在自己缸中的已饮用的油,是自己的资具。“混淆之处”,指依罪过裁决而成为混淆之处。显示巴利原文
Avahāralakkhaṇanti pañcavīsatiyā avahāresu ekampi avahāralakkhaṇaṃ, ṭhānācāvanapayogo eva vā. Uddhāreti kumbhiyā phuṭṭhaṭṭhānato kesaggamattepi uddhaṭe. Yuttanti ṭhānācāvanapayogasabbhāvato yuttaṃ. Saṅgopanatthāyāti iminā suddhacittataṃ dasseti. Palibujjhissatīti nivāressati. Vuttanayeneva pārājikanti hatthato muttamatteyeva pārājikaṃ. Suddhacittovauddharatīti kumbhiyaṃ telassa ākiraṇato puretarameva suddhacitto nikkhipitvā pacchā suddhacittova uddharati. Neva avahāroti theyyacittena avaharaṇapayogassa akatattā. Attano bhājanattā pana ‘‘na gīvā’’ti vuttaṃ, anāpattimattameva vuttaṃ, na pana evaṃ vicāritanti adhippāyo. Atha vā anāpattimattameva vuttanti imināpi tattha ‘‘gīvā’’ti vacanābhāvato ‘‘na gīvā’’ti pubbe vuttamahāaṭṭhakathāvādameva patiṭṭhāpeti, pacchā dassitena kurundivādenapi mahāaṭṭhakathāvādova samatthito. Attano bhaṇḍanti telākiraṇato puretarameva attano kumbhiyaṃ suddhacittena ṭhapitaṃ pītatelaṃ attano parikkhāraṃ. Sammohaṭṭhānanti āpattivinicchayavasena sammohaṭṭhānaṃ.
所谓“外露”,是指从那时起,油已不在原位且向下倾覆,故称外露。若从内侧开始在容器上穿孔,油流出后所至之处,仅算作容器之数,因此说:“若从外侧边缘流至一足价之物,则为波罗夷。”所谓“无论从何处所作”,指从外侧边缘或内侧开始所作。“中间留出穿孔”,是指在中间留出少许陶片,之后再将其切断而作穿孔。由于《普端严注》中说:“在破坏界限时,若站在内侧面向外侧切断,应按外侧边缘处理;若站在外侧面向内侧切断,应按内侧边缘处理;若内外都切断后,在中间留出部分再将其切断,则按中间处理。”因此说“这与破坏池塘界限等同”。于此,下述之理为合理:从内侧与外侧开始穿孔的,应按中间处理。然而,从内侧开始所作的,应按外侧边缘处理;从外侧开始所作的,应按内侧边缘处理——这三种方式在此不确定的穿孔中皆为合理。由于在水中未实施加行,故说“因无移动位置的加行”。显示巴利原文
Bahigataṃ nāma hotīti tato paṭṭhāya telassa aṭṭhānabhāvato adhomukhabhāvato ca bahigataṃ nāma hoti. Anto paṭṭhāya chidde kariyamāne telassa nikkhamitvā gatagataṭṭhānaṃ bhājanasaṅkhyameva gacchatīti āha – ‘‘bāhirantato pādagghanake gaḷite pārājika’’nti. Yathā tathā vā katassāti bāhirantato abbhantarato vā paṭṭhāya katassa. Majjhe ṭhapetvā katachiddeti majjhe thokaṃ kapālaṃ ṭhapetvā pacchā taṃ chindantena katachidde. ‘‘Mariyādacchedane anto ṭhatvā bahimukho chindanto bahi antena kāretabbo, bahi ṭhatvā antomukho chindanto anto antena kāretabbo, anto ca bahi ca chinditvā majjhe ṭhapetvā taṃ chindanto majjhena kāretabbo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.108) vuttattā ‘‘taḷākassa ca mariyādabhedena sametī’’ti vuttaṃ. Idamettha yuttanti anto ca bahi ca paṭṭhāya katachidde majjhena kāretabbo. Anto paṭṭhāya kate pana bāhirantena, bahi paṭṭhāya kate abbhantarena kāretabboti ayaṃ tippakāropi ettha vemaṭṭhachidde yutto. Udake katapayogassa abhāvato ‘‘ṭhānācāvanapayogassa abhāvā’’ti vuttaṃ.
首先,《大注疏》中说:对于凝固者(食物)是咀嚼,对于其余者(液体)是饮用,对于酥油等则是受用,因此说“使其成为不可食或不可饮”。如何使其如此呢?说“放入粪便或尿液”等。为何此处说为恶作?答:“由于无位置移动,故为恶作。”前两者,即破坏与丢弃。为何不相合?说:“因为那……”等。使满罐出现裂纹,即令装满的罐出现裂纹。使水渠变直,即令充满水的水渠变直。性质相同,即破坏与使满罐出现裂纹,丢弃与使水渠变直,由于存在位置移动的加行,故具有同一性质。而后两者,即焚烧与使其不可受用。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ tāva vuttanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Patthinnassa khādanaṃ itarassa pānañca sappiādīnaṃ paribhogoti āha – ‘‘akhāditabbaṃ vā apātabbaṃ vā karotī’’ti. Kathaṃ pana tathā karotīti āha ‘‘uccāraṃ vā passāvaṃ vā’’tiādi. Kasmā panettha dukkaṭaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘ṭhānācāvanassa natthitāya dukkaṭa’’nti. Purimadvayanti bhedanaṃ chaḍḍanañca. Kasmā na sametīti āha ‘‘tañhī’’tiādi. Kumbhijajjarakaraṇenāti puṇṇakumbhiyā jajjarakaraṇena. Mātikāujaukaraṇenāti udakapuṇṇāya mātikāya ujukaraṇena. Ekalakkhaṇanti bhedanaṃ kumbhijajjarakaraṇena chaḍḍanaṃ mātikāya ujukaraṇena saddhiṃ ekasabhāvaṃ ṭhānācāvanapayogasabbhāvato. Pacchimaṃ pana dvayanti jhāpanaṃ aparibhogakaraṇañca.
就此,有些阿阇梨在《大注疏》所说之处,作出如此判断:前两者的判断可依前文所述而了知,故未加说明;而针对后两者,由于无位置移动,故说为恶作,这是其意旨。“以盗心”,即出于为自己或为他人而作的欲所生起的盗心。“以欲毁坏”,即如同切断手足等,纯粹出于毁坏之欲。前两者如何?以何意旨而未加说明?说:“然而前两者……波罗夷。”在那里,依所述方法,破坏者是指用棍棒击打而破坏者,丢弃者是指倒入水或沙而使其溢出者,这是其义。若认为“不合理”,是由于在巴利圣典中前两句也仅说为恶作,因此“前两者……波罗夷,这是不合理的”——如果你们这样认为,这是其义。在遮止了“并非不合理”的过失后,说出了其中的理由:“应取其他含义。”那么,在此应如何取其义呢?说:“因为在巴利圣典中……”等。由于在欲毁坏的一方,依前文所述方法,其义并不相违,故说“在盗心一方”。从“如此作出判断”开始,所有所述都只是一家之言,故以总结的方式说“有些人如此说”。显示巴利原文
Ettha evaṃ vinicchayaṃ vadantīti ettha mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutte eke ācariyā evaṃ vinicchayaṃ vadanti. Pacchimadvayaṃ sandhāya vuttanti ettha purimadvaye vinicchayo heṭṭhā vuttānusārena sakkā viññātunti tattha kiñci avatvā pacchimadvayaṃ sandhāya ṭhānācāvanassa natthitāya dukkaṭanti idaṃ vuttanti adhippāyo. Theyyacittenāti attano vā parassa vā kātukāmatāvasena uppannatheyyacittena. Vināsetukāmatāyāti hatthapādādiṃ chindanto viya kevalaṃ vināsetukāmatāya. Purimadvaye kiṃ hoti, kiṃ adhippāyena na kiñci vuttanti āha – ‘‘purimadvaye pana…pe… pārājika’’nti. Tattha vuttanayena bhindantassa vā chaḍḍentassa vāti muggarena pothetvā bhindantassa udakaṃ vā vālikaṃ vā ākiritvā uttarāpentassāti attho. Ayuttanti ceti pāḷiyaṃ purimapadadvayepi dukkaṭasseva vuttattā ‘‘purimadvaye…pe… pārājikanti idaṃ ayutta’’nti yadi tumhākaṃ siyāti attho. Nāti ayuttabhāvappasaṅgaṃ nisedhetvā tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘aññathā gahetabbatthato’’ti. Kathaṃ panettha attho gahetabboti āha ‘‘pāḷiyaṃ hī’’tiādi. Nāsetukāmatāpakkhe heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva atthassa avirujjhanato ‘‘theyyacittapakkhe’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ vinicchayaṃ vadantī’’ti ito paṭṭhāya vuttassa sabbassapi ekasseva vacanattā ‘‘evameke vadantī’’ti nigamanavasena vuttaṃ.
在依上述方式领会圣典文义时,由于《大注疏》中对四种情况作了通说,而针对后两者所说明的言辞中并无特别区分;又由于在圣典所说的四种情形里,“丢弃或使其不可受用”这些措辞也有缺乏区别的过失,因此作者希望另以不同方式将圣典与注疏对照以显明其义,故说:“然而,此处的要义是……”等。《律藏实例》中说:“以盗心焚烧了僧团堆集的草”,正如《律藏实例》中的烧草者那样,是以这种方式表示“不欲移动位置者”——在此也应视为“以盗心不欲移动位置者”,这先前已经说过。即便是不欲丢弃者,在此也应联系“以盗心”来理解。因为这是针对盗心方面而说,关于欲毁坏方面将在后文说明。因此说:“然而在欲毁坏方面……”等。以另一种方式也是合理的:即由于没有盗心,即使对于欲移动位置者,恶作也是成立的,这便是所说之义。显示巴利原文
Idāni yathāvuttavasena pāḷiyā atthe gayhamāne mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ catunnampi sāmaññato vuttassa pacchimadvayaṃ sandhāya vuttanti vacane visesābhāvato pāḷiyaṃ vuttesu catūsu padesu ‘‘chaḍḍeti vā aparibhogaṃ vā karotī’’ti imesaṃ padānaṃ visesābhāvappasaṅgato ca sayaṃ aññathā pāḷiṃ aṭṭhakathañca saṃsanditvā atthaṃ dassetukāmo ‘‘ayaṃ panettha sāro’’tiādimāha. Vinītavatthumhi ‘‘saṅghassa puñjakitaṃ tiṇaṃ theyyacitto jhāpesī’’si (pārā. 156) vuttattā vinītavatthumhi tiṇajjhāpako viyāti imināva ṭhānā acāvetukāmovāti etthāpi theyyacittena ṭhānā acāvetukāmoti idaṃ vuttameva hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Achaḍḍetukāmoyevāti etthāpi theyyacittenāti sambandhitabbaṃ. Idañhi theyyacittapakkhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ nāsetukāmatāpakkhassa vakkhamānattā. Tenevāha ‘‘nāsetukāmatāpakkhe panā’’tiādi. Itarathāpi yujjatīti theyyacittābhāvā ṭhānā cāvetukāmassapi dukkaṭaṃ yujjatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
《空中物注疏复注》显示巴利原文
Ākāsaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
96 在《空中物注疏》中,“以口尖”即用嘴尖。“以羽束尖”即用尾羽束的尖端。“伸展”指为了抓取而伸出。“或不抓取”指用土块等击打后,以引导的方式而不抓取。虽然此处是在决断空中物,但为了避免对因缘相关而成为空中物、处于空中等状态产生迷惑,故说:“在哪个肢体上隐藏……”等。“在界内宅基”指在有围墙的宅地之内。“在村内”指在有围墙的村庄之内。然而,在无围墙的宅基或村庄中,所站立之处便是其位置。“使其面向森林”即使其朝向森林。“守护”指由于那种加行,使得该物未能去往所欲之处,故称为守护。针对在地上行走者,说:“或在第二步时”。“从村庄出离者”即从有围墙的村庄出离者。“迦宾阇罗”是一种鸟的名称。显示巴利原文
96. Ākāsaṭṭhakathāyaṃ mukhatuṇḍakenāti mukhaggena. Kalāpaggenāti piñchakalāpassa aggena. Pasāretīti gahaṇatthaṃ pasāreti. Aggahetvā vāti leḍḍuādīhi paharitvā nayanavasena aggahetvā vā. Ākāsaṭṭhavinicchaye vuccamānepi tappasaṅgena ākāsaṭṭhassa vehāsaṭṭhādibhāvamupagatepi asammohatthaṃ ‘‘yasmiṃ aṅge nilīyatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Antovatthumhīti parikkhittavatthussa anto. Antogāmeti parikkhittassa gāmassa anto. Aparikkhitte pana vatthumhi, gāme vā ṭhitaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ. Aṭavimukhaṃ karotīti araññābhimukhaṃ karoti. Rakkhatīti tena payogena tassa icchitaṭṭhānaṃ agatattā rakkhati. Bhūmiyā gacchantaṃ sandhāya ‘‘dutiyapadavāre vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Gāmato nikkhantassāti parikkhittagāmato nikkhantassa. Kapiñjaro nāma ekā pakkhijāti.
《空中住物注疏复注》显示巴利原文
Vehāsaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
97 而在《空中注释》里,关于拉扯挂在衣绳上的衣,意思是:若拉扯超出前述范围,即使仅拉扯了一两指宽,也可能犯波罗夷,因此说“仅拉扯一两指宽便犯波罗夷”。这是针对那种不太大的衣绳竿而说的;若是大的衣绳竿,则须拉扯超过此量才犯。以绳系缚,是指用绳的一端系住衣,另一端系在衣绳上所放置的衣。由于绳一松开,衣便自然掉落,故说“绳松开时即波罗夷”。显示巴利原文
97. Vehāsaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana cīvaravaṃse ṭhapitassa cīvarassa ākaḍḍhane yathāvuttappadesātikkamo ekadvaṅgulamattākaḍḍhanena siyāti adhippāyena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekadvaṅgulamattākaḍḍhaneneva pārājika’’nti. Idañca tādisaṃ nātimahantaṃ cīvaravaṃsadaṇḍakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, mahante pana tato adhikamattākaḍḍhaneneva siyā. Rajjukena bandhitvāti ekāya rajjukoṭiyā cīvaraṃ bandhitvā aparāya koṭiyā cīvaravaṃsaṃ bandhitvā ṭhapitacīvaraṃ. Muttamatte aṭṭhatvā patanakasabhāvattā ‘‘mutte pārājika’’nti vuttaṃ.
“每一所触之处若超过即波罗夷”,这是针对不使衣触墙而放置的情况说的。“依墙而置”,是指在依次排列的象牙钉等处挂衣,并使衣触墙而放置。“置于叶间而置”,是指由他人放置的情况而言。显示巴利原文
Ekamekassa phuṭṭhokāsamatte atikkante pārājikanti bhittiṃ aphusāpetvā ṭhapitattā vuttaṃ. Bhittiṃ nissāya ṭhapitanti paṭipāṭiyā ṭhapitesu nāgadantādīsuyeva āropetvā bhittiṃ phusāpetvā ṭhapitaṃ. Paṇṇantaraṃ āropetvā ṭhapitāti aññehi ṭhapitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
《水注释》的解释显示巴利原文
Udakaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
98 在《水注释》中,因为放置在流动的水中不会停住,所以说到“在不流动的水中”。“无犯”是针对手栏、足栏等而言,没有恶作罪。“拉拽”是指从下方移开。“在莲花等中”的“等”字,包含了红莲、白莲等。红莲是红色的莲花,白莲是白色的莲花。或者,红莲是白色的莲花,白莲是红色的莲花。又或者,无论红色还是白色,百瓣的是莲花,不足百瓣的是白莲。所谓“构成犯波罗夷的物体”,是指足以构成波罗夷罪的物体。当它被切断时即波罗夷,这是针对从水中高高长出、离开水面的部分被切断而说的。所谓构成犯波罗夷的物体,这朵花即足以构成波罗夷罪。以十朵花扎成的束称为手束,扎成大束而绑缚的称为担束。在绳上铺草,此处他们说:“将两根绳放在水面上,在它们上面横着铺草,在草上或绑或不绑,横着放花,然后将下方的两根绳提起,放在花的顶部。”显示巴利原文
98. Udakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ sandamānaudake nikkhittaṃ na tiṭṭhatīti āha ‘‘asandanake udake’’ti. Anāpattīti hatthavārapadavāresu dukkaṭāpattiyā abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kaḍḍhatīti heṭṭhato osāreti. Uppalādīsūti ādi-saddena padumapuṇḍarīkādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Rattaṃ padumaṃ, setaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ. Setaṃ vā padumaṃ, rattaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ. Atha vā rattaṃ vā hotu setaṃ vā satapattaṃ padumaṃ, ūnasatapattaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ. Vatthu pūratīti pārājikavatthu pahoti. Tasmiṃ chinnamatte pārājikanti udakato accuggatassa udakavinimuttaṭṭhānato chedanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yaṃ vatthuṃ pūretīti yaṃ pupphaṃ pārājikavatthuṃ pūreti. Dasahi pupphehi katakalāpo hatthako, mahantaṃ kalāpaṃ katvā baddhaṃ bhārabaddhaṃ. Rajjukesu tiṇāni santharitvāti ettha ‘‘dve rajjukāni udakapiṭṭhe ṭhapetvā tesaṃ upari tiriyato tiṇāni santharitvā tesaṃ upari bandhitvā vā abandhitvā vā tiriyatoyeva pupphāni ṭhapetvā heṭṭhato gatāni dve rajjukāni ukkhipitvā pupphamatthake ṭhapentī’’ti vadanti.
“即使移动发端之量,从原放置处移开”,是指从最远所触之处,向近处移动发端之量。“全部水”是指以杖所触范围内的全部水。“水并非处所”,是因为自己所作之处并非真正的处所。此中两者:一者即“若不解除系缚……波罗夷”,二者即“最初的系缚……处所限定”。“在莲丛中”是指在莲花丛中。“被拔起”是指被他人为了自己的利益而拔起。显示巴利原文
Kesaggamattampi yathāṭhitaṭṭhānato cāvetīti pārimantena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ, orimantena kesaggamattaṃ cāveti. Sakalamudakanti daṇḍena phuṭṭhokāsagataṃ sakalamudakaṃ. Na udakaṃ ṭhānanti attanā kataṭṭhānassa aṭṭhānattā. Idaṃ ubhayanti ettha ‘‘bandhanaṃ amocetvā…pe… pārājika’’nti idamevekaṃ, ‘‘paṭhamaṃ bandhanaṃ…pe… ṭhānaparicchedo’’ti idaṃ dutiyaṃ. Paduminiyanti padumagacche. Uppāṭitāyāti parehi attano atthāya uppāṭitāya.
“绑缚的”,指扎成束而绑缚。“藕”,指根茎。“叶或花”,这是针对进入泥中而住立的情形而说。“全部水”,指池等中所包含的全部水。“排水管”,指池水流出的通道。“引水渠”,指大沟渠。“非不与取”,这里指与前面情况不相似,因此说:“为何……因为那里有这样的规约”。“无不与取”,则是因为在一切共有、无执受之处而取。引入小渠,指引入小水渠。“死后……而住立”,此处他们说:“因为死鱼才属于他们,取活鱼者则无不与取。”显示巴利原文
Baddhaṃ kalāpabaddhaṃ. Muḷālanti kandaṃ. Pattaṃ vā pupphaṃ vāti idaṃ kaddamassa anto pavisitvā ṭhitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sakalamudakanti vāpiādīsu pariyāpannaṃ sakalamudakaṃ. Niddhamanatumbanti vāpiyā udakassa nikkhamanamaggaṃ. Udakavāhakanti mahāmātikaṃ. Na avahāroti idaṃ pubbasadisaṃ na hotīti āha – ‘‘kasmā…pe… evarūpā hi tattha katikā’’ti. Avahāro natthīti sabbasādhāraṇe apariggahaṭṭhāne gahitattā. Mātikaṃ āropetvāti khuddakamātikaṃ āropetvā. Maritvā…pe… tiṭṭhantīti ettha ‘‘matamacchānaṃyeva tesaṃ santakattā amate gaṇhantassa natthi avahāro’’ti vadanti.
《船注释》的解释显示巴利原文
Nāvaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
99 然而,在《船注释》中,“若系缚一解开,船不从原处移动”,以此遮止在急流中系缚的船。“此时为恶作”,是指“解开系缚时,犯恶作罪”,这是针对如此解开者所制定的恶作罪而说。“也有偷兰遮和波罗夷”,此处应知:若不先使船从原处移动而解开,则犯偷兰遮;若先使船从原处移动而后解开,则犯波罗夷。显示巴利原文
99. Nāvaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana yā bandhanā muttamatte ṭhānā na cavatīti iminā caṇḍasote baddhanāvaṃ paṭikkhipati. Tāva dukkaṭanti ‘‘bandhanaṃ moceti, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti evaṃ mocentassa paññattaṃ dukkaṭaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Thullaccayampi pārājikampi hotīti ettha paṭhamaṃ ṭhānā acāvetvā mutte thullaccayaṃ, paṭhamaṃ ṭhānā cāvetvā mutte pārājikanti veditabbaṃ.
针对“如被绳套绑住的猪”等所说,而说“那里的道理如前已说”。“失坏的船”,是指因狂风等遭到破坏,沉入水中,未至水底地面而停在水中间的情况。因此说:“若使人向下沉没……所触之船底空间,超过口边时即波罗夷”。“使人沉没”,是指使人下沉。“超过时”,是指超过所触空间时。此理亦然,即显示“一解开即波罗夷”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Pāse baddhasūkaro viyā’’tiādinā vuttaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘tattha yutti pubbe vuttā evā’’ti. Vippanaṭṭhā nāvāti visamavātādīhi vināsaṃ patvā udake nimujjitvā heṭṭhā bhūmitalaṃ appatvā majjhe ṭhitaṃ sandhāya vadati. Teneva ‘‘adho vā opilāpentassa…pe… nāvātalena phuṭṭhokāsaṃ mukhavaṭṭiṃ atikkantamatte pārājika’’nti vuttaṃ. Opilāpentassāti osīdāpentassa. Atikkantamatteti phuṭṭhokāsaṃ atikkantamatte. Eseva nayoti muttamatte pārājikanti dasseti.
由于适合拖船的大绳很长,从绳端开始,全部都说为“处”。显示巴利原文
Nāvākaḍḍhanayoggamahāyottatāya yottakoṭito paṭṭhāya sakalampi ‘‘ṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
即便无风,由于放置得如同能招风一般,故说“使招风”。而“强风来”一语,则显示此运作是在无风时所作。因此说“此人无不与取”。然而,若在有风时所作,则是使船从原处移动的运作,如同在干渠中使船直行一般,确实有不与取,应如此见。“并非使船从原处移动的运作”,是因为如同在干渠中使船直行一样,这是无风时所作的运作。“但有赔偿物”,是指对船主有物可赔。显示巴利原文
Asatipi vāte yathā vātaṃ gaṇhāti, tathā ṭhapitattā ‘‘vātaṃ gaṇhāpetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Balavā ca vāto āgammāti iminā asati vāte ayaṃ payogo katoti dasseti. Teneva ‘‘puggalassa natthi avahāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Sati pana vāte kato payogo ṭhānācāvanapayogoyevāti mātikāujukaraṇe viya attheva avahāroti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ṭhānācāvanapayogo na hotīti sukkhamātikāujukaraṇe viya asati vāte katapayogattā. Bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hotīti nāvāsāmikassa bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ hoti.
《车注释》的解释显示巴利原文
Yānaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
100 在《车乘义注》中,“与两头牛结合者”指用两头牛所系缚者。“未结合者”指未被牛系缚者。“已作适合者”指如以两部分在下方安立那样所作成者。“三处或四处”指:若未作适合者,依支撑而有三个接触处;若已作适合者,则有四个接触处。同样,置于地面者有三个接触处,这是关联。所谓“彼”,指置于木板或木头上方者,以及置于地面者。“以两轴端”指以两轴之末端。“置于两木之上方者”指以两轴端悬吊而置于两木之上、车棚之中者。“下表面”指车辕触地而立的下部。其余与船中所说相似——以此指示这样的理趣:“然而,若在如此行进之时,阻断其自然行进而将其带往其他方向,则为波罗夷。若自己到达某个村庄后,不让它离开该处便卖掉而离去,则无‘不与取’,但应赔偿物品。”显示巴利原文
100. Yānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ dukayuttassāti dvīhi goṇehi yuttassa. Ayuttakanti goṇehi ayuttaṃ. Kappakatāti yathā dvīhi bhāgehi heṭṭhā patiṭṭhāti, evaṃ katā. Tīṇi vā cattāri vā ṭhānānīti akappakatāya upatthambhaniyā vasena tīṇi ṭhānāni, kappakatāya vasena cattāri ṭhānānīti. Tathā pathaviyaṃ ṭhapitassa tīṇi ṭhānānīti sambandho. Tanti phalakassa vā dārukassa vā upari ṭhapitaṃ pathaviyaṃ ṭhapitañca. Dvīhi akkhasīsehīti dvīhi akkhakoṭīhi. Dārūnaṃ upari ṭhapitassāti dvinnaṃ dārūnaṃ upari dvīhi akkhakoṭīhi olambetvā sakaṭasālāyaṃ ṭhapitassa. Heṭṭhimatalassāti sakaṭabāhāya bhūmiṃ phusitvā ṭhitassa heṭṭhimabhāgassa. Sesaṃ nāvāyaṃ vuttasadisanti iminā ‘‘yadi pana taṃ evaṃ gacchantaṃ pakatigamanaṃ upacchinditvā aññaṃ disābhāgaṃ neti, pārājikaṃ. Sayameva yaṃ kañci gāmaṃ sampattaṃ ṭhānā acāventova vikkiṇitvā gacchati, nevatthi avahāro, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hotī’’ti imaṃ nayaṃ atidissati.
负担义注的解说显示巴利原文
Bhāraṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
101 在《负担义注》中,“前颈环的颈窝”指前颈环上方的颈窝。“胸部界限中间”指胸部边际的中间。“因未被命令”指因未被命令“将其带到某处”。“而此在头载负担中所说之裁决”,指在头载负担中所说的判定。应关联为“或以头等持取者”。“如此者”指足以覆盖彼者。显示巴利原文
101. Bhāraṭṭhakathāyaṃ purimagale galavāṭakoti purimagale uparimagalavāṭako. Uraparicchedamajjheti urapariyantassa majjhe. Anāṇattattāti ‘‘asukaṭṭhānaṃ nehī’’ti anāṇattattā. Yo cāyaṃ sīsabhārevuttoti yo cāyaṃ vinicchayo sīsabhāre vutto. Sīsādīhi vā gahito hotūti sambandho. Tādisanti tappaṭicchādanasamatthaṃ.
园林义注的解说显示巴利原文
Ārāmaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
102 在《园林义注》中,“系缚处”指花梗所依附之处。“催促”意为责令、强行。“因有不与取的努力”指连同努力而说,因为是在事相上已作了努力。由此同作努力,此为恶作。“从事于判定”指致力于判定。“严酷”指粗暴。“放下负担”指停止努力,即对令物成为己有之事不再作为,这是其义。即便欺诈裁判者,若不放下负担,便无“不与取”,因此说“若自己也已放下负担”。“自己”指催促者。“已放下负担”指“现在我不将此物给他”,即于施予彼物已放下负担。“处于唯命是从的状态”指“我做什么、我做什么”,如此只以“做什么”回应而行事者,即为唯命是从者,其状态即唯命是从的状态;在此状态中,即处于自在的状态——这是所说之义。显示巴利原文
102. Ārāmaṭṭhakathāyaṃ bandhananti pupphānaṃ vaṇṭe patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ. Abhiyuñjatīti codeti aḍḍaṃ karoti. Adinnādānassa payogattāti sahapayogamāha vatthumhiyeva katapayogattā. Sahapayogavasena hetaṃ dukkaṭaṃ. Vinicchayappasutanti vinicchaye niyuttaṃ. Kakkhaḷoti dāruṇo. Dhuraṃ nikkhipatīti ussāhaṃ ṭhapeti, attano santakakaraṇe nirussāho hotīti attho. Kūṭaḍḍakārakopi sace dhuraṃ na nikkhipati, natthi avahāroti āha ‘‘sace sayampi katadhuranikkhepo hotī’’ti. Sayampīti abhiyuñjakopi. Katadhuranikkhepoti ‘‘na dāni naṃ imassa dassāmī’’ti evaṃ tassa dāne katadhuranikkhepo. Kiṅkārappaṭissāvibhāveti ‘‘kiṃ karomi kiṃ karomī’’ti evaṃ kiṅkārameva paṭissuṇanto vicaratīti kiṅkārapaṭissāvī, tassa bhāvo kiṅkārapaṭissāvibhāvo, tasmiṃ, attano vasavattibhāveti vuttaṃ hoti.
“给予贿赂后”指给予贿赂后。“欺诈裁判者们”指从事欺诈判定的持律者们。即使不说“取”,而以“此是无主者的主人”等间接方式说,由于是判定其所有性后而说的话语,故对于作欺诈判定者及作伪证者,亦成波罗夷。在此,即使未使其离开该处,两者的放下负担即处于令其离开该处的位置。在此构成放下负担的波罗夷中,若对物主作令其生疑的努力,则为偷兰遮;若完成了令其放下负担的努力,则为波罗夷。“自己达到波罗夷”指欺诈裁判者成就波罗夷。显示巴利原文
Ukkocaṃ datvāti lañjaṃ datvā. Kūṭavinicchayikānanti kūṭavinicchaye niyuttānaṃ vinayadharānaṃ. ‘‘Gaṇhā’’ti avatvā ‘‘asāmikassa sāmiko aya’’ntiādinā pariyāyena vuttepi tassa santakabhāvaṃ paricchinditvā pavattavacanattā kūṭavinicchayaṃ karontānaṃ kūṭasakkhīnañca pārājikameva. Asatipi cettha ṭhānācāvane ubhinnaṃ dhuranikkhepoyeva ṭhānācāvanaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhati. Imasmiṃ dhuranikkhepe pārājike sāmikassa vimatuppādanapayoge kate thullaccayaṃ, tasseva dhuranikkhepapayoge nipphādite pārājikaṃ. Sayaṃ parājayaṃ pāpuṇātīti kūṭaḍḍakārako parājayaṃ pāpuṇāti.
寺院义注的解说显示巴利原文
Vihāraṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
103 在《精舍义注》中,精舍、别院与住所皆通称为精舍,故说“精舍或”等。其中,“精舍”指大精舍。“别院”指大精舍内部以墙垣一一分隔之处。“住所”指单一住处。即使已行催促,因不与取不成,故说“催促不成立”。然而,对于僧团共有物,因物主已确定,故可令其放下负担,因此说“然而,对于分为长部诵者等类别的僧团”。在此,若即使仅一人未放下负担,则仍为守护。唯有当所有人皆放下负担时,方成波罗夷。显示巴利原文
103. Vihāraṭṭhakathāyaṃ vihāropi pariveṇampi āvāsopi vihārotveva saṅkhaṃ gacchatīti āha ‘‘vihāraṃ vā’’tiādi. Tattha vihāranti mahāvihāraṃ. Pariveṇanti mahāvihārassa abbhantare visuṃ visuṃ pākāraparicchinnaṭṭhānaṃ. Āvāsanti ekaṃ āvasathaṃ. Abhiyoge katepi avahārassa asijjhanato vuttaṃ ‘‘abhiyogo na ruhatī’’ti. Gaṇasantake pana paricchinnasāmikattā sakkā dhuraṃ nikkhipāpetunti āha ‘‘dīghabhāṇakādibhedassa pana gaṇassā’’ti. Idhāpi sace ekopi dhuraṃ na nikkhipati, rakkhatiyeva. Sabbesaṃ dhuranikkhepeneva hi pārājikaṃ.
田注疏之解释显示巴利原文
Khettaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
104 在“田地”的注释中,七种谷物是指:稻、米、大麦、粟、稗、高粱、小麦。对“nirumbhitvā vā”等语句,应各自与“gaṇhantassa”搭配。其中,所谓以“nirumbhitvā”而取,是指折断稻穗后,就那样用手抓住并拉扯,只取谷粒部分。“ekamekaṃ”是指每一根稻穗。“uppāṭetvā vā”是指将绿豆、黑豆等连根拔起。在“yasmiṃ bīje vā”等语句中,应按顺序与“nirumbhitvā”而取等搭配。应知此处的顺序为:若以折断稻穗等方式而取者,在单一种子上构成事由;若以手一根一根割取而取者,在每一穗上构成事由;若以镰刀割取而取者,在每一握上构成事由;若将许多一起拔取而取者,在每一颗绿豆、黑豆等果实时构成事由。根据“tasmiṃ bandhanā mocitamatte”这句话,应知当那些种子等从束缚中脱离时,即使尚未从该处移开,也已构成波罗夷。“acchijjamāno”是指已被割断而站立着。“jaṭitāni”是指已被割断的与未被割断的缠绕在一起。显示巴利原文
104. Khettaṭṭhakathāyaṃ satta dhaññānīti sālivīhiyavakaṅgukudrūsavarakagodhumānaṃ vasena satta dhaññāni . Nirumbhitvā vātiādīsu ‘‘gaṇhantassā’’ti paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tattha nirumbhitvā gahaṇaṃ nāma vīhisīsaṃ acchinditvā yathāṭhitameva hatthena gahetvā ākaḍḍhitvā bījamattasseva gahaṇaṃ. Ekamekanti ekamekaṃ vīhisīsaṃ. Uppāṭetvā vāti muggamāsādīni uddharitvā vā. Yasmiṃ bīje vātiādi nirumbhitvā gahaṇādīsu yathākkamaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Sālisīsādīni nirumbhitvā gaṇhantassa yasmiṃ bīje vatthu pūrati, ekamekaṃ hattheneva chinditvā gaṇhantassa yasmiṃ sīse vatthu pūrati, asitena lāyitvā gaṇhantassa yassaṃ muṭṭhiyaṃ vatthu pūrati, bahūni ekato uppāṭetvā gaṇhantassa yasmiṃ muggamāsādiphale vatthu pūratīti evamettha yathākkamo veditabbo. ‘‘Tasmiṃ bandhanā mocitamatte’’ti vacanato tasmiṃ bījādimhi bandhanā mocite sati tato anapanītepi pārājikamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Acchijjamānoti acchinno hutvā ṭhito. Jaṭitānīti chinditāni acchinnehi saddhiṃ jaṭitāni hontīti attho. Sabhusanti palālasahitaṃ. Abhusanti palālarahitaṃ.
“khīlena”是指用木桩。在此,通过移动木桩等方式,两种情形都可能发生:共同协作与放弃责任。若有人通过移动木桩等方式,将他人的田地等的一部分变为自己所有,即使物主已先行放弃责任,但若无移动木桩等共同协作,此事亦不能成就;因此,正是由于共同协作而构成波罗夷。正因如此,在根本注释书(疑惑度释·第二波罗夷注释)中说:“应知,通过变更位置而移动木桩等,以及通过侵占田地等,皆是共同协作。”然而,若物主并未放弃责任,仅做了移动木桩等事,此时若无放弃责任,此事不能成就,因此正是由于放弃责任而构成波罗夷。正因如此,此处说“而这只有在物主放弃责任时”。如此,在一切处,应将所述之义类推到移动绳索等上。显示巴利原文
Khīlenāti khāṇukena. Ettha ca khīlasaṅkamanādīsu ubhayaṃ sambhavati sahapayogo dhuranikkhepo ca. Yadā hi parassa khettādīsu ekadesaṃ khīlasaṅkamanādivasena attano santakaṃ karoti, tadā satipi paṭhamataraṃ sāmikānaṃ dhuranikkhepe khīlasaṅkamanādisahapayogaṃ vinā na hotīti sahapayogeneva pārājikaṃ. Teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyaṃ (kaṅkhā. aṭṭha. dutiyapārājikavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ ‘‘ṭhānācāvanavasena khīlādīni saṅkāmetvā khettādiggahaṇavasena ca sahapayogo veditabbo’’ti. Yadā pana asati dhuranikkhepe khīlasaṅkamanādimattaṃ kataṃ, tadā vinā dhuranikkhepena na hotīti dhuranikkhepeneva pārājikaṃ. Tenevettha ‘‘tañca kho sāmikānaṃ dhuranikkhepenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sabbatthāti yathāvuttamatthaṃ rajjusaṅkamanādīsupi atidisati.
“yaṭṭhiṃ”是指测量杆。关于“一根未到时是偷兰遮,那根到来时是波罗夷”这一句,应知:如果他钉下木桩后,只想以这些为限来取得,则在最后一根木桩时构成波罗夷。如果他还想连同树枝一起做来取得,则在最后一根树枝时构成波罗夷。“以那么多不能做到”是指钉下木桩后无法做成围栏。“田界”是为阐明所述之义而说“kedārapāḷi”。“扩展”是指将先前已存在的界限加以扩大。“或者设立未作的”是指设立先前未有的界限。显示巴利原文
Yaṭṭhinti mānadaṇḍaṃ. Ekasmiṃ anāgate thullaccayaṃ, tasmiṃ āgate pārājikanti ettha sace dārūni nikhaṇitvā tattakeneva gaṇhitukāmo hoti, avasāne dārumhi pārājikaṃ. Sace tattha sākhāyopi katvā gahetukāmo hoti, avasānasākhāya pārājikanti veditabbaṃ. Tattakena asakkontoti dārūni nikhaṇitvā vatiṃ kātuṃ asakkonto. Khettamariyādanti vuttamevatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kedārapāḷi’’nti vuttaṃ. Vitthataṃ karotīti pubbe vijjamānameva mariyādaṃ vitthiṇṇaṃ karoti. Akataṃ vā pana patiṭṭhapetīti pubbe akataṃ vā mariyādaṃ ṭhapeti.
地注疏之解释显示巴利原文
Vatthuṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
105 在基址的注释中,“三种围墙”指由砖、石、木所建成的三种围墙。“依此方式”即以此指示了“仅平整地面……或不设围墙”等所述之义。显示巴利原文
105. Vatthuṭṭhakathāyaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pākārānanti iṭṭhakasilādārūnaṃ vasena tiṇṇaṃ pākārānaṃ. Eteneva nayenāti iminā ‘‘kevalaṃ bhūmiṃ sodhetvā…pe… aparikkhipitvā vā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ nidasseti.
村注疏之解释显示巴利原文
Gāmaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
106 在村庄的注释中,“所谓村庄”在巴利圣典中并未提及,因为村庄的特征先前已全部说毕。显示巴利原文
106. Gāmaṭṭhakathāyaṃ gāmo nāmāti pāḷiyaṃ na vuttaṃ sabbaso gāmalakkhaṇassa pubbe vuttattā.
林注疏之解释显示巴利原文
Araññaṭṭhakathāvaṇṇanā
107 在阿兰若的注释中,“所谓阿兰若”一语,并非仅就具备前述阿兰若特征者便是此处所指的阿兰若,而是要显示:凡是依其自身的阿兰若特征而为阿兰若、且为他人所占有者,才是此处所指的阿兰若。因此,通过再次说“阿兰若”一词,揭示了未被占有的状态并非阿兰若的特征,意思是:若被占有的状态即是特征,则只需说“所谓阿兰若,即人们所占有者”即可。而“yaṃ”一词,是指依前说特征而被称为阿兰若者,故说:“然而,凡依其自身阿兰若特征而为阿兰若者。”显示巴利原文
107. Araññaṭṭhakathāyaṃ araññaṃ nāmāti idaṃ pana na kevalaṃ pubbe vuttaaraññalakkhaṇappattimattena araññaṃ idhādhippetaṃ, kintu yaṃ attano araññalakkhaṇena araññaṃ parapariggahitañca hoti, taṃ araññaṃ idhādhippetanti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Tenāti puna araññavacanena. Na pariggahitabhāvo araññassa lakkhaṇanti yadi hi pariggahitabhāvo araññalakkhaṇaṃ siyā, ‘‘araññaṃ nāma yaṃ manussānaṃ pariggahita’’nti ettakameva vadeyyāti adhippāyo. Yanti iminā pubbe vuttalakkhaṇameva araññaṃ parāmaṭṭhanti āha ‘‘yaṃ pana attano araññalakkhaṇena arañña’’nti.
“vinivijjhitvā”是指径直贯穿。“paṇṇaṃ vā”是指棕榈叶等叶片。“addhagatopi”是指即便长时间站立在那里。在“不应取”句中,若是他人从阿兰若主人手中买下后削制好便放置在那里的,纵然得到了阿兰若主人的许可,也不应取用。“被主人丢弃的”则可以取,这是依粪扫衣想而说的取。“标记被砍除者”是指从阿兰若主人手中买下后取用者所作的标记。“被树皮包裹者”乃显示主人已不再有所期待,因此说“可以取”。若主人尚有期待,则不可取。“那些已建成且已有人居住者”,是指房屋等已建成、已完成并有人居住的处所。“dārūnipi”指由于建造房屋等而剩余下来的那些木料。“etesaṃ”是指前述这些木料。显示巴利原文
Vinivijjhitvāti ujukameva vinivijjhitvā. Paṇṇaṃ vāti tālapaṇṇādi paṇṇaṃ vā. Addhagatopīti cirakālaṃ tattheva ṭhitopi. Na gahetabboti ettha pana yo parehi araññasāmikānaṃ hatthato kiṇitvā tacchetvā tattheva ṭhapito, so araññasāmikena anuññātopi na gahetabbo. Sāmikehi chaḍḍitoti gahetuṃ vaṭṭatīti paṃsukūlasaññāya gahaṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Lakkhaṇacchinnassāpīti araññasāmikānaṃ hatthato kiṇitvā gaṇhantehi katasaññāṇassa. Challiyā pariyonaddhaṃ hotīti iminā sāmikānaṃ nirapekkhataṃ dīpeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘gahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti. Yadi sāmikānaṃ sāpekkhatā atthi, na vaṭṭati. Tāni katāni ajjhāvutthāni ca hontīti tāni gehādīni katāni pariniṭṭhitāni manussehi ca ajjhāvutthāni honti. Dārūnipīti gehādīnaṃ katattā tato avasiṭṭhadārūnipi. Etesanti etesaṃ yathāvuttadārūnaṃ.
“他们的守护处”是指那些阿兰若守护者所站立之处。“若被说‘给’则必须给”这一句中,当对方说出“给”时,由于自己已生起“我将给”的作意,所以必须给;若对方未说“给”,即使不给也可以离开。“gantuṃ detha”意为允许离开。若未见到而离去,该物品应当给;以清净心离去,也是物品应给。即使木料被带到任何地方,由于其仍然属于阿兰若主人所有,纵使起初以清净心出发,后来若生起盗心而离去,也构成波罗夷,诸师如是说。显示巴利原文
Tesaṃārakkhaṭṭhānanti tesaṃ araññapālānaṃ ṭhitaṭṭhānaṃ. Dehīti vutte dātabbamevāti ettha ‘‘dehī’’ti vutte ‘‘dassāmī’’ti ābhogasabbhāvato ‘‘dehī’’ti avutte adatvāpi gantuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Gantuṃ dethāti gamanaṃ detha. Adisvā gacchati, bhaṇḍadeyyanti parisuddhacittena gacchati, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ. Yattha katthaci nītānampi dārūnaṃ araññasāmikānaṃyeva santakattā suddhacittena nikkhantopi puna theyyacittaṃ uppādetvā gacchati, pārājikamevāti vadanti.
水之论释显示巴利原文
Udakakathāvaṇṇanā
108 108. 在水之论中,“mahākucchikā”指大型水缸、水罐。也称为“带箍的缸、水罐”。“此处”(tattha)是指于那些容器中。“泄出水”(nibbahanaudakaṃ)是指为了防护池塘,恐“大水冲来时不要毁坏池塘的堤岸”,而从池塘一侧放出的水。“排水管”(niddhamanatumbaṃ)是指为了谷物等而设置的出水通道。“使堤岸变弱”是为了显示堤岸必定会决口的特性,并为了说明此属于物品应给的范围。纵使未使堤岸变弱,若作了如前所述的加行,使堤岸决口而流出之水,也应依其价值处以相应的夺取罪。显示巴利原文
108. Udakakathāyaṃ mahākucchikā udakacāṭi udakamaṇiko. ‘‘Samekhalā cāṭi udakamaṇiko’’tipi vadanti. Tatthāti tesu bhājanesu. Nibbahanaudakanti ‘‘mahodakaṃ āgantvā taḷākamariyādaṃ mā chindī’’ti taḷākarakkhaṇatthaṃ tassa ekapassena vissajjitaudakaṃ. Niddhamanatumbanti sassādīnaṃ atthāya udakanikkhamanamaggaṃ. Mariyādaṃ dubbalaṃ katvāti idaṃ avassaṃ chinnasabhāvadassanatthaṃ bhaṇḍadeyyavisayadassanatthañca vuttaṃ. Mariyādaṃ dubbalaṃ akatvāpi yathāvuttappayoge kate mariyādaṃ chinditvā nikkhantaudakagghānurūpena avahārena kāretabbameva.
“未出”(aniggate),是指水尚未离池,仍停留在池塘中。“未到达”(asampatteva),是指水已离池,仅停在大水渠中。“未出”(anikkhante),是指水未从池塘流出。“善缚”(subaddhā),意为尚不构成物品应给。因此说“已出而缚,为物品应给”,意思是水离池后,尚未到达他人的小水渠口,仅停在大水渠中时,若被截缚,即属物品应给。所谓“未出而缚是善缚,已出而缚是物品应给”这两句,是依次与前文所说的两种分别相对应。于“无夺取罪”这一处,有人说“无夺取罪,但是物品应给”,然而池塘中的水为一切共有,此说并不合理,且与注释书“未出而缚是善缚”之说相违。至于“事物……不合”这一处,意指池塘中的水为一切共有,于此未加执持,故此处的事物(vatthu)不成立。显示巴利原文
Aniggateti anikkhamitvā taḷākasmiṃyeva udake ṭhite. Asampattevāti taḷākato nikkhamitvā mahāmātikāya eva ṭhite. Anikkhanteti taḷākato anikkhante udake. Subaddhāti bhaṇḍadeyyampi na hotīti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘nikkhante baddhā bhaṇḍadeyya’’nti, taḷākato nikkhamitvā paresaṃ khuddakamātikāmukhaṃ apāpuṇitvā mahāmātikāyaṃyeva ṭhite baddhā ce, bhaṇḍadeyyanti attho. ‘‘Anikkhante baddhā subaddhā, nikkhante baddhā bhaṇḍadeyya’’nti hi idaṃ dvayaṃ heṭṭhā vuttavikappadvayassa yathākkamena vuttaṃ. Natthi avahāroti ettha ‘‘avahāro natthi, bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ pana hotī’’ti keci vadanti, taḷākagataudakassa sabbasādhāraṇattā taṃ ayuttaṃ viya dissati, ‘‘anikkhante baddhā subaddhā’’ti iminā ca aṭṭhakathāvacanena na sameti. Vatthuṃ…pe… na sametīti ettha taḷākagataudakassa sabbasādhāraṇattā apariggahitaṃ idha vatthunti adhippāyo.
牙木之论释显示巴利原文
Dantaponakathāvaṇṇanā
109 在齿木之论中,“从此以后无夺取罪”的意思是:因为是特意为“比丘僧团随意享用”而放置的,为使僧众随其所乐而受用,故不应按戒腊分配、不应守护,且为一切共有,因此不似其他僧物;即使以盗心拿取,也无夺取罪。所说的“义务”(vattaṃ),是指取用齿木时的义务。为了显示该项义务,现在说“若有人……”等文。应如此连接理解:有些长老可能会说“沙弥们会再拿来”。显示巴利原文
109. Dantakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ tato paṭṭhāya avahāro natthīti ‘‘yathāsukhaṃ bhikkhusaṅgho paribhuñjatū’’ti yathāsukhaṃ paribhogatthāya ṭhapitattā vassaggena abhājetabbattā arakkhitabbattā sabbasādhāraṇattā ca aññaṃ saṅghikaṃ viya na hotīti theyyacittena gaṇhantassapi natthi avahāro . Vattanti dantakaṭṭhaggahaṇe vattaṃ. Idāni tadeva vattaṃ dassento ‘‘yo hī’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Puna sāmaṇerā āharissantī’’ti keci therā vadeyyunti yojetabbaṃ.
树木之论释显示巴利原文
Vanappatikathāvaṇṇanā
110 在树木之论中,有人说:“‘它直直地立着’这一说法,是意在表达:因树的重量而稍作倾斜后仍然立着,因此仍有从处所移动(的可能)。”“清理风口”是指:如同风吹来会吹倒树木那样,为了让风顺利通过,砍掉遮挡风路的枝条、灌木丛等而加以清理。关于“蛙刺”(maṇḍūkakaṇṭakaṃ),有人说是位于青蛙尾巴尖端的刺,也有人说是某种不平整的鱼刺。显示巴利原文
110. Vanappatikathāyaṃ ‘‘ujukameva tiṭṭhatīti rukkhabhārena kiñcideva bhassitvā ṭhitattā hotiyeva ṭhānācāvananti adhippāyena vutta’’nti vadanti. Vātamukhaṃ sodhetīti yathā vāto āgantvā rukkhaṃ pāteti, evaṃ vātassa āgamanamaggaṃ rundhitvā ṭhitāni sākhāgumbādīni chinditvā apanento sodheti. ‘‘Maṇḍūkakaṇṭakaṃ vā visanti maṇḍūkānaṃ naṅguṭṭhe aggakoṭiyaṃ ṭhitakaṇṭaka’’nti vadanti, ‘‘ekaṃ visamacchakaṇṭaka’’ntipi vadanti.
搬运之论释显示巴利原文
Haraṇakakathāvaṇṇanā
111 在“搬运之论”中,“所搬运的”(haraṇakaṃ)是指正在被搬运之物。向自身方向拉拽称为“拉来”(ākaḍḍhanaṃ),朝其余方向拉拽则称为“拉开”(vikaḍḍhanaṃ)。“值一脚(之价),即波罗夷”此处,由于“我不取末端”而未作标记,而该末端实为已作标记“我将取”的那块布的一个部分,因此说为波罗夷。“与持物者一起”(sahabhaṇḍahārakaṃ)即与搬运财物者一道。“恐吓后”是指以弓箭等方式恐吓之后。显示巴利原文
111. Haraṇakakathāyaṃ haraṇakanti hariyamānaṃ. Abhimukhaṃ katvā kaḍḍhanaṃ ākaḍḍhanaṃ, sesadisākaḍḍhanaṃ vikaḍḍhanaṃ. Pādaṃ agghati, pārājikamevāti ettha antaṃ na gaṇhāmīti asallakkhitattā antassa ca gaṇhissāmīti sallakkhitasseva paṭassa ekadesattā pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ. Sahabhaṇḍahārakanti bhaṇḍahārakena saddhiṃ. Santajjetvāti dhanuādīhi santajjetvā.
“他”(so)指搬运财物者。“未被执持的”(anajjhāvutthakaṃ)指未被占有的,意为无主的。显示巴利原文
Soti bhaṇḍahārako. Anajjhāvutthakanti apariggahitakaṃ, asāmikanti attho.
关于“令取回时应给与”一段:当地住处的老师们说:“因为对于舍弃后放下责任而离去、已无执著者,也开许可令取回,所以比丘们自己的资具被他人夺走后,即使已在那里放下了责任,仍可以强力令其取回。”但锡兰岛的一些老师不认同此说。正因如此,《大结集》与《中结集》中说:“然而,我们不喜此说。”在别处(aññesu),即指《大帕阇利》等论中。“根本没有讨论”的意思是那里也没有加以否定,故说此处的义理即是如此。显示巴利原文
Āharāpente dātabbanti ettha ‘‘chaḍḍetvā dhuraṃ nikkhipitvā gatānampi nirālayānaṃ puna āharāpanassa vuttattā bhikkhūnampi attano santake parikkhāre acchinditvā parehi gahite tattha dhuranikkhepaṃ katvāpi puna taṃ balakkārenapi āharāpetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti desavāsino ācariyā vadanti, sīhaḷadīpavāsino pana taṃ keci ācariyā na icchanti. Teneva mahāgaṇṭhipade majjhimagaṇṭhipade ca vuttaṃ ‘‘amhākaṃ pana taṃ na ruccatī’’ti. Aññesūti mahāpaccariādīsu. Vicāraṇā eva natthīti tatthāpi paṭikkhepābhāvato ayamevatthoti vuttaṃ hoti.
寄存之论释显示巴利原文
Upanidhikathāvaṇṇanā
112 在“寄存之论”中,有人说:“为了保管而置于自己手中的物品,如果未作安放于安全处的加行,即使未作其他加行,在王国动乱等时,双方各自坐在自己的地方,生起‘现在我不给他了,现在他不会给我了’的心念,从而放下责任,由于已作安置加行,即构成波罗夷。”“因为放在了自己手中”此处,意谓从为了保管而放置之时起,便因此种系属关系,守护者即处于物主之位,且该处所也因此而系属,故无法通过移动处所来达成,因此无有夺取之罪。这是它的意旨。显示巴利原文
112. Upanidhikathāyaṃ ‘‘saṅgopanatthāya attano hatthe nikkhittassa bhaṇḍassa guttaṭṭhāne paṭisāmanapayogaṃ vinā aññasmiṃ payoge akatepi rajjasaṅkhobhādikāle ‘na dāni tassa dassāmi, na mayhaṃ dāni dassatī’ti ubhohipi sakasakaṭṭhāne nisīditvā dhuranikkhepe kate pārājikameva paṭisāmanapayogassa katattā’’ti vadanti. Attano hatthe nikkhittattāti ettha attano hatthe saṅgopanatthāya nikkhittakālato paṭṭhāya tappaṭibaddhattā ārakkhāya bhaṇḍasāmikaṭṭhāne ṭhitattā ṭhānassa ca tadāyattatāya ṭhānācāvanassa alabbhanato natthi avahāroti adhippāyo.
“令说示法”意为令其开示法义。依同样的道理,即在取离时便犯波罗夷。何以故?因已说示了不与余人共的标记。“取其他同类物时亦成立”,此乃由说示标记之人限定了‘在某处’的场所,故将置于彼处之钵移开后,于该处另置一同类钵——针对此而说。即便盗贼未取走所标记之钵,然于该处对其他同类物生起‘我将盗取此物’之盗心而取,亦得成立——此即阐明了盗贼的盗取行为。所谓“以步数计”,是指长老取出所予之钵,盗贼持之而去,即依其步数计算。取非同类物亦得成立,此因知‘此非我钵’或‘此非我所示之钵’而以盗心取者,及对彼物生起‘我将盗取此物’之盗心而取者,皆有盗取之故,而作是说。显示巴利原文
Dhammaṃ vācāpetvāti dhammaṃ kathāpetvā. Eseva nayoti uddhāreyeva pārājikaṃ. Kasmā? Aññehi asādhāraṇassa abhiññāṇassa vuttattā. ‘‘Aññaṃ tādisameva gaṇhante yujjatīti idaṃ saññāṇaṃ kathenteneva ‘asukasmiṃ ṭhāne’ti okāsassa ca niyamitattā tasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhitaṃ pattaṃ apanetvā tasmiṃ okāse aññaṃ tādisameva pacchā ṭhapitaṃ pattaṃ sandhāya kathita’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Corena sallakkhitapattassa gahaṇābhāvepi ‘‘idaṃ thenetvā gaṇhissāmī’’ti tasmiṃ okāse ṭhite tādise vatthumatte tassa theyyacittasabbhāvato aññaṃ tādisameva gaṇhante yujjatīti corassa avahāro dassito. Padavārenāti therena nīharitvā dinnaṃ pattaṃ gahetvā gacchato corassa padavārena. Taṃ atādisameva gaṇhante yujjatīti ‘‘mamāyaṃ patto na hotī’’ti vā ‘‘mayā kathito ayaṃ patto na hotī’’ti vā jānitvā theyyacittena gaṇhantassa ‘‘idaṃ thenetvā gaṇhissāmī’’ti vatthumatte theyyacittaṃ uppādetvā gaṇhantassa ca avahārasabbhāvato vuttaṃ.
“村口”者,此仅是适合沙门身份的通俗说法,实指村内。依前述之理,长老亦犯波罗夷——因以盗心取他人所有物,故于取离时长老便犯波罗夷。盗贼则犯恶作,因以不清净心取物,故于取物之时盗贼犯恶作。依前述之理,两者皆犯恶作:盗贼之物乃由物主所给,故无波罗夷,然因以不清净心取物而犯恶作;长老则因对自己的所有物亦生起不清净心,故犯恶作。显示巴利原文
Gāmadvāranti samaṇasāruppaṃ vohāramattametaṃ, antogāmaṃ icceva vuttaṃ hoti. Vuttanayeneva therassapārājikanti theyyacitteneva parasantakassa gahitattā uddhāreyeva therassa pārājikaṃ. Corassa dukkaṭanti asuddhacittena gahitattā gahitakāle corassa dukkaṭaṃ. Vuttanayeneva ubhinnampi dukkaṭanti corassa sāmikena dinnattā pārājikaṃ natthi, asuddhacittena gahitattā dukkaṭaṃ, therassa pana attano santakepi asuddhacittatāya dukkaṭanti.
“因受命而取”者,此处意指:长老如此命令——“取衣钵来,我等将往某村乞食”——则从寺院附近界内开始,直至彼村界外,其间一切皆成为场地。所谓“偏离道路”,于此应知两车辙路之间隙,亦是道路。“不站立、不坐下”,此处指进入寺院后,不将头上等之负担置于地上。若站立或坐下休息后,盗心止息,复又生起盗心而行,则应以举足数断罪。若将负担放置于地后,复又取起而行,则应以取离断罪。何以故?因令者命令所应作之事,于彼时已圆成故。然而有说者言:“纵使先前的盗心未曾止息,依前述之理,休息后而行者,亦应以举足数或取离处罚。”亦有说者道:“若不限定‘某村’,而泛说‘我等将入村’,则寺院附近一切行乞范围的村落皆是场地。”其余者,如偏离道路、朝向寺院而行等一切,皆与前述相同。即:虽未受命而取,但因告知物主而取,故前文所说于寺院界内等一切,皆视为场地而说。显示巴利原文
Āṇattiyā gahitattāti ettha ‘‘pattacīvaraṃ gaṇha, asukaṃ nāma gāmaṃ gantvā piṇḍāya carissāmā’’ti evaṃ therena kataāṇattiyā vihārassa parabhāge upacārato paṭṭhāya yāva tassa gāmassa parato upacāro, tāva sabbaṃ khettameva jātanti adhippāyo. Maggato okkammāti ettha ubhinnaṃ sakaṭacakkamaggānaṃ antarāḷampi maggoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aṭṭhatvā anisīditvāti ettha vihāraṃ pavisitvā sīsādīsu bhāraṃ bhūmiyaṃ anikkhipitvāva tiṭṭhanto nisīdanto vā vissamitvā theyyacitte vūpasante puna theyyacittaṃ uppādetvā gacchati ce, pāduddhārena kāretabbo. Sace bhūmiyaṃ nikkhipitvā puna taṃ gahetvā gacchati, uddhārena kāretabbo. Kasmā? Āṇāpakassa āṇattiyā yaṃ kattabbaṃ, tassa tāva pariniṭṭhitattā. Keci pana ‘‘purimasmiṃ theyyacitte avūpasantepi vuttanayeneva vissamitvā gacchato pāduddhārena uddhārena vā kāretabbo’’ti vadanti, ‘‘asukaṃ nāma gāmanti aniyametvā ‘antogāmaṃ pavisissāmā’ti avisesena vutte vihārasāmantā sabbopi gocaragāmo khettamevā’’tipi vadanti. Sesanti maggukkamanavihārābhimukhagamanādi sabbaṃ. Purimasadisamevāti anāṇattiyā gahitepi sāmikassa kathetvā gahitattā heṭṭhā vuttavihārūpacārādi sabbaṃ khettamevāti katvā vuttaṃ.
“同样的道理”,即指“于途中生起盗心”等所说的道理。“或作暗示”,指如说“我的衣服脏了,谁能为我染一染?”等作暗示。依前述之理,即未受嘱咐而与长老一起取衣钵同行的章节中所说的道理。“或住于一边”,是因寺院广大,不显露自身而住于一边。以盗心受用而致损坏者,指盗心生起后,不经移动位置,即以穿着、披覆等方式受用而致损坏;若移动位置,则当盗心生起时即犯波罗夷,如将头上负担移于肩上等。“或以任何方式毁坏”,指以火等方式毁坏,或被白蚁等啃食而毁坏。显示巴利原文
Eseva nayoti ‘‘antarāmagge theyyacittaṃ uppādetvā’’tiādinā vuttanayaṃ atidisati. Nimitte vā kateti ‘‘cīvaraṃ me kiliṭṭhaṃ, ko nu kho rajitvā dassatī’’tiādinā nimitte kate. Vuttanayenevāti anāṇattassa therena saddhiṃ pattacīvaraṃ gahetvā gamanavāre vuttanayeneva. Ekapasse vāti vihārassa mahantatāya attānaṃ adassetvā ekasmiṃ passe vasanto vā. Theyyacittena paribhuñjanto jīrāpetīti theyyacitte uppanne ṭhānācāvanaṃ akatvā nivatthapārutanīhāreneva paribhuñjanto jīrāpeti, ṭhānā cāventassa pana theyyacitte sati pārājikameva sīse bhāraṃ khandhe karaṇādīsu viya. Yathā tathā vā nassatīti aggiādinā vā upacikādīhi khāditaṃ vā nassati.
“或其他任何人”,应知此也包括放置该物之人。说“你拿到了粗麻衣”等妄语,因是行不与取的方便,故犯恶作。若取另一物,在移动离开时犯波罗夷。此处,因“进去拿你的衣”这句言语,衣已从寄存状态中脱离,而物主对自己的衣仍有贪着,故对取另一物者,在移动离开时犯波罗夷。“不知”,指未听到对方所说的话而不知。“同样的道理”,此处若虽知而心中不予认可,也应知是同样的道理。“拒绝”,此处应知也包括心中拒绝。“被请求或未被请求”,此处若被请求,即使心中认可,物毁亦无罪;若未被请求,即使心中认可,物毁亦无罪。显示巴利原文
Añño vā kocīti iminā pana yena ṭhapitaṃ, sopi saṅgahitoti veditabbaṃ. Tava thūlasāṭako laddhotiādinā musāvāde dukkaṭaṃ adinnādānapayogattā. Itaraṃ gaṇhato uddhāre pārājikanti ettha ‘‘pavisitvā tava sāṭakaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti imināva upanidhibhāvato muttattā sāmikassa itaraṃ gaṇhatopi attano sāṭake ālayassa sabbhāvato ca uddhāre pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ. Na jānantīti tena vuttaṃ vacanaṃ asuṇantā na jānanti. Eseva nayoti ettha sace jānitvāpi cittena na sampaṭicchanti, eseva nayoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Paṭikkhipantīti ettha cittena paṭikkhepopi saṅgahitovāti veditabbaṃ. Yācitā vā ayācitā vāti ettha yācitā yadi cittenapi sampaṭicchanti, naṭṭhe gīvā. Ayācitā pana yadipi cittena sampaṭicchanti, natthi gīvā.
“取后安置”,在此,即使移动后又放回原处,若物品毁坏亦无罪。“存在于界内”,指存在于库房附近的厕所处。“于我死后,僧团的坐卧具毁坏”,对此,有人说:“仅以‘但愿僧团的坐卧具不致毁坏’的意图,打开库房也是可以的。”“应有同伴”,意思是也应当给予他们少许物品。这是住于库房者的正行,是其应尽的义务。显示巴利原文
Gahetvā ṭhapetīti ettha cāletvā tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne ṭhapitepi naṭṭhe gīvā. Upacāre vijjamāneti bhaṇḍāgārassa samīpe uccārapassāvaṭṭhāne vijjamāne. Mayi ca mate saṅghassa ca senāsane vinaṭṭheti ettha ‘‘kevalaṃ saṅghassa senāsanaṃ mā nassīti imināva adhippāyena vivaritumpi vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti vadanti. Sahāyehi bhavitabbanti tehipi kiñci kiñci dātabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayaṃ sāmīcīti bhaṇḍāgāre vasantānaṃ idaṃ vattaṃ.
“Lolamahāthero”是指迟钝、愚痴或耽着于嬉笑戏耍的长老。应理解为:他们各自在住处为同众比丘存放资具。“Itarehi”指住在同一房中的其他比丘。受命轮值守护寺院者称为“vihāravāriko”,即轮流守护寺院的人。“Nivāpa”意为饭食酬劳。“Paṭipathaṃ gatesu”是指知道盗贼即将到来时,心想“我们先出声喝阻”,便迎着盗贼而去。“Nissitake jaggenti”指通过教导学处来照看各自的依止弟子,也让依止者守护寺院。“Asahāyassa adutiyassa”这一读法成立,因为后句只是前句的同义词。然而,在“asahāyassa vā attadutiyassa vā”这一读法中,有人说:一人带来的食物不够两人分,因此“attadutiya”的情况也被排除;但这与“没有同众比丘为他带来并给予食物”的说法不符,应加以审察。“Upajīvantena ṭhātabban”意为:即使是露地住者、树下住者,依靠村落乞食而活,当轮到守护寺院时,为了守护……显示巴利原文
Lolamahātheroti mando momūho hasitakīḷitappasuto vā mahāthero. Attano attano vasanagabbhesu sabhāgabhikkhūnaṃ parikkhāraṃ ṭhapentīti yojetabbaṃ. Itarehīti tasmiṃyeva gabbhe vasantehi itarabhikkhūhi. Vihāravāre niyutto vihāravāriko, vāraṃ katvā vihārarakkhaṇako. Nivāpanti bhattavetanaṃ. Paṭipathaṃ gatesūti corānaṃ āgamanaṃ ñatvā ‘‘paṭhamataraṃyeva gantvā saddaṃ karissāmā’’ti corānaṃ abhimukhaṃ gatesu. Nissitake jaggentīti attano attano nissitake sikkhācariyāya posentāpi nissitake vihāraṃ jaggāpenti. ‘‘Asahāyassa adutiyassā’’ti pāṭho yutto, pacchimaṃ purimasseva vevacanaṃ. Asahāyassa vā attadutiyassa vāti imasmiṃ pana pāṭhe ekena ānītaṃ dvinnaṃ nappahotīti attadutiyassapi vāro nivāritoti vadanti, taṃ ‘‘yassa sabhāgo bhikkhu bhattaṃ ānetvā dātā natthī’’ti iminā na sametīti vīmaṃsitabbaṃ. Upajīvantena ṭhātabbanti abbhokāsikena rukkhamūlikenapi pākavaṭṭaṃ upanissāya jīvantena pattacīvararakkhaṇatthāya vihāravāre sampatte ṭhātabbaṃ. Paripucchanti pucchitapañhavissajjanaṃ aṭṭhakathaṃ vā. Diguṇanti vassaggena pāpitaṃ vināva dve koṭṭhāseti vadanti. Pakkhavārenāti aḍḍhamāsavārena.
税关事释义显示巴利原文
Suṅkaghātakathāvaṇṇanā
113 在税关事中,“tato hananti”指从那里取出时杀害。“Tan”指税关处。“Yato”指被取出的货物。“Rājakan”指属于国王的,那也确实是国王应得之物,故说“此即其义”。“Ito”指从此货物。关于“第二只脚越过”,有人说:“将第一只脚置于界限以外,第二只脚刚抬起时,即犯波罗夷。”因为即便抬起后尚未置外,也已属在外。凡以脚步判定犯戒之处,都应依此理趣处理。从税关外行至更远的税关外。“Avassaṃ patanakan”指必定会落到税关之外者。如前所说的方法,即在必定会落下的情况中,刚一离手即犯。关于“旋转后又进入内部”,大注疏与库伦迪简要注疏已阐明其义。“站在内部保护向外走者”,是指因比丘的运作,行走的势能在内部便已止息。“翻转后将内侧置于外”,指将位于内侧的包裹翻转后置于外侧。此处有人说:“当内侧包裹刚一脱离地面,即犯波罗夷。”显示巴利原文
113. Suṅkaghātakathāyaṃ tato hanantīti tato nīharantā hananti. Tanti suṅkaṭṭhānaṃ. Yatoti yato nīhariyamānabhaṇḍato. Rājakanti rājāyattaṃ. Tampi rājārahamevāti āha ‘‘ayamevattho’’ti. Itoti ito bhaṇḍato. Dutiyaṃ pādaṃ atikkāmetīti ettha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ pādaṃ paricchedato bahi ṭhapetvā dutiye pāde uddhaṭamatte pārājika’’nti vadanti uddharitvā bahi aṭṭhapitopi bahi ṭhitoyeva nāma hotīti katvā. Yattha yattha padavārena āpatti kāretabbā, tattha tattha sabbatthāpi eseva nayoti vadanti. Suṅkaghātato bahi bahisuṅkaghātaṃ. Avassaṃ patanakanti avassaṃ suṅkaghātato bahi patanakaṃ. Pubbe vuttanayenevāti avassaṃ patanake hatthato muttamatteti vuttaṃ hoti. Vaṭṭantaṃ puna anto pavisatīti mahāaṭṭhakathāvacanassa kurundisaṅkhepaṭṭhakathāhi adhippāyo pakāsito. Anto ṭhatvā bahi gacchantaṃ rakkhatīti bhikkhuno payogena gamanavegassa antoyeva vūpasantattā. Parivattetvā abbhantarimaṃ bahi ṭhapetīti abbhantare ṭhitaṃ puṭakaṃ parivattetvā bahi ṭhapeti. Ettha ca ‘‘abbhantarime puṭake bhūmito mocitamatte pārājika’’nti vadanti.
“当车等行走时……置于”意为:未进入税关内,仅置于外面。三处结文皆说“置于税关外”,因下文将述。然而,诸师长将“置于税关外”这一读法加以分别,释义为:“首先,在已进入税关内的车等之上放置,后来随车一起被带出,置于税关外,但并非由彼带出。”他们的意图是:即使放置在已进入税关内的车等之上,若比丘未作运作,由他人带出,则无巴拉基;因为已说“对进入此处者征税”,由他人带出而置于外的物品,亦非应给之物。这一理趣与“若想旋转而行,或他人将旋转之,先置于内,后来自己旋转或由他人旋转而出,仍属守护”的说法相符,显得更为合理。对于进入税关后又返回者,若从那一侧越过界限,且该处对出行者手中之物征税,则越界即犯巴拉基。显示巴利原文
‘‘Gacchante yāne vā…pe… ṭhapetīti suṅkaghātaṃ apavisitvā bahiyeva ṭhapetī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ suṅkaṭṭhānassa bahi ṭhapitanti vakkhamānattā. Ācariyā pana ‘‘suṅkaṭṭhānassa bahi ṭhita’’nti pāṭhaṃ vikappetvā ‘‘paṭhamaṃ antosuṅkaghātaṃ paviṭṭhesuyeva yānādīsu ṭhapitaṃ pacchā yānena saddhiṃ nīhaṭaṃ suṅkaghātassa bahi ṭhitaṃ, na ca tena nīta’’nti atthaṃ vadanti. Ayaṃ pana tesaṃ adhippāyo – suṅkaṭṭhānassa anto paviṭṭhayānādīsu ṭhapitepi bhikkhussa payogaṃ vinā aññena nīhaṭattā nevatthi pārājikaṃ, ‘‘atra paviṭṭhassa suṅkaṃ gaṇhantū’’ti vuttattā aññena nīhaṭassa bahi ṭhite bhaṇḍadeyyampi na hotīti. Ayameva ca nayo ‘‘vaṭṭitvā gamissatīti vā añño naṃ vaṭṭessatīti vā anto ṭhapitaṃ pacchā sayaṃ vā vaṭṭamānaṃ aññena vā vaṭṭitaṃ bahi gacchati, rakkhatiyevā’’ti iminā vacanena sametīti yuttataro viya dissati. Suṅkaṭṭhānassa anto pavisitvā puna paccāgacchatopi tena passena paricchedaṃ atikkamantassa yadi tatopi gacchantānaṃ hatthato suṅkaṃ gaṇhanti, sīmātikkame pārājikameva.
“Hatthisuttādīsu”指《象学》等处。“在此处”指如前所述,以车等方式运出时。所谓“无犯”,此处因有“亲手”一语,若令人运出,则无犯。“Idha”指此不与取学处;“Tatra”指彼羊毛学处。“Honti”中的“iti”表原因:因为羊毛为应舍,故犯波逸提。此处无犯,指此学处中因无盗取,故无犯。“Upacāra”是指从税关界限向外,四周各两土块投掷距离之内的近处区域。若进入那样的近处绕行,其中有过患,故犯恶作。“Ettha”指税关处。至于“两土块投掷距离”,这一规定是依师承而来——为说明此义,大结文如是说。显示巴利原文
Hatthisuttādīsūti hatthisikkhādīsu. Imasmiṃ ṭhāneti yathāvuttayānādīhi vuttappakārena nīharaṇe. Anāpattīti tattha ‘‘sahatthā’’ti vacanato aññena nīharāpentassa anāpatti. Idhāti imasmiṃ adinnādānasikkhāpade. Tatrāti tasmiṃ eḷakalomasikkhāpade. Hontīti ettha iti-saddo hetuattho, yasmā eḷakalomāni nissaggiyāni honti, tasmā pācittiyanti attho. Idha anāpattīti imasmiṃ sikkhāpade avahārābhāvā anāpatti. Upacāranti suṅkaghātaparicchedato bahi samantā dvinnaṃ leḍḍupātānaṃ abbhantaraṃ vatiāsannappadesasaṅkhātaṃ upacāraṃ. Tādisaṃ upacāraṃ okkamitvā pariharaṇe sādīnavattā dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ. Etthāti suṅkaghāte. ‘‘Dvīhi leḍḍupātehīti ayaṃ niyamo ācariyaparamparābhato’’ti mahāgaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ.
生物事释义显示巴利原文
Pāṇakathāvaṇṇanā
114 在生物事中,因旁生绝无可能具有构成盗取的价值,故说“开示绝对不足以构成偷盗的生物”。“运走自由人者无盗取”,因其非他人所占有。“自由人”指非奴隶者。“被抵押者”是指被父母在借款时交给债主,说“在还债之前,此人留在你们身边”。因为父母并非子女的主人,一如奴隶之主人;而收留他的人,也只是对其手工劳动拥有主权,并非对其人身拥有主权,故说“无盗取”。关于“财物在存放处增长”,三处结文中说:“连同增长,所取财物归于盗取者之颈。”显示巴利原文
114. Pāṇakathāyaṃ tiracchānagatassa ekantena pādagghanakatā na sambhavatīti āha – ‘‘ekaṃsena avahārakappahonakapāṇaṃ dassento’’ti. Bhujissaṃ harantassa avahāro natthīti parapariggahitābhāvato. Bhujissoti adāso. Āṭhapitoti mātāpitūhi iṇaṃ gaṇhantehi ‘‘yāva iṇadānā ayaṃ tumhākaṃ santike hotū’’ti iṇadāyakānaṃ niyyātito. Yasmā mātāpitaro dāsānaṃ viya puttānaṃ na sāmino. Yesañca santike āṭhapito, tepi tassa hatthakamme sāmino, na tassāti āha ‘‘avahāro natthī’’ti. Dhanaṃ pana gataṭṭhāne vaḍḍhatīti ettha ‘‘āṭhapetvā gahitadhanaṃ vaḍḍhiyā saha avahārakassa gīvā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ.
在“内生……是偷盗”一句中,应知:依各地习俗,自献其身而成为奴隶者,若行偷盗,亦犯波罗夷。如“家婢女腹中所生之奴仆”,此亦有此可能,故取其可能之义而说。然而,在家婢女腹中由他人所生者,也包含在此处。所谓“从战场带来者”,即被俘获者。因此说“从外地打击……”等。其中,“从外地打击”是指被强盗、国王、大臣等大盗从外地劫掠而来。“于波罗夷无犯”是指,若因其言而未加快速,则无犯。“以婉转语”是指以间接言辞。在杀人戒中,因说到“或赞叹死亡的美好”,故虽以间接语说亦不得脱罪;但在此处,因唯说“取未给予的、称为偷盗之物”,故以间接语说即可脱罪。显示巴利原文
Antojāta…pe… avahāro hotīti ettha padesacārittavasena attanāva attānaṃ niyyātetvā dāsabyaṃ upagataṃ avaharantassapi pārājikamevāti veditabbaṃ. Gehadāsiyā kucchimhi dāsassa jātoti evampi sambhavatīti sambhavantaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Gehadāsiyā kucchismiṃ pana aññassa jātopi ettheva saṅgahito. Karamarānīto nāma bandhagāhagahito. Tenāha ‘‘paradesato paharitvā’’tiādi. Tattha paradesato paharitvāti paradesaṃ vilumpakehi rājarājamahāmattādīhi mahācorehi paradesato paharitvā. Anāpatti pārājikassāti yadi tassa vacanena tato adhikaṃ vegaṃ na vaḍḍheti, anāpatti. Pariyāyenāti pariyāyavacanena. Manussaviggahe ‘‘maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyyā’’ti vuttattā pariyāyakathāyapi na muccati, idha pana ‘‘adinnaṃ theyyasaṅkhātaṃ ādiyeyyā’’ti ādānasseva vuttattā pariyāyakathāya muccati.
无足事释义显示巴利原文
Apadakathāvaṇṇanā
在无足事中,“以名”是指以蛇的名称或以主人所起的名来称呼。“箱盖”指箱子的盖子。“撞击”指打击。显示巴利原文
Apadakathāyaṃ nāmenāti sappanāmena vā sāmikena katanāmena vā. Karaṇḍapuṭanti peḷāya pidhānaṃ. Āhaccāti paharitvā.
四足事释义显示巴利原文
Catuppadakathāvaṇṇanā
116 在四足事中,“bhiṅkacchāpa”指因发出“bhiṅka bhiṅka”的叫声而得名的幼象。“在内院中”指在有围墙的内院中。“在王宫广场”指在有围墙的城市中,从宅门之外的王宫广场处。“象厩处”指从卸鞍处到饮水槽之间的地方。“住于城外者”是就有围墙的城市而言;若无围墙的城市,即使住在城内,其所在之处即为住处。“破门”指自己所弄破的门。“断枝”指折断的树枝。“对躺卧者有二”指连同绑缚在内共构成二罪。关于“杀害”此处,诸师长说:“以盗心毁坏者,由于是共同加行,唯犯恶作,不犯波逸提。”显示巴利原文
116. Catuppadakathāyaṃ bhiṅkacchāpanti bhiṅkabhiṅkāti saddāyanato evaṃladdhanāmaṃ hatthipotakaṃ. Antovatthumhīti parikkhitte antovatthumhi. Rājaṅgaṇeti parikkhitte nagare vatthudvārato bahirājaṅgaṇe. Hatthisālā ṭhānanti nibbakosato udakapātabbhantaraṃ ṭhānaṃ. Bahinagare ṭhitassāti parikkhittanagaraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, aparikkhittanagare pana antonagare ṭhitassapi ṭhitaṭṭhānameva ṭhānaṃ. Khaṇḍadvāranti attanā khaṇḍitadvāraṃ. Sākhābhaṅganti bhañjitasākhaṃ. Nipannassa dveti bandhanena saddhiṃ dve. Ghātetīti ettha ‘‘theyyacittena vināsentassa sahapayogattā dukkaṭameva, na pācittiya’’nti ācariyā vadanti.
寄托物事释义显示巴利原文
Oṇirakkhakathāvaṇṇanā
在寄托物事中,“oṇi”意为被带来、被取来。他们说:“放在寄托物保管者近旁的物品,如同寄存物一般,并非为了保管而安放,只是为了暂时观看而搁置,因此仅仅将其从原位移开,即构成波罗夷。”显示巴利原文
Oṇirakkhakathāyaṃ oṇinti oṇītaṃ, ānītanti attho. ‘‘Oṇirakkhassa santike ṭhapitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ upanidhi viya saṅgopanatthāya anikkhipitvā muhuttaṃ olokanatthāya ṭhapitattā tassa ṭhānācāvanamattena pārājikaṃ janetī’’ti vadanti.
共谋偷盗事释义显示巴利原文
Saṃvidāvahārakathāvaṇṇanā
在共谋偷盗一事中,律文总说“众人共谋后,由一人偷取物品,则所有人皆犯波罗夷”,由此可知:教唆者于教唆之际即犯戒,偷盗者则于取物时犯戒。应如理分别其义,正如教唆事中所说:“他偷取该物品,所有人皆犯波罗夷。”此处,教唆者犯戒的刹那正是教唆之时。正如复注将说:“若该物品必定被带走,则由‘所有人皆犯波罗夷’一语可知,此人于彼时即犯波罗夷,此理当遍知一切处。”在共谋偷盗中,不应说“无有教唆”,因为律文有言:“诸弟子中,每人各得一摩沙迦,此为亲手偷盗,而有五教唆。”既有教唆,便应认许教唆者于教唆当下犯戒,而非于取物时。显示巴利原文
Saṃvidāvahārakathāyaṃ ‘‘sambahulā saṃvidahitvā eko bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati, āpatti sabbesaṃ pārājikassā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ avisesena vuttattā āṇāpakānaṃ āṇattikkhaṇe āpatti, avahārakassa uddhāreti yathāsambhavaṃ yojetvā attho gahetabbo āṇattikathāyaṃ ‘‘so taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati, āpatti sabbesaṃ pārājikassā’’tiādīsu viya. Etthāpi hi āṇāpakassa āṇattikkhaṇeyeva āpatti vuttā. Tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘atha taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avassaṃ hāriyaṃ hoti, yaṃ parato sabbesaṃ āpatti pārājikassāti vuttaṃ, tato imassa taṅkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ hotīti ayaṃ yutti sabbattha veditabbā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.121). Saṃvidāvahāre ca ‘‘āṇatti natthī’’ti na vattabbā ‘‘antevāsikesu ekamekassa ekeko māsako sāhatthiko hoti, pañca āṇattikā’’ti vacanato. Āṇattiyā ca sati āṇāpakassa āṇattikkhaṇeyeva āpatti icchitabbā, na uddhāre.
若如此,何故说“他们中一人偷取物品,于其取物时,所有人皆犯波罗夷”?此无过失。此处,为显明所有人皆犯戒,兼示偷盗者亦有犯戒可能,故说“于其取物时,所有人皆犯波罗夷”,而非为显示教唆者亦唯于取物时犯戒;当如此领会其义。于“众人教唆一人:‘去,将彼物取来’——在其取物时,所有人皆犯波罗夷”等句中,亦应如此取其义。或者,于共谋偷盗中,教唆者们亦唯于取物时犯戒,非于教唆当下——此是其特有之相,应依诸注疏师之权威而信受;或者应依其他方式,如理思惟,令注疏前后不相乖违,而后信受。显示巴利原文
Yadi evaṃ ‘‘tesu eko bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati, tassuddhāre sabbesaṃ pārājika’’nti kasmā vuttanti? Nāyaṃ doso. Ettha hi sabbesaṃyeva āpattidassanatthaṃ avahārakassapi āpattisambhavaṭṭhānaṃ dassento ‘‘tassuddhāre sabbesaṃ pārājika’’nti āha, na pana āṇāpakānampi uddhāreyeva āpattidassanatthanti evamattho gahetabbo. ‘‘Sambahulā ekaṃ āṇāpenti ‘gacchetaṃ āharā’ti, tassuddhāre sabbesaṃ pārājika’’ntiādīsupi evameva attho gahetabbo. Atha vā saṃvidāvahāre āṇāpakānampi uddhāreyeva āpatti, na āṇattikkhaṇeti āveṇikamidaṃ lakkhaṇanti aṭṭhakathācariyappamāṇena gahetabbaṃ, ito vā aññena pakārena yathā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pubbenāparaṃ na virujjhati, tathā vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ.
“共谋后”即共同谋划后。“由此他们犯恶作”,此语是就无有可能因教唆而犯波罗夷的情形而说。若他们受教唆者必定偷取该物品,则应知他们唯犯波罗夷,而非恶作。亲手偷盗不成为教唆者之支分,教唆亦不成为亲手偷盗者之支分,以二者时间相异故,互不成为支分。实则,亲手偷盗者于移离物品原处时犯戒,而教唆则于教唆之当下犯戒,故亲手偷盗与教唆所致犯戒,时间不同。显示巴利原文
Saṃvidhāyāti saṃvidahitvā. Tena nesaṃ dukkaṭāpattiyoti āṇattivasena pārājikāpattiyā asambhave sati vuttaṃ. Yadi hi te āṇattā avassaṃ taṃ haranti, pārājikāpattiyeva nesaṃ daṭṭhabbā, na dukkaṭāpatti. Sāhatthikaṃ vā āṇattikassa āṇattikaṃ vā sāhatthikassa aṅgaṃ na hotīti bhinnakālavisayattā aññamaññassa aṅgaṃ na hoti. Tathā hi sahatthā avaharantassa ṭhānācāvane āpatti, āṇattiyā pana āṇattikkhaṇeyevāti bhinnakālavisayā sāhatthikāṇattikehi āpajjitabbāpattiyo.
暗号行事释义显示巴利原文
Saṅketakammakathāvaṇṇanā
119 关于约定行为的解说中,“依照前面关于密探的方法所说”,是指按照“在必定要被带走的物品”等所述的方法。在律藏“那约定,在前或在后”一句中,“那约定”应视为表客体义的业格,意为“对于那约定”。或者,应这样理解此处的句法:在未到达那约定之前,或超过了那约定之后。因此说:“‘今日’是指超过了那指定的约定”等。“那相状,在前或在后”一句的含义,也应同样理解。显示巴利原文
119. Saṅketakammakathāyaṃ ocarake vuttanayenevāti ‘‘avassaṃ hāriye bhaṇḍe’’tiādinā vuttanayena. Pāḷiyaṃ taṃ saṅketaṃ pure vā pacchā vāti ettha taṃ saṅketanti sāmiatthe upayogavacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tassa saṅketassāti attho. Atha vā taṃ saṅketaṃ asampatvā pure vā taṃ saṅketaṃ atikkamma pacchā vāti evamettha yojanā veditabbā. Tenevāha – ‘‘ajjāti niyāmitaṃtaṃ saṅketaṃ atikkammā’’tiādi. Taṃ nimittaṃ pure vā pacchā vāti etthāpi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.
相标行事释义显示巴利原文
Nimittakammakathāvaṇṇanā
120 在关于相状行为的解说中,眨眼等相状行为轻微且短暂,因此不可能在那一刹那即取走该物品。正如有些物品在远处,有些物品沉重,当他为了取物而走去、举起时,相状行为已落在其后。即便如此,由于从相状行为开始即已着手取物,故说以该相状而偷取。若如此,有人提出“这仅是食前的努力”之说,是否成立?不成立。因为相状行为不应视同约定行为。在约定行为中,有时间上的限定;在相状行为中,则没有。约定行为依时间而说,相状行为依动作而说,这是它们的区别。至于“该相状于前或后偷取该物品,根本者无罪”这段话,是针对那人做了相状行为后,未着手取物而自行取物的情况而说的。显示巴利原文
120. Nimittakammakathāyaṃ akkhinikhaṇādinimittakammaṃ pana lahukaṃ ittarakālaṃ, tasmā taṅkhaṇeyeva taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharituṃ na sakkā. Tathā hi kiñci bhaṇḍaṃ dūre hoti kiñci bhāriyaṃ, taṃ gahetuṃ yāva gacchati, yāva ukkhipituṃ vāyamati, tāva nimittakammassa pacchā hoti. Evaṃ santepi nimittakammato paṭṭhāya gaṇhituṃ āraddhattā teneva nimittena avaharatīti vuccati. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘purebhattapayogova eso’’ti vādo pamāṇabhāvaṃ āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati. Na hi saṅketakammaṃ viya nimittakammaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha hi kālaparicchedo atthi, idha natthi. Kālavasena hi saṅketakammaṃ vuttaṃ, kiriyāvasena nimittakammanti ayametesaṃ viseso. ‘‘Taṃ nimittaṃ pure vā pacchā vā taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati, mūlaṭṭhassa anāpattī’’ti idaṃ pana tena nimittakamme kate gaṇhituṃ anārabhitvā sayameva gaṇhantassa vasena vuttaṃ.
命令论释显示巴利原文
Āṇattikathāvaṇṇanā
121 在命令的解说中,为了不混淆而说:因为有人行约定行为与相状行为时,见到食前等或眨眼等后,便说“取吧”;有人以应取物品为所依,说“食前取如此颜色、如此形状的物品”;有人则通过“你告诉某某,某某再告诉另一人”等,按人次第而命令。因此,依时间、依动作、依物品、依人而命令时,为了使这些有约定或无约定的约定行为与相状行为不混淆。作相状想:即对“这样的物品”,以颜色、形状等作为取物之相状想。显示巴利原文
121. Āṇattikathāyaṃ asammohatthanti yasmā saṅketakammanimittakammāni karonto eko purebhattādīsu vā akkhinikhaṇanādīni vā disvā ‘‘gaṇhā’’ti vadati, eko gahetabbabhaṇḍanissitaṃ katvā ‘‘purebhattaṃ evaṃvaṇṇasaṇṭhānaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ gaṇhā’’ti vadati, eko ‘‘tvaṃ itthannāmassa pāvada, so aññassa pāvadatū’’tiādinā puggalapaṭipāṭiyā ca āṇāpeti, tasmā kālavasena kiriyāvasena bhaṇḍavasena puggalavasena ca āṇatte visaṅketāvisaṅketavasena etesu saṅketakammanimittakammesu asammohatthaṃ. Nimittasaññaṃ katvāti ‘‘īdisaṃ nāma bhaṇḍa’’nti vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivasena gahaṇassa nimittabhūtaṃ saññāṇaṃ katvā.
‘如其所欲而行’:即第二人告知第三人,第三人告知第四人,如此次第传述。若第二人直接告知第四人,则教令未如其所欲而传达,故无偷兰遮,唯有最初所说的恶作。‘即是那个’:即仅成就受持教令而未取物品,故唯有偷兰遮,既非恶作,亦非波罗夷,这是其义。‘在一切处’:即在所有此类情况中。显示巴利原文
Yathādhippāyaṃ gacchatīti dutiyo tatiyassa, tatiyo catutthassāti evaṃ paṭipāṭiyā ce vadantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sace pana dutiyo catutthassa āroceti, na yathādhippāyaṃ āṇatti gatāti nevatthi thullaccayaṃ, paṭhamaṃ vuttadukkaṭameva hoti. Tadeva hotīti bhaṇḍaggahaṇaṃ vinā kevalaṃ sāsanappaṭiggahaṇamattasseva siddhattā tadeva thullaccayaṃ hoti , na dukkaṭaṃ nāpi pārājikanti attho. Sabbatthāti īdisesu sabbaṭṭhānesu.
‘他们亦有恶作’:由于告知的因缘而有恶作。‘于仅接受时’:在此,若他必定接受,则在此之前师长已犯偷兰遮,而非在接受时才犯,应作如是观。为何他有偷兰遮?答:‘因为大众因此被驱使造作恶业。’显示巴利原文
Tesampi dukkaṭanti ārocanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ. Paṭiggahitamatteti ettha avassaṃ ce paṭiggaṇhāti, tato pubbeva ācariyassa thullaccayaṃ, na pana paṭiggahiteti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kasmā panassa thullaccayanti āha – ‘‘mahājano hi tena pāpe niyojito’’ti.
‘唯根本者有恶作’:这只是注释书的主张。然而,诸师长说:‘正因是无约定,根本者的情况在圣典中未说,故唯针对接受者说此恶作。依此,在下文已出现的各处中,对于接受者,在接受时应有恶作,应知。但由于那里没有适当之处而未说,特于此处说明。’显示巴利原文
Mūlaṭṭhasseva dukkaṭanti ayaṃ tāva aṭṭhakathānayo, ācariyā pana ‘‘visaṅketattā eva mūlaṭṭhassāti pāḷiyaṃ avuttattā paṭiggaṇhantasseva taṃ dukkaṭaṃ vuttaṃ, imināva heṭṭhā āgatavāresupi paṭiggaṇhantānaṃ paṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭaṃ veditabbaṃ, taṃ pana tattha okāsābhāvato avatvā idha vutta’’nti vadanti.
“如此,即使是命令,也唯有恶作”——这是最初因尚无成就义而宣说的。“于命令的刹那即是波罗夷”:如同道心之后紧跟着果心,于成就义的命令之思心所生起的刹那,便构成波罗夷。“因聋故”:即因高声而说,或因对方耳聋而未能听受,故如此说。在“我被你命令”这一情况中,由于已无可拒绝,且无成就义,因此主使者不犯波罗夷。“若书写于贝叶、石板等处:‘应作偷盗’而放置,即是波罗夷”——这在三本《甘提帕达》中都有说明。然而,此方式有别于间接教唆不与取,故应审察而后接受。若于贝叶上写道:“在某处有某物品,你把它偷来”,然后派人送去,若那人偷取了该物品,则是经由命令而行偷盗,命令者犯波罗夷。这是合理的。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ puna āṇattiyāpi dukkaṭameva hotīti paṭhamaṃ atthasādhakattābhāvato vuttaṃ. Āṇattikkhaṇeyeva pārājikoti maggānantaraphalaṃ viya atthasādhikāṇatticetanākkhaṇeyeva pārājiko. Badhiratāyāti uccaṃ bhaṇanto badhiratāya vā na sāvetīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Āṇatto ahaṃ tayā’’ti imasmiṃ vāre puna paṭikkhipitabbābhāvena atthasādhakattābhāvato mūlaṭṭhassa natthi pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Paṇṇe vā silāya vā yattha katthaci ‘coriyaṃ kātabba’nti likhitvā ṭhapite pārājikamevā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā adinnādānato pariyāyakathāya muccati, tasmā vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. Yadi pana ‘‘asukasmiṃ nāma ṭhāne asukaṃ nāma bhaṇḍaṃ ṭhitaṃ, taṃ avaharā’’ti paṇṇe likhitvā kassaci peseti, so ce taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avaharati, āṇattiyā avahaṭaṃ nāma hotīti yuttaṃ āṇāpakassa pārājikaṃ.
罪分别释显示巴利原文
Āpattibhedavaṇṇanā
122 “处处”:指地面、高地等处。“且显示支分”:应结合。“以物品的差别”:即依所偷物品的重、轻而有差别。“罪的差别”:即依波罗夷、偷兰遮、恶作而有的罪相差别。“被其他人类所执持的”:即为他人所执持。显示巴利原文
122.Tattha tatthāti bhūmaṭṭhathalaṭṭhādīsu. Aṅgañca dassentoti yojetabbaṃ. Vatthubhedenāti avaharitabbassa vatthussa garukalahukabhedena. Āpattibhedanti pārājikathullaccayadukkaṭānaṃ vasena āpattibhedaṃ. Manussabhūtena parena pariggahitaṃ parapariggahitaṃ.
125 “非自己物想”:以此说明他人所执持的物品。“非亲厚取、非暂时取”:以此说明他人所执持的想。“非亲厚取”:即非以亲厚而取的情形。“非暂时取”:即非作日后归还想而取的情形。“无主物”:即无有“这是我的”之执持的物品,如林中的柴、草、叶等。“舍弃物”:即因过重等原因,被樵夫等以无用想而舍弃于林中的物品。“断根物”:即已经丢失,经寻找后,由于称为执着的根已断,故为断根。“无主”:即依无主物等三种意义所指的无主物品。“两者”:即依上述定义的无主物及自己所有物。显示巴利原文
125.Naca sakasaññīti iminā pana parapariggahitaṃ vatthu kathitaṃ. Na ca vissāsaggāhī, na ca tāvakālikanti iminā pana parapariggahitasaññā kathitā. Na vissāsaggāhitāti vissāsaggāhena aggahitabhāvo. Na tāvakālikatāti pacchā dātabbataṃ katvā aggahitabhāvo. Anajjhāvutthakanti ‘‘mameda’’nti pariggahavasena anajjhāvutthakaṃ araññe dārutiṇapaṇṇādi. Chaḍḍitanti kaṭṭhahārādīhi atibhārāditāya anatthikabhāvena araññādīsu chaḍḍitaṃ. Chinnamūlakanti naṭṭhaṃ pariyesitvā ālayasaṅkhātassa mūlassa chinnattā chinnamūlaṃ. Asāmikanti anajjhāvutthakādīhi tīhi ākārehi dassitaṃ asāmikavatthu. Ubhayampīti yathāvuttalakkhaṇaṃ asāmikaṃ attano santakañca.
无罪分别释显示巴利原文
Anāpattibhedavaṇṇanā
131 他躺卧其上而命终的床,称为‘未起之床’。为了阐明‘但以心忍受’的意义,所以说‘什么也不说’。‘恢复原样’的意思:即取了多少或用掉多少,就该赔偿多少,这是所说。显示巴利原文
131. Yāya seyyāya sayito kālaṃ karoti, sā anuṭṭhānaseyyā nāma. ‘‘Cittena pana adhivāsetī’’ti vuttamatthaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘na kiñci vadatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pākatikaṃ kātunti yattakaṃ gahitaṃ paribhuttaṃ vā, tattakaṃ dātabbanti vuttaṃ hoti.
‘我将归还’的意思是:所取之物,无论是原物,或是另一件类似的,我都将归还。因为对于僧团所有物,无法令僧团许可(他人占有),而且任何物品都不应未经许可(而取用),因此说‘然而僧团所有物,只应归还’。显示巴利原文
Paṭidassāmīti yaṃ gahitaṃ, tadeva vā aññaṃ vā tādisaṃ puna dassāmīti attho. Saṅghasantake saṅghaṃ anujānāpetumasakkuṇeyyattā kassaci vatthuno ananujānitabbato ca ‘‘saṅghasantakaṃ pana paṭidātumeva vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ.
‘即使就在那个自体中生起’的意思是:即使就在那个死亡的身体中生起(为饿鬼)。应知,正如《调伏事》中所说,因对衣的渴爱,就在那死亡的身体中生为饿鬼一样。对于挂在树上等处的衣,不必多言,这是指未被人们执取的衣物而说。但如果那衣已被守护者执取,则不应取用。显示巴利原文
Tasmiṃyeva attabhāve nibbattāpīti tasmiṃyeva matasarīre uppannāpi. Vinītavatthūsu sāṭakataṇhāya tasmiṃyeva matasarīre nibbattapeto viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Rukkhādīsu laggitasāṭake vattabbameva natthīti manussehi apariggahitaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sace pana taṃ ārakkhakehi pariggahitaṃ hoti, gahetuṃ na vaṭṭatīti.
杂事论解释显示巴利原文
Pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā
在搬运木段等时,对于“这很重,你抬一端,我抬一端”——像这样由双方协力使一物移动,而说为“亲手与命令”。这是为了显示,在此类情形中,身与语仅作为支分。然而,由哪一种思所发起的努力——无论是亲手还是命令——以主要的方式完成了移动,就应依该思来判定犯戒。否则,如果亲手不是命令的支分,或命令不是亲手的支分,便成相违。显示巴利原文
Dārukhaṇḍādīsu ‘‘bhāriyamidaṃ, tvaṃ ekapassaṃ ukkhipāhi, ahaṃ ekapassaṃ ukkhipāmī’’ti ubhayesaṃ payogena ekassa vatthuno ṭhānācāvanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sāhatthikāṇattika’’nti vuttaṃ. Idañca kāyavācānaṃ īdise ṭhāne aṅgabhāvamattadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Yāya pana cetanāya samuṭṭhāpito payogo sāhatthiko āṇattiko vā padhānabhāvena ṭhānācāvanaṃ sādheti, tassā vasena āpatti kāretabbā. Aññathā sāhatthikaṃ vā āṇattikassa aṅgaṃ na hoti, āṇattikaṃ vā sāhatthikassāti idaṃ virujjhati.
调伏事解释显示巴利原文
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
132 在调伏事中,“善奔跑”即善于奔跑;“种种奔跑”即以种种不同的方式奔跑;“即使没有身语门的差别”即没有身的动作与语的差别;“以省察的力量”即以观察如此心生起之过患的力量。显示巴利原文
132. Vinītavatthūsu sandhāvatīti suṭṭhu dhāvati. Vidhāvatīti vividhā nānappakārena dhāvati. Kāyavacīdvārabhedaṃ vināpīti kāyacopanaṃ vacībhedañca vinā. Paṭisaṅkhānabalenāti tathāvidhacittuppāde ādīnavapaccavekkhaṇabalena.
135 “以提问相应”即随顺提问。言辞本身即是路径,故为言辞路径,即在此言辞路径中。因此说“仅在惯用语上”。显示巴利原文
135.Pucchāsabhāgenāti pucchānurūpena. Nirutti eva patho niruttipatho, tasmiṃ niruttipathe. Tenāha ‘‘vohāravacanamatte’’ti.
137 137. “随业而去”以此显示其死亡的状态。“在温热的(身体)”,这也是以同义语来阐明,故说“在尚有体温的身体”。在异类身体,即女性身体。因为是异类身体,不应过于靠近,故说“在头部等”。因此,即使在异类身体,也可以自行按所述方式取衣。然而有些人说:“虽然依此学处无犯,但触摸女性形相者得恶作。”显示巴利原文
137.Yathākammaṃ gatoti iminā tassa matabhāvaṃ dasseti. Abbhuṇheti imināpi vuttameva pariyāyantarena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘allasarīre’’ti vuttaṃ. Visabhāgasarīreti itthisarīre. Visabhāgasarīrattā accāsannena na bhavitabbanti āha ‘‘sīse vā’’tiādi. Vaṭṭatīti visabhāgasarīrepi attanāva vuttavidhiṃ kātuṃ sāṭakañca gahetuṃ vaṭṭati. Keci pana ‘‘kiñcāpi iminā sikkhāpadena anāpatti, itthirūpaṃ pana āmasantassa dukkaṭa’’nti vadanti.
138 138. “将草翻转”即把草翻转过来。“以伪量、伪币等”——其中的“等”字包含了伪秤、伪铜器、欺骗等。其中,伪量由破坏内腔、破坏顶部、破坏绳索三者而有三种。其中,“内腔”指量器等的内部,破坏它即穿孔,称为破坏内腔,这见于量取酥油等时。因为取用时,用底部有孔的量器,一边说“慢慢倒入”,一边让很多流入下面的容器而取;给予时,则堵住孔,快速装满而给。破坏顶部见于量取芝麻、稻谷等时。因为取用时,慢慢把顶部堆高而取;给予时,快速装满后削平顶部而给。破坏绳索见于丈量田地等时。因为丈量田地等时,把不大的量成大的,把大的量成不大的。伪币则是显而易见的。显示巴利原文
138.Kusaṃ saṅkāmetvāti kusaṃ parivattetvā. Kūṭamānakūṭakahāpaṇādīhīti ādi-saddena tulākūṭakaṃsakūṭavañcanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha kūṭamānaṃ hadayabhedasikhābhedarajjubhedavasena tividhaṃ hoti. Tattha hadayanti nāḷiādimānabhājanānaṃ abbhantaraṃ, tassa bhedo chiddakaraṇaṃ hadayabhedo, so sappitelādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto heṭṭhāchiddena mānena ‘‘saṇikaṃ āsiñcā’’ti vatvā antobhājane bahuṃ paggharāpetvā gaṇhāti, dadanto chiddaṃ pidhāya sīghaṃ pūretvā deti. Sikhābhedo tilataṇḍulādiminanakāle labbhati. Tāni hi gaṇhanto saṇikaṃ sikhaṃ ussāpetvā gaṇhāti, dento vegena pūretvā sikhaṃ chindanto deti. Rajjubhedo khettavatthuminanakāle labbhati. Khettādiṃ minantā hi amahantampi mahantaṃ katvā minanti, mahantampi amahantaṃ. Kūṭakahāpaṇo pākaṭoyeva.
伪秤则有伪形、伪肢、伪执、伪覆四种。其中,伪形,指将两个秤做成相同形状,取用时用大的秤取,给予时用小的秤给。伪肢,指取用时用手在后方压秤,给予时在前方压秤。伪执,指取用时握绳的根部,给予时握顶端。伪覆,指将秤做成中空,内部放入铁粉,取用时将铁粉移到后方,给予时移到顶端。显示巴利原文
Tulākūṭaṃ pana rūpakūṭaṃ aṅgakūṭaṃ gahaṇakūṭaṃ paṭicchannakūṭanti catubbidhaṃ hoti. Tattha rūpakūṭaṃ nāma dve tulā sarūpā katvā gaṇhanto mahatiyā gaṇhāti, dadanto khuddikāya deti. Aṅgakūṭaṃ nāma gaṇhanto pacchābhāge hatthena tulaṃ akkamati, dadanto pubbabhāge akkamati. Gahaṇakūṭaṃ nāma gaṇhanto mūle rajjuṃ gaṇhāti, dadanto agge. Paṭicchannakūṭaṃ nāma tulaṃ susiraṃ katvā anto ayacuṇṇaṃ pakkhipitvā gaṇhanto taṃ pacchābhāge karoti, dadanto aggabhāge.
铜器被说成是金碗,以此进行的欺骗,称为伪铜器。如何进行呢?先制作一只金碗,再将另外两三只铁碗做成金色的,然后进入乡间某个富户家,问道:“要买金器吗?”当被询价时,他们表示愿意以较便宜的价格出售。这时,对方若问:“怎么知道这些是金的?”他们便说:“检验后再买吧。”于是将金碗在石头上擦拭,随后把所有的碗交给对方便离去。显示巴利原文
Kaṃso vuccati suvaṇṇapāti, tāya vañcanaṃ kaṃsakūṭaṃ. Kathaṃ? Ekaṃ suvaṇṇapātiṃ katvā aññā dve tisso lohapātiyo suvaṇṇavaṇṇā karonti, tato janapadaṃ gantvā kiñcideva aḍḍhaṃ kulaṃ pavisitvā ‘‘suvaṇṇabhājanāni kiṇathā’’ti vatvā agghe pucchite samagghataraṃ dātukāmā honti. Tato tehi ‘‘kathaṃ imesaṃ suvaṇṇabhāvo jānitabbo’’ti vutte ‘‘vīmaṃsitvā gaṇhathā’’ti suvaṇṇapātiṃ pāsāṇe ghaṃsitvā sabbapātiyo datvā gacchanti.
欺骗,即用各种手段欺诳他人。于此有一则事例:据说,有位猎人捉了一只母鹿和一只小鹿,正往回走。一个骗子问他:“喂,这母鹿值多少钱?小鹿值多少钱?”猎人答:“母鹿两个钱币,小鹿一个钱币。”骗子于是付了一个钱币,拿走小鹿,走了一小段路后又折返回来,说:“喂,我不要这小鹿了,把母鹿给我吧。”猎人说:“那你得给两个钱币。”骗子说:“喂,我之前不是给了一个钱币吗?”猎人答:“是,给了。”骗子便说:“那你把这小鹿拿回去,这样,那一个钱币,加上这只值一个钱币的小鹿,正好就是两个钱币了。”猎人以为“他说得有道理”,便收下小鹿,把母鹿给了他。显示巴利原文
Vañcanaṃ nāma tehi tehi upāyehi paresaṃ vañcanaṃ. Tatridamekaṃ vatthu – eko kira luddako migañca migapotakañca gahetvā āgacchati. Tameko dhutto ‘‘kiṃ, bho, migo agghati, kiṃ migapotako’’ti āha. ‘‘Migo dve kahāpaṇe, migapotako eka’’nti ca vutte ekaṃ kahāpaṇaṃ datvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā thokaṃ gantvā nivatto ‘‘na me, bho, migapotakena attho, migaṃ me dehī’’ti āha. Tena hi dve kahāpaṇe dehīti. So āha – ‘‘nanu, bho, mayā paṭhamaṃ eko kahāpaṇo dinno’’ti? ‘‘Āma dinno’’ti. ‘‘Imaṃ migapotakaṃ gaṇha, evaṃ so ca kahāpaṇo, ayañca kahāpaṇagghanako migapotakoti dve kahāpaṇā bhavissantī’’ti. So ‘‘kāraṇaṃ vadatī’’ti sallakkhetvā migapotakaṃ gahetvā migaṃ adāsīti.
以强力,即用力量。此处所说的拦路抢劫,也包括了雪阻和丛阻。其中,在下雪时节,藏身于雪中,劫掠行路之人,这便是雪阻。藏身于丛林等处,劫掠众人,这便是丛阻。显示巴利原文
Balasāti balena. Panthaghāta-ggahaṇena himaviparāmosagumbaviparāmosāpi saṅgahitā. Tattha yaṃ himapātasamaye himena paṭicchannā hutvā maggappaṭipannaṃ janaṃ mūsanti, ayaṃ himaviparāmoso. Yaṃ gummādīhi paṭicchannā janaṃ mūsanti, ayaṃ gumbaviparāmoso.
“应举出波罗夷”一句,是由于“若有布,我便取”的意图已生起,且该处确实有布。“应以句数定罪”,是因为未将布放置于地面便进行了检查而说的。“被缠缚”是被跟随。由于见后生喜,故不见有以意图而取的情况,藉此显示以意图而取的不可能,进而阐明《大灯》等所述为不合理。然而,通过“《大注》云”等语,显示以意图而取的可能性及其与圣典的相符,从而表明《大注》所述方为善说。因此,《本母注》中也展示了《大注》的意趣。显示巴利原文
Uddhāreyevapārājikanti ‘‘sace sāṭako bhavissati, gaṇhissāmī’’ti parikappassa pavattattā sāṭakassa ca tattha sabbhāvato. Padavārena kāretabboti bhūmiyaṃ anikkhipitvāva vīmaṃsitattā vuttaṃ. Pariyuṭṭhitoti anubaddho. Disvā haṭattā parikappāvahāro na dissatīti iminā parikappāvahārassa asambhavaṃ dassento mahāpaccariādīsu vuttassa ayuttabhāvaṃ vibhāveti. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyantiādinā pana parikappāvahārasambhavaṃ pāḷiyā saṃsandanabhāvañca vibhāvento mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttameva suvuttanti dīpeti. Teneva mātikāṭṭhakathāyampi mahāaṭṭhakathānayova dassito.
“某些”是指《大注》本身中的一些论师。而“在《大灯》中”的“而”字,其作用在于显示某些论者的说法与《大灯》论者的说法有特别的差异。藉此显示,某些论者的说法与《大灯》论者的说法亦不相合。并说明,正是由于《大注》的理趣也与《大灯》论者的说法相符,故更为合理。显示巴利原文
Kecīti mahāaṭṭhakathāyameva ekacce ācariyā. Mahāpaccariyaṃ panāti pana-saddo kecivādato mahāpaccarivādassa visesasandassanattho. Tena kecivādo mahāpaccarivādenapi na sametīti dasseti. Mahāaṭṭhakathānayo eva ca mahāpaccarivādenapi saṃsandanato yuttataroti vibhāveti.
“装饰品”是指指环等装饰品。“放下草标”是指放下任何以藤条或棕榈叶等制成的标记草标。“价值更低”是指价值较次。由于从他人的份额中哪怕拔起了草标,也还不算草标的转换,故说“在拔起时守护”。“缝制品”是指产于西维国之物。显示巴利原文
Alaṅkārabhaṇḍanti aṅgulimuddikādi alaṅkārabhaṇḍaṃ. Kusaṃ pātetvāti vilīvamayaṃ vā tālapaṇṇamayaṃ vā katasaññāṇaṃ yaṃ kiñci kusaṃ pātetvā. Samagghataranti appagghataraṃ. Parakoṭṭhāsato kuse uddhaṭepi na tāva kusassa parivattanaṃ jātanti vuttaṃ ‘‘uddhāre rakkhatī’’ti. Siveyyakanti siviraṭṭhe jātaṃ.
139 关于暖房这件事,由于阿难长老知道其中无犯,所以没有记载“他起了恶作”;又因为他自己没有向世尊报告,因此没有使用单数词“报告了”。显示巴利原文
139. Jantāgharavatthusmiṃ yasmā ānandatthero tattha anāpattibhāvaṃ jānāti, tasmā ‘‘tassa kukkuccaṃ ahosī’’ti na vuttaṃ. Yasmā ca sayaṃ bhagavato nārocesi, tasmā ‘‘ārocesī’’ti ekavacanaṃ na vuttaṃ.
140 “残食”:指吃剩的或丢弃的食物。“令作净后”:指令煮熟后。“为了自我保护”:指为了避免由此而来的灾祸而保护自己。因为被饥饿逼迫的狮子等,可能会伤害那些抓取其食物的人。“出于悲悯他人”:指出于对狮子等其他众生的悲悯。因为若为了消除它们的饥饿,却赶走并抓取它们正在吃的食物,那对它们而言便不成为悲悯了。显示巴利原文
140.Vighāsanti khāditāvasesaṃ ucchiṭṭhaṃ vā. Kappiyaṃ kārāpetvāti pacāpetvā. Attaguttatthāyāti taṃnimittaupaddavato attānaṃ rakkhaṇatthāya. Jighacchābhibhūtā hi sīhādayo attanā khādiyamānaṃ gaṇhantānaṃ anatthampi kareyyuṃ. Parānuddayatāyāti sīhādīsu parasattesu anukampāya. Jighacchāvinodanatthañhi tehi khādiyamānaṃ te palāpetvā gaṇhato tesu anukampā nāma na bhavissati.
141 “如同在三熟米粥这件事中”,是基于妄语的共通性而说的。“被命令者”:指被公认者所命令的人。“被命令”:指被物主所命令。“给另一人的份额”:由于指向一个不存在的人而拿取,因此称为“物品应赔偿”。“由其他人”:指上述公认者等四人以外的其他人。即便说“再给另一份”,因为是僧团物,无根据而拿取,所以称为“应以物品价值处罚”。由其他人所给予的,是指由公认者或他所命令的人所给予的。如此拿取,即说“再给另一份”后拿取,或通过计算虚假的年份后拿取。“善施”是指:先前由物主或他所命令的人施给在家人之物,若说“给另一人的份额”而拿取,由于另一人并不存在,那实际上是有主物,因此构成物品应赔偿。但在这种情况下,当他们这样给予时,说“再给另一份”后拿取,或计算虚假年份后拿取,由于说了“给”,因此除了构成向非亲戚乞求外,既不是波罗夷,也不是物品应赔偿,而是善施。显示巴利原文
141.Tekaṭulayāguvatthumhi viyāti musāvādasāmaññato vuttaṃ. Āṇattehīti sammatena āṇattehi. Āṇattenāti sāmikehi āṇattena. Aparassa bhāgaṃ dehīti asantaṃ puggalaṃ dassetvā gahitattā ‘‘bhaṇḍadeyya’’nti vuttaṃ. Aññenāti yathāvuttehi sammatādīhi catūhi aññena. ‘‘Aparampi bhāgaṃ dehī’’ti vuttepi saṅghasantakattā amūlakameva gahitanti ‘‘uddhāreyeva bhaṇḍagghena kāretabbo’’ti vuttaṃ. Itarehi dīyamānanti sammatena, tena āṇattena vā dīyamānaṃ. Evaṃ gaṇhatoti ‘‘aparampi bhāgaṃ dehī’’ti vatvā vā kūṭavassāni gaṇetvā vā gaṇhato. Sudinnanti heṭṭhā sāmikena, tena āṇattena vā dīyamānaṃ gihisantakaṃ ‘‘aparassa bhāgaṃ dehī’’ti vatvā gaṇhato aparassa abhāvato sāmisantakameva hotīti bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ jātaṃ. Idha pana tehi evaṃ dīyamānaṃ ‘‘aparampi bhāgaṃ dehīti vatvā vā kūṭavassāni gaṇetvā vā gaṇhato dehī’’ti vuttattā aññātakaviññattimattaṃ ṭhapetvā neva pārājikaṃ na bhaṇḍadeyyanti sudinnameva hoti.
142-3 关于资具诸事中所说的资具,与前述物品有何差别?凡未经制作成适合受用的装饰品等形式、按其本来状态放置的,称为物品。若经过制作,以适合受用的形式放置的装饰品等,当知即为资具。显示巴利原文
142-3. Parikkhāravatthūsu vuttaparikkhārassa heṭṭhā vuttabhaṇḍassa ca ko viseso? Yaṃ paribhogayoggaṃ ābharaṇādirūpaṃ akatvā yathāsabhāvato ṭhapitaṃ, taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ. Yaṃ pana tathā katvā paribhuñjituṃ anucchavikākārena ṭhapitaṃ ābharaṇādikaṃ, taṃ parikkhāranti veditabbaṃ.
144-146 “移开后”是指从原放置处挪开。“袋”是指鞋袋等任何一种袋子。在令人取来时,应当赔偿物品。这是依据“对所取之物感到满意”的说法,若物主不满意,纵使已被取走,也仍必须归还,故如此说。又依据“应由在场的比丘们分配”的说法,应分配之物仅限在近行界范围内的,所以说“唯有站立在近行界内者才适合拿取”。显示巴利原文
144-146.Saṅkāmetvāti ṭhitaṭṭhānato apanetvā. Thavikanti upāhanatthavikādi yaṃkiñci thavikaṃ. Āharāpentesu bhaṇḍadeyyanti ‘‘gahite attamano hotī’’ti (mahāva. 356) vacanato anattamanassa santakaṃ gahitampi puna dātabbamevāti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sammukhībhūtehi bhājetabba’’nti (mahāva. 379) vacanato bhājanīyabhaṇḍaṃ upacārasīmaṭṭhānaṃyeva pāpuṇātīti āha ‘‘upacārasīmāyaṃ ṭhitasseva gahetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti.
148-9 他们说:“‘物品应赔偿’,是指当双方都有所有权时,可以将其给予前来的盗贼或物主中的任何一方。”同样的道理:若以粪扫衣想而拿取,为物品应赔偿;若以盗心拿取,则犯波罗夷,这是其含义。“于村落中”是指于村落的人们中,此处以“村落”一词指称村落里的人。“于逃离时”是指舍离村落而逃散之时。“于人们再次居住时”是指各地的人们又返回居住之时。显示巴利原文
148-9.‘‘Bhaṇḍadeyyanti ubhinnaṃ sālayabhāve sati corassa vā sāmikassa vā sampattassa kassaci dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti. Eseva nayoti paṃsukūlasaññāya gahite bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ, theyyacittena pārājikanti attho. Gāmesūti gāmikesu manussesu. Gāma-ggahaṇena hettha gāmaṭṭhā vuttā. Vuṭṭhahantesūti gāmaṃ chaḍḍetvā palāyantesu. Puna āvasante janapadeti jānapadikesu puna āgantvā vasantesu.
“有精进者或无精进者”,这是总括而言,即不执取差别而作一般性说明。因为并非仅有少数人有精进时,僧物便成为非僧物——这是此处要旨。所谓“仅以有精进为准则”,是就物主已被限定而言。从彼处——即从僧团所有或个人所有物中——为住所而指定,这仅是举例;于四资具中,为任何一者而指定,亦同此理。以自主权,即无论是否询问他人,皆无应作之义务,唯以此为准,如此依自主权而行。应按价值处罚,即依其价值处以恶作或偷兰遮。以自主权受用者的过失,不仅限于此处;下文中,为摄受俗家或以自主权而施与者,亦属过失。称为善食,是因在精舍内坐下,并已行犍椎等规定,故为善食。僧团的分配物,无论于精舍内或界外:若在界外,界内者不可作白二甘马分配;然而,若在两地,界内者作白二甘马分配,则是可以的。因此,三处结文皆说:“因在精舍内坐下,如此而行,故说善食。”此义将于雨安居犍度注释中阐明。显示巴利原文
Avisesena vuttanti ‘‘saussāhā vā nirussāhā vā’’ti visesaṃ aparāmasitvā sāmaññato vuttaṃ. Na hi katipayānaṃ anussāhe sati saṅghikaṃ asaṅghikaṃ hotīti ayamettha adhippāyo. Saussāhamattameva pamāṇanti sāmikānaṃ paricchinnabhāvato vuttaṃ. Tatoti gaṇasantakato puggalasantakato vā. Senāsanatthāya niyamitanti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ, catūsu paccayesu yassa kassaci atthāya niyamitepi vuttanayameva. Issaravatāyāti paraṃ āpucchitvā vā anāpucchitvā vā dātabbakiccaṃ natthi, ayamevettha pamāṇanti evaṃ attano issarabhāvena. Agghena kāretabboti agghānurūpaṃ dukkaṭena thullaccayena vā kāretabbo. Issaravatāya paribhuñjato gīvāti na kevalaṃ ettheva gīvā, heṭṭhā kulasaṅgahatthāya issaravatāya vā dinnepi gīvāyeva. Sukhāditamevāti antovihāre nisīditvā ghaṇṭippaharaṇādivuttavidhānassa katattā sukhāditaṃ. Saṅghikañhi vebhaṅgiyabhaṇḍaṃ antovihāre vā bahisīmāya vā hotu, bahisīmāyaṃ ṭhitehi apaloketvā bhājetuṃ na vaṭṭati, ubhayattha ṭhitampi pana antosīmāyaṃ ṭhitehi apaloketvā bhājetuṃ vaṭṭatiyeva. Teneva tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ ‘‘vihāreyeva nisīditvā evaṃ katattā sukhāditanti āhā’’ti. Ayañca attho vassūpanāyikakkhandhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ āvi bhavissati.
150 于所说语事中,律藏所言“一套衣”即一对衣。“秤”即一百巴拉。“斗”约十六那利。作限定后,即依所欲的量,或以价值或以衣等资具作限定。指责,即“诸尊者未作限定而说”,以此加罪。显示巴利原文
150. Vuttavādakavatthūsu pāḷiyaṃ yugasāṭakanti sāṭakayugaṃ. Tulanti palasataṃ. Doṇanti soḷasanāḷimattaṃ. Paricchedaṃ pana katvāti yattakaṃ icchitaṃ, tattakaṃ agghavasena vā cīvarādipaccayavasena vā paricchedaṃ katvā. Upārambhāti ‘‘bhadantā aparicchedaṃ katvā vadantī’’ti evaṃ dosāropanato.
153 “内心饥饿”指被饥饿之苦逼迫的自身相续。“小弓”即小型弓。“被缚”即横向被缚。“被狗咬住”指被主人放开的狗所咬住。“连同棍棒一并使其落下”指在猪到来之前,预先使其落下以免被缚。“踩踏而行,应给付货物”意指应给付相当于一头猪价值的货物。因为并非所有沿该路行走的猪都会被该陷阱缚住,唯有最先行走的一头被缚,故应给付相当于一头猪价值的货物。“事后自行前往”指并非因彼所设机关,而是事后自行前往。上文所述此类情形,亦同此理。“先行取出而丢弃”即预先取出而丢弃。“于寺院地界”指寺院周边的林野地带。“请求守护”即前往国王、大臣等处,专程请求守护。显示巴利原文
153.Chātajjhattanti jighacchādukkhena pīḷitaattasantānaṃ. Dhanukanti khuddakadhanukaṃ. Baddho hotīti tiriyaṃ baddho hoti. Sunakhadaṭṭhanti sāmikehi vissajjitasunakhena gahitaṃ. Yaṭṭhiyā saha pātetīti sūkarassa āgamanato puretarameva tattha abajjhanatthāya pāteti. Maddanto gacchati, bhaṇḍadeyyanti ekasūkaragghanakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ dātabbaṃ. Na hi tena maggena gacchantā sabbeva sūkarā tena pāsena bajjhanti, ekoyeva paṭhamataraṃ gacchanto bajjhati, tasmā ekasūkaragghanakaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ dātabbaṃ. Pacchā gacchatīti tena katapayogena agantvā pacchā sayameva gacchati. Heṭṭhā vuttesupi īdisesu ṭhānesu eseva nayo. Uddharitvā chaḍḍetīti puretarameva uddharitvā chaḍḍeti. Vihārabhūmiyanti vihārasāmantā araññappadese. Rakkhaṃ yācitvāti rājarājamahāmattādīnaṃ santikaṃ gantvā anuddissa rakkhaṃ yācitvā.
“笼口”:即鱼笼内部供鱼进入的口。“投入草丛”指投入鱼笼,应给付货物;也就是说,应按应进入笼内之鱼的价值来给付货物。显示巴利原文
Kumīnamukhanti kumīnassa anto macchānaṃ pavisanamukhaṃ. Gumbe khipati, bhaṇḍadeyyamevāti kumīnassa anto pavisitabbānaṃ macchānaṃ agghena bhaṇḍadeyyaṃ.
156 156. “限定比丘数”:指以二十、三十等数目限定比丘的住处,故称“限定比丘数”。“诸长老”:指客来的长老们。“他们亦”:即常住比丘们也如此。“为受用”:指为僧团受用而受用。其中,“取”应视为省略词。“于何处”:即于某住处。“知有其他”:指知道有其他客来比丘。“于彼处”:即于这样的住处。“分而食”:意指也分给到来的客比丘后而食,这是此处意旨。关于四资具的如法运用:即售卖芒果等果实后,如法运用于衣等四资具中。指定用于衣的施与:即“这些树上的果实售卖后,应只用于衣,不应分食”,如此指定施与。对于他们,客比丘无权:因这是专为资具受用而指定施与的,故没有分食的权利。显示巴利原文
156. Vīsatiṃsādivasena paricchinnā bhikkhū etthāti paricchinnabhikkhukaṃ. Therānanti āgantukattherānaṃ . Tesampīti āvāsikabhikkhūnampi. Paribhogatthāyāti saṅghikaparibhogavasena paribhuñjanatthāya. Gahaṇeti pāṭhaseso daṭṭhabbo. Yatthāti yasmiṃ āvāse. Aññesaṃ atthibhāvanti aññesaṃ āgantukabhikkhūnaṃ atthibhāvaṃ. Tatthāti tādise āvāse. Bhājetvā khādantīti āgantukānampi sampattānaṃ bhājetvā khādantīti adhippāyo. Catūsu paccayesu sammā upanentīti ambaphalādīni vikkiṇitvā cīvarādīsu catūsu paccayesu sammā upanenti. Cīvaratthāya niyametvā dinnāti ‘‘imesaṃ rukkhānaṃ phalāni vikkiṇitvā cīvaresuyeva upanetabbāni, na bhājetvā khāditabbānī’’ti evaṃ niyametvā dinnā. Tesupi āgantukāanissarāti paccayaparibhogatthāya niyametvā dinnattā bhājetvā khādituṃ anissarā.
“于他们不应……停留”:此处意指客比丘应按前文所述方式分食后而停留。“应依他们的规约而停留”:即依常住比丘所立的规约,如“不应分食”,或“我们将采摘若干棵树的果实”,或“我们将采摘若干果实”,或“我们将在若干日内采摘”,或“我们将不采摘任何”,客比丘应依这些规约而停留。大注中以“无权”一词所显示的意义,在大护法注中以“四资具”等作了详细开示。“唯以受用”中的“唯”字是无义助词。应连接为“以受用而分彼”。“于此”:即于此精舍或此国土。“住所资具”:指精舍本身以及为此目的而指定安置的物品。显示巴利原文
Na tesu…pe… ṭhātabbanti ettha āgantukehi heṭṭhā vuttanayena bhājetvā khāditabbanti adhippāyo. Tesaṃ katikāya ṭhātabbanti ‘‘bhājetvā na khāditabba’’nti vā ‘‘ettakesu rukkhesu phalāni gaṇhissāmā’’ti vā ‘‘ettakāni phalāni gaṇhissāmā’’ti vā ‘‘ettakānaṃ divasānaṃ abbhantare gaṇhissāmā’’ti vā ‘‘na kiñci gaṇhissāmā’’ti vā evaṃ katāya āvāsikānaṃ katikāya āgantukehi ṭhātabbaṃ. Mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘anissarā’’ti vacanena dīpitoyeva attho mahāpaccariyaṃ ‘‘catunnaṃ paccayāna’’ntiādinā vitthāretvā dassito. Paribhogavasenevāti ettha eva-saddo aṭṭhānappayutto. Paribhogavasena tameva bhājetvāti yojetabbaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ vihāre raṭṭhe vā. Senāsanapaccayanti senāsanañca tadatthāya niyametvā ṭhapitañca.
所谓“以最劣为始”,即从最劣的开始着手,也就是从最劣的住所开始。住所中的草等也应从最劣的起舍弃,住所资具也应从最劣的开始舍弃。那么,“不应断根本事而运用”是什么意思呢?三部结文中首先说道:“一切住所都不应舍弃,这是所说的。”即使以最劣为始而舍弃,住所地也不应舍弃,此义已明。但我并不认可,应当审察之后,取合意之物。显示巴利原文
Lāmakakoṭiyāti lāmakaṃ ādiṃ katvā, lāmakasenāsanato paṭṭhāyāti vuttaṃ hoti. Senāsanepi tiṇādīni lāmakakoṭiyāva vissajjetabbāni, senāsanaparikkhārāpi lāmakakoṭiyāva vissajjetabbā. Mūlavatthucchedaṃ pana katvā na upanetabbanti iminā kiṃ vuttaṃ hotīti? Tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu tāva idaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbāni senāsanāni na vissajjetabbānīti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Lāmakakoṭiyā vissajjentehipi senāsanabhūmiyo na vissajjetabbāti ayamattho vutto hotīti no khanti, vīmaṃsitvā yaṃ ruccati, taṃ gahetabbaṃ.
用属于法之物供养佛,或用属于佛之物供养法,是允许,还是不允许?依据“婆私吒,如来有此同义语,即法身”以及“跋迦利,见法者即见我”等语,有人认为这是允许的。但是,有些人说:“若是如此,那么依‘诸比丘,若有人侍奉我,他应侍奉病者’之语,用属于佛之物为病者作医药也应是合理的”,因此认为不允许。此说并无道理。因为“诸比丘,若有人侍奉我,他应侍奉病者”这句话,并非指佛与病者完全相同,或侍奉二者有同等果报。此处的意思是:“若有人以遵行我的教诫而侍奉我,他应侍奉病者;病者应以遵行我的教诫而被侍奉。”不应将此理解为世尊与病者的侍奉完全等同。因此,依“阿难,我为你们所说所制的法与律,在我灭度后,就是你们的导师”之语,以及“现在我独自一人教诫、教授,我般涅槃后,这八万四千法蕴将教诫、教授你们”之语,又依赞叹多闻比丘时所说“纯陀,多闻者不是你们的声闻弟子,他名为佛”之语,加之如来尊重法故,先前的方式(以法物供佛等)更为殊胜。这是我们认可的观点。显示巴利原文
Dhammasantakena buddhapūjaṃ kātuṃ, buddhasantakena vā dhammapūjaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati, na vaṭṭatīti? ‘‘Tathāgatassa kho etaṃ vāseṭṭha adhivacanaṃ dhammakāyo itipīti ca yo kho, vakkali, dhammaṃ passati, so maṃ passatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.87) ca vacanato vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Keci pana ‘‘evaṃ sante ‘yo, bhikkhave, maṃ upaṭṭhaheyya, so gilānaṃ upaṭṭhaheyyā’ti vacanato buddhasantakena gilānassapi bhesajjaṃ kātuṃ yuttanti āpajjeyya, tasmā na vaṭṭatī’’ti vadanti, taṃ akāraṇaṃ. Na hi ‘‘yo, bhikkhave, maṃ upaṭṭhaheyya, so gilānaṃ upaṭṭhaheyyā’’ti iminā attano ca gilānassa ca ekasadisatā tadupaṭṭhānassa vā samaphalatā vuttā. Ayañhettha attho ‘‘yo maṃ ovādānusāsanīkaraṇena upaṭṭhaheyya, so gilānaṃ upaṭṭhaheyya, mama ovādakaraṇena gilāno upaṭṭhātabbo’’ti. Bhagavato ca gilānassa ca upaṭṭhānaṃ ekasadisanti evaṃ panettha attho na gahetabbo. Tasmā ‘‘yo vo, ānanda, mayā dhammo ca vinayo ca desito paññatto, so vo mamaccayena satthā’’ti vacanato ‘‘ahañca panidāni eko ovadāmi anusāsāmi, mayi parinibbute imāni caturāsīti buddhasahassāni tumhe ovadissanti anusāsissantī’’ti vuttattā ca bahussutaṃ bhikkhuṃ pasaṃsantena ca ‘‘yo bahussuto, na so tumhākaṃ sāvako nāma, buddho nāma esa cundā’’ti vuttattā dhammagarukattā ca tathāgatassa pubbanayo eva pasatthataroti amhākaṃ khanti.
“写上叶片”,是指在叶片上写下“只应从这些树上取这么多”,即记录下来。“作标记想”,是指作出一个约定的记号。“孩童”,指的是他们的子孙等孩童。其他任何牧牛人也都被提到。一切情况下,对于在家人的牧牛者所给的布施,牧牛者给多少,就应取多少。而对于僧团之物,则应说明仅按所划定的量取用,因此说“在义理上是一回事”。显示巴利原文
Paṇṇaṃ āropetvāti ‘‘ettakeheva rukkhehi ettakameva gahetabba’’nti paṇṇaṃ āropetvā, likhitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Nimittasaññaṃ katvāti saṅketaṃ katvā. Dārakāti tesaṃ puttanattādayo dārakā. Aññepi ye keci gopakā honti, te sabbepi vuttā. Sabbatthāpi gihīnaṃ gopakadāne yattakaṃ gopakā denti, tattakaṃ gahetabbaṃ. Saṅghike pana yathāparicchedameva gahetabbanti dīpitattā ‘‘atthato eka’’nti vuttaṃ.
“从那里”,即从为建造前述布萨堂等而存放的木材堆处。“问准后”,指问准负责的僧团之后。“将那些全部取来”,指即使未问准,也可暂时取来。“令取来”,此处即使未令人取来,也应给予。“此比丘是主事者”,意指此处归属某一位比丘,因此应从该住所给予他,且不应将他从那里赶走。以上是所说之义。显示巴利原文
Tatoti yathāvuttauposathāgārādikaraṇatthāya ṭhapitadārusambhārato. Āpucchitvāti kārakasaṅghaṃ āpucchitvā. Taṃ sabbampi āharitvāti anāpucchitvāpi tāvakālikaṃ āharitvā. Āharāpentoti ettha anāharāpentepi dātabbameva. Ayameva bhikkhu issaroti ekassa bhikkhuno pāpuṇanaṭṭhānaṃ, tatoyeva senāsanato tassa dātabbaṃ, na ca so tato uṭṭhāpetabboti vuttaṃ hoti.
“水供养”,据注疏的解释,即“在塔庙等处洒水”。“以义务为首”,指出于纯粹的信心,而非为了报酬等目的。“连同地基”,指连同土地一起。然而,为何说“即使草量也应给予”?难道那不属于重物吗?并不属于重物。因为在无守护、无保护之处,已处于将要毁坏状态的物品,不视为重物,因此针对那种情形说“即使草量也应给予”。“照料后”,指年年照料之后。显示巴利原文
‘‘Udakapūjanti cetiyaṭṭhānesu siñcana’’nti gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Vattasīsenāti kevalaṃ saddhāya, na vetanādiatthāya. Savatthukanti saha bhūmiyā. Tiṇamattaṃ pana dātabbanti kasmā vuttaṃ, kiṃ taṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ na hotīti? Na hoti. Arakkhitaagopitaṭṭhāne hi vinassakabhāvena ṭhitaṃ garubhaṇḍaṃ na hoti, tasmā tādisaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tiṇamattaṃ pana dātabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Jaggitvāti saṃvacchare saṃvacchare jaggitvā.
“墙”,即房屋的墙壁。“围墙”,即围起的院墙。“从那里”,指从被废弃的寺院。“从那里取来后建造了住所”,意思是住在附近村落的比丘们从废弃的寺院取来木材等材料,建造了住所。显示巴利原文
Kuṭṭanti gehabhittiṃ. Pākāranti parikkhepapākāraṃ. Tatoti chaḍḍitavihārato. Tatoāharitvā senāsanaṃ kataṃ hotīti sāmantagāmavāsīhi bhikkhūhi chaḍḍitavihārato dārusambhārādiṃ āharitvā senāsanaṃ kataṃ hoti.
157 “与四分之一水相混合”是说以四分之一的水混合。“在米饭分配的事例中”是指“给其他人一份”的那个事例。显示巴利原文
157.Catubhāgaudakasambhinneti catutthabhāgena udakena sambhinne. Odanabhājanīyavatthusminti ‘‘dehi aparassa bhāga’’nti āgatavatthusmiṃ.
159 “圣尊们连自己能做的事也不做,实在太过固执”,他们破坏净信,心生恼怒,因此说“为守护净信”。“收回神通”即撤回了神通。“就停在原处”,正是因为撤回了神通,即使没有决意“让宫殿再回来”,宫殿也自己回来停在了原处。而由于先前曾决意“在孩童们登上宫殿期间,让宫殿在他们附近”,那是在限定了时间的前提下所作的决意,此后神通便称为已释放,因此说“长老收回了神通”。应知:那些孩童并非这样取走后成为所有者,长老也并非以这种方式将他们带来,所以长老如此做了。因而说“依世俗用语”等。不舍弃自己本来的形色而于外部显现象等,这称为决意神通,因为它依决意而成就,如“一身变为多身”所说。“他舍弃本来形色,显现童子形色,或显现龙形色……乃至显现种种军阵”,如此所说的神通称为变化神通,因为它通过舍弃本来形色的变化方式而生起。应知,不显示自己而于外部显现象等,也摄于此中。因为所谓舍弃本来形色,是指自己的本来形色不为他人所见,并非彻底断灭它。如此,“不显示自己而于外部显现象等也摄在此中”这句话,与“舍弃本来形色”的说法相应。显示巴利原文
159. Ayyā attanā kātuṃ yuttampi na karonti, ativiya thaddhāti pasādaṃ bhinditvā cittena kuppanti, tasmā ‘‘pasādānurakkhaṇatthāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Iddhiṃ paṭisaṃharīti iddhiṃ vissajjesi. Sakaṭṭhāneyeva aṭṭhāsīti iddhiyā vissajjitattā eva ‘‘pāsādo puna āgacchatū’’ti anadhiṭṭhitepi sayameva āgantvā sakaṭṭhāneyeva aṭṭhāsi. ‘‘Yāva dārakā pāsādaṃ ārohanti, tāva pāsādo tesaṃ santike hotū’’ti pubbe adhiṭṭhitattā eva ca kālaparicchedaṃ katvā adhiṭṭhitena tato paraṃ iddhi vissajjitā nāma hotīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘thero iddhiṃ paṭisaṃharī’’ti. Yasmā te dārakā evaṃ gahetvā gatānaṃ santakā na honti, yasmā ca īdisena payogena therena te ānītā nāma na honti, tasmā thero evamakāsīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘vohāravasenā’’tiādi. Attano pakativaṇṇaṃ avijahitvā bahiddhā hatthiādidassanaṃ ‘‘ekopi hutvā bahudhā hotī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.238; ma. ni. 1.147; saṃ. ni. 5.842) āgatañca adhiṭṭhānavasena nipphannattā adhiṭṭhāniddhi nāma. ‘‘So pakativaṇṇaṃ vijahitvā kumārakavaṇṇaṃ vā dasseti nāgavaṇṇaṃ vā…pe… vividhampi senābyūhaṃ dassetī’’ti (paṭi. ma. 3.13) evaṃ āgatā iddhi pakativaṇṇavijahanavikāravasena pavattattā vikubbaniddhi nāma. Attānaṃ adassetvā bahiddhā hatthiādidassanampi ettheva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pakativaṇṇavijahanañhi nāma attano pakatirūpassa aññesaṃ adassanaṃ, na sabbena sabbaṃ tassa nirodhanaṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘attānaṃ adassetvā bahiddhā hatthiādidassanampi ettheva saṅgahita’’nti idaṃ ‘‘pakativaṇṇaṃ vijahitvā’’ti vuttamūlapadena na virujjhati.
教诫语释论显示巴利原文
Anusāsanīkathāvaṇṇanā
“Parājitakilesenā”者,即以四种道智连同习气,断尽一切烦恼,令其在相续中不再生起。“Idha”者,指在此教法中。应如此连属:与此学处等齐,并没有其他任何学处如此具足多种理趣与深奥的义理抉择。“Attho ca vinicchayo ca”即义与抉择,因为拥有深奥的义与抉择,故称“gambhīratthavinicchayaṃ”(深奥义抉择)。“Vatthumhi otiṇṇe”者,即当所举发的事缘进入僧团中时,或一人被另一人举发,或自己前来陈述所犯过失。“Etthā”者,即在那进入的事缘中。显示巴利原文
Parājitakilesenāti santāne puna anuppattidhammatāpādanena catūhi maggañāṇehi saha vāsanāya samucchinnasabbakilesena. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Tena sikkhāpadena samaṃ aññaṃ anekanayavokiṇṇaṃ gambhīratthavinicchayaṃ kiñci sikkhāpadaṃ na vijjatīti yojetabbaṃ. Attho ca vinicchayo ca atthavinicchayā, gambhīrā atthavinicchayā assāti gambhīratthavinicchayaṃ. Vatthumhi otiṇṇeti codanāvatthumhi saṅghamajjhaṃ otiṇṇe, ekena ekasmiṃ codite, sayameva vā āgantvā attano katavītikkame ārociteti vuttaṃ hoti. Etthāti otiṇṇe vatthumhi.
为表明裁决者不应仓促断为‘波罗夷’,而应行应作之事,故说‘律文’等语。‘Vinicchayo’:指对波罗夷罪的裁决。‘Avatvāvā’:即不说‘你犯了波罗夷’。‘Kappiyepi ca vatthusminti’:即对于即使不说明即可取用的净物,乃至属于父母所有的物品。‘Lahuvattino’:指因盗心生起而轻率改变者。‘Āsīvisaṃ’:指毒性能迅速遍布全身者。显示巴利原文
Vinicchayaṃ karontena sahasā ‘‘pārājika’’nti avatvā yaṃ kattabbaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘pāḷi’’ntiādimāha. Vinicchayoti pārājikāpattivinicchayo. Avatvāvāti ‘‘tvaṃ pārājikaṃ āpanno’’ti avatvāva. Kappiyepi ca vatthusminti avatvāpi gaṇhituṃ kappiye mātupitusantakepi vatthusmiṃ. Lahuvattinoti theyyacittuppādena lahuparivattino. Āsīvisanti sīghameva sakalasarīre pharaṇasamatthavisaṃ.
第三波罗夷显示巴利原文
3. Tatiyapārājikaṃ
‘Tīhī’:身、语、意三门。‘Vibhāvitaṃ’:即已阐明、已宣说、已制立。显示巴利原文
Tīhīti kāyavacīmanodvārehi. Vibhāvitanti pakāsitaṃ, desitaṃ paññattanti vuttaṃ hoti.
第一制定因缘释论显示巴利原文
Paṭhamapaññattinidānavaṇṇanā
162 “Tikkhattuṃ pākāraparikkhepavaḍḍhanenā”:指通过三次以城墙围护,令都城地界得以增广。“Visālībhūtattā”:指每一牛呼之地皆变得宽阔。据说,波罗奈王的王后怀有身孕。她得知后禀报国王,国王便安排了胎孕保护。在妥善的照料下,胎孕成熟时她进入产房。凡是具大福德者,常在黎明时分分娩,她便是其中之一,因此也在黎明时分产下一块如紫胶板、似日日春花般的肉片。这时她想:“其他妃子生下的儿子宛若金像,而我身为王后却产下肉片。若是传到国王耳中,我定会蒙受恶名。”出于对此恶名的畏惧,她将那肉片放入一个容器中,盖好盖子,用王印封缄,然后让人投入恒河水流。刚一被丢弃入水,诸天便安排了守护。他们还用天然朱砂在一块金板上写下“波罗奈王之王后之子”,系在容器上。随后,那个容器未遭波浪等灾祸,随恒河之水漂流而下。显示巴利原文
162.Tikkhattuṃ pākāraparikkhepavaḍḍhanenāti tikkhattuṃ pākāraparikkhepena nagarabhūmiyā vaḍḍhanena. Visālībhūtattāti gāvutantaraṃ gāvutantaraṃ puthubhūtattā. Bārāṇasirañño kira (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.146; khu. pā. aṭṭha. 6. ratanasuttavaṇṇanā) aggamahesiyā kucchimhi gabbho saṇṭhāsi, sā ñatvā rañño nivedesi, rājā gabbhaparihāraṃ adāsi. Sā sammā parihariyamānā gabbhaparipākakāle vijāyanagharaṃ pāvisi. Puññavantīnaṃ paccūsasamaye gabbhavuṭṭhānaṃ hoti, sā ca tāsaṃ aññatarā, tena paccūsasamaye alattakapaṭalabandhujīvakapupphasadisaṃ maṃsapesiṃ vijāyi. Tato ‘‘aññā deviyo suvaṇṇabimbasadise putte vijāyanti, aggamahesī maṃsapesinti rañño purato mama avaṇṇo uppajjeyyā’’ti cintetvā tena avaṇṇabhayena taṃ maṃsapesiṃ ekasmiṃ bhājane pakkhipitvā paṭikujjitvā rājamuddikāya lañchetvā gaṅgāya sote pakkhipāpesi. Manussehi chaḍḍitamatte devatā ārakkhaṃ saṃvidahiṃsu. Suvaṇṇapaṭṭikañcettha jātihiṅgulakena ‘‘bārāṇasirañño aggamahesiyā pajā’’ti likhitvā bandhiṃsu. Tato taṃ bhājanaṃ ūmibhayādīhi anupaddutaṃ gaṅgāsotena pāyāsi.
那时,有一位苦行者依一牧牛人家族而住在恒河岸边。他清晨下到恒河边,看见那个容器正漂过来,遂以粪扫衣想而捡取。在近处,他看见了那块字牌及王印封缄,解开后见到了那肉片。见后他心想:“这很可能是胎儿,因为确实没有恶臭腐烂之相。”即便被水流冲来,其体温也未曾消失,而这样的体温应属于有识之物,所以他推想应是胎儿。然而,由于福德之力,它既无恶臭,也未如死胎般腐烂。如此思惟后,他将它带回草庵,放置在洁净之处。过了半个月,它变成了两块肉片。苦行者看见后,更加妥善地安置。又过了半个月,每块肉片上各长出五个肿包,呈现为手、脚、头等的雏形。再半月之后,一块肉片变成了宛如金像的男孩,另一块则变成了女孩。苦行者对这两个孩子生起了如同对亲生儿子般的爱。由于孩子们的福德因缘,从他拇指中涌出了乳汁。从此以后,他们便以乳汁为食。苦行者用餐之后,便将乳汁注入孩子们的口中。凡是进入他们腹中的,都如同盛在宝器里一般清晰可见。正如最后生菩萨住于母胎时,菩萨母亲的腹部皮肤变得清澈透明,他们也同样没有皮肤。另有人说:“他们的皮肤就像被缝合安立一般,彼此紧密相连。”就这样,由于无皮或皮肤紧密相连,他们……显示巴利原文
Tena ca samayena aññataro tāpaso gopālakakulaṃ nissāya gaṅgātīre viharati. So pātova gaṅgaṃ otiṇṇo taṃ bhājanaṃ āgacchantaṃ disvā paṃsukūlasaññāya aggahesi. Athettha taṃ akkharapaṭṭikaṃ rājamuddikālañchanañca disvā muñcitvā taṃ maṃsapesiṃ addasa. Disvānassa etadahosi ‘‘siyā gabbho, tathā hissa duggandhapūtibhāvo natthī’’ti. Udakappavāhenāgatassapi hi usmā na vigacchati, usmā ca nāma īdisāya saviññāṇakatāya bhaveyyāti ‘‘siyā gabbho’’ti cintesi. Puññavantatāya pana duggandhaṃ nāhosi sausumagatāya pūtibhāvo ca. Evaṃ pana cintetvā assamaṃ netvā naṃ suddhe okāse ṭhapesi. Atha aḍḍhamāsaccayena dve maṃsapesiyo ahesuṃ. Tāpaso disvā sādhukataraṃ ṭhapesi. Tato puna aḍḍhamāsaccayena ekamekissā pesiyā hatthapādasīsānamatthāya pañca pañca piḷakā uṭṭhahiṃsu. Atha tato aḍḍhamāsaccayena ekā maṃsapesi suvaṇṇabimbasadiso dārako, ekā dārikā ahosi. Tesu tāpasassa puttasineho uppajji, dārakānaṃ puññupanissayato aṅguṭṭhakato cassa khīraṃ nibbatti. Tato pabhuti ca khīrabhattaṃ alabhittha. Tāpaso bhattaṃ bhuñjitvā khīraṃ dārakānaṃ mukhe āsiñcati. Tesaṃ pana yaṃ yaṃ udaraṃ pavisati, taṃ sabbaṃ maṇibhājanagataṃ viya dissati. Carimabhave bodhisatte kucchigate bodhisattamātu viya udaracchaviyā acchavippasannatāya evaṃ te nicchavī ahesuṃ. Apare āhu ‘‘sibbitvā ṭhapitā viya nesaṃ aññamaññaṃ līnā chavi ahosī’’ti. Evaṃ te nicchavitāya vā līnacchavitāya vā ‘‘licchavī’’ti paññāyiṃsu.
苦行者养育着孩子们,总是在太阳升高之后才入村乞食,过了正午才返回。牧人们得知他的这一情况后,便对他说:“尊者,养育孩子是出家人的障碍。请将孩子交给我们吧,我们来养育,您只管做您自己的修行。”苦行者回答:“善。”次日,牧人们平整道路,撒上鲜花,竖起幢幡,在奏乐声中来到草庵。苦行者说:“这些孩子有大福德,你们应当以不放逸心养育他们。长大后让他们互相婚配,然后以五牛乳制品令国王欢喜,取得土地,建造城市,就在那里为王子灌顶。”说完便将孩子们交给了他们。他们答“善”后,便带着孩子们回去养育。孩子们渐渐长大,在游戏打闹时,用拳脚殴打其他牧童,被打的孩子便哭泣。当父母问“为什么哭”时,他们回答:“那些没爹没娘、由苦行者养活的孩子,狠狠地打我们。”于是,当初养育他们的那些父母也说:“这些孩子折磨、伤害其他孩子,不该再收留,应当舍弃他们。”据说,从此以后,那方圆一百由旬的地区便被称为“跋耆”。显示巴利原文
Tāpaso dārake posento ussūre gāmaṃ bhikkhāya pavisati, atidivā paṭikkamati. Tassa taṃ byāpāraṃ ñatvā gopālakā āhaṃsu – ‘‘bhante, pabbajitānaṃ dārakaposanaṃ palibodho, amhākaṃ dārake detha, mayaṃ posessāma, tumhe attano kammaṃ karothā’’ti. Tāpaso ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇi. Gopālakā dutiyadivase maggaṃ samaṃ katvā pupphehi okiritvā dhajapaṭākā ussāpetvā tūriyehi vajjamānehi assamaṃ āgatā. Tāpaso ‘‘mahāpuññā dārakā, appamādeneva vaḍḍhetha, vaḍḍhetvā aññamaññaṃ āvāhaṃ karotha, pañcagorasena rājānaṃ tosetvā bhūmibhāgaṃ gahetvā nagaraṃ māpetha, tattha kumāraṃ abhisiñcathā’’ti vatvā dārake adāsi. Te ‘‘sādhū’’ti paṭissuṇitvā dārake netvā posesuṃ. Dārakā vuḍḍhimanvāya kīḷantā vivādaṭṭhānesu aññe gopālakadārake hatthenapi pādenapi paharanti, te rodanti. ‘‘Kissa rodathā’’ti ca mātāpitūhi vuttā ‘‘ime nimmātāpitikā tāpasapositā amhe atīva paharantī’’ti vadanti. Tato nesaṃ posakamātāpitaropi ‘‘ime dārakā aññe dārake vihesenti dukkhāpenti, na ime saṅgahetabbā, vajjetabbā ime’’ti āhaṃsu. Tato pabhuti kira so padeso ‘‘vajjī’’ti vuccati yojanasataparimāṇena.
随后,牧牛人们取悦国王后,得到了那片土地。他们在那里建造了城市,为一位年满十六岁的王子灌顶,立他为王。有些人说:由于他曾造下能获王位的业,又因生于从未断绝的王族,在王子福德的威力所驱动及天神的护持下,他们这样做了。他们为男孩和女孩缔结婚约,并立下约定:‘不得从外面迎娶女子,这里的女子也不得许配给任何人。’他们初次同居,生下两个孩子,一女一子。就这样,总共十六次,每次生下一对。后来,随着这些孩子们渐渐长大,原有的城市已容不下园林、苑囿、住所、随从等资生之具,他们便向外扩建了三次,每次扩展一牛呼的距离。由于它一再变得广大,故名为‘毗舍离’。因此说道:‘因三次扩大城墙围栏而变得广大,故称为毗舍离。’显示巴利原文
Atha taṃ padesaṃ gopālakā rājānaṃ tosetvā aggahesuṃ. Tattha ca nagaraṃ māpetvā soḷasavassuddesikaṃ kumāraṃ abhisiñcitvā rājānaṃ akaṃsu. Rajjasampattidāyakassa kammassa katattā asambhinne eva rājakule uppannattā ca rājakumārassa puññānubhāvasañcoditā devatādhiggahitā akaṃsūti keci. Dārakassa dārikāya saddhiṃ vāreyyaṃ katvā katikaṃ akaṃsu ‘‘bāhirato dārikā na ānetabbā, ito dārikā na kassaci dātabbā’’ti. Tesaṃ paṭhamasaṃvāsena dve dārakā jātā dhītā ca putto ca. Evaṃ soḷasakkhattuṃ dve dve jātā. Tato tesaṃ dārakānaṃ yathākkamaṃ vaḍḍhantānaṃ ārāmuyyānanivāsaṭṭhānaparivārasampattiṃ gahetuṃ appahontaṃ nagaraṃ tikkhattuṃ gāvutantarena gāvutantarena parikkhipiṃsu. Tassa punappunaṃ visālīkatattā ‘‘vesālī’’tveva nāmaṃ jātaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tikkhattuṃ pākāraparikkhepavaḍḍhanena visālībhūtattā vesālīti vuccatī’’ti.
而且,这里所说的‘城’并不仅指王舍城和舍卫城,这是为了说明这一点。其中,‘名为大林’等,是中部诵者与相应部诵者共同的注释。因为在中部注释和相应部注释中,正是以此方式解说的。然而,在长部注释中则说:‘大林:城外有一片与雪山连成一片而存在的自生林,因其广大故称大林,在那大林中。在重阁讲堂:他们在该树林中建立了一座僧园。在那里,他们安上椽子,在柱子上建造了一座以重阁讲堂为概称、如同天宫般的高楼,由此,整个僧园也称作重阁讲堂。’由于建在树林中间,故说‘依于林’。在园中:即在僧园中。以鹅爪顶覆盖:即被鹅爪形覆盖,意为呈鹅圆纹的形状。显示巴利原文
Idampi ca nagaranti na kevalaṃ rājagahasāvatthiyo yevāti dasseti. Tattha mahāvanaṃ nāmātiādi majjhimabhāṇakasaṃyuttabhāṇakānaṃ samānaṭṭhakathā. Majjhimaṭṭhakathāyañhi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.146) saṃyuttaṭṭhakathāyañca (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.984-985) imināva nayena vuttaṃ. Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.359) pana ‘‘mahāvaneti bahinagare himavantena saddhiṃ ekābaddhaṃ hutvā ṭhitaṃ sayaṃjātaṃ vanaṃ atthi, yaṃ mahantabhāveneva mahāvananti vuccati, tasmiṃ mahāvane. Kūṭāgārasālāyanti tasmiṃ vanasaṇḍe saṅghārāmaṃ patiṭṭhāpesuṃ. Tattha kaṇṇikaṃ yojetvā thambhānaṃ upari kūṭāgārasālāsaṅkhepena devavimānasadisaṃ pāsādaṃ akaṃsu, taṃ upādāya sakalopi saṅghārāmo kūṭāgārasālāti paññāyitthā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vanamajjhe katattā ‘‘vanaṃ nissāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ārāmeti saṅghārāme. Haṃsavaṭṭakacchadanenāti haṃsavaṭṭakapaṭicchannena, haṃsamaṇḍalākārenāti attho.
‘以多种方式’:此处‘方式’一词意指原因,故说‘以多种原因’,意谓:这个身体,不论是无识的还是有识的,都是不净的,以种种原因说明‘这样不净,那样也不净’。‘示现不净相而转起’:即依头发等,于彼处也从颜色等方面,全面地示现不净相而转起。‘令对身离欲的谈论’:即针对自己和他人由此四大所造之身,生起离欲的谈论。‘或已解脱’等,是以遮遣的方式显示身体的不可意。其中,开头三句显示其不可见、无坚实;中间四句显示其恶臭;最后一句显示其丝毫无可爱之处。‘那时,尊者’等,是以顺合的方式,依其自性显示不可意。‘欲’:指微弱的贪染。‘贪’:指强烈的贪染。为详细说明‘头发、身毛等’这一略说的含义,而说‘即使那些’等。‘不净’:因远离了外在的净相,故为不净。‘不洁’:以其自性即是不洁。‘可厌’:如同城里人对污秽之处感到厌恶,因令人作呕,故为可厌。显示巴利原文
Anekapariyāyenāti ettha pariyāya-saddo kāraṇavacanoti āha ‘‘anekehi kāraṇehī’’ti, ayaṃ kāyo aviññāṇakopi saviññāṇakopi evampi asubho evampi asubhoti nānāvidhehi kāraṇehīti attho. Asubhākārasandassanappavattanti kesādivasena tatthāpi vaṇṇādito asubhākārassa sabbaso dassanavasena pavattaṃ. Kāyavicchandaniyakathanti attano parassa ca karajakāye vicchandanuppādanakathaṃ. Muttaṃ vātiādinā byatirekamukhena kāyassa amanuññataṃ dasseti. Tattha ādito tīhi padehi adassanīyatāya asārakatāya majjhe catūhi duggandhatāya, ante ekena lesamattenapi manuññatābhāvamassa dasseti. Atha khotiādinā anvayato sarūpeneva amanuññatāya dassanaṃ. Chandoti dubbalarāgo. Rāgoti balavarāgo. ‘‘Kesā lomādī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘yepi hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asubhāti āgantukena subhākārena virahitattā asubhā. Asucinoti attano sabhāveneva asucino. Paṭikūlāti nāgarikassa asucikaṭṭhānaṃ viya jigucchanīyattā paṭikūlā.
为明“这些名为头发者,由颜色亦为可厌,由形状、气味、来源、处所皆为可厌”之义,故说“而他们……当以五种相了知”。即使于可爱的粥碗或饭钵中,见有似发色之物,人亦厌恶而谓:“此中混有发丝,拿走吧!”如是,头发即颜色可厌。夜间进食时,若触到如发形之 akkavāka 或 makacivāka 纤维,亦同样生厌;如是,即形状亦可厌。未以涂油、涂香、熏花等方式处理的头发,其气味本已极其令人作呕;若投入火中,气味更为可厌。头发由颜色与形状或可未至那样可厌,然由气味则必定可厌。譬如幼童之粪,色如姜黄,形亦如姜黄团;又如弃于垃圾堆、膨胀的黑狗尸体,色如棕榈果,形如撑开的圆鼓,其齿如茉莉花蕾——此二者于颜色、形状或未至可厌,然于气味则必定可厌。同样,头发纵使于颜色、形状或未至可厌,然于气味则必定可厌。显示巴利原文
Kesā nāmete vaṇṇatopi paṭikūlā, saṇṭhānatopi gandhatopi āsayatopi okāsatopi paṭikūlāti dassento ‘‘so ca nesaṃ…pe… pañcahi kāraṇehi veditabbo’’ti āha. Manuññepi (visuddhi. 1.383; vibha. aṭṭha. 356) hi yāgupatte vā bhattapatte vā kesavaṇṇaṃ kiñci disvā ‘‘kesamissakamidaṃ, haratha na’’nti jigucchanti, evaṃ kesā vaṇṇato paṭikūlā. Rattiṃ paribhuñjantāpi kesasaṇṭhānaṃ akkavākaṃ vā makacivākaṃ vā chupitvā tatheva jigucchanti, evaṃ saṇṭhānatopi paṭikūlā. Telamakkhanapupphadhūpādisaṅkhāravirahitānañca kesānaṃ gandho paramajeguccho hoti, tato jegucchataro aggimhi pakkhittānaṃ. Kesā hi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikūlāpi siyuṃ, gandhena pana paṭikūlāyeva. Yathā hi daharassa kumārakassa vaccaṃ vaṇṇato haliddivaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānatopi haliddipiṇḍasaṇṭhānaṃ, saṅkāraṭṭhāne chaḍḍitañca uddhumātakakāḷasunakhasarīraṃ vaṇṇato tālapakkavaṇṇaṃ, saṇṭhānato vaṭṭetvā vissaṭṭhamudiṅgasaṇṭhānaṃ, dāṭhāpissa sumanamakuḷasadisāti ubhayampi vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato siyā appaṭikūlaṃ, gandhena pana paṭikūlameva, evaṃ kesāpi siyuṃ vaṇṇasaṇṭhānato appaṭikūlā, gandhena pana paṭikūlāyevāti.
又如生于不洁之处、由村落秽水滋长的可作羹汤之叶,为城里人所厌恶、不堪食用;同样,头发亦由脓、血、尿、粪、胆汁、痰等之流溢而生,故令人厌恶,此即由来源之可厌性。而所谓头发者,即如粪堆上生出的菌菇,生于三十一身分之积聚中;如同生于坟场、垃圾堆等处的蔬菜,以及生于沟渠等处的莲花、睡莲等花,因生处不洁而极其可厌,此即由处所之可厌性。犹如头发,一切身分亦当由颜色、形状、气味、来源、处所此五种相而了知可厌性,故说:“如此,身毛等”。“以五种五种分类”:此处应视为外在之复合词,即“其有五种、五种之分类”,故称“五种五种分类”。显示巴利原文
Yathā pana asuciṭṭhāne gāmanissandena jātāni sūpeyyapaṇṇāni nāgarikamanussānaṃ jegucchāni honti aparibhogāni, evaṃ kesāpi pubbalohitamuttakarīsapittasemhādinissandena jātattā jegucchāti idaṃ tesaṃ āsayato pāṭikulyaṃ. Ime ca kesā nāma gūtharāsimhi uṭṭhitakaṇṇakaṃ viya ekatiṃsakoṭṭhāsarāsimhi jātā, te susānasaṅkāraṭṭhānādīsu jātasākaṃ viya parikhādīsu jātakamalakuvalayādipupphaṃ viya ca asuciṭṭhāne jātattā paramajegucchāti idaṃ tesaṃ okāsato pāṭikulyaṃ. Yathā ca kesānaṃ, evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsānañca vaṇṇasaṇṭhānagandhāsayokāsavasena pañcadhā paṭikūlatā veditabbāti āha ‘‘evaṃ lomādīna’’nti. Pañcapañcappabhedenāti ettha bāhiratthasamāso daṭṭhabbo pañca pañca pabhedā etassāti pañcapañcappabhedoti.
“Saṃvaṇṇento”意为详细阐述。“Asubhāya”指以不净论母。“Phātikamma”意为多修习。关于“已断五支、具足五支”,此处应知:通过断除欲贪、嗔恚、昏沉睡眠、掉举恶作、疑这五盖,而成为“已断五支”。因为若这些未断,禅那不会生起,因此它们被称为“断支”。虽然在禅那刹那也有其他不善法被断除,但这些特为禅那的障碍。因为被欲贪所诱于种种所缘的心,无法于单一所缘得定;被欲贪所征服的心,不会走上为断除欲界而修的道;被嗔恚所冲击的心,于所缘不能持续运作;被昏沉睡眠所征服的心,不堪任作业;被掉举恶作所左右的心,不寂静而散乱;被疑所害的心,不登上能证得禅那之道。如此,由于这些特为禅那的障碍,故说它们为“断支”。显示巴利原文
Saṃvaṇṇentoti vitthārento. Asubhāyāti asubhamātikāya. Phātikammanti bahulīkāro. Pañcaṅgavippahīnaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgatanti ettha kāmacchando byāpādo thinamiddhaṃ uddhaccakukkuccaṃ vicikicchāti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ nīvaraṇānaṃ pahānavasena pañcaṅgavippahīnatā veditabbā. Na hi etesu appahīnesu jhānaṃ uppajjati, tenassetāni pahānaṅgānīti vuccanti. Kiñcāpi hi jhānakkhaṇe aññepi akusalā dhammā pahīyanti, tathāpi etāneva visesena jhānantarāyakarāni. Kāmacchandena hi nānāvisayapalobhitaṃ cittaṃ na ekattārammaṇe samādhiyati, kāmacchandābhibhūtaṃ vā cittaṃ na kāmadhātuppahānāya paṭipadaṃ paṭipajjati, byāpādena ca ārammaṇe paṭihaññamānaṃ na nirantaraṃ pavattati, thinamiddhābhibhūtaṃ akammaññaṃ hoti, uddhaccakukkuccaparetaṃ avūpasantameva hutvā paribbhamati, vicikicchāya upahataṃ jhānādhigamasādhikaṃ paṭipadaṃ nārohati. Iti visesena jhānantarāyakarattā etāneva pahānaṅgānīti vuttāni.
然而,由于寻将心投向所缘,伺令心持续安住,藉由它们成就了无散乱的方便,心便生起方便成就,由此喜令喜悅,乐令增益。随后,被这投向、安住、喜悅、增益所资助的心一境性,便与相应法一同,于单一所缘平等、正确地安立。是故,应知依寻、伺、喜、乐、心一境性此五者的生起而说“具足五支”。因为当此五者生起时,即名为禅那已生起,所以它们被称为此禅那的“具足五支”。因此,不应执取为:除这些支之外,另有别的禅那名为“具足这些支”。然而,正如仅就支分而说“四支军”、“五支乐器”、“八支道”,此处同样仅就支分而说“五支”或“具足五支”,应如是了知。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pana vitakko ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropeti, vicāro anuppabandhati, tehi avikkhepāya sampāditapayogassa cetaso payogasampattisambhavā pīti pīnanaṃ, sukhañca upabrūhanaṃ karoti, atha naṃ sasampayuttadhammaṃ etehi abhiniropanānubandhanapīnanaupabrūhanehi anuggahitā ekaggatā ekattārammaṇe samaṃ sammā ādhiyati, tasmā vitakko vicāro pīti sukhaṃ cittekaggatāti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ uppattivasena pañcaṅgasamannāgatatā veditabbā. Uppannesu hi etesu pañcasu jhānaṃ uppannaṃ nāma hoti, tenassa etāni pañca samannāgataṅgānīti vuccanti. Tasmā na etehi samannāgataṃ aññadeva jhānaṃ nāma atthīti gahetabbaṃ. Yathā pana aṅgamattavaseneva caturaṅginī senā, pañcaṅgikaṃ tūriyaṃ aṭṭhaṅgiko ca maggoti vuccati, evamidampi aṅgamattavaseneva ‘‘pañcaṅgika’’nti vā ‘‘pañcaṅgasamannāgata’’nti vā vuccatīti veditabbaṃ.
这五支虽在近行刹那也存在,但在近行中比本性心更强,而在此处(安止)则比近行更强,达到色界刹那。因为在此,寻以极为清晰的方式将心投向所缘而生起,伺极度地触及所缘,喜与乐遍满全身。正因如此,才说:“他整个身体没有任何一处不被离生喜乐所遍满。”心一境性也如同将上层抽屉置于下层抽屉上一般,紧密地触击所缘而生起。这就是它们与其他(近行)的差别。因此,“具足五支”是就安止禅那而特说的。显示巴利原文
Etāni ca pañcaṅgāni kiñcāpi upacārakkhaṇepi atthi, atha kho upacāre pakaticittato balavatarāni, idha pana upacāratopi balavatarāni rūpāvacarakkhaṇappattāni. Ettha hi vitakko suvisadena ākārena ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropayamāno uppajjati, vicāro ativiya ārammaṇaṃ anumajjamāno, pītisukhaṃ sabbāvantampi kāyaṃ pharamānaṃ. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘nāssa kiñci sabbāvato kāyassa vivekajena pītisukhena apphuṭaṃ hotī’’ti. Cittekaggatāpi heṭṭhimamhi samuggapaṭale uparimaṃ samuggapaṭalaṃ viya ārammaṇe suphusitā hutvā uppajjati. Ayametesaṃ itarehi viseso, tasmā ‘‘pañcaṅgasamannāgata’’nti appanājhānameva visesetvā vuttaṃ.
具足三种善妙、具足十相:此处应知,依禅那的初、中、后阶段而说三种善妙,依彼初、中、后阶段各自的相而说具足十相。其详细方法,下文自当阐明。由于不被烦恼贼所征服,禅那被称为“心之宝箧”。“依止”意为作为基础。显示巴利原文
Tividhakalyāṇaṃ dasalakkhaṇasampannanti ettha pana jhānassa ādimajjhapariyosānavasena tividhakalyāṇatā, tesaṃyeva ādimajjhapariyosānānaṃ lakkhaṇavasena dasalakkhaṇasampannatā veditabbā. Vitthāranayaṃ panettha sayameva pakāsayissati. Kilesacorehi anabhibhavanīyattā jhānaṃ ‘‘cittamañjūsa’’nti vuttaṃ. Nissāyāti pādakaṃ katvā.
由于十相得以阐明,三种善妙也随之阐明,因此先开示十相,说“此中这些”等。其中,“从障碍中心清净”等语句的含义,将在“此中,有如是圣典”等所引圣典的注释中明了。“此中”即指十相的阐明。“行道清净”:依之而行禅那,故为“行道”,即以至种姓为终点的前行修习方法。从障碍中得清净,称为“清净”;行道的清净,便是“行道清净”。而此清净在禅那的生起刹那获得,故说“行道清净为初”。“舍随增”:由无所应清净等,通过属于禅那的中舍性之作用成就而得增广。而此增广特别在禅那的住立刹那获得,故说“舍随增为中”。“庆慰”:由成就了令彼处诸法不相逾越等智的作用而遍净。此庆慰在禅那的终了刹那显著,故说“庆慰为后”。这三相——从障碍中心得净化的行相、中舍寂止的行道行相、跃入彼处的行相——即是禅那从最初生起刹那直至安止成就的三相。若此行相不存,则无安止成就;若无安止,则无它们,故为初善;又因是清净行道,并具足如上所述之相,故为具足三相。依此方法,应知中、后相的结合。显示巴利原文
Dasalakkhaṇavibhāvaneneva tividhakalyāṇatāpi vibhāvitā hotīti dasalakkhaṇaṃ tāva dassento ‘‘tatrimānī’’tiādimāha. Tattha pāripanthikato cittavisuddhītiādīnaṃ padānaṃ attho ‘‘tatrāyaṃ pāḷī’’tiādinā vuttapāḷivaṇṇanāyameva āvi bhavissati. Tatrāti tasmiṃ dasalakkhaṇavibhāvane. Paṭipadāvisuddhīti paṭipajjati jhānaṃ etāyāti paṭipadā, gotrabhupariyosāno pubbabhāgiyo bhāvanānayo. Paripanthato visujjhanaṃ visuddhi, paṭipadāya visuddhi paṭipadāvisuddhi. Sā panāyaṃ yasmā jhānassa uppādakkhaṇe labbhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭipadāvisuddhi ādī’’ti. Upekkhānubrūhanāti visodhetabbatādīnaṃ abhāvato jhānapariyāpannāya tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccanipphattiyā anubrūhanā. Sā panāyaṃ yasmā visesato jhānassa ṭhitikkhaṇe labbhati, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘upekkhānubrūhanā majjhe’’ti. Sampahaṃsanāti tattha dhammānaṃ anativattanādisādhakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena pariyodapanā. Sā pana yasmā jhānassa osānakkhaṇe pākaṭā hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sampahaṃsanā pariyosāna’’nti. Imāni tīṇi lakkhaṇānīti paripanthato cittassa visujjhanākāro, majjhimassa samathanimittassa paṭipajjanākāro, tattha pakkhandanākāroti imāni tīṇi jhānassa ādito uppādakkhaṇe appanāppattilakkhaṇāni. Tehi ākārehi vinā appanāppattiyā abhāvato asati ca appanāyaṃ tadabhāvato ādikalyāṇañceva visuddhipaṭipadattā yathāvuttehi lakkhaṇehi samannāgatattā ca tilakkhaṇasampannañca. Iminā nayena majjhapariyosānalakkhaṇānañca yojanā veditabbā.
然而,有些人解释说:“所谓‘行道清净’是具备资粮的近行定,‘舍随增’是安止定,‘庆慰’是省察。”此说并不合理。如果那样,就成了以非禅那法来赞叹禅那的功德。毕竟,不同的范畴并不包含于另一范畴之中,且与巴利经文相违。巴利经中说:“心一境性既是趣入行道清净,亦为舍所随增,亦为智所庆慰。”(《无碍解道》1.158)在此,所谓“心一境性”,是指由于诸根具有一味性,且一境性达到顶点,与之相应、具俱有相应法、已达安止的心;紧接着便开示此心的趣入行道清净等。因此,由于巴利经文在同一个安止心刹那宣说了行道清净等,故应知:于安止内部,依遍作与随顺的作用而有“行道清净”,依中舍的作用而有“舍随增”,依完成净化作用的智的作用成就而有“庆慰”——此智以令诸法不相逾越等状态为成就方式。显示巴利原文
Keci pana ‘‘paṭipadāvisuddhi nāma sasambhāriko upacāro, upekkhānubrūhanā nāma appanā, sampahaṃsanā nāma paccavekkhaṇā’’ti vaṇṇayanti, taṃ na yuttaṃ. Tathā hi sati ajhānadhammehi jhānassa guṇasaṃkittanaṃ nāma kataṃ hoti. Na hi bhūmantaraṃ bhūmantarapariyāpannaṃ hoti, pāḷiyā cetaṃ virujjhati. ‘‘Ekattagataṃ cittaṃ paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandañceva hoti upekkhānubrūhitañca ñāṇena ca sampahaṃsita’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.158) hi pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha hi ekattagataṃ cittanti indriyānaṃ ekarasabhāvena ekaggatāya ca sikhāppattiyā tadanuguṇaṃ ekattagataṃ sasampayuttaṃ appanāppattaṃ cittaṃ vuttaṃ, tasseva ca paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandatādi anantaraṃ vuccate. Tasmā pāḷiyaṃ ekasmiṃyeva appanācittakkhaṇe paṭipadāvisuddhiādīnaṃ vuttattā antoappanāyameva parikammāgamanavasena paṭipadāvisuddhi, tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā, dhammānaṃ anativattanādibhāvasādhanena pariyodāpakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena sampahaṃsanā ca veditabbā.
如何呢?在安止生起的阶段,被称为“盖”的烦恼群是那禅那的障碍,心由此得以清净;因清净故,心远离障盖后,便进入中道的奢摩他相。所谓“中道的奢摩他相”,即指已等起的安止本身:由于不落入昏沉与掉举两个极端,故为“中道”;因殊胜地止息敌对法,故为“奢摩他”;因是瑜伽行者殊胜乐受的因,故为“相”。然而,作为彼安止心无间缘的种姓心,虽存在有限与广大、缘与缘所生的差别,但由于在同一相续中转向成熟,依同一相续转变之理,以安止之力正达等持状态,此即称为“进入中道的奢摩他相”。由此进入,以转向彼状态而称为“趣入”。因为在进入中道奢摩他相的那一刹那,即以转向彼状态、以安止达等持而称为“趣入”。如是,存在于前一种姓心中的障碍清净、进入中道奢摩他、趣入等行相,依随顺的作用而成就,在初禅的生起刹那,即应知为“行道清净”。因为这些行相,以殊胜的缘在禅那刹那成就,故说为“行道清净”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ? Yasmiṃ (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.158; visuddhi. 1.175) vāre appanā uppajjati , tasmiṃ yo nīvaraṇasaṅkhāto kilesagaṇo tassa jhānassa paripantho, tato cittaṃ visujjhati, visuddhattā āvaraṇavirahitaṃ hutvā majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati. Majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ nāma samappavatto appanāsamādhiyeva, līnuddhaccasaṅkhātānaṃ ubhinnaṃ antānaṃ anupagamanena majjhimo, savisesaṃ paccanīkadhammānaṃ vūpasamanato samatho, yogino sukhavisesānaṃ kāraṇabhāvato nimittanti katvā. Tassa pana appanācittassa anantarapaccayabhūtaṃ gotrabhucittaṃ satipi parittamahaggatabhāvabhede paccayapaccayuppannabhāvabhede ca ekissāyeva santatiyā pariṇāmūpagamanato ekasantatipariṇāmanayena tathattaṃ appanāsamādhivasena samāhitabhāvaṃ upagacchamānaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati nāma. Evaṃ paṭipannattā tathattupagamanena tattha pakkhandati nāma. Yasmiñhi khaṇe tathattaṃ majjhimaṃ samathanimittaṃ paṭipajjati, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe tathattupagamanena appanāsamādhinā samāhitabhāvūpagamanena tattha pakkhandati nāma. Evaṃ tāva purimasmiṃ gotrabhucitte vijjamānā paripanthavisuddhimajjhimasamathappaṭipattipakkhandanākārā āgamanavasena nipphajjamānā paṭhamassa jhānassa uppādakkhaṇeyeva paṭipadāvisuddhīti veditabbā. Teyeva hi ākārā paccayavisesato jhānakkhaṇe nipphajjamānā paṭipadāvisuddhīti vuttā.
然而,当此心如此清净之后,既无可再令清净者,便不再起净化的功用,而称为“对清净心保持中舍”。由于已入奢摩他,对已入奢摩他的心,不再起令其等持的功用,而称为“对已入奢摩他者保持中舍”。正因已入奢摩他,此心已舍离烦恼的交杂,以单一性而现起;对此单一性的现起,不再起令其现为单一性的功用,而称为“对单一性的现起保持中舍”。如是,当知由中舍的功用而有“舍随增”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ visuddhassa pana tassa cittassa puna sodhetabbābhāvato visodhane byāpāraṃ akaronto visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Samathabhāvūpagamanena samathappaṭipannassa puna samādhāne byāpāraṃ akaronto samathappaṭipannaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Samathappaṭipannabhāvato eva cassa kilesasaṃsaggaṃ pahāya ekattena upaṭṭhitassa puna ekattupaṭṭhāne byāpāraṃ akaronto ekattupaṭṭhānaṃ ajjhupekkhati nāma. Evaṃ tatramajjhattupekkhāya kiccavasena upekkhānubrūhanā veditabbā.
然而,当此禅那心为舍所随增时,那些称为定与慧的双运法,便以互不相逾的方式生起而转起;信等诸根,因已从种种烦恼解脱,以解脱味而成为一味,生起而转起;与之相应、与此不相逾及一味性相适合的精进,得以策励;以及彼刹那中转起的修习——所有这些行相,皆因以智照见杂染与清净中的种种过患与功德,如此如此地庆慰、净化、遍净而成就。因此,依智的作用而得成就,此智以令诸法不相逾等状态为成就之道,故说为“庆慰”。显示巴利原文
Ye panete evaṃ upekkhānubrūhite tasmiṃ jhānacitte jātā samādhipaññāsaṅkhātā yuganaddhadhammā aññamaññaṃ anativattamānā hutvā pavattā, yāni ca saddhādīni indriyāni nānākilesehi vimuttattā vimuttirasena ekarasāni hutvā pavattāni, yañcesa tadupagaṃ tesaṃ anativattanaekarasasabhāvānaṃ anucchavikaṃ vīriyaṃ vāhayati, yā cassa tasmiṃ khaṇe pavattā āsevanā, sabbepi te ākārā yasmā ñāṇena saṃkilesavodānesu taṃ taṃ ādīnavañca ānisaṃsañca disvā tathā tathā sampahaṃsitattā visodhitattā pariyodāpitattā nipphannā, tasmā dhammānaṃ anativattanādibhāvasādhanena pariyodāpakassa ñāṇassa kiccanipphattivasena sampahaṃsanā veditabbāti vuttaṃ.
既然如此,为何唯说“庆慰”为终结,而不说“舍随增”呢?因为在那修习心中,由舍的力量,令智变得明显,因此,作为智的作用的“庆慰”被说为终结。确实,在安止时,由于修习已等起,敌对法已善断除,于策励等功用已无可作者,故唯有中舍。关于此,有言:“其时心成中舍,对清净心保持中舍”等。然而,此中舍是为了成就智的作用,尤其是因为安止的功用是以智为成就之因,因此,作为智的作用的“庆慰”被说为终结。如此,依三种行道清净而得殊胜,依三种舍随增而令慧根极为增胜,四种庆慰亦得成就。是故,依随顺舍与智的作用,当知此十种行相唯在禅那中。显示巴利原文
Atha kasmā sampahaṃsanāva ‘‘pariyosāna’’nti vuttā, na upekkhānubrūhanāti? Yasmā tasmiṃ bhāvanācitte upekkhāvasena ñāṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tasmā ñāṇakiccabhūtā sampahaṃsanā ‘‘pariyosāna’’nti vuttā. Tathā hi appanākāle bhāvanāya samappavattiyā paṭipakkhassa ca suppahānato paggahādīsu byāpārassa akātabbato ajjhupekkhanāva hoti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘samaye cittassa ajjhupekkhanā visuddhaṃ cittaṃ ajjhupekkhatī’’ti ca ādi. Sā panāyaṃ ajjhupekkhanā ñāṇassa kiccasiddhiyā hoti visesato ñāṇasādhanattā appanābyāpārassa, tasmā ñāṇakiccabhūtā sampahaṃsanā ‘‘pariyosāna’’nti vuttā. Evaṃ tividhāya paṭipadāvisuddhiyā laddhavisesāya tividhāya upekkhānubrūhanāya sātisayaṃ paññindriyassa adhimattabhāvena catubbidhāpi sampahaṃsanā sijjhatīti āgamanupekkhāñāṇakiccavasena dasapi ākārā jhāne eva veditabbā.
“如是到达三种状态的心”等,是对该心的赞叹之语。其中,“如是到达三种状态”是指,如前面所述的方式,由修习清净、入舍、增智、随喜而到达三种状态。“具足寻”是指,因远离烦恼的扰动,以寻而达到美妙的状态。“具足心之胜解”是指,在同一所缘上,以心无间断转起为相,具足无缺的胜解。正如胜解自在中所说,“胜解”是禅那的转起,同样地,这里“心之胜解”也适用于心一境性,因为心正是依此而安住于同一所缘,不散乱于别处。“具足定”因被单独说出,故应依上述方式理解。或者,由于定被摄为禅支,“具足心之胜解”是依五禅支而说;而定被摄为根,“具足定”是依五根而说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃtividhattagataṃ cittantiādīni tasseva cittassa thomanavacanāni. Tattha evaṃ tividhattagatanti evaṃ yathāvuttena vidhinā paṭipadāvisuddhipakkhandanaupekkhānubrūhanañāṇasampahaṃsanāvasena tividhabhāvaṃ gataṃ. Vitakkasampannanti kilesakkhobhavirahitattā vitakkena sundarabhāvamupagataṃ. Cittassa adhiṭṭhānasampannanti tasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe cittassa nirantarappavattisaṅkhātena adhiṭṭhānena sampannaṃ anūnaṃ. Yathā adhiṭṭhānavasiyaṃ adhiṭṭhānanti jhānappavatti, tathā idhāpi cittassa adhiṭṭhānanti cittekaggatāpi yujjati. Tena hi ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe cittaṃ adhiṭṭhāti, na ettha vikkhipatīti. Samādhisampannanti visuṃ vuttattā pana vuttanayeneva gahetabbo. Atha vā samādhisseva jhānaṅgasaṅgahitattā ‘‘cittassa adhiṭṭhānasampanna’’nti jhānaṅgapañcakavasena vuttaṃ. Samādhisampannanti indriyasaṅgahitattā indriyapañcakavasena.
“以不净想所熟习的”是指,由“全身为不净”想所俱行,禅那为不净想,依此熟习、修习的心。“心”即心意。“多”为频繁。“住”指正在安住者,意思是多入不净等至者。“于淫欲法等至”指因淫欲法而具足。“回避”指躲向一边,犹如隐藏。“蜷缩”指收缩。“反转”指退回。“不舒展”指不流散,其义为不因乐着而投入。或者,“回避”指收缩,因于彼处有厌恶而安住故;“蜷缩”指退开,不靠近;“反转”指退回,由此即“不舒展”。“筋腱片”指一段筋,或筋的割痕。显示巴利原文
Asubhasaññāparicitenāti sakalaṃ kāyaṃ asubhanti pavattāya saññāya sahagatattā jhānaṃ asubhasaññā, tena paricitena paribhāvitena. Cetasāti cittena. Bahulanti abhiṇhaṃ. Viharatoti viharantassa, asubhasamāpattibahulassāti attho. Methunadhammasamāpattiyāti methunadhammena samaṅgibhāvato. Paṭilīyatīti ekapassena nilīyati nilīnaṃ viya hoti. Paṭikuṭatīti saṅkucati. Paṭivattatīti nivattati. Na sampasārīyatīti na visarati, abhirativasena na pakkhandatīti attho. Atha vā paṭilīyatīti saṅkucati tattha paṭikūlatāya saṇṭhitattā. Paṭikuṭatīti apasakkati na upasakkati. Paṭivattatīti nivattati, tato eva na sampasārīyatīti. Nhārudaddulanti nhārukhaṇḍaṃ nhāruvilekhanaṃ vā.
“半月”是持续关联中的业格。“独处”是指在所说的期间,日复一日将心内敛,安住于等至与法随念中。“说关联之语”是指说与资具相关的言语,例如:“佛陀在这些日子不出外乞食,只安坐于精舍中,供养他们得大果报”等语。显示巴利原文
Addhamāsanti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Paṭisallīyitunti yathāvuttakālaṃ paṭi paṭi divase divase samāpattiyaṃ dhammacintāya cittaṃ nilīyituṃ. Payuttavācanti paccayapaṭisaṃyuttavācaṃ, buddhā imesu divasesu piṇḍāya na caranti, vihāreyeva nisīdanti, tesaṃ dinnaṃ mahapphalaṃ hotīti ādivacanaṃ.
“依善依止”是指依止出家的因缘。“据说”一词在此表不悦之意。因此说“然而这只是他们的愿望”,意思是:不知已发生之事、不告知已知之事,以及阻止已知之事——这些只是他们的愿望,并非真实的理由。另有一些人则说:“据说在这半月里,没有任何堪受佛陀调伏的众生。于是导师心想:‘我将以果等至之乐度过这半月,如此我既能得安乐住,未来后世之人也将随顺所见而行,心想:导师尚且舍离僧众而独住,何况我们呢?这将为他们带来长远的利益与安乐。’以此因缘而如此说。”“没有任何人到世尊跟前”是指除了取食者之外,没有其他人来到世尊面前。然而,比丘僧团接受了导师的教诫,指派了一位比丘。他于清晨完成香室庭院的清扫,提供洗脸水、齿木等一切事务后,便在相应时刻离去。显示巴利原文
Kalyāṇūpanissayavasenāti pabbajjāya upanissayavasena. Pare kirāti kira-saddo arucisūcanattho. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ pana icchāmatta’’nti, pavattiajānanaṃ ārocayitābhāvo ñāte nivāraṇañcāti idaṃ tesaṃ icchāmattaṃ , na pana kāraṇanti attho. Apare pana vadanti ‘‘etasmiṃ kira aḍḍhamāse na koci buddhaveneyyo ahosi, atha satthā imaṃ aḍḍhamāsaṃ phalasamāpattisukhena vītināmessāmi, iti mayhañceva sukhavihāro bhavissati, anāgate ca pacchimā janatā ‘satthāpi gaṇaṃ pahāya ekako vihāsi, kimaṅgaṃ pana maya’nti diṭṭhānugatiṃ āpajjissati, tadassa bhavissati dīgharattaṃ hitāya sukhāyāti iminā kāraṇena evamāhā’’ti. Neva koci bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamatīti ṭhapetvā piṇḍapātanīhārakaṃ añño koci neva bhagavantaṃ upasaṅkamati, bhikkhusaṅgho pana satthu vacanaṃ sampaṭicchitvā ekaṃ bhikkhuṃ adāsi. So pātova gandhakuṭipariveṇasammajjanamukhodakadantakaṭṭhadānādīni sabbakiccāni tasmiṃ tasmiṃ khaṇe katvā apagacchati.
“具多种原因”在此处,身体的不净、恶臭、可厌、违逆等即是多种原因。“有装饰本性者”即具有装饰习性者。有些年少者并非青年,有些青年虽年轻却无装饰习性,例如本性寂静者,或被懒惰、放逸等所制服者。然而此处所指的,是既年少、又为青年、且具装饰习性者。所谓“青年初期”,是指从十五岁到三十二岁,或从十六岁到三十三岁。“尸体”指死尸,蛇的尸体即蛇尸,其余可类推。应知,由于极度违逆、可厌的本质,此处仅说此三种。因为其他如兔、猪等的尸体,人们尚会以辛辣调料等加以调制后食用;然而这些尸体即便新鲜也令人厌恶,更何况是过期腐坏的呢?据说,它们之所以极度违逆、可厌,是因为恶臭极重;而蛇的恶臭源于其暴烈的嗔怒,狗与人的恶臭则源于以米饭、豆粥等滋养的身体。显示巴利原文
Anekakāraṇasammissoti ettha kāyassa asuciduggandhajegucchapaṭikūlatāva anekakāraṇaṃ. Maṇḍanakapakatikoti alaṅkārakasabhāvo. Koci taruṇopi yuvā na hoti, koci yuvāpi maṇḍanakajātiko na hoti yathā upasantasabhāvo ālasiyabyasanādīhi vā abhibhūto, idha pana daharo ceva yuvā ca maṇḍanakajātiko ca adhippeto. Paṭhamayobbanaṃ nāma pannarasavassato yāva dvattiṃsa saṃvaccharāni, soḷasavassato vā yāva tettiṃsa vassāni. Kuṇapanti matakaḷevaraṃ, ahissa kuṇapaṃ ahikuṇapaṃ. Evaṃ itarānipi. Atipaṭikūlajigucchanīyasabhāvato cettha imāneva tīṇi vuttānīti veditabbāni. Aññesañhi sasasūkarādīnaṃ kuṇapaṃ manussā kaṭukabhaṇḍādīhi abhisaṅkharitvā paribhuñjantipi, imesaṃ pana kuṇapaṃ abhinavampi jigucchantiyeva, ko pana vādo kālātikkamena pūtibhūte. Atipaṭikūlajigucchanīyatā ca nesaṃ ativiya duggandhatāya, sā ca ahīnaṃ tikhiṇakopatāya kukkuramanussānaṃ odanakummāsūpacayatāya ca sarīrassa hotīti vadanti.
“沙门行者”意指作沙门之事者,即通过著袈裟等方式而作沙门之事者,因此说“持沙门衣者”。“他们做了一切”指凡夫即使面对有过失之事,也心生无过失想,从而做了自作、教他作、随喜等一切行为。“罗希塔卡”在此处,也有人读作“罗希塔伽塔”。“瓦古”指被视为可爱的。“被认可为福”意指,因能产生应予供养的果报,能净化、清净有情,故被认可为福德。“我将令其流出”指我将使它流出,我将令它清净。显示巴利原文
Samaṇakuttakoti samaṇakiccako, kāsāvanivāsanādivasena samaṇakiccakārīti vuttaṃ hoti . Tenāha ‘‘samaṇavesadhārako’’ti. Sabbamakaṃsūti puthujjanā sāvajjepi tattha anavajjasaññino hutvā karaṇakārāpanasamanuññatādibhedaṃ sabbamakaṃsu. Lohitakanti ettha ‘‘lohitagata’’ntipi paṭhanti. Vaggūti matā vaggumatā. Puññasammatāti pujjabhavaphalanibbattanena sattānaṃ punanena visodhanena puññanti sammatā. Pavāhessāmīti gamayissāmi, visodhessāmīti attho.
163 “魔境”指三界诸法。从词义上说,魔的领域称为魔境。“领域”即处所、地基、住处、活动范围。又,魔于此安住、停留、转起,故称魔境;此处“魔”指烦恼魔,且正是依于烦恼魔,天子魔才于欲有中得自在。他心想:“他将不会超越魔境。”——他如此生起悚惧感后,本也可能超越魔境,但在我这样说之后,他平息了已生的悚惧,又想:“他将不会超越魔境。”所谓“双言”即说两次,也就是重复语。至于“劝导”,应知此愚盲天女,生起了以悚惧感为根源的沙门法后,心想“此人或许会超越魔境”,却因自己的无知,执持“死者从轮回中解脱”的邪见,未审察“比丘们死后从轮回中解脱”这一义理,便依自己的邪见作如是劝导。显示巴利原文
163. Māradheyyaṃ vuccati tebhūmakā dhammā. Vacanatthato pana mārassa dheyyaṃ māradheyyaṃ. Dheyyanti ṭhānaṃ vatthu nivāso gocaro. Māro vā ettha dhiyati tiṭṭhati pavattatīti māradheyyaṃ, māroti cettha kilesamāro adhippeto, kilesamāravaseneva ca devaputtamārassa kāmabhave ādhipaccanti. Māravisayaṃ nātikkamissatīti cintetvāti evamayaṃ saṃvegaṃ paṭilabhitvā māravisayaṃ atikkameyyāpi, mayā pana evaṃ vutte uppannaṃ saṃvegaṃ paṭippassambhetvā māravisayaṃ nātikkamissatīti evaṃ cintetvā. Dvivacananti dvikkhattuṃ vacanaṃ, āmeḍitavacananti vuttaṃ hoti. Niyojentīti ettha ayaṃ andhabālā devatā evaṃ uppannasaṃvegamūlakaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ katvā ‘‘ayaṃ māravisayaṃ atikkameyyāpī’’ti cintetvā attano aññāṇatāya ‘‘matā saṃsārato muccantī’’ti evaṃladdhikāpi samānā attano laddhivasena matā bhikkhū saṃsārato muccantīti imamatthaṃ anupaparikkhitvā taṃ tattha niyojesīti veditabbaṃ.
虽然世尊宣说不净论时,是以令那些比丘不生起死亡恐惧的方式而说,而比丘们听闻此法论后,由修习不净观,于身离欲离贪,故对死亡无所恐惧;然而,见到那手持利刃如此游行者,其余比丘便生恐惧,因此才说“确实有恐惧”等语。由于说到“既自己夺取自己的生命,也互相夺取生命”,故“他夺取了全部五百比丘的生命”应理解为依多数而说。因为略少或多出一些,不算入整数,故说为“五百”。因此,应知除了那些自己结束自己生命,以及互相夺取生命者外,其余凡夫比丘及一切圣者,都是此人夺取其生命的。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi asubhakathaṃ kathentena bhagavatā yathā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ maraṇabhayaṃ na bhavissati, tathā desitattā bhikkhūnañca taṃ dhammakathaṃ sutvā asubhabhāvanānuyogena kāye vigatachandarāgatāya maraṇassa abhipatthitabhāvato bhayaṃ natthi, taṃ pana asihatthaṃ tathā vicarantaṃ disvā tadaññesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ uppajjanakabhayaṃ sandhāya ‘‘hotiyeva bhaya’’ntiādi vuttanti vadanti. ‘‘Attanāpi attānaṃ jīvitā voropenti, aññamaññampi jīvitā voropentī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘sabbānipi tāni pañca bhikkhusatāni jīvitā voropesī’’ti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Appakañhi ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti ‘‘pañcasatānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā ye ca attanāva attānaṃ aññamaññañca jīvitā voropesuṃ, te ṭhapetvā avasese puthujjanabhikkhū sabbe ca ariye ayaṃ jīvitā voropesīti veditabbaṃ.
164 “从独处起”:“独处”指从种种有情行作中回转、退避而隐居、潜藏,即身与心远离他们而独一。故说“从独一状态”,意为远离。“独一”即指身远离与心远离。“起”指从这两种远离中出离,由转向有分而生起色所缘等诸行,以及与在家、出家等有情相聚。他们各自在各自师长的近处受持读诵与问难。虽然十随念的受持已包含入出息念,但于此处,它对聚集的比丘众中多数人适宜且有利益,故再次受持。正如世尊也为那些比丘们宣说此业处。食厌想与不净业处相似,而四无色于初学者不适宜,是故此处不见受持它们。显示巴利原文
164.Paṭisallānā vuṭṭhitoti ettha paṭisallānanti tehi tehi sattasaṅkhārehi paṭinivattitvā apasakkitvā sallānaṃ nilīyanaṃ vivecanaṃ, kāyacittehi tato vivittatā ekībhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘ekībhāvato’’ti , pavivekatoti attho. Ekībhāvoti hi kāyacittaviveko vutto. Vuṭṭhitoti tato duvidhavivekato bhavaṅguppattiyā rūpārammaṇādisaṅkhārasamāyogena gahaṭṭhapabbajitādisattasamāgamena ca apeto. Uddesaṃ paripucchaṃ gaṇhantīti attano attano ācariyānaṃ santike gaṇhanti. Kāmaṃ dasānussatiggahaṇeneva ānāpānassatipi gahitā, sā pana tattha sannipatitabhikkhūsu bahūnaṃ sappāyā sātthikā ca, tasmā puna gahitā. Tathā hi bhagavā tameva kammaṭṭhānaṃ tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ kathesi. Āhāre paṭikūlasaññā asubhakammaṭṭhānasadisā, cattāro pana āruppā ādikammikānaṃ ananurūpāti tesaṃ idha aggahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“依毗舍离而住”:即以毗舍离城作为行境的村落。“在侍奉堂”:即法堂中。“仅片刻间”:指那些带着敬重心前来亲近世尊与正法的比丘们,于听闻话语后立即起立,故如此说。据说佛世时,比丘们为了以头顶恭敬领受世尊的教示,一直安住于侧耳倾听。“其”指所应作之事,“时”指说法之时。显示巴利原文
Vesāliṃ upanissāyāti vesālīnagaraṃ gocaragāmaṃ katvā. Upaṭṭhānasālāyanti dhammasabhāyaṃ. Muhuttenevāti satthari saddhamme ca gāravena upagatabhikkhūnaṃ vacanasamanantarameva uṭṭhahiṃsūti katvā vuttaṃ. Buddhakāle kira bhikkhū bhagavato sandesaṃ sirasā sampaṭicchituṃ ohitasotā viharanti. Yassāti yassa kattabbassa. Kālanti desanākālaṃ sandhāya vadati.
入出息念定论解释显示巴利原文
Ānāpānassatisamādhikathāvaṇṇanā
165 “为证阿罗汉果”:即为了证得阿罗汉果的目的。“其他方法”:指为了证得阿罗汉果的其他原因。“宣说”:指以称赞为先而进行教导;此处的称赞,是为了令生欢喜、策励精进。因为比丘们听闻之后,心中思惟:“世尊以种种方式称赞此定,此定确实是寂静、微妙、纯粹、安乐的住法,且能渐次断除诸恶不善法。”他们便生起欢喜与精进,认为应当恭敬地投入修习。显示巴利原文
165.Arahattappattiyāti arahattappattiatthāya. Aññaṃ pariyāyanti arahattādhigamatthāya aññampi kāraṇaṃ. Ācikkhantoti pasaṃsāpubbakaṃ desento, pasaṃsā ca tattha abhirucijananena ussāhanatthā. Tañhi sutvā bhikkhū ‘‘bhagavā imaṃ samādhiṃ anekehi ākārehi pasaṃsati, santo kirāyaṃ samādhi paṇīto ca asecanako ca sukho ca vihāro, pāpadhamme ca ṭhānaso antaradhāpetī’’ti sañjātābhirucino ussāhajātā sakkaccaṃ anuyuñjitabbaṃ paṭipajjitabbaṃ maññanti.
“义理与连接次第”:即义理及连接次第。世尊将自己亲证的定,由说法的威力,使那些比丘也近乎亲证,并以归纳的方式开示说“此亦是”等。“执持入出息”:即连同长短等差别,限定而执取入出息,意为缘彼而生起。显示巴利原文
Atthayojanakkamanti atthañca yojanakkamañca. Bhagavā attano paccakkhabhūtaṃ samādhiṃ desanānubhāvena tesampi bhikkhūnaṃ āsannaṃ paccakkhañca karonto sampiṇḍanavasena ‘‘ayampi kho’’tiādimāha. Assāsapassāsapariggāhikāti dīgharassādivisesehi saddhiṃ assāsapassāse paricchijja gāhikā, te ārabbha pavattāti attho.
现在,为了以巴利语阐明前述义理,而说“已说”等句。其中,“非呼出、非吸入”是通过否定来简别,从而说明同一个意思。“依吸入”是说以吸入为所缘。“依呼出”同理。“念现前”则是指由于不忘失,而近住于那吸入与呼出,这便称为念。至此,已说明了“于入出息中念,即是入出息念”的意义。接着,为了以念来指称那个修行人,而说“若吸入者,则念现前;若呼出者,则念现前”。意思是:当他吸入时,念便近住于吸入而安住;当他呼出时,念便近住于呼出而安住。显示巴利原文
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ pāḷiyā vibhāvento āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi. Tattha no passāsono assāsoti so soyeva attho paṭisedhena visesetvā vutto. Assāsavasenāti assāsaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Passāsavasenāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Upaṭṭhānaṃ satīti asammussanatāya tameva assāsaṃ passāsañca upagantvā ṭhānaṃ sati nāmāti attho. Ettāvatā ānāpānesu sati ānāpānassatīti ayamattho vutto hoti. Idāni sativaseneva puggalaṃ niddisitukāmena ‘‘yo assasati, tassupaṭṭhāti, yo passasati, tassupaṭṭhātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yo assasati, tassa sati assāsaṃ upagantvā tiṭṭhati. Yo passasati, tassa sati passāsaṃ upagantvā tiṭṭhatīti attho.
“Yutto”意为相应。“入出息念”的意思,是以入出息念为缘。在前一种意义中,因为说“相应”,所以说定与念之间存在俱生缘等缘的关系;在后一种意义中,则还有亲依止缘的关系,因为伴随近行定的念是安止定的亲依止缘。这样,通过俱生缘等七种缘,显示了两种情形下的缘关系。而所谓“修习”,如在“再者,优陀夷,我为弟子们宣说了行道,我的弟子们依此行道,修习四念处”(中部2.247)等处,是依令生起、令增长之义而说的。为了通过这两种意义显示其含义,所以说“已修习者,即已令生起、已令增长”。其中,“bhāvito”指已存在、从此处去,即已令生起、仅已获得之义;而已生起、已得习行者,即是“已修习”,即已令达到熟练状态、已令增长之义。“多修习者”是说多所转起,以此说明达到转向自在等的状态。因为已经达到自在的人,可以在任何想要的时候入定,便会一再地转起,因此说“一再而作”。正如在“在此,比丘们,有沙门……离诸欲……”(长部1.226;相应部2.152)等处,第一句中出现的“eva”一词,在第二句等中也同样被使用,此处也是如此,所以说“两处皆应以‘eva’一词限定理解”。显示巴利原文
Yuttoti sampayutto. Ānāpānassatiyanti ānāpānassatiyaṃ paccayabhūtāyanti attho. Purimasmiñhi atthe samādhissa satiyā sahajātādipaccayabhāvo vutto sampayuttavacanato, dutiyasmiṃ pana upanissayabhāvopi. Upacārajjhānasahagatā hi sati appanāsamādhissa upanissayo hotīti ubhayathāpi sahajātādīnaṃ sattannampi paccayānaṃ vasena paccayabhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Puna caparaṃ, udāyi, akkhātā mayā sāvakānaṃ paṭipadā, yathāpaṭipannā me sāvakā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne bhāventī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.247) uppādanavaḍḍhanaṭṭhena bhāvanāti vuccatīti tadubhayavasena atthaṃ dassento ‘‘bhāvitoti uppādito vaḍḍhito cā’’ti āha. Tattha bhāvaṃ vijjamānataṃ ito gatoti bhāvito, uppādito paṭiladdhamattoti attho. Uppanno pana laddhāsevano bhāvito, paguṇabhāvaṃ āpādito vaḍḍhitoti attho. Bahulīkatoti bahulaṃ pavattito. Tena āvajjanādivasībhāvappattimāha. Yo hi vasībhāvaṃ āpādito, so icchiticchitakkhaṇe samāpajjitabbato punappunaṃ pavattissati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘punappunaṃ kato’’ti. Yathā ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo (ma. ni. 1.139; a. ni. 4.241) vivicceva kāmehī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.226; saṃ. ni. 2.152) ca evamādīsu paṭhamapade vutto eva-saddo dutiyādīsupi vuttoyeva hoti, evamidhāpīti āha ‘‘ubhayattha eva-saddena niyamo veditabbo’’ti.
为了显示由两处词句的限定而获得的功德,而说“这即是……”等。“不净业处”是指以不净为所缘的禅那。因为它在不净对象上起到修习业处的作用,并且是瑜伽行者获得殊胜快乐的原因,所以称为“不净业处”。其中“唯”字,是用来遮止其他所缘。“以通达之力”,是指以禅那通达的力量。当禅那通过殊胜的修习而成就时,便能如其自性地通达自己的境界并完全了达,因此称为“通达”。由于是有可厌相的粗显所缘,由于是应厌离的违逆所缘,所以说“以方便”,即通过某种理由或间接的方式。“亦因所缘的寂静性”,指所缘达到依次观察时极为微细的状态。因为当所缘变得寂静、平息时,于其上转起的法自身也变得寂静、平息。因此说“寂静、寂止、寂灭”,即一切热恼都已寂灭的意思。所缘的寂静性,以及那些以彼为所缘的法的寂静性,应当以观察出世间法的智慧来阐明。显示巴利原文
Ubhayapadaniyamena laddhaguṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asubhakammaṭṭhānanti asubhārammaṇaṃ jhānamāha. Tañhi asubhesu yogakammabhāvato yogino sukhavisesānaṃ kāraṇabhāvato ca ‘‘asubhakammaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Kevalanti iminā ārammaṇaṃ nivatteti. Paṭivedhavasenāti jhānapaṭivedhavasena. Jhānañhi bhāvanāvisesena ijjhantaṃ attano visayaṃ paṭivijjhantameva pavattati yathāsabhāvato paṭivijjhīyati cāti paṭivedhoti vuccati. Oḷārikārammaṇattāti bībhacchārammaṇattā. Paṭikūlārammaṇattāti jigucchitabbārammaṇattā. Pariyāyenāti kāraṇena lesantarena vā. Ārammaṇasantatāyapīti anukkamena vicetabbataṃ pattārammaṇassa paramasukhumataṃ sandhāyāha. Sante hi sannisinne ārammaṇe pavattamāno dhammo sayampi sannisinnova hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘santo vūpasanto nibbuto’’ti, nibbutasabbapariḷāhoti attho. Ārammaṇasantatāya tadārammaṇānaṃ dhammānaṃ santatā lokuttaradhammārammaṇāhi paccavekkhaṇāhi dīpetabbā.
没有任何能带来掺杂、使之成为殊胜的浇灌,故为“无浇灌”;由于无浇灌,故为“未被浇灌”;正因未被浇灌,故为“不混杂”、“未与遍作等相杂”;正因如此,故为“各别”、“单独唯一”、“独特”、“不共”。这一切都是为了显示其自性即是寂静的状态而说,或者遍作是寂静之因。所谓“遍作”,即以遍作为始,以相的生起为终;这里没有那样的东西,这是其意旨。因为那时业处无味,故可能是不寂静、非殊胜的。或者,与近行定相比,这里没有寂静性,如此关联。如同在近行定的刹那,由于盖的离去和支的显现,对其他禅那而言有寂静性,对此禅那则不然。然而,此禅那从最初作意起即是殊胜的,如此关联。“有些人”是就后期精舍的住众而说。“未被浇灌”即未以浇灌而浇灌。因此说“有滋养”,即类似有滋养之义。“甘美”即可爱。能带来心所乐的获得,依三禅、四禅之力,或因舍的寂静状态而趋向乐,故应知这一切也是依于所有禅那之力。然而,能带来身乐的获得,应知是依于由禅那等起的殊胜色所触之身的状态,而且这是在出禅那之时。据此观点,“于每……”显示巴利原文
Nāssa santapaṇītabhāvāvahaṃ kiñci secananti asecanako, asecanakattā anāsittako, anāsittakattā eva abbokiṇṇo asammisso parikammādinā, tatoyeva pāṭiyekko, visuṃyeveko āveṇiko asādhāraṇo. Sabbametaṃ sarasato eva santabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ, parikammaṃ vā santabhāvanimittaṃ. Parikammanti ca kasiṇakaraṇādinimittuppādapariyosānaṃ, tādisaṃ idha natthīti adhippāyo. Tadā hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ nirassādattā asantaṃ appaṇītaṃ siyā. Upacārena vā natthi ettha santatāti yojanā. Yathā upacārakkhaṇe nīvaraṇavigamena aṅgapātubhāvena ca paresaṃ santatā hoti, na evamimassa. Ayaṃ pana ādimanasi…pe… paṇīto cāti yojanā. Kecīti uttaravihāravāsike sandhāyāha. Anāsittakoti upasecanena anāsittako. Tenāha ‘‘ojavanto’’ti, ojavantasadisoti attho. Madhuroti iṭṭho. Cetasikasukhappaṭilābhasaṃvattanaṃ tikacatukkajjhānavasena upekkhāya vā santabhāvena sukhagatikattā sabbesampi vasena veditabbaṃ. Jhānasamuṭṭhānapaṇītarūpaphuṭasarīratāvasena pana kāyikasukhappaṭilābhasaṃvattanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, tañca kho jhānato vuṭṭhitakāle. Imasmiṃ pakkhe appitappitakkhaṇeti idaṃ hetumhi bhummavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“未镇伏”指未以禅那从自相续中移除、未断除。“由不巧便所生”中,不巧便即无明,意为由此所生。因为一切恶法皆以无明为先导。“仅于刹那”即仅于其转起的刹那。“令消失”在此处,消失即毁灭。然而,由于这里意指禅那作者的功德,那是镇伏现行烦恼,故说“镇伏”。“令寂止”即殊胜地寂止。而殊胜地寂止即是正确地寂止,故说“善令寂止”。显示巴利原文
Avikkhambhiteti jhānena sakasantānato anīhaṭe appahīne. Akosallasambhūteti akosallaṃ vuccati avijjā, tato sambhūte. Avijjāpubbaṅgamā hi sabbe pāpadhammā. Khaṇenevāti attano pavattikkhaṇeneva. Antaradhāpetīti ettha antaradhāpanaṃ vināsanaṃ. Taṃ pana jhānakattukassa idhādhippetattā pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘vikkhambhetī’’ti. Vūpasametīti visesena upasameti. Visesena upasamanaṃ pana sammadeva upasamanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘suṭṭhu upasametī’’ti.
难道不是也有其他定在自己转起的刹那,便令敌对法消失、止息吗?那么,为何唯独将此定如此特别地宣说呢?因为从前行阶段开始,它就有令种种寻思止息的性质。确实曾这样说:‘应修习入出息念以断除寻思。’(《增支部》9.1;《优陀那》31)再者,这是利根者、智最上者的业处,而智最上者断除烦恼较其他更为殊胜,犹如见至者较信解者殊胜,因此针对这一殊胜处,说‘它令敌对法彻底消失、止息’。或者,由于在相显现时,诸支的显现是刹那即具足的,唯独此定被称为‘彻底消失、止息’,正如大非时云涌起、降下大雨的刹那,地面的尘垢便止息。因此他说:‘诸比丘,譬如大非时云涌起……’等等。教法中的禅那修习大多是顺决择分的,所以说‘因为是顺决择分的’。然而对于诸佛,则必定是顺决择分的。因为正是修习此业处,一切正等觉者证得正等觉。此定作为圣道的基础,次第增长后,如同达到了圣道的状态,所以说‘次第达到圣道的增长’。而此义理,依离贪、灭尽、舍遣随观,是完全合理的。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca aññopi samādhi attano pavattikkhaṇeneva paṭipakkhadhamme antaradhāpeti vūpasameti, atha kasmā ayameva samādhi evaṃ visesetvā vuttoti? Pubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya nānāvitakkavūpasamanasabbhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ānāpānassati bhāvetabbā vitakkupacchedāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.1; udā. 31). Apica tikkhapaññassa ñāṇuttarassetaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ, ñāṇuttarassa ca kilesappahānaṃ itarehi sātisayaṃ yathā saddhādhimuttehi diṭṭhippattassa, tasmā imaṃ visesaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā nimittapātubhāve sati khaṇeneva aṅgapātubhāvasabbhāvato ayameva samādhi ‘‘ṭhānaso antaradhāpeti vūpasametī’’ti vutto yathā taṃ mahato akālameghassa uṭṭhitassa dhārānipāte khaṇeneva pathaviyaṃ rajojallassa vūpasamo. Tenevāha ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, mahā akālamegho uṭṭhito’’tiādi. Sāsanikassa jhānabhāvanā yebhuyyena nibbedhabhāgiyāva hotīti āha ‘‘nibbedhabhāgiyattā’’ti. Buddhānaṃ pana ekaṃsena nibbedhabhāgiyāva hoti. Imameva hi kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā sabbepi sammāsambuddhā sammāsambodhiṃ adhigacchanti, ariyamaggassa pādakabhūto ayaṃ samādhi anukkamena vaḍḍhitvā ariyamaggabhāvaṃ upagato viya hotīti āha ‘‘anupubbena ariyamaggavuḍḍhippatto’’ti. Ayaṃ panattho virāganirodhapaṭinissaggānupassanānaṃ vasena sammadeva yujjati.
‘如何’一词是显示提问方式的用语。此处提问源于宣说的意欲,因其他途径不存在,且此提问涵盖了上面将详述的一切种类差别。为说明此义,他说:‘如何……乃至……是欲详细阐明的提问。’在‘如何多修习’处,也应将‘入出息念定’一词引来连接。其中,‘如何’是欲从种种方面详细说明入出息念定多修习的提问;‘多修习的入出息念定’则指示所问之法。为显示此义,他以‘同样的方法’来指示。为便于把握,将前面广说之义归纳显示,他说:‘而此处的略义是’,意即总括义。显示巴利原文
Kathanti idaṃ pucchanākāravibhāvanapadaṃ, pucchā cettha kathetukamyatāvasena aññesaṃ asambhavato, sā ca upari desanaṃ āruḷhānaṃ sabbesaṃ pakāravisesānaṃ āmasanavasenāti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘kathanti…pe… vitthāretukamyatāpucchā’’ti āha. Kathaṃ bahulīkatoti etthāpi ānāpānassatisamādhīti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Tattha kathanti ānāpānassatisamādhibahulīkāraṃ nānappakārato vitthāretukamyatāpucchā. Bahulīkato ānāpānassatisamādhīti tathā puṭṭhadhammanidassananti imamatthaṃ ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti imināyeva atidissati. Heṭṭhā papañcavasena vuttamatthaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ saṅgahetvā dassento ‘‘ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho’’ti āha, piṇḍatthoti vuttaṃ hoti.
‘那个义理’是指以‘如何修习’等提问方式简略所说的义理。在‘此处如来出现于世间’等句中,‘此处’一词是就世间而说。在‘就住立于此’等句中,是就处所而说。在‘诸比丘,我于此已食、已满足’等句中,仅是填充语。而在‘此处比丘学得法’等句中,则指教法。为显示‘诸比丘,此处比丘’这里也是指教法,他说‘诸比丘,在此教法中比丘’。之后为使该义理明显,他说‘因为此’等。其中,‘能产生一切种类入出息念定者’的‘一切种类’是就十六种方式而言。因为这些方式唯在此教法中才有。外道们即便有所知,也仅知最初的四种方式。因此他说‘是遮止其他教法有如此状态’,意思是遮止如前所说之人有这些依止的状态。由此显示‘诸比丘,此处’一词包含了‘唯’字,因为确实有单语即表简别的,如‘食风者’。因此他说‘诸比丘,唯此处有沙门’等。因为能圆满成就沙门的法,即是能产生一切种类入出息念定者。‘外道之说’是指其他外道们的种种学说,即外道之处。显示巴利原文
Tamatthanti taṃ ‘‘kathaṃ bhāvito’’tiādinā pucchāvasena saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ. ‘‘Idha tathāgato loke uppajjatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.291; a. ni. 3.61) idha-saddo lokaṃ upādāya vutto. ‘‘Idheva tiṭṭhamānassā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.369) okāsaṃ. ‘‘Idhāhaṃ, bhikkhave, bhuttāvī assaṃ pavārito’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.30) padapūraṇamattaṃ. ‘‘Idha bhikkhu dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇātī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.73) pana sāsanaṃ. ‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhū’’ti idhāpi sāsanamevāti dassento ‘‘bhikkhave, imasmiṃ sāsane bhikkhū’’ti vatvā tamevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattakassāti sabbappakāraggahaṇaṃ soḷasa pakāre sandhāya. Te hi imasmiṃyeva sāsane. Bāhirakā hi jānantā ādito catuppakārameva jānanti. Tenāha ‘‘aññasāsanassa tathābhāvappaṭisedhano’’ti, yathāvuttassa puggalassa nissayabhāvappaṭisedhanoti attho. Etena ‘‘idha, bhikkhave’’ti idaṃ antogadhaeva-saddanti dasseti. Santi hi ekapadānipi avadhāraṇāni yathā vāyubhakkhoti. Tenevāha ‘‘idheva, bhikkhave, samaṇo’’tiādi. Paripuṇṇasamaṇakaraṇadhammo hi yo, so sabbappakāraānāpānassatisamādhinibbattako. Parappavādāti paresaṃ aññatitthiyānaṃ nānappakāravādā titthāyatanāni.
为显示林野等住处正适合修习,他说‘因为对此’等。难以调伏、未达调伏的牛,是伪牛。如同乳房完全不能流出乳汁那样,阻碍挤奶的母牛是伪母牛。‘他的’指牧牛人的。依于色声等而生起的乐味,即是色所缘等味。‘先前惯习的所缘’指出家前,或在无始轮回中所熟悉的所缘。应连接:以近行而靠近,以安止而安住。显示巴利原文
Araññādikasseva bhāvanānurūpasenāsanataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imassa hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Duddamo damathaṃ anupagato goṇo kūṭagoṇo. Yathā thanehi sabbaso khīraṃ na paggharati, evaṃ dohapaṭibandhinī kūṭadhenu. Assāti gopassa. Rūpasaddādike paṭicca uppajjanakaassādo rūpārammaṇādiraso. Pubbe āciṇṇārammaṇanti pabbajitato pubbe, anādimati vā saṃsāre paricitārammaṇaṃ. Upacāravasena upanisīdati, appanāvasena upanipajjatīti yojetabbaṃ.
“此处”:指在此教法中。“应系缚”:指应系住。“以念”:指以正确认取业处相的作用而现起的念。“于所缘”:指于业处所缘。“坚固”:即稳定,意为使其具有力量,如同具念者的近行定与安止定等定得以成就那样。显示巴利原文
Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Nibandheyyāti bandheyya. Satiyāti sammadeva kammaṭṭhānasallakkhaṇavasappavattāya satiyā. Ārammaṇeti kammaṭṭhānārammaṇe. Daḷhanti thiraṃ, yathā satokārissa upacārappanābhedo samādhi ijjhati, tathā thāmagataṃ katvāti attho.
“如顶”:因具有相续等殊胜功德,且为佛陀等圣者所亲近,故如同顶,意为最高。“殊胜证得与现法乐住的足处”:指对于一切佛、部分独觉及佛弟子,既是殊胜证得的足处,也是以其他业处已证殊胜者的现法乐住的足处。世尊如同宅相师,能指示瑜伽行者适宜的住处。比丘如同豹,独住林中,摧破敌对而达成所愿。“最上果”:指沙门果。“精进速度适宜的场地”:成为修习精勤速度的适宜之地。显示巴利原文
Muddhabhūtanti santatādivisesaguṇavantatāya buddhādīhi ariyehi samāsevitabhāvato ca muddhasadisaṃ, uttamanti attho. Visesādhigamadiṭṭhadhammasukhavihārapadaṭṭhānanti sabbesaṃ buddhānaṃ ekaccānaṃ paccekabuddhānaṃ buddhasāvakānañca visesādhigamassa ceva aññakammaṭṭhānena adhigatavisesānaṃ diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārassa ca padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Vatthuvijjācariyo viya bhagavā yogīnaṃ anurūpanivāsaṭṭhānupadissanato. Bhikkhu dīpisadiso araññe ekako viharitvā paṭipakkhanimmathanena icchitatthasādhanato. Phalamuttamanti sāmaññaphalamāha. Parakkamajavayoggabhūminti bhāvanussāhajavassa yoggakaraṇabhūmibhūtaṃ.
“如是所说之相”:即依阿毗达摩教说与经教说所说的相。“树近处”:即如所说:“于正午时分,四周遍覆树荫,无风处树叶飘落,所及的范围称为树下”,此即所说的树近处。其余七种坐卧处,即所说的:山、岩谷、山洞、冢墓、林丛、露地、草堆。“顺适三季、顺适界与行者性”:即顺适于暑等三季,顺适于痰等三界,顺适于痴等三性行。如此,暑季时林野为顺适,因其柔和清凉;寒季时树下为顺适,因能遮雪;雨季时空屋为顺适,因有遮雨的屋。痰界者、痰性者,林野为顺适,因通过远行乞食平息痰;胆汁界者,树下为顺适,因有凉风触受;风界者,空屋为顺适,因能遮风。痴性行者,林野为顺适,因大林中如广场开阔,心不萎缩;嗔性行者,树下为顺适,能令心净信;贪性行者,空屋为顺适,能遮止异分所缘的进入。“不属于昏沉、不掉举的部分”:即不属于萎缩、散乱的部分。卧姿属于懈怠的方面,站立与经行属于掉举的方面,坐姿则不然。因此,坐是平稳的。为显示:结跏趺坐而令坐稳固,上身正直而令出息入息运行安乐,置念于面前而作为把握所缘的方便,故如此说。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttalakkhaṇesūti abhidhammapariyāyena suttantapariyāyena vuttalakkhaṇesu. Rukkhasamīpanti ‘‘yāvatā majjhanhike kāle samantā chāyā pharati, nivāte paṇṇāni patanti, ettāvatā rukkhamūlanti vuccatī’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ rukkhassa samīpaṭṭhānaṃ. Avasesasattavidhasenāsananti pabbataṃ kandaraṃ giriguhaṃ susānaṃ vanappatthaṃ abbhokāsaṃ palālapuñjanti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ututtayānukūlaṃ dhātucariyānukūlanti gimhādiututtayassa semhādidhātuttayassa mohādicaritattayassa ca anukūlaṃ. Tathā hi gimhakāle araññaṃ anukūlaṃ sommasītalabhāvato, hemante rukkhamūlaṃ himapātanivāraṇato, vassakāle suññāgāraṃ vassanivāraṇagehasambhavato. Semhadhātukassa semhapakatikassa araññaṃ anukūlaṃ dūraṃ gantvā bhikkhācaraṇena semhassa vūpasamanato, pittadhātukassa rukkhamūlaṃ anukūlaṃ sītavātasamphassasambhavato , vātadhātukassa suññāgāraṃ anukūlaṃ vātanivāraṇato. Mohacaritassa araññaṃ anukūlaṃ. Mahāaraññe hi cittaṃ na saṅkucati vivaṭaṅgaṇabhāvato, dosacaritassa rukkhamūlaṃ anukūlaṃ pasādanīyabhāvato, rāgacaritassa suññāgāraṃ anukūlaṃ visabhāgārammaṇānaṃ pavesanivāraṇato. Alīnānuddhaccapakkhikanti asaṅkocāvikkhepapakkhikaṃ. Sayanañhi kosajjapakkhikaṃ, ṭhānacaṅkamanāni uddhaccapakkhikāni, na evaṃ nisajjā. Tato eva tassā santatā. Nisajjāya daḷhabhāvaṃ pallaṅkābhujanena, assāsapassāsānaṃ pavattanasukhataṃ uparimakāyassa ujukaṭṭhapanena, ārammaṇapariggahūpāyaṃ parimukhaṃ satiyā ṭhapanena dassento.
“结跏趺坐”:即由大腿下结缚而安住之坐。“令下身不正直”,即由“坐”一词便令了知。“令身正直”中的“身”字指上身,故说“令上身正直”。为显示那正直的相状与作用,而说“十八”等。“不俯”:即不前倾。“不散堕”:即不散乱、不越出正道,由此前前后后辗转生起殊胜,增长增广。此处“pari”与“abhi”同义,故说“面向业处”,即遮止向外散动种种所缘,唯以业处为前导的意思。“pari”有摄持义,如在“引导者”等词中。“出离”是从敌对法出离的意思,因此“已摄持而出离”即于一切时中持守而不忘失,断除忘失之念,令最上念住现前。“具念者”:具足念、以正忆念而入息,其入息无任何离念之转起,这就是它的含义。在“具念出息”中,也应引入“eva”字,作“具念者出息”。“念行者”:即唯是具念者,或唯依念而作应作之事者,或有如此修习之习性者。显示巴利原文
Ūrubaddhāsananti ūrūnamadhobandhanavasena nisajjā. Heṭṭhimakāyassa anujukaṃ ṭhapanaṃ nisajjāvacaneneva bodhitanti. Ujuṃ kāyanti ettha kāya-saddo uparimakāyavisayoti āha – ‘‘uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Taṃ pana ujukaṭṭhapanaṃ sarūpato payojanato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhārasā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na paṇamantīti na oṇamanti. Na paripatatīti na vigacchati vīthiṃ na vilaṅgheti, tato eva pubbenāparaṃ visesuppattiyā vuḍḍhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati. Idha pari-saddo abhi-saddena samānatthoti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti, bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇato nivāretvā kammaṭṭhānaṃyeva purakkhatvāti attho. Parīti pariggahaṭṭho ‘‘pariṇāyikā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 16, 20) viya. Niyyānaṭṭho paṭipakkhato niggamanaṭṭho, tasmā pariggahitaniyyānanti sabbathā gahitāsammosaṃ pariccattasammosaṃ satiṃ katvā, paramaṃ satinepakkaṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti attho. Satovāti satiyā samannāgato eva saranto eva assasati, nāssa kāci sativirahitā assāsappavatti hotīti attho. Sato passasatīti etthāpi satova passasatīti eva-saddo ānetvā vattabbo. Satokārīti sato eva hutvā satiyā eva vā kātabbassa kattā, karaṇasīlo vā.
“以三十二种行相”:即于四组四法中,将长、短等十六句依入出息分为二类,从“长入息”开始,至“观舍遣之出息”为止,所说的三十二种行相。如果在“具念者入息,具念者出息”的分别中已经说过,为何不直接说“入息出息”,而说“念行者”呢?这是为了使教说成为一味。初四法中,仅两句以现在时出现,其余以未来时,因此为了使教说成为一味,于一切处只说“念行者”。“依长入息”:即依于长入息,省略格尾而作说明;或依世尊所说的“长”。了知心一境性、无散乱者,因是散乱的对治,故得无散乱之名;在了知心一境性时,念已现前,投入所缘而住。“依彼念、依彼智”:即依如前所说的念与如前所说的智。这就是所说:以长入息为所缘,心不散乱,或因不痴而正知者,于彼处念即现前;那正知者,由作意所缘或因不痴而有正知,依彼所摄的念与正知,那相应的瑜伽行者即称为“念行者”。“观舍遣之入息”:即成为观舍遣者而入息的意思。或读作“观舍遣之入息”,其意为:彼观舍遣者之入息,即观舍遣之入息,依他们的解释。显示巴利原文
Bāttiṃsāya ākārehīti catūsu catukkesu āgatāni dīgharassādīni soḷasa padāni assāsapassāsavasena dvidhā vibhajitvā vuttehi dīghamassāsaṃ ādiṃ katvā paṭinissaggānupassipassāsapariyantehi bāttiṃsākārehi. Yadi ‘‘satova assasati, sato passasatī’’ti etassa vibhaṅge vuttaṃ, atha kasmā ‘‘assasati passasati’’cceva avatvā ‘‘satokārī’’ti vuttaṃ? Ekarasaṃ desanaṃ kātukāmatāya. Paṭhamacatukke padadvayameva hi vattamānakālavasena āgataṃ, itarāni anāgatakālavasena, tasmā ekarasaṃ desanaṃ kātukāmatāya sabbattha ‘‘satokāri’’cceva vuttaṃ. Dīghaṃassāsavasenāti dīghaassāsavasena, vibhattialopaṃ katvā niddeso. Dīghanti vā bhagavatā vuttaassāsavasena. Cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepanti vikkhepassa paṭipakkhabhāvato avikkhepoti laddhanāmaṃ cittassa ekaggabhāvaṃ pajānato sati upaṭṭhitā ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā ṭhitā hoti. Tāya satiyā tena ñāṇenāti yathāvuttāya satiyā yathāvuttena ca ñāṇena. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – dīghaṃ assāsaṃ ārammaṇabhūtaṃ avikkhittacittassa asammohato vā sampajānantassa tattha sati upaṭṭhitāva hoti, taṃ sampajānantassa ārammaṇakaraṇavasena asammohavasena vā sampajaññaṃ, tadadhīnasatisampajaññena taṃsamaṅgī yogāvacaro satokārī nāma hotīti. Paṭinissaggānupassī assāsavasenāti paṭinissaggānupassī hutvā assasanassa vasena. ‘‘Paṭinissaggānupassiassāsavasenā’’ti vā pāṭho, tassa paṭinissaggānupassino assāsā paṭinissaggānupassiassāsā, tesaṃ vasenāti attho.
“内起的呼吸是入息,外起的呼吸是出息”,故说“入息即外出之风”等。但在经藏注释中,即使外出后仍向内呼吸的称为入息,即使内入后仍向外呼吸的称为出息,这是依相反的次第而说。或者,在母胎中未得外出之处的鼻风,刚出母胎时首先向外而出,因此在律藏注释中依生起次第说“最初的息是入息”,即指外出之风。由此故说“一切住胎者”等。然而在经藏注释中,于修行开始时,因先将鼻风向内吸入,而后向外呼出,故依转起次第说“最初的息是入息”,即指进入之风。此处唯以经藏之理趣,与《无碍解道》的巴利经文相符:“以念随行于入息的初中后时,内心因散乱故身与心皆躁动、动摇、颤动;以念随行于出息的初中后时,外心因散乱故身与心皆躁动、动摇、颤动。”他们说:“因为修行开始时,唯转起次第是被认可的,所以更为殊胜。”“触腭而灭”:即触腭而止息。据说,刚出生的幼童即因此作出喷嚏状。以上这些是对前述义理的归结。有些人说:“‘如此’一词,意思是依此转起次第,入息应被理解为外出之风。”显示巴利原文
Anto uṭṭhitasasanaṃ assāso, bahi uṭṭhitasasanaṃ passāsoti āha – ‘‘assāsoti bahinikkhamanavāto’’tiādi. Suttantaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana bahi uṭṭhahitvāpi anto sasanato assāso, anto uṭṭhahitvāpi bahi sasanato passāsoti katvā uppaṭipāṭiyā vuttaṃ. Atha vā mātukucchiyaṃ bahi nikkhamituṃ aladdhokāso nāsikāvāto mātukucchito nikkhantamatte paṭhamaṃ bahi nikkhamatīti vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ uppattikkamena ‘‘ādimhi sāso assāso’’ti bahinikkhamanavāto vutto. Tenevāha ‘‘sabbesampi gabbhaseyyakāna’’ntiādi. Suttantaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana pavattiyaṃ bhāvanārambhasamaye paṭhamaṃ nāsikāvātassa anto ākaḍḍhitvā pacchā bahi vissajjanato pavattikkamena ‘‘ādimhi sāso assāso’’ti antopavisanavāto vutto. Suttantanayoyeva cettha ‘‘assāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato ajjhattaṃ vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā ca, passāsādimajjhapariyosānaṃ satiyā anugacchato bahiddhā vikkhepagatena cittena kāyopi cittampi sāraddhā ca honti iñjitā ca phanditā cā’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.157) imāya pāḷiyā sameti. ‘‘Bhāvanārambhe pavattikkamasseva icchitattā sundarataro’’ti vadanti. Tāluṃ āhacca nibbāyatīti tāluṃ āhacca nirujjhati. Tena kira sampatijāto bāladārako khipitaṃ karoti. Evaṃ tāvātiādi yathāvuttassa atthassa nigamanaṃ. Keci ‘‘evaṃ tāvāti anena pavattikkamena assāso bahinikkhamanavātoti gahetabbanti adhippāyo’’ti vadanti.
“依长时”是指依于时间上的长时。因为“addhāna”一词既表示时间,也表示处所。在此,先以处所长时为例,进而依时间之长时来阐明入出息的长短,故说“正如”等语。其中,“处所长时”指作为处所的长远。“遍满”即周遍。即使被粉碎至微尘,也因其有众多缠束,故“长时”即指长的区域。因此,由于缓慢转起而有长续之性,故称为长。在此应知,在象等与狗等的身体中,入出息的长短是依时间之长时,而非依处所长时,因为有“缓慢充满后缓慢而出,快速充满后快速而出”这样的说法。“于人中”指即使在同等量度的人类身体中。“长入息”意为长的入息之流在转起。“出息”于此也同理。而对于狗、兔等,则连接为短入息与短出息。然而,这些入出息的长与短,应视为那些众生身体的自性。“他们”指那些众生。“彼”指入出息。“短暂长时”即少时。“以九种行相”是就那些修习业处而尚未获得前后殊胜者而言,最初所说仅有三种行相,而且这三种实乃随顺某一类善巧观察入息者、某一类善巧观察出息者,以及某一类善巧观察此两者者,即是依于这三种人。也有人这样说:“‘入息与出息’的合并宣说,是为显示修习的无间断。”
},
{显示巴利原文
Addhānavasenāti kāladdhānavasena. Ayañhi addhāna-saddo kālassa desassa ca vācakoti. Tattha desaddhānaṃ udāharaṇabhāvena dassetvā kāladdhānassa vasena assāsapassāsānaṃ dīgharassataṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha okāsaddhānanti okāsabhūtaṃ addhānaṃ. Pharitvāti byāpetvā. Cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi anekakalāpabhāvena, dīghamaddhānanti dīghaṃ padesaṃ. Tasmāti saṇikaṃ pavattiyā dīghasantānatāya dīghāti vuccanti. Ettha ca hatthiādisarīre sunakhādisarīre ca assāsapassāsānaṃ desaddhānavisiṭṭhena kāladdhānavaseneva dīgharassatā vuttāti veditabbā ‘‘saṇikaṃ pūretvā saṇikameva nikkhamanti, sīghaṃ pūretvā sīghameva nikkhamantī’’ti vacanato. Manussesūti samānappamāṇesupi manussasarīresu. Dīghaṃ assasantīti dīghaṃ assāsappabandhaṃ pavattentīti attho. Passasantīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sunakhasasādayo viya rassaṃ assasanti passasanti cāti yojanā. Idaṃ pana dīghaṃ rassañca assasanaṃ passasanañca tesaṃ sattānaṃ sarīrassa sabhāvoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tesanti tesaṃ sattānaṃ. Teti assāsapassāsā. Ittaramaddhānanti appakaṃ kālaṃ. Navahākārehīti bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa pubbenāparaṃ aladdhavisesassa kevalaṃ addhānavasena ādito vuttā tayo ākārā, te ca kho ekacco assāsaṃ suṭṭhu sallakkheti, ekacco passāsaṃ, ekacco tadubhayanti imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ puggalānaṃ vasena. Keci pana ‘‘assasatipi passasatipīti ekajjhaṃ vacanaṃ bhāvanāya nirantaraṃ pavattidassanattha’’nti vadanti. Chandavasena pubbe viya tayo, tathā pāmojjavasenāti imehi navahi ākārehi.
虽然在此,一位修行者仅可获得三种行相,但依传承,因一切皆已载于巴利圣典,且应依他们而作遍作,故说“于此,此比丘以九种行相”。如此了知者,即如此依所说行相而了知入出息、于彼作意转起者。“以一种行相”指于长入息等四种行相中以一种行相,或于九种、三种中以一种。正如将说:显示巴利原文
Kāmañcettha ekassa puggalassa tayo eva ākārā labbhanti, tantivasena pana sabbesaṃ pāḷiāruḷhattā tesaṃ vasena parikammassa kātabbattā ca ‘‘tatrāyaṃbhikkhu navahākārehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pajānatoti evaṃ yathāvuttehi ākārehi assāsapassāse pajānato, tattha manasikāraṃ pavattentassa. Ekenākārenāti dīghaṃassāsādīsu catūsu ākāresu ekena ākārena, navasu tīsu vā ekena. Tathā hi vakkhati –
「呼吸有长与短,
出息也是如此;
四种相显现,
只在于比丘的鼻端。”(《律藏注》2.165)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Dīgho rasso ca assāso, Passāsopi ca tādiso; Cattāro vaṇṇā vattanti, Nāsikaggeva bhikkhuno’’ti. (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.165);
此修习即是对入出息之身随观,故说为“身随观念处之修习成就”。显示巴利原文
Ayaṃ bhāvanā assāsapassāsakāyānupassanāti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanā sampajjatī’’ti.
现在,为纯粹依据圣典显示那九种行相及其修习方法,而开始阐述“如”等。在此,“如何了知?”是出于说明了知方法的愿望而发问的。“长入息”指具有所述特征的长入息。“称为长时”,即被称为长时的时间,意思是长刹那。或者,“saṅkhāta”一词如同“theyyasaṅkhāta”(被称为贼)等中的用法,是部分、区块的同义语,因此“addhānasaṅkhāta”意为长时的部分、区域的部分,这是其义。“欲生起”指由于能带来前后殊胜的修习已引生喜乐,因而于彼生起以殊胜欲作性为特征的善欲。“依欲”指依止于如此转起的欲,而对于修习殊胜业处、令业处增长广大者。“从此更微细”指因前述之欲的转起,而变得比先前更微细。由于修习之力,身的躁动与热恼已得止息,所以出入息转而更微细地流转。“喜悦生起”指因出入息更微细、所缘更寂静,且业处已入行道,而与修习心俱起的、以微小等为差别的稚嫩喜得以生起。“心回转”指有些人说:因为次第达到入出息极度微细的状态,当他们的入出息达到不应作意的状态时,心便从他们回转。然而,由于修习之力,当入出息达到更加微细的状态,且于彼处似相生起时,心从对自然入出息的作意中回转。“舍安住”显示巴利原文
Idāni pāḷivaseneva te nava ākāre bhāvanāvidhiñca dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ‘‘kathaṃ pajānātī’’ti pajānanavidhiṃ kathetukamyatāya pucchati. Dīghaṃ assāsanti vuttalakkhaṇaṃ dīghaṃ assāsaṃ. Addhānasaṅkhāteti addhānanti saṅkhaṃ gate dīghe kāle, dīghaṃ khaṇanti attho. Koṭṭhāsapariyāyo vā saṅkhāta-saddo ‘‘theyyasaṅkhāta’’ntiādīsu viya, tasmā addhānasaṅkhāteti addhānakoṭṭhāse desabhāgeti attho. Chando uppajjatīti bhāvanāya pubbenāparaṃ visesaṃ āvahantiyā laddhassādattā tattha sātisayo kattukāmatālakkhaṇo kusalacchando uppajjati. Chandavasenāti tathāpavattachandassa vasena visesabhāvanamanuyuñjantassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuḍḍhiṃ phātiṃ gamentassa. Tato sukhumataranti yathāvuttachandappavattiyā purimakato sukhumataraṃ. Bhāvanābalena hi paṭippassaddhadarathapariḷāhatāya kāyassa assāsapassāsā sukhumatarā hutvā pavattanti. Pāmojjaṃ uppajjatīti assāsapassāsānaṃ sukhumatarabhāvena ārammaṇassa santataratāya kammaṭṭhānassa ca vīthippaṭipannatāya bhāvanācittasahagato pamodo khuddikādibhedā taruṇapīti uppajjati. Cittaṃ vivattatīti anukkamena assāsapassāsānaṃ ativiya sukhumatarabhāvappattiyā anupaṭṭhahane vicetabbākārappattehi tehi cittaṃ vinivattatīti keci. Bhāvanābalena pana sukhumatarabhāvappattesu assāsapassāsesu tattha paṭibhāganimitte uppanne pakatiassāsapassāsato cittaṃ nivattati. Upekkhā saṇṭhātīti tasmiṃ paṭibhāganimitte upacārappanābhede samādhimhi uppanne puna jhānanibbattanatthaṃ byāpārābhāvato ajjhupekkhanaṃ hoti, sā panāyaṃ upekkhā tatramajjhattupekkhāti veditabbā.
“以此九种行相”:即以如前所述的这九种方式而转起。“长入出息之身”:长形的入出息,纵使被粉碎为微尘,就集合的意义而言也是“身”。依于入出息而生起的所缘相,在此处也依入出息的共称而说。“念的现起”:念到达那个所缘后即安住于此,因此称为“现起”。“随观之智”:以奢摩他的方式随观所缘相,以毗婆舍那的方式,将入出息及其所依身确定为“色”,将心及与之相应的诸法确定为“非色”,如此对名色进行随观,此处的智即如实的了知。“身之现起”:那个身以作为所缘的方式,被念到达、安住,故说为“现起”。于此,以“身之现起”一句也包含了其他身,因为此处也意许如此所说的遍作行之故。“非念”:那个身不名为念。念既是现起,也是念,具足忆持的意义与现起的意义。以彼念:即以前述之念。以彼智:即以前述之智。彼身:即彼入出息身及彼所依的色身。随观:即以相应于禅那的智与相应于毗婆舍那的智,一再一再地观察。因此说为“于身随观身之念处修习”:即以此随观,于前述的身中,这被称为身随观念处修习。这是说:对于前述的入出息身及其所依的色身显示巴利原文
Imehi navahi ākārehīti imehi yathāvuttehi navahi pakārehi pavattā. Dīghaṃ assāsapassāsā kāyoti dīghākārā assāsapassāsā cuṇṇavicuṇṇāpi samūhaṭṭhena kāyo. Assāsapassāse nissāya uppannanimittampi ettha assāsapassāsasāmaññavasena vuttaṃ. Upaṭṭhānaṃ satīti taṃ ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā tiṭṭhatīti sati upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Anupassanā ñāṇanti samathavasena nimittassa anupassanā vipassanāvasena assāsapassāse tannissayañca kāyaṃ ‘‘rūpa’’nti, cittaṃ taṃsampayuttadhamme ca ‘‘arūpa’’nti vavatthapetvā nāmarūpassa anupassanā ca ñāṇaṃ tattha yathābhūtāvabodho. Kāyo upaṭṭhānanti so kāyo ārammaṇakaraṇavasena upagantvā sati ettha tiṭṭhatīti upaṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Ettha ca ‘‘kāyo upaṭṭhāna’’nti iminā itarakāyassapi saṅgahoti tathā vuttaṃ sammasanacārassapi idha icchitattā. No satīti so kāyo sati nāma na hoti. Sati upaṭṭhānañceva sati ca saraṇaṭṭhena upaṭṭhānaṭṭhena ca. Tāya satiyāti yathāvuttāya satiyā. Tena ñāṇenāti yathāvutteneva ñāṇena. Taṃ kāyanti taṃ assāsapassāsakāyañceva tannissayarūpakāyañca. Anupassatīti jhānasampayuttañāṇena ceva vipassanāñāṇena ca anu anu passati. Tena vuccati kāye kāyānupassanā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti tena anupassanena yathāvutte kāye ayaṃ kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti vuccati. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā ayaṃ yathāvutte assāsapassāsakāye tassa nissayabhūte karajakāye ca kāyasseva anupassanā anudakabhūtāya marīciyā udakānupassanā viya na aniccādisabhāve kāye niccādibhāvānupassanā, atha kho yathārahaṃ aniccadukkhānattā subhabhāvasseva anupassanā. Atha vā kāye ‘‘ahanti vā, mamanti vā, itthīti vā, puriso’’ti vā gahetabbassa kassaci abhāvato tādisaṃ ananupassitvā kāyamattasseva anupassanā kāyānupassanā, tāya kāyānupassanāya sampayuttā satiyeva upaṭṭhānaṃ satipaṭṭhānaṃ, tassa bhāvanā vaḍḍhanā kāyānupassanā satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāti.
“同样的方法”:即以“九种行相”等所说的方式,应用于短呼吸的部分。“此处”:即在此如所开示的“如何长入息”等所引的巴利教法中。“于此”:即在此以短呼吸部分所引的巴利教法中。“彼”:指瑜伽行者。“以长时间”:即以长时间的方式。“以短时间”:即以短时间的方式。“以这些行相”:即以这九种行相。显示巴利原文
Eseva nayoti ‘‘navahi ākārehī’’tiādinā vuttavidhiṃ rassa-pade atidissati. Etthāti etasmiṃ yathādassite ‘‘kathaṃ dīghaṃ assasanto’’tiādinā āgate pāḷinaye. Idhāti imasmiṃ rassapadavasena āgate pāḷinaye. Ayanti yogāvacaro. Addhānavasenāti dīghakālavasena. Ittaravasenāti parittakālavasena. Imehi ākārehīti imehi navahi ākārehi.
“那样的”:即长与短。“四种”:即四种行相,也就是长等。“比丘于鼻端”:为偈颂顺畅而作简略说。“或于鼻端”:其中,“或”字表示不定义,以此涵盖上唇。显示巴利原文
Tādisoti dīgho rasso ca. Cattāro vaṇṇāti cattāro ākārā te ca dīghādayo eva. Nāsikaggeva bhikkhunoti gāthāsukhatthaṃ rassaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Nāsikagge vāti vā-saddo aniyamattho, tena uttaroṭṭhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“觉知全身”:即对全身各部分别地、正确地具有感受习性、了知习性;或者,彼对各部分别地、正确地具有感受;或者,彼对各部分别地、正确地正在感受,这是其含义。其中,以“一切”一词,虽然已成就对入息等身的无余遍知,但为了显示对其由众多聚所集成之身的一切部分的觉知,而取用“paṭi”(各别)一词;为了显示于此中殷重而作的状态,而取用“saṃ”(正确地)一词。为了显示此义,而说“整个的”等。其中,应知:如同在入出息虽相同的情况下,为了显示瑜伽行者在行道方式上应各别地、殷重地行道,而作了各别的教导;同样地,为了阐明此义,虽然意义相同,也以“整个的”等对两句作了各别各别的释义。“令明显”:即令显著,令全然明了,这是其义。为了显示“令明显”即“阐明”,在此是以不迷惑的智令它们转起而成就,而说“如是令了知”等。其中,“因此”:即因为是以与智相应的心令入出息转起,而非以与智不相应的心,因此,如是状态者被称为“觉知全身,我当入息、出息而学”,这是诸佛等所说——应如此连接。“碎为微尘而散”:即因众多聚的状态,以碎为微尘的状态而散。“开始明显”:即由于依于念与智,先前已作之行作已转起。“应成为那样的”:即应成为与第四人相似的状态,意思是:更何况先令念与智现前之后,于三处都应令唯与智相应之心转起。显示巴利原文
Sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedīti sabbassa kāyassa paṭi paṭi paccekaṃ sammadeva vedanasīlo jānanasīlo, tassa vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedo etassa atthi, taṃ vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedamānoti attho. Tattha tattha sabba-ggahaṇena assāsādikāyassa anavasesapariyādāne siddhepi anekakalāpasamudāyabhāvato tassa sabbesampi bhāgānaṃ saṃvedanadassanatthaṃ paṭi-saddaggahaṇaṃ, tattha sakkaccakāribhāvadassanatthaṃ saṃ-saddaggahaṇanti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sakalassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yathā samānesupi assāsapassāsesu yogino paṭipattividhāne paccekaṃ sakkaccaṃyeva paṭipajjitabbanti dassetuṃ visuṃ desanā katā, evaṃ tamevatthaṃ dīpetuṃ satipi atthassa samānatāya ‘‘sakalassā’’tiādinā padadvayassa visuṃ visuṃ atthavaṇṇanā katāti veditabbā. Pākaṭaṃ karontoti vibhūtaṃ karonto, sabbaso vibhāventoti attho. Pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ vibhāvanaṃ tattha asammuyhanañāṇeneva nesaṃ pavattanena hotīti dassento ‘‘evaṃ viditaṃ karonto’’tiādimāha . Tattha tasmāti yasmā ñāṇasampayuttacitteneva assāsapassāse pavatteti, na vippayuttacittena, tasmā evaṃbhūto sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedī assasissāmi passasissāmīti sikkhatīti vuccati buddhādīhīti yojanā. Cuṇṇavicuṇṇavisaṭeti anekakalāpatāya cuṇṇavicuṇṇabhāvena visaṭe. Ādi pākaṭohoti satiyā ñāṇassa ca vasena katapubbābhisaṅkhārassa pavattattā. Tādisena bhavitabbanti catutthapuggalasadisena bhavitabbaṃ, pageva satiṃ ñāṇañca paccupaṭṭhapetvā tīsupi ṭhānesu ñāṇasampayuttameva cittaṃ pavattetabbanti adhippāyo.
如此,即是以所说的方式——依遍身感受。‘努力’就是精勤。‘策励’即作精进,令作意转起,这就是它的含义。‘于如是状态者’指修习入出息念的人。‘防护’即念或精进。‘以彼念’意味着,以那依入出息而生起的念。‘以彼作意’意为,那以念为前导的修习作意,与之俱行。‘习行’指在所说‘三学’中,修习增上善法。因为在这里,这种习行即被称作‘学’。‘前一种方式’是指在前述修习方式中最初两种事项,这就是其意旨。在那里,尽管由于如实了知入出息的长短,确实能够生起智慧,但这并不困难,因为只需如其转起地执取它们即可,因此在那里使用了现在时分的表述。然而,这后一种方式是困难的,犹如人行走于刀刃之上。因此,为了表明此处应作前方便才有更为殊胜的修习,便使用了未来时分的表述。为显示这个意义,所以说‘在那里,因为……’等。其中,‘于智的生起等’的‘等’字,包含了身行寂止、喜的感受等。然而,有些人在此说:‘这是防护与正受的摄集。’显示巴利原文
Evanti vuttappakārena sabbakāyappaṭisaṃvedanavaseneva. Ghaṭatīti ussahati. Vāyamatīti vāyāmaṃ karoti, manasikāraṃ pavattetīti attho. Tathābhūtassāti ānāpānassatiṃ bhāventassa. Saṃvaroti sati vīriyampi vā. Tāya satiyāti yā sā ānāpāne ārabbha pavattā sati, tāya. Tena manasikārenāti yo so tattha satipubbaṅgamo bhāvanāmanasikāro, tena saddhinti adhippāyo. Āsevatīti ‘‘tisso sikkhāyo’’ti vutte adhikusaladhamme āsevati. Tadāsevanañhettha sikkhananti adhippetaṃ. Purimanayeti purimasmiṃ bhāvanānaye, paṭhamavatthudvayeti adhippāyo. Tatthāpi kāmaṃ ñāṇuppādanaṃ labbhateva assāsapassāsānaṃ yāthāvato dīgharassabhāvāvabodhasabbhāvato, tathāpi taṃ na dukkaraṃ yathāpavattānaṃ tesaṃ gahaṇamattabhāvatoti tattha vattamānakālappayogo kato. Idaṃ pana dukkaraṃ purisassa khuradhārāyaṃ gamanasadisaṃ, tasmā sātisayenettha pubbābhisaṅkhārena bhavitabbanti dīpetuṃ anāgatakālappayogo katoti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha yasmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ñāṇuppādanādīsūti ādi-saddena kāyasaṅkhārapassambhanapītipaṭisaṃvedanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Keci panettha ‘‘saṃvarasamādānānaṃ saṅgaho’’ti vadanti.
‘身行’即入出息。它虽由心生起,但因系属于业生身而转起,故由此而被造作,称为身行。然而,如‘身行、语行’这样所说的、以思为相的身行,虽也依[业]门转起时,因多分转起及屡屡转起而以身门为特征,但在此并非所指。在‘令寂止’等中,后后之词是前前之词的释义。因此,‘寂止’即令寂静,应知那是在如此加行时,由于加行的成就,使本应生起的粗的身行不生起。‘在那里’即于‘令粗的身行寂止’此句中。‘未执取时’即业处尚未开始之时,由此,身与心也未被执取之时。因为‘结跏趺坐,端正身体,置念于前’以此说身执取,‘安立念于面前’以此说心执取。故说:‘身与心都被执取’。‘身’即业生身。‘有燥热’即有热恼。而它们的这种有燥热性,犹如因粗重而与粗性不相离,故说‘粗’。‘更强’即有强力、粗大。‘成为寂静’:首先,心因无外散而成为一境,执取业处而转起,成为寂静、寂止;由此,彼心生之色法获得轻快、柔软、适业性;由于随顺于彼,其余的三相续色也是如此。如此,当心与身寂止而转起时,依于他们的入出息,其寂静之性,次第成为细、更细、最细而转起。因此说‘然而,当他的身……’等。‘我令寂止’是初转向。‘弯曲’即倾注,‘正持’即正确地一再持来,‘作意’即于彼同一义中,前后转起的转向,即对此义作意、安立于心,‘审察’即观察。显示巴利原文
Kāyasaṅkhāranti assāsapassāsaṃ. So hi cittasamuṭṭhānopi samāno karajakāyapaṭibaddhavuttitāya tena saṅkharīyatīti kāyasaṅkhāroti vuccati. Yo pana ‘‘kāyasaṅkhāro vacīsaṅkhāro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.102) evamāgato kāyasaṅkhāro cetanālakkhaṇo satipi dvārantaruppattiyaṃ yebhuyyavuttiyā tabbahulavuttiyā ca kāyadvārena lakkhito, so idha nādhippeto. Passambhentotiādīsu pacchimaṃ pacchimaṃ padaṃ purimassa purimassa atthavacanaṃ. Tasmā passambhanaṃ nāma vūpasamanaṃ, tañca tathāpayoge asati uppajjanārahassa oḷārikassa kāyasaṅkhārassa payogasampattiyā anuppādananti daṭṭhabbaṃ . Tatrāti ‘‘oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhento’’ti ettha. Apariggahitakāleti kammaṭṭhānassa anāraddhakāle, tato eva kāyacittānampi apariggahitakāle. ‘‘Nisīdati pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā ujuṃ kāyaṃ paṇidhāyā’’ti hi iminā kāyapariggaho , ‘‘parimukhaṃ satiṃ upaṭṭhapetvā’’ti iminā cittapariggaho vutto. Tenevāha – ‘‘kāyopi cittampi pariggahitā hontī’’ti. Kāyoti karajakāyo. Sadarathāti sapariḷāhā. Sā ca nesaṃ sadarathatā garubhāvena viya oḷārikatāya avinābhāvinīti āha ‘‘oḷārikā’’ti. Balavatarāti sabalā thūlā. Santā hontīti cittaṃ tāva bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvena ekaggaṃ hutvā kammaṭṭhānaṃ pariggahetvā pavattamānaṃ santaṃ hoti vūpasantaṃ, tato eva taṃsamuṭṭhānā rūpadhammā lahumudukammaññabhāvappattā, tadanuguṇatāya sesaṃ tisantatirūpanti evaṃ citte kāye ca vūpasante pavattamāne tannissitā assāsapassāsā santasabhāvā anukkamena sukhumasukhumatarasukhumatamā hutvā pavattanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yadā panassa kāyopī’’tiādi. Passambhemīti paṭhamāvajjanā. Ābhujanaṃ ābhogo, sammā anu anu āharaṇaṃ samannāhāro, tasmiṃyeva atthe aparāparaṃ pavattaāvajjanā tasseva atthassa manasikaraṇaṃ citte ṭhapanaṃ manasikāro, vīmaṃsā paccavekkhaṇā.
‘有燥热’即伴有热恼。‘增盛’即强而粗,是以性别的颠倒而说。因为所指的实是身行。或者,‘成为增盛而转起’这是对动作的简别。‘细’在此也是同样的道理。‘于身’在此应连带‘于心’而连接。显示巴利原文
Sāraddheti sadarathe sapariḷāhe. Adhimattanti balavaṃ oḷārikaṃ, liṅgavipallāsena vuttaṃ. Kāyasaṅkhāro hi adhippeto. ‘‘Adhimattaṃ hutvā pavattatī’’ti kiriyāvisesanaṃ vā etaṃ. Sukhumanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Kāyamhīti ettha citte cāti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
从初禅出定后,为第二禅而作的种种转向与遍作,正如初禅那样,因敌对法已被远远驱除,故由彼所生的身行,在初禅与第二禅的近行中,同样被说为“粗”。此理也适用于其余两种近行。或者,为证得第二禅等而修行的瑜伽行者,由于奉行苦行道等而疲惫,因身疲劳与心损恼,以及寻等的扰动而心散动,在第二禅等的近行中,应知身行是粗的。“极细”:在别处仍会生起的身行,于第四禅中则是超越性的微细。那里尚且没有那种细的状态,更遑论粗的状态,因为已不再转起。故说“达到不再转起”。显示巴利原文
Paṭhamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya kariyamānaṃ dutiyajjhānassa nānāvajjanaṃ parikammaṃ paṭhamajjhānaṃ viya dūrasamussāritapaṭipakkhanti katvā taṃsamuṭṭhāno kāyasaṅkhāro paṭhamajjhāne ca dutiyajjhānūpacāre ca oḷārikoti sadiso vutto. Esa nayo sesupacāradvayepi. Atha vā dutiyajjhānādīnaṃ adhigamāya paṭipajjato dukkhāpaṭipadādivasena kilamato yogino kāyakilamathacittupaghātādivasena vitakkādisaṅkhobhena saparipphandatāya ca cittappavattiyā dutiyajjhānādiupacāresu kāyasaṅkhārassa oḷārikatā veditabbā. Atisukhumoti aññattha labbhamāno kāyasaṅkhāro catutthajjhāne atikkantasukhumo. Sukhumabhāvopissa tattha natthi kuto oḷārikatā appavattanato. Tenāha ‘‘appavattimeva pāpuṇātī’’ti.
中部诵者认为:于拥有禅那者次第进入等至,或于一座中证得一切禅那时,从下下的禅那到上上禅那的近行中,身行也更为微细。因为在那些连同近行的禅那里,上上者具足殊胜性与寂静性,这是可能的;或者,这是就单一次转向的近行而说。如此,这一说法与前面所述的主张并不相违,因为所缘境各不相同,这是成立的。“一切”即指这两者。所有那些禅那,以所述的方式,确实都趋向于寂止。“于未执取时转起的身行,在执取时寂止”,这是就相续的相似性而说。因为并非那些粗的入出息等本身变成微细;然而,它们寂止的方式,正是前面所说的那样。显示巴利原文
Lābhissa sato anupubbasamāpattisamāpajjanavelaṃ ekāsaneneva vā sabbesaṃ jhānānaṃ paṭilābhaṃ sandhāya majjhimabhāṇakā heṭṭhimaheṭṭhimajjhānato uparūparijhānūpacārepi sukhumataraṃ icchanti. Tattha hi sopacārānaṃ jhānānaṃ uparūpari visesavantatā santatā ca sambhaveyya, ekāvajjanūpacāraṃ vā sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Evañhi heṭṭhā vuttavādena imassa vādassa avirodho siddho bhinnavisayattā. Sabbesaṃyevāti ubhayesampi. Yasmā te sabbepi vuccamānena vidhinā passaddhimicchantiyeva . Apariggahitakāle pavattakāyasaṅkhāro pariggahitakāle paṭippassambhatīti idaṃ sadisasantānatāya vuttaṃ. Na hi te eva oḷārikā assāsādayo sukhumā honti. Passambhanākāro pana tesaṃ heṭṭhā vuttoyeva.
于把握大种时说为“微细”,这是针对通过四界差别而投入观禅而言。于把握一切色法时,由于修习层层递进、日趋殊胜,故为微细。因此他说“于色、无色把握中为微细”。所谓“以相为所缘的观禅”,是指对聚的遍察。从厌随观开始为强力观禅,在此之前为弱力观禅。应依前说之方法,即如“于未把握时”等,依止禅的方法所说。这是说,在观禅的方法中,也应如“于未把握时转起的身行,于大种把握时寂止”等那样,将此种寂止配合起来理解。显示巴利原文
Mahābhūtapariggahe sukhumoti catudhātumukhena vipassanābhinivesaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Sakalarūpapariggahe sukhumo bhāvanāya uparūpari paṇītabhāvato. Tenevāha ‘‘rūpārūpapariggahe sukhumo’’ti. Lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāyāti kalāpasammasanamāha. Nibbidānupassanāto paṭṭhāya balavavipassanā, tato oraṃ dubbalavipassanā. Pubbe vuttanayenāti ‘‘apariggahitakāle’’tiādinā samathanaye vuttanayena. ‘‘Apariggahe pavatto kāyasaṅkhāro mahābhūtapariggahe paṭippassambhatī’’tiādinā vipassanānayepi paṭippassaddhi yojetabbāti vuttaṃ hoti.
"Assā"指的是"令身行止息"这一句中的词。"Codanāsodhanāhi"指通过质问和释疑。"Evaṃ"指现在将要说明的方式。"Kathaṃ"是指:对于所说的"令……止息……学习",为了说明身行如何止息、瑜伽行者如何学习,在提问以表达解释的愿望之后,开始从自性、粗与细、寂止以及质问和释疑等方面显示身行,也就是"什么是身行"等。其中,"身内的"指存在于色身中的。"系属于身的"即依止于身。当身存在时,它们存在;当身不存在时,它们不存在。因此,虽然不是身所生,但仍由身所造作,故称为身行。"令止息"指令粗的身行止息。显示巴利原文
Assāti imassa ‘‘passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti padassa. Codanāsodhanāhīti anuyogaparihārehi. Evanti idāni vuccamānākārena. Kathanti yaṃ idaṃ ‘‘passambhayaṃ…pe… sikkhatī’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ kathaṃ kena pakārena kāyasaṅkhārassa passambhanaṃ yogino ca sikkhanaṃ hotīti kathetukāmatāya pucchitvā kāyasaṅkhāre sarūpato oḷārikasukhumato vūpasamato anuyogaparihārato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘katame kāyasaṅkhārā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kāyikāti rūpakāye bhavā. Kāyappaṭibaddhāti kāyasannissitā. Kāye sati honti, asati na honti, tato eva te akāyasamuṭṭhānāpi kāyena saṅkharīyantīti kāyasaṅkhārā. Passambhentoti oḷārikoḷārikaṃ passambhento.
其余两句是它的同义词。因为使粗的身行——其自性尚未寂止——沉静下来,故说为"令止息";令达到不生起的灭尽,故说为"令灭";令导入极寂静的自性,故说为"令寂止"。显示巴利原文
Sesapadadvayaṃ tasseva vevacanaṃ. Oḷārikañhi kāyasaṅkhāraṃ avūpasantasabhāvaṃ sannisīdāpento ‘‘passambhento’’ti vuccati, anuppādanirodhaṃ pāpento ‘‘nirodhento’’ti, suṭṭhu santasabhāvaṃ nayanto ‘‘vūpasamento’’ti.
"Yathārūpehi"指像那样的。"Kāyasaṅkhārehi"指粗的身行。"Ānamanā"指身体向前弯曲。"Vinamanā"指向各个侧面弯曲。"Sannamanā"指向一切方向弯曲,或充分地弯曲。"Paṇamanā"指向后弯曲。"Iñjana"等是"ānamana"等的同义词;或者,"ānamana"等是向前移动等较为强烈的动作,而"iñjana"等是较为微弱的动作。"令身行止息"的意思是:使像那样的、作为弯曲身体等因的粗身行止息。因为当那些粗身行止息时,弯身等也就止息了。显示巴利原文
Yathārūpehīti yādisehi. Kāyasaṅkhārehīti oḷārikehi kāyasaṅkhārehi. Ānamanāti abhimukhena kāyassa namanā. Vinamanāti visuṃ visuṃ passato namanā. Sannamanāti sabbato, suṭṭhu vā namanā. Paṇamanāti pacchato namanā. Iñjanādīni ānamanādīnaṃ vevacanāni, adhimattāni vā abhimukhacalanādīni ānamanādayo, mandāni iñjanādayo. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti tathārūpaṃ ānamanādīnaṃ kāraṇabhūtaṃ oḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambhento. Tasmiñhi passambhite ānamanādayopi passambhitā eva honti.
“寂静、微细”是指:由于那样的身行——即身体不躁动的因,弯身等便不生起,因此没有恼害而寂静,不粗重而微细。“令身行止息”是总说。或者,先令粗的身行止息,渐次生起能令身体不躁动的、越来越微细的身行,再令这些也止息,最后乃至最极微细之顶点的身行也止息,依此义而说“令寂静、微细的身行止息”。显示巴利原文
Santaṃ sukhumanti yathārūpehi kāyasaṅkhārehi kāyassa aparipphandanahetūhi ānamanādayo na honti, tathārūpaṃ darathābhāvato santaṃ, anoḷārikatāya sukhumaṃ. Passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti sāmaññato ekaṃ katvā vadati. Atha vā pubbe oḷārikoḷārikaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambhento anukkamena kāyassa aparipphandanahetubhūte sukhumasukhumatare uppādetvā tepi paṭippassambhetvā paramasukhumatāya koṭippattaṃ yaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ paṭippassambheti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘santaṃ sukhumaṃ passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāra’’nti.
“Iti”等是质难者的话语。其中,“iti”是表方式的助词,“kira”表不认可,意为“据说如此”。这里的意思是:“若依所说方式,即使极微细的身行也令止息。”“Evaṃ sante”指:如此,在依你所说方式可得的情况下。“Vātūpaladdhiyā”指风的获得。“Ca”字是合集义,意指以出入息等风为所缘的心的产生、生起、转起不会发生,而那些也应被他止息——这是其意旨。“出入息的产生”指:修习中令粗的出入息止息后,微细的出入息也不会产生,因为两者皆应止息。“入出息念”指:以入出息为所缘的念的转起也不会发生,因为入出息已不存在。因此,与之相应的入出息念定的产生、生起也不会发生。因为有所缘的法,任何时候都不可能无所缘而生起。“Na ca naṃ taṃ”中,“na”只是助词。智者、有慧者既不进入彼所说的那种等至,也不从中出定——应如此连接。如是,质难者以“止息即是一切归无”的意旨而质难。显示巴利原文
Itītiādi codakavacanaṃ. Tattha itīti pakāratthe nipāto, kirāti arucisūcane, evañceti attho. Ayañhettha adhippāyo ‘‘vuttappakārena yadi atisukhumampi kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passambhetī’’ti. Evaṃ santeti evaṃ sati tayā vuttākāre labbhamāne. Vātūpaladdhiyāti vātassa upaladdhiyā. Ca-saddo samuccayattho, assāsādivātārammaṇassa cittassa pabhāvanā uppādanā pavattanā na hoti, te ca tena passambhetabbāti adhippāyo. Assāsapassāsānañca pabhāvanāti oḷārike assāsapassāse bhāvanāya paṭippassambhetvā sukhumānaṃ tesaṃ pabhāvanā ca na hoti ubhayesaṃ tesaṃ tena paṭippassambhetabbato. Ānāpānassatiyāti ānāpānārammaṇāya satiyā ca pavattanaṃ na hoti ānāpānānaṃ abhāvato. Tato eva taṃsampayuttassa ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā uppādanāpi na hoti. Na hi kadāci ārammaṇena vinā sārammaṇā dhammā sambhavanti. Na ca naṃ tanti ettha nanti nipātamattaṃ. Taṃ vuttavidhānaṃ samāpattiṃ paṇḍitā paññavanto na ceva samāpajjantipi tato na vuṭṭhahantipīti yojanā. Evaṃ codako sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvūpanayanaṃ passambhananti adhippāyena codeti.
再接下来的“iti kira”等是对上述质难的答复。其中,“kira”是表“如果”义的助词。“Iti kira sikkhati”意为:若依我所说方式学习。“Evaṃ sante”指:在如此止息的情况下。“会产生”指:虽然粗的身行止息了,但微细的身行仍然存在,渐次达到最极微细的状态,由于相的生起,入出息念及入出息念定的产生确实得以成就——这是意旨。显示巴利原文
Puna iti kirātiādi yathāvuttāya codanāya vissajjanā. Tattha kirāti yadīti etassa atthe nipāto. Iti kira sikkhati, mayā vuttākārena yadi sikkhatīti attho. Evaṃ santeti evaṃ passambhane sati. Pabhāvanā hotīti yadipi oḷārikā kāyasaṅkhārā paṭippassambhanti, sukhumā pana atthevāti anukkamena paramasukhumabhāvappattassa vasena nimittuppattiyā ānāpānassatiyā ānāpānassatisamādhissa ca pabhāvanā ijjhatevāti adhippāyo.
“如所说那样”应视为依所说方式而论,即以此说明义理时有其譬喻。今为显示该譬喻,故说“譬如”等语。其中,“譬如”是表譬喻的助词。“在铜器中”指在铜制的器皿里。“相”指诸声音生起的行相,这是其意义。此处是以属格的意义来使用业格。“因善执取”即因善于执取。“因善作意”即因善于安立于心。“因善持守”即因全然正确地持守、善作标记。“微细的声音”指随声,也就是那些微小的声音,因为此处的“ka”音具有微小的含义。“微细声相所缘性”是说那微细的声音本身就是相,即微细声相,以此为所缘之性,是这么说。虽然那时微细的声音也已灭去,但由于声相被善加执取,心便转而以更加微细的声相作为所缘。从最初开始,对于逐一灭去的声音,以不散乱的心持守其相,次第而进,最终,心便以极其微细的声相为所缘而转起。心不散乱,是因为在那现起的相上存在着等持。显示巴利原文
Yathākathaṃ viyāti yathāvuttavidhānaṃ taṃ kathaṃ viya daṭṭhabbaṃ, atthi kiñci tadatthasampaṭipādane opammanti adhippāyo. Idāni opammaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha seyyathāpīti opammatthe nipāto. Kaṃseti kaṃsabhājane. Nimittanti nimittassa, tesaṃ saddānaṃ pavattākārassāti attho. Sāmiatthe hi idaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Suggahitattāti suṭṭhu gahitattā. Sumanasikatattāti suṭṭhu citte ṭhapitattā. Sūpadhāritattāti sammadeva upadhāritattā sallakkhitattā. Sukhumakā saddāti anurave āha, ye appakā. Appattho hi ayaṃ ka-saddo. Sukhumasaddanimittārammaṇatāpīti sukhumo saddova nimittaṃ sukhumasaddanimittaṃ, tadārammaṇatāyapīti vuttaṃ hoti. Kāmaṃ tadā sukhumāpi saddā niruddhā, saddanimittassa pana suggahitattā sukhumatarasaddanimittārammaṇabhāvenapi cittaṃ pavattati. Ādito paṭṭhāya hi tassa tassa niruddhassa saddassa nimittaṃ avikkhittena cittena upadhārentassa anukkamena pariyosāne atisukhumasaddanimittampi ārammaṇaṃ katvā cittaṃ pavattateva. Cittaṃ na vikkhepaṃ gacchati tasmiṃ yathāupaṭṭhite nimitte samādhānasabbhāvato.
“当如此成立时”等语,是作为对已说之义的归结而说。其中,为了将与诘问和简别一同释其义理的经句提取出来,分别显示身随观念处,从而说“令身行轻安”等语。于此,“令身行轻安”应理解为:所说的入出息即是身,应如此连结。或者,在此“令身行轻安”之处,入出息即是身,应如此看待其意义。因为在《大念处经》中,开示身随观念处时,仅说了最初的四个法;且在《入出息念经》中也说:“诸比丘,比丘于何时出息长,即了知‘我出息长’……乃至……学习‘我令身行轻安而吸入’。诸比丘,那时比丘即于身上观身而住。”因此说这是“依身随观念处而说的初四法”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ santetiādi vuttassevatthassa nigamanavasena vuttaṃ. Tattha yassa suttapadassa saddhiṃ codanāsodhanāhi attho vutto, taṃ uddharitvā kāyānupassanāsatipaṭṭhānāni vibhāgato dassetuṃ ‘‘passambhaya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ . Tattha passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti vuttaassāsapassāsā kāyoti yojanā veditabbā. Atha vā passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāranti ettha assāsapassāsā kāyoti evamattho daṭṭhabbo. Mahāsatipaṭṭhānasutte (dī. ni. 2.372 ādayo; ma. ni. 1.105 ādayo) kāyānupassanaṃ kathentena paṭhamacatukkasseva vuttattā, ānāpānassatisuttepi ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye, bhikkhave, bhikkhu dīghaṃ vā assasanto dīghaṃ assasāmīti pajānāti…pe… passambhayaṃ kāyasaṅkhāraṃ passasissāmīti sikkhati. Kāye kāyānupassī, bhikkhave, tasmiṃ samaye bhikkhu viharatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.149) vuttattā ca ‘‘kāyānupassanāvasena vuttassa paṭhamacatukkassā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“依初学者业处”是就止业处而言,但观业处在其余诸四法中也是可以获得的。“此处”指初四法。“与无碍解俱行”这仅是举例,而对于那些具足福德、具备亲依止者,神通也确能成就。“四种”指依巴帝摩卡律仪等而成的四种。“不犯”指不违犯七种犯聚中的任何一种。“已犯的出离”指:对于已犯而可作对治的犯,通过如法行持而对治出离;对于通过说戒而出的犯,由说戒出离;对于通过出离而出的犯,由别住等律仪作法而出离,这样说。因为通过说戒也能从已犯的罪中出离,所以这也包含在出离之中。“不被烦恼所迫”指不被忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、诳、谄、慢、过慢、憍、放逸等不善法所迫,即不令其生起,这么说。显示巴利原文
Ādikammikassa kammaṭṭhānavasenāti samathakammaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ pana itaracatukkesupi labbhateva. Etthāti paṭhamacatukke. Saha paṭisambhidāhīti nidassanamattametaṃ, puññavantānaṃ pana upanissayasampannānaṃ abhiññāpi sijjhatiyeva. Catubbidhanti pātimokkhasaṃvarādivasena catubbidhaṃ. Anāpajjananti sattannaṃ āpattikkhandhānaṃ aññatarassa anāpajjanaṃ. Āpannavuṭṭhānanti āpannasappaṭikammāpattito yathādhammaṃ paṭikammakaraṇena vuṭṭhānaṃ, desanāgāminito desanāya, vuṭṭhānagāminito parivāsādivinayakammakaraṇena vuṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti . Desanāyapi hi āpannāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ hotīti sāpi vuṭṭhāneneva saṅgahitā. Kilesehi ca appaṭipīḷananti kodho upanāho makkho palāso issā macchariyaṃ māyā sāṭheyyaṃ thambho sārambho māno atimāno mado pamādoti evamādīhi pāpadhammehi appaṭipīḷanaṃ, tesaṃ anuppādananti vuttaṃ hoti.
“此称为增上戒”是连接上下文之语。在八十二种犍度义务、十四种大义务中,此处的大义务是指义务犍度中所说的客比丘义务、住者义务、出行者义务、随喜义务、食堂义务、乞食义务、阿兰若义务、卧坐处义务、浴室义务、厕所义务、和尚义务、共住弟子义务、阿阇梨义务、门人义务,共有十四种。此外,其他一些犍度义务,如受呵责羯磨等,仅在特定时应行,并非一切时都应行持,故不计入大义务中。其中,从“我将为别住比丘制定义务”开始,至“不应授具足戒……乃至……不应在地上经行时于经行处经行”为止,所说的义务有六十三种。此后,“诸比丘,别住比丘不应与较己别住年长的比丘、应与根本摈出的比丘、应与行敬悦的比丘、应与行敬悦的比丘、应与出罪的比丘共住一覆处”等所说,因与正常比丘所应行没有差别,故不单独计算,而是依较己别住年长者等各别补特伽罗应行,将其等总合各计为一种,共五种,如此而成七十一义务。于受摈羯磨者义务中,依义务制定所说“不应接受正常比丘的礼拜……乃至……沐浴时不应接受擦背服务”,此不接受礼拜等为一种,及“正常比丘不应以戒坏而举发”等十种,如显示巴利原文
Yamidaṃ ābhisamācārikasīlaṃ vuccatīti sambandho. Dveasīti khandhakavattāni cuddasavidhaṃ mahāvattanti ettha mahāvattaṃ nāma vattakkhandhake vuttāni āgantukavattaṃ āvāsikagamikaanumodanabhattaggapiṇḍacārikaāraññikasenāsanajantāgharavaccakuṭiupajjhāyasaddhivihārikaācariyaantevāsikavattanti cuddasa vattāni. Tato aññāni pana kadāci tajjanīyakammakatādikāleyeva caritabbāni dvāsīti khandhakavattāni, na sabbāsu avatthāsu caritabbāni, tasmā mahāvattesu agaṇitāni. Tattha ‘‘pārivāsikānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ vattaṃ paññapessāmī’’ti ārabhitvā ‘‘na upasampādetabbaṃ…pe… na chamāyaṃ caṅkamante caṅkame caṅkamitabba’’nti (cūḷava. 76) vuttavattāni chasaṭṭhi, tato paraṃ ‘‘na, bhikkhave, pārivāsikena bhikkhunā pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ mūlāyapaṭikassanārahena, mānattārahena, mānattacārikena, abbhānārahena bhikkhunā saddhiṃ ekacchanne āvāse vatthabba’’ntiādinā (cūḷava. 82) vuttāni pakatatte caritabbehi anaññattā visuṃ tāni agaṇetvā pārivāsikavuḍḍhatarādīsu puggalantaresu caritabbattā tesaṃ vasena sampiṇḍetvā ekekaṃ katvā gaṇitāni pañcāti ekasattati vattāni, ukkhepanīyakammakatavattesu vattapaññāpanavasena vuttaṃ ‘‘na pakatattassa bhikkhuno abhivādanaṃ…pe… nahāne piṭṭhiparikammaṃ sāditabba’’nti (cūḷava. 51) idaṃ abhivādanādīnaṃ asādiyanaṃ ekaṃ, ‘‘na pakatatto bhikkhu sīlavipattiyā anuddhaṃsetabbo’’tiādīni (cūḷava. 51) ca dasāti evametāni dvāsīti. Etesveva pana kānici tajjanīyakammādivattāni kānici pārivāsikādivattānīti aggahitaggahaṇena dvāsīti eva. Aññattha pana aṭṭhakathāpadese appakaṃ ūnamadhikaṃ vā gaṇanūpagaṃ na hotīti asīti khandhakavattānīti vuccati. Ābhisamācārikasīlanti ettha abhisamācāroti uttamasamācāro, abhisamācārova ābhisamācārikaṃ, abhisamācāraṃ vā ārabbha paññattaṃ ābhisamācārikaṃ, tadeva sīlanti ābhisamācārikasīlaṃ. Khandhakavattapariyāpannassa sīlassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Ahaṃ sīlaṃ rakkhāmi, kiṃ ābhisamācārikenātiādīsu sīlanti ubhatovibhaṅgapariyāpannameva gahetabbaṃ khandhakavattapariyāpannassa ābhisamācārikaggahaṇena gahitattā. Paripūreti paripuṇṇe, paripūriteti vā attho.
此后,依上述戒清净之后。住处,即住处的障碍。族姓等亦同此理。此处(《清净道论》1.41)中,住处指一间房、一座院落或整个僧园。它并非对所有人都是障碍。唯有在此处从事新造作等事务,或积聚众多物品,或因某种原因而牵挂、心被系缚者,住处才成为其障碍;其他人则否。显示巴利原文
Tatoti yathāvuttasīlavisodhanato paraṃ. Āvāsoti āvāsapalibodho. Kulantiādīsupi eseva nayo. Tattha (visuddhi. 1.41) āvāsoti ekopi ovarako vuccati ekampi pariveṇaṃ sakalopi saṅghārāmo. Svāyaṃ na sabbasseva palibodho hoti, yo panettha navakammādiussukkaṃ vā āpajjati, bahubhaṇḍasannicayo vā hoti, yena kenaci vā kāraṇena apekkhavā paṭibaddhacitto, tasseva palibodho hoti, na itarassa.
族姓,指亲族之家或护持者之家。某些人即使与护持者之家交往密切,以“安乐者我亦安乐”等方式生活,也会成为障碍。他若离开那些家族之人,甚至不会去邻近的寺院听闻法义。对于某些人,即使是父母也不是障碍,如戈兰达迦寺长老的外甥——一位年轻比丘。显示巴利原文
Kulanti ñātikulaṃ vā upaṭṭhākakulaṃ vā. Ekaccassa hi upaṭṭhākakulampi ‘‘sukhite sukhito’’tiādinā nayena saṃsaṭṭhassa viharato palibodho hoti, so kulamānusakehi vinā dhammassavanāya sāmantavihārampi na gacchati. Ekaccassa mātāpitaropi palibodhā na honti koraṇḍakavihāravāsittherassa bhāgineyyadaharabhikkhuno viya.
利得,即四种资具。它们如何成为障碍呢?一位有福德的比丘,所到之处都会有众多随从前来供养资具。他为了随喜他们、为他们说法,便得不到修习沙门法的时间。从破晓直到初夜,与人的往来不曾断绝。到了凌晨,又有许多乞食比丘前来传话:‘尊者,某位护持者、优婆塞、优婆夷、大臣、大臣之女想见您。’他便说:‘贤友,拿衣钵吧。’随即准备动身,恒常这样忙碌。如此,这些资具便成了他的障碍。因此,他应舍弃僧众,前往无人认识他的地方,独自游行。这样,那种障碍便得以断除。显示巴利原文
Lābhoti cattāro paccayā. Te kathaṃ palibodhā honti? Puññavantassa hi bhikkhuno gatagataṭṭhāne manussā mahāparivāre paccaye denti, so tesaṃ anumodento dhammaṃ desento samaṇadhammaṃ kātuṃ okāsaṃ na labhati, aruṇuggamanato yāva paṭhamayāmo, tāva manussasaṃsaggo na upacchijjati, puna balavapaccūseyeva bāhullikapiṇḍapātikā āgantvā ‘‘bhante, asuko upaṭṭhāko upāsako upāsikā amacco amaccadhītā tumhākaṃ dassanakāmā’’ti vadanti, so ‘‘gaṇhāvuso pattacīvara’’nti gamanasajjova hoti niccabyāvaṭo, tasseva te paccayā palibodhā honti. Tena gaṇaṃ pahāya yattha naṃ na jānanti, tattha ekakena caritabbaṃ. Evaṃ so palibodho upacchijjati.
众,指经师众或论师众。如果因为给予他们教授或解答问题而得不到修习沙门法的时间,那么此众便成为他的障碍。他应当这样断除:如果那些比丘已完成很多,所剩无几,就应完成之后再进入森林。如果完成很少,所剩尚多,则不应超出一由旬之外,而应在一由旬的范围内寻找另一位教导此众的法师,对他说:‘请尊者以教授等摄受他们。’如果这样还找不到,便应说:‘贤友们,我有些事务,你们各自去安适之处吧。’然后舍弃此众,做自己的事。显示巴利原文
Gaṇoti suttantikagaṇo vā ābhidhammikagaṇo vā. Yo tassa uddesaṃ vā paripucchaṃ vā dento samaṇadhammassa okāsaṃ na labhati, tassa gaṇo palibodho hoti. Tena so evaṃ upacchinditabbo – sace tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ bahu kataṃ hoti, appaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ, taṃ niṭṭhapetvā araññaṃ pavisitabbaṃ. Sace appaṃ kataṃ, bahu avasiṭṭhaṃ, yojanato paraṃ agantvā antoyojanaparicchede aññaṃ gaṇavācakaṃ upasaṅkamitvā ‘‘ime āyasmā uddesādīhi saṅgaṇhatū’’ti vattabbaṃ. Evampi alabhamānena ‘‘mayhaṃ, āvuso, ekaṃ kiccaṃ atthi, tumhe yathāphāsukaṭṭhānāni gacchathā’’ti gaṇaṃ pahāya attano kammaṃ kātabbaṃ.
业,指业障。也有‘业为第五’的说法。此处,业指新造作。从事这种造作时,必须了解从木匠等处所得与未得,必须对已做、未做之事费心操劳,这样在一切方面都成为障碍。这种障碍也应如此断除:如果所剩无几,就应完成。如果所剩尚多,若是僧团的,新造作应交付给僧团或承担事务的比丘。若是自己的,应交付给为自己承担事务的人。如果找不到这样的人,就把它舍给僧团,然后离去。显示巴利原文
Kammenāti kammapalibodhena. ‘‘Kammañca pañcama’’ntipi pāṭho. Tattha kammanti navakammaṃ. Taṃ karontena vaḍḍhakīādīhi laddhāladdhaṃ jānitabbaṃ, katākate ussukkaṃ āpajjitabbanti sabbathāpi palibodho hoti. Sopi evaṃ upacchinditabbo – sace appaṃ avasiṭṭhaṃ hoti, niṭṭhapetabbaṃ. Sace bahu, saṅghikaṃ ce, navakammaṃ saṅghassa vā bhārahārakabhikkhūnaṃ vā niyyātetabbaṃ. Attano santakaṃ ce, attano bhārahārakānaṃ niyyātetabbaṃ. Tādisaṃ alabhantena saṅghassa pariccajitvā gantabbaṃ.
道路,指行路。若有人于某处望求出家,或有应得的资具待获取,若不得便不能安忍,那么即使进入山林修习沙门法,这种旅人之心也极难断除。因此,应先前往完成那件事,再于沙门法上精勤用功。显示巴利原文
Addhānanti maggagamanaṃ. Yassa hi katthaci pabbajjāpekkho vā hoti, paccayajātaṃ vā kiñci laddhabbaṃ hoti. Sace taṃ alabhanto na sakkoti adhivāsetuṃ, araññaṃ pavisitvā samaṇadhammaṃ karontassapi gamikacittaṃ nāma duppaṭivinodayaṃ hoti, tasmā gantvā taṃ kiccaṃ tīretvāva samaṇadhamme ussukkaṃ kātabbaṃ.
亲属,指寺院中的戒师、依止师、共住弟子、门徒、同戒师者、同依止师者,以及家中的父母、兄弟等。他们若患病,便成此人的障碍。因此,应通过照顾他们、令其康复来断除此障碍。其中,若戒师生病,若久久不能痊愈,则当终生照料。同样,出家时的老师、授具足戒的老师、共住弟子、所授具足戒者、所度出家者、门徒、同戒师者,也应如此照料。依止师、教授师、依止弟子、教授弟子、同依止师者,只要依止和教授关系尚未断绝,就应当照料。若有能力,即使关系已断,也应继续照料。父母应如对戒师般照料;即使他们身居王位,若期望儿子的照料,也当随力而行。他们若无药,应施予自己的药;若自己也无,应通过乞食寻得后给予。兄弟姊妹,可先用他们自己的财物给予;若没有,可暂时用自己的给予,日后他们得到时再取回,若终究不得,亦不应责难。对于非亲姐妹的丈夫,不应为之捣药,也不应直接给药,但可对姐妹说‘给你丈夫’,而将药交与姐妹。兄弟的妻子,也同此理。然而,他们的子女是此人的亲属,因此可以为之料理。显示巴利原文
Ñātīti vihāre ācariyupajjhāyasaddhivihārikaantevāsikasamānupajjhāyakasamānācariyakā, ghare mātā pitā bhātāti evamādikā. Te gilānā imassa palibodhā honti. Tasmā so palibodho te upaṭṭhahitvā tesaṃ pākatikakaraṇena upacchinditabbo. Tattha upajjhāyo tāva gilāno sace lahuṃ na vuṭṭhāti, yāvajīvaṃ paṭijaggitabbo, tathā pabbajjācariyo upasampadācariyo saddhivihāriko upasampāditapabbājitaantevāsikasamānupajjhāyakā ca. Nissayācariyauddesācariyanissayantevāsikauddesantevāsikasamānācariyakā pana yāva nissayauddesā anupacchinnā, tāva paṭijaggitabbā. Pahontena tato uddhampi paṭijaggitabbā eva. Mātāpitūsu upajjhāye viya paṭijaggitabbaṃ. Sacepi hi te rajje ṭhitā honti, puttato ca upaṭṭhānaṃ paccāsīsanti, kātabbameva. Atha tesaṃ bhesajjaṃ natthi, attano santakaṃ dātabbaṃ. Asati, bhikkhācariyāya pariyesitvāpi dātabbameva. Bhātubhaginīnaṃ pana tesaṃ santakameva yojetvā dātabbaṃ. Sace natthi, attano santakaṃ tāvakālikaṃ datvā pacchā labhantena gaṇhitabbaṃ, alabhantena na codetabbā. Aññātakassa bhaginiyā sāmikassa bhesajjaṃ neva kātuṃ, na dātuṃ vaṭṭati, ‘‘tuyhaṃ sāmikassa dehī’’ti vatvā pana bhaginiyā dātabbaṃ. Bhātu jāyāyapi eseva nayo, tesaṃ pana puttā imassa ñātakāyevāti tesaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭati.
疾病,指任何病痛。当它折磨人时便成障碍,因此应以治疗来断除。若经数日治疗仍不见止息,便应呵责自身:‘我不是你的奴仆,也不是受雇者,正是因为要养护你,我才在无始的轮回流转中备受痛苦。’而后继续修习沙门法。显示巴利原文
Ābādhoti yo koci rogo. So bādhayamāno palibodho hoti, tasmā bhesajjakaraṇena upacchinditabbo. Sace pana katipāhaṃ bhesajjaṃ karontassapi na vūpasammati, ‘‘nāhaṃ tuyhaṃ dāso, na bhatako, taṃyevamhi posento anamatagge saṃsāravaṭṭe dukkhappatto’’ti attabhāvaṃ garahitvā samaṇadhammo kātabbo.
典籍,指教法的受持。唯有对此恒常精勤于诵习等者,它才会成为障碍,其他人则不会。显示巴利原文
Ganthoti pariyattipariharaṇaṃ. Taṃ sajjhāyādīhi niccabyāvaṭasseva palibodho hoti, na itarassa.
关于“神通”:指以神通为障碍。也有经文读作“神通有十种”。此处“神通”指凡夫的神通。它如同仰卧的婴儿与幼嫩的秧苗,难以照料,稍有不慎即会毁坏。然而,神通唯是修观的障碍,而非修定的障碍,因为神通是证得禅定之后方可获得。因此,欲修观者应断除神通障碍,其他(欲修定者)则不必。障碍(palibodha),即障蔽、阻止业处修习令不得进行;将ra音转为la音而说,义为障碍。应当断除(upacchinditabbo),指应以等至与摄受加以抑制,使其不成为障碍。显示巴利原文
Iddhiyāti iddhipalibodhena. ‘‘Iddhīti te dasā’’tipi pāṭho. Tattha iddhīti pothujjanikā iddhi. Sā hi uttānaseyyakadārako viya taruṇasassaṃ viya ca dupparihārā hoti, appamattakena ca bhijjati. Sā pana vipassanāya palibodho hoti, na samādhissa samādhiṃ patvā pattabbato, tasmā vipassanātthikena iddhipalibodho upacchinditabbo, itarena avasesāti. Kammaṭṭhānabhāvanaṃ paribundheti uparodheti pavattituṃ na detīti palibodho, ra-kārassa la-kāraṃ katvā vutto, paripanthoti attho. Upacchinditabboti samāpanena saṅgahaṇena uparundhitabbo, apalibodho kātabboti attho.
业处者(kammaṭṭhāniko),即致力于业处、精勤修习之人。由这位业处者。“限定之后”(paricchinditvā),指如此限定:“此寺院中的所有比丘”。“同住者”(sahavāsīnaṃ),即共同居住的比丘们。“生起柔软心”(muducittataṃ janeti),谓于自己心中生起柔软之心。而此“对同住者生起柔和心等”的含义,应依《慈心功德经》(增支部8.1)中以“为人所爱”等广为开示的教说来阐明。显示巴利原文
Kammaṭṭhāne niyutto kammaṭṭhāniko, bhāvanamanuyuñjanto. Tena kammaṭṭhānikena. Paricchinditvāti ‘‘imasmiṃ vihāre sabbepi bhikkhū’’ti evaṃ paricchinditvā. Sahavāsīnanti sahavāsīnaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ. Muducittataṃ janetīti attani muducittataṃ uppādeti. Ayañca sahavāsīnaṃ cittamaddavajananādiattho ‘‘manussānaṃ piyo hotī’’tiādinayappavattena mettānisaṃsasuttena (a. ni. 8.1) dīpetabbo.
“成为不懈怠而住者”(anolīnavuttiko hoti)的意思是:在正确的修行中,他不是懈怠、精进羸劣之人,而是精进勇猛之人。其意涵为:即使对于天界的所缘亦是如此,更何况是其他所缘。“在一切处”(sabbattha)是指在一切沙门应作之事中,或于一切业处实践中。“应当亲近”(atthayitabbaṃ)是指应以先前反复修习的方式去亲近。致力于修习瑜伽(禅修)即称为瑜伽实践(yogānuyogo),该瑜伽实践本身因应被造作之义而称为业(kamma),即那瑜伽实践之业。“因为是近因”(padaṭṭhānattā)的意思是:因为是成就之因。显示巴利原文
Anolīnavuttiko hotīti sammāpaṭipattiyaṃ olīnavuttiko hīnavīriyo na hoti, āraddhavīriyo hotīti attho. Dibbesupi ārammaṇesu, pageva itaresūti adhippāyo. Sabbatthāti sabbasmiṃ samaṇakaraṇīye, sabbasmiṃ vā kammaṭṭhānānuyoge. Atthayitabbanti pubbāsevanavasena atthayitabbaṃ. Yogassa bhāvanāya anuyuñjanaṃ yogānuyogo, tadeva karaṇīyaṭṭhena kammaṃ, tassa yogānuyogakammassa. Padaṭṭhānattāti nipphattihetuttā.
将光明遍包含于白遍,并将限定虚空遍包含于遍的扩展之虚空遍之后,在经典中,由于唯按自性说示地遍等八种色界禅那所缘的遍,故将虚空遍与光明遍除外,依经典中所说的方法而说为“三十八所缘中”。然而,依据注释书的方法,当虚空遍与光明遍被分别执取时,业处正好有四十种。于此,这四十种业处是:十遍、十不净、十随念、四梵住、四无色、一想、一差别。其中,地遍、水遍、火遍、风遍、青遍、黄遍、赤遍、白遍、光明遍、限定虚空遍,这些是十遍。膨胀相、青瘀相、脓烂相、断坏相、食残相、散乱相、斩斫离散相、血涂相、虫聚相、骨相,这些是十不净。佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、舍随念、天随念、死随念、身至念、入出息念、寂止随念,这些是十随念。慈、悲、喜、舍,这些是四梵住。空无边处、识无边处、无所有处、非想非非想处,这些是四无色。食厌想是一想。四界差别是一差别。显示巴利原文
Odātakasiṇe ālokakasiṇaṃ, kasiṇugghāṭimākāsakasiṇe paricchinnākāsakasiṇañca antogadhaṃ katvā pāḷiyaṃ pathavīkasiṇādīnaṃ rūpajjhānārammaṇānaṃ aṭṭhannaṃyeva kasiṇānaṃ sarūpato vuttattā ākāsakasiṇaṃ ālokakasiṇañca vajjetvā ‘‘aṭṭhatiṃsārammaṇesū’’ti pāḷiyaṃ āgatanayeneva vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathānayena pana ākāsakasiṇe ālokakasiṇe ca visuṃ gahite cattālīsaṃyeva kammaṭṭhānāni. Tatrimāni cattālīsa kammaṭṭhānāni – dasa kasiṇā, dasa asubhā , dasa anussatiyo, cattāro brahmavihārā, cattāro āruppā, ekā saññā, ekaṃ vavatthānanti. Tattha pathavīkasiṇaṃ āpokasiṇaṃ tejokasiṇaṃ vāyokasiṇaṃ nīlakasiṇaṃ pītakasiṇaṃ lohitakasiṇaṃ odātakasiṇaṃ ālokakasiṇaṃ paricchinnākāsakasiṇanti ime dasa kasiṇā. Uddhumātakaṃ vinīlakaṃ vipubbakaṃ vicchiddakaṃ vikkhāyitakaṃ vikkhittakaṃ hatavikkhittakaṃ lohitakaṃ puḷavakaṃ aṭṭhikanti ime dasa asubhā. Buddhānussati dhamma saṅgha sīla cāga devatānussati maraṇassati kāyagatāsati ānāpānassati upasamānussatīti imā dasa anussatiyo. Mettā karuṇā muditā upekkhāti ime cattāro brahmavihārā. Ākāsānañcāyatanaṃ viññāṇañcāyatanaṃ ākiñcaññāyatanaṃ nevasaññānāsaññāyatananti ime cattāro āruppā. Āhāre paṭikūlasaññā ekā saññā. Catudhātuvavatthānaṃ ekaṃ vavatthānanti.
“凡是对其习性适合的”:在此,对于贪行者而言,十不净与身至念这十一种业处是适合的;对于嗔行者而言,四梵住与四种颜色遍这八种是适合的;对于痴行者与寻行者,唯有入出息念这一种业处是适合的;对于信行者,前六种随念是适合的;对于觉行者,死随念、寂止随念、四界差别与食厌想这四种是适合的;其余的遍与四无色对一切行者都适合。在遍中,应知任何小的遍对寻行者适合,无量的遍对痴行者适合。以如前所述的方法,即“因为是瑜伽实践之业的近因”来指示此义。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ yassa caritānukūlanti ettha rāgacaritassa tāva dasa asubhā kāyagatāsatīti ekādasa kammaṭṭhānāni anukūlāni, dosacaritassa cattāro brahmavihārā cattāri vaṇṇakasiṇānīti aṭṭha, mohacaritassa ca vitakkacaritassa ca ekaṃ ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānameva, saddhācaritassa purimā cha anussatiyo, buddhicaritassa maraṇassati upasamānussati catudhātuvavatthānaṃ āhāre paṭikūlasaññāti cattāri, sesakasiṇāni cattāro ca āruppā sabbacaritānaṃ anukūlāni. Kasiṇesu ca yaṃ kiñci parittaṃ vitakkacaritassa, appamāṇaṃ mohacaritassa anukūlanti veditabbaṃ. Yathāvutteneva nayenāti ‘‘yogānuyogakammassa padaṭṭhānattā’’ti imamatthaṃ atidisati.
对于想要受持某一业处者,应即依该业处证得四禅与五禅,以禅那为近因增长观智,然后在证得漏尽的漏尽者跟前受取业处。因此说:“应以此业处……而学习”。“阿罗汉等”以下的文句,意在说明:在授予业处时,从漏尽者或多闻者处受取更为殊胜。如同大象所行之道,是将业处之地显示为大象的行道。在辨别适合与不适合之后,意为教导业处时,以如理的方法为所教者辨别了利与弊之后。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetukāmo hoti, tasseva vasena catukkapañcakajjhānāni nibbattetvā jhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā āsavakkhayappattassa khīṇāsavassa santike gahetabbanti āha – ‘‘imināva kammaṭṭhānena…pe… uggahetabba’’nti. Arahantādayo hītiādi ekaccakhīṇāsavato bahussutova kammaṭṭhānadāne seyyoti dassanatthaṃ āraddhaṃ. Mahāhatthipathaṃ nīharanto viyāti kammaṭṭhānapathaviṃ mahāhatthipathaṃ katvā dassento viya. Sappāyāsappāyaṃ paricchinditvāti yassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ ācikkhati, tassa upakārānupakāraṃ yuttimagganena paricchinditvā.
前往业处授予者那里时,不应在洗净并涂油的双脚上穿好鞋、撑着伞,让人带着油筒、蜜、糖等,并由弟子们围绕而去;而应履行远行者的义务,自己手持衣钵,在途中每进入一所寺院时,处处皆履行客僧的义务,离开时则履行远行者的义务,如此随宜作好诸义务,以资具轻便、极为少欲的方式前往。因此说:“以轻便的生活、具足律仪与行仪”。如此前往后,进入那座寺院时,应在途中让人准备好许可的齿木并持入。不应在寺院内歇脚片刻,做过洗脚、涂油等之后,才起念“我要去见老师”,而进入其他僧舍。何以故?若那里有与老师不和的比丘,他们或会盘问来意,继而宣说老师的过失,令他懊悔道:“你去那里就完了”,由此可能使他从那里折返。因此,应询问老师住处后,径直前往。显示巴利原文
Idāni kammaṭṭhānadāyakassa santikaṃ gacchantena dhotamakkhitehi pādehi upāhanā āruhitvā chattaṃ gahetvā telanāḷimadhuphāṇitādīni gāhāpetvā antevāsikaparivutena na gantabbaṃ, gamikavattaṃ pana pūretvā attano pattacīvaraṃ sayameva gahetvā antarāmagge yaṃ yaṃ vihāraṃ pavisati, sabbattha paviṭṭhakāle āgantukavattaṃ, nikkhamanakāle gamikavattanti yathārahaṃ taṃ taṃ vattaṃ pūrentena sallahukaparikkhārena paramasallekhavuttinā hutvā gantabbanti imamatthaṃ saṅkhipitvā dassento ‘‘sallahukavuttinā vinayācārasampannenā’’ti āha. Evaṃ pana gantvā taṃ vihāraṃ pavisantena antarāyeva dantakaṭṭhaṃ kappiyaṃ kārāpetvā gahetvā pavisitabbaṃ, na ca muhuttaṃ vissamitvā pādadhovanamakkhanādīni katvā ācariyassa santikaṃ gamissāmīti aññaṃ pariveṇaṃ pavisitabbaṃ. Kasmā? Sace hissa tatra ācariyassa visabhāgā bhikkhū bhaveyyuṃ, taṃ te āgamanakāraṇaṃ pucchitvā ācariyassa avaṇṇaṃ pakāsetvā ‘‘naṭṭhosi, sace tassa santikaṃ āgato’’ti vippaṭisāraṃ uppādeyyuṃ, yena tatova paṭinivatteyya, tasmā ācariyassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ pucchitvā ujukaṃ tattheva gantabbaṃ.
如前所说的那样一位老师:显示巴利原文
Vuttappakāramācariyanti –
令人喜爱、可敬、值得尊重,善于言辞,且能接受劝诫;
能演说甚深之法,且不于不合宜处驱策他人。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Piyo garu bhāvanīyo, vattā ca vacanakkhamo; Gambhīrañca kathaṃ kattā, no caṭṭhāne niyojako’’ti. (a. ni. 7.37; netti. 113) –
如上所说,具足信等功德、唯求利益、住于增长分的善知识老师。对于以行持仪轨令其心满意足者:此处,若老师较年轻,则不应接受其钵与衣等;若老师较年长,应前往礼敬老师后站立。若被说“放下钵衣,贤友”,则应放下。若被说“喝水”,若欲喝则可喝。若被说“洗脚”,则不应立即洗,因若水是老师亲自取来的,便不合宜。若被说“洗吧,贤友,这不是我取来的,是别人取来的”,则应在老师看不见的隐蔽处,或在露地住处的角落坐下洗脚。若老师拿来油筒,应起立以双手恭敬接取。若不接取,老师或生异心:“此比丘从今开始拒绝共享。”接取后不应马上涂脚。若那是老师涂身用的油,便不合宜,故应先涂头,再涂肩等。若被说“贤友,这是可涂全身的油,也涂脚吧”,则涂脚后说:“尊者,我将此油筒放在此处。”待老师接取时交付。显示巴利原文
Evamādinā vuttappakāraṃ saddhādiguṇasamannāgataṃ ekantahitesiṃ vuḍḍhipakkhe ṭhitaṃ kalyāṇamittaṃ ācariyaṃ. Vattapaṭipattiyā ārādhitacittassāti ettha sace ācariyo daharataro hoti, pattacīvarapaṭiggahaṇādīni na sāditabbāni. Sace vuḍḍhataro, gantvā ācariyaṃ vanditvā ṭhātabbaṃ. ‘‘Nikkhipāvuso, pattacīvara’’nti vuttena nikkhipitabbaṃ. ‘‘Pānīyaṃ pivā’’ti vuttena sace icchati, pātabbaṃ. ‘‘Pāde dhovā’’ti vuttena na tāva dhovitabbā. Sace hi ācariyena ābhatamudakaṃ bhaveyya, na sāruppaṃ siyā. ‘‘Dhovāvuso, na mayā ābhataṃ, aññehi ābhata’’nti vuttena pana yattha ācariyo na passati, evarūpe paṭicchanne vā okāse abbhokāsavihārassapi vā ekamante nisīditvā pādā dhovitabbā. Sace ācariyo telanāḷiṃ āharati, uṭṭhahitvā ubhohi hatthehi sakkaccaṃ gahetabbā. Sace hi na gaṇheyya, ‘‘ayaṃ bhikkhu ito eva paṭṭhāya sambhogaṃ kopetī’’ti ācariyassa aññathattaṃ bhaveyya. Gahetvā pana na āditova pādā makkhetabbā. Sace hi taṃ ācariyassa gattabbhañjanatelaṃ bhaveyya, na sāruppaṃ siyā, tasmā paṭhamaṃ sīsaṃ makkhetvā khandhādīni makkhetabbāni. ‘‘Sabbapārihāriyatelamidaṃ, āvuso, pādepi makkhehī’’ti vuttena pana pāde makkhetvā ‘‘imaṃ telanāḷiṃ ṭhapemi, bhante’’ti vatvā ācariye gaṇhante dātabbā.
从抵达之日开始,不应说:“尊者,请为我开示业处。”从第二天起,若老师有常随侍者,应向他请求后,再履行义务;若请求后仍不允许,则仅在得到机会时履行。履行时,应呈上小、中、大三种齿木,并准备好冷、热两种洗脸水与沐浴水。之后,若老师连续三天使用某种齿木,便应常备同一种;若不固定,则随其所用而呈上。何须多言?凡世尊在犍度中所制:“诸比丘,弟子应对老师正行。此中正行为:清晨早起,脱鞋,偏袒上衣,奉上齿木,奉上洗脸水,铺设座位。若有粥,洗净钵后呈上粥”等,一切皆应履行。如此,依上述方式实行者,当知是以奉行仪轨,令师心满意足。显示巴利原文
Gatadivasato paṭṭhāya ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ me, bhante, kathetha’’iccevaṃ na vattabbaṃ. Dutiyadivasato pana paṭṭhāya sace ācariyassa pakatiupaṭṭhāko atthi, taṃ yācitvā vattaṃ kātabbaṃ. Sace yācitopi na deti, okāse laddheyeva kātabbaṃ. Karontena ca khuddakamajjhimamahantāni tīṇi dantakaṭṭhāni upanāmetabbāni. Sītaṃ uṇhanti duvidhaṃ mukhadhovanudakañca nhānodakañca paṭiyādetabbaṃ. Tato yaṃ ācariyo tīṇi divasāni paribhuñjati, tādisameva niccaṃ upaṭṭhāpetabbaṃ, niyamaṃ akatvā yaṃ vā taṃ vā paribhuñjantassa yathāladdhaṃ upanāmetabbaṃ. Kiṃ bahunā vuttena, yaṃ taṃ bhagavatā ‘‘antevāsikena, bhikkhave, ācariyamhi sammā vattitabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ sammāvattanā – kālasseva vuṭṭhāya upāhanā omuñcitvā ekaṃsaṃ uttarāsaṅgaṃ karitvā dantakaṭṭhaṃ dātabbaṃ, mukhodakaṃ dātabbaṃ, āsanaṃ paññapetabbaṃ. Sace yāgu hoti, bhājanaṃ dhovitvā yāgu upanāmetabbā’’tiādikaṃ (mahāva. 66) khandhake vattaṃ paññattaṃ, taṃ sabbampi kātabbaṃ. Iti iminā yathāvuttena nayena paṭipajjanto vattapaṭipattiyā cittaṃ ārādhetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“五连结”意为五节、五部分。“业处的学习”即学习业处典籍,以及为通达其义理而提问,这便是对业处的询问。又或者,从经典与义理两方面学习业处,称为“学”;就其中的疑惑提出询问,称为“问”。“业处的现起”即禅相之现起,及对如此精进修习者的审查:“此相如此现起”,以及业处的安止:“如此入定”。“业处的特相”是指,通过计数、随逐、触等方法精勤修习后,所达到的安立成就,或进而依观察等达到究竟,这便是对业处本质的观察。因此说:“即对业处本质的审察”。显示巴利原文
Pañcasandhikanti pañcapabbaṃ, pañcabhāganti attho. Kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhananti kammaṭṭhānaganthassa uggaṇhanaṃ, tadatthaparipucchā kammaṭṭhānassa paripucchanā. Atha vā ganthato atthato ca kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanaṃ uggaho, tattha saṃsayaparipucchanā paripucchā. Kammaṭṭhānassa upaṭṭhānanti nimittupaṭṭhānaṃ, evaṃ bhāvanamanuyuñjantassa ‘‘evamidaṃ nimittaṃ upaṭṭhātī’’ti upadhāraṇaṃ, tathā kammaṭṭhānappanā ‘‘evaṃ jhānamappetī’’ti. Kammaṭṭhānassa lakkhaṇanti gaṇanānubandhanāphusanānaṃ vasena bhāvanaṃ ussukkāpetvā ṭhapanāya sampatti, tato parampi vā sallakkhaṇādivasena matthakappattīti kammaṭṭhānasabhāvassa sallakkhaṇaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘kammaṭṭhānasabhāvupadhāraṇanti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
自己也会因分段学习业处而感到疲劳,但正因如此,既不烦扰老师,又能通过修习将法的事业推向顶峰。因此,基于此因——即自己不疲劳、不令老师困扰之故。“少许”即一点点。“于彼处”指老师所住之处。“是适合的”指由于获得住所适合等条件,而作意轻安、修习顺适。“以一由旬为限”这句话,也包括半由旬、一伽浮他。然而,对于钝根者,若住在半由旬、一伽浮他或一由旬之处,于业处某处生起疑惑或失念时,可在清晨于寺中履行义务后,途中乞食,饭毕即前往老师住处,当天在老师跟前澄清业处,次日礼敬老师后再出发,途中乞食,便能不疲劳地回到自己住处。因此说:“钝根者以一由旬为限而行。”若利根者在一由旬内找不到舒适住处,则应断除业处中的一切结缚处,作纯净的转向系念业处之后,即使前往超过一由旬的远处也可以。因此说:“利根者乃至远行亦可”。显示巴利原文
Attanāpina kilamati odhiso kammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanato, tato eva ācariyampi na viheṭheti dhammādhikaraṇampi bhāvanāya matthakaṃ pāpanato. Tasmāti taṃnimittaṃ attanoakilamanaācariyāviheṭhanahetu. Thokanti thokaṃ thokaṃ. Tatthāti yattha ācariyo vasati, tattha. Sappāyaṃ hotīti āvāsasappāyādilābhena manasikāraphāsutā bhāvanānukūlatā hoti. Yojanaparamanti iminā gāvutaaḍḍhayojanānipi saṅgaṇhāti. Yasmā pana mandapañño gāvute aḍḍhayojane yojanamatte vā vasanto kammaṭṭhānassa kismiñcideva ṭhāne sandehe vā satisammose vā jāte kālasseva vihāre vattaṃ katvā antarāmagge piṇḍāya caritvā bhattakiccapariyosāneyeva ācariyassa vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā taṃ divasaṃ ācariyassa santike kammaṭṭhānaṃ sodhetvā dutiyadivase ācariyaṃ vanditvā nikkhamitvā antarāmagge piṇḍāya caritvā akilamantoyeva attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ āgantuṃ sakkhissati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘mandapañño yojanaparamaṃ gantvā’’ti. Sace tikkhapañño yojanaparame phāsukaṭṭhānaṃ na labhati, tena kammaṭṭhāne sabbaṃ gaṇṭhiṭṭhānaṃ chinditvā visuddhaṃ āvajjanapaṭibaddhaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ katvā yojanaparamato dūrampi gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘tikkhapañño dūrampi gantvā’’ti.
“远离十八种住所过失”是指:过大、过新、过于破旧、临近道路、邻近酒肆、有叶、有花、有果、为众人所希求、靠近城市、靠近林木、靠近田地、有不合之众、靠近商埠、位于边境、位于国界、不适当、不得善友——应远离此十八种住所过失。因为,凡具足这十八种过失中任何一种的住所,便不适宜修习。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhārasasenāsanadosavivajjitanti mahattaṃ, navattaṃ, jiṇṇattaṃ, panthanissitattaṃ, soṇḍī, paṇṇaṃ, pupphaṃ, phalaṃ, patthanīyatā, nagarasannissitatā, dārusannissitatā, khettasannissitatā, visabhāgānaṃ puggalānaṃ atthitā, paṭṭanasannissitatā, paccantasannissitatā, rajjasīmasannissitatā, asappāyatā, kalyāṇamittānaṃ alābhoti imehi aṭṭhārasahi senāsanadosehi vivajjitaṃ. Imesañhi aṭṭhārasannaṃ dosānaṃ aññatarena samannāgataṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanāya ananurūpaṃ.
这是为什么呢?首先,在大寺中,许多意趣不同的人聚集一处。他们彼此对立,互不履行义务,导致菩提树园等处无人清扫,饮用水与洗用水也未备置。在此,若有比丘心想‘我将前往行乞的村庄乞食’,持衣钵外出,若见到义务未完成,或水瓶已空,他便必须履行义务、备置饮用水;若不履行,则犯下违越义务的恶作罪。一旦去履行,时间便流逝,过午才入村,乞食已然结束,终将一无所获。即便他独处静修,也会被沙弥与年轻比丘的高声喧哗及僧团的各种活动所打扰。然而,若在一处一切义务皆已办妥,且无此类纷扰,那么,即使是这样的大寺,也应居住。显示巴利原文
Kasmā? Mahāvihāre (visuddhi. 1.52) tāva bahū nānāchandā sannipatanti, te aññamaññaṃ paṭiviruddhatāya vattaṃ na karonti, bodhiyaṅgaṇādīni asammaṭṭhāneva honti, anupaṭṭhāpitaṃ pānīyaṃ paribhojanīyaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ ‘‘gocaragāme piṇḍāya carissāmī’’ti pattacīvaramādāya nikkhantopi sace passati vattaṃ akataṃ, pānīyaghaṭaṃ vā rittaṃ, athānena vattaṃ kātabbaṃ hoti, pānīyaṃ upaṭṭhāpetabbaṃ , akaronto vattabhede dukkaṭaṃ āpajjati. Karontassa kālo atikkamati, atidivā paviṭṭho niṭṭhitāya bhikkhāya kiñci na labhati. Paṭisallānagatopi sāmaṇeradaharabhikkhūnaṃ uccāsaddena saṅghakammehi ca vikkhipati. Yattha pana sabbaṃ vattaṃ katameva hoti, avasesāpi ca ghaṭṭanā natthi, evarūpe mahāvihārepi vihātabbaṃ.
在新寺院中,有许多新的工程事务。若不参与其中,便会招致非难。但是,如果那里的比丘们这样说:‘尊者,请您随心修习沙门法,这些新的工程事务就由我们来做。’这样的寺院则可以居住。显示巴利原文
Navavihāre bahu navakammaṃ hoti, akarontaṃ ujjhāyanti. Yattha pana bhikkhū evaṃ vadanti ‘‘āyasmā yathāsukhaṃ samaṇadhammaṃ karotu, mayaṃ navakammaṃ karissāmā’’ti, evarūpe vihātabbaṃ.
在破旧的寺院中,需要修整维护的事务繁多,甚至连自己的座位若不加整理也会遭人非议;但若加以整理,业处又会退失。显示巴利原文
Jiṇṇavihāre pana bahu paṭijaggitabbaṃ hoti, antamaso attano senāsanamattampi appaṭijaggantaṃ ujjhāyanti, paṭijaggantassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ parihāyati.
位于大路旁的寺院,日夜有来客聚集。非时到达的客人来后,便须将自己的住处让给他们,自己则住在树下或石面上,次日依然如此,故而没有修习业处的空闲。然而,若没有这种来客的拥挤干扰,那样的地方则可以居住。显示巴利原文
Panthanissite mahāpathavihāre rattindivaṃ āgantukā sannipatanti. Vikāle āgatānaṃ attano senāsanaṃ datvā rukkhamūle vā pāsāṇapiṭṭhe vā vasitabbaṃ hoti, punadivasepi evamevāti kammaṭṭhānassa okāso na hoti. Yattha pana evarūpo āgantukasambādho na hoti, tattha vihātabbaṃ.
所谓“索尼迪”,是一处石砌池沼。大众为取饮用水而聚集于此,城中居民与依附王族长老的弟子们则为此处染衣之事而来。当有人询问他们的器皿、木槽等物时,便须为其指示“放在某处某处”。如此终日,总是忙于应对,不得闲暇。显示巴利原文
Soṇḍī nāma pāsāṇapokkharaṇī hoti. Tattha pānīyatthaṃ mahājano samosarati, nagaravāsīnaṃ rājakulūpakattherānaṃ antevāsikā rajanakammatthāya āgacchanti, tesaṃ bhājanadārudoṇikādīni pucchantānaṃ ‘‘asuke ca asuke ca ṭhāne’’ti dassetabbāni honti. Evaṃ sabbakālampi niccabyāvaṭo hoti.
在生长各种菜叶之处,比丘即便取了业处坐于日间住处,附近也有采菜妇女们边唱歌边采摘叶子,这些不调和的声音与碰触便造成业处的障碍。显示巴利原文
Yattha nānāvidhaṃ sākapaṇṇaṃ hoti, tatthassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā divāvihāraṃ nisinnassapi santike sākahārikā gāyamānā paṇṇaṃ uccinantiyo visabhāgasaddasaṅghaṭṭanena kammaṭṭhānantarāyaṃ karonti.
而在种种花丛盛开之处,同样有这种干扰。显示巴利原文
Yattha pana nānāvidhā mālāgacchā supupphitā honti, tatrāpi tādisoyeva upaddavo.
在生长各种芒果、阎浮果、菠萝蜜等果实之处,有求果者前来乞讨;若不给予,他们便生气,或以强力夺取。傍晚时分,比丘在寺院内经行时看见他们,便问:‘居士们为何如此?’他们便随己意辱骂,乃至设法令他无法安住。显示巴利原文
Yattha nānāvidhaṃ ambajambupanasādiphalaṃ hoti, tattha phalatthikā āgantvā yācanti, adentassa kujjhanti, balakkārena vā gaṇhanti, sāyanhasamaye vihāramajjhe caṅkamantena te disvā ‘‘kiṃ upāsakā evaṃ karothā’’ti vuttā yathāruci akkosanti, avāsāyapissa parakkamanti.
然而,若住在人们向往、世间知名的寺院——诸如南山、象腹塔山、心山、彩画山等处,人们会生起显示巴利原文
Patthanīye pana lokasammate dakkhiṇagirihatthikucchicetiyagiricittalapabbatasadise vihāre viharantaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ arahā’’ti sambhāvetvā vanditukāmā manussā samantā osaranti, tenassa na phāsu hoti. Yassa pana taṃ sappāyaṃ hoti, tena divā aññattha gantvā rattiṃ vasitabbaṃ.
在靠近城镇之处,不相应的所缘会进入视野:取水的婢女们也提着瓶子相互碰撞着走过,并不让路;有权势的人们更在寺院中央围起布幔而坐。显示巴利原文
Nagarasannissite visabhāgārammaṇāni āpāthamāgacchanti, kumbhadāsiyopi ghaṭehi nighaṃsantiyo gacchanti, okkamitvā maggaṃ na denti, issaramanussāpi vihāramajjhe sāṇiṃ parikkhipitvā nisīdanti.
在依靠树木之处,若有柴薪和用作材料之木,那些拾柴者便如同前文所述的采菜采花者一样,制造不安。寺院里若有树木,人们便来说显示巴利原文
Dārusannissaye pana yattha kaṭṭhāni ca dabbupakaraṇarukkhā ca santi, tattha kaṭṭhahārikā pubbe vuttasākapupphahārikā viya aphāsukaṃ karonti. Vihāre rukkhā santi, te ‘‘chinditvā gharāni karissāmā’’ti manussā āgantvā chindanti. Sace sāyanhasamaye padhānagharā nikkhamitvā vihāramajjhe caṅkamanto te disvā ‘‘kiṃ upāsakā evaṃ karothā’’ti vadati, yathāruci akkosanti, avāsāyapissa parakkamanti.
若寺院坐落于田野之中,四周皆为田地所环绕,人们便会直接在寺院中央筑打谷场碾打稻谷,在寺院门口卧眠,还做其他种种不安之事。如果那里有僧团的大量资具,人们会拦阻净人家庭的牛,禁止他们取水,又拿着稻穗向僧团展示说:“看看你们净人家庭的所作所为。” 由于这些缘故,不得不前去国王、大臣的门前,这也属于依田地而住的情形。显示巴利原文
Yo pana khettasannissito hoti samantā khettehi parivārito, tattha manussā vihāramajjheyeva khalaṃ katvā dhaññaṃ maddanti, pamukhesu sayanti, aññampi bahuṃ aphāsuṃ karonti. Yatrapi mahāsaṅghabhogo hoti, ārāmikakulānaṃ gāvo rundhanti, udakavāraṃ paṭisedhenti, manussā vīhisīsaṃ gahetvā ‘‘passatha tumhākaṃ ārāmikakulānaṃ kamma’’nti saṅghassa dassenti. Tena tena kāraṇena rājarājamahāmattānaṃ gharadvāraṃ gantabbaṃ hoti, ayampi khettasannissiteneva saṅgahito.
又有彼此不和、积有怨结的比丘共住一处,当他们发生争吵而被人劝止说“尊者,请勿如此”时,他们便说:“自从这个粪扫衣者来了以后,我们就完了。”显示巴利原文
Yattha aññamaññavisabhāgā verī bhikkhū viharanti, ye kalahaṃ karontā ‘‘mā, bhante, evaṃ karothā’’ti vāriyamānā ‘‘etassa paṃsukūlikassa āgatakālato paṭṭhāya naṭṭhāmhā’’ti vattāro bhavanti.
若寺院依水码头或陆码头而建,常会有乘船或随商队而来的人们,吵吵嚷嚷地索要“给个地方”、“给水”、“给盐”,制造种种不安。显示巴利原文
Yopi udakapaṭṭanaṃ vā thalapaṭṭanaṃ vā sannissito hoti, tattha abhiṇhaṃ nāvāhi ca satthehi ca āgatamanussā ‘‘okāsaṃ detha, pānīyaṃ detha, loṇaṃ dethā’’ti ghaṭṭayantā aphāsuṃ karonti.
而依附于边境地区的人们,对佛、法等则缺乏敬信。显示巴利原文
Paccantasannissite pana manussā buddhādīsu appasannā honti.
在依附国界之处,则有国王之怖。因为对于那个地区,一位国王以‘其不归我统治’为由进行攻伐,而另一位国王也以‘其不归我统治’为由进行攻伐。那里的比丘时而游行于这位国王的领土,时而游行于那位国王的领土,于是众人便把他当作‘探子’,使其遭遇不幸与灾难。显示巴利原文
Rajjasīmasannissite rājabhayaṃ hoti. Tañhi padesaṃ eko rājā ‘‘na mayhaṃ vase vattatī’’ti paharati, itaropi ‘‘na mayhaṃ vase vattatī’’ti. Tatrāyaṃ bhikkhu kadāci imassa rañño vijite vicarati, kadāci etassa, atha naṃ ‘‘carapuriso aya’’nti maññamānā anayabyasanaṃ pāpenti.
‘不适宜’,是指由于不相应的色等所缘聚集,或因被非人占据而变得不适宜。这里有一个事例:据说,有一位长老住在林中。那时,一个女夜叉站在树叶屋的门口唱歌。长老出来,站在门口,女夜叉便走到经行道的尽头唱歌。长老走到经行道尽头,女夜叉又站在百仞深的悬崖边上唱歌。当长老转身返回时,女夜叉迅速上前抓住他说:‘尊者,被我吃掉像您这样的人,已经不是第一个,也不是第二个了。’显示巴利原文
Asappāyatāti visabhāgarūpādiārammaṇasamosaraṇena vā amanussapariggahitatāya vā asappāyatā. Tatridaṃ vatthu – eko kira thero araññe vasati. Athassa ekā yakkhinī paṇṇasāladvāre ṭhatvā gāyi. So nikkhamitvā dvāre aṭṭhāsi, sā gantvā caṅkamanasīse gāyi. Thero caṅkamanasīsaṃ agamāsi, sā sataporise papāte ṭhatvā gāyi. Thero paṭinivatti, atha naṃ sā vegena gantvā gahetvā ‘‘mayā, bhante, na eko, na dve tumhādisā khāditā’’ti āha.
若不能得老师、与师相等者,或依止师、与依止师相等者,或善知识,则不得善友,此即大过失。因此,应知具足此十八种过失中任何一种的住处,皆不适宜修习。注疏中亦说:显示巴利原文
Yattha na sakkā hoti ācariyaṃ vā ācariyasamaṃ vā upajjhāyaṃ vā upajjhāyasamaṃ vā kalyāṇamittaṃ laddhuṃ, tattha so kalyāṇamittānaṃ alābho mahādosoyeva. Tasmā imesaṃ aṭṭhārasannaṃ dosānaṃ aññatarena samannāgataṃ senāsanaṃ bhāvanāya ananurūpanti veditabbaṃ. Vuttampi cetaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu –
大住处、新住处,老住处与路边;
酒肆、叶与花,果与所求之物。
城镇、林野、田地和不宜的港口;
边地不宜的处所,于彼处不得善友。
智者如是了知此十八处;
应当远远避开,犹如避开有怖畏的道路。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mahāvāsaṃ navāvāsaṃ, jarāvāsañca panthaniṃ; Soṇḍiṃ paṇṇañca pupphañca, phalaṃ patthitameva ca. ‘‘Nagaraṃ dārunā khettaṃ, visabhāgena paṭṭanaṃ; Paccantasīmāsappāyaṃ, yattha mitto na labbhati. ‘‘Aṭṭhārasetāni ṭhānāni, iti viññāya paṇḍito; Ārakā parivajjeyya, maggaṃ sappaṭibhayaṃ yathā’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.52);
具足五住处支,即具备离村不远不近等五种住处支。这是世尊所说的:显示巴利原文
Pañcasenāsanaṅgasamannāgatanti gāmato nātidūranāccāsannatādīhi pañcahi senāsanaṅgehi samannāgataṃ. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“诸比丘,怎样的住处才具足五支?在此,诸比丘,住处不远不近,方便往来;白天不嘈杂,夜间没有声息、不喧闹;没有蚊、蝇、风、热、蛇类的侵扰;安住在这样的住处中,衣服、饮食、住处、医药资具都容易获得;而且在该住处,有长老比丘们安住,他们多闻、通达经教、持法、持律、持论母,时时前往请教、遍问:‘尊者,这是什么意义?这有什么意义?’那些尊者便为他们开示未开示的,阐明未阐明的,帮助他们在种种疑处祛除疑惑。诸比丘,这就是具足五支的住处。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Kathañca, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ hoti? Idha, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ nātidūraṃ hoti nāccāsannaṃ gamanāgamanasampannaṃ, divā appākiṇṇaṃ rattiṃ appasaddaṃ appanigghosaṃ, appaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassaṃ, tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane viharantassa appakasirena uppajjanti cīvarapiṇḍapātasenāsanagilānapaccayabhesajjaparikkhārā, tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane therā bhikkhū viharanti bahussutā āgatāgamā dhammadharā vinayadharā mātikādharā, te kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamitvā paripucchati paripañhati ‘idaṃ, bhante, kathaṃ, imassa ko attho’ti. Tassa te āyasmanto avivaṭañceva vivaranti, anuttānīkatañca uttāniṃ karonti, anekavihitesu ca kaṅkhāṭhāniyesu dhammesu kaṅkhaṃ paṭivinodenti. Evaṃ kho, bhikkhave, senāsanaṃ pañcaṅgasamannāgataṃ hotī’’ti (a. ni. 10.11).
这里,“不太远、不太近,往来便利”为一支;“白昼不喧杂,夜晚无声响、无喧闹”为一支;“无蚊、蝇、风、热、蛇类之触扰”为一支;“安住此处者……资具易得”为一支;“此处有长老……能除遣疑惑”为一支。应当如此了知五支。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca nātidūraṃ nāccāsannaṃ gamanāgamanasampannanti ekaṃ aṅgaṃ, divā appākiṇṇaṃ rattiṃ appasaddaṃ appanigghosanti ekaṃ, appaḍaṃsamakasavātātapasarīsapasamphassanti ekaṃ, tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane viharantassa…pe… parikkhārāti ekaṃ, tasmiṃ kho pana senāsane therā…pe… kaṅkhaṃ paṭivinodentīti ekaṃ. Evaṃ pañcaṅgāni veditabbāni.
断除细琐障碍者:断除细琐障碍时,应剪去长发及身毛;旧衣若有破洞、裂口或需补缀处等,应缝补或织补;污秽之衣应加以染洗。若钵有垢,应煮钵令净;床、椅等亦应清洁。消除食后倦怠者:即消除由饮食所生的疲劳。食物初入胃时,身体多有某种倦怠,应当使之平息。若未平息,则身疲惫,心不得一境。应受持者:即应受持的业处,指一切业处修习方法,并非仅如前文所说的受持。从师受持者:即从师长所受持。乃至一句者:即乃至一分。显示巴利原文
Upacchinnakhuddakapalibodhenāti ettha pana khuddakapalibodhe upacchindantena dīghāni kesanakhalomāni chinditabbāni, jiṇṇacīvaresu aggaḷaanuvātaparibhaṇḍadānādinā daḷhīkammaṃ vā tantucchedādīsu tunnakammaṃ vā kātabbaṃ, kiliṭṭhāni vā rajitabbāni. Sace patte malaṃ hoti, patto pacitabbo, mañcapīṭhādīni sodhetabbāni. Bhattasammadaṃ paṭivinodetvāti bhojananimittaṃ parissamaṃ vinodetvā. Āhāre hi āsayaṃ paviṭṭhamatte tassa āgantukatāya yebhuyyena siyā sarīrassa koci parissamo, taṃ vūpasametvā. Tasmiñhi avūpasante sarīrakhedena cittaṃ ekaggataṃ na labheyyāti. Uggahetabbato uggaho, sabbopi kammaṭṭhānavidhi, na pubbe vuttauggahamattaṃ. Ācariyato uggaho ācariyuggaho, tato. Ekapadampīti ekakoṭṭhāsampi.
随逐:即念持续跟随入出息而无间断地转起。触:计数入出息者,在收回计数后,以念随逐入出息,将心安住于能得安止之处,即鼻端等触处。然而,如同计数时,并没有像触时那样的各别作意,因此为了显示应在触处作计数,此处所说的“触”是指触处。安住:即是定。因为心善巧安住于所缘,便是安住。正如“定”被定义为“心的住立、安住”。然而,安止以定为主,因此说“安住即安止”。随观:即观察无常等相,是为观。转离:即从转起与相转离,是为道。遍净:因一切杂染悉皆寂止,故为果。那些转离与遍净,便是“对观”的对象,反复观察。因此说“省察”。显示巴利原文
Anubandhanāti assāsapassāsānaṃ anugamanavasena satiyā nirantaraṃ anupavattanā. Phusanāti assāsapassāse gaṇentassa gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhantassa yathā appanā hoti, tathā cittaṃ ṭhapentassa ca nāsikaggādiṭṭhānassa nesaṃ phusanā. Yasmā pana gaṇanādivasena viya phusanādivasena visuṃ manasikāro natthi, phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva gaṇanā kātabbāti dassetuṃ idha phusanāgahaṇanti dīpento ‘‘phusanāti phuṭṭhaṭṭhāna’’nti āha. Ṭhapanāti samādhānaṃ. Tañhi sammadeva ārammaṇe cittassa ādhānaṃ ṭhapanaṃ hoti. Tathā hi samādhi ‘‘cittassa ṭhiti saṇṭhitī’’ti niddiṭṭho. Samādhippadhānā pana appanāti āha ‘‘ṭhapanāti appanā’’ti. Aniccatādīnaṃ saṃlakkhaṇato sallakkhaṇā vipassanā. Pavattato nimittato ca vinivaṭṭanato vinivaṭṭanā maggo. Sakalasaṃkilesapaṭippassaddhibhāvato sabbaso suddhīti pārisuddhi phalaṃ. Tesanti vivaṭṭanāpārisuddhīnaṃ. Paṭipassanāti pati pati dassanaṃ pekkhanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paccavekkhaṇā’’ti.
“分断”是指以一、三、五等数目来区分片段。“开端”是就计数方法而言,即依于计数,而非依于业处。“是否已达顶点”这句话,是对长期修习计数者而说的。此人可能仅凭这样获得的不散乱,便产生这种想法。“取入出息中现起者”这句话,是就入出息中先现起的那个所缘而说的。如果两个都现起,就应取两个来计数。“现起者”也显示:在两道鼻风之中,应取较为明显的那一个——这一层含义也应了知。“转起转起”是用叠字来显示对入出息不间断地观察。“如是”是说,以如上所说的方式观察之后。在初学时,虽然所缘是一一各别现起,但这样观察并计数的比丘,后来两个都会变得明显,所以经文说“入出息成为明显”。因此,将“观察已而计数”作为因句,应理解为“当他这样计数时……变得明显”。此中的“明显”,是指因为依于计数,没有外在的散乱,所以变得显著。显示巴利原文
Khaṇḍanti ekaṃ tīṇi pañcāti evaṃ gaṇanāya khaṇḍanaṃ. Okāseti gaṇanāvidhiṃ sandhāyāha, gaṇanānissitova na kammaṭṭhānanissito. Sikhāppattaṃ nu khoti idaṃ cirataraṃ gaṇanāya manasikarontassa vasena vuttaṃ. So hi tathā laddhaṃ avikkhepamattaṃ nissāya evaṃ maññeyya. Assāsapassāsesu yo upaṭṭhāti, taṃ gahetvāti idaṃ assāsapassāsesu yassa ekova paṭhamaṃ upaṭṭhāti, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yassa pana ubhopi upaṭṭhahanti, tena ubhayampi gahetvā gaṇetabbaṃ . Yo upaṭṭhātīti iminā ca dvīsu nāsāpuṭavātesu yo pākaṭataro upaṭṭhāti, so gahetabboti ayampi attho dīpitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pavattamānaṃ pavattamānanti āmeḍitavacanena nirantaraṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ upalakkhaṇaṃ dasseti. Evanti vuttappakārena upalakkhetvāvāti attho. Paṭhamaṃ ekekasmiṃ upaṭṭhitepi upalakkhetvāva gaṇentassa kamena ubhopi pākaṭā hontīti āha – ‘‘assāsapassāsā pākaṭā hontī’’ti. Tena ‘‘upalakkhetvāva gaṇetabba’’nti imassa ‘‘tassevaṃ gaṇayato…pe… pākaṭā hontī’’ti idaṃ kāraṇavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha pākaṭā hontīti gaṇanāvasena bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvato vibhūtā honti.
扭枝为支架,是指安放扭枝的地方,那个就是扭枝柱。“三夜”是与紧密结合相关的受格。前文所说的那种方式,即快速计数,意思是像牧牛者的计数方式。一、二、三、四、五,这是显示计数的方法。因此,在“八”等数目中,也应从“一”开始,逐一达到“八”等。在说“应快快计数”之后,再用“因为计数所系缚”等语句,来显示其中的道理和譬喻。其中,船借以行进之物是“桨”,即拨水的棍棒。以桨来支撑,称为“桨的支撑”,这是就依靠它的力量而说。显示巴利原文
Palighāya parivattanakaṃ yattha nikkhipanti, so palighatthambho. Tiyāmarattinti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Purimanayenāti sīghagaṇanāya, gopālakagaṇanāyāti attho. Eko dve tīṇi cattāri pañcāti gaṇanāvidhidassanaṃ. Tasmā aṭṭhātiādīsupi ekato paṭṭhāyeva paccekaṃ aṭṭhādīni pāpetabbāni. ‘‘Sīghaṃ sīghaṃ gaṇetabbamevā’’ti vatvā tattha kāraṇaṃ nidassanañca dasseti ‘‘gaṇanāpaṭibaddhe hī’’tiādinā. Tattha arīyati tena nāvāti arittaṃ, pājanadaṇḍo. Arittena upatthambhanaṃ arittupatthambhanaṃ, tassa vasena.
从非异门的意义上说,无间断的持续本身就称为安住,所以论中说“如同无间断的持续”。在作意于进入内部的气息时,名为将心引入内部。将心引向外部时,道理也是如此。所谓“被风冲击”,是说如果过度作意于内部的风,那个部位就会像是被风冲击,又像是被脂肪充满一样,这样现起。“引出”是指松开所触的点而将心引出。然而,在这样引出的时候,由于去追寻风的去向,心便会驰骋于种种不同的所缘,所以论中说“心散乱于种种所缘”。显示巴利原文
Nippariyāyato nirantarappavatti nāma ṭhapanāyamevāti āha ‘‘nirantarappavattaṃ viyā’’ti. Anto pavisantaṃ manasikaronto anto cittaṃ paveseti nāma. Bahi cittanīharaṇepi eseva nayo. Vātabbhāhatanti abbhantaragatavātaṃ bahulaṃ manasikarontassa vātena taṃ ṭhānaṃ abbhāhataṃ viya medena pūritaṃ viya ca hoti, tathā upaṭṭhāti. Nīharatoti phuṭṭhokāsaṃ muñcitvā nīharato. Tathā pana nīharato vātassa gatisamanvesanamukhena nānārammaṇesu cittaṃ vidhāvatīti āha ‘‘puthuttārammaṇe cittaṃ vikkhipatī’’ti.
“此”即入出息之生起。“随逐”是说对于持续生起的入出息,以作意为所缘,念随之持续生起,故称随行。因此说:“而那是依初、中、后的随逐。”脐为初,因为入出息首先在那里生起。这里所说的“初”是以首先生起而言,并非仅就生起这一事。实际上,它们从脐开始,直至鼻端,处处皆生起。而在各处生起之处,即于彼处坏灭,因为诸法并无移动;然而,依于众缘转至另一处,假名为“行”。心脏为中间,即心脏附近,其上方部分为中。鼻端为后,即鼻处为后,因为入出息依其通称,以鼻端为界限。事实上,它们被称为“心等起”,而心等起之法不可能存在于外界。因此说:“进入内部之风,以鼻端为初。”然而,出入的次第只是依其相似而说,应如此了知。“趣于散乱”即已至散乱,意为散乱、不专注。“有躁恼”即具有躁恼的状态。“有动摇”即业处作意的动摇。“以趣于散乱的心”是表原因的具格,或表如是状态的相。“有躁恼”即具躁恼,“已动摇”即已动摇、动转,同样地,“已颤动”也是如此。显示巴利原文
Etanti etaṃ assāsapassāsajātaṃ. Anugamananti pavattapavattānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇavasena satiyā anu anu pavattanaṃ anugacchanaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘tañca kho ādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasenā’’ti. Nābhi ādi tattha paṭhamaṃ uppajjanato. Paṭhamuppattivasena hi idha ādicintā, na uppattimattavasena. Tathā hi te nābhito paṭṭhāya yāva nāsikaggā sabbattha uppajjanteva. Yattha yattha ca uppajjanti, tattha tattheva bhijjanti dhammānaṃ gamanābhāvato. Yathāpaccayaṃ pana desantarappattiyaṃ gatisamaññā. Hadayaṃ majjhanti hadayasamīpaṃ tassa uparibhāgo majjhaṃ. Nāsikaggaṃ pariyosānanti nāsikaṭṭhānaṃ tassa pariyosānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ samaññāya tadavadhibhāvato. Tathā hete cittasamuṭṭhānā vuttā, na ca bahiddhā cittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ sambhavo atthi. Tenāha ‘‘abbhantarapavisanavātassa nāsikaggaṃ ādī’’ti. Pavisananikkhamanapariyāyo pana taṃsadisavaseneva vuttoti veditabbo. Vikkhepagatanti vikkhepaṃ upagataṃ, vikkhittaṃ asamāhitanti attho. Sāraddhāyāti sadarathabhāvāya. Iñjanāyāti kammaṭṭhānamanasikārassa calanāya. Vikkhepagatena cittenāti hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ, itthambhūtalakkhaṇe vā. Sāraddhāti sadarathā. Iñjitāti iñjanakā calanakā, tathā phanditā.
“依初、中、后”意为依初、中、后的随逐,不应作意,此为关联。“以随逐而作意者,应依触与依安住而作意”——为阐明此义,说“如同依计数和随逐”等。其中,“没有单独的作意”是指:若不依计数与随逐,则依次唯依触与安住的业处作意便不存在。难道没有触,就像没有安住一样,没有触时依计数的作意也不存在吗?虽然不存在,但计数如同业处作意的根本,应以主要方式把握;同样,随逐对于安住,若无随逐,安住便不可能。因此,尽管触具有无间性,但计数与随逐才是根本,应以主要方式把握,为了显示其他二者并不如是,故说:“如同依计数和随逐,依触和安住并无单独的作意。”若如此,为何在总说中单独列出它们?即“就在触触之处”等。其中,“就在触触之处计数”,以此显示触是计数的支分。因此说:“依计数与触而作意。”“就在那里”即就在触触之处。“他们”指入出息。“以念随逐”即随顺计数的方法以念系缚,意思是在所触之处无间断地确定它们。“以安止而安立心”即为了生起安止,如是将心安立于呈现的相上,令其等持。在“随逐与触与安住”等中,关联如下。显示巴利原文
Ādimajjhapariyosānavasenātiādimajjhapariyosānānugamanavasena na manasi kātabbanti sambandho. ‘‘Anubandhanāya manasikarontena phusanāvasena ṭhapanāvasena ca manasi kātabba’’nti yena adhippāyena vuttaṃ, taṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha visuṃ manasikāro natthīti gaṇanāya anubandhanāya ca vinā yathākkamaṃ kevalaṃ phusanāvasena ṭhapanāvasena ca kammaṭṭhānamanasikāro natthi. Nanu phusanāya vinā ṭhapanāya viya phusanāya vinā gaṇanāyapi manasikāro natthiyevāti? Yadipi natthi, gaṇanā pana yathā kammaṭṭhānamanasikārassa mūlabhāvato padhānabhāvena gahetabbā, evaṃ anubandhanā ṭhapanāya tāya vinā ṭhapanāya asambhavato. Tasmā satipi phusanāya nānantarikabhāve gaṇanānubandhanā eva mūlabhāvato padhānabhāvena gahetvā itarāsaṃ tadabhāvaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘gaṇanānubandhanāvasena viya hi phusanāṭhapanāvasena visuṃ manasikāro natthī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ tā kasmā uddese visuṃ gahitāti āha ‘‘phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyevā’’tiādi. Tattha phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva gaṇentoti iminā gaṇanāya phusanā aṅganti dasseti. Tenāha – ‘‘gaṇanāya ca phusanāya ca manasi karotī’’ti. Tatthevāti phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva. Teti assāsapassāse. Satiyā anubandhantoti gaṇanāvidhiṃ anugantvā satiyā nibandhanto, phuṭṭhokāseyeva te nirantaraṃ upadhārentoti attho. Appanāvasena cittaṃ ṭhapentoti yathā appanā hoti, evaṃ yathāupaṭṭhite nimitte cittaṃ ṭhapento samādahanto. Anubandhanāya cātiādīsu anubandhanāya ca phusanāya ca ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotīti vuccatīti yojanā. Svāyamatthoti yvāyaṃ ‘‘phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva gaṇento tattheva gaṇanaṃ paṭisaṃharitvā te satiyā anubandhanto’’ti vutto, so ayamattho. Yā accantāya na minoti na vinicchinati, sā mānassa samīpeti upamā yathā goṇo viya gavayoti.
“跛者”指以臀部行走的人。“秋千”指摇篮。“玩耍”指正在玩耍的人们。“母与子”指自己的妻子和儿子。“两端”指来者的前端、去者的后端,这两端。“中间”指秋千板的正中。“如固定柱”即固定柱,指鼻端或口相,安住在其根部附近。如何安住?以念力而住。修行者将念善安立于彼处,即称为“住于彼处”,因为可以部分之法指示整体。“相”指鼻端等相。“以念而坐”即以念力而坐。“将念善安立于彼处”等,应如同说“住立处”时一样解说。“于彼处”即所触之处。“他们”指进出城内外的人们,以及属于那些人者,已在手中。“从最初以来”指从显示所喻之义开始。显示巴利原文
Paṅguḷoti pīṭhasappī. Dolāti peṅkholo. Kīḷatanti kīḷantānaṃ. Mātāputtānanti attano bhariyāya puttassa ca. Ubho koṭiyoti āgacchantassa purimakoṭiṃ, gacchantassa pacchimakoṭinti dvepi koṭiyo. Majjhañcāti dolāphalakasseva majjhaṃ. Upanibandhanatthambho viyāti upanibandhanatthambho, nāsikaggaṃ mukhanimittaṃ vā, tassa mūle samīpe ṭhatvā. Kathaṃ ṭhatvā ? Satiyā vasena. Satiñhi tattha sūpaṭṭhitaṃ karonto yogāvacaro tattha ṭhito nāma hoti avayavadhammena samudāyassa apadisitabbato . Nimitteti nāsikaggādinimitte. Satiyā nisinnoti sativasena nisīdanto. ‘‘Satiñhi tatthā’’tiādinā ṭhāne viya vattabbaṃ. Tatthāti phuṭṭhaṭṭhāne. Teti nagarassa anto bahi ca gatā manussā tesaṃ saṅgahā ca hatthagatā. Ādito pabhutīti upameyyatthadassanato paṭṭhāya.
偈颂中的“相”,是指系缚之相。“非一心之所缘”,是说不是单一心的所缘,即不能成为所缘的意思。“不知三法者”,指未能将相、入息、出息这三法作为所缘而予以把握之人。“且”字表差别之义。“修习”,即入出息念定的修习。“不能获得”,是说不能获得、不能成就,这是责难偈颂的意旨。第二首遮护偈颂则甚易了知。显示巴利原文
Gāthāyaṃ nimittanti upanibandhananimittaṃ. Anārammaṇamekacittassāti ekassa cittassa na ārammaṇaṃ, ārammaṇaṃ na hontīti attho. Ajānato ca tayo dhammeti nimittaṃ assāso passāsoti ime nimittādayo tayo dhamme ārammaṇakaraṇavasena avindantassa. Ca-saddo byatireke. Bhāvanāti ānāpānassatisamādhibhāvanā. Nupalabbhatīti na upalabbhati na sijjhatīti ayaṃ codanāgāthāya attho. Dutiyā pana parihāragāthā suviññeyyāva.
“如何”一词,是为了阐明那些责难与遮护偈颂的意义,欲加解说而提出的问题。“这些三法”等句,结合词句的连属,其义解如下:这些相、入息、出息三法,如何不是单一心的所缘?既然不是所缘,这三法又如何不是未被了知?又为何不是未被了知?若它们未被了知,心如何不陷入散乱?作为修习成就之因的精勤,又如何显现?能镇伏盖障、正确带来等持的修习随行——即所谓加行,瑜伽行者又如何成就?渐次增上的世间与出世间殊胜,又如何得以证得?显示巴利原文
Kathanti tāsaṃ codanāparihāragāthānaṃ atthaṃ vivarituṃ kathetukamyatāpucchā. Ime tayo dhammātiādīsu padayojanāya saddhiṃ ayamatthaniddeso – ime nimittādayo tayo dhammā ekacittassa kathaṃ ārammaṇaṃ na honti, asatipi ārammaṇabhāve na cime na ca ime tayo dhammā aviditā honti, kathañca na honti aviditā, tesañhi aviditatte cittañca kathaṃ vikkhepaṃ na gacchati, padhānañca bhāvanāya nipphādakaṃ vīriyañca kathaṃ paññāyati, nīvaraṇānaṃ vikkhambhakaṃ sammadeva samādhānāvahaṃ bhāvanānuyogasaṅkhātaṃ payogañca yogī kathaṃ sādheti, uparūpari lokiyalokuttarañca visesaṃ kathamadhigacchatīti.
现在为了以锯喻成就其义,故说“譬如”等语。由于地面不平,在摇晃的树上,砍伐作业不易进行,且如此一来,锯齿的轨迹便难以了知,所以特别说明“在平坦的地面上”。“以锯”,指用细小锐利的锯,因此称之为“人”。“触锯齿”,即依于所触之锯齿,以此显示那人唯在锯齿所触之处有念现前。因此说:“他不对来或去的锯齿作意”。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ kakacopamāya sādhetuṃ ‘‘seyyathāpī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhūmibhāgassa visamatāya cañcale rukkhe chedanakiriyā na sukarā siyā, tathā ca sati kakacadantagati duviññeyyāti āha – ‘‘same bhūmibhāge’’ti. Kakacenāti khuddakena kharapattena. Tenāha ‘‘puriso’’ti. Phuṭṭhakakacadantānanti phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhakakacadantānaṃ vasena. Tena kakacadantehi phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva purisassa satiyā upaṭṭhānaṃ dasseti. Tenāha – ‘‘na āgate vā gate vā kakacadante manasi karotī’’ti.
拉锯时朝向人而来的锯齿称为‘来’,推锯时离此而去的称为‘去’。然而,对来去的锯齿并非无所了知,因为于一切处,念皆现前;而来去之锯齿,若不触及要切割之处,亦无所谓来去。精进,即砍树之勤行。加行,即其砍伐之作业。譬喻中,‘证得殊胜’一词巴利原文虽无,然应结合而显示。正因如此,《清净道论》于譬喻中亦结合‘证得殊胜’一词而说。其注释释其义:‘殊胜,即成就多种状态,以此应成就之利益殊胜。’显示巴利原文
Kakacassa ākaḍḍhanakāle purisābhimukhaṃ pavattā āgatā, pellanakāle tato vigatā gatāti vuttā, na ca āgatā vā gatā vā kakacadantā aviditā honti sabbattha satiyā upaṭṭhitattā chinditabbaṭṭhānaṃ aphusitvā gacchantānaṃ āgacchantānañca kakacadantānaṃ abhāvato. Padhānanti rukkhassa chedanavīriyaṃ. Payoganti tasseva chedanakiriyaṃ. Upamāyaṃ ‘‘visesamadhigacchatī’’ti padaṃ pāḷiyaṃ natthi, yojetvā pana dassetabbaṃ. Teneva visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.227) upamāyampi ‘‘visesamadhigacchatī’’ti padaṃ yojetvāva vuttaṃ. Taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca ‘‘visesanti anekabhāvāpādanaṃ, tena ca sādhetabbaṃ payojanavisesa’’nti attho vutto.
‘如树’等,是譬喻的连结。‘能令心系缚于所缘’,依此而称为念系缚;对入出息标记之相,即是系缚之相,即鼻端或口相。如是,正如那人以锯砍树时,虽不作意于来去之锯齿,唯于所触之处令念现前,而了知来去之锯齿,且不偏离线墨,成就义利,如是亦然。所谓鼻端或口相:长鼻者取鼻端,其余者取称为口相的上唇——‘口’即食物,于此被标记、被覆盖,故得口相之名。显示巴利原文
Yathā rukkhotiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Upanibandhati ārammaṇe cittaṃ etāyāti sati upanibandhanā nāma, tassā assāsapassāsānaṃ sallakkhaṇassa nimittanti upanibandhanānimittaṃ, nāsikaggaṃ mukhanimittaṃ vā. Evamevanti yathā so puriso kakacena rukkhaṃ chindanto āgatagate kakacadante amanasikarontopi phuṭṭhaphuṭṭhaṭṭhāneyeva satiyā upaṭṭhapanena āgatagate kakacadante jānāti, suttapadañca avirajjhanto atthakiccaṃ sādheti, evamevaṃ. Nāsikagge mukhanimitteti dīghanāsiko nāsikagge, itaro mukhaṃ asanaṃ nimīyati chādīyati etenāti mukhanimittanti laddhanāme uttaroṭṭhe.
‘此是精进’:即以此勤行策励,已发勤行的瑜伽行者,其身与心皆成为堪任修行业处、适合修行业处,此勤行即是精进——这是以果显因。‘随烦恼断除’:即成为心之随烦恼的诸盖,以镇伏而断除。‘寻伺止息’:即由此,欲寻等邪寻伺归于止息;又或者,以诸盖断除显示初禅证得后,以寻伺止息之说显示第二禅等之证得。‘此是加行’:此即作为证得禅那之因的业处随行,名为加行。‘结缚断除’:即十种结缚,依道之次第,以正断而断除。‘随眠消除’:即同样,七种随眠,以令不再生起之性,即使仅存坏灭亦无余而消除。此处,所谓结缚断除,实即随眠灭尽;且为显示于已断之结缚中,随眠丝毫亦将不存,故说‘结缚断除,随眠消除’。‘此是殊胜’:即依此定,次第所得之结缚断除等,是此定之殊胜,此为义。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ padhānanti yena vīriyārambhena āraddhavīriyassa yogino kāyopi cittampi kammaniyaṃ bhāvanākammakkhamaṃ bhāvanākammayoggaṃ hoti, idaṃ vīriyaṃ padhānanti phalena hetuṃ dasseti. Upakkilesā pahīyantīti cittassa upakkilesabhūtāni nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhanavasena pahīyanti. Vitakkā vūpasammantīti tato eva kāmavitakkādayo micchāvitakkā upasamaṃ gacchanti, nīvaraṇappahānena vā paṭhamajjhānādhigamaṃ dassetvā vitakkavūpasamāpadesena dutiyajjhānādīnamadhigamamāha. Ayaṃ payogoti ayaṃ jhānādhigamassa hetubhūto kammaṭṭhānānuyogo payogo. Saṃyojanā pahīyantīti dasapi saṃyojanāni maggappaṭipāṭiyā samucchedavasena pahīyanti. Anusayā byantī hontīti tathā sattapi anusayā anuppattidhammatāpādanena bhaṅgamattassapi anavasesato vigatantā honti. Ettha ca saṃyojanappahānaṃ nāma anusayanirodheneva hoti, pahīnesu ca saṃyojanesu anusayānaṃ lesopi na bhavissatīti ca dassanatthaṃ ‘‘saṃyojanā pahīyanti, anusayā byantī hontī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ visesoti imaṃ samādhiṃ nissāya anukkamena labbhamāno ayaṃ saṃyojanappahānādiko imassa samādhissa visesoti attho.
“Yassā”,意即“由那种”。“Anupubbaṃ”,意即“次第地”。“Paricitā”,意即“已熟习”。此处略义如下:正如由佛陀、世尊所教导的入出息念,依那种长短了知等方法次第熟习、善加修习,正因如此,它圆满成就十六种事(所缘)的圆满而完全具足。那位比丘以智慧的光明照亮自己的蕴等世间。如同什么?如同离云的月亮,即脱离了云等随烦恼的月亮,众星之王。应知在解释“如月离云”一词时,由于也提到了地等,此处省略了“等”字。显示巴利原文
Yassāti yena. Anupubbanti anukkamena. Paricitāti pariciṇṇā. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – ānāpānassati yathā buddhena bhagavatā desitā, tathā yena dīgharassapajaānanādividhinā anupubbaṃ paricitā suṭṭhu bhāvitā, tato eva paripuṇṇā soḷasannaṃ vatthūnaṃ pāripūriyā sabbaso puṇṇā, so bhikkhu imaṃ attano khandhādilokaṃ paññobhāsena pabhāseti. Yathā kiṃ? Abbhā muttova candimā abbhādiupakkilesavimutto candimā tārakarājā viyāti. ‘‘Abbhā muttova candimā’’ti hi padassa niddese mahikādīnampi vuttattā ettha ādi-saddalopo katoti veditabbo.
“Idha”意为“在此(锯喻)中”。“Assa”意为“那位修行者的”。或者,“idha”意为“在此处”,“assa”意为“作为比喻的锯子的”。正如那个人对锯子的来去不加作意,同样地,对于入出息,只是对其来去不加作意,这便是此处的引导作用。“不久”,是针对已作加行的人而说的。“相”,指似相。“为其余禅支所庄严”:他们说“为寻等其余禅支所庄严”,但应说“为伺等”,因为严格来说,寻并不存在于安止中。由于寻在经文中被表述为“安止、遍止”,或因其相应,禅那在注释书中被称为“安止”;而在禅支中,定是主要的,因此,为显示那安止,而说“为其余禅支所庄严的、称为安止的安立也成就”。然而,对某些人而言,仅以计数的方式,从作意之时起,此处“次第地……如同已得”整段文句已佚失,但在某些古旧写本中,那段文句仍被书写保留。显示巴利原文
Idhāti kakacūpamāya. Assāti yogino. Idhāti vā imasmiṃ ṭhāne. Assāti upamābhūtassa kakacassa. Āgatagatavasena yathā tassa purisassa amanasikāro, evaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ āgatagatavasena amanasikāramattameva ānayanappayojanaṃ. Na cirenevāti idaṃ katādhikāraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Nimittanti paṭibhāganimittaṃ. Avasesajjhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitāti vitakkādiavasesajjhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitāti vadanti, vicārādīti pana vattabbaṃ nippariyāyena vitakkassa appanābhāvato. So hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘appanā byappanā’’ti niddiṭṭho, taṃsampayogato vā yasmā jhānaṃ appanāti aṭṭhakathāvohāro, jhānaṅgesu ca samādhi padhānaṃ, tasmā taṃ appanāti dassento ‘‘avasesajjhānaṅgapaṭimaṇḍitā appanāsaṅkhātā ṭhapanā ca sampajjatī’’ti āha. Kassaci pana gaṇanāvaseneva manasikārakālato pabhutīti ettha ‘‘anukkamato…pe… pattaṃ viya hotī’’ti ettakova gantho parihīno, purāṇapotthakesu pana katthaci so gantho likhitoyeva tiṭṭhati.
于某位身躁动者。“弯曲”,指因膀胱等下垂而弯曲。“发出声响”,指发出声音。“产生皱纹”,指各处出现皱纹。为什么?因为躁动的身体是沉重的。粗显的入出息之灭,与身躁动的止息一同成就,这被说成如同通过反证来成立。“以粗显的入出息之灭为手段”,是通过顺证来成立其义。当身躁动止息时,由于心生色法的轻快、柔软、适业性,其余等流色法也具有轻快等状态,这在此处被理解为身体的轻快。而那种轻快,因为若无心的轻快等状态便不存在,所以这样说:“身和心都变得轻快”。显示巴利原文
Sāraddhakāyassa kassaci puggalassa. Onamati vatthikādipalambanena. Vikūjatīti saddaṃ karoti. Valiṃ gaṇhātīti. Tattha tattha valinaṃ hoti. Kasmā? Yasmā sāraddhakāyo garuko hotīti. Kāyadarathavūpasamena saddhiṃ sijjhamāno oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodho byatirekamukhena tassa sādhanaṃ viya vutto. Oḷārikaassāsapassāsanirodhavasenāti anvayavasena tadatthassa sādhanaṃ. Kāyadarathe vūpasanteti cittajarūpānaṃ lahumudukammaññabhāvena yo sesatisantatirūpānampi lahuādibhāvo, so idha kāyassa lahubhāvoti adhippeto. Svāyaṃ yasmā cittassa lahuādibhāvena vinā natthi, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘kāyopi cittampi lahukaṃ hotī’’ti.
“当粗显的入出息止息时”等语句,是为了说明在已达到应审察阶段时,如何审察身行的方法而引出的,其中的原理如前所述。显示巴利原文
Oḷārike assāsapassāse niruddhetiādi heṭṭhā vuttanayamhi vicetabbākārappattassa kāyasaṅkhārassa vicayanavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ānītaṃ.
“愈发向上而明显”是指由于修习的力量,入出息在向上各阶段变得清晰。“从处所”指从自然接触的处所,即先前依自己接触而确定的位置。显示巴利原文
Uparūparivibhūtānīti bhāvanābalena uddhaṃ uddhaṃ pākaṭāni honti. Desatoti pakatiyā phusanadesato, pubbe attano phusanavasena upadhāritaṭṭhānato.
为了将“何处无有?”依处所,“谁无有?”依个人这样被审察的意义合在一起阐明,而说了“在母胎内”等。 对此,阿阇梨法护长老说:“如同沉入水中的人,由于空间被阻隔,入出息不转起,在母胎内也是如此。如同死者由于没有令生起的心,无想者、昏迷者或生于无想有情中者也是如此,同样,入灭尽定者也是如此。” 然而在《大结节》中说:“昏迷者由于心转起羸弱。” 第四禅的证入者,依法性自然,他们没有入出息的生起,色界、无色界的有情也是如此。 但有些人说:“由于次第达到微细状态,第四禅的证入者没有入出息;由于色界中色法和有分的微细状态,色界有情没有入出息。” 其意是:除了如前所述的七种情况之外,入出息确实存在,因为没有入出息不生起的情况。 “依自然触处”指依自然接触的处所。 “应安立相”指为了令念在那里安乐地转起,应令更坚固的想转起。 因为坚固的想是念的近因。 “正是这个”指对于不现起(入出息)者,正是这个如同拔刺的方法,即令身行现起的方法。 “目的”指原因。 因为目的是果。 它依之而转起,所以是“目的”。 “失念者”指念已坏失者。 “不正知者”指缺乏正知者,其意是:对于正在修习而次第不现起入出息者,缺乏能够审察“这些是(入出息)”并正确了知的念与慧。 “从此处,其他业处”指其他业处。 “沉重”指负担重。 而它的沉重性是由于修习极为困难,所以说“沉重修习”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kattha natthī’’ti ṭhānavasena ‘‘kassa natthī’’ti puggalavasena ca vīmaṃsiyamānamatthaṃ ekajjhaṃ katvā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘antomātukucchiya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘yathā udake nimuggassa niruddhokāsatāya assāsapassāsā na pavattanti, evaṃ antomātukucchiyaṃ. Yathā matānaṃ samuṭṭhāpakacittābhāvato, evaṃ asaññībhūtānaṃ mucchāparetānaṃ asaññīsu vā jātānaṃ, tathā nirodhasamāpannāna’’nti ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ. Mahāgaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘mucchāparetānaṃ cittappavattiyā dubbalabhāvato’’ti kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Catutthajjhānasamāpannānaṃ dhammatāvaseneva nesaṃ anuppajjanaṃ, tathā rūpārūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘anupubbato sukhumabhāvappattiyā catutthajjhānasamāpannassa, rūpabhave rūpānaṃ bhavaṅgassa ca sukhumabhāvato rūpabhavasamaṅgīnaṃ natthī’’ti kāraṇaṃ vadanti. Atthiyeva te assāsapassāsā pārisesatoti adhippāyo yathāvuttasattaṭṭhānavinimuttassa assāsapassāsānaṃ anuppajjanaṭṭhānassa abhāvato. Pakatiphuṭṭhavasenāti pakatiyā phusanaṭṭhānavasena. Nimittaṃ ṭhapetabbanti satiyā tattha sukhappavattanatthaṃ thirataraṃ saññāṇaṃ pavattetabbaṃ. Thirasaññāpadaṭṭhānā hi sati. Imamevāti imaṃ eva anupaṭṭhahantassa kāyasaṅkhārassa kaṇṭakuṭṭhāpanañāyena upaṭṭhāpanavidhimeva. Atthavasanti hetuṃ. Attho hi phalaṃ. So yassa vasena pavattati, so atthavasoti. Muṭṭhassatissāti vinaṭṭhassatissa. Asampajānassāti sampajaññavirahitassa, bhāventassa anukkamena anupaṭṭhahante assāsapassāse vīmaṃsitvā ‘‘ime te’’ti upadhāretuṃ sammadeva jānituñca samatthāhi satipaññāhi virahitassāti adhippāyo. Ito aññaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ. Garukanti bhāriyaṃ. Sā cassa garukatā bhāvanāya sudukkarabhāvenāti āha ‘‘garukabhāvana’’nti.
由渐次证得极微细的状态,故说“应希求强猛、极清净且锐利的正念与正慧”;为了表明微细之义的确立亦须以微细的方式达成,而说“正如……”等。现在,为了开示那些尚未现起入出息者的寻求方法,而说“然而以彼……”等。其中,“anupada”即随逐于每一步。“caritvā”即行持了所行境之后。“tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne”即在于那个被称为安止相的处所。“yojetvā”即以作意将其系缚;或者说“以正念之光索系缚”,正是为了说明“系缚于那一个处所”这一含义,因为在喻体中,系缚与连接之处并不能各别获得。“nimitta”指取相或似相,此处二者被合在一起说。正如棉絮等三个比喻适用于取相,其余则适用于两者。“ekacce”是指某些阿阇梨。显示巴利原文
Uparūpari santasukhumabhāvāpattito ‘‘balavatī suvisadā sūrā ca sati paññā ca icchitabbā’’ti vatvā sukhumassa nāma atthassa sādhanenapi sukhumeneva bhavitabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Idāni anupaṭṭhahantānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ pariyesanupāyaṃ dassento ‘‘tāhi ca panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha anupadanti padānupadaṃ. Caritvāti gocaraṃ gahetvā. Tasmiṃyeva ṭhāneti upanibandhananimittasaññite ṭhāne. Yojetvāti manasikārena yojetvā. ‘‘Satirasmiyā bandhitvā’’ti vā vuttamevatthamāha ‘‘tasmiṃyeva ṭhāne yojetvā’’ti. Na hi upameyye bandhanayojanaṭṭhānāni visuṃ labbhanti. Nimittanti uggahanimittaṃ paṭibhāganimittaṃ vā. Ubhayampi hi idha ekajjhaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā hi tūlapicuādi upamattayaṃ uggahe yujjati, sesaṃ ubhayattha. Ekacceti eke ācariyā.
“如星体之形”是指如同星曜的光辉形态。宝珠等比喻适用于似相。然而,为何这单一的业处会以多种方式现起呢?因此说“而彼……”等。“suttanta”即一部经典。以善巧转起而无间断、具有广大行境的状态,故说“如大山上之河”。其中,文句圆满、各方面皆善妙的经典,犹如一切部分皆悦意、一切枝叶花果盛开的丛林,故说“如同一片丛林”。因此世尊说:“如丛林中花满枝头”(小诵6.13;经集236)。具有种种连结、种种重复、种种微细理趣、种种业处门径的经典,应被有需求者恭敬亲近,故说“如清凉荫蔽……之树”。“由于想有种种”,是指由于相现起之前所转起的想而有种种不同的状态。“想所生”是指由修习想所生、唯由修习想而认知的。因为非实有之法不可能从任何地方生起,因此说“以种种方式现起”,意思是仅以现起的行相而说。显示巴利原文
Tārakarūpaṃ viyāti tārakāya pabhārūpaṃ viya. Maṇiguḷikādiupamā paṭibhāge vaṭṭanti. Kathaṃ panetaṃ ekaṃyeva kammaṭṭhānaṃ anekākārato upaṭṭhātīti āha ‘‘tañca paneta’’ntiādi. Suttantanti ekaṃ suttaṃ. Paguṇappavattibhāvena avicchedaṃ mahāvisayatañca sandhāyāha ‘‘mahatī pabbateyyā nadī viyā’’ti. Tattha byañjanasampattiyā samantabhaddakaṃ suttaṃ sabbabhāgamanoharā sabbapāliphullā vanaghaṭā viyāti āha ‘‘ekā vanarāji viyā’’ti. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘vanappagumbe yatha phussitagge’’ti (khu. pā. 6.13; su. ni. 236) nānānusandhiyaṃ nānāpeyyālaṃ vividhanayanipuṇaṃ bahuvidhakammaṭṭhānamukhaṃ suttantaṃ atthikehi sakkaccaṃ samupapajjitabbanti āha – ‘‘sītacchāyo…pe… rukkhoviyā’’ti. Saññānānatāyāti nimittupaṭṭhānato pubbe pavattasaññānaṃ nānāvidhabhāvato. Saññajanti bhāvanāsaññājanitaṃ bhāvanāsaññāya sañjānanamattaṃ. Na hi asabhāvassa kutoci samuṭṭhānaṃ atthi. Tenāha – ‘‘nānato upaṭṭhātī’’ti, upaṭṭhānākāramattanti vuttaṃ hoti.
“此三法”,即入息、出息与相这三法。“没有”,是指就业处而言,作为应作意之法,是不存在的、不可得的。“不达近行”,是指连近行定也不能达到,更遑论安止定——这是其意旨。而“若有……”的情况,依所述的方法类推即可了知。显示巴利原文
Ime tayo dhammāti assāso passāso nimittanti ime tayo dhammā. Natthīti kammaṭṭhānavasena manasikātabbabhāvena natthi na upalabbhati. Na upacāranti upacārampi na pāpuṇāti, pageva appananti adhippāyo. Yassa panāti vijjamānapakkho vuttanayānusāreneva veditabbo.
现在,为了论证刚才所说的义理,引用了锯喻中出现的“相”等偈颂。“相”即如前所述的似相。“会这样”是指修行者会如此心生,因此应告诉他:“应一再如此作意。”“可能陷入懈怠”即可能陷入这样的退缩:“相难得生起,而我已经得到,现在便可随时证得殊胜。”“可能沮丧”即可能会沮丧地想:“修行这么久,相仍未生起,我恐怕无力证得殊胜。”然而,当说到“依此行此道,我将从老死中解脱,如此行道者的相”时,又怎么会退缩呢?反而应更加精进。因此,中部诵者说:“这是相……应被这样说。”“如此”是指依前述方式,将修习之心仅安住于似相。“从此以后”指从似相生起以后。先前所说“以随逐、触、安住而作意”(《律藏注·入出息念定论》)中,舍弃随逐与触,仅以安住而修习,故说“以安住而修习”。显示巴利原文
Idāni vuttasseva atthassa samatthanatthaṃ kakacūpamāyaṃ āgatā ‘‘nimitta’’ntiādikā gāthā paccānītā. Nimitteti yathāvutte paṭibhāganimitte. Evaṃ hotīti bhāvanamanuyuttassa evaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘punappunaṃ evaṃ manasi karohī’’ti vattabbo. Vosānaṃ āpajjeyyāti ‘‘nimittaṃ nāma dukkaraṃ uppādetuṃ, tayidaṃ laddhaṃ, handāhaṃ dāni yadā vā tadā vā visesaṃ nibbattessāmī’’ti saṅkocaṃ āpajjeyya. Visīdeyyāti ‘‘ettakaṃ kālaṃ bhāvanamanuyuttassa nimittampi na uppannaṃ, abhabbo maññe visesassā’’ti visādaṃ āpajjeyya. ‘‘Imāya paṭipadāya jarāmaraṇato muccissāmīti paṭipannassa nimitta’’nti vutte kathaṃ saṅkocāpatti, bhiyyoso mattāya ussāhameva kareyyāti ‘‘nimittamidaṃ…pe… vattabbo’’ti majjhimabhāṇakā āhu. Evanti vuttappakārena paṭibhāganimitteyeva bhāvanācittassa ṭhapanena. Ito pabhutīti ito paṭibhāganimittuppattito paṭṭhāya. Pubbe yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘anubandhanāya phusanāya ṭhapanāya ca manasi karotī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.ānāpānassatisamādhikathā), tattha anubandhanaṃ phusanañca vissajjetvā ṭhapanāvaseneva bhāvetabbanti āha ‘‘ṭhapanāvasena bhāvanā hotī’’ti.
为了显示古德所阐释的义理,而说“于相”等偈颂。其中,“相”指似相。“安立心”即安立修习心,意谓以安住的方式作意。“种种行相”指“四种颜色”等所说的种种行相,此处是以行相的共通性而作单数表达。“令消失”指令其消失、隐没,因为从相生起后,那些行相由于不作意,便如同消失一般。“于入出息”指令入出息中的种种行相消失,或于入出息所生的相中令其消失。“系缚自心”指以此安住,将自心系缚于彼,意思即令入安止。然而,有些人将“令消失”解释为令其明显、清楚,这适用于前分阶段。此处真正的意思是:具足慧力的智者瑜伽行者,令入出息中的种种行相消失,以种种方式了知它们,使之明显、清楚,或者令粗重的种种行相止息、寂静,然后将心安立于所获之相,次第系缚自心,令入安止。显示巴利原文
Porāṇehi vuttovāyamatthoti dassento ‘‘nimitte’’ti gāthamāha. Tattha nimitteti paṭibhāganimitte. Ṭhapayaṃ cittanti bhāvanācittaṃ ṭhapento, ṭhapanāvasena manasikarontoti attho. Nānākāranti ‘‘cattāro vaṇṇā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ nānākāraṃ. Ākārasāmaññavasena hetaṃ ekavacanaṃ. Vibhāvayanti vibhāvento antaradhāpento. Nimittuppattito paṭṭhāya hi te ākārā amanasikārato antarahitā viya honti. Assāsapassāseti assāsapassāse yo nānākāro, taṃ vibhāvayaṃ, assāsapassāsasambhūte vā nimitte. Sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhatīti tāya eva ṭhapanāya attano cittaṃ upanibandhati, appetīti attho. Keci pana ‘‘vibhāvayanti vibhāvento, viditaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto’’ti atthaṃ vadanti, taṃ pubbabhāgavasena yujjeyya. Ayañhettha attho – dhitisampannattā dhīro yogī assāsapassāse nānākāraṃ vibhāvento nānākārato te pajānanto vidite pākaṭe karonto nānākāraṃ vā oḷārikoḷārike passambhento vūpasamento tattha yaṃ laddhaṃ nimittaṃ, tasmiṃ cittaṃ ṭhapento anukkamena sakaṃ cittaṃ nibandhati appetīti.
当信等诸根极为清净、锐利地运作时,由于不信等已远离,那些唯属欲界的寻等禅支,得到七力极强地支撑,便大量生起。由此,作为其直接对立面的欲贪等,连同与之俱生的恶不善法,便随着似相的出现而远远离去,依此而生起近行定。因此说“从似相出现开始,诸盖即已被镇伏”等。其中,“已安坐”指完全正确地安坐,意即已寂静。“已镇伏而安坐”这一强调,则显示应为此义而努力。以两种方式:即禅法的敌对法远离与达到坚固状态,以此二因。现在,为了通过阶段来显示这些原因,而说“在近行地”等。其中,“在近行地”指近行阶段。因为那时虽然禅支尚未生起得更为锐利、达到广大状态,但通过镇伏其敌对法,心得入定,因此说“由断除诸盖”。“在获得地”指证得禅那的阶段。因为那时通过生起已达安止的禅法,心得入定,因此说“由诸支显现”。显示巴利原文
Yadā saddhādīni indriyāni suvisadāni tikkhāni pavattanti, tadā assaddhiyādīnaṃ dūrībhāvena sātisayaṃ thāmappattehi sattahi balehi laddhupatthambhāni vitakkādīni kāmāvacarāneva jhānaṅgāni bahūni hutvā pātubhavanti. Tato eva tesaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā kāmacchandādayo saddhiṃ tadekaṭṭhehi pāpadhammehi vidūrī bhavanti paṭibhāganimittuppattiyā saddhiṃ, taṃ ārabbha upacārajjhānaṃ uppajjati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘nimittupaṭṭhānato pabhuti nīvaraṇāni vikkhambhitāneva hontī’’tiādi. Tattha sannisinnāvāti sammadeva nisīdiṃsu eva, upasantāyevāti attho. Vikkhambhitāneva sannisinnāvāti avadhāraṇena pana tadatthaṃ ussāho kātabboti dasseti. Dvīhākārehīti jhānadhammānaṃ paṭipakkhadūrībhāvo thirabhāvappatti cāti imehi dvīhi kāraṇehi. Idāni tāni kāraṇāni avatthāmukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘upacārabhūmiyaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha upacārabhūmiyanti upacārāvatthāyaṃ. Yadipi hi tadā jhānaṅgāni paṭutarāni mahaggatabhāvappattāni nuppajjanti, tesaṃ pana paṭipakkhadhammānaṃ vikkhambhanena cittaṃ samādhiyati. Tenāha ‘‘nīvaraṇappahānenā’’ti. Paṭilābhabhūmiyanti jhānassa adhigamāvatthāyaṃ. Tadā hi appanāppattānaṃ jhānadhammānaṃ uppattiyā cittaṃ samādhiyati. Tenāha ‘‘aṅgapātubhāvenā’’ti.
在近行阶段,诸支尚未强健有力;因为诸支无力,就如同幼童被扶起站立,却又再三跌倒在地。同样地,当近行定生起时,心有时取相为所缘,有时则落入有分。因此说:“近行定在善速行路中运行后,落入有分。”然而,在安止阶段,诸支已强健有力;由于诸支有力,犹如大力士从座而起,能站立一整天。同样地,安止定生起时,心一次截断有分之流,便能持续整夜、整日,唯依善速行相续而转起。因此说:“安止定……不落入有分。”所谓“相”:从颜色而言,即如棉团、星形等所现之色;从自性而言,即粗涩等自性,或无常等共相。应当守护彼相——这便是其中的关联。显示巴利原文
Upacāre aṅgāni na thāmajātāni honti aṅgānaṃ athāmajātattā. Yathā nāma daharo kumārako ukkhipitvā ṭhapiyamāno punappunaṃ bhūmiyaṃ patati, evameva upacāre uppanne cittaṃ kālena nimittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karoti, kālena bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘upacārasamādhi kusalavīthiyaṃ javitvā bhavaṅgaṃ otaratī’’ti. Appanāyaṃ pana aṅgāni thāmajātāni honti tesaṃ thāmajātattā. Yathā nāma balavā puriso āsanā vuṭṭhāya divasampi tiṭṭheyya, evameva appanāsamādhimhi uppanne cittaṃ sakiṃ bhavaṅgavāraṃ chinditvā kevalampi rattiṃ kevalampi divasaṃ tiṭṭhati, kusalajavanapaṭipāṭivaseneva pavattati. Tenāha – ‘‘appanāsamādhi…pe… na bhavaṅgaṃ otaratī’’ti. Vaṇṇatoti picupiṇḍatārakarūpādīsu viya upaṭṭhitavaṇṇato. Lakkhaṇatoti kharabhāvādisabhāvato aniccādisabhāvato vā. Rakkhitabbaṃ taṃ nimittanti sambandho.
“所得退失”是指已获得的近行禅那的退失。当所缘之相未坏灭时,以此相为所缘的禅那便不会退失;但若由于缺乏守护而导致相坏灭,那么即使已获得的禅那也会随之坏灭,因为它正是依此相而转起的。因此说“于守护”等。显示巴利原文
Laddhaparihānīti laddhaupacārajjhānaparihāni. Nimitte avinassante tadārammaṇaṃ jhānaṃ aparihīnameva hoti, nimitte pana ārakkhābhāvena vinaṭṭhe laddhaṃ laddhaṃ jhānampi vinassati tadāyattavuttito. Tenāha ‘‘ārakkhamhī’’tiādi.
现在,于此便说明守护的方法等——显示巴利原文
Idāni tatrāyaṃ rakkhaṇūpāyotiādinā –
住所、行处、谈论、人、食物、时节——于此六者,应回避不适的。
应亲近七种适合的,如此践行者,
安止定并非短时间内便能证得,对任何人都是一样的。」(清净论1.59)——
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Āvāso gocaro bhassaṃ, puggalo bhojanaṃ utu; Iriyāpathoti sattete, asappāye vivajjaye. ‘‘Sappāye satta sevetha, evañhi paṭipajjato; Na cireneva kālena, hoti kassaci appanā’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.59) –
如上所说,简要阐明守护的方法。此处详述如下:若比丘住于某住所时,未生的相不生起,或已生的相坏灭,未现前的念不现前,未得定的心不得定,此即不合适。若相生起且稳固,念现前,心得定,此即合适。因此,若一座寺院有多处住所,应在每一住所各住三日,于其心得专一之处便应安住。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ vuttaṃ rakkhaṇavidhiṃ saṅkhepato vibhāveti. Tatrāyaṃ vitthāro – yasmiṃ āvāse vasantassa anuppannaṃ vā nimittaṃ nuppajjati, uppannaṃ vā vinassati, anupaṭṭhitā ca sati na upaṭṭhāti, asamāhitañca cittaṃ na samādhiyati, ayaṃ asappāyo. Yattha nimittaṃ uppajjati ceva thāvarañca hoti, sati upaṭṭhāti, cittaṃ samādhiyati, ayaṃ sappāyo. Tasmā yasmiṃ vihāre bahū āvāsā honti, tattha ekamekasmiṃ tīṇi tīṇi divasāni vasitvā yatthassa cittaṃ ekaggaṃ hoti, tattha vasitabbaṃ.
行处村庄,若在住所的北方或南方,距离不太远,在一由旬半的范围内,而且容易获得资具、比丘众具足,这即是合适的;反之则不合适。显示巴利原文
Gocaragāmo pana yo senāsanato uttarena vā dakkhiṇena vā nātidūre diyaḍḍhakosabbhantare hoti sulabhasampannabhikkho, so sappāyo, viparīto asappāyo.
言说:摄属于三十二种畜生论者,为不适宜,因为那会导致禅相消失。依止十论事而说者,则为适宜,但亦应适度而说。显示巴利原文
Bhassanti dvattiṃsatiracchānakathāpariyāpannaṃ asappāyaṃ. Tañhissa nimittantaradhānāya saṃvattati. Dasakathāvatthunissitaṃ sappāyaṃ, tampimattāya bhāsitabbaṃ.
人:若有人不沉溺于畜生论,具足戒等功德,依止此人,心未得定者能得定,已得定者更为坚固,如此之人便是适合的。若有人多谈畜生论、偏重身体健壮,则为不适合。因为他就像将泥团投入清水,令水污浊;依止这种人,禅定便会毁坏,犹如住于山顶寺院的沙弥之例,更不必说禅相了。显示巴利原文
Puggalopi atiracchānakathiko sīlādiguṇasampanno, yaṃ nissāya asamāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ samādhiyati, samāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ thirataraṃ hoti, evarūpo sappāyo. Kāyadaḷhībahulo pana tiracchānakathiko asappāyo. So hi taṃ kaddamodakamiva acchaṃ udakaṃ malīnameva karoti, tādisañca āgamma koṭapabbatavāsīdaharasseva samāpatti vinassati, pageva nimittaṃ.
食物:甜味对某些人适合,酸味对某些人适合。时节:寒冷对某些人适合,炎热对某些人适合。因此,凡受用某种食物或时节时,令身心安乐,未得定之心得定,已得定之心更为坚固,则该食物、该时节即为适合。其余食物、其余时节,则为不适合。显示巴利原文
Bhojanaṃ pana kassaci madhuraṃ, kassaci ambilaṃ sappāyaṃ hoti. Utupi kassaci sīto, kassaci uṇho sappāyo hoti. Tasmā yaṃ bhojanaṃ vā utuṃ vā sevantassa phāsu hoti, asamāhitaṃ vā cittaṃ samādhiyati, samāhitaṃ vā thirataraṃ hoti. Taṃ bhojanaṃ, so ca utu sappāyo. Itaraṃ bhojanaṃ, itaro ca utu asappāyo.
在威仪方面:有些人适合经行,有些人适合卧、立、坐中的某一种。因此,应当如同观察住所那样,用三天时间观察:在哪种威仪下,未得定的心能得定,已得定的心更坚固,这种威仪便是适合的,其他则不适合。应如此了知。像这样,避开这七种不适合的威仪,亲近适合的。能如此修习并多加修习者,不久之后便能获得安止定。显示巴利原文
Iriyāpathesupi kassaci caṅkamo sappāyo hoti, kassaci sayanaṭṭhānanisajjānaṃ aññataro. Tasmā taṃ āvāsaṃ viya tīṇi divasāni upaparikkhitvā yasmiṃ iriyāpathe asamāhitaṃ cittaṃ samādhiyati, samāhitaṃ vā thirataraṃ hoti, so sappāyo, itaro asappāyoti veditabbo. Iti imaṃ sattavidhaṃ asappāyaṃ vajjetvā sappāyaṃ sevitabbaṃ. Evaṃ paṭipannassa hi nimittāsevanabahulassa na cireneva kālena hoti kassaci appanā.
然而,如果有人这样修行后仍不得成就,那就应当修习十种安止善巧。为说明这一点,故说“净洁所依”等。其中,“净洁所依”是指令内外所依变得清净。当他的头发、指甲、体毛过长,或身上沾满汗垢时,内在所依便不清净、不纯净。当他的衣服破旧、污秽、发臭,或住处肮脏时,外在所依便不清净、不纯净。因为当内外所依不清净时,依之而生起的心与心所中,智慧也不清净,如同依靠不净的灯盏、灯芯和灯油所生起的灯火一般。以不清净的智慧观察诸行,诸行便不清晰;致力于业处者,其业处也不会增长、增广、广大。反之,当内外所依清净时,依之而生起的心与心所中,智慧也清净,如同依靠清净的灯盏、灯芯和灯油所生起的灯火一般。以清净的智慧观察诸行,诸行便清晰;致力于业处者,其业处也会增长、增广、广大。显示巴利原文
Yassa pana evampi paṭipajjato na hoti, tena dasavidhaṃ appanākosallaṃ sampādetabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘vatthuvisadakiriyā’’tiādimāha. Tattha (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.385; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.118; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.232; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.418) vitthuvisadakiriyā nāma ajjhattikabāhirānaṃ vatthūnaṃ visadabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Yadā hissa kesanakhalomāni dīghāni honti, sarīraṃ vā sedamalaggahitaṃ, tadā ajjhattikaṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Yadā panassa cīvaraṃ jiṇṇaṃ kiliṭṭhaṃ duggandhaṃ hoti, senāsanaṃ vā uklāpaṃ, tadā bāhiraṃ vatthu avisadaṃ hoti aparisuddhaṃ. Ajjhattikabāhire hi vatthumhi avisade uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi aparisuddhaṃ hoti aparisuddhāni dīpakapallikavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Aparisuddhena ca ñāṇena saṅkhāre sammasato saṅkhārāpi avibhūtā honti, kammaṭṭhānamanuyuñjato kammaṭṭhānampi vuddhiṃ viruḷhiṃ vepullaṃ na gacchati. Visade pana ajjhattikabāhire vatthumhi uppannesu cittacetasikesu ñāṇampi visadaṃ hoti parisuddhāni dīpakapallikavaṭṭitelāni nissāya uppannadīpasikhāya obhāso viya. Parisuddhena ca ñāṇena saṅkhāre sammasato saṅkhārāpi vibhūtāhonti, kammaṭṭhānamanuyuñjato kammaṭṭhānampi vuddhiṃ viruḷhiṃ vepullaṃ gacchati.
所谓诸根平衡成就,是指令信等诸根达到平衡。如果他的信根强而其余诸根弱,那么精进根便不能执行策励的作用,念根不能执行现前的作用,定根不能执行不散乱的作用,慧根不能执行照见的作用。因此,应当以观察法之自性等方式,对于因如理作意而变得强盛的信根,用不如理作意来减弱它。在此,可以跋迦梨长老的故事为例。然而,若精进根过强,则信根便不能执行胜解的作用,其余诸根也不能执行各自的作用。因此,应当借助修习轻安等来减弱它。在此,可以举二十亿耳长老的故事。同样地,应当知道,在其他诸根中,如果一根过强,其余诸根便无法胜任各自的作用。显示巴利原文
Indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā nāma saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ samabhāvakaraṇaṃ. Sace hissa saddhindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, itarāni mandāni, tato vīriyindriyaṃ paggahakiccaṃ, satindriyaṃ upaṭṭhānakiccaṃ, samādhindriyaṃ avikkhepakiccaṃ, paññindriyaṃ dassanakiccaṃ kātuṃ na sakkoti. Tasmā taṃ dhammasabhāvapaccavekkhaṇena vā yathā vā manasikaroto balavaṃ jātaṃ, tathā amanasikārena hāpetabbaṃ. Vakkalittheravatthu cettha nidassanaṃ. Sace pana vīriyindriyaṃ balavaṃ hoti, atha neva saddhindriyaṃ adhimokkhakiccaṃ kātuṃ sakkoti, na itarāni itarakiccabhedaṃ. Tasmā taṃ passaddhādibhāvanāya hāpetabbaṃ. Tatrāpi soṇattheravatthu dassetabbaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi ekassa balavabhāve sati itaresaṃ attano kiccesu asamatthatā veditabbā.
在此,特别赞叹信与慧、定与精进的平衡。因为信强而慧弱之人,会有盲目的净信,对不应信处生信;慧强而信弱之人,会倾向于狡诈,如同由药物引发的疾病一般难以治疗。二者平衡时,则唯对真实应信之处生信。再者,定强而精进弱时,由于定属于懈怠的一方,懈怠便会压倒;精进强而定弱时,由于精进属于掉举的一方,掉举便会压倒。然而,定与精进结合时,便不会陷入懈怠;精进与定结合时,便不会陷入掉举。因此,二者应达到平衡,唯有二者平衡才能生起安止。此外,对于以定为业处者,强信也是合适的,因为如此信解、确信,将能证得安止。在定与慧之中,对于以定为业处者,一境性强是合适的,因为如此他能证得安止;对于以观为业处者,慧强是合适的,因为如此他能通达诸法之相。然而,二者平衡时也能生起安止。至于念,则在一切处都适合强而有力。因为念能守护心,使其不因属于掉举一方的信、精进、慧而堕入掉举,也不因属于懈怠一方的定而堕入懈怠。因此,念如同盐在所有菜肴中、如同全能大臣在一切国王事务中一般,在一切处都是必需的。显示巴利原文
Visesato panettha saddhāpaññānaṃ samādhivīriyānañca samataṃ pasaṃsanti. Balavasaddho hi mandapañño mudhappasanno hoti, avatthusmiṃ pasīdati. Balavapañño mandasaddho kerāṭikapakkhaṃ bhajati, bhesajjasamuṭṭhito viya rogo atekiccho hoti. Ubhinnaṃ samatāya vatthusmiṃyeva pasīdati. Balavasamādhiṃ pana mandavīriyaṃ samādhissa kosajjapakkhattā kosajjaṃ abhibhavati, balavavīriyaṃ mandasamādhiṃvīriyassa uddhaccapakkhattā uddhaccaṃ abhibhavati. Samādhi pana vīriyena saṃyojito kosajje patituṃ na labhati, vīriyaṃ samādhinā saṃyojitaṃ uddhacce patituṃ na labhati. Tasmā tadubhayaṃ samaṃ kātabbaṃ. Ubhayasamatāya hi appanā hoti. Apica samādhikammikassa balavatīpi saddhā vaṭṭati. Evañhi saddahanto okappento appanaṃ pāpuṇissati, samādhipaññāsu pana samādhikammikassa ekaggatā balavatī vaṭṭati. Evañhi so appanaṃ pāpuṇāti, vipassanākammikassa paññā balavatī vaṭṭati . Evañhi so lakkhaṇappaṭivedhaṃ pāpuṇāti, ubhinnaṃ pana samatāyapi appanā hotiyeva. Sati pana sabbattha balavatī vaṭṭati. Sati hi cittaṃ uddhaccapakkhikānaṃ saddhāvīriyapaññānaṃ vasena uddhaccapātato kosajjapakkhena ca samādhinā kosajjapātato rakkhati. Tasmā sā loṇadhūpanaṃ viya sabbabyañjanesu, sabbakammikaamacco viya ca sabbarājakiccesu sabbattha icchitabbā.
所谓相善巧,是指对于地遍等的心一境性之相,于未作时令其生起的善巧,于已作时令其修习的善巧,以及于修习已得时令其守护的善巧,这便是此处所指。显示巴利原文
Nimittakusalatā nāma pathavīkasiṇādikassa cittekaggatānimittassa akatassa karaṇakosallaṃ, katassa bhāvanākosallaṃ, bhāvanāya laddhassa rakkhaṇakosallañca, taṃ idha adhippetaṃ.
如何在应抑制心时抑制心呢?当他的心因过度精进等而掉举时,此时不应修习择法觉支等三觉支,而应修习轻安觉支等三觉支。对此,世尊曾这样说(相应部5.234)——显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhāti? Yadāssa accāraddhavīriyatādīhi uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo tayo abhāvetvā passaddhisambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā (saṃ. ni. 5.234) –
诸比丘,犹如有人想扑灭一个大火堆,他往其中投入干草、干牛粪、干柴,用口吹风,却不撒尘土。诸比丘,那人能扑灭那个大火堆吗?
“不能,尊者。”
“正是如此,诸比丘,当心生掉举时,那不是修习择法觉支的时机,不是修习精进觉支……不是修习喜觉支的时机。为什么呢?诸比丘,因为掉举的心,藉由这些法难以得定。显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetukāmo assa, so tattha sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya, sukkhāni ca gomayāni pakkhipeyya, sukkhāni ca kaṭṭhāni pakkhipeyya, mukhavātañca dadeyya, na ca paṃsukena okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso taṃ mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetunti. No hetaṃ, bhante. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yasmiṃ samaye uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, akālo tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Akālo vīriya…pe… akālo pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Uddhataṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi duvūpasamayaṃ hoti.
诸比丘,当心生掉举时,那正是修习轻安觉支的时机,是修习定觉支……是修习舍觉支的时机。为什么呢?诸比丘,因为掉举的心,藉由这些法容易平息。
诸比丘,犹如有人想扑灭一个大火堆,他往其中投入湿草、湿牛粪、湿柴,用水喷雾,并撒尘土。诸比丘,那人能扑灭那个大火堆吗?
“能,尊者。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiṃ kho, bhikkhave, samaye uddhataṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Kālo samādhi…pe… kālo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Uddhataṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi suvūpasamayaṃ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetukāmo assa, so tattha allāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya, allāni ca gomayāni pakkhipeyya, allāni ca kaṭṭhāni pakkhipeyya, udakavātañca dadeyya, paṃsukena ca okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso taṃ mahantaṃ aggikkhandhaṃ nibbāpetunti. Evaṃ, bhante’’ti.
于此,应依各自的食来了知轻安觉支等的修习。这是世尊所说:显示巴利原文
Ettha ca yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena passaddhisambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
诸比丘,有身轻安与心轻安,于此多修习如理作意,即是未生轻安觉支生起之食,亦是已生轻安觉支增长、广大、修习、圆满之食。同样,诸比丘,有止相与不散乱相,于此多修习如理作意,即是未生定觉支生起之食,亦是已生定觉支增长、广大、修习、圆满之食。同样,诸比丘,有与舍觉支相应之法,于此多修习如理作意,即是未生舍觉支生起之食,亦是已生舍觉支增长、广大、修习、圆满之食。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, kāyappassaddhi cittappassaddhi, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya , uppannassa vā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattati. Tathā atthi, bhikkhave, samathanimittaṃ abyagganimittaṃ, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattati…pe… tathā atthi, bhikkhave, upekkhāsambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.232).
其中,正如他先前已生起轻安等,记取彼相后,为令它们生起而转起的作意,在三处中皆名为如理作意。'止相'即是'止'的同义语;依不散乱之义,它亦名'不散乱相'。显示巴利原文
Tattha yathāssa passaddhiādayo uppannapubbā, taṃ ākāraṃ sallakkhetvā tesaṃ uppādanavasena pavattamanasikārova tīsu padesupi yonisomanasikāro nāma. Samathanimittanti ca samathassevetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, avikkhepaṭṭhena ca tasseva abyagganimittanti.
复次,有七法能令轻安觉支生起:受用殊胜饮食、受用适宜气候、受用适宜威仪、行于中道、远离身躁动者、亲近身轻安者、心向于彼。显示巴利原文
Apica satta dhammā passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – paṇītabhojanasevanatā, utusukhasevanatā, iriyāpathasukhasevanatā, majjhattappayogatā, sāraddhakāyapuggalaparivajjanatā, passaddhakāyapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti.
有十一法能令定觉支生起:依处清净、善巧于相、平衡诸根、适时抑心、适时策心、以信与悚惧激励无喜乐之心、于平等转起之心行舍、远离不得定之人、亲近得定之人、观察禅定与解脱、心倾向于彼。显示巴利原文
Ekādasa dhammā samādhisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – vatthuvisadatā, nimittakusalatā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanatā, samaye cittassa niggahaṇatā, samaye cittassa paggahaṇatā, nirassādassa cittassa saddhāsaṃvegavasena sampahaṃsanatā, samappavattassa ajjhupekkhanatā, asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanatā, samāhitapuggalasevanatā, jhānavimokkhapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti.
有五法能令舍觉支生起:于有情行中舍、于诸行行中舍、远离于有情与诸行生执著之人、亲近于有情与诸行行中舍之人、心倾向于彼。如此以这些方式令这些法生起者,即名修习轻安觉支等。如是,于应抑心之时,即于彼时抑心。显示巴利原文
Pañca dhammā upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – sattamajjhattatā, saṅkhāramajjhattatā, sattasaṅkhārakelāyanapuggalaparivajjanatā, sattasaṅkhāramajjhattapuggalasevanatā, tadadhimuttatāti. Iti imehi ākārehi ete dhamme uppādento passaddhisambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti nāma. Evaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ niggaṇhāti.
又,如何于应策心之时,即于彼时策心?当彼之心因过度懈怠等而沉滞时,则不修习轻安觉支等三支,而修习择法觉支等。此为世尊所说(《相应部》5.234)——显示巴利原文
Kathañca yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggaṇhāti? Yadāssa atisithilavīriyatādīhi cittaṃ līnaṃ hoti, tadā passaddhisambojjhaṅgādayo tayo abhāvetvā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā (saṃ. ni. 5.234) –
诸比丘,譬如有人欲点燃小火,他将湿草投入其中……乃至……又撒上尘土,此人能否点燃那小火呢?不能,尊者。正是如此,诸比丘,当心沉滞之时,彼时并非修习轻安觉支之时,并非修习定觉支……乃至……并非修习舍觉支之时。何以故?诸比丘,沉滞之心,以这些法难以策励。显示巴利原文
‘‘Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletukāmo assa, so tattha allāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya…pe… paṃsukena ca okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso taṃ parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletunti. No hetaṃ, bhante. Evameva kho, bhikkhave, yasmiṃ samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti. Akālo tasmiṃ samaye passaddhisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Akālo samādhi…pe… akālo upekkhāsambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Līnaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi dusamuṭṭhāpayaṃ hoti.
然而,诸比丘,当心沉滞之时,彼时正是修习择法觉支之时,正是修习精进觉支……乃至……正是修习喜觉支之时。何以故?诸比丘,沉滞之心,以这些法易于策励。诸比丘,譬如有人欲点燃小火,他将干草投入其中……乃至……不撒尘土,此人能否点燃那小火呢?能,尊者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Yasmiñca kho, bhikkhave, samaye līnaṃ cittaṃ hoti, kālo tasmiṃ samaye dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya, kālo vīriya…pe… kālo pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhāvanāya. Taṃ kissa hetu? Līnaṃ, bhikkhave, cittaṃ, taṃ etehi dhammehi susamuṭṭhāpayaṃ hoti. Seyyathāpi, bhikkhave, puriso parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletukāmo assa, so tattha sukkhāni ceva tiṇāni pakkhipeyya…pe… na ca paṃsukena okireyya, bhabbo nu kho so puriso taṃ parittaṃ aggiṃ ujjāletunti. Evaṃ, bhante’’ti.
于此,亦应知依其各自的食而修习择法觉支等。此乃世尊所说(《相应部》5.232)——显示巴利原文
Etthāpi yathāsakaṃ āhāravasena dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādīnaṃ bhāvanā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā (saṃ. ni. 5.232) –
诸比丘,有善与不善法、有罪与无罪法、劣与胜法、黑与白相对之法,对此多加修习如理作意,便是令未生的择法觉支生起之食,也是令已生的择法觉支增长、广大、修习、圆满之食。同样,诸比丘,有发勤界、出离界、勇猛界,对此多加修习如理作意,便是令未生的精进觉支生起之食,也是令已生的精进觉支增长、广大、修习、圆满之食。同样,诸比丘,有与喜觉支相应之法,对此多加修习如理作意,便是令未生的喜觉支生起之食,也是令已生的喜觉支增长、广大、修习、圆满之食。显示巴利原文
‘‘Atthi, bhikkhave, kusalākusalā dhammā sāvajjānavajjā dhammā hīnappaṇītā dhammā kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattati. Tathā atthi, bhikkhave, ārambhadhātu nikkamadhātu parakkamadhātu, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattati. Tathā atthi, bhikkhave, pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammā, tattha yonisomanasikārabahulīkāro ayamāhāro anuppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya, uppannassa vā pītisambojjhaṅgassa bhiyyobhāvāya vepullāya bhāvanāya pāripūriyā saṃvattatī’’ti.
其中,依通达自性相与共相之力而转起的作意,于善等法中称为如理作意。依发勤界等生起之力而转起的作意,于发勤界等中称为如理作意。在此,发勤界是指最初的策励精进。出离界因从懈怠中出离,故较前者更强。勇猛界因次第趣向更高之处,故较前者更强。喜觉支相应法,这是喜的异名,能令其生起的作意也称为如理作意。显示巴利原文
Tattha sabhāvasāmaññalakkhaṇappaṭivedhavasena pavattamanasikāro kusalādīsu yonisomanasikāro nāma. Ārambhadhātuādīnaṃ uppādavasena pavattamanasikāro ārambhadhātuādīsu yonisomanasikāro nāma. Tattha ārambhadhātūti paṭhamavīriyaṃ vuccati. Nikkamadhātūti kosajjato nikkhantattā tato balavataraṃ. Parakkamadhātūti paraṃ paraṃ ṭhānaṃ akkamanato tatopi balavataraṃ. Pītisambojjhaṅgaṭṭhānīyā dhammāti pana pītiyā evetaṃ nāmaṃ, tassāpi uppādakamanasikāro yonisomanasikāro nāma.
再者,有七种法能引生择法觉支:遍请问、清净诸事、平衡诸根、远离慧劣之人、亲近具慧之人、省察深妙的智行,以及心倾向于彼。显示巴利原文
Apica satta dhammā dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – paripucchakatā, vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanā, duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā, paññavantapuggalasevanā, gambhīrañāṇacariyapaccavekkhaṇā, tadadhimuttatāti.
有十一法能导致精进觉支的生起:省察恶趣等怖畏;见依精进而证得世间与出世间殊胜利益之功德;省察‘佛陀、独觉佛及大弟子们所行之道,我应当行,而懈怠者不能行’如此之行道;为令施者得大果报而恭敬所受之食;省察‘我之导师赞叹精进,其教诫不可违越,且于我大有利益,唯以修行受供方为真供养,非由余途’如此导师之伟大;省察‘我应受持名为正法的伟大遗产,而懈怠者不能受持’如此遗产之伟大;以光明想、作意、变换威仪、亲近空旷处等去除昏沉睡眠;远离懈怠之人;亲近已发精进之人;省察正勤;以及心倾向于此。显示巴利原文
Ekādasa dhammā vīriyasambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – apāyādibhayapaccavekkhaṇatā, vīriyāyattalokiyalokuttaravisesādhigamānisaṃsadassitā, ‘‘buddhapaccekabuddhamahaāsāvakehi gatamaggo mayā gantabbo, so ca na sakkā kusītena gantu’’nti evaṃ gamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇatā, dāyakānaṃ mahapphalatākaraṇena piṇḍāpacāyanatā, ‘‘vīriyārambhassa vaṇṇavādī me satthā, so ca anatikkamanīyasāsano, amhākañca bahūpakāro, paṭipattiyā ca pūjiyamāno pūjito hoti, na itarathā’’ti evaṃ satthu mahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, ‘‘saddhammasaṅkhātaṃ me mahādāyajjaṃ gahetabbaṃ, tañca na sakkā kusītena gahetu’’nti evaṃ dāyajjamahattapaccavekkhaṇatā, ālokasaññāmanasikārairiyāpathaparivattanaabbhokāsasevanādīhi thinamiddhavinodanatā, kusītapuggalaparivajjanatā, āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanatā, sammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti.
有十一法能导致喜觉支的生起:佛随念、法随念、僧随念、戒随念、舍随念、天随念、寂止随念;远离粗涩之人;亲近温和之人;省察能生净信之经典;以及心倾向于此。如此,以这些方式令这些法生起者,即名为修习择法觉支等。如是,当心应策励时,即于其时策励心。显示巴利原文
Ekādasa dhammā pītisambojjhaṅgassa uppādāya saṃvattanti – buddhānussati, dhammasaṅghasīlacāgadevatānussati, upasamānussati, lūkhapuggalaparivajjanatā, siniddhapuggalasevanatā, pasādanīyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇatā, tadadhimuttatāti. Iti imehi ākārehi ete dhamme uppādento dhammavicayasambojjhaṅgādayo bhāveti nāma. Evaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggahetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ paggaṇhāti.
如何应在心应喜悦时,即令心喜悦?当他的心因慧的运用薄弱,或因未证得寂止之乐而变得乏味时,他便以省察八种悚惧事而令心悚惧。所谓八种悚惧事:生、老、病、死四种,恶趣之苦为第五,过去轮回之苦根,未来轮回之苦根,现在求食之苦根。又以随念佛、法、僧的功德令心生净信。如此,即于应令心喜悦之时,令心喜悦。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃseti? Yadāssa paññāpayogamandatāya vā upasamasukhānadhigamena vā nirassādaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadā naṃ aṭṭhasaṃvegavatthupaccavekkhaṇena saṃvejeti. Aṭṭha saṃvegavatthūni nāma jātijarābyādhimaraṇāni cattāri, apāyadukkhaṃ pañcamaṃ, atīte vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, anāgate vaṭṭamūlakaṃ dukkhaṃ, paccuppanne āhārapariyeṭṭhimūlakaṃ dukkhanti. Buddhadhammasaṅghaguṇānussaraṇena cassa pasādaṃ janeti. Evaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃsetabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ sampahaṃseti.
如何于应令心舍置之时,即于其时令心舍置?当他如此修行时,心达到不沉滞、不掉举、不无味、于所缘等持而转、入于奢摩他之道,那时他便于策励、抑制与令喜悦等事中无所作为,犹如车夫对平稳而行的马匹。如此,于应令心舍置之时,即于其时令心舍置。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati? Yadāssa evaṃ paṭipajjato alīnaṃ anuddhataṃ anirassādaṃ ārammaṇe samappavattaṃ samathavīthippaṭipannaṃ cittaṃ hoti, tadā tassa paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu abyāpāraṃ āpajjati sārathi viya ca samappavattesu assesu. Evaṃ yasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhitabbaṃ, tasmiṃ samaye cittaṃ ajjhupekkhati.
“远离不具定之人”,即远离那些先前未入出离行道、从事众多事务、心散乱之人。“亲近具定之人”,即时时亲近那些已入出离行道、得定之人。“倾向于彼”,即倾向于定,意为尊重定、趣向定、朝向定、倾向定。如此,应成就此十种安止善巧。因此说:“不舍此十种安止善巧者”。其中,能令安止善巧成就的方法,那十种方法即是安止善巧,或由彼所生的智。如此成就此十种安止善巧者,于已得之相,安止便得生起。此即所说——显示巴利原文
Asamāhitapuggalaparivajjanā nāma nekkhammapaṭipadaṃ anāruḷhapubbānaṃ anekakiccappasutānaṃ vikkhittahadayānaṃ puggalānaṃ ārakā pariccāgo. Samāhitapuggalasevanā nāma nekkhammapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannānaṃ samādhilābhīnaṃ puggalānaṃ kālena kālaṃ upasaṅkamanaṃ. Tadadhimuttatā nāma samādhimuttatā, samādhigarusamādhininnasamādhipoṇasamādhipabbhāratāti attho. Evametaṃ dasavidhaṃ appanākosallaṃ sampādetabbaṃ. Tenāha – ‘‘imāni dasa appanākosallāni avijahantenā’’ti. Tattha yena vidhinā appanāya kusalo hoti, so dasavidhopi vidhi appanākosallaṃ tannibbattaṃ vā ñāṇaṃ, evametaṃ dasavidhaṃ appanākosallaṃ sampādentassa paṭiladdhanimittasmiṃ appanā uppajjati. Vuttañhetaṃ –
‘‘Evañhi sampādayato, appanākosallaṃ imaṃ; Paṭiladdhe nimittasmiṃ, appanā sampavattatī’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.67);
“应作努力”:即使已成就安止善巧的人,若安止仍未生起,也不应舍弃业处的修习;应观察蜜蜂于微尘等中的活动方式,使心从沉滞与掉举中解脱,以平等精进,一再努力。此即所说。显示巴利原文
Yogo karaṇīyoti appanākosallaṃ sampādentassapi yadi appanā na hoti, tena kammaṭṭhānānuyogaṃ avijahitvā reṇuādīsu madhukarādīnaṃ pavatti ākāraṃ sallakkhetvā līnuddhatabhāvehi mānasaṃ mocetvā vīriyasamataṃ yojentena punappunaṃ yogo kātabbo. Vuttañhetaṃ –
如此行道者,若其安止仍未转起;
因此,智者不应舍弃精勤,应当精进努力。
若舍弃了正精进,所谓的青年人——
即使微小的殊胜,也绝无可能获得。
因此,智者观察心的转起方式,
应再三运用精进的平衡。
即使有少许沉滞,亦应策励其心;
制止过度策励后,应使其平衡转起。
犹如在微尘中、莲叶上、线中、船中、管中,
蜜蜂等众的活动,已善加描述。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Evañhi paṭipannassa, sace sā nappavattati; Tathāpi na jahe yogaṃ, vāyametheva paṇḍito. ‘‘Hitvā hi sammavāyāmaṃ, visesaṃ nāma māṇavo; Adhigacche parittampi, ṭhānametaṃ na vijjati. ‘‘Cittappavattiākāraṃ, tasmā sallakkhayaṃ budho; Samataṃ vīriyasseva, yojayetha punappunaṃ. ‘‘Īsakampi layaṃ yantaṃ, paggaṇhetheva mānasaṃ; Accāraddhaṃ nisedhetvā, samameva pavattaye. ‘‘Reṇumhi uppaladale, sutte nāvāya nāḷiyā; Yathā madhukarādīnaṃ, pavatti sammavaṇṇitā. ‘‘Līnauddhatabhāvehi, mocayitvāna sabbaso; Evaṃ nimittābhimukhaṃ, mānasaṃ paṭipādaye’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.67);
正如一个不熟练的采蜜人,知道‘某棵树上花开了’后,以迅猛的速度冲过去,越过了那棵树,再折返回来时,花粉已散尽才到达;另一个不熟练的人以缓慢的速度冲过去,到达时花粉也已耗尽;而熟练的人则以均匀的速度冲过去,轻松地到达花丛,随心所欲地取足花粉,制成蜂蜜,享用蜂蜜。又如,当学生们在水中莲叶上练习手术刀技艺时,一个不熟练的人急速下刀,要么把莲叶切成两半,要么把莲叶压入水中;另一个不熟练的人因为害怕切破或压沉,连用刀触碰都不敢;而熟练的人则力道均匀,在那里展示刀法,成为技艺精湛者后,在类似的场合施行手术,获得报酬。又如,当国王宣布‘谁能取来四肘长的蜘蛛丝,就能得四千钱’时,一个不熟练的人用力拉扯蜘蛛丝,处处把它扯断;另一个不熟练的人因为害怕扯断,连用手触碰都不敢;而熟练的人则从末端开始,均匀用力把它绕在小棍上取来,获得报酬。再如,一个不熟练的舵手在强风中张满帆,让船冲向他方;另一个不熟练的人在微风时就降下帆,让船停滞不前;而熟练的人则在微风时张帆,在强风时收半帆,平安抵达想去的地方。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi acheko madhukaro ‘‘asukasmiṃ rukkhe pupphaṃ pupphita’’nti ñatvā tikkhena vegena pakkhando taṃ atikkamitvā paṭinivattento khīṇe reṇumhi sampāpuṇāti, aparo acheko mandena javena pakkhando khīṇeyeva sampāpuṇāti, cheko pana samena javena pakkhando sukhena puppharāsiṃ sampatvā yāvadicchakaṃ reṇuṃ ādāya madhuṃ sampādetvā madhuṃ anubhavati, yathā ca sallakattaantevāsikesu udakathālagate uppalapatte satthakammaṃ sikkhantesu eko acheko vegena satthaṃ pātento uppalapattaṃ dvidhā vā chindati, udake vā paveseti, aparo acheko chijjanapavesanabhayā satthakena phusitumpi na visahati, cheko pana samena payogena tattha satthapadaṃ dassetvā pariyodātasippo hutvā tathārūpesu ṭhānesu kammaṃ katvā lābhaṃ labhati, yathā ca ‘‘yo catubyāmappamāṇaṃ makkaṭakasuttaṃ āharati, so cattāri sahassāni labhatī’’ti raññā vutte eko achekapuriso vegena makkaṭakasuttaṃ ākaḍḍhanto tahiṃ tahiṃ chindatiyeva, aparo acheko chedanabhayā hatthena phusitumpi na visahati, cheko pana koṭito paṭṭhāya samena payogena daṇḍake veṭhetvā āharitvā lābhaṃ labhati, yathā ca acheko niyāmako balavavāte laṅkāraṃ pūrento nāvaṃ videsaṃ pakkhandāpeti, aparo acheko mandavāte laṅkāraṃ oropento nāvaṃ tattheva ṭhapeti, cheko pana mandavāte pūretvā balavavāte aḍḍhalaṅkāraṃ katvā sotthinā icchitaṭṭhānaṃ pāpuṇāti, yathā ca ‘‘yo telena achaḍḍento nāḷiṃ pūreti, so lābhaṃ labhatī’’ti ācariyena antevāsikānaṃ vutte eko acheko lābhaluddho vegena pūrento telaṃ chaḍḍeti, aparo acheko telachaḍḍanabhayā āsiñcitumpi na visahati, cheko pana samena payogena pūretvā lābhaṃ labhati, evameva eko bhikkhu uppanne nimitte ‘‘sīghameva appanaṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti gāḷhaṃ vīriyaṃ karoti, tassa cittaṃ accāraddhavīriyattā uddhacce patati, so na sakkoti appanaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Eko accāraddhavīriyatāya dosaṃ disvā ‘‘kiṃ dāni me appanāyā’’ti vīriyaṃ hāpeti, tassa cittaṃ atilīnavīriyattā kosajje patati, sopi na sakkoti appanaṃ pāpuṇituṃ. Yo pana īsakampi līnaṃ līnabhāvato, uddhataṃ uddhaccato mocetvā samena payogena nimittābhimukhaṃ pavatteti, so appanaṃ pāpuṇāti, tādisena bhavitabbaṃ.
现为显示如此修行者安止定的生起,而说“当他如此精勤时”等语。其中,“遍作”等,是依未把握禅相而说;若依已把握禅相,则无差别地通用于一切,皆用同一名称。因为这些心对安止定来说,都是遍作、都是准备,故称“遍作”。犹如村落等的附近区域被称为“村界”“家界”,同样,它们邻近安止定或行于其近处,故亦称“近行”。又因它们随顺之前的遍作与之后的安止定,故亦称“随顺”。其中的最后一个,因镇伏狭小种姓、修习广大种姓,故亦称“种姓”。所谓“种姓”,意即“它保护(所缘)”。“狭小”是指正在进行的、以确定一境为所缘的欲界言说与智慧,因彼所缘保护它们,故为狭小种姓。正如智慧没有所缘的义便不能生起,言说没有所称的义亦不能生起,所以那个所缘保护它们,故说“它保护”。此狭小种姓应视为欲贪的境域,是欲界诸法的特有形态,与广大、无上相背离。对于广大种姓,亦应同样理解其义。如此,因能镇伏这些狭小种姓,并修习、生起广大种姓。显示巴利原文
Idāni evaṃ paṭipannassa appanāpavattiṃ dassento ‘‘tassevaṃ anuyuttassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha paṭhamaṃ parikammantiādi aggahitaggahaṇena vuttaṃ, gahitaggahaṇena pana avisesena sabbesaṃ sabbā samaññā. Sabbānipi hi appanāya parikammattā paṭisaṅkhārakattā ‘‘parikammānī’’tipi, yathā gāmādīnaṃ āsannappadeso ‘‘gāmūpacāro gharūpacāro’’ti vuccati, evaṃ appanāya āsannattā samīpacārittā vā ‘‘upacārānī’’tipi, ito pubbe parikammānaṃ upari appanāya ca anulomanato ‘‘anulomānī’’tipi vuccanti. Yañcettha sabbantimaṃ, taṃ parittagottābhibhavanato mahaggatagottabhāvanato ca ‘‘gotrabhū’’tipi vuccati. Gaṃ tāyatīti hi gottaṃ, parittanti pavattamānaṃ abhidhānaṃ buddhiñca ekaṃsikavisayatāya rakkhatīti parittagottaṃ. Yathā hi buddhi ārammaṇabhūtena atthena vinā na vattati, evaṃ abhidhānaṃ abhidheyyabhūtena, tasmā so tāni tāyati rakkhatīti vuccati. Taṃ pana mahaggatānuttaravidhuraṃ kāmataṇhāya gocarabhūtaṃ kāmāvacaradhammānaṃ āveṇikarūpaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Mahaggatagottepi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Iti evarūpassa parittagottassa abhibhavanato mahaggatagottassa ca bhāvanato uppādanato antimaṃ ‘‘gotrabhū’’tipi vuccati. Catutthameva hi pañcamaṃ vāti khippābhiññadandhābhiññānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Khippābhiññassa hi catutthaṃ appeti, dandhābhiññassa pañcamaṃ. Kasmā pana catutthaṃ pañcamaṃ vā appeti, na chaṭṭhaṃ vā sattamaṃ vāti āha ‘‘āsannabhavaṅgapātattā’’ti. Yathā hi puriso chinnapapātābhimukho dhāvanto ṭhātukāmopi pariyante pādaṃ katvā ṭhātuṃ na sakkoti, papāte eva patati, evaṃ chaṭṭhaṃ vā sattamaṃ vā appetuṃ na sakkoti bhavaṅgassa āsannattā. Tasmā catutthapañcamesuyeva appanā hotīti veditabbā.
“前前善法对后后善法以习行缘为缘”(《发趣论》1.1.12),因作此说,故言“以习行缘,善法成为有力”。恰如未得习行的第一速行,因其弱故,不生种姓心;已得习行者,由于有力,第二或第三速行能生种姓心;如是,已得习行而有力故,第六与第七速行亦能生起──此是长老的意趣。故彼言:“是故第六或第七速行生起”。“那”指长老所说。“被驳斥”指因无经证、随顺经证及阿阇梨说为依,故斥为“此唯长老自见”而驳斥之。而“前前善法”这句经文,并不能决定性地证明由习行缘所得之力。何以故?未得习行的第一思亦能令现法受,已得习行的第二乃至第六思则为次第受。若第六、第七速行因速行力尽而弱,并非以习行缘有力,则第七速行思何以为生报受及无间受?此差别非由获得习行缘有力而来,唯依作用阶段之不同。作用阶段有初、中、后三种。其中,后阶段有决意思故,成为生报受等,非因有力,应作此见。又言:“因对结生为无间缘状态的异熟相续,以无间缘力而被如此造作故。”是故,第六显示巴利原文
‘‘Purimā purimā kusalā dhammā pacchimānaṃ pacchimānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ āsevanapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.12) vuttattā ‘‘āsevanapaccayena kusalā dhammā balavanto hontī’’ti āha. Yathā aladdhāsevanaṃ paṭhamaṃ javanaṃ dubbalattā gotrabhuṃ na uppādeti, laddhāsevanaṃ pana balavabhāvato dutiyaṃ vā tatiyaṃ vā gotrabhuṃ uppādeti, evaṃ laddhāsevanatāya balavabhāvato chaṭṭhampi sattamampi appetīti therassa adhippāyo. Tenāha – ‘‘tasmā chaṭṭhaṃ sattamaṃ vā appetī’’ti. Tanti therassa vacanaṃ. Paṭikkhittanti suttasuttānulomaācariyavādehi anupatthambhitattā ‘‘attanomatimattaṃ therasseta’’nti vatvā paṭikkhittaṃ. ‘‘Purimā purimā kusalā dhammā’’ti pana suttapadamakāraṇaṃ āsevanapaccayalābhassa balavabhāve anekantikattā. Tathā hi aladdhāsevanāpi paṭhamacetanā diṭṭhadhammavedanīyā hoti, laddhāsevanā dutiyacetanā yāva chaṭṭhacetanā aparāpariyavedanīyā. Yadi chaṭṭhaṃ sattamañca parikkhīṇajavattā dubbalaṃ, na āsevanapaccayena balavaṃ, kathaṃ sattamajavanacetanā upapajjavedanīyā ānantariyā ca hotīti? Nāyaṃ viseso āsevanapaccayalābhena balavappattiyā kiñcarahi kiriyāvatthāvisesato. Kiriyāvatthā hi ādimajjhapariyosānavasena tividhā. Tattha pariyosānāvatthāya sanniṭṭhāpakacetanābhāvena upapajjavedanīyāditā hoti, na balavabhāvenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Paṭisandhiyā anantarapaccayabhāvino vipākasantānassa anantarapaccayabhāvena tathā abhisaṅkhatattā’’ti ca vadanti, tasmā chaṭṭhasattamānaṃ papātābhimukhatāya parikkhīṇajavatā na sakkā nivāretuṃ. Pubbabhāgacittānīti tīṇi cattāri vā cittāni.
“在此”指在此身随观念处中。“欲得清净”指欲证得、欲入定。其中,应以随观与反转的方式欲证得,以随观的方式欲入定,应如此结合。“转向自在……乃至……得自在”在此,首先应知五种自在如此:从初禅出定后,当转向第一个寻时,截断有分而生起的转向心之后,即生起以寻为所缘的四或五个速行心,然后两个有分心,之后以伺为所缘的转向心,依前述方式生起速行心。如此,当于五禅支中能无间地驱使心时,他的转向自在即成就。而这种有两个有分间隔的、达到顶点的自在,见于世尊的双神变,或见于法将舍利弗等人在如此起身后生起更快速转向自在之时。然而,那种自在是短暂的、时间少的,不像导师的双神变那样有较长时间的持续。因此,那被说为声闻所不共的。从此以后,更快速的转向自在是没有的。显示巴利原文
Etthāti etissaṃ kāyānupassanāyaṃ. Pārisuddhiṃ pattukāmoti adhigantukāmo samāpajjitukāmo ca. Tattha sallakkhaṇāvivaṭṭanāvasena adhigantukāmo, sallakkhaṇavasena samāpajjitukāmoti yojetabbaṃ. Āvajjanasamāpajjana…pe… vasippattanti ettha evaṃ tāva pañca vasiyo veditabbā – paṭhamajjhānato vuṭṭhāya paṭhamaṃ vitakkaṃ āvajjayato bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā uppannāvajjanānantaraṃ vitakkārammaṇāneva cattāri pañca javanāni javanti, tato dve bhavaṅgāni, tato pana vicārārammaṇaṃ āvajjanaṃ vuttanayeneva javanānīti evaṃ pañcasu jhānaṅgesu yadā nirantaraṃ cittaṃ pesetuṃ sakkoti, athassa āvajjanavasī siddhā hoti. Ayaṃ pana bhavaṅgadvayantaritā matthakappattā vasī bhagavato yamakapāṭihāriye labbhati, aññesaṃ vā dhammasenāpatiādīnaṃ evarūpe uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya lahutaraṃ āvajjanavasīnibbattanakāle. Sā ca kho ittarā parittakālā, na satthu yamakapāṭihāriye viya ciratarappabandhavatī. Tathā hi taṃ sāvakehi asādhāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Ito paraṃ sīghatarā āvajjanavasī nāma natthi.
然而,如尊者大目犍连在调伏难陀乌巴难达龙王时那样,能迅速入定,即名入定自在。此处,在生起入定之欲后,当两个有分心生起时,随即截断有分,于转向心生起之后,能迅速入定的能力,即是入定自在。此种达于顶点的入定自在,见于导师的说法中,即针对此而说:“阿耆毗舍那,我就在那话语的结尾,就在那先前的定相中,令心内住、安歇、专一、入定,由此我常恒而住。”(《中部》1.387)因为自此以后,更迅捷的入定自在不复存在。显示巴利原文
Āyasmato pana mahāmoggallānassa nandopanandanāgarājadamane viya sīghaṃ samāpajjanasamatthatā samāpajjanavasī nāma. Ettha ca samāpajjitukāmatānantaraṃ dvīsu bhavaṅgesu uppannesu bhavaṅgaṃ upacchinditvā uppannāvajjanānantaraṃ samāpajjanaṃ sīghaṃ samāpajjanasamatthatā. Ayañca matthakappattā samāpajjanavasī satthu dhammadesanāyaṃ labbhati, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘so kho ahaṃ, aggivessana, tassāyeva kathāya pariyosāne tasmiṃyeva purimasmiṃ samādhinimitte ajjhattameva cittaṃ saṇṭhapemi sannisādemi ekodiṃ karomi samādahāmi, yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.387). Ito sīghatarā hi samāpajjanavasī nāma natthi.
能令禅那安住仅弹指间或十弹指间的能力,名为决意自在。同样,成为禅那具足者仅经弹指间或十弹指这样短暂的时间,便能从禅那出定的能力,名为出定自在。在此,有分心之生起,即是从禅那出定。于此,应知:如能通过前加行而决意“我将安住禅那仅此时间”,即是决意自在;同样,通过前加行而能出定,如“我将成为禅那具足者仅此时间,然后从禅那出定”,即是出定自在,这也称为等至出定善巧。而观察自在,已于转向自在中说过。因为那里的观察速行心就在转向心之后。从成就转向自在之时起,即应知观察自在亦已成就。显示巴利原文
Accharāmattaṃ vā dasaccharāmattaṃ vā khaṇaṃ jhānaṃ ṭhapetuṃ samatthatā adhiṭṭhānavasī nāma. Tatheva accharāmattaṃ vā dasaccharāmattaṃ vā lahukaṃ khaṇaṃ jhānasamaṅgī hutvā jhānato vuṭṭhātuṃ samatthatā vuṭṭhānavasī nāma. Bhavaṅgacittappavattiyeva hettha jhānato vuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Ettha ca yathā ‘‘ettakameva khaṇaṃ jhānaṃ ṭhapessāmī’’ti pubbaparikammavasena adhiṭṭhānasamatthatā adhiṭṭhānavasī, evaṃ ‘‘ettakameva khaṇaṃ jhānasamaṅgī hutvā jhānato vuṭṭhahissāmī’’ti pubbaparikammavasena vuṭṭhānasamatthatā vuṭṭhānavasīti veditabbā, yā samāpattivuṭṭhānakusalatāti vuccati. Paccavekkhaṇavasī pana āvajjanavasiyā eva vuttā. Paccavekkhaṇajavanāneva hi tattha āvajjanānantarāni. Yadaggena hi āvajjanavasīsiddhi, tadaggena paccavekkhaṇavasīsiddhi veditabbā.
“以无色为前行……修习观”,为详细阐明略说之义,而说“如何”等。其中,“把握了禅支”是指:以自相、味等方式,把握了寻等禅支以及与它们相应的法。所谓“禅支”,这仅是举例,然而观察禅支者,也观察与之相应的法。“它们的依止是心所依处”,正如有人于内室见到蛇,追踪而见到它的住处,同样,这位瑜伽行者审察那些无色法时,探寻“这些法依止什么而生起?”,便见到它们的依止——心所依处。在此,“禅支是无色”应当知也包含了与之相应的法。显示巴利原文
Arūpapubbaṅgamaṃ vā…pe… vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetīti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha jhānaṅgāni pariggahetvāti vitakkādīni jhānaṅgāni taṃsampayutte ca dhamme salakkhaṇarasādivasena pariggahetvā. ‘‘Jhānaṅgānī’’ti hi idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ, jhānaṅgāni pana passanto taṃsampayutte ca dhamme passati. Tesaṃ nissayaṃ hadayavatthunti yathā nāma puriso antogehe sappaṃ disvā anubandhamāno tassa āsayaṃ passati, evameva kho ayampi yogāvacaro te arūpadhamme upaparikkhanto ‘‘ime dhammā kiṃ nissāya pavattantī’’ti pariyesamāno tesaṃ nissayaṃ hadayavatthuṃ passati. Jhānaṅgāni arūpanti ettha taṃsampayuttadhammānampi gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
说明了以无色为前行而把握色之后,现在为了说明以色为前行而把握无色,说“或者”等语。在把握了发等部分……以及依止于它的色之后:在此,首先于发中,应把握坚硬相为地界,其中的粘结相为水界,成熟相为火界,支持相为风界。如是,于一切部分中,每一部分都应把握四大的四界。当诸界依真实自相而显现时,于业生中,首先在发中,具有所述相的四界,连同依止于它的颜色、香、味、食素、命根、身净色,如此以身十法而有十色;在那里,由于有性根的存在,则以性十法而有十色;食生者为食素第八;时节生和心生者为另外的二十四色。如此,在四种生起的二十四个部分中,应把握四十四色。至于汗、泪、唾、涕这四种,于四种时节生和心生的两个食素第八中,各有十六色。在胃中物、粪、脓、尿这四种中,于四种时节生中,唯以时节生的食素第八,应把握八色。这是三十二身分的理趣。显示巴利原文
Arūpapubbaṅgamaṃ rūpapariggahaṃ dassetvā idāni rūpapubbaṅgamaṃ arūpapariggahaṃ dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Kesādīsu koṭṭhāsesu…pe… taṃnissitarūpāni ca pariggahetvāti ettha pana kese tāva thaddhalakkhaṇaṃ pathavīdhātūti pariggahetabbaṃ, tattheva ābandhanalakkhaṇaṃ āpodhātūti, paripācanalakkhaṇaṃ tejodhātūti, vitthambhanalakkhaṇaṃ vāyodhātūti evaṃ sabbakoṭṭhāsesu ekekasmiṃ koṭṭhāse cattāri cattāri mahābhūtāni pariggahetabbāni. Athānena yāthāvato sarasalakkhaṇato āvibhūtāsu dhātūsu kammasamuṭṭhānamhi tāva kese vuttalakkhaṇā tā catasso ca dhātuyo taṃnissito ca vaṇṇo gandho raso ojā jīvitaṃ kāyapasādoti evaṃ kāyadasakavasena dasa rūpāni, tattheva bhāvassa atthitāya bhāvadasakavasena dasa rūpāni, āhārasamuṭṭhānaṃ ojaṭṭhamakaṃ, utusamuṭṭhānaṃ cittasamuṭṭhānanti aparānipi catuvīsatīti evaṃ catusamuṭṭhānesu catuvīsatikoṭṭhāsesu catucattālīsa rūpāni pariggahetabbāni. Sedo assu kheḷo siṅghāṇikāti ime pana catūsu utucittasamuṭṭhānesu dvinnaṃ ojaṭṭhamakānaṃ vasena soḷasa soḷasa rūpāni. Udariyaṃ karīsaṃ pubbaṃ muttanti imesu catūsu utusamuṭṭhānesu utusamuṭṭhānasseva ojaṭṭhamakassa vasena aṭṭha aṭṭha rūpāni pariggahetabbāni. Esa tāva dvattiṃsākāre nayo.
然而,当这三十二身分明了之后,便会显现另外十个相,即四个火的部分和六个风的部分。其中,在消化食物的火的部分中,首先于业生火的部分,有食素第八与命根,共九色;同样,于心生的入出息部分,有食素第八与声,共九色;在其余八种四生起的部分中,有命根九法与三个食素第八,各应把握三十三色。如此,依四十二相详细地,在这些已变得明显的所造色与四大种中,依处门,另有五类眼十法等,以及心处十法,应把握六十色。然而,如果比丘以种种方式把握了色之后,在把握无色时,由于微细,无色不显现,则他不应放弃努力,而应一再地思惟、作意、把握、确定色。因为,当他的色被善巧分别、无有杂乱、极为清净时,以彼为所缘的无色法便会自行显现。显示巴利原文
Ye pana imasmiṃ dvattiṃsākāre āvibhūte apare cattāro tejokoṭṭhāsā, cha vāyokoṭṭhāsāti dasa ākārā āvi bhavanti, tattha asitādiparipācake tāva kammajatejokoṭṭhāsamhi ojaṭṭhamakañceva jīvitañcāti nava rūpāni, tathā cittaje assāsapassāsakoṭṭhāse ojaṭṭhamakañceva saddo cāti nava, sesesu catusamuṭṭhānesu aṭṭhasu jīvitanavakañceva tīṇi ca ojaṭṭhamakānīti tettiṃsa tettiṃsa rūpāni pariggahetabbāni. Evaṃ vitthārato dvācattālīsākāravasena imesu bhūtupādāyarūpesu pākaṭesu jātesu vatthudvāravasena pañca cakkhudasakādayo hadayavatthudasakañcāti aparānipi saṭṭhi rūpāni pariggahetabbāni. Sace panassa tena tena mukhena rūpaṃ pariggahetvā arūpaṃ pariggaṇhato sukhumattā arūpaṃ na upaṭṭhāti, tena dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvā rūpameva punappunaṃ sammasitabbaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ pariggahetabbaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Yathā yathā hissa rūpaṃ suvikkhālitaṃ hoti nijjaṭaṃ suparisuddhaṃ, tathā tathā tadārammaṇā arūpadhammā sayameva pākaṭā honti.
譬如,有眼之人在不净的镜中观看自己的面容时,影像不显现,他并不丢弃镜子,而是一再擦拭;当镜子洁净时,影像便自行显现。同样,那位比丘不应放弃努力,而应一再地思惟、作意、把握、确定色。因为,当他的色被善巧分别、无有杂乱、极为清净时,以彼为所缘的无色法便会自行显现。对于如此具有极清净色把握的他,无色法以三种方式显现:或以触的方式,或以受的方式,或以识的方式。显示巴利原文
Yathā hi cakkhumato purisassa aparisuddhe ādāse mukhanimittaṃ olokentassa nimittaṃ na paññāyatīti na ādāsaṃ chaḍḍeti, atha kho naṃ punappunaṃ parimajjati, tassa parisuddhe ādāse nimittaṃ sayameva pākaṭaṃ hoti, evameva tena bhikkhunā dhuranikkhepaṃ akatvā rūpameva punappunaṃ sammasitabbaṃ manasi kātabbaṃ pariggahetabbaṃ vavatthapetabbaṃ. Yathā yathā hissa rūpaṃ suvikkhālitaṃ hoti nijjaṭaṃ suparisuddhaṃ, tathā tathā tadārammaṇā arūpadhammā sayameva pākaṭā honti. Evaṃ suvisuddharūpapariggahassa panassa arūpadhammā tīhākārehi upaṭṭhahanti phassavasena vā vedanāvasena vā viññāṇavasena vā.
如何呢?首先,对于依“发中地界具有坚硬相……入出息中地界具有坚硬相”等方式把握诸界者,最初的触击是触,与触相应的受是受蕴,想是想蕴,与触俱的思是行蕴,心是识蕴——如此显现。这样,无色法以触的方式显现。对于另一位,在“发中地界具有坚硬相……入出息中地界具有坚硬相”中,体验所缘之味的受是受蕴,相应的想是想蕴,相应的触与思是行蕴,相应的心是识蕴——如此显现。这样,无色法以受的方式显现。对于又一位,在“发中地界具有坚硬相……入出息中地界具有坚硬相”中,了知所缘的是识蕴,相应的受是受蕴,想是想蕴,触与思是行蕴——如此显现。这样,无色法以识的方式显现。依此方法,对于按“在业生的发中,地界具有坚硬相”等理趣,在四十二界部分中以四界的方式,以及在其余的处、眼等十法中,依处门而把握“意界和意识界的依止相为心处,适合色撞击的净色相为眼”等者,同样以最初的触击为触等触、受、识的方式,无色法以三种方式显现。因此说:“他见与所把握的色为所缘、或以所把握的色处门为所缘的、具有相应法……”显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ ? Ekassa tāva ‘‘kese pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā…pe… assāsapassāse pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā’’tiādinā nayena dhātuyo pariggaṇhantassa paṭhamābhinipāto phasso, taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, saddhiṃ phassena cetanā saṅkhārakkhandho, cittaṃ viññāṇakkhandhoti upaṭṭhāti. Evaṃ arūpadhammā phassavasena upaṭṭhahanti. Ekassa ‘‘kese pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā…pe… assāsapassāse pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā’’ti tadārammaṇarasānubhavanakavedanā vedanākkhandho, taṃsampayuttā saññā saññākkhandho, taṃsampayutto phasso ca cetanā ca saṅkhārakkhandho, taṃsampayuttaṃ cittaṃ viññāṇakkhandhoti upaṭṭhāti. Evaṃ vedanāvasena arūpadhammā upaṭṭhahanti. Aparassa ‘‘kese pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā…pe… assāsapassāse pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā’’ti ārammaṇapaṭivijānanaṃ viññāṇakkhandho, taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandho, saññā saññākkhandho, phasso ca cetanā ca saṅkhārakkhandhoti upaṭṭhāti. Evaṃ viññāṇavasena arūpadhammā upaṭṭhahanti. Etenevupāyena ‘‘kammasamuṭṭhāne kese pathavīdhātu kakkhaḷalakkhaṇā’’tiādinā nayena dvācattālīsāya dhātukoṭṭhāsesu catunnaṃ catunnaṃ dhātūnaṃ vasena sesesupi vatthu cakkhādīsu dasakesu manodhātumanoviññāṇadhātūnaṃ nissayalakkhaṇaṃ hadayavatthu rūpābhighātārahabhūtappasādalakkhaṇaṃ cakkhūtiādinā vatthudvāravasena pariggaṇhantassa paṭhamābhinipāto phasso, taṃsampayuttā vedanā vedanākkhandhotiādinā phassādivasena tīhi ākārehi arūpadhammā upaṭṭhahanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathāpariggahitarūpārammaṇaṃ yathāpariggahitarūpavatthudvārārammaṇaṃ vā sasampayuttadhammaṃ viññāṇañca passatī’’ti.
现在,为以另一种方式显示以色为前行而把握无色,故说“或者”等语。其中,“正如”等是显示身、心及入出息生起的状态。“铁匠的鼓风囊”,即铁匠用来吹火于熔炉的皮囊。“被鼓动时”,即冒烟时,意为产生风时。“相应的”,即随顺于彼的。“同样地”,此处铁匠的鼓风囊应视如身体,努力如心。虽然入出息是心生,但离开身体便不能转起,所以说“依于身与心而有入出息”。显示巴利原文
Idāni aññathāpi rūpapubbaṅgamaṃ arūpapariggahaṃ dassento ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha yathā hītiādi kāyassa cittassa ca assāsapassāsānaṃ samudayabhāvadassanaṃ. Kammāragaggarīti kammārānaṃ ukkāya aggidhamanabhastā. Dhamamānāyāti dhūmāyantiyā, vātaṃ gāhāpentiyāti attho. Tajjanti tadanurūpaṃ. Evamevanti ettha kammāragaggarī viya karajakāyo, vāyāmo viya cittaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kiñcāpi assāsapassāsā cittasamuṭṭhānā, karajakāyaṃ pana vinā tesaṃ appavattanato ‘‘kāyañca cittañca paṭicca assāsapassāsā’’ti vuttaṃ.
关于此名色:探求其缘,即如“无明集则色集”等所说,探求、审察、把握以无明等为首的缘。度脱疑惑,即超越、断除“我于过去世是否存在”等十六种事相的疑惑。以“任何色,无论过去、未来、现在”等所说的方法,是对诸蕴作聚团思惟。前分,是指在属于行道智见清净的生灭随观智之前分生起的。光明等,即光明、智、喜、轻安、乐、胜解、策励、舍、现起、欲,这十种光明等。显示巴利原文
Tassāti nāmarūpassa. Paccayaṃ pariyesatīti ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo’’tiādinā avijjādikaṃ paccayaṃ pariyesati vīmaṃsati pariggaṇhāti. Kaṅkhaṃ vitaratīti ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahaṃ atītamaddhāna’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ soḷasavatthukaṃ vicikicchaṃ atikkamati pajahati. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ atītānāgatapaccuppanna’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ kalāpasammasanaṃ. Pubbabhāgeti paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhipariyāpannāya udayabbayānupassanāya pubbabhāge uppanne. Obhāsādayoti obhāso ñāṇaṃ pīti passaddhi sukhaṃ adhimokkho paggaho upekkhā upaṭṭhānaṃ nikantīti ime obhāsādayo dasa.
此处(《清净道论》第二册第733段;《无碍解道注》第二卷第二章第六节)所说“光明”,是指观智的光明。此光明是由观智心的等起、持续生起的时节等起的极净色。其中,由观智心等起的光明,仅在瑜伽行者体内成为极净而住,因为心生色不能离开身体在外生起;另一种(时节等起的)光明则离开身体,随智的力量向周围扩散,唯彼行者能见。触及其光明的处所,也能见到那里的色法。见到时,是以眼识见,还是以意识见?诸师说,这应当审察。如同得天眼者,那光明唯是意识所识知的,如此说似较合理。然而,此光明对某些比丘,仅照亮坐处大小而生起;对某些比丘,照亮室内;对某些比丘,照亮室外;对某些比丘,照亮整个寺院、一牛吼地、半由旬、一由旬、二由旬、三由旬;对某些比丘,从地面直至阿迦尼咤梵天界,成为一片光明。而世尊的光明,则照亮一万世界而生起。当此光明生起时,瑜伽行者心想:‘我过去从未生起过这样的光明,我必定已得道、已得果。’于是将非道执为“道”,将非果执为“果”。当他将非道执为“道”、将非果执为“果”时,即名为偏离了观智路。他舍显示巴利原文
Tattha (visuddhi. 2.733; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.2.6) obhāsoti vipassanobhāso, so ca vipassanācittasamuṭṭhitaṃ santatipatitaṃ utusamuṭṭhānañca pabhassararūpaṃ. Tattha vipassanācittasamuṭṭhitaṃ yogino sarīraṭṭhameva pabhassaraṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati cittajarūpānaṃ sarīraṃ muñcitvā bahi appavattanato, itaraṃ sarīraṃ muñcitvā ñāṇānubhāvānurūpaṃ samantato pattharati, taṃ tasseva paññāyati. Tena phuṭṭhokāse rūpagatampi passati, passanto ca cakkhuviññāṇena passati, udāhu manoviññāṇenāti vīmaṃsitabbanti vadanti. Dibbacakkhulābhino viya taṃ manoviññāṇaviññeyyamevāti vattuṃ yuttaṃ viya dissati. So kho panāyaṃ obhāso kassaci bhikkhuno pallaṅkaṭṭhānamattameva obhāsento uppajjati, kassaci antogabbhaṃ, kassaci bahigabbhampi, kassaci sakalavihāraṃ, gāvutaṃ, aḍḍhayojanaṃ, yojanaṃ, dviyojanaṃ, tiyojanaṃ, kassaci pathavītalato yāva akaniṭṭhabrahmalokā ekālokaṃ kurumāno. Bhagavato pana dasasahassilokadhātuṃ obhāsento udapādi. Tasmiṃ pana uppanne yogāvacaro ‘‘na vata me ito pubbe evarūpo obhāso uppannapubbo, addhā maggappattosmi phalappattosmī’’ti amaggameva ‘‘maggo’’ti, aphalameva ca ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhāti. Tassa amaggaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti aphalaṃ vā ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhato vipassanāvīthi ukkantā nāma hoti. So attano mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā obhāsameva assādento nisīdati.
智,是指观智。据说,当他推度、审察色法、非色法时,会生起如离弦金刚杵般无碍、锐利、勇健、极明净的智。显示巴利原文
Ñāṇanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ. Tassa kira rūpārūpadhamme tulayantassa tīrayantassa vissaṭṭhaindavajiramiva avihatavegaṃ tikhiṇaṃ sūraṃ ativisadaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppajjati.
喜,是指观智的喜。据说,那时,他的五种喜——小喜、刹那喜、继起喜、踊跃喜、遍满喜——充满全身而生起。显示巴利原文
Pītīti vipassanāpīti. Tassa kira tasmiṃ samaye khuddikā pīti khaṇikā pīti okkantikā pīti ubbegā pīti pharaṇā pītīti ayaṃ pañcavidhā pīti sakalasarīraṃ pūrayamānā uppajjati.
轻安,是指观智的轻安。据说,那时,无论他坐在夜间的住处或白天的住处,身心都没有不安、沉重、僵硬、不适业、病态与弯曲,反而身心轻安、轻快、柔软、适业、极明净且正直。他以这样轻安等所护持的身心,在那一刻体验到名为“非人间的喜”。对此,有偈颂说:显示巴利原文
Passaddhīti vipassanāpassaddhi. Tassa kira tasmiṃ samaye rattiṭṭhāne vā divāṭṭhāne vā nisinnassa kāyacittānaṃ neva daratho, na gāravaṃ, na kakkhaḷatā, na akammaññatā, na gelaññaṃ, na vaṅkatā hoti, atha kho panassa kāyacittāni passaddhāni lahūni mudūni kammaññāni suvisadāni ujukāniyeva honti. So imehi passaddhādīhi anuggahitakāyacitto tasmiṃ samaye amānusiṃ nāma ratiṃ anubhavati. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
进入空闲处、内心寂静的比丘,
正确地观法者,便生起非人间的喜。
无论何时,他思惟诸蕴之生灭,
即获得喜与悦,此乃知不死者之境。”(《法句经》第373-374偈)
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Suññāgāraṃ paviṭṭhassa, santacittassa bhikkhuno; Amānusī ratī hoti, sammā dhammaṃ vipassato. ‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 373-374);
如是,当他成就这非人间之喜时,与轻快等相应的轻安便生起。显示巴利原文
Evamassa imaṃ amānusiṃ ratiṃ sādhayamānā lahutādisampayuttā passaddhi uppajjati.
乐,是指观智的乐。据说,在那一刻,会生起遍满全身、极为微妙的乐。显示巴利原文
Sukhanti vipassanāsukhaṃ. Tassa kira tasmiṃ samaye sakalasarīraṃ abhisandayamānaṃ atipaṇītaṃ sukhamuppajjati.
胜解,即是信。即与观智相应,成为心和心所极净信的有力之信生起。显示巴利原文
Adhimokkhoti saddhā. Vipassanāsampayuttāyeva hissa cittacetasikānaṃ atisayappasādabhūtā balavatī saddhā uppajjati.
策励,即是精进。即与观智相应,不缓不急、善加策励的精进生起。显示巴利原文
Paggahoti vīriyaṃ. Vipassanāsampayuttameva hissa asithilamanaccāraddhaṃ supaggahitaṃ vīriyaṃ uppajjati.
现起,即念。与观智相应的念,确实善现起、善安住,如埋入地中那般不动,如大山王一般而生起。当他转向、留意、作意、省察任何处所时,彼处所便进入、跃入其念中而现起,犹如具天眼者所见的他世一般。显示巴利原文
Upaṭṭhānanti sati. Vipassanāsampayuttāyeva hissa sūpaṭṭhitā suppatiṭṭhitā nikhātā acalā pabbatarājasadisā sati uppajjati. So yaṃ yaṃ ṭhānaṃ āvajjati samannāharati manasi karoti paccavekkhati, taṃ taṃ ṭhānamassa okkantitvā pakkhanditvā dibbacakkhuno paraloko viya satiyā upaṭṭhāti.
舍,即观舍与转向舍。于彼时,他对一切诸行保持中舍的有力观舍生起,意门的转向舍亦生起。当他转向种种所缘时,此舍即如离弦的金刚杵、如跃入叶袋的箭一般,锐利而勇健地运作。显示巴利原文
Upekkhāti vipassanupekkhā ceva āvajjanupekkhā ca. Tasmiñhissa samaye sabbasaṅkhāresu majjhattabhūtā vipassanupekkhā balavatī uppajjati, manodvāre āvajjanupekkhāpi. Sā hissa taṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ āvajjentassa vissaṭṭhaindavajiramiva pattapuṭe pakkhandatattanārāco viya ca sūrā tikhiṇā hutvā vahati.
欲,即观智欲。当他的观智如此为光明等所庄严时,便对观智生起爱著,生起微细、寂静相的欲,此种欲甚至无法被执取为‘烦恼’。显示巴利原文
Nikantīti vipassanānikanti. Evaṃ obhāsādipaṭimaṇḍitāya hissa vipassanāya ālayaṃ kurumānā sukhumā santākārā nikanti uppajjati, yā ‘‘kileso’’ti pariggahetumpi na sakkā hoti.
正如在光明中生起时那样,当这些法(智等)中的任何一种生起时,瑜伽行者便心想:‘过去我从未生起过这样的智、这样的喜、这样的轻安、这样的乐、胜解、策励、现起、舍与欲,我必定已证得道、已证得果。’于是他将非道执为‘道’,将非果执为‘果’。当他这样将非道执为道、将非果执为果时,即称为偏离了观智之道。他舍弃了自己的根本业处,唯耽著于欲念而坐。显示巴利原文
Yathā ca obhāse, evaṃ etesupi aññatarasmiṃ uppanne yogāvacaro ‘‘na vata me ito pubbe evarūpaṃ ñāṇaṃ uppannapubbaṃ, evarūpā pīti, passaddhi, sukhaṃ, adhimokkho, paggaho, upaṭṭhānaṃ, upekkhā, nikanti uppannapubbā, addhā maggappattosmi phalappattosmī’’ti amaggameva ‘‘maggo’’ti aphalameva ca ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhāti, tassa amaggaṃ ‘‘maggo’’ti aphalaṃ ‘‘phala’’nti gaṇhato vipassanāvīthi ukkantā nāma hoti. So attano mūlakammaṭṭhānaṃ vissajjetvā nikantimeva assādento nisīdati.
在此,光明等由于是随烦恼的所依处而被称为‘随烦恼’,并非因为它们是不善;而欲求既是随烦恼,也是随烦恼的所依处。这十种仅就所依处而说,但依执取方式则有三十种。如何呢?若执取‘我的光明生起了’,这是邪见执;若执取‘这光明生起真是可意啊’,这是慢执;若对光明生起味著,这是渴爱执。如此,对于光明,依邪见、慢、渴爱而有三种执取。同样地,对于其余诸法也是如此。这样,依执取方式而有三十种随烦恼。由于这些随烦恼,不具善巧、不聪慧的瑜伽行者对于光明等便动摇、散乱,对于光明等一一观察为‘这是我的,我是这个,这是我的自我’。因此,古德们说:显示巴利原文
Ettha ca obhāsādayo upakkilesavatthutāya ‘‘upakkilesā’’ti vuttā, na akusalattā, nikanti pana upakkileso ceva upakkilesavatthu ca . Vatthuvaseneva cete dasa, gāhavasena pana samatiṃsa honti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Mama obhāso uppanno’’ti gaṇhato hi diṭṭhiggāho hoti, ‘‘manāpo vata obhāso uppanno’’ti gaṇhato mānaggāho, obhāsaṃ assādayato taṇhāgāho. Iti obhāse diṭṭhimānataṇhāvasena tayo gāhā. Tathā sesesupīti evaṃ gāhavasena samatiṃsa upakkilesā honti. Tesaṃ vasena akusalo abyatto yogāvacaro obhāsādīsu kampati vikkhipati, obhāsādīsu ekekaṃ ‘‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti samanupassati. Tenāhu porāṇā –
于光明、智慧与喜悦,心生动摇;
于轻安与乐中,令心战栗者;
于胜解与策励,于近住中动摇;
于舍与转向,及于舍的欲求中。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Obhāse ceva ñāṇe ca, pītiyā ca vikampati; Passaddhiyā sukhe ceva, yehi cittaṃ pavedhati. ‘‘Adhimokkhe ca paggāhe, upaṭṭhāne ca kampati; Upekkhāvajjanāya ceva, upekkhāya ca nikantiyā’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 2.7)
具足善巧、聪慧、明智与智慧的瑜伽行者,当光明等相生起时,便以慧如此决断、审察:‘这光明确实已在我这里生起,然而这光明是无常的、有为的、缘生的、灭尽法、衰灭法、离贪法、灭法。’或者他又这样想:‘如果光明是我,便可以执取为“我”,但它实为无我,却被执取为“我”。因此,它由不受支配义而为无我,由有已还无义而为无常,由被生灭逼迫义而为苦。’他这样审察。如同对光明一般,对其余诸法也是如此。他如此审察后,便观察:‘这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的自我。’对于观察智……乃至欲求,也观察:‘这不是我的,我不是这个,这不是我的自我。’如此观察者,于光明等诸法便不动摇、不颤抖。因此,古德们说:显示巴利原文
Kusalo paṇḍito byatto buddhisampanno yogāvacaro obhāsādīsu uppannesu ‘‘ayaṃ kho me obhāso uppanno, so kho panāyaṃ anicco saṅkhato paṭiccasamuppanno khayadhammo vayadhammo virāgadhammo nirodhadhammo’’ti iti vā taṃ paññāya paricchindati upaparikkhati. Atha vā panassa evaṃ hoti – sace obhāso attā bhaveyya, attāti gahetuṃ vaṭṭeyya, anattāva panāyaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahito. Tasmā so avasavattanaṭṭhena anattā, hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena anicco, uppādavayapaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhoti upaparikkhati. Yathā ca obhāse, evaṃ sesesupi. So evaṃ upaparikkhitvā obhāsaṃ ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti samanupassati. Ñāṇaṃ…pe… nikantiṃ ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti samanupassati. Evaṃ samanupassanto obhāsādīsu na kampati na vedhati. Tenāhu porāṇā –
此十种处,若人以慧善决断已;
他便成为法掉举的善巧者,而不入于散乱。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Imāni dasa ṭhānāni, paññā yassa pariccitā; Dhammuddhaccakusalo hoti, na ca vikkhepa gacchatī’’ti. (paṭi. ma. 2.7);
他如此不趋于散乱,解开了那三十种随烦恼的缠结,决断“光明等法不是道,离随烦恼而行于道上的观智才是道”,从而区分了非道与道。正是对此而说:“舍弃光明等十种观随烦恼,决断离随烦恼的行道智为道后”。所谓“舍弃生起”,即舍弃在生灭随观中所执取的诸行生起,唯观其坏灭;证得坏灭观智后,以过患随观为先导而生厌离随观,在欲解脱智、审察智、行舍智、随顺智的修习终了时,生起种姓智,之后以生起的道智对一切诸行离贪、解脱。因为在道刹那,圣者即被称为离贪、解脱。因此说:“次第证得四圣道后”。对于应观察的道、果、涅槃、已断烦恼与残余烦恼所摄的十九种差别,他皆观之。因为阿罗汉已无余烦恼,故有十九种观察智。“他的”:指入出息念业处修行者。显示巴利原文
So evaṃ vikkhepaṃ agacchanto taṃ samatiṃsavidhaṃ upakkilesajaṭaṃ vijaṭetvā ‘‘obhāsādayo dhammā na maggo, upakkilesavimuttaṃ pana vīthippaṭipannaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggo’’ti amaggaṃ maggañca vavatthapeti. Yaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘obhāsādayo dasa vipassanupakkilese pahāya upakkilesavimuttaṃ paṭipadāñāṇaṃ maggoti vavatthapetvā’’ti. Udayaṃ pahāyāti udayabbayānupassanāya gahitaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ udayaṃ vissajjetvā tesaṃ bhaṅgasseva anupassanato bhaṅgānupassanāñāṇaṃ patvā ādīnavānupassanāpubbaṅgamāya nibbidānupassanāya nibbindanto muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhānupassanāsaṅkhārupekkhānulomañāṇānaṃ ciṇṇapariyante uppannagotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ uppannena maggañāṇena sabbasaṅkhāresu virajjanto vimuccanto. Maggakkhaṇe hi ariyo virajjati vimuccatīti ca vuccati. Tenāha – ‘‘yathākkamaṃ cattāro ariyamagge pāpuṇitvā’’ti. Maggaphalanibbānapahīnāvasiṭṭhakilesasaṅkhātassa paccavekkhitabbassa pabhedena ekūnavīsatibhedassa. Arahato hi avasiṭṭhakilesābhāvena ekūnavīsati paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni. Assāti ānāpānassatikammaṭṭhānikassa.
由于没有独立的业处修习方法,这是依初四法组证得禅那后,而以受随观、心随观、法随观的方式来说的。“他们的”:指三组四法。“遍知喜者”:即一遍又一遍正确地感受喜为性,或他有一遍又一遍正确感受喜的状态,或正在一遍又一遍正确地感受喜。在此,虽然仅凭“感受”一词就已表示对喜的了知,但为了显示希望以何种方式感受,故用“遍”字,即“一遍又一遍地感受,因此称为遍知”。因而说“以两种方式”等。显示巴利原文
Visuṃ kammaṭṭhānabhāvanānayo nāma natthīti paṭhamacatukkavasena adhigatajjhānassa vedanācittadhammānupassanāvasena desitattā vuttaṃ. Tesanti tiṇṇaṃ catukkānaṃ. Pītippaṭisaṃvedīti pītiyā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedanasīlo, tassā vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedo etassa atthi, taṃ vā paṭi paṭi sammadeva vedayamāno. Tattha kāmaṃ saṃvedanaggahaṇeneva pītiyā sakkaccaṃ viditabhāvo bodhito hoti, yehi pana pakārehi tassā saṃvedanaṃ icchitaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ paṭi-saddaggahaṇaṃ ‘‘paṭi paṭi saṃvedīti paṭisaṃvedī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘dvīhākārehī’’tiādi.
在此,“如何由所缘而遍知喜?”是问句。“入于有喜的二禅”:即次第入于有喜俱行的初禅与第二禅。“她的”:即由她。因期待“遍知”一词,此为属格,表作者之义。“在入定刹那”:即在入定的刹那。“由证得禅那”:即由具足禅那。“由所缘”:即由所缘之门,属于该所缘的禅那所含摄的喜便被遍知,因为所缘已被遍知。这是什么意思呢?正如寻找蛇的人,当蛇的住处被遍知时,由于凭咒语和药力易于捕捉,蛇也就被遍知了;同样地,当作为喜的住处的所缘被遍知时,由于容易从自相与共相把握,那喜也就被遍知了。显示巴利原文
Tattha kathaṃ ārammaṇato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti pucchāvacanaṃ. Sappītike dve jhāne samāpajjatī’’ti pītisahagatāni dve paṭhamadutiyajjhānāni paṭipāṭiyā samāpajjati. Tassāti tena. ‘‘Paṭisaṃviditā’’ti hi padaṃ apekkhitvā kattuatthe etaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Samāpattikkhaṇeti samāpannakkhaṇe. Jhānapaṭilābhenāti jhānena samaṅgibhāvena. Ārammaṇatoti ārammaṇamukhena, tadārammaṇajjhānapariyāpannā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇassa paṭisaṃviditattā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hoti? Yathā nāma sappapariyesanaṃ carantena tassa āsaye paṭisaṃvidite sopi paṭisaṃvidito eva hoti mantāgadabalena tassa gahaṇassa sukarattā, evaṃ pītiyā āsayabhūte ārammaṇe paṭisaṃvidite sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā eva hoti salakkhaṇato sāmaññalakkhaṇato ca tassā gahaṇassa sukarattāti.
应将“如何由不痴而遍知喜”与此处连接。“在观刹那”:指当观慧锐利、明净地现起时,从所缘境上进行观察的那个刹那。“由通达相”:即由通达喜的自相与共相。因为,若某一法的特相与共相被了知,该法即被如实了知。因此说:“由不痴而遍知喜”。显示巴利原文
Kathaṃ asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Vipassanākkhaṇeti vipassanāpaññāya tikkhavisadappavattāya visayato dassanakkhaṇe. Lakkhaṇapaṭivedhenāti pītiyā salakkhaṇassa sāmaññalakkhaṇassa ca paṭivijjhanena. Yañhi yassa visesato sāmaññato ca lakkhaṇaṃ, tasmiṃ vidite so yāthāvato vidito eva hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘asammohato pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotī’’ti.
现在,为了以巴利语阐明其含义,而说“已说”等语。其中,在“以长入息之力”等处应说的内容,前文已述。然而,在那里,巴利文是依念与作意的显示方式引述的,而此处则是依喜的觉知方式。喜的觉知在意义上已经分析过了。此外,这里还有一个简要的含义——“以长入息之力”是指:对于以长入息为所缘之力而了知者,那喜便成为被觉知的,这是句子的关联。“了知心的一境性、不散乱”是指:以与那禅支相应的慧,了知那属于禅那、名为不散乱的心一境性。正如喜通过所缘之门而被觉知,那些与它相应的法也同样通过所缘之门而被觉知。“念已现起”是指:以长入息之力,与禅那相应的念现起于那所缘上;通过所缘之门,念亦名为现起于禅那中。“以那念”是指:以如此现起的那念,由于那所缘被所述之智善巧地觉知,依于那所缘,那喜成为被觉知的。在“以长出息之力”等处,也应以同样的方法理解其义。显示巴利原文
Idāni tamatthaṃ pāḷiyā eva vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha dīghaṃassāsavasenātiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Tattha pana satokāritādassanavasena pāḷi āgatā, idha pītippaṭisaṃviditāvasena. Pītippaṭisaṃviditā ca atthato vibhattā eva. Apica ayamettha saṅkhepattho – dīghaṃassāsavasenāti dīghassa assāsassa ārammaṇabhūtassa vasena pajānato sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti sambandho. Cittassa ekaggataṃ avikkhepaṃ pajānatoti jhānapariyāpannaṃ avikkhepoti laddhanāmaṃ cittassekaggataṃ taṃsampayuttāya paññāya pajānato. Yatheva hi ārammaṇamukhena pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti, evaṃ taṃsampayuttadhammāpi ārammaṇamukhena paṭisaṃviditā eva hontīti. Sati upaṭṭhitā hotīti dīghaṃassāsavasena jhānasampayuttā sati tassa ārammaṇe upaṭṭhitā ārammaṇamukhena jhānepi upaṭṭhitā nāma hoti. Tāya satiyāti evaṃ upaṭṭhitāya tāya satiyā yathāvuttena tena ñāṇena suppaṭividitattā ārammaṇassa tassa vasena tadārammaṇā sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hoti. Dīghaṃpassāsavasenātiādīsupi imināva nayena attho veditabbo.
如此,为了从所缘与不痴两方面分别显示由初四法所示现的喜的觉知,而说“转向者”等语。其中,“转向者”是指转向禅那者。“那喜”是指那属于禅那的喜。“了知者”是指在入定刹那通过所缘之门而了知者——那喜成为他所觉知的,这是句子的关联。“见者”是指以见性之智从禅那出起后而见者。“观察者”是指观察禅那者。“决意心者”是指决意禅那心:“我将于如此长的时间具足禅那”者。如此,以五种自在力的方式,通过禅那的了知之门,从所缘方面显示了喜的觉知。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ paṭhamacatukkavasena dassitaṃ pītippaṭisaṃvedanaṃ ārammaṇato asammohato ca vibhāgaso dassetuṃ ‘‘āvajjato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha āvajjatoti jhānaṃ āvajjentassa. Sā pītīti sā jhānapariyāpannā pīti. Jānatoti samāpannakkhaṇe ārammaṇamukhena jānato. Tassa sā pīti paṭisaṃviditā hotīti sambandho. Passatoti dassanabhūtena ñāṇena jhānato vuṭṭhāya passantassa. Paccavekkhatoti jhānaṃ paccavekkhantassa. Cittaṃ adhiṭṭhahatoti ‘‘ettakaṃ velaṃ jhānasamaṅgī bhavissāmī’’ti jhānacittaṃ adhiṭṭhahantassa. Evaṃ pañcannaṃ vasībhāvānaṃ vasena jhānassa pajānanamukhena ārammaṇato pītiyā paṭisaṃvedanā dassitā.
为显示依止那些成就禅那与观的法——即属于禅那与属于观道的信等诸力——而觉知喜,故说“以信胜解者”等语。其中,“胜解者”指具信者,意在以止观之力。“策励精进者”等处也是同样的方法。“应证知”指应以殊胜的慧了知;“证知者”指以观慧为先导的道慧而了知者;“应遍知”指以审察遍知与道慧遍知苦谛;“应断”指以断遍知与道慧断除集谛;“修习者”与“作证者”指修习应修的道谛,作证应证的灭谛。然而,若有人在此仅以喜的力量来列举应证知等,那并不恰当,因为此处意在举出禅那等的集合,再从中拣择出喜。显示巴利原文
Idāni yehi dhammehi jhānaṃ vipassanā ca sijjhanti, tesaṃ jhānapariyāpannānaṃ vipassanāmaggapariyāpannānañca saddhādīnaṃ vasena pītippaṭisaṃvedanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhāya adhimuccato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha adhimuccatoti saddahantassa, samathavipassanāvasenāti adhippāyo. Vīriyaṃ paggaṇhatotiādīsupi eseva nayo. Abhiññeyyanti abhivisiṭṭhāya paññāya jānitabbaṃ. Abhijānatoti vipassanāpaññāpubbaṅgamāya maggapaññāya jānato. Pariññeyyanti dukkhasaccaṃ tīraṇapariññāya maggapaññāya ca parijānato. Pahātabbanti samudayasaccaṃ pahānapariññāya maggapaññāya ca pajahato. Bhāvayato sacchikaroto bhāvetabbaṃ maggasaccaṃ, sacchikātabbaṃ nirodhasaccaṃ. Keci panettha pītiyā eva vasena abhiññeyyādīni uddharanti, taṃ ayuttaṃ jhānādisamudāyaṃ uddharitvā tato pītiyā niddhāraṇassa adhippetattā.
在此,以“以长入息之力”等,依初四法的方式,从所缘方面说明了喜的觉知;同样,以“转向者”等五句。以“应证知者证知”等,则从不迷惑方面;以“以信胜解者”等,则简要地从两方面——依止力从所缘方面,依观力从不迷惑方面——说明了喜的觉知。应如此理解。然而,为什么在此受随观念处中,以喜为题而取受,而不直接以受本身来阐述呢?这是为了依地差别等将受分类,以四种方式显示受随观念处。再者,当显示受为业处时,世尊因喜的粗显性,为了把握相应的乐,而以喜为题来显示。显示巴利原文
Ettha ca ‘‘dīghaṃassāsavasenā’’tiādinā paṭhamacatukkavasena ārammaṇato pītippaṭisaṃvedanaṃ vuttaṃ, tathā ‘‘āvajjato’’tiādīhi pañcahi padehi. ‘‘Abhiññeyyaṃ abhijānato’’tiādīhi pana asammohato, ‘‘saddhāya adhimuccato’’tiādīhi ubhayathāpi saṅkhepato samathavasena ārammaṇato vipassanāvasena asammohato pītippaṭisaṃvedanaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kasmā panettha vedanānupassanāyaṃ pītisīsena vedanā gahitā, na sarūpato evāti? Bhūmivibhāgādivasena vedanaṃ bhinditvā catudhā vedanānupassanaṃ dassetuṃ. Apica vedanākammaṭṭhānaṃ dassento bhagavā pītiyā oḷārikattā taṃsampayuttasukhaṃ sukhaggahaṇatthaṃ pītisīsena dasseti.
以同样的方法,其余的词句,即“觉知乐者”、“觉知心行者”等,应依“觉知喜者”词句中所用的方法来理解其义。因为可以将“以两种方式成为觉知乐者、觉知心行者:从所缘方面……”等,在喜的位置代之以乐等词句,并以“具足与乐俱行的三禅或四禅”等而了知其义。因此说“依三禅之力”等。“受等”中的“等”字包含了想,故说“二蕴”。为了显示观的地——即以杂行思惟的方式显示观的地——而说“乐:有两种乐”等,因为在止中没有身乐。“那”是指以止息为同义语所说的灭。“因为当这位比丘未把握时”等,详细地说了身行,因此应依那里所说的方法了知。在那里是以身行的方式而来,这里则是以心行的方式而来,这就是唯一的不同之处。显示巴利原文
Eteneva nayena avasesapadānīti sukhappaṭisaṃvedī cittasaṅkhārappaṭisaṃvedīti padāni pītippaṭisaṃvedī-pade āgatanayeneva atthato veditabbāni. Sakkā hi ‘‘dvīhākārehi sukhappaṭisaṃviditā hoti, cittasaṅkhārappaṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇato’’tiādinā pītiṭṭhāne sukhādipadāni pakkhipitvā ‘‘sukhasahagatāni tīṇi jhānāni cattāri vā jhānāni samāpajjatī’’tiādinā atthaṃ viññātuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ jhānānaṃ vasenā’’tiādi. Vedanādayoti ādi-saddena saññā gahitā. Tenāha ‘‘dve khandhā’’ti. Vipassanābhūmidassanatthanti pakiṇṇakasaṅkhārasammasanavasena vipassanāya bhūmidassanatthaṃ ‘‘sukhanti dve sukhānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ samathe kāyikasukhābhāvato. Soti so passambhanapariyāyena vutto nirodho. ‘‘Imassa hi bhikkhuno apariggahitakāle’’tiādinā vitthārato kāyasaṅkhāre vutto, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Tattha kāyasaṅkhāravasena āgato, idha cittasaṅkhāravasenāti ayameva viseso.
如此,以类推显示了心行的止息之后,为了说明在此四法中尚应宣说的其余内容,便说了“再者”等语。其中,“在喜的词句”中,是指以“觉知喜者”等所教导的部分。“以喜为标题而说了受”,意谓以喜的名称宣说了与它相应的受,而非喜本身,这是其意趣所在。其理由前文已说。“在两个心行的词句”中,是指“觉知心行者”、“止息心行者”这两个与心行相关的词句。依“识缘名色”之说,它们是依于心而被系缚的,故为“心所系缚”。正因如此,它们虽由心造作而称为“心行”——即想、受等,但此处仅是举例,实指想与受,故说“与想相应的受”。显示巴利原文
Evaṃ cittasaṅkhārassa passambhanaṃ atidesena dassetvā yadaññaṃ imasmiṃ catukke vattabbaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha pītipadeti ‘‘pītippaṭisaṃvedī’’tiādinā desitakoṭṭhāse. Pītisīsena vedanā vuttāti pītiapadesena taṃsampayuttā vedanā vuttā, na pītīti adhippāyo. Tattha kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Dvīsu cittasaṅkhārapadesūti ‘‘cittasaṅkhārappaṭisaṃvedī passambhayaṃ cittasaṅkhāra’’nti cittasaṅkhārapaṭisaṃyuttesu dvīsu padesu. ‘‘Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti vacanato cittena paṭibaddhāti cittapaṭibaddhā. Tato eva kāmaṃ cittena saṅkharīyantīti cittasaṅkhārā, saññāvedanādayo, idha pana upalakkhaṇamattaṃ, saññāvedanāva adhippetāti āha ‘‘saññāsampayuttā vedanā’’ti.
“觉知心”:此处,由两种方式觉知心:从所缘与从不迷惑。如何从所缘?成就四禅,在成就的刹那,依“由得禅那”等所说的方法,一切皆可善知,故说“应知由四禅之力而觉知心”。“令心喜悦”:以与禅那相应的喜,令与禅那相应的心喜悦;或者,以此喜为所缘而生起观心,通过这所缘的喜而令心喜悦。“令欣喜”等词即是其同义词,因为它们是喜的异名。显示巴利原文
Cittappaṭisaṃvedīti ettha dvīhākārehi cittapaṭisaṃviditā hoti ārammaṇato asammohato ca. Kathaṃ ārammaṇato? Cattāri jhānāni samāpajjati, tassa samāpattikkhaṇe jhānapaṭilābhenātiādinā vuttanayānusārena sabbaṃ suviññeyyanti āha – ‘‘catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ vasena cittapaṭisaṃviditā veditabbā’’ti. Cittaṃ modentoti jhānasampayuttaṃ cittaṃ sampayuttāya pītiyā modayamāno, taṃ vā pītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattaṃ vipassanācittaṃ tāya eva ārammaṇabhūtāya pītiyāmodayamāno. Pamodentotiādīni padāni tasseva vevacanāni pītipariyāyabhāvato.
“以相应的喜令心喜悦”:以与禅那心相应的、具备喜觉支性质、以昂扬为相的禅那喜,依俱生缘等及禅那缘,令那禅那心增广,使之成为欢喜踊跃的状态,由此而令喜悦、令欣喜。“作为所缘”:瑜伽行者以殊胜的、与禅那相应的喜为所缘而生起观心,以此所缘的喜令心成为欢喜踊跃的状态,故说“令喜悦、令欣喜”。显示巴利原文
Sampayuttāya pītiyā cittaṃ āmodetīti jhānacittasampayuttāya pītisambojjhaṅgabhūtāya odagyalakkhaṇāya jhānapītiyā tameva jhānacittaṃ sahajātādipaccayavasena ceva jhānapaccayavasena ca paribrūhento haṭṭhappahaṭṭhākāraṃ pāpento āmodeti pamodeti ca. Ārammaṇaṃ katvāti uḷāraṃ jhānasampayuttaṃ pītiṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattamānaṃ vipassanācittaṃ tāya eva ārammaṇabhūtāya pītiyā yogāvacaro haṭṭhappahaṭṭhākāraṃ pāpento ‘‘āmodeti pamodetī’’ti vuccati.
“令安住”者:令不落入丝毫昏沉与掉举,不低沉也不高扬,由诸根平等行道而不偏颇,或由定力增上而达不动,如此正确地安立,即依安止而令安住。“以通达相”者:对无常等相一再穿透,刹那刹那觉悟。“刹那心一境性”者:仅安住刹那的定。此定于所缘上无间断地以同一方式生起,不为敌对法所制伏,如同安止一般令心不动而安立。故说“如是生起者”等。显示巴利原文
Samaṃṭhapentoti yathā īsakampi līnapakkhaṃ uddhaccapakkhañca anupaggamma anonataṃ anunnataṃ yathā indriyānaṃ samattapaṭipattiyā avisamaṃ, samādhissa vā ukkaṃsagamanena āneñjappattiyā sammadeva ṭhitaṃ hoti, evaṃ appanāvasena ṭhapento. Lakkhaṇappaṭivedhenāti aniccādikassa lakkhaṇassa paṭi paṭi vijjhanena khaṇe khaṇe avabodhena. Khaṇikacittekaggatāti khaṇamattaṭṭhitiko samādhi. Sopi hi ārammaṇe nirantaraṃ ekākārena pavattamāno paṭipakkhena anabhibhūto appito viya cittaṃ niccalaṃ ṭhapeti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘evaṃ uppannāyā’’tiādi.
“令解脱”者:以镇伏解脱的方式令远离、令分离,即断除诸盖的意思。“于观刹那”者:于坏灭随观刹那。因为坏灭实为无常的极致,因此,坏灭随观的瑜伽行者以心为先导,观一切诸行为无常,而非为常;由于无常是苦,苦是无我,故随观为苦,而非为乐;随观为无我,而非为我。然而,凡是无常、苦、无我者,不应欢喜;凡不应欢喜者,不应染着。因此,依坏灭见,见诸行“无常、苦、无我”时,于彼厌离,而非欢喜;离欲,而非染着。他如此厌离、离欲,便以世间智令贪灭去,而非令生起——即不令其生起的意思。或者,他如此离欲后,如所见诸行,以自智令彼如是所见者灭去,而非令生起——即唯作意于灭,而非于生起的意思。如此行道者,即说为“舍离,而非执取”。因为此无常等随观,连同诸蕴行,由舍弃烦恼、由见有为过患而其反面涅槃生起,以倾向彼而跳入,故称为“舍离舍”与“跳入舍”。因此,具足此的瑜伽行者,依所述方法,既舍弃烦恼,又跳入涅槃。故说:“彼于观刹那,以无常随观令心从常想解脱、令脱离……乃至……以舍离随观令心从执取解脱、令脱离,而吸气、呼气。”显示巴利原文
Mocentoti vikkhambhanavimuttivasena vivecento visuṃ karonto, nīvaraṇāni pajahantoti attho. Vipassanākkhaṇeti bhaṅgānupassanākkhaṇe. Bhaṅgo hi nāma aniccatāya paramā koṭi, tasmā tāya bhaṅgānupassako yogāvacaro cittamukhena sabbaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ aniccato passati, no niccato, aniccassa dukkhattā dukkhassa ca anattattā tadeva dukkhato anupassati, no sukhato, anattato anupassati, no attato. Yasmā pana yaṃ aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā, na taṃ abhinanditabbaṃ, yañca na abhinanditabbaṃ, na taṃ rañjitabbaṃ, tasmā bhaṅgadassanānusārena ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattā’’ti saṅkhāragate diṭṭhe tasmiṃ nibbindati, no nandati, virajjati, no rajjati, so evaṃ nibbindanto virajjanto lokiyeneva tāva ñāṇena rāgaṃ nirodheti no samudeti, nāssa samudayaṃ karotīti attho. Atha vā so evaṃ viratto yathā diṭṭhaṃ saṅkhāragataṃ, taṃ tathā diṭṭhaṃ attano ñāṇena nirodheti no samudeti, nirodhamevassa manasi karoti, no samudayanti attho, so evaṃ paṭipanno paṭinissajjati, no ādiyatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ayañhi aniccādianupassanā saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilesānaṃ pariccajanato saṅkhatadosadassanena tabbiparīte nibbāne tanninnatāya pakkhandanato ca pariccāgapaṭinissaggo ceva pakkhandanapaṭinissaggocāti vuccati. Tasmā tāya samannāgato yogāvacaro vuttanayena kilese ca pariccajati, nibbāne ca pakkhandati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘so vipassanākkhaṇe aniccānupassanāya niccasaññāto cittaṃ mocento vimocento…pe… paṭinissaggānupassanāya ādānato cittaṃ mocento vimocento assasati ceva passasati cā’’ti.
其中,对无常或“无常”的随观为无常随观。这是取了有漏法无常性而生起的观的名字。“从常想”者:从对有为法生起的“常、恒常”的邪想。应知以想为首,也包含了心与见。对乐想等也是如此。“以厌离随观”者:以于诸行厌离的方式生起的随观。“从欢喜”者:从有喜的渴爱。“以离欲随观”者:以同样离欲的方式生起的随观。因此说“从贪令解脱”。“以灭随观”者:对诸行灭的随观。或者,如同诸行确实灭去,未来不再以再生之因生起,这样的随观为灭随观。因为这是达到强有力的欲解脱。因此说“从集令解脱”。以舍离的方式生起的随观为舍离随观。“从执取”者:从以常等方式执取,或从结生执取。此处应如此理解其义。显示巴利原文
Tattha aniccassa, aniccanti vā anupassanā aniccānupassanā. Tebhūmakadhammānaṃ aniccataṃ gahetvā pavattāya vipassanāya etaṃ nāmaṃ. Niccasaññātoti saṅkhatadhamme ‘‘niccā sassatā’’ti pavattāya micchāsaññāya. Saññāsīsena cittadiṭṭhīnampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo sukhasaññādīsupi. Nibbidānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu nibbindanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya . Nanditoti sappītikataṇhāto. Virāgānupassanāyāti tathā virajjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘rāgato mocento’’ti. Nirodhānupassanāyāti saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhassa anupassanāya. Yathā saṅkhārā nirujjhantiyeva āyatiṃ punabbhavavasena nuppajjanti, evaṃ vā anupassanā nirodhānupassanā. Muñcitukamyatā hi ayaṃ balappattā. Tenāha ‘‘samudayato mocento’’ti. Paṭinissajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Ādānatoti niccādivasena gahaṇato, paṭisandhiggahaṇato vāti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo.
“无常随观者”:即随观无常者,或具有无常随观之习性者。于此,应阐明“何谓无常?如何为无常?何谓无常随观?谁的无常随观?”这四义,为显此义,故说“应知无常”等。其中,所谓常,乃坚固、恒常,譬如涅槃;非常,即无常,具有生灭,意指有为法,故说“无常即五蕴”。何以故?因其有生、有灭、有变异性,即具足生、灭、变异性之义。其中,诸有为法依因缘而生起,即无而现有、获得自性,是为“生”;彼法既生已,刹那坏灭,是为“灭”;因老而转异,是为“变异性”。恰如处于生位而遭破坏,于坏灭位并无实体破坏;如是,于朝向坏灭而称为住位时,亦无实体的破坏。然于此处,假立有老,故虽一一法,亦有其老,此名为刹那老。且于生位与坏灭位,须承认实体无有破坏,否则即堕“另一法生,另一法灭”之过失。此乃就刹那老而言“变异性”。显示巴利原文
Aniccanti anupassī, aniccassa vā anupassanasīlo aniccānupassīti ettha kiṃ pana taṃ aniccaṃ, kathaṃ vā aniccaṃ, kā vā aniccānupassanā, kassa vā aniccānupassanāti catukkaṃ vibhāvetabbanti taṃ dassento ‘‘aniccaṃ veditabba’’ntiādimāha. Tattha niccaṃ nāma dhuvaṃ sassataṃ yathā taṃ nibbānaṃ, na niccanti aniccaṃ, udayabbayavantaṃ, atthato saṅkhatā dhammāti āha aniccanti pañcakkhandhā. Kasmā? Uppādavayaññathattabhāvāti, uppādavayaññathattasabbhāvāti attho. Tattha saṅkhatadhammānaṃ hetupaccayehi uppajjanaṃ ahutvā sambhavo attalābho uppādo, uppannānaṃ tesaṃ khaṇanirodho vināso vayo, jarāya aññathābhāvo aññathattaṃ. Yathā hi uppādāvatthāya bhinnāya bhaṅgāvatthāyaṃ vatthubhedo natthi, evaṃ ṭhitisaṅkhātāyaṃ bhaṅgābhimukhāvatthāyampi vatthubhedo natthi. Yattha jarāvohāro, tasmā ekassapi dhammassa jarā yujjati, yā khaṇikajarāti vuccati. Ekaṃsena ca uppādabhaṅgāvatthāsu vatthuno abhedo icchitabbo, aññathā ‘‘añño uppajjati, añño bhijjatī’’ti āpajjeyya. Tayidaṃ khaṇikajaraṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘aññathatta’’nti.
由于具备三相,故于诸蕴得无常之名;于此三相中,无常是共称之名。为说明无常性即是那些诸法之生、灭、变异性,更进而显了诸法于刹那灭中特有无常之称谓,故说“或有了之后不复存在”等。其中,由于不存在是以生起为先,故言“有了之后”;由此显示灭坏之性以显了的存在为先。如是,即以生起的方式。以刹那灭,即以刹那之坏灭。彼无常,即称为刹那灭的无常。彼随观,即如前所述的无常随观。具足者,即成就此之瑜伽行者。显示巴利原文
Yassa lakkhaṇattayassa bhāvā khandhesu aniccasamaññā, tasmiṃ lakkhaṇattaye aniccatā samaññāti ‘‘aniccatāti tesaṃyeva uppādavayaññathatta’’nti vatvā visesato dhammānaṃ khaṇikanirodhe aniccatāvohāroti dassento ‘‘hutvā abhāvo vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha uppādapubbakattā abhāvassa hutvā-gahaṇaṃ. Tena pākaṭabhāvapubbakattaṃ vināsabhāvassa dasseti. Tenevākārenāti nibbattanākārena. Khaṇabhaṅgenāti khaṇikanirodhena. Tassā aniccatāyāti khaṇikabhaṅgasaṅkhātāya aniccatāya. Tāya anupassanāyāti yathāvuttāya aniccānupassanāya. Samannāgatoti samaṅgibhūto yogāvacaro.
“灭尽”乃诸行之坏灭。“离欲”乃那些诸行之消散;灭尽即是离欲,故称灭尽离欲,此即刹那灭。“极尽离欲”者:于证得此时,此处诸行离欲、止灭,故为极尽离欲,此即涅槃。因此说:“灭尽离欲是诸行之刹那灭。极尽离欲是涅槃。”依此二者之观察而生起者:应知,依灭尽离欲随观而修观,依极尽离欲随观而修道。或者,从所缘上说,观依灭尽离欲随观而生起,由于倾向彼故,依极尽离欲随观而生起;而道则从不迷惑上说,依灭尽离欲随观而生起,从所缘上说,依极尽离欲随观而生起。当知此理。由此类推,此即指示:依“离欲随观”句中所说之理,如“二种灭:灭尽灭与极尽灭”等义释已明,故于离欲处插入灭句,依此处所说“灭尽即诸行坏灭”等理,当知彼之释义。显示巴利原文
Khayoti saṅkhārānaṃ vināso. Virajjanaṃ tesaṃyeva vilujjanaṃ virāgo, khayo eva virāgo khayavirāgo, khaṇikanirodho. Accantamettha etasmiṃ adhigate saṅkhārā virajjanti nirujjhantīti accantavirāgo, nibbānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khayavirāgoti saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇabhaṅgo. Accantavirāgoti nibbāna’’nti. Tadubhayadassanavasena pavattāti khayavirāgānupassanāvasena vipassanāya, accantavirāgānupassanāvasena maggassa pavatti yojetabbā. Ārammaṇato vā vipassanāya khayavirāgānupassanāvasena pavatti, tanninnabhāvato accantavirāgānupassanāvasena, maggassa pana asammohato khayavirāgānupassanāvasena, ārammaṇato accantavirāgānupassanāvasena pavatti veditabbā. Eseva nayoti iminā yasmā virāgānupassīpade vuttanayānusārena ‘‘dve nirodhā khayanirodho ca accantanirodho cā’’ti evamādiatthavaṇṇanaṃ atidissati, tasmā virāgaṭṭhāne nirodhapadaṃ pakkhipitvā ‘‘khayo saṅkhārānaṃ vināso’’tiādinā idha vuttanayena tassa atthavaṇṇanā veditabbā.
“舍遣”是以彼分断或正断的方式,对所应断的舍弃,称为弃舍舍遣。同样,在舍遣一切依着的无为涅槃中,自己投入其中——或以倾向彼,或以彼为所缘而投入——称为投入舍遣。其中,“以彼分断的方式”:无常随观先以彼分断而舍弃常想,在舍弃时,当这一无常随观住于无间、不再生起时,那些以执取“常”为缘的烦恼、以彼为根的诸行,以及以彼二者为根的异熟蕴,未来本应生起,这一切都通过令其不生而舍弃;苦随观等也是如此。因此说:“此观以彼分断的方式,连同蕴、行、烦恼一并舍弃。”见有为的过患,即是见三地诸行中无常等过患;由此舍弃常等性——即与之相反的常想等。以倾向彼,即以胜解趣向彼。投入,即进入,如同跃入其中。连同蕴、行、烦恼一并舍弃:当以道断除烦恼时,由于令诸行成为无果法,诸行及以彼为根的蕴因无生起之可能而称为被舍弃,所以说“道舍弃这一切”。二者,指观智与道智。道智也因在种姓智后见涅槃,故称为随观。显示巴利原文
Paṭinissajjanaṃ pahātabbassa tadaṅgavasena vā samucchedavasena vā pariccajanaṃ pariccāgapaṭinissaggo. Tathā sabbupadhīnaṃ paṭinissaggabhūte visaṅkhāre attano nissajjanaṃ tanninnatāya vā tadārammaṇatāya vā tattha pakkhandanaṃ pakkhandanapaṭinissaggo. Tadaṅgavasenāti ettha aniccānupassanā tāva tadaṅgappahānavasena niccasaññaṃ pariccajati, pariccajantī ca tassā tathā appavattiyaṃ ye ‘‘nicca’’nti gahaṇavasena kilesā tammūlakā ca abhisaṅkhārā tadubhayamūlakā ca vipākakkhandhā anāgate uppajjeyyuṃ, te sabbepi appavattikaraṇavasena pariccajati, tathā dukkhasaññādayo. Tenāha – ‘‘vipassanā hi tadaṅgavasena saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajatī’’ti. Saṅkhatadosadassanenāti saṅkhate tebhūmakasaṅkhāragate aniccatādidosadassanena. Niccādibhāvena tabbiparīte. Tanninnatāyāti tadadhimuttatāya. Pakkhandatīti anupavisati anupavisantaṃ viya hoti. Saddhiṃ khandhābhisaṅkhārehi kilese pariccajatīti maggena kilesesu pariccattesu avipākadhammatāpādanena abhisaṅkhārā tammūlakā ca khandhā anuppattirahabhāvena pariccattā nāma hontīti sabbepi te maggo pariccajatīti vuttaṃ. Ubhayanti vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggañāṇañca. Maggañāṇampi hi gotrabhuñāṇassa anu pacchā nibbānadassanato anupassanāti vuccati.
而这第四组四法,是纯粹依观而说;前三组则依止与观而说。如此,依这四组四法,应知入出息念的修习有十六事。也正依这十六事,应知此修习有大果、大利益。而“比丘们,如此修习的入出息念定……”等,则是依寂静性等显示其大利。也应当见到,由于能断除寻思,它有大利益。因为此定是寂静、微妙、无杂染的乐住,能断除那些障碍定的寻思,使心不再四处驰散,而令心朝向入出息所缘。因此说:“应修习入出息念以断除寻思。”还应知道,作为明与解脱圆满的根本,它也有大利益。此乃世尊所说:显示巴利原文
Idañca catutthacatukkaṃ suddhavipassanāvaseneva vuttaṃ, purimāni pana tīṇi samathavipassanāvasena. Evaṃ catunnaṃ catukkānaṃ vasena soḷasavatthukāya ānāpānassatiyā bhāvanā veditabbā. Evaṃ soḷasavatthuvasena ca ayaṃ ānāpānassati bhāvitā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṃsāti veditabbā. ‘‘Evaṃ bhāvito kho, bhikkhave, ānāpānassatisamādhī’’tiādinā pana santabhāvādivasena mahānisaṃsatā dassitā. Vitakkupacchedasamatthatāyapi cassa mahānisaṃsatā daṭṭhabbā. Ayañhi santapaṇītaasecanakasukhavihārattā samādhiantarāyakarānaṃ vitakkānaṃ vasena ito cito ca cittassa vidhāvanaṃ upacchinditvā ānāpānārammaṇābhimukhameva cittaṃ karoti. Teneva vuttaṃ – ‘‘ānāpānassati bhāvetabbā vitakkupacchedāyā’’ti (a. ni. 9.1; udā. 31). Vijjāvimuttipāripūriyā mūlabhāvenapi cassā mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“比丘们,修习、多修习入出息念,能圆满四念住;修习、多修习四念住,能圆满七觉支;修习、多修习七觉支,能圆满明与解脱。”(《中部》第147经)显示巴利原文
‘‘Ānāpānassati, bhikkhave, bhāvitā bahulīkatā cattāro satipaṭṭhāne paripūreti, cattāro satipaṭṭhānā bhāvitā bahulīkatā satta bojjhaṅge paripūrenti, satta bojjhaṅgā bhāvitā bahulīkatā vijjāvimuttiṃ paripūrentī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.147).
再者,应知由于能令最后的入出息被了知,它也具有大利益。此即世尊所说:显示巴利原文
Apica carimakānaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ viditabhāvakaraṇatopissā mahānisaṃsatā veditabbā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā –
“罗睺罗,如此修习、如此多修的入出息念,那些最后的入出息,也都在了知中息灭,并非不了知而息灭。”显示巴利原文
‘‘Evaṃ bhāvitāya, rāhula, ānāpānassatiyā evaṃ bahulīkatāya yepi te carimakā assāsapassāsā, tepi viditāva nirujjhanti, no aviditā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.121).
其中,从灭的角度说,有三种最后:有最后、禅那最后、死心最后。因为在诸有中,入出息于欲有中生起,在色有、无色有中不生起,故称为有最后。在诸禅中,入出息在前三禅中生起,在第四禅中不生起,故称为禅那最后。而那些在死心之前、与第十六心生起、并与死心一同息灭的,则称为死心最后。此处所说的最后,即是指这些。显示巴利原文
Tattha nirodhavasena tayo carimakā bhavacarimakā jhānacarimakā cuticarimakāti. Bhavesu hi kāmabhave assāsapassāsā pavattanti, rūpārūpabhavesu na pavattanti, tasmā te bhavacarimakā. Jhānesu purime jhānattaye pavattanti, catutthe nappavattanti, tasmā te jhānacarimakā. Ye pana cuticittassa purato soḷasamena cittena saddhiṃ uppajjitvā cuticittena saha nirujjhanti, ime cuticarimakā nāma. Ime idha carimakāti adhippetā.
据说,这些对于专修此业处的比丘而言是分明的,因为他已善巧把握了入出息念的所缘。当他作意死心前第十六心的生起刹那为‘生’时,其生对他们也是分明的;当他作意其‘住’时,其住对他们也是分明的;当他作意其‘灭’时,其灭对他们也是分明的。修习其他业处而证得阿拉汉的比丘,其寿限或有限定,或无限定;但修习此入出息念十六事而证得阿拉汉者,其寿限必定是限定的。他了知‘我的寿行将存续如此之久,此后不再延续’后,便以自法性妥善完成照顾身体、穿衣、披衣等一切事务,然后闭上双眼,如同住于拘吒山寺的帝沙长老、住于大迦兰耆耶寺的大帝沙长老、在提婆子国托钵的帝沙长老,以及住于心叶山寺的两位兄弟长老一般。显示巴利原文
Ime kira imaṃ kammaṭṭhānamanuyuttassa bhikkhuno pākaṭā honti ānāpānārammaṇassa suṭṭhu pariggahitattā. Cuticittassa hi purato soḷasamacittassa uppādakkhaṇe uppādaṃ āvajjayato uppādopi nesaṃ pākaṭo hoti, ṭhitiṃ āvajjayato ṭhitipi nesaṃ pākaṭā hoti, bhaṅgaṃ āvajjayato bhaṅgopi nesaṃ pākaṭo hoti. Ito aññaṃ kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāvetvā arahattappattassa bhikkhuno hi āyuantaraṃ paricchinnaṃ vā hoti aparicchinnaṃ vā, imaṃ pana soḷasavatthukaṃ ānāpānassatiṃ bhāvetvā arahattappattassa āyuantaraṃ paricchinnameva hoti. So ‘‘ettakaṃ dāni me āyusaṅkhārā pavattissanti, na ito para’’nti ñatvā attano dhammatāya eva sarīrapaṭijaggananivāsanapārupanādīni sabbakiccāni katvā akkhīni nimīleti koṭapabbatavihāravāsitissatthero viya, mahākarañjiyavihāravāsimahātissatthero viya, devaputtaraṭṭhe piṇḍapātikatthero viya, cittalapabbatavihāravāsino dvebhātikattherā viya ca.
此处,以一个事例阐明:据说,兄弟二位长老中的一位,在满月布萨日诵完巴帝摩卡后,由比丘僧众围绕,回到自己的住所,站在经行处。月明分的傍晚时分,他望见天空犹如倾泻的乳流一般被月光遍洒,地面宛如铺开的银布或铺满细沙,便说:‘这时光确实可爱,这地方也正合我意,这苦担还要背负多久呢?’他观察自己的寿行后,对比丘僧众说:‘诸位曾见过比丘如何般涅槃吗?’其中有些人说:‘我们见过坐在座位上般涅槃的。’有些人说:‘我们见过在空中结跏趺坐般涅槃的。’长老说:‘现在我将为你们示现正在经行中般涅槃。’于是,他在经行处画了一条横线,说:‘我从经行处这一端走到另一端,折返时,脚一触到这条线,便入般涅槃。’说完,他从经行处走下,行至另一端,转身返回,在一只脚踏上那条线的刹那,便般涅槃了。显示巴利原文
Tatridaṃ ekavatthuparidīpanaṃ – dvebhātikattherānaṃ kireko puṇṇamuposathadivase pātimokkhaṃ osāretvā bhikkhusaṅghaparivuto attano vasanaṭṭhānaṃ gantvā caṅkame ṭhito juṇhapakkhe padosavelāyaṃ candālokena samantato āsiñcamānakhīradhāraṃ viya gaganatalaṃ rajatapaṭṭasadisaṃ vālikāsanthatañca bhūmibhāgaṃ disvā ‘‘ramaṇīyo vatāyaṃ kālo, deso ca mama ajjhāsayasadiso, kīva ciraṃ nu kho ayaṃ dukkhabhāro vahitabbo’’ti attano āyusaṅkhāre upadhāretvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ āha – ‘‘tumhehi kathaṃ parinibbāyantā bhikkhū diṭṭhapubbā’’ti. Tatra keci āhaṃsu – ‘‘amhehi āsane nisinnakāva parinibbāyantā diṭṭhapubbā’’ti. Keci ‘‘amhehi ākāse pallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā nisinnakā’’ti. Thero āha – ‘‘ahaṃ dāni vo caṅkamantameva parinibbāyamānaṃ dassayissāmī’’ti. Tato caṅkame tiriyaṃ lekhaṃ katvā ‘‘ahaṃ ito caṅkamakoṭito parakoṭiṃ gantvā nivattamāno imaṃ lekhaṃ patvā parinibbāyissāmī’’ti vatvā caṅkamaṃ oruyha parabhāgaṃ gantvā nivattamāno ekena pādena lekhaṃ akkantakkhaṇeyeva parinibbāyīti.
第一施设论解释显示巴利原文
Paṭhamapaññattikathāvaṇṇanā
167 虽然圣者们并未自行结束自己的生命,也未相互结束生命,更未前往鹿斑外道、沙门伪装者处教唆,然而,由于在以上述三种方式死亡的人中也有圣者存在,故说‘因夹杂了圣者’。因为圣者们不曾杀生,不曾教唆,也不曾随喜。再者,也有在凡夫时自行杀害自己、临死时增长毗婆舍那而证得圣道后死去的人,其中亦有圣者存在。依此道理,由于自行结束生命者中也有圣者,因夹杂了圣者,所以未用‘愚痴人’一词,而说‘那些比丘’。所谓‘诸比丘,那些比丘如何竟自行结束自己的生命呢?’在此句中,不说‘愚痴人’,而言‘那些比丘’。显示巴利原文
167. Yadipi ariyā neva attanāva attānaṃ jīvitā voropesuṃ, nāññamaññampi jīvitā voropesuṃ, nāpi migalaṇḍikaṃ samaṇakuttakaṃ upasaṅkamitvā samādapesuṃ, tathāpi yathāvuttehi tīhi pakārehi matānaṃ antare ariyānampi sabbhāvato ‘‘ariyapuggalamissakattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi ariyā pāṇātipātaṃ kariṃsu na samādapesuṃ, nāpi samanuññā ahesuṃ. Atha vā puthujjanakāle attanāva attānaṃ ghātetvā maraṇasamaye vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā ariyamaggaṃ paṭilabhitvā matānampi ariyānaṃ sabbhāvato imināva nayena attanāva attānaṃ jīvitā voropanassa ariyānampi sabbhāvato ariyapuggalamissakattā ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti na vuttaṃ. ‘‘Te bhikkhū’’ti vuttanti ‘‘kathañhi nāma te, bhikkhave, bhikkhū attanāpi attānaṃ jīvitā voropessantī’’ti ettha ‘‘moghapurisā’’ti avatvā ‘‘te bhikkhū’’ti vuttaṃ.
非施设论解释显示巴利原文
Anupaññattikathāvaṇṇanā
168 所谓“于女人有系缚心”,是指因欲贪而染著、有所期待的状态,因此说“染著、有所期待”。赞叹死亡的功德,是以先显示生命的过患为前提的,所以讲“显示了生命的过患后”。“你以此邪恶、难活的生命做什么?”这是显示生命的过患。“你死了比活着更好”等,则应视为对死亡功德的赞叹。由于贪等极度增盛,未经审察而作出的粗暴行为,称为罪过,因此说“罪过即粗暴行为,贪等烦恼增盛”。为何这样说?这是六群比丘所说。“已死”一词如同“已去”等,是表示状态的词,所以说“你的死”。“已作时”即已作死亡之时;或者,“时”是死亡的别名,因此“已作时”意即已作死亡。所以说“作了时,死了”。“天”指生于天界者,故说“生于天界者”。“具足”即相应。“成为具足者”即完全成为一体。显示巴利原文
168. Itthīsu paṭibaddhacittatā nāma chandarāgena sārattatā sāpekkhabhāvoti āha ‘‘sārattā apekkhavanto’’ti. Maraṇassa guṇakittanaṃ jīvite ādīnavadassanapubbaṅgamanti āha ‘‘jīvite ādīnavaṃ dassetvā’’ti. ‘‘Kiṃ tuyhiminā pāpakena dujjīvitenā’’ti idaṃ jīvite ādīnavadassanaṃ. ‘‘Mataṃ te jīvitā seyyo’’tiādi pana maraṇaguṇakittananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Lobhādīnaṃ ativiya ussannattā anupaparikkhitvā kataṃ sāhasikakammaṃ kibbisanti vuccatīti āha – ‘‘kibbisaṃ sāhasikakammaṃ lobhādikilesussada’’nti. Kasmā idaṃ vuccatīti chabbaggiyānaṃyevedaṃ vacanaṃ. Mata-saddo ‘‘gata’’ntiādīsu viya bhāvavacanoti āha ‘‘tava maraṇa’’nti. Katakāloti katamaraṇakālo. Atha vā kāloti maraṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā katakāloti katamaraṇoti attho. Tenevāha ‘‘kālaṃ katvā, maritvā’’ti. Divi bhavā dibbāti āha ‘‘devaloke uppannehī’’ti. Samappitoti yutto. Samaṅgībhūtoti sammadeva ekībhāvaṃ gato.
词分别解释显示巴利原文
Padabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
172 “ussukkavacana”是指先前动作的表述。因为在表述同一主体先后动作时,先行动词的表述有此语法名称。对于“sañcicca”(故意)一词,在词分别中,本应随顺字面,依先前动作之义而解释为“知已、识别已、思已、违犯已”,却未如此做,而是以“知者、识者”作补特伽罗施设,并以“思已、违犯已、违犯”表明其目的而说明夺命,因此说“未注重字面”。虽然笼统地说“知者”,但由于说了“故意夺取人的生命”,此处的知是以有情为所缘,故说“知为有情”,即知“这是有情”。因为“有情”在世俗上指众生,在胜义上指命根。不说“知是人”而说“知是有情”,是为了显示:即使不知道“这是人”,仅以众生想而行杀,也构成波罗夷。正因如此,在《羊群分别》中,显示了以羊想杀害人类众生者犯波罗夷。因此,不说“是人”,而笼统地说“知是有情”。显示巴利原文
172.Ussukkavacananti pubbakālakiriyāvacanaṃ. Ayañhi samānakattukesu pubbāparakālakiriyāvacanesu pubbakālakiriyāvacanassa niruttivohāro. Sañciccāti imassa padassa ‘‘jānitvā sañjānitvā cecca abhivitaritvā’’ti evaṃ pubbakālakiriyāvasena byañjanānurūpaṃ katvā padabhājane vattabbe tathā avatvā ‘‘jānanto sañjānanto’’ti puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā ‘‘cecca abhivitaritvā vītikkamo’’ti jīvitā voropanassa ca tadatthavasena niddiṭṭhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘byañjane ādaraṃ akatvā’’ti. ‘‘Jānanto’’ti avisesena vuttepi ‘‘sañcicca manussaviggahaṃ jīvitā voropeyyā’’ti vuttattā pāṇavisayamettha jānananti āha ‘‘pāṇoti jānanto’’ti, satto ayanti jānantoti attho. Pāṇoti hi vohārato satto, paramatthato jīvitindriyaṃ vuccati. ‘‘Manussaviggahoti jānanto’’ti avatvā ‘‘pāṇoti jānanto’’ti vacanaṃ ‘‘manusso aya’’nti ajānitvā kevalaṃ sattasaññāya ghātentassapi pārājikabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Teneva eḷakacatukke (pārā. aṭṭha. 2.174) eḷakasaññāya manussapāṇaṃ vadhantassa pārājikāpatti dassitā. Tasmā ‘‘manussaviggaho’’ti avatvā ‘‘pāṇoti jānanto’’ti avisesena vuttaṃ.
“共知”一词中,“共”(saṃ-)字与“俱”(saha-)字同义,故说“即以此了知有情的行相而俱知”,意思是:即以此了知有情的行相,俱知“我断其命”。虽然同一心识不可能同时以两个对象为所缘,以“有情”为所缘的了知与以“我断其命”为所缘的了知不可能在同一刹那生起,但此处是就未舍离“有情”之想而了知“我杀”来说的,因此说“即以此……俱知”。因此,“俱”的意思就是“不舍弃”。有些论师则说:“如同以遍知智于已见自性的诸法上,以度遍知智安立三特相,在同一刹那了知‘色是无常’等特相与自性一样,此人也是在‘我杀此有情’时,与自己的行为俱时了知。”然而,其他阿阇梨对此也不这么说。显示巴利原文
Sañjānantoti ettha saha-saddena samānattho saṃ-saddoti āha – ‘‘teneva pāṇajānanākārena saddhiṃjānanto’’ti, teneva pāṇajānanākārena saddhiṃ jīvitā voropemīti jānantoti attho. Yadipi ekasseva cittassa ubhayārammaṇabhāvāsambhavato pāṇoti jānanena saddhiṃ jīvitā voropemīti jānanaṃ ekakkhaṇe na sambhavati, pāṇotisaññaṃ pana avijahitvā māremīti jānanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘teneva…pe… saddhiṃ jānanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā saddhinti avijahitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Keci pana ‘‘ñātapariññāya diṭṭhasabhāvesu dhammesu tīraṇapariññāya tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā ‘rūpaṃ anicca’ntiādinā sabhāvena saddhiṃ ekakkhaṇe aniccādilakkhaṇajānanaṃ viya ‘imaṃ pāṇaṃ māremī’ti attano kiriyāya saddhiṃyeva jānātī’’ti vadanti. Apare pana ācariyā tatthāpi evaṃ na kathenti.
“以杀意而思惟已”:即依‘我杀此人’的杀意而思惟。“筹划已”:即依‘我杀’或‘不杀’而以心决断。“现前已”:即作出决定。因此说“遣出无疑惑之心”。“依方便”:即依亲手等方便。“如此生起者”:即依上述方式生起者。虽然“故意”一词是未完成语,而“断其命”一词是后时行为语,由此已说明了完全究竟的违犯,但为了显示“故意”一词所指的尚未究竟的违犯也达到究竟,故对“违犯”一词作分别。因此说:“这样就说明了‘故意’一词的究竟义。”显示巴利原文
Vadhakacetanāvasena cetetvāti ‘‘imaṃ māremī’’ti vadhakacetanāya cintetvā. Pakappetvāti ‘‘vadhāmi na’’nti evaṃ cittena paricchinditvā. Abhivitaritvāti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā. Tenevāha ‘‘nirāsaṅkacittaṃ pesetvā’’ti. Upakkamavasenāti sāhatthikādiupakkamavasena. Evaṃ pavattassāti evaṃ yathāvuttavidhinā pavattassa. Kiñcāpi ‘‘sañciccā’’ti imassa vippakatavacanattā ‘‘jīvitā voropeyyā’’ti imināva aparakālakiriyāvacanena sabbathā pariniṭṭhitavītikkamo vutto, tathāpi ‘‘sañciccā’’ti iminā vuccamānaṃ apariyositavītikkamampi avasānaṃ pāpetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘vītikkamo’’ti padabhājanaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘ayaṃ sañciccasaddassa sikhāppatto atthoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti.
“从最初开始”:即从与结生识俱生的羯罗蓝开始。“卧处”即安卧于此中;母胎所摄的胎便是这些(卵生、胎生)的卧处,故称“胎卧者”,这是就卵生和胎生而言。“于母胎中”等语,是为显示一切最微细的有情之体而说,并非为了限定波罗夷事的范围。化生、湿生的人类同样是波罗夷事。而且,这最初的人形并不能被断命。因为与结生心俱生起的三十种业生色,在它们存续期间,仅有十六个有分心生灭。在此间隙,已结生的胎儿或母亲并无危难。此处确实没有死亡容身的余地。因为在十六心刹那的时间里,胎儿不会死亡,那时死心不可能生起;母亲也不会在未超过那段时间后就紧接着死去,因为那时根本不可能取胎。由于心被取,其余非色法也因不相离而被取,且名身唯依色身支持而存在于五蕴有中,故说“完整的五蕴结生也被显示”。此处“完整的五蕴结生”应理解为圆满无缺的色等五蕴结生,而非“完整的五蕴有中的结生”。因此说“故彼初心……羯罗蓝色,此即最初的人形”。“当日生的羊的毛为生毛”,这是某些人的说法。“喜马拉雅地方所生羊的毛为生毛”,这是另一些人的说法。据说,喜马拉显示巴利原文
Ādito paṭṭhāyāti paṭisandhiviññāṇena saddhiṃ uppannakalalarūpato paṭṭhāya. Sayanti etthāti seyyā, mātukucchisaṅkhāto gabbho seyyā etesanti gabbhaseyyakā, aṇḍajā jalābujā ca. Tesaṃ gabbhaseyyakānaṃ vasena sabbasukhumattabhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘yaṃ mātukucchismi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, na pārājikavatthuniyamanatthaṃ. Opapātikasaṃsedajāpi hi manussā pārājikavatthumeva. Na cevimaṃ sabbapaṭhamaṃ manussaviggahaṃ jīvitā voropetuṃ sakkā. Paṭisandhicittena hi saddhiṃ tiṃsa kammajarūpāni nibbattanti, tesu pana ṭhitesuyeva soḷasa bhavaṅgacittāni uppajjitvā nirujjhanti. Etasmiṃ antare gahitapaṭisandhikassa dārakassa vā mātuyā vā panassa antarāyo natthi. Ayañhi maraṇassa anokāso nāma. Ekasmiñhi soḷasacittakkhaṇe kāle dārakassa maraṇaṃ natthi tadā cuticittassa asambhavato, mātuyāpi tattakaṃ kālaṃ anatikkamitvā tadanantareyeva cavanadhammāya gabbhaggahaṇasseva asambhavato. Cittaggahaṇeneva avinābhāvato sesaarūpadhammānampi gahitattā rūpakāyupatthambhitasseva ca nāmakāyassa pañcavokāre pavattisabbhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘sakalāpi pañcavokārapaṭisandhi dassitā hotī’’ti. Tattha sakalāpipañcavokārapaṭisandhīti paripuṇṇā anūnā rūpādipañcakkhandhānaṃ paṭisandhīti evamattho gahetabbo, na pana sakalāpi pañcavokārabhave paṭisandhīti. Tenevāha ‘‘tasmā tañca paṭhamaṃ cittaṃ…pe… kalalarūpanti ayaṃ sabbapaṭhamo manussaviggaho’’ti. ‘‘Tadahujātassa eḷakassa lomaṃ jātiuṇṇā’’ti keci. ‘‘Himavantappadese jātimantaeḷakalomaṃ jātiuṇṇā’’ti apare. Sukhumajātilomā eva kira keci eḷakā himavante vijjanti. ‘‘Gabbhaṃ phāletvā gahitaeḷakalomaṃ jātiuṇṇā’’ti aññe.
“以一缕”,是依小诵师之说而言。即如此说:“胎卧有情于结生刹那,五蕴不后不先,一时显现。于彼刹那显现的名为羯罗蓝的色相续,极为微细,仅如一只小蝇振翅便可吹落之量。”然后又驳斥说:“此说太过,应如将细针投入油中取出后,油滴流下而停于针尖的一滴之量。”又驳斥此说:“如从油中取出一根头发,油滴流下而停于其尖端的一滴之量。”又驳斥此说:“此国人头发劈为八份,其中一份之量等于北俱卢洲人的头发;如从澄清的芝麻油中取出该头发,油滴停于尖端的一滴之量。”又驳斥此说:“名为生毛者极细,取其一丝投入澄清的芝麻油中取出,油滴流下而停于尖端的一滴之量。”这些是小诵师所说。而相应诵师则说:“以三缕生毛所纺之线,其尖端所停的油滴之量,即为羯罗蓝的量。”“澄清”,即以同义词说明“清”的意思,说为“极清”。显示巴利原文
Ekena aṃsunāti khuddakabhāṇakānaṃ matena vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘gabbhaseyyakasattānaṃ paṭisandhikkhaṇe pañcakkhandhā apacchā apure ekato pātubhavanti. Tasmiṃ khaṇe pātubhūtā kalalasaṅkhātā rūpasantati parittā hoti khuddakamakkhikāya ekavāyāmena pātabbamattā’’ti vatvā puna ‘‘atibahuṃ etaṃ, saṇhasūciyā tele pakkhipitvā ukkhittāya paggharitvā agge ṭhitabindumatta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tampi paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘ekakese telato uddharitvā gahite tassa paggharitvā agge ṭhitabindumatta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tampi paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘imasmiṃ janapade manussānaṃ kese aṭṭhadhā phālite tato ekakoṭṭhāsappamāṇo uttarakurukānaṃ keso, tassa pasannatilatelato uddhaṭassa agge ṭhitabindumatta’’nti vuttaṃ. Tampi paṭikkhipitvā ‘‘jātiuṇṇā nāma sukhumā, tassā ekaaṃsuno pasannatilatele pakkhipitvā uddhaṭassa paggharitvā agge ṭhitabindumatta’’nti (vibha. aṭṭha. 26) khuddakabhāṇakehi vuttaṃ. Saṃyuttabhāṇakā pana ‘‘tīhi jātiuṇṇaṃsūhi katasuttagge saṇṭhitatelabinduppamāṇaṃ kalalaṃ hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.235) vadanti. ‘‘Accha’’nti vuttamatthaṃ pariyāyantarena vibhāveti ‘‘vippasanna’’nti.
“熟酥”,即澄清的酥。“如”字应移引于此,此处所许的熟酥亦如前所说的油滴之量。“如是色类”,指由前所述之量与形所限定者。或者,“如是色类”即如是色、如是形。又或,“类”即分类,即相似性的分类、相似性的获得。具有如是色类者,即于色与形上获得相似性,故称“如是色类”。“称为羯罗蓝”,即依相续而转起、由四大及所造色所构成的有情自体,称为羯罗蓝。“寿百二十岁者”仅为举例,因为亦有人类寿量少于或多于此。显示巴利原文
Sappimaṇḍoti pasannasappi. Yathāti idaṃ ānetvā etthāpi sambandhitabbaṃ, sappimaṇḍopi vuttabinduppamāṇova idha adhippeto. Evaṃvaṇṇappaṭibhāganti vuttappamāṇasaṇṭhānaparicchinnaṃ . Atha vā evaṃvaṇṇappaṭibhāganti evaṃvaṇṇaṃ evaṃsaṇṭhānañca. Paṭibhajanaṃ vā paṭibhāgo, sadisatābhajanaṃ sadisatāpattīti attho. Evaṃvidho vaṇṇappaṭibhāgo rūpato saṇṭhānato ca sadisatāpatti etassāti evaṃvaṇṇappaṭibhāgaṃ. Kalalanti pavuccatīti bhūtupādārūpasaṅkhāto santānavasena pavattamāno attabhāvo kalalaṃ nāmāti kathīyati. Vīsavassasatāyukassāti nidassanamattaṃ tato ūnādhikāyukamanussānampi sabbhāvato.
“在羯罗蓝(凝滑)阶段”,是指第一个七天期间,依相续而转起、称为羯罗蓝的自体,可被剥夺生命,即就此而言。“从此以后”,是指第二个七天等期间,达到頞部陀(疱)等状态,即就此而言。难道不是已生起的诸法,以其自性灭而灭尽,中间不可能作断灭吗?既然如此,为何说“因此……断绝、阻碍命根”呢?答:“因为命根的相续被破坏……故说为阻碍”。如何理解此义?称“此义”等。显示巴利原文
Kalalakālepīti paṭhamasattāhabbhantare yaṃ santativasena pavattamānaṃ kalalasaṅkhātaṃ attabhāvaṃ jīvitā voropetuṃ sakkā, taṃ sandhāya vadati. Tato vā uddhanti dutiyasattāhādīsu abbudādibhāvappattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Nanu ca uppannānaṃ dhammānaṃ sarasanirodheneva nirujjhanato antarā upacchedo na sakkā kātuṃ, ‘‘tasmā…pe… jīvitindriyaṃ upacchindati uparodhetī’’ti kasmā vuttanti āha – ‘‘jīvitindriyassa paveṇīghaṭanaṃ…pe… uparodhetīti vuccatī’’ti. Kathañcāyamattho viññāyatīti āha ‘‘svāyamattho’’tiādi.
此处有言(《心义灯》1.5;《如是语注》74)——在刹那刹那以坏灭为自性的诸行中,谁为杀者?谁为所杀?若是心与心所的相续,因其无色,不能以切割、分裂等加以破坏,亦不可被破坏。若是色相续,因其无心,犹如木桩,故如死尸上以切割等不能成立杀生。进而,杀生的加行,如所说的打击、敲击等,是施加于过去诸行、未来诸行,抑或现在诸行?其中,于过去、未来不可能,以他们不存在故;于现在诸行,因刹那性,以自性灭为自性故,对于正趣向坏灭者,加行成为无用;又坏灭无因,故无有以打击、敲击等加行为因的死亡;又诸行无有作者,彼加行属于谁?由于刹那性,于作用终结时与杀意同时坏灭的所缘境,谁又被杀生业所系缚呢?显示巴利原文
Etthāha (sārattha. ṭī. 1.5; itivu. aṭṭha. 74) – khaṇe khaṇe nirujjhanasabhāvesu saṅkhāresu ko hanti, ko vā haññati, yadi cittacetasikasantāno, so arūpatāya na chedanabhedanādivasena vikopanasamattho, napi vikopanīyo. Atha rūpasantāno, so acetanatāya kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamoti na tattha chedanādinā pāṇātipāto labbhati yathā matasarīre. Payogopi pāṇātipātassa yathāvutto paharaṇappahārādiko atītesu vā saṅkhāresu bhaveyya anāgatesu vā paccuppannesu vā, tattha na tāva atītānāgatesu sambhavati tesaṃ abhāvato, paccuppannesu ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikattā saraseneva nirujjhanasabhāvatāya vināsābhimukhesu nippayojano payogo siyā, vināsassa ca kāraṇarahitattā na paharaṇappahārādippayogahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, nirīhakatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ kassa so payogo, khaṇikattā vadhādhippāyasamakālabhijjanakassa kiriyāpariyosānakaālānavaṭṭhānato kassa vā pāṇātipātakammabaddhoti?
所谓“杀”者,即与杀意相应的诸行聚集——名为“有情”者被杀。由彼所发起的杀生加行之相,令无间灭去的识与命根成为死之假名生起的所依;若未作杀生加行,则本应生起的色与非色法之聚集,即被杀害。或者,纯粹的心与心所的相续,虽非杀生加行的直接对象,但在五蕴有中,彼依止于色相续而转起;当他人以断绝命根的加行,破坏了能生起彼(心与心所)的、与彼相似的色法之生起时,此相续便被断绝。因此,杀生并非不可能,杀生亦非无因,加行亦非无用。因为于现在的诸行,依所施加的加行,其无间本应生起的诸行聚,便不生起故。由于刹那的诸行其刹那灭,在此不被视为“死”;而相续死又如所说之理,是有因的,故死非无因。又,杀生加行并非无有作者,因为即使在无作者的诸行中,仅以存在而助成,于决定能生起各自相应果报的诸因中,得安立“作者”之假名,如说“灯照亮”、“月是月”一般。再者,并非单纯的与杀意俱的心与心所聚即被认作杀生,因为唯承认依相续而安立者;且依相续而转起的灯等,可见其作用成就。因此,确实有被杀生业所系缚者。此理趣于不与取等中,亦应随其所应而阐明。显示巴利原文
Vuccate – vadhakacetanāsahito saṅkhārānaṃ puñjo sattasaṅkhāto hanti. Tena pavattitavadhappayoganimittaṃ apagatusmāviññāṇajīvitindriyo matavohārappavattinibandhano yathāvuttavadhappayogākaraṇe uppajjanāraho rūpārūpadhammasamūho haññati, kevalo vā cittacetasikasantāno vadhappayogāvisayabhāvepi tassa pañcavokārabhave rūpasantānādhīnavuttitāya rūpasantāne parena payojitajīvitindriyupacchedakapayogavasena tannibbattivinibandhakavisadisarūpuppattiyā vihate vicchedo hotīti na pāṇātipātassa asambhavo, napi ahetuko pāṇātipāto, na ca payogo nippayojano paccuppannesu saṅkhāresu katappayogavasena tadanantaraṃ uppajjanārahassa saṅkhārakalāpassa tathā anuppattito. Khaṇikānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikamaraṇassa idha maraṇabhāvena anadhippetattā santatimaraṇassa ca yathāvuttanayena sahetukabhāvato na ahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, na ca katturahito pāṇātipātappayogo nirīhakesupi saṅkhāresu sannihitatāmattena upakārakesu attano attano anurūpaphaluppādane niyatesu kāraṇesu kattuvohārasiddhito yathā ‘‘padīpo pakāseti, nisākaro candimā’’ti. Na ca kevalassa vadhādhippāyasahabhuno cittacetasikakalāpassa pāṇātipāto icchito santānavasena avaṭṭhitasseva paṭijānanato, santānavasena pavattamānānañca padīpādīnaṃ atthakiriyāsiddhi dissatīti attheva pāṇātipātena kammunā baddho. Ayañca vicāro adinnādānādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ vibhāvetabbo.
“不能剥夺”:即不能以加行剥夺。“仅七八个速行心刹那”:是依小诵师的意见而说。然而,合诵师则先说“色相续、非色相续”两种相续,而后说:“如踏水而行者,直至岸上被踏的水痕未澄清;从远路来者,直至身上的热气未平息;从热处来而入于内室者,直至黑暗未消失;于母胎内作意业处后,日间开窗而观者,直至眼的颤动未止息——此名为色相续。二三个速行心刹那,名为非色相续。”又说:“此二者皆名为相续现在。”中诵师则说:“摄于一或二个相续刹那的,是相续现在。其中,于黑暗中坐后,去往光明处者,所缘并非立即明显。然而,直至彼明显,其间转起的色相续或非色相续,应知名为一或二个相续刹那。于光明处行走后,进入内室者,色亦非立即明显。然而,直至彼明显,其间转起的色相续或非色相续,应知为一或二个相续刹那。又,于远处站立,虽见染衣者的手势及敲钟击鼓的动作,亦非立即闻声。然而,直至彼闻声,于此间亦应知为一或二个相续刹那。”于此,从光明处进入内室者,乃至先前已坐于彼处者,直至色境明显,其间一半时间近于不明显,一半时间近于明显,总合此二者。显示巴利原文
Voropetuṃ na sakkāti upakkamena voropetuṃ na sakkā. Sattaṭṭhajavanavāramattanti khuddakabhāṇakānaṃ matena vuttaṃ. Saṃyuttabhāṇakā pana ‘‘rūpasantati arūpasantatī’’ti dve santatiyo vatvā ‘‘udakaṃ akkamitvā gatassa yāva tīre akkantaudakalekhā na vippasīdati, addhānato āgatassa yāva kāye usumabhāvo na vūpasammati, ātapā āgantvā gabbhaṃ paviṭṭhassa yāva andhakārabhāvo na vigacchati, antogabbhe kammaṭṭhānaṃ manasi karitvā divā vātapānaṃ vivaritvā olokentassa yāva akkhīnaṃ phandanabhāvo na vūpasammati, ayaṃ rūpasantati nāma. Dve tayo javanavārā arūpasantati nāmā’’ti vatvā ‘‘tadubhayampi santatipaccuppannaṃ nāmā’’ti vadanti . Majjhimabhāṇakā pana vadanti ‘‘ekadvesantativārapariyāpannaṃ santatipaccuppannaṃ. Tattha andhakāre nisīditvā ālokaṭṭhānaṃ gatassa na ca tāva ārammaṇaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Yāva pana taṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, etthantare pavattā rūpasantati arūpasantati vā ekadvesantativārā nāmāti veditabbā. Ālokaṭṭhāne caritvā ovarakaṃ paviṭṭhassapi na tāva sahasā rūpaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti. Yāva pana taṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, etthantare pavattā rūpasantati arūpasantati vā ekadvesantativārā veditabbā. Dūre ṭhatvā pana rajakānaṃ hatthavikāraṃ ghaṇṭibheriākoṭanavikārañca disvāpi na tāva saddaṃ suṇāti. Yāva pana taṃ suṇāti, etasmimpi antare ekadvesantativārā veditabbā’’ti. Ettha ca ālokaṭṭhānato ovarakaṃ paviṭṭhassa pageva tattha nisinnassa yāva rūpagataṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, tattha upaḍḍhavelā avibhūtappāyā, upaḍḍhavelā vibhūtappāyā tadubhayaṃ gahetvā ‘‘dvesantativārā’’ti vuttaṃ, tayidaṃ na sabbasādhāraṇaṃ, ekaccassa sīghampi pākaṭaṃ hotīti ‘‘ekadvesantativārā’’ti ekaggahaṇampi kataṃ.
“同类相续之力”是指以善、不善、喜、舍等同类相续之力。由此显示了无色相续。而“仅七八个速行刹那的量”应理解为仅就欲界速行而言,并非就其他速行而言。因为它们并非时间有限,其间生起的有分等也应视为包含在内。然而,“只要从热处而来……”等,则显示了色法相续。“成为黑暗”是指黑暗不消失。此处,相续现在在注释书中被提及,而经中则为分位现在。正如在《贤善一夜经》中,针对分位现在而说:“贤友,意与诸法,此二者皆为现在。若识于彼现在中被欲贪所系缚,由于识被欲贪所系缚,便欢喜于彼;欢喜于彼者,即被卷入现在诸法中。”在此,“意”指与相应俱的识。“诸法”指所缘法。或者,“意”指意处,“诸法”指受等无色蕴。“此二者皆为现在”的意思是:此二者是分位现在。“识”指渴爱识。因为此识于彼现在中因欲贪而被系缚。“欢喜”指以渴爱、邪见之欢喜而欢喜。如此之人,由于未遍知事理,便被卷入那些现在法中,即被渴爱、邪见所牵引。在此,由于“十二处为一现在”的说法,可知于彼处生起的欲贪是以分位现在为所缘,而非以刹那现在为所缘。显示巴利原文
Sabhāgasantativasenāti kusalākusalasomanassupekkhādinā sabhāgasantativasena. Iminā arūpasantati dassitā. Sattaṭṭhajavanavāramattanti ca kāmāvacarajavanavaseneva veditabbaṃ, na itarajavanavasena. Na hi te parimitakālā, antarā pavattabhavaṅgādayopi tadantogadhāti daṭṭhabbā. Yāva vā uṇhato āgantvātiādinā pana rūpasantatiṃ dasseti. Andhakāraṃ hotīti andhakāraṃ na vigacchati. Santatipaccuppannañcettha aṭṭhakathāsu āgataṃ, addhāpaccuppannaṃ sutte. Tathā hi bhaddekarattasutte addhāpaccuppannaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yo cāvuso mano, ye ca dhammā, ubhayametaṃ paccuppannaṃ, tasmiṃ ce paccuppanne chandarāgapaṭibaddhaṃ hoti viññāṇaṃ, chandarāgapaṭibaddhattā viññāṇassa tadabhinandati, tadabhinandanto paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīratī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.284) vuttaṃ. Ettha hi manoti sasampayuttaṃ viññāṇamāha. Dhammāti ārammaṇadhammā. Manoti vā manāyatanaṃ. Dhammāti vedanādayo arūpakkhandhā. Ubhayametaṃ paccuppannanti addhāpaccuppannaṃ etaṃ ubhayaṃ hotīti attho. Viññāṇanti nikantiviññāṇaṃ. Tañhi tasmiṃ paccuppanne chandarāgavasena paṭibaddhaṃ hoti. Abhinandatīti taṇhādiṭṭhābhinandanāhi abhinandati . Tathābhūto ca vatthupariññāya abhāvato tesu paccuppannesu dhammesu saṃhīrati, taṇhādiṭṭhīhi ākaḍḍhīyatīti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘dvādasāyatanāni ekaṃ paccuppanna’’nti āgatattā tattha pavatto chandarāgo addhāpaccuppannārammaṇo, na khaṇapaccuppannārammaṇoti viññāyati.
“有情”指蕴的相续。因在此处,“有情”是施设。命根指色命根与无色命根。若色命根遭到破坏,其余(无色命根)也因其与彼的关联而坏灭。所谓“即如前所述”,是指前述杀害命根的方式。“断命”即令具有自然坠落性质者,在其间极为迅速地坠落,意即不予以缓慢坠落之机,而令其迅速坠落。又,“断命”是超越、以刀杖等制伏而令其坠落。“杀生”即杀害有情。当某一思心所现行时,作为命根所依的诸大种,由于加行之因缘,以彼大种为缘而生起的诸大种便不再生起;能引生如此加行的杀生之思,即是杀生。因此说“由某一思心所……”等。显示巴利原文
Sattoti khandhasantāno. Tattha hi sattapaññatti. Jīvitindriyanti rūpārūpajīvitindriyaṃ. Rūpajīvitindriye hi vikopite itarampi taṃsambandhatāya vinassatīti. Taṃ vuttappakāramevāti taṃ jīvitindriyātipātanavidhānaṃ heṭṭhā vuttappakārameva. Saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atīva pātanaṃ atipāto, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghapātananti attho. Atikkamma vā satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātanaṃ atipāto, pāṇassa atipāto pāṇātipāto. Yāya cetanāya pavattamānassa jīvitindriyassa nissayabhūtesu mahābhūtesu upakkamakaraṇahetu taṃmahābhūtapaccayā uppajjanamahābhūtā nuppajjissanti, sā tādisappayogasamuṭṭhāpikā vadhakacetanā pāṇātipāto. Tenāha ‘‘yāya cetanāyā’’tiādi.
“打击”:指伴有身表的杀生之思,以此达成其目的之手段。“命令”:指伴有语表的杀生之思,以此达成其目的之手段。因此说“欲令人闻而不令人闻”等。“放下”:指将刀剑等放置于彼。显示巴利原文
Paharaṇanti kāyaviññattisahitāya vadhakacetanāya adhippetatthasādhanaṃ. Āṇāpananti vacīviññattisahitāya vadhakacetanāya adhippetatthasādhanaṃ. Teneva ‘‘sāvetukāmo na sāvetī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Upanikkhipananti asiādīnaṃ tassa upanikkhipanaṃ.
为要略地开示注释书中的义理,而说“略而言之”等。此中,“明咒祈愿”指咒语的祈愿。今为显示注释书中详细阐述的义理,而说“然而在注释书中……”等。此中,“阿闼婆那者”指精通阿闼婆那吠陀者。“施行阿闼婆那”指按照阿闼婆那吠陀所规定的仪轨,施行其中所说的咒语。据说,阿闼婆那者七日间食无盐之食,铺草席而卧于地,修习苦行;于第七日备办坟场,立于第七步之处,反复转动手臂,以口祈愿明咒,于是他们的所作便得成就。“对敌军”一词,可与上下文中的任一句相关联。“生起灾祸”指为了杀害而放出蝎子等,令其蜇咬,从而生起恼害。“灾祸”即“īti”。“祸患”指较之更重的恼害。“热病”指毒热病。“针痛”指犹如以针刺穿肢节般所生起的剧痛。“绞肠痧”指伴有剧痛的痢疾。“赤痢”即赤痢。“翻转明咒后”指对于犍陀罗明咒等自己的明咒,通过祈愿而加以运用,依诵咒的次第而诵持之后。“以他们”指以那些事物。显示巴利原文
Aṭṭhakathāsu vuttamatthaṃ saṅkhipitvā dassento ‘‘saṅkhepato’’tiādimāha. Tattha vijjāparijappananti mantaparijappanaṃ. Idāni aṭṭhakathāsu vitthāritamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘aṭṭhakathāsu panā’’tiādi. Tattha āthabbaṇikāti āthabbaṇavedavedino. Āthabbaṇaṃ payojentīti āthabbaṇavedavihitaṃ mantaṃ tattha vuttavidhinā payojenti. Āthabbaṇikā hi sattāhaṃ aloṇakaṃ bhuñjitvā dabbe attharitvā pathaviyaṃ sayamānā tapaṃ caritvā sattame divase susānabhūmiṃ sajjetvā sattame pade ṭhatvā hatthaṃ vaṭṭetvā vaṭṭetvā mukhena vijjaṃ parijappanti, atha nesaṃ kammaṃ samijjhati. Paṭisenāyāti idaṃ heṭṭhā upari vā padadvayena sambandhamupagacchati. Ītiṃuppādentīti ḍaṃsitvā māraṇatthāya vicchikādīnaṃ vissajjanavasena pīḷaṃ uppādenti . Etīti īti. Upaddavanti tato adhikatarapīḷaṃ. Pajjarakanti visamajjaraṃ. Sūcikanti aṅgapaccaṅgāni sūcīhi viya vijjhitvā pavattamānaṃ sūlaṃ. Visūcikanti sasūlaṃ āmātisāraṃ. Pakkhandiyanti rattātisāraṃ. Vijjaṃ parivattetvāti gandhāravijjādikaṃ attano vijjaṃ katupacāraṃ parijappitvā mantapaṭhanakkamena paṭhitvā. Tehīti tehi vatthūhi.
“施行”指正在发生。“见”等,是依见毒等情形次第而说。“拔起二三百寻量之龙”:指拔起那些化现为二三百寻量巨大身躯而站立的龙。“瓮腹鬼”:指瓮腹鬼天神。据说,那些天神大腹便便,私处也大如瓮,故称瓮腹鬼。毗沙门天王虽是夜叉之主,但此处提到以眼为武器令瓮腹鬼死亡,故应知他们亦受其统辖。显示巴利原文
Payojananti pavattamānaṃ. Disvātiādi diṭṭhavisādīnaṃ yathākkamena vuttaṃ. Dvattibyāmasatappamāṇanāguddharaṇeti dvattibyāmasatappamāṇe mahākāye nimminitvā ṭhitānaṃ nāgānaṃ uddharaṇe. Kumbhaṇḍānanti kumbhaṇḍadevānaṃ. Te kira devā mahodarā honti, rahassaṅgampi ca nesaṃ kumbho viya mahantaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘kumbhaṇḍā’’ti vuccanti. Vessavaṇassa yakkhādhipatibhāvepi nayanāvudhena kumbhaṇḍānaṃ maraṇassa idha vuttattā tesupi tassa āṇāpavatti veditabbā.
有些人,即大众部。“啊,但愿那在母胎中的胎儿不能安稳地出来”——这一读法更为美妙。也有“啊,但愿此……”的读法。应如此说:“愿这位妇女不能安稳地产下那在母胎中的胎儿。”“Kulumbassa”指胎儿的胎室,或家族,即说为“kuṭumbassa”。所谓“修习所成神通”,他们是指决意神通。神通破灭如瓶破碎,伤害他人如灭火——这是譬喻的对应。那只是他们的一厢情愿——对此有这样的审察:你们说以神通伤害他人,而所谓神通,有决意神通、变化神通、意所成神通、智遍满神通、定遍满神通、圣神通、业异熟生神通、有福者神通、明所成神通,由处处与正勤相应为缘而成就其义,故神通有十种。其中你们指的是哪种神通呢?“修习所成神通。”那么,修习所成神通能作伤害他人之事吗?“是的,能作一次。正如向燃烧的房屋上方投掷盛满水的瓶,瓶破碎后,火便熄灭;同样,修习所成神通作一次伤害他人之事,此后它便灭去。”于是,对他们说“修习所成神通不能作一次、两次伤害他人之事”后,为使他们理解,应问:“修习所成神通是善、不善、无记?与……”显示巴利原文
Kecīti mahāsaṅghikā. ‘‘Aho vata yaṃ taṃ kucchigataṃ gabbhaṃ na sotthinā abhinikkhameyyā’’ti pāṭho sundarataro. ‘‘Aho vatāyaṃ ta’’ntipi pāṭho. ‘‘Ayaṃ itthī taṃ kucchigataṃ gabbhaṃ na sotthinā abhinikkhāmeyyā’’ti vattabbaṃ. Kulumbassāti gabbhassa kulasseva vā, kuṭumbassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Bhāvanāmayiddhiyāti adhiṭṭhāniddhiṃ sandhāya vadanti. Ghaṭabhedanaṃ viya iddhivināso, agginibbāpanaṃ viya parūpaghātoti upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Taṃ tesaṃ icchāmattamevāti etthāyaṃ vicāraṇā – tumhe iddhiyā parūpaghātaṃ vadetha, iddhi nāma cesā adhiṭṭhāniddhi vikubbaniddhi manomayiddhi ñāṇavipphāriddhi samādhivipphāriddhi ariyiddhi kammavipākajiddhi puññavatoiddhi vijjāmayiddhi tattha tattha sammāpayogapaccayā ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhīti dasavidhā. Tattha kataraṃ iddhiṃ vadethāti? Bhāvanāmayanti. Kiṃ pana bhāvanāmayiddhiyā parūpaghātakammaṃ hotīti? Āma ekavāraṃ hoti. Yathā hi ādittagharassa upari udakabharite ghaṭe khitte ghaṭopi bhijjati, aggipi nibbāyati, evameva bhāvanāmayiddhiyā ekavāraṃ parūpaghātakammaṃ hoti, tato paṭṭhāya pana sā nassatīti. Atha ne ‘‘bhāvanāmayiddhiyā neva ekavāraṃ, na dve vāre parūpaghātakammaṃ hotī’’ti vatvā saññattiṃ āgacchantā pucchitabbā ‘‘bhāvanāmayiddhi kiṃ kusalā, akusalā, abyākatā, sukhāya vedanāya sampayuttā, dukkhāya , adukkhamasukhāya, savitakkasavicārā, avitakkavicāramattā, avitakkaavicārā, kāmāvacarā, rūpāvacarā, arūpāvacarā’’ti.
然而,了知此问题的人会这样说:“修习所成神通或是善,或是无记,唯属不苦不乐受,唯是无寻无伺,唯是色界系。”应对他们说:“杀生的思,在善、不善等中属于哪一类?”了知者会说:“杀生的思唯是不善,唯是苦受,唯是有寻有伺,唯是欲界系。”既然如此:“你们的说法既不符合善三法,不符合受三法,不符合寻三法,也不符合小大无量三法。”那么,如此大的经文便毫无意义吗?并非无意义,只是你们不解其义。“有神通者、心得自在者”——此处并非指修习所成神通,而是指阿闼婆神通。因为在此处,所能获得的就是那种神通。显示巴利原文
Imaṃ pana pañhaṃ ye jānanti, te evaṃ vakkhanti ‘‘bhāvanāmayiddhi kusalā vā hoti abyākatā vā, adukkhamasukhavedanīyā eva, avitakkaavicārā eva, rūpāvacarā evā’’ti. Te vattabbā ‘‘pāṇātipātacetanā kusalākusalādīsu kataraṃ koṭṭhāsaṃ bhajatī’’ti. Jānantā vakkhanti ‘‘pāṇātipātacetanā akusalāva, dukkhavedanīyāva, savitakkasavicārāva, kāmāvacarā evā’’ti. Evaṃ sante ‘‘tumhākaṃ kathā neva kusalattikena sameti, na vedanāttikena, na vitakkattikena, na parittattikenā’’ti. Kiṃ pana evaṃ mahantaṃ suttaṃ niratthakanti? No niratthakaṃ, tumhe panassa atthaṃ na jānātha. Iddhimā cetovasippattoti ettha hi na bhāvanāmayiddhi adhippetā, āthabbaṇiddhi pana adhippetā. Sā hi ettha labbhamānā labbhatīti.
“haritabbaṃ upanikkhipitabbaṃ”意为“应携带、应放置”,即是“hāra”;而“hāra”本身就是“hāraka”,因此说“atha vā”等。“能夺命者、应放置的刀”即是“satthahāraka”,这是以两种分别来说的。本应说“hārakasattha”,却说“satthahāraka”,是将修饰语后置而说。“如其所得,应如是作”——这是表明其意图而说。“应放置”显示了“应寻求”的极致之义。“否则”——若不将“应寻求”理解为“应放置”之义,而仅理解为寻求本身,这便是此处的意思。“仅以寻求”即仅以寻找。对于“或为他寻求能夺命者”所表达的含义,因未依文句而完整说明,故说“不依文句”。它切割、伤害,故名为“sattha”;或者,以此切割、伤害,故名为“sattha”。因为棍棒、石块等也包含在“sattha”中,所以,这里是为了说明被粗重加行所摄的刀,才如此解说。显示巴利原文
Haritabbaṃ upanikkhipitabbanti hāraṃ, hārameva hārakanti āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Jīvitaharaṇakaṃ upanikkhipitabbaṃ vā satthaṃ satthahārakanti vikappadvayenāha. ‘‘Hārakasattha’’nti ca vattabbe satthahārakanti visesanassa paranipātaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Yathā labhati, tathā kareyyāti adhippāyatthamāha. Upanikkhipeyyāti ‘‘pariyeseyyā’’ti imassa sikhāppattamatthaṃ dasseti. Itarathāti ‘‘pariyeseyyā’’ti imassa upanikkhipeyyāti evamatthaṃ aggahetvā yadi pariyesanamattameva adhippetaṃ siyāti attho. Pariyiṭṭhamattenāti pariyesitamattena. ‘‘Satthahārakaṃ vāssa pariyeseyyā’’ti iminā vuccamānassa atthassa byañjanānurūpato paripuṇṇaṃ katvā avuttattā āha ‘‘byañjanaṃ anādiyitvā’’ti. Sasati hiṃsatīti satthaṃ, sasanti hiṃsanti tenāti vā satthanti laguḷapāsāṇādīnampi satthasaṅgahitattā āha – ‘‘yaṃ ettha thāvarappayogasaṅgahitaṃ satthaṃ, tadeva dassetu’’nti.
“所说之余”即除了已说的刀等之外所剩的部分。“Laguḷa”是锤的别名。“刀的包含”即在本母中“satthahāraka”处所提到的刀的包含。因为……所以,分作两种而解释其词——应知这是显示前文所说分别法门的分类。“或堕地狱等”——在此,以“等”字包含了后文所说的“或堕悬崖”以及未说的“或从树上堕下”等一切死亡方法。因此说:“不可能以具体形式穷尽一切。”因为后文已说明其方法,即后文以结语方式在第二词的解释中已说明其方法。“从义理上已说”——为了显示死亡方法的多种多样,当其中一法被显示时,一切即已被说,这是其意图。“不可能……说明”——不可能以“或从树上堕下”等具体形式穷尽一切死亡方法来加以说明,这是其含义。显示巴利原文
Vuttāvasesanti vuttaasiādīhi avasiṭṭhaṃ. Laguḷanti muggarassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Satthasaṅgahoti mātikāyaṃ ‘‘satthahāraka’’nti ettha vuttasatthasaṅgaho. Yasmā…pe… tasmā dvidhā bhinditvā padabhājanaṃ vuttanti īdisaṃ heṭṭhā vuttavibhaṅganayabhedadassananti veditabbaṃ. Narake vā papatātiādīti ettha ādi-saddena ‘‘papāte vā papatā’’ti parato vuttaṃ avuttañca ‘‘rukkhato vā papatā’’tiādi sabbaṃ maraṇūpāyaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tenevāha ‘‘na hi sakkā sabbaṃ sarūpeneva vattu’’nti. Parato vuttanayattāti parato nigamanavasena vuttassa dutiyapadassa padabhājane vuttanayattā. Atthato vuttamevāti maraṇūpāyassa bahuvidhatānidassanatthaṃ, tato ekadese dassite sabbaṃ vuttameva hotīti adhippāyo. Na hi sakkā…pe… vattunti ‘‘rukkhato vā papatā’’tiādinā sarūpato sabbaṃ maraṇūpāyaṃ pariyosānaṃ pāpetvā na sakkā vattunti attho.
在“死对你来说比活更好”这一句中,iti一词指示了所说的死,因此,为了说明其含义,取用了那里所说的死作为iti一词的含义,而说:“以死为心的心、以死为意的心,这就是含义。”这是为了阐明“心”的含义而说的。因为“心”一词有多义,诸如“种种造作”等,所以不应将这里的“心”一词视为在其他意义上使用,而应知它正是在“识”的意义上使用,这是为了确定其含义而说。由此也显示,这里没有重复过失的余地。因为含义尚未说明,所以说“iti cittamano”,这是为了指出:即使将“iti cittamano”单独提出,iti一词所指示的“死”也未被把握。而通过“tāva”一词,则阐明在后面解释“cittasaṅkappo”这一词时,将以“maraṇasaññī”等方式说明iti一词的含义。因为在那里,取用了iti一词所指示的、名为“死”的含义,而说“maraṇasaññī maraṇacetano maraṇādhippāyo”。因此他说:“在‘cittasaṅkappo’这一词中,应根据上下文将iti一词引入。”显示巴利原文
Mataṃte jīvitā seyyoti ettha vuttamaraṇaṃ yasmā iti-saddo nidasseti, tasmā tattha vuttamaraṇaṃ iti-saddassa atthoti tampi gahetvā atthaṃ dassento āha – ‘‘maraṇacitto maraṇamanoti attho’’ti. Cittassa atthadīpanatthaṃ vuttoti citta-saddassa vicittādianekatthavisayattā nāyaṃ citta-saddo idha aññasmiṃ atthe vattamāno daṭṭhabbo, api tu viññāṇasmiṃyeva vattamāno veditabboti tassa atthassa niyamanatthaṃ vutto. Iminā punaruttidosassapi idha anavakāsoti dasseti. Na tāva attho vuttoti ‘‘iti cittamano’’ti uddharitvāpi iti-saddanidassitassa maraṇassa aparāmaṭṭhabhāvato vuttaṃ. Tāva-saddena pana parato ‘‘cittasaṅkappo’’ti imassa padabhājane ‘‘maraṇasaññī’’tiādinā itisaddatthassa vakkhamānataṃ vibhāveti. Tattha hi iti-saddanidassitaṃ maraṇasaṅkhātamatthaṃ gahetvā ‘‘maraṇasaññī maraṇacetano maraṇādhippāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘cittasaṅkappoti imasmiṃ pade adhikāravasena itisaddo āharitabbo’’ti. Kasmā āharitabboti āha ‘‘idañhī’’tiādi. Kathaṃ panetaṃ viññāyatīti āha ‘‘tathā hissā’’tiādi. Assāti iti-saddassa. Tameva atthanti maraṇasaṅkhātamatthaṃ. ‘‘Maraṇasaññī’’tiādīsu hi maraṇaṃ iti-saddassa attho, ‘‘saññī’’tiādi saṅkappasaddassa. Cittasaddassa panettha vicittavacanatā saṅkappasaddassa saññācetanādhippāyavasena tidhā atthaṃ dassentena vibhāvitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘citto nānappakārako saṅkappo’’tiādi. Adhippāyasaddena kimettha vuttanti āha – ‘‘adhippāyoti vitakko veditabbo’’ti. Na idaṃ vitakkassa nāmanti idaṃ pana na kevalaṃ vitakkasseva nāmanti dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Pākaṭattā oḷārikattā ca uccākāratā veditabbā, apākaṭattā anoḷārikattā ca avacākāratā.
174 “kāya”一词也用指身体的部分,因此说“以手”等。“paharaṇena”指用刀剑。因为人们用刀剑击打,所以称为“paharaṇa”。被业所束缚,即被杀生业所束缚,意思是杀生业成就了。在“让任何一个死吧”这句中,应知:对任何一个单一的生命根生起杀心,并非只对因击打而死者生起以命根为所缘的杀心,也非对群体生起。杀心有总说和分别说两种方式。杀心即使以现在为所缘,也是以生命根相续的断绝为所缘而生起,因此说“后来由同一种病”等。因为,当相续被断绝时,造作那种加行,那时生起的杀心,仅在击打之时便被业所束缚。对于人和阿罗汉,若在凡夫阶段给予刀击或下毒,如果他证得阿罗汉后因此而死去,他仍是杀阿罗汉者。然而,在凡夫阶段所给的布施,证得阿罗汉后受用,那布施仍是给凡夫的。显示巴利原文
174. Kāyekadesepi kāya-saddo vattatīti āha ‘‘hatthena vā’’tiādi. Paharaṇenāti satthena. Satthañhi paharanti etenāti paharaṇanti vuccati. Kammunā bajjhatīti pāṇātipātakammunā bajjhati, pāṇātipātakammassa siddhanti vuttaṃ hoti. Yo koci maratūti ettha yassa kassaci ekasseva jīvitindriyavisayā vadhakacetanā pavattati, na pahārapaccayā marantasseva jīvitindriyavisayā, nāpi samūhassāti veditabbā. Ubhayathāpīti uddesānuddesānaṃ vasena. Vadhakacittaṃ paccuppannārammaṇampi jīvitindriyaṃ pabandhavicchedanavasena ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattatīti āha ‘‘pacchā vā teneva rogenā’’tiādi. Yena hi pabandho vicchijjati, tādisaṃ payogaṃ nibbattentaṃ tadā vadhakacittaṃ pavattantaṃ paharitamatteyeva kammunā bajjhati. Manussaarahantassa ca puthujjanakāleyeva satthappahāre vā vise vā dinnepi yadi so arahattaṃ patvā teneva marati, arahantaghātako hotiyeva. Yaṃ pana puthujjanakāle dinnaṃ dānaṃ arahattaṃ patvā paribhuñjati, puthujjanasseva taṃ dinnaṃ hoti.
难道不是这样吗?正如凡夫阶段所给的布施,即使在证得阿罗汉后受用,仍是给凡夫的布施;同样,以杀死的意图在凡夫阶段给予击打,证得阿罗汉后因那击打而死,为什么是杀阿罗汉者,而不是杀凡夫者?因为有差别存在。布施仅由对所施物的舍弃而成。确实,布施思以应舍弃的物品为所缘,仅仅是舍弃,那舍弃如同将其变成他人的所有物,因此它成为谁的所有物,就是给谁的布施。而杀生则不同。杀生只有在‘有情、有情想、杀心、加行、因此而死’这五支具足圆满时才成立,不圆满则不成立。因此,因为是阿罗汉的死,所以是杀阿罗汉者,不是杀凡夫者。然而,由于以‘我杀此人’的意图针对某一相续生起杀意,尽管在凡夫与漏尽者的状态、加行和死时刹那上,相续有差别,但被视为无差别;当目的达成时,那时是漏尽者的状态,因此应得出结论:正是杀阿罗汉者。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca yathā arahattaṃ patvā paribhuttampi puthujjanakāle dinnaṃ puthujjanadānameva hoti, evaṃ maraṇādhippāyena puthujjanakāle pahāre dinne arahattaṃ patvā teneva pahārena mate kasmā arahantaghātakoyeva hoti, na puthujjanaghātakoti? Visesasabbhāvato. Dānañhi deyyadhammassa pariccāgamattena hoti. Tathā hi dānacetanā cajitabbaṃ vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā cajanamattameva hoti, aññasantakakaraṇaṃva tassa cajanaṃ, tasmā yassa taṃ santakaṃ kataṃ, tasseva taṃ dinnaṃ hoti, na evaṃ vadho. So hi pāṇo pāṇasaññitā vadhakacetanā upakkamo tena maraṇanti imesaṃ pañcannaṃ aṅgānaṃ pāripūriyāva hoti, na apāripūriyā. Tasmā arahattaṃ pattasseva maraṇanti arahantaghātakoyeva hoti, na puthujjanaghātako. Yasmā pana ‘‘imaṃ māremī’’ti yaṃ santānaṃ ārabbha māraṇicchā, tassa puthujjanakhīṇāsavabhāvena payogamaraṇakkhaṇānaṃ vasena satipi santānabhede abhedoyeva, yadā ca atthasiddhi, tadā khīṇāsavabhāvo, tasmā arahantaghātakoyeva hotīti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ.
“以异心”,指以非杀意图、不想杀的心。不构成杀生,是因为以不想杀的心击打。虽然第一击本身不能致命,但若得到第二击,能杀者便成为毁灭生命的因。因此,依‘加行以及因此而死’的关联,仅以第一击便被业所束缚,这是合理的,而不是以第二击,因为第二击是以异心给出的。因此说:“即使因两者而死,也仅以第一击被业所束缚。”显示巴利原文
Aññacittenāti avadhādhippāyena amāretukāmatācittena. Natthi pāṇātipātoti amāretukāmatācittena pahaṭattā. Kiñcāpi paṭhamappahāro na sayameva sakkoti māretuṃ, dutiyaṃ pana labhitvā sakkonto jīvitavināsanahetu hoti, tasmā ‘‘payogo tena ca maraṇa’’nti iminā saṃsandanato paṭhamappahāreneva kammabaddho yutto, na dutiyena tassa aññacittena dinnattā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhayehi matepi paṭhamappahāreneva kammunā baddho’’ti.
为了阐明业与罪的区别:即为了说明无间业等业的分类,以及波罗夷等罪(犯)的分类。由于“我要杀羊”这一生起的思心所是前分(准备阶段),而“我要杀此人”这一决断思心所于那时已现前,因此依所缘境而结缚于业,故说“由于存在‘我要杀此所缘境’的思心所”。因为在一切情况下,先前的(杀羊)思惟心并无固定所缘,不能依它而成就(杀人的)事义;然而,杀心及其所缘与命根,在成为无间业等方面,才是衡量的标准。而且成为杀害者即是成为杀生者,意思是唯由杀生业所结缚。应知如前所述的方法,即应依次了知为波罗夷、偷兰遮、波逸提。由于对母、父、阿罗汉等任一对象生起的前分思心所,因其功德殊胜而性质酷烈,故以如此酷烈的前分思心所为眷属的决断思心所,也必然是酷烈的,因此说“但在此处,思心所是酷烈的”。应知由此也说明了:由于“我要杀羊”的前分思心所并不酷烈,因此,与以其他方式生起的无间业相比,如此生起的无间业并非极其酷烈。显示巴利原文
Kammāpattibyattibhāvatthanti ānantariyādikammavibhāgassa pārājikādiāpattivibhāgassa ca vibhāvanatthaṃ. ‘‘Eḷakaṃ māremī’’ti pavattacetanāya pubbabhāgattā ‘‘imaṃ māremī’’ti sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya tadā sannihitattā yathāvatthukaṃ kammabaddho hotiyevāti āha ‘‘imaṃ vatthuṃ māremīti cetanāya atthibhāvato’’tiādi. Sabbattha hi purimaṃ abhisandhicittaṃ appamāṇaṃ tena atthasiddhiyā abhāvato, vadhakacittaṃ pana tadārammaṇañca jīvitindriyaṃ anantariyādibhāve pamāṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ghātako ca hotīti pāṇaghātako hoti, pāṇātipātakammunāva baddho hotīti attho. Pubbe vuttanayeneva veditabbanti yathākkamaṃ pārājikathullaccayapācittiyāni veditabbāni. ‘‘Mātāpituarahantānaṃ aññataraṃ māremī’’ti guṇamahantesu pavattapubbabhāgacetanāya dāruṇabhāvato tathāvidhapubbabhāgacetanāparivārā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā dāruṇāva hotīti āha – ‘‘idha pana cetanā dāruṇā hotī’’ti. Iminā ca ‘‘eḷakaṃ māressāmī’’ti mātāpituādīnaṃ māraṇepi pubbabhāgacetanāya adāruṇattā aññathā pavattaānantariyakammato evaṃ pavattānantariyassa nātidāruṇatā vuttāva hotīti daṭṭhabbā.
“沾血”是指被血所染污。“正在作(战斗)业”是指正在从事战斗。“如其意图而行”是指射中战士后,箭射中了父亲。这是为了显示他如此被射中是符合其意图的。然而,若箭直行而射中父亲,虽然并非符合其意图,但因是以杀意为动机、由自己所作的加行,故他们说这并无疑惑。但这并不构成无间业,因为缺乏以父亲为对象而作的加行。显示巴利原文
Lohitakanti lohitamakkhitaṃ. Kammaṃ karonteti yuddhakammaṃ karonte. Yathādhippāyaṃ gateti yodhaṃ vijjhitvā pitari viddhe. Idañca yathādhippāyaṃ tena tathāviddhabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ayathādhippāyaṃ pana ujukameva gantvā pitari viddhepi maraṇādhippāyena attanāva katappayogattā nevatthi visaṅketoti vadanti. Ānantariyaṃ pana natthīti pitaraṃ uddissa katappayogābhāvato.
“指定后”是指依论母而对命令式加行论所作的解说。显示巴利原文
Adhiṭṭhāyāti mātikāvasena āṇattikapayogakathāvaṇṇanā
“如是射”意为:如此拉弓而射。“如是击”意为:如此紧握刀剑而击。“如是杀”意为:如此施以刑罚而杀。“中间”指象背的中间。“以此”指“指定后而命令”等语句。“在此”即指在命令式的加行中。显示巴利原文
Evaṃvijjhāti evaṃ dhanuṃ kaḍḍhetvā vijjha. Evaṃ paharāti evaṃ daḷhaṃ asiṃ gahetvā pahara. Evaṃ ghātehīti evaṃ kammakāraṇaṃ katvā mārehi. Majjheti hatthino piṭṭhimajjhe. Etenāti ‘‘adhiṭṭhahitvā āṇāpetī’’tiādinā. Tatthāti āṇattikappayoge.
义注中虽未提及这些具体行刑方式,但巴利圣典中已论及“如是射,如是击,如是杀”等具体做法,因此依据师承所传,将该具体做法与经文相合而采纳,以资显示,故而说“另一种方法”等。“割”指割截手等。“裂”指剖开腹部等。或者,此处应知:以箭射为“射”,以刀割为“割”,以锤等击破头颅等为“裂”。螺髻刑即是螺髻刑罚。行此刑者,沿着上唇、双耳垂及喉颈的边界割开皮肤,将全部头发结为一束,用木棍卷缠后拔起,头皮便连同头发一起被扯下,然后用粗砂粒摩擦头骨,洗净后使之呈现螺色。“等”字即含摄:酸粥臼刑、罗睺面刑、光鬘刑、手灯刑、茅草叶刑、树皮衣刑、羚羊刑、钩肉刑、钱币刑、碱水衣刑、门闩转刑、稻草座刑等一切刑罚。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi kiriyaviseso aṭṭhakathāsu anāgato, pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘evaṃ vijjha, evaṃ pahara, evaṃ ghātehī’’ti kiriyāvisesassa parāmaṭṭhattā ācariyaparamparāya ābhataṃ kiriyāvisesaṃ pāḷiyā saṃsandanato gahetvā dassento ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādimāha. Chedananti hatthādichedanaṃ. Bhedananti kucchiādiphālanaṃ. Atha vā usunā vijjhanaṃ, asinā chedanaṃ, muggarādīhi sīsādibhedananti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Saṅkhamuṇḍakanti saṅkhamuṇḍakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā uttaroṭṭhaubhatokaṇṇacūḷikagalavāṭakaparicchedena cammaṃ chinditvā sabbakese ekato gaṇṭhiṃ katvā daṇḍakena paliveṭhetvā uppāṭenti, saha kesehi cammaṃ uṭṭhahati, tato sīsakaṭāhaṃ thūlasakkharāhi ghaṃsitvā dhovantā saṅkhavaṇṇaṃ karonti. Evamādīti ādi-saddena bilaṅgathālikaṃ rāhumukhaṃ jotimālikaṃ hatthapajjotikaṃ erakavattikaṃ cīrakavāsikaṃ eṇeyyakaṃ baḷisamaṃsikaṃ kahāpaṇikaṃ khārāpatacchikaṃ palighaparivattikaṃ palālapīṭhakanti evamādiṃ sabbaṃ kammakāraṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
其中,酸粥臼刑是酸粥臼刑罚。行此刑者,将头盖骨掀开,用钳夹取烧热的铁丸投入其中,脑髓随之沸腾,向上涌出。罗睺面刑是罗睺面刑罚。行此刑者,用桩撬开口腔,于口中燃灯;或从耳垂处开始,用钳子挖开面部,鲜血流淌,布满面容。光鬘刑,是以油布缠裹全身后点燃。手灯刑,是手上缠裹油布,点燃如灯。茅草叶刑是茅草叶刑罚。行此刑者,从颈下开始割开一圈如筒的皮肤,使之坠至脚踝,再用绳捆绑拖拽,受刑人踩在自己所剥落的皮筒上而跌倒。树皮衣刑是树皮衣刑罚。行此刑者,同样割下皮筒置于腰部,再从腰部割至脚踝,上身与下身如同穿著树皮衣一般。羚羊刑是羚羊刑罚。行此刑者,在两肘与两膝套上铁环,钉入铁桩,以四肢的铁桩撑立于地,然后周围的人环绕生火,不时从关节处拔出铁桩,仅以四肢骨端承力而立。显示巴利原文
Tattha (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.1) bilaṅgathālikanti kañjiyaukkhalikakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ kammaṃ karontā sīsakapālaṃ uppāṭetvā tattaṃ ayoguḷaṃ saṇḍāsena gahetvā tattha pakkhipanti, tena matthaluṅgaṃ pakkuthitvā upari uttarati. Rāhumukhanti rāhumukhakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karonto saṅkunā mukhaṃ vivaritvā antomukhe dīpaṃ jālenti, kaṇṇacūḷikāhi vā paṭṭhāya mukhaṃ nikhādanena khaṇanti, lohitaṃ paggharitvā mukhaṃ pūreti. Jotimālikanti sakalasarīraṃ telapilotikāya veṭhetvā ālimpenti. Hatthapajjotikanti hatthe telapilotikāya veṭhetvā dīpaṃ viya pajjālenti. Erakavattikanti erakavattakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā heṭṭhāgīvato paṭṭhāya cammavaṭṭe kantitvā gopphake pātenti, atha naṃ yottehi bandhitvā kaḍḍhanti, so attanova cammavaṭṭe akkamitvā patati. Cīrakavāsikanti cīrakavāsikakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā tatheva cammavaṭṭe kantitvā kaṭiyaṃ ṭhapenti, kaṭito paṭṭhāya kantitvā gopphakesu ṭhapenti, uparimehi heṭṭhimasarīraṃ cīrakanivāsananivatthaṃ viya hoti. Eṇeyyakanti eṇeyyakammakāraṇaṃ. Taṃ karontā ubhosu kapparesu ca jaṇṇukesu ca ayavalayāni datvā ayasūlāni koṭṭenti, so catūhi ayasūlehi bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhahati, atha naṃ parivāretvā aggiṃ karonti, taṃ kālena kālaṃ sandhito sūlāni apanetvā catūhi aṭṭhikoṭīhiyeva ṭhapenti.
钩肉刑,是用两端带钩的钩子击打后,钩扯其皮肉筋腱。钱币刑,是以锋利的凿斧,从顶门开始,将全身凿成钱币大小的碎块。碱水衣刑,是用武器遍击身体各处后,以刷子涂擦碱水,皮肉筋腱消泐,唯余骨链。门闩转刑,是令其侧卧,将铁桩钉入耳孔固定于地,然后抓住双脚扭转。稻草座刑,是熟练的行刑者剥去皮肉,将骨骸置入臼中捣碎,抓住头发提起时,只见一堆肉泥,便用头发将其包裹,抓住后如同卷紧稻草束一般缠绕。显示巴利原文
Baḷisamaṃsikanti ubhatomukhehi baḷisehi paharitvā cammamaṃsanahārūni uppāṭenti. Kahāpaṇikanti sakalasarīraṃ tikhiṇāhi vāsīhi koṭito paṭṭhāya kahāpaṇamattaṃ kahāpaṇamattaṃ pātentā koṭṭenti. Khārāpatacchikanti sarīraṃ tattha tattha āvudhehi paharitvā kocchehi khāraṃ ghaṃsanti, cammamaṃsanahārūni paggharitvā aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikāva tiṭṭhati. Palighaparivattikanti ekena passena nipajjāpetvā kaṇṇachidde ayasūlaṃ koṭṭetvā pathaviyā ekābaddhaṃ karonti, atha naṃ pāde gahetvā āviñchanti. Palālapīṭhakanti cheko kāraṇiko chavicammaṃ acchinditvā nisadapotehi aṭṭhīni bhinditvā kesesu gahetvā ukkhipati, maṃsarāsiyeva hoti, atha naṃ keseheva pariyonandhitvā gaṇhantā palālavaṭṭiṃ viya katvā paliveṭhenti.
先就事端行欺,而后杀害另一人,这是句义的关联。前分等与事端同类,因此以“事端”便已摄尽它们,故说“先打击”等。若心中作了“在前面”的限定,或未作限定,而说“先打击再杀害”,如果在别处打击后杀害,则因未提及施设诡计,故有疑惑。然而,若心中虽想在任何处打击后杀害,口中却说“先打击再杀害”,则因施设了诡计而这样说,其意义已得成立,并且由于是由同一心所发起的表业,故不能以迂回方式从杀人的波罗夷中脱免。因此有人说“即使在别处打击后杀害,也绝无疑惑”,但有些人不同意此说。“以事端差别”是指以母亲等事端的差别;“业差别”是指无间业等业的差别;“罪差别”是指波罗夷等罪的差别。显示巴利原文
Vatthuṃ visaṃvādetvā tato aññaṃ māretīti sambandho. Purimapassādīnampi vatthusabhāgato vatthuggahaṇeneva gahaṇanti āha ‘‘purato paharitvā’’tiādi. Cittena ‘‘purato vā’’ti niyamaṃ katvā vā akatvā vā ‘‘purato paharitvā mārehī’’ti vutte sace aññattha paharitvā māreti, lesaṃ oḍḍetvā avuttattā visaṅketova hoti. Cittena pana yattha katthaci paharitvā māraṇaṃ icchantopi sace ‘‘purato paharitvā mārehī’’ti vadati, tassa lesaṃ oḍḍetvā tathā vuttamatthaṃ ṭhapetvā teneva cittena samuṭṭhāpitaviññattikattā manussaviggahapārājikato pariyāyena amuccanato ‘‘aññattha paharitvā māritepi nevatthi visaṅketo’’ti vadanti, keci pana taṃ na icchanti. Vatthuvisesenāti mātuādivatthuvisesena . Kammavisesoti ānantariyādikammaviseso. Āpattivisesoti pārājikādiāpattiviseso.
“此人在村中”这一表述中,“村”是为了限定人而说,并非为了限定处所。因此,由于只限定了人而未限定处所,故无疑惑。而在“只在村中”等表述中,因为限定了处所,如果于别处杀害,则说为有疑惑。显示巴利原文
‘‘Etaṃ gāme ṭhita’’nti gāmo puggalaniyamanatthaṃ vutto, na okāsaniyamanatthaṃ, tasmā okāsaṃ aniyametvā puggalasseva niyamitattā natthi visaṅketo. ‘‘Gāmeye vā’’tiādīsu pana okāsassa niyamitattā aññattha mārite visaṅketo vutto.
“以喙”即用剑的尖端;“以柄”即用剑的握把。显示巴利原文
Tuṇḍenāti khaggakoṭiyā. Tharunāti khaggamuṭṭhinā.
“此行进者”一词,以“行进”限定的是人本身,而非威仪,故说“无疑惑”。而“唯行进者”等语,则是限定了威仪,故说“有疑惑”。显示巴利原文
‘‘Etaṃ gacchanta’’nti gamanena puggalova niyamito, na iriyāpatho. Tenāha ‘‘natthi visaṅketo’’ti. ‘‘Gacchantamevā’’tiādinā iriyāpatho niyamito. Tenāha ‘‘visaṅketo hotī’’ti.
即便说“杀长的”,因长形之物有多种,且未以“叫某某名字的、如此这般的长者”等他人不共的特征加以指定,故说“未作限定而命令”。因此说“杀任何那样的长形者”。于此,有人说:“即使心中在众多长形有情中限定其一而说,但由于言语未作限定,若杀了另一那样的有情,也无有疑。”然而,由于他人手上并无“命根”这一特征为肢体,故绝无杀生,因此说“命令者得脱”。若如此,那么限定场所时为何成为杀生?应知:对于限定场所者,其心以坐在该场所者的命根为所缘。因为以场所限定而指示者,意欲杀害坐在该场所者,但当时他自己并不在那里,因此他们说,场所与自己的命根不成其为所缘。显示巴利原文
‘‘Dīghaṃ mārehī’’ti vuttepi dīghasaṇṭhānānaṃ bahubhāvato itthannāmaṃ evarūpañca dīghanti aññesaṃ asādhāraṇalakkhaṇena aniddiṭṭhattā ‘‘aniyametvā āṇāpetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘yaṃ kiñci tādisaṃ māretī’’ti. Ettha ca ‘‘cittena bahūsu dīghasaṇṭhānesu ekaṃ niyametvā vuttepi vācāya aniyamitattā aññasmiṃ tādise mārite natthi visaṅketo’’ti vadanti. Parapāṇimhi pāṇasaññitālakkhaṇassa aṅgassa abhāvato nevatthi pāṇātipātoti āha ‘‘āṇāpako muccatī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ okāsaniyame sati kathaṃ pāṇātipātoti? Okāsaṃ niyamentassa tasmiṃ okāse nisinnassa jīvitindriyaṃ ārammaṇaṃ hotīti gahetabbaṃ. Okāsañhi niyametvā niddisanto tasmiṃ okāse nisinnaṃ mārāpetukāmo hoti, sayaṃ pana tadā tattha natthi, tasmā okāsena saha attano jīvitindriyaṃ ārammaṇaṃ na hotīti vadanti.
使者论之解说。显示巴利原文
Dūtakathāvaṇṇanā
当如此命令时,先说老师的恶作:若该命令未如其心意而行,则在老师发令的那一刹那,结恶作罪。若该命令如其心意而行,则后面所说的偷兰遮罪,在发令的刹那即已成立。若他必定进行杀害,则后面所说的“一切人波罗夷罪”,对此人而言,在那一刹那便成为波罗夷罪。此处应如此了知其义。然而,老师在下文“不与取论”中已依所述之理阐明此义,故此处未说。因为那里说:“如此命令时,先说老师的恶作。若该命令如其心意而行,则后面所说的偷兰遮罪,在发令的刹那即成立。若该物品必定被带走,则后面所说的‘一切人波罗夷罪’,对此人而言,在那一刹那便成为波罗夷罪。此理于一切处应知。”他们的恶作:因告知的缘而有恶作。“仅于受取时”:此处,若他必定接受,则在接受之前老师已结偷兰遮罪,而非在接受之时,应作如是见。为何他有偷兰遮?答:“因为大众被他投入了恶业。”显示巴利原文
Evaṃ āṇāpentassa ācariyassa tāva dukkaṭanti sace sā āṇatti yathādhippāyaṃ na gacchati, ācariyassa āṇattikkhaṇe dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana sā āṇatti yathādhippāyaṃ gacchati, yaṃ parato thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ, āṇattikkhaṇe tadeva hoti. Atha so taṃ avassaṃ ghāteti, yaṃ parato ‘‘sabbesaṃ āpatti pārājikassā’’ti vuttaṃ, tato imassa taṅkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ hotīti evamettha attho gahetabbo. Ācariyena pana heṭṭhā adinnādānakathāyaṃ (pārā. 121) vuttanayeneva ayamattho sakkā viññātunti idha na vutto. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘āpatti dukkaṭassāti evaṃ āṇāpentassa ācariyassa tāva dukkaṭaṃ. Sace pana sā āṇatti yathādhippāyaṃ gacchati, yaṃ parato thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ, āṇattikkhaṇe tadeva hoti. Atha taṃ bhaṇḍaṃ avassaṃ hāriyaṃ hoti, yaṃ parato ‘sabbesaṃ āpatti pārājikassā’ti vuttaṃ, tato imassa taṅkhaṇeyeva pārājikaṃ hotīti ayaṃ yutti sabbattha veditabbā’’ti. Tesampi dukkaṭanti ārocanapaccayā dukkaṭaṃ. Paṭiggahitamatteti ettha avassaṃ ce paṭiggaṇhāti, tato pubbeva ācariyassa thullaccayaṃ, na pana paṭiggahiteti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kasmā panassa thullaccayanti āha ‘‘mahājano hi tena pāpe niyojito’’ti.
“唯根本者有恶作”——此仅显示《大注》中所传的义理,并非导师所许。因此说“若如此”等,意谓若依《大注》所说之理而成立其义。“在接受时,罪应不存在”:即若凶手说“善哉、善哉”而接受杀害时,恶作罪应不存在。为显明即使在如此非粗显的所缘上亦有恶作,何况接受杀害?故举出“做媒接受”等为例。“啊,愿某某被杀!”如是随喜死亡时,亦有恶作,更何况接受杀害,此是其意趣。“此恶作唯属接受者”:以此决定显示,由于无疑惑,此根本者因接受之缘绝无罪。然而有些人说:“此处所说恶作唯属接受者,仅以此决定显示,而并未否定《大注》中所说根本者的恶作。”“前理”:指紧接前文“不遣还使者”的解说。“此”:指恶作。若如此,为何在圣典中未说?答:“因无机会”。在那里,由于说根本者有偷兰遮,故无机会说接受者的恶作,因此是因无机会而未说,并非因不存在,此是其意旨。显示巴利原文
Mūlaṭṭhasseva dukkaṭanti idaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ āgatanayadassanamattaṃ, na pana taṃ ācariyassa adhippetaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ sante’’tiādi, evaṃ mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayena atthe satīti attho. Paṭiggahaṇe āpattiyeva na siyāti vadhakassa ‘‘sādhu suṭṭhū’’ti māraṇapaṭiggahaṇe dukkaṭāpatti na siyā, evaṃ anoḷārikavisayepi tāva dukkaṭaṃ hoti, kimaṅgaṃ pana māraṇapaṭiggahaṇeti dassanatthaṃ sañcarittapaṭiggahaṇādi nidassitaṃ. ‘‘Aho vata itthannāmo hato assā’’ti evaṃ maraṇābhinandanepi dukkaṭe sati pageva māraṇapaṭiggahaṇeti adhippāyo. Paṭiggaṇhantassevetaṃ dukkaṭanti avadhāraṇena visaṅketattā imassa paṭiggahaṇapaccayā mūlaṭṭhassa nattheva āpattīti dasseti. Keci pana ‘‘idha vuttadukkaṭaṃ paṭiggaṇhantassevāti ettakameva avadhāraṇena dassitaṃ, na pana mūlaṭṭhassa mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttadukkaṭaṃ paṭikkhitta’’nti vadanti. Purimanayeti samanantarātīte avisakkiyadūtaniddese. Etanti dukkaṭaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā pāḷiyaṃ na vuttanti āha ‘‘okāsābhāvenā’’ti. Tattha mūlaṭṭhassa thullaccayavacanato paṭiggaṇhantassa dukkaṭaṃ vattuṃ okāso natthīti okāsābhāvena na vuttaṃ, na pana abhāvatoti adhippāyo.
“命令刹那之凡夫”:此处应知,由于以未来应被断坏的命根为所缘,成就意义的思心所已经生起,故彼已成为杀阿罗汉者。显示巴利原文
Āṇattikkhaṇeputhujjanoti ettha anāgate voropetabbajīvitindriyavasena atthasādhikacetanāya pavattattā arahantaghātako jātoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
175 175. 由于他自身即是僧团长老,故说“在侍奉之时”。所谓“每一话语皆犯恶作”,是指并非出于“谁听闻我语后,能受持此”这样的意图而说,而仅是出于随喜死亡而说,因此像“连盗贼也不杀他”等话语,也都说为恶作。此义即由此说明,即如彼所知,作为关联。所谓“语句差别”,即言语的差异。“针对两人”,是指针对两个人,或针对两个人的死亡。对于针对两者而赞叹死亡的人,思心所虽是单一,但由于可称为“两个杀生”,并且在结生果报之后,复于生命期间,由连续不断的思心所之力,于多生中产生诸苦,因此有大果报,故说为“不善之聚”。针对多人赞叹死亡,同理可知。显示巴利原文
175. Sayaṃ saṅghattherattā ‘‘upaṭṭhānakāle’’ti vuttaṃ. Vācāya vācāya dukkaṭanti ‘‘yo koci mama vacanaṃ sutvā imaṃ dhāretū’’ti iminā adhippāyena avatvā kevalaṃ maraṇābhinandanavaseneva vuttattā ‘‘corāpi nāma taṃ na hanantī’’tiādivācāsupi dukkaṭameva vuttaṃ. Ayamattho etena vuttoti yathā so jānātīti sambandho. Vākyabhedanti vacībhedaṃ. Dvinnaṃ uddissāti dve uddissa, dvinnaṃ vā maraṇaṃ uddissa. Ubho uddissa maraṇaṃ saṃvaṇṇentassa cetanāya ekattepi ‘‘dve pāṇātipātā’’ti vattabbabhāvato balavabhāvaṃ āpajjitvā paṭisandhivipākasamanantaraṃ pavattiyaṃ anekāsupi jātīsu aparāpariyacetanāvasena dukkhuppādanato mahāvipākattā ‘‘akusalarāsī’’ti vuttaṃ. Bahū uddissa maraṇasaṃvaṇṇanepi eseva nayo.
此即“或斩首,或坠崖”等。“仅一告知”,即话才出口。正如在圣道刹那,四念处与四正勤依其作用而得成就;同样,思心所虽为单一,然依其作用却能成就众多杀生,故说“那么多的杀生”。譬如有人欲示现自身为百人,通过“我成百、我成百”的准备,获得以现前小所缘为境的智通心,即使缘取百中一色为所缘,亦能成就百人。又如杀思于一人死时生起,虽遍全身而生灭,然不能以一杀即缘取整体命根为境,故取位于一处、局部生起的命根为所缘,从而摧毁所缘的整个命根。同样,怀有现前小所缘的杀思,于想杀的意欲所摄众生中,纵使只缘取一人的命根为境,由于作用的成就,所有众生亦皆被杀死。显示巴利原文
Evanti ‘‘sīsaṃ vā chinditvā papāte vā papatitvā’’tiādinā. Ārocitamatteti vuttamatte. Yathā ariyamaggakkhaṇe cattāro satipaṭṭhānā cattāro sammappadhānā ca kiccavasena ijjhanti, evaṃ cetanāya ekattepi kiccavasena anekā pāṇātipātā ijjhantīti āha ‘‘tattakā pāṇātipātā’’ti. Yathā hi attānaṃ sataṃ katvā dassetukāmassa ‘‘sataṃ homi sataṃ homī’’ti kataparikammavasena laddhapaccuppannaparittārammaṇaṃ abhiññācittaṃ satantogadhānaṃ vaṇṇesu ekassa vaṇṇaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvāpi sataṃ nipphādeti, yathā ca ekassa maraṇe pavattamānāpi vadhakacetanā sakalasarīre uppajjamānaṃ nirujjhamānañca sakalampi jīvitindriyaṃ ekappahāreneva ālambitumasakkuṇeyyattā ṭhānappattaṃ ekadesappavattaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā ārammaṇabhūtaṃ sakalampi jīvitindriyaṃ vināseti, evameva paccuppannaparittārammaṇāya vadhakacetanāya māretukāmatāya pariggahitasattesu ekasseva jīvitindriye ārammaṇe katepi kiccanipphattivasena sabbepi māritāva honti.
176 176. “从谁之手”:指从那些受亲属邀请者的手中。“给予他们根本而解脱”,这是为了表明他所做的努力已回归原样而告终。而在三本《结文》中说:“然而,以此根本买来的书,交给书的主人后,便得解脱。”但有人却说:“如果付给书的主人款项后,不取回款项,则不得解脱,因属自己之物未被释放”,并作种种戏论,此不应取为核心。因为当书已交给书的主人时,他便取回了由他人所做之物,而自己所做之努力已遭破坏,他怎么会不得解脱呢?再者,已舍弃之物,未见其有属于自己之性。在《结文》中又说:“若是以款项买来的,为何说将书给书的主人,并将款项给与那些从其处取得款项者后便得解脱?因为为书而取款项,本不如法。若将书给书的主人后,自己又取回款项,则不如法。或者,若不从书的主人处取回款项,而自行烧毁该书,则因毁坏信施物,他人获罪,故有此说。”此亦不应取为核心。因此,当以《结文》所说法为核心来看待。“我们将书写死亡之相”,成为同一意向,是针对如此做的人。显示巴利原文
176.Yesaṃhatthatoti yesaṃ ñātakapavāritānaṃ hatthato. Tesaṃ mūlaṃ datvā muccatīti idaṃ tena katapayogassa puna pākatikabhāvāpādanaṃ avasānaṃ pāpetvā dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Mūlena kītaṃ pana potthakaṃ potthakasāmikānaṃ datvā muccatiyevā’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Kenaci pana ‘‘sace potthakaṃ sāmikānaṃ datvā mūlaṃ na gaṇhāti, na muccati attaniyabhāvato amocitattā’’ti vatvā bahudhā papañcitaṃ, na taṃ sārato paccetabbaṃ. Potthakasāmikānañhi potthake dinne aññena kataṃ paṭilabhitvā attanā katapayogassa nāsitattā kathaṃ so na mucceyya, na ca pariccattassa attaniyabhāvo diṭṭhoti. Gaṇṭhipade pana ‘‘sace mūlena kīto hoti, potthakasāmikānaṃ potthakaṃ, yesaṃ hatthato mūlaṃ gahitaṃ, tesaṃ mūlaṃ datvā muccatīti kasmā vuttaṃ. Potthakanimittaṃ mūlassa gahitattā akappiyametaṃ. Yadi hi potthakasāmikassa potthakaṃ datvā sayameva mūlaṃ gaṇheyya, akappiyameva taṃ. Athāpi potthakasāmikassa santikā mūlaṃ aggahetvā sayameva taṃ potthakaṃ jhāpeyya, tathāpi aññā yena saddhādeyyavinipātane āpatti, tasmā evamāhā’’ti vuttaṃ, tampi na sārato paccetabbaṃ. Tasmā gaṇṭhipadesu vuttanayovettha sārato daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Maraṇavaṇṇaṃ likhissāmā’’ti ekajjhāsayā hutvāti idaṃ tathā karonte sandhāya vuttaṃ, evaṃ pana asaṃvidahitvāpi maraṇādhippāyena tasmiṃ potthake vuttavidhiṃ karontassa pārājikameva.
“量度”:指自己所确定的量度。“削平”:指削平高起之处。“最后一畚箕”:指最后的一畚箕土。“这些够了”:指以想完成的心,由最后努力所成就的思心所,即完成思。所谓“经师长老”,是指不通达律藏的诵经者。也有人针对大注释师长老说:“他们不知律藏,故以嘲弄之意称为经师长老。”此处,大注释中说:“愿坑完成时,他们坠落而死;未完成时,不要死。”这是针对怀有此种意图而做者,说最后的完成思。然而于《大灯》《略注》中,则针对从第一击起便以“愿他们落此坑而死”的意图而做之人,于每次努力所作,说“即使一锄击”等,以成就每次努力的完成思,此于三本《结文》中均有说。因此种种,注释的说法彼此并无矛盾。或者,大注释是就一日间以无间努力挖掘完成者,说最后的完成思;而其他注释,则是就怀“愿他们落此而死”的意图,一日挖掘一部分,他日亦复如是挖掘完成者而说。如此,诸注释彼此亦无矛盾,此为我等所接受。显示巴利原文
Pamāṇeti attanā sallakkhite pamāṇe. Tacchetvāti unnatappadesaṃ tacchetvā. Paṃsupacchinti sabbantimaṃ paṃsupacchiṃ. ‘‘Ettakaṃ ala’’nti niṭṭhāpetukāmatāya sabbantimapayogasādhikā cetanā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā . Suttantikattherāti vinaye apakataññuno suttantabhāṇakā. Mahāaṭṭhakathācariyatthereyeva sandhāya ‘‘vinayaṃ te na jānantīti upahāsavasena suttantikattherāti vutta’’ntipi vadanti. Ettha ca mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘āvāṭe niṭṭhite patitvā marantu, aniṭṭhite mā marantū’’ti iminā adhippāyena karontaṃ sandhāya sabbantimā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā vuttā, mahāpaccarisaṅkhepaṭṭhakathāsu pana paṭhamappahārato paṭṭhāya ‘‘imasmiṃ āvāṭe patitvā marantū’’ti iminā adhippāyena karontassa yasmiṃ yasmiṃ payoge kate tattha patitā maranti, taṃtaṃpayogasādhikaṃ sanniṭṭhāpakacetanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekasmimpi kudālappahāre dinne’’tiādi vuttanti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Tasmā tena tena pariyāyena aṭṭhakathāvādānaṃ aññamaññāvirodho yutto. Atha vā mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ekasmiṃyeva divase avūpasanteneva payogena khaṇitvā niṭṭhāpentaṃ sandhāya sabbantimā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā vuttā, itarāsu pana ‘‘imasmiṃ patitvā marantū’’ti adhippāyena ekasmiṃ divase kiñci khaṇitvā aparasmimpi divase tatheva kiñci kiñci khaṇitvā niṭṭhāpentaṃ sandhāya vuttanti. Evampi aṭṭhakathānaṃ aññamaññāvirodho yuttoti amhākaṃ khanti.
“Attano dhammatāya”意指因不自觉而失足等。阿拉汉亦被包括在内,这是说:即使是不愿死的阿拉汉,若被他人推落,也可能发生死亡。“Purimanaye”指“想死的人将死在这里”所说的情形。关于“将掉入其中者拖出外面”,此处论师们说:“因为没有‘让他们就死在此坑中’的限定,所以即使拖到外面杀死,也犯波罗夷。若掉入坑中停留片刻后,抓住正离开者而杀死,则因未在坑中抓住,故不犯波罗夷。”然而,由于注释书中“以令其掉落之努力而抓住”所说的理由于此也可能存在,故应审察后采纳。对于“或不想死者”,也因有此意图的可能;对于化生者,若无法逃脱而死亡,也说了犯波罗夷。若问:既然说了“nibbattitvā”(化生后),难道不见掉落吗?对于化生者,在那里化生本身就是掉落,故无矛盾。因为当母亲掉落并转变性别后死亡时,他是杀母者,而非仅仅是杀男人者,所以依“掉落者”本身而说罪,以此意图而说“掉落之相为衡量标准”。但这并非正理,因为注释书中仅说:“若杀害已生为人的母亲或父亲,即使其转变了性别,其……显示巴利原文
Attano dhammatāyāti ajānitvā pakkhalitvā vā. Arahantāpi saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti aññehi pātiyamānānaṃ amaritukāmānampi arahantānaṃ maraṇaṃ sambhavatīti vuttaṃ. Purimanayeti ‘‘maritukāmā idha marissantī’’ti vuttanaye. Tattha patitaṃ bahi nīharitvāti ettha ‘‘imasmiṃ āvāṭeyeva marantūti niyamābhāvato bahi nīharitvā māritepi pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ. Āvāṭe patitvā thokaṃ cirāyitvā gacchantaṃ gahetvā mārite āvāṭasmiṃyeva aggahitattā pārājikaṃ na hotī’’ti vadanti, taṃ pana aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘patitappayogena gahitattā’’ti vuttahetussa idhāpi sambhavato vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. Amaritukāmā vātipi adhippāyassa sambhavato opapātike uttarituṃ asakkuṇitvā matepi pārājikaṃ vuttaṃ. Nibbattitvāti vuttattā patanaṃ na dissatīti ce? Opapātikassa tattha nibbattiyeva patananti natthi virodho. Yasmā mātuyā patitvā parivattitaliṅgāya matāya so mātughātako hoti, na kevalaṃ manussapurisaghātako, tasmā patitasseva vasena āpattīti adhippāyena ‘‘patanarūpaṃ pamāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Idaṃ pana akāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Manussabhūtaṃ mātaraṃ vā pitaraṃ vā api parivattaliṅgaṃ jīvitā voropentassa kammaṃ ānantariyaṃ hotī’’ti ettakameva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ.
于此,即使性别转变,那由同一业所生的有分相续流与命根相续流仍是同一个,而非其他,故说“即使转变性别”。因为,在性别未转变时于彼自体中的有分与命根相续流,在性别转变后依旧是同一个,依此而安立同一生之名。在此,不应依存在于色聚中的命根来非难,因为所指的正是与此不同的心命根。因为那心命根在那里以无间断的方式获得相续之名,而另一色命根则以色法守护的共通性而存在,故非难无据。因此,即使性别转变,由于是断绝那由同一业所生的相续流之命,就称谓差别而言,他不论是杀女人者还是杀男人者,都不能免于无间业,此处仅应说这么多。然而,就此处而言,有情是什么种类,他们在死时便各自以自己种类的形态而死,而非以其他形态,且应依种类而有波逸提、偷兰遮、波罗夷的差别。因此,若龙或金翅鸟以夜叉形或饿鬼形掉落,而以其自体的畜生形死亡,则仅波逸提是恰当的,而非偷兰遮,因为所死的正是畜生。正因如此,在第二位长老的主张中说“死时的形态是衡量标准,故为波逸提”。而这一主张更为合理,正因如此,它被放在后面说。显示巴利原文
Tattha ca liṅge parivattepi so eva ekakammanibbatto bhavaṅgappabandho jīvitindriyappabandho ca, na aññoti ‘‘api parivattaliṅga’’nti vuttaṃ. Yo hi liṅge aparivatte tasmiṃ attabhāve bhavaṅgajīvitindriyappabandho , so eva parivattepi liṅge taṃyeva ca upādāya ekajātisamaññā. Na cettha bhāvakalāpagatajīvitindriyassa vasena codanā kātabbā tadaññasseva adhippetattā. Tañhi tattha avicchedavuttiyā pabandhavohāraṃ labhati, itarampi vā bhāvānupālatāsāmaññenāti anokāsāva codanā. Tasmā parivattepi liṅge tasseva ekakammanibbattassa santānassa jīvitā voropanato vohārabhedato so itthighātako vā hotu purisaghātako vā, ānantariyakammato na muccatīti ettakameva tattha vattabbaṃ. Idha pana yaṃyaṃjātikā sattā honti, te maraṇasamaye attano attano jātirūpeneva maranti, nāññarūpena, jātivaseneva ca pācittiyathullaccayapārājikehi bhavitabbaṃ. Tasmā nāgo vā supaṇṇo vā yakkharūpena vā petarūpena vā patitvā attano tiracchānarūpena marati, tattha pācittiyameva yuttaṃ, na thullaccayaṃ tiracchānagatasseva matattā. Teneva dutiyattheravāde maraṇarūpaṃ pamāṇaṃ, tasmā pācittiyanti vuttaṃ. Ayameva ca vādo yuttataro, teneva so pacchā vutto.
依此理趣,若在人形中类似龙与金翅鸟的畜生,掉落而以自己的本形死亡,应犯波逸提。若如此,为何在圣典中说:“夜叉或饿鬼,或畜生人形者掉落其中,犯恶作。掉落时生起苦受,犯恶作。死亡,犯偷兰遮”?对此,有些人说:先以“夜叉或饿鬼”显示最初以自形而住的夜叉与饿鬼,再以“或畜生人形者”显示那些又以其他形态而住的夜叉与饿鬼,并非为了单独显示那样的畜生。因此,在此应作如此连接:畜生形者、或人形者、或夜叉、或饿鬼。然而,在《复注》中,三处都说:“圣典中似乎将住于人形的畜生单独列出而说偷兰遮。”即使以夜叉形或饿鬼形死亡,也同此理趣;以此,由于死时的形态才是衡量标准,故显示为偷兰遮。显示巴利原文
Imināva nayena manussaviggahe nāgasupaṇṇasadise tiracchānagate patitvā attano rūpena mate pācittiyena bhavitabbaṃ. Evaṃ sante pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘yakkho vā peto vā tiracchānagatamanussaviggaho vā tasmiṃ patati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Patite dukkhā vedanā uppajjati, āpatti dukkaṭassa. Marati, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti kasmā vuttanti ce? Tattha keci vadanti – yakkho vā peto vāti paṭhamaṃ sakarūpeneva ṭhite yakkhapete dassetvā puna aññarūpenapi ṭhite teyeva yakkhapete dassetuṃ ‘‘tiracchānagatamanussaviggaho vā’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana tādisaṃ tiracchānagataṃ visuṃ dassetuṃ. Tasmā tiracchānagataviggaho vā manussaviggaho vā yakkho vā peto vāti evamettha yojanā kātabbāti. Gaṇṭhipadesu pana tīsupi ‘‘pāḷiyaṃ manussaviggahena ṭhitatiracchānagatānaṃ āveṇikaṃ katvā thullaccayaṃ vuttaṃ viya dissatī’’ti kathitaṃ. Yakkharūpapetarūpena matepi eseva nayoti iminā maraṇarūpasseva pamāṇattā thullaccayaṃ atidissati.
“Mudhā”意为无根由,即不抓住任何根据而说。他无罪,因为他在那里没有作任何努力。然而,为显示如果他在那里也做了什么,则绝不免除罪责,故说“evaṃ patitā”等语。其中,“evaṃ”的意思是“这是我所作的”。“Na nassissantī”意谓不会消失、不会逃走,此是其义。“Vippaṭisāre uppanne”是就根本当事者而言。然而,若后来者也得到机会,于该处做了所说的某种行为,而后生起追悔,如此,对他也是同样的道理。“Paṃsumhi patitvā maratī”意指在新填的尘土中,将脚插入后无法拔出,即那样倒地而死。“Jātapathavī jātā”这是为了显示各方面都已达到最为坚固的状态而说。然而,当以尘土填满,并用脚踩、棍棒捣等使之极为坚固,做到与自然地面无别时,即便未达到“生土”的特征,也得以免除罪责。“Opātaṃ haratī”在此,因为类似池塘,故得以免除罪责。显示巴利原文
Mudhāti amūlena, kiñci mūlaṃ aggahetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. So niddosoti tena tattha katapayogassa abhāvato. Yadi pana sopi tattha kiñci kiñci karoti, na muccatiyevāti dassento āha ‘‘evaṃ patitā’’tiādi. Tattha evanti evaṃ mayā kateti attho. Na nassissantīti adassanaṃ na gamissanti, na palāyissantīti adhippāyo. Vippaṭisāre uppanneti mūlaṭṭhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yadi pana pacchimopi labhitvā tattha vuttappakāraṃ kiñci katvā puna vippaṭisāre uppanne evaṃ karoti, tassapi eseva nayo. Paṃsumhi patitvā maratīti abhinavapūrite paṃsumhi pāde pavesetvā uddharituṃ asakkonto tattheva patitvā marati. Jātapathavī jātāti idaṃ sabbathā matthakappattaṃ thirabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Paṃsunā pūrentena pana pādadaṇḍādīhi maddanatāḷanādinā suṭṭhutaraṃ thirabhāvaṃ āpādetvā pakatipathaviyā nibbisese kate jātapathavīlakkhaṇaṃ appattepi muccatiyeva. Opātaṃ haratīti ettha pokkharaṇīsadisattā muccati.
“Hatthā muttamatte”意为在投出后、刚从手中释放的那一刻。“Vatiṃ katvā”在此,若他对陷阱未作前述的任何特殊处理,当自己所设的围栏被破坏时,便得以免除罪责。“Thaddhataraṃ vā pāsayaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapetī”意指为了使其更坚固,以另一根陷阱棍与之绑在一起,或将那根已变松的棍子绑得更紧而安置。“Daḷhataraṃ vā thirataraṃ vā”在此也是同样的道理。“Khāṇuka”指绑陷阱棍的木桩。于一切情况下,因为作了以杀害为目的的加行,故不得免除罪责。“Vippaṭisāre uppanne”指根本当事者生起追悔之时。显示巴利原文
Hatthā muttamatteti oḍḍetvā hatthato muttamatte. Vatiṃ katvāti ettha yadi so pāse vuttappakāraṃ kañci visesaṃ na karoti, attanā katavatiyā viddhaṃsitāya muccati. Thaddhataraṃ vā pāsayaṭṭhiṃ ṭhapetīti thirabhāvatthaṃ aparāya pāsayaṭṭhiyā saddhiṃ bandhitvā vā tameva vā sithilabhūtaṃ thaddhataraṃ bandhitvā ṭhapeti. Daḷhataraṃ vā thirataraṃ vāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Khāṇukanti pāsayaṭṭhibandhanakhāṇukaṃ. Sabbattheva māraṇatthāya katappayogattā na muccati. Vippaṭisāre uppanneti mūlaṭṭhasseva vippaṭisāre uppanne.
“以彼火把……不得解脱者”,此处于三处《结文》中说:“前时所造之加行已灭,后时虽以善心造作,亦不得解脱,应以此义理解。”然而,此处合理的意趣应是:既然最初即是为了杀害而造作加行,当绳、杖等加行完成之时,以此为缘,那些将死的众生,依他们各自而言,杀生业首先即已成就,故后时虽以善心另作他行,亦不得解脱。所谓“绳”,指细绳。所谓“自缠”,指将多绳合在一处,自己缠绕而成。所谓“拆开”,指将那些绳一一拆开。所谓“作得更重”,指作得极重。所谓“寻而作”,指前往森林,砍伐树木,削制而成。显示巴利原文
Tena alātena…pe… na muccatīti ettha ‘‘pubbe katappayogaṃ vināsetvā pacchā kusalacittena payoge katepi na muccatīti idaṃ sandhāya gantabba’’nti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo yutto siyā – āditoyeva māraṇatthāya katappayogattā katapariyositāya pāsayaṭṭhiyā tappaccayā ye ye sattā marissanti, tesaṃ tesaṃ vasena paṭhamataraṃyeva pāṇātipātakammasiddhito pacchā kusalacittena aññathā katepi na muccatīti. Rajjuketi khuddakarajjuke. Sayaṃ vaṭṭitanti bahurajjuke ekato katvā attanā vaṭṭitaṃ. Ubbaṭṭetvāti te rajjuke visuṃ visuṃ katvā. Garukataraṃ karotīti atibhāriyaṃ karoti. Pariyesitvā katanti araññaṃ gantvā rukkhaṃ chinditvā tacchetvā kataṃ.
177 所谓‘或依倚树’,指于该处出生者而言。‘即为此目的’,即只是为了杀害。所谓‘毒圆盘’,指涂于床、椅等物上的毒圆盘。‘说后放下刀’一处,即使未以口说,而是依前述方式以心思维后放下,亦同此理。所谓‘依前理’,即‘从谁手中取其根’等。因令身体成异常状,故名癞病等为异分病;或因与命根相续不相应、不顺合,凡与命根相续相违的痈疮等,皆为异分病。显示巴利原文
177.Ālambanarukkho vāti tatthajātakaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tadatthamevāti māraṇatthameva. Visamaṇḍalanti mañcapīṭhādīsu ālittaṃ visamaṇḍalaṃ. Vatvā asiṃ upanikkhipatīti ettha mukhena avatvā vuttappakāraṃ manasā cintetvā upanikkhipanepi eseva nayo. Purimanayenāti ‘‘yesaṃ hatthato mūlaṃ gahita’’ntiādinā. Sarīrassa virūpabhāvakaraṇato kuṭṭhādi visabhāgarogo nāma, jīvitappavattiyā vā asabhāgattā ananukūlattā gaṇḍapiḷakādi yo koci jīvitappavattipaccanīko visabhāgarogo.
178 所谓‘或令他人成不可爱色’,此处‘不可爱色’意为‘有此不可爱色者’,应视作依主释。于可爱色亦同此理,由此显示:在‘令现可爱色’一处,应配合为‘或令他人成可爱色,置于其近处,或自己具足可爱色而住’等。正因如此,于某结文中说:显示巴利原文
178.Paraṃvā amanāparūpanti ettha amanāpaṃ rūpaṃ etassāti amanāparūpoti bāhiratthasamāso daṭṭhabbo. Manāpiyepi eseva nayoti etena manāpikaṃ rūpaṃ upasaṃharatīti ettha paraṃ vā manāparūpaṃ tassa samīpe ṭhapeti, attanā vā manāpiyena rūpena samannāgato tiṭṭhatītiādi yojetabbanti dasseti. Teneva aññatarasmiṃ gaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ –
‘若彼心怀嗔恚,思惟:彼女因我不得利而死’,即近于彼者,
若以嗔心前往,即是杀女人者。
“若为乞食而行,虽知亦非杀者;
因他于其死无希求,心住于舍。”
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Mamālābhena esitthī, maratūti samīpago; Duṭṭhacitto sace yāti, hoti so itthimārako. ‘‘Bhikkhatthāya sace yāti, jānantopi na mārako; Anatthiko hi so tassā, maraṇena upekkhako’’ti.
又,此处亦曾有说——显示巴利原文
Aparampi tattheva vuttaṃ –
“因离别,我的妻子与母亲将不能存活;
若明知如此而离别,他便因此成为杀者。
若为出家等因缘而往,虽知亦非杀者;
因他于他们之死无所希求,是舍心者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Viyogena ca me jāyā, jananī ca na jīvati; Iti jānaṃ viyuñjanto, tadatthī hoti mārako. ‘‘Pabbajjādinimittañce, yāti jānaṃ na mārako; Anatthiko hi so tesaṃ, maraṇena upekkhako’’ti.
“装饰后令现前”,即以“令彼因不得而憔悴死”的意趣而令现前。因此说“若因惊惧而死,则非迷乱者”。而于“因不得而憔悴死”中,应知省略了“波罗夷”一词。“及尸臭”指蛇等尸体的气味。“天鹅花”即指天鹅等的翼毛。显示巴利原文
Alaṅkaritvā upasaṃharatīti ‘‘alābhakena sussitvā maratū’’ti iminā adhippāyena upasaṃharati. Teneva ‘‘sace uttasitvā marati, visaṅketo’’ti vuttaṃ. Alābhakena sussitvā maratīti ettha ca pārājikanti pāṭhaseso daṭṭhabbo. Kuṇapagandhā cāti ahiādikuṇapānaṃ gandhā. Haṃsapupphanti haṃsādīnaṃ pakkhalomaṃ sandhāya vadati.
179 ‘非故意’,是就未察觉那导致死亡的方便而言,故说‘以此方便’等。‘不知者’,是就不知道造作了导致死亡的方便而言,故说‘此人将以此而死’等。‘非以死为意图者’,则是就虽知方便却没有死的意图而言,故说‘不欲死者’等。显示巴利原文
179.Asañciccāti idaṃ maraṇasaṃvattanikaupakkamassa asallakkhaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘iminā upakkamenā’’tiādi. Ajānantassāti idaṃ pana maraṇasaṃvattanikaupakkamakaraṇassa ajānanaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘iminā ayaṃ marissatī’’tiādi. Namaraṇādhippāyassāti idaṃ upakkamaṃ jānantassapi maraṇādhippāyassa abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘maraṇaṃ anicchantassā’’tiādi.
杂论之解说。显示巴利原文
Pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā
‘唯以忧心而说’,以此表明决断思惟与苦受相应。诸王多乐,即使于笑中亦说‘杀之’,然而他们的笑是以除灾等其余事为境,因此决断思惟唯与苦受相应。然而,若有忧在,何以不显?故说‘因乐掺杂故’等,意思是:由于前后二边生起的乐掺杂其间,且所生之忧无有相续而转,纵使当时有忧,亦不得显现。显示巴利原文
Domanassacittenevabhaṇatīti iminā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā dukkhavedanāya sampayuttā evāti dasseti. Sukhabahulatāya hi rājāno hasamānāpi ‘‘ghātethā’’ti vadanti, hāso pana nesaṃ anatthavūpasamādiaññavisayoti sanniṭṭhāpakacetanā dukkhavedanāya sampayuttā eva. Sati pana domanasse kathaṃ taṃ nappakāsatīti āha ‘‘sukhavokiṇṇattā’’tiādi, pubbāpariyavasena ubhosu passesu uppajjanakasukhehi ākiṇṇattā uppannassa ca domanassassa anuppabandhanena pavattiyā abhāvato tadā uppannampi domanassaṃ nappakāsatīti attho.
决断事释义显示巴利原文
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
180 ‘成为欲死者’:因身坏灭而求生天等之意趣,从义理上说便是成为欲死者。‘不知自己为欲死者’:即不知自己有如此意趣者,称为欲死者。并非他们不知自心的活动。‘依世俗言说’:这是依于前分的世俗言说,因为在以死为意趣的决断思惟刹那并无悲悯,不同于出于悲悯而释放被绳所缚之猪,这便是此处意趣。‘如其寿’:以先前所述之义,以‘如其相续’的异门来表述,即是如其相续、如其寿限。或者,‘如其相续’即如其转起,也就是说,只要在那个有中,相续的转起尚未中断而仍存续,便安住于彼。显示巴利原文
180.Maraṇatthikāva hutvāti imassa kāyassa bhedena saggapāpanādhippāyattā atthato maraṇatthikāva hutvā. Maraṇatthikabhāvaṃ ajānantāti evaṃ adhippāyino maraṇatthikā nāma hontīti attano maraṇatthikabhāvaṃ ajānantā. Na hi te attano cittappavattiṃ na jānanti. Vohāravasenāti pubbabhāgavohāravasena, maraṇādhippāyassa sanniṭṭhāpakacetanākkhaṇe karuṇāya abhāvato kāruññena pāse baddhasūkaramocanaṃ viya na hotīti adhippāyo. Yathāyunāti vuttamevatthaṃ yathānusandhināti pariyāyantarena vuttaṃ, yathānusandhinā yathāyuparicchedenāti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā yathānusandhināti yathānuppabandhena, yāva tasmiṃ bhave santānassa anuppabandho avicchinnappavatti hoti, tāva ṭhatvāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“不观察”即不检查。“向上或向下移动”指为给后来者让座,在座位行列中向上方或下方移动。“无观察之事”指后来者没有检查的必要。如果下方有任何物品,衣便不会起褶皱,因此说“那里不显褶皱”。应知这种观察仅就在家者的物品而行。显示巴利原文
Appaṭivekkhitvāti anupaparikkhitvā. Uddhaṃ vā adho vā saṅkamantīti pacchā āgatānaṃ okāsadānatthaṃ nisinnapāḷiyā uddhaṃ vā adho vā gacchanti. Paccavekkhaṇakiccaṃ natthīti pacchā āgatehi upaparikkhaṇakiccaṃ natthi. Heṭṭhā kismiñci vijjamāne sāṭakaṃ vali na gaṇhātīti āha ‘‘tasmiṃ vali na paññāyatī’’ti. Paṭivekkhaṇañcedaṃ gihīnaṃ santakeyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在圣典中,“杵竖起时”意指两杵相互支撑而竖起之时。“臼木具”指为臼而运来的木具。“关联”指与食物相关联,也就是指食物的障碍。显示巴利原文
Pāḷiyaṃ musale ussiteti aññamaññaṃ upatthambhetvā dvīsu musalesu ussitesūti attho. Udukkhalabhaṇḍikanti udukkhalatthāya ānītaṃ dārubhaṇḍaṃ. Paṭibaddhanti bhojanapaṭibaddhaṃ, bhojanantarāyanti vuttaṃ hoti.
181 181. “最上所作”:此处因“所作”一词是抽象名词,故虽然其义解释为“最上业”,但因为业不能被施予,所以在此应通过“最上业”的转喻,把与称为布施的最上业相应的施食取为“最上业”。因此说“最初所得的施食”等。显示巴利原文
181.Aggakārikanti ettha kārikā-saddassa bhāvavacanattā ‘‘aggakiriya’’nti atthaṃ vatvāpi yasmā kiriyaṃ dātuṃ na sakkā, tasmā dānasaṅkhātāya aggakiriyāya yuttaṃ piṇḍapātameva idha upacāravuttiyā ‘‘aggakiriyā’’ti gahetabbanti āha ‘‘paṭhamaṃ laddhapiṇḍapāta’’ntiādi.
182-183 “棒锤”指一种挖掘用的锤子。“以格变化”即通过格的转换。“殊胜证得”:由于定与慧极为明显,所以说“如同掌中之物一般显现”。“中断”指“为了不让殊胜证得的散乱生起”而中断饮食。“殊胜证得”指出世间法的获得。“说明后”即告知之后。“中断,是不允许的”,意思是:只有对同分且具惭耻的比丘,圣者们才会在那种情况下告知自己所证得的殊胜,而那样的比丘不会以不如法的邪命寻求资具;因此,若对他们所寻求的资具生起恶作便中断饮食,是不允许的。因为对同分者说明后,即不可中断。他们确是如法的福田。正因如此,“因为可以对同分的、有惭耻的比丘讲述”这句话,正是为了显示“中断,是不允许的”这一句的缘由而说,三本《结文》中均有记载。显示巴利原文
182-183.Daṇḍamuggaranti nikhādanamuggaraṃ. Vibhattibyattayenāti vibhattivipariṇāmena. Visesādhigamoti samādhi vipassanā ca ativiya pākaṭattā ‘‘hatthappatto viya dissatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Upacchindatīti ‘‘visesādhigamassa vikkhepo mā hotū’’ti āhāraṃ upacchindati. Visesādhigamanti lokuttaradhammapaṭilābhaṃ. Byākaritvāti ārocetvā. Upacchindati, na vaṭṭatīti yasmā sabhāgānaṃ lajjibhikkhūnaṃyeva ariyā attanā adhigatavisesaṃ tādise kāraṇe sati ārocenti, te ca bhikkhū appatirūpāya anesanāya paccayaṃ na pariyesanti, tasmā tehi pariyesitapaccaye kukkuccaṃ uppādetvā āhāraṃ upacchindituṃ na vaṭṭatīti attho. Sabhāgānañhi byākatattā upacchindituṃ na labhati. Te hi kappiyakhettaṃ. Teneva ‘‘sabhāgānañhi lajjibhikkhūnaṃ kathetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘upacchindati, na vaṭṭatī’’ti imassa kāraṇaṃ dassentena vuttanti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ.
或者,所谓“说明殊胜证得后”,此语是为显示殊胜已被证得的状态而说。在尚未逾越证得障碍时,中断饮食是开许的;为了显示证得后便不应中断,故说“说明殊胜证得后中断饮食,是不允许的”。若问:“难道圣者们会将自己所证得的殊胜告诉他人吗?”对此回答:“因为可以对同分的、有惭耻的比丘讲述。”我们认为这是此处更合理的解释,《结文》中也确实显示了此意。“洗衣”指洗涤袈裟。“洗衣棒”指洗衣所用的棒子。显示巴利原文
Atha vā visesādhigamaṃ byākaritvāti idaṃ visesassa adhigatabhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Adhigamantarāyaṃ asaṅkanteneva ca āhārupacchedo kātabboti anuññātattā adhigatena na kātabboti dassetuṃ ‘‘visesādhigamaṃ byākaritvā āhāraṃ upacchindati, na vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kiṃ pana ariyā attanā adhigatavisesaṃ aññesaṃ ārocentīti imissā codanāya ‘‘sabhāgānañhi lajjibhikkhūnaṃ kathetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ayamettha yuttataroti amhākaṃ khanti, gaṇṭhipadepi ayamattho dassitoyevāti. Bhaṇḍakaṃ dhovantāti cīvaraṃ dhovantā. Dhovanadaṇḍakanti bhaṇḍadhovanadaṇḍaṃ.
184 “我是恶作者”指“以我的所为,他会不会死呢”——如此生起的恶作。然而,在此处所有此类情形中,由于在未死的情况下世尊判定为偷兰遮,因此,由他所施行的方便,无论苦受是否生起,因波罗夷并不成立,依佛陀的教说,唯是偷兰遮。显示巴利原文
184.Ahaṃ kukkuccakoti ‘‘mama kiriyāya mareyya nu kho, no vā’’ti evaṃ jātakukkuccako. Sabbatthāpi panettha evarūpesu vatthūsu amate thullaccayassa vuttattā tena katappayogena dukkhavedanā uppajjatu vā mā vā, pārājikāya abhāvato bhagavato vacanena thullaccayamevāti vadanti.
185 “胎儿以此坠落”即是堕胎药物,即指此类药物。因此说“由服用后”等。因提到“或赞叹死亡之美”,故通过间接方式并不能免罪,所以说“并无间接方式一说”。显示巴利原文
185. Gabbho patati etenāti gabbhapātanaṃ, tādisaṃ bhesajjaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yena paribhuttenā’’tiādi . ‘‘Maraṇavaṇṇaṃ vā saṃvaṇṇeyyā’’ti vuttattā pariyāyato āpattimokkho na hotīti āha ‘‘pariyāyo nāma natthī’’ti.
“不执持胎儿”即不能维持、保住胎儿。胎儿因风或虫类而毁坏,若无业力则不会毁坏,基于此意趣而说“以两种方式”。然而《长部注》中说:“胎儿确实依风、虫类和业三种原因而毁坏”,又说“但当以业力毁坏时,即使是诸佛也不能阻止”。这其中,当胎儿以风或虫类毁坏时,并非由前业创造了机会,而是以此为缘令业力成熟;但当业力自己创造了机会时,则不必依赖风或虫类,基于此意趣,业力被说为单独的原因,应如此理解。“虫类咬食后使之消失”应如此连接。为求不生育而给予药物者,若以“将在子宫内生起而后毁坏”的意图给予,则如同在堕胎时刻等,是业力所系;若以“在子宫内将不生起”的意图给予,则完全没有业力所系。显示巴利原文
Gabbhaṃ na gaṇhātīti gabbhaṃ na dhāreti. Vātena pāṇakehi vā gabbho vinassanto kammaṃ vinā na nassatīti adhippāyena ‘‘dvīhākārehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.26) pana ‘‘gabbho hi vātena pāṇakehi kammunā cāti tīhi kāraṇehi vinassatī’’ti vatvā ‘‘kammunā vinassante pana buddhāpi paṭibāhituṃ na sakkontī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha vātena pāṇakehi vā gabbhe vinassante na purimakammunā okāso kato, apica tappaccayā kammaṃ vipaccati, sayameva pana kammunā okāse kate na ekantena vāto pāṇakā vā apekkhitabbāti iminā adhippāyena kammassa visuṃ kāraṇabhāvo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pāṇakā khāditvā antaradhāpentīti yojetabbaṃ. Avijāyanatthāya bhesajjaṃ dentassa kucchiyaṃ uppajjitvā vinassissantīti iminā adhippāyena dinne opātakkhaṇanādīsu viya kammabaddho, kucchiyaṃ na uppajjissantīti iminā pana adhippāyena dinne nevatthi kammabaddho.
“同法者”是指在同一位导师的教法中共同修学的行者。由于五类人都具备出离意义的戒,故说“具有同等的戒、信与慧”。“从亲属已邀请之处”即从自己或对方的亲属曾经邀请之处。为了照顾病人,即使在未被邀请之处,佛陀也已允许通过暗示求取,因此即使作出也如同未作,称为“未作暗示”;而在“尊者,请说资具”这类未经邀请之处,以暗示求取,亦称为“未作暗示”。显示巴利原文
Sahadhammikānanti ekassa satthuno sāsane sahasikkhamānadhammānaṃ. Pañcannampi vivaṭṭanissitasīlattā ‘‘samasīlasaddhāpaññāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Ñātakapavāritaṭṭhānatoti attano tesaṃ vā ñātakapavāritaṭṭhānato. Gilānassatthāya appavāritaṭṭhānatopi viññattiyā anuññātattā katāpi akatā viyāti akataviññatti, ‘‘vada, bhante, paccayenā’’ti evaṃ akatapavāraṇaṭṭhāne ca viññatti akataviññatti.
“准备”即备办。“不可不做”在此处指恶作。关于同法者,如前所述的方式,因《库伦达注》中说:“对于这五种人,即使未作暗示,也可以备办药物”,故如此说。“只要亲属们看见”指只要他的亲属们看见。父亲的姐妹是姑母。母亲的兄弟是舅父。“不能胜任”指不能去做。“即使他们不乞求”,意思是他们若以“乞求是痛苦的”这样的想法而不来乞求。“作意后”,这是从应做之事的开示角度而说的;但在三本《结文》中写道:“即使不作意,也可以给予。”除了这十种亲属,由于他们的子孙等也是相关联的亲属,因此也包含在内。因此,“其他人”应理解为指非亲属。正因如此,才说“这些人的子孙相续”等。“家族次第”即家族顺序,也就是家族相续。怀着“他们会给我、会为我做”这样的期望而行事的人,由于在亲属中,即便乞求后也应接受,所以做医生的工作或犯污家之罪都不会发生,诸师如是说。在一切处都应了知决断;就如“幼母”等一切处,应以“幼母的丈夫”等来连接,依前文所述的方式了知决断。显示巴利原文
Paṭiyādiyatīti sampādeti. Akātuṃ na vaṭṭatīti ettha dukkaṭaṃ vadanti. Sahadhammikesu vuttanayenevāti ‘‘imesampi pañcannaṃ akataviññattiyāpi bhesajjaṃ kātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti kurundaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttattā kathitaṃ. Yāva ñātakā passantīti yāva tassa ñātakā passanti. Pitu bhaginī pitucchā. Mātu bhātā mātulo. Nappahontīti kātuṃ na sakkonti. Sacepi na yācantīti ‘‘yācituṃ dukkha’’nti adhippāyena yadi na yācanti. Ābhogaṃ katvāti idaṃ kattabbatādassanavasena vuttaṃ, ‘‘ābhogaṃ pana akatvāpi dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti tīsupi gaṇṭhipadesu likhitaṃ. Ete dasa ñātake ṭhapetvāti tesaṃ puttanattādayopi tappaṭibaddhattā ñātakā evāti tepi ettheva saṅgahitā. Tena aññesanti iminā aññātakānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘etesaṃ puttaparamparāyā’’tiādi. Kulaparivaṭṭoti kulānaṃ paṭipāṭi, kulaparamparāti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Mayhaṃ dassanti karissantī’’ti paccāsāya karontassapi yācitvāpi gahetabbaṭṭhānatāya ñātakesu vejjakammaṃ vā kuladūsakāpatti vā na hotīti vadanti. Sabbapadesupi vinicchayo veditabboti cūḷamātuyātiādīsu sabbapadesu ‘‘cūḷamātuyā sāmiko’’tiādinā yojetvā heṭṭhā vuttanayena vinicchayo veditabbo.
“依前文所述的方式寻求后”,以此指示了“由亲属沙弥等”所说的含义。“不期望者”是指不以“他们会给我、会为我做”这种为自己的利益而期望的人。然而,若是期望对比丘僧团有所助益,则可以做。即使被说“请告知药物”,正如“然而可以互相交谈”这句话因为是间接方式而可行,依前述方式,以“取这个和那个去做”等间接方式讲述,也完全没有过失,诸师如是说。显示巴利原文
Vuttanayena pariyesitvāti iminā ‘‘ñātisāmaṇerehi vā’’tiādinā vuttamatthaṃ atidissati. Apaccāsīsantenāti ‘‘mayhaṃ dassanti karissantī’’ti evaṃ attano atthāya apaccāsīsantena. Bhikkhusaṅghassa pana upakārakattaṃ paccāsīsantena kātuṃ vaṭṭati. ‘‘Bhesajjaṃ ācikkhathā’’ti vuttepi yathā ‘‘aññamaññaṃ pana kathā kātabbā’’ti idaṃ pariyāyattā vaṭṭati, evaṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayena ‘‘idañcidañca gahetvā karontī’’ti iminā pariyāyena kathentassapi nevatthi dosoti ācariyā.
对于不知戒律特征、没有师父的人,因其不可能有与律相应的言行,这样的利益便无从产生,故说“这不称为师父份”。意思是:这是由精通戒律的师父所应得的份额。对于为供花而布施的物品,若以不如法的言语方式处理则不成如法,故说“依如法方式”,意思即应依“请取花来”等如法的言语方式。显示巴利原文
Vinayalakkhaṇaṃ ajānantassa anācariyassa tadanurūpavohārāsambhavato īdisassa lābhassa uppatti nāma natthīti ‘‘ācariyabhāgo nāmāya’’nti vuttaṃ, vinaye pakataññunā ācariyena labhitabbabhāgo ayanti vuttaṃ hoti. Pupphapūjanatthāya dinnepi akappiyavohārena vidhānassa ayuttattā ‘‘kappiyavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘pupphaṃ āharathā’’tiādinā kappiyavohāravasenāti attho.
如果应“请作护卫经”之说而行,便落入为在家人作服务的状态,因此说“若说‘请作护卫经,尊者’时,不应作”;若说“请诵”时,则处于请求说法的状态,因此说“应作”。因为即使未被请求,说法也属应当,更何况已被请求。摇动后擦拭经绳,是显示作护卫经者所应行的仪轨。从寺院……乃至……恶作,是指仅施与非亲属者时犯恶作。若他们不知,即如果他们不会这样说。水,指施水。由于撤去脚垫时人们会视为不吉祥,故说“不应撤去脚垫”。可以去,是指即便有人说“为随行之故请来”,如此思惟后也可前往。显示巴利原文
Yadi ‘‘parittaṃ karothā’’ti vutte karonti, gihiveyyāvaccakaraṇaṭṭhāne tiṭṭhatīti ‘‘parittaṃ karotha, bhanteti vutte na kātabba’’nti vuttaṃ, ‘‘bhaṇathā’’ti vutte pana dhammakathāya ajjhesanaṭṭhāne ṭhitattā ‘‘kātabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Dhammañhi anajjhiṭṭhenapi kathetuṃ vaṭṭati, pageva ajjhiṭṭhena. Cāletvā suttaṃ parimajjitvāti parittaṃ karontena kātabbavidhiṃ dasseti. Vihārato…pe… dukkaṭanti aññātakānaṃyeva dadato dukkaṭaṃ. No ce jānantīti yadi evaṃ vattuṃ na jānanti. Udakanti dakkhiṇodakaṃ. Pādesu apanītesu avamaṅgalasaññino hontīti āha ‘‘na pādā apanetabbā’’ti . Gantuṃ vaṭṭatīti ‘‘parivāratthāya āgacchantū’’ti vuttepi evaṃ sallakkhetvā gantuṃ vaṭṭati.
“未触之食”是指从在家人手中获得、自己或其他比丘未曾触及其顶部的食物。于“盘”一词,应知钵也包括在内。“公开盗贼”是指觊觎王位的公开盗贼。在“盗贼那伽之事”中,《小髻解》说:“据说若给盗贼那伽已触之食,他会瞋怒;未触之食则不如法。长老便以持钵之手取食顶,将全部食物放入钵中施与,他因此满意。即使把少量食物分出放在一边说‘这些是我的’,之后再与他一起全部施与,也是可以的。”显示巴利原文
Anāmaṭṭhapiṇḍapātoti apabbajitassa hatthato laddho attanā aññena vā pabbajitena aggahitaaggo piṇḍapāto. Thālaketi iminā pattopi gahitoyevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Dāmarikacorassāti rajjaṃ patthayamānassa pākaṭacorassa. Coranāgavatthūti ettha ‘‘coranāgassa kira āmaṭṭhaṃ dento kujjhissati, anāmaṭṭhaṃ na vaṭṭatīti thero pattaggahaṇahattheneva aggaṃ gahetvā patte bhattaṃ sabbamadāsi, so tena tussi. ‘Ettakaṃ mayha’nti bhattassa ekapasseyeva thokaṃ ṭhapetvāpi puna tena saddhiṃ sabbampi dātuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti cūḷagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ.
由于缺乏财物与法而在自他之间产生的裂缝、间隙、分裂,将其填补、遮盖、连接,即称为摄益。此世间共住因未获得的财物与法而有二种裂缝,为了不使这些裂缝显现,如同以椅垫遮盖椅子一般,以财物与法来摄益,即称为财物摄益与法摄益。其中,法摄益对任何人都不可不作,因为对任何在家人或出家人,都应以法作摄益。而“摄益应对谁作,对谁不应作”这句话,是针对财物摄益说的。驱逐,是指在方圆三由旬范围内掠夺,驱赶众人,使人无处安住。为僧团之需而持来,是指从常食处为当日所需而持来。殊胜布帛彩绘敷具,指多种上等彩绘敷具。显示巴利原文
Āmisassa dhammassa ca alābhena attano parassa ca antare sambhavantassa chiddassa vivarassa bhedassa paṭisantharaṇaṃ pidahanaṃ gaṇhanaṃ paṭisanthāro. Ayañhi lokasannivāso alabbhamānena āmisena ca dhammena cāti dvīhi chiddo, tassa taṃ chiddaṃ yathā na paññāyati, evaṃ pīṭhassa viya paccattharaṇena āmisena ca dhammena ca paṭisantharaṇaṃ āmisapaṭisanthāro dhammapaṭisanthāro cāti vuccati. Tattha dhammapaṭisanthāro kassaci na kātabbo natthi. Yassa kassaci hi gahaṭṭhassa vā pabbajitassa vā dhammena saṅgaho kātabboyeva. ‘‘Paṭisanthāro pana kassa kātabbo, kassa na kātabbo’’ti idaṃ pana āmisapaṭisanthāraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ubbāsetvāti samantato tiyojanaṃ vilumpanto manusse palāpetvā aññesaṃ avāsaṃ katvā. Saṅghassatthāya āhaṭāti pākavaṭṭato taṃdivasassatthāya āhaṭā. Varapotthacittattharaṇanti anekappakārauttamarūpavicittattharaṇaṃ.
187 在十七群比丘中,因先前一人被指刺杀害,故于其余十六人中,除一人坐于腹上外,说“其余十五人”。“如未举起之石”,即如置于未举起处的石头。“以羯磨为目的”,指旨在行呵责等羯磨。“使进入”,即令其进入。“恶住处”,指被暴恶众生所占据的住处。显示巴利原文
187. Sattarasavaggiyesu pubbe ekassa aṅgulipatodena māritattā sesasoḷasajanesu udaraṃ āruhitvā nisinnamekaṃ ṭhapetvā ‘‘sesāpi pannarasa janā’’ti vuttaṃ. Adūhalapāsāṇā viyāti adūhale āropitapāsāṇā viya. Kammādhippāyāti tajjanīyādikammakaraṇādhippāyā. Āvāhetvāti āvisāpetvā. Vāḷavihāranti caṇḍasattehi adhiṭṭhitavihāraṃ.
189 关于“虽被树压住而不死”等应说之事,将在草木学处的注释中自行说明。因为该处有这样说的(波逸提注释92)——显示巴利原文
189.Yorukkhena otthatopi na maratītiādīsu yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ bhūtagāmasikkhāpadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ sayameva vakkhati. Evañhi tattha vuttaṃ (pāci. aṭṭha. 92) –
然而在杀人波罗夷的注释中,所有注释书都说:“若比丘被树压住或堕入坑中,且能从一侧砍树或掘地而出,即使为了活命,自己也不应作;但其他比丘掘地或砍树,或从活树砍下枝条,推倒那树令其脱出,则是可以,无罪。”对此未见理由。然而,“诸比丘,我允许在野火燃烧时放逆火、作防护经”(小品283)这一句经文可得见。若与此相应,则自己不可作、他人可作这种差别便无法成立。如果说因为为自己而作时是以自爱心和不善心而作,他人则是以悲心而作,故无罪,这也不是理由。因为即使以善心也会犯此罪。然而,因所有注释书都如此说,故不能否定,应在此寻求理据,或依于信注释师而行。显示巴利原文
‘‘Manussaviggahapārājikavaṇṇanāyaṃ pana sabbaaṭṭhakathāsu ‘sace bhikkhu rukkhena vā ajjhotthato hoti opāte vā patito, sakkā ca hoti ekena passena rukkhaṃ chinditvā bhūmiṃ vā khaṇitvā nikkhamituṃ, jīvitahetupi attanā na kātabbaṃ, aññena pana bhikkhunā bhūmiṃ vā khaṇitvā rukkhaṃ vā chinditvā allarukkhato vā daṇḍakaṃ chinditvā taṃ rukkhaṃ pavaṭṭetvā nikkhamāpetuṃ vaṭṭati, anāpattī’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha kāraṇaṃ na dissati, ‘anujānāmi, bhikkhave, davaḍāhe ḍayhamāne paṭaggiṃ dātuṃ parittaṃ kātu’nti (cūḷava. 283) idaṃ pana ekameva suttaṃ dissati. Sace etassa anulomaṃ, attano na vaṭṭati, aññassa vaṭṭatīti idaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ na sakkā laddhuṃ. Attano atthāya karonto attasinehena akusalacitteneva karoti, paro pana kāruññena. Tasmā anāpattīti ce, etampi akāraṇaṃ. Kusalacittenapi hi imaṃ āpattiṃ āpajjati, sabbaṭṭhakathāsu pana vuttattā na sakkā paṭisedhetuṃ, gavesitabbā ettha yutti, aṭṭhakathācariyānaṃ vā saddhāya gantabba’’nti.
因此,对此处若有人以其他方式加以铺陈,或在结释中所说的理由,皆不应视为核心而信受。显示巴利原文
Tasmā yaṃ ettha ito aññathā kenaci papañcitaṃ, gaṇṭhipadesu ca kāraṇaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ na sārato paccetabbaṃ.
190 湿……乃至……波逸提:即使在干燥处,若放火并以焚烧的意图点燃,即犯波逸提。恶作:在干燥处,或未将干燥物简别为“非干燥”而放火者,犯恶作。以嬉戏为目的者亦同此理。以嬉戏为目的者,应知即是贪着那噼啪作响之声。与之敌对之火为回火。作护卫,即作保护。自己生起,指因风等吹动竹子等物相互摩擦而生起。无燃料,即无薪柴。显示巴利原文
190.Alla…pe… pācittiyanti sukkhaṭṭhānepi aggiṃ pātetvā iminā adhippāyena ālimpentassa pācittiyameva. Dukkaṭanti sukkhaṭṭhāne vā sukkhaṃ ‘‘asukkha’’nti avavatthapetvā vā aggiṃ pātentassa dukkaṭaṃ. Kīḷādhippāyepi eseva nayo. Kīḷādhippāyo ca paṭapaṭāyamānasaddassādavaseneva veditabbo. Paṭipakkhabhūto aggi paṭaggi. Parittakaraṇanti ārakkhakaraṇaṃ. Sayaṃ vā uṭṭhitanti vāteritānaṃ veḷuādīnaṃ aññamaññasaṅghaṭṭanena samuṭṭhitaṃ. Nirupādānoti indhanarahito.
191-192 因为仅越过场地即构成波罗夷,故当说“以两下”时,由于期待以两下打击致死,若缺一下则两下不成立,故犯波罗夷。然而,若限定为“唯以两下”,则以一下打击致死时,他们说“不构成波罗夷”。对于先前已施加强力冲击者,由于随先前的惯行习气,诸法只是移至他处,而命根并不在那里,故说为“断头者”。此处的“此所依”指刑场。由于说到“以饮料受用”,他们说“盐酸粥是时限药”。显示巴利原文
191-192.Khettameva otiṇṇattā pārājikanti ‘‘dvīhī’’ti vutte dvīhipi pahārehi maraṇassa paccāsīsanato ekena vinā dvinnaṃ abhāvato ca pārājikaṃ. ‘‘Dvīhiyevāti niyamite pana ekena pahārena mārite natthi pārājika’’nti vadanti. Paṭhamaṃ āhitabalavegassa pubbānuciṇṇavasena dhammānaṃ desantaruppattiyā gamanamattaṃ ṭhapetvā jīvitindriyassa tattha avijjamānattā ‘‘sīsacchedakassā’’ti vuttaṃ. Imassa vatthussāti āghātanavatthussa. ‘‘Pānaparibhogenāti vuttattā loṇasovīrakaṃ yāmakālika’’nti vadanti.
第四条波罗夷戒。显示巴利原文
4. Catutthapārājikaṃ
四谛知者:四谛是四圣谛的总称,了知、通达此者,即称为四谛知者。即便声闻与独觉佛也可名为四谛知者,然而世尊对四谛的照见前所未有,并于其中证得一切知智与诸力中的自在,更因其将此广传于他相续中而昭著,故唯有世尊特别值得以“四谛知者”来称叹。显示巴利原文
Catusaccavidūti cattāri saccāni samāhaṭāni catusaccaṃ, taṃ avedi paṭivijjhīti catusaccavidū. Satipi sāvakānaṃ paccekabuddhānañca catusaccavidubhāve anaññapubbakattā bhagavato catusaccadassanassa tattha ca sabbaññutāya balesu ca vasībhāvassa pattito parasantānesu pasāritabhāvena pākaṭattā ca bhagavāva visesena ‘‘catusaccavidū’’ti thomanaṃ arahati.
瓦咖伍穆达提利亚比丘事释义显示巴利原文
Vaggumudātīriyabhikkhuvatthuvaṇṇanā
193 “Adhiṭṭhemā”意为“我们安排、共谋”。“使者之事”指持在家人的书信或口信前往各处。“安置威仪后”指将其调整为适合精勤的状态。“若有人问”是指有人问:“尊者们的威仪极为寂静,你们证得了何种殊胜?”至于“未来关联不存在”的问题,补上“将会被说”等省略文句后,未来关联便不存在。问:“‘被说’是过去式,如何与未来式产生关联?”答:“此语法规则应从语法著作中探求。”因为在此类情形中,语法家们说:当词根意义有所关联时,依“词根关联中诸缘”这一规则,即使时态不合的缘也能成立。显示巴利原文
193.Adhiṭṭhemāti saṃvidahāma. Dūtakammanti gihīnaṃ paṇṇaṃ vā sāsanaṃ vā gahetvā tattha tattha gamanaṃ. Iriyāpathaṃ saṇṭhapetvāti padhānānurūpaṃ katvā. Pucchantānaṃ vāti ‘‘ayyā santairiyāpathā ativiya upasantā, kataraṃ visesamadhigacchiṃsū’’ti pucchantānaṃ. Anāgatasambandhe pana asatīti ‘‘bhāsito bhavissatī’’ti pāṭhasesaṃ katvā anāgatasambandhe asati. ‘‘Bhāsito’’ti atītavacanaṃ kathaṃ anāgatavacanena sambandhamupagacchatīti āha ‘‘lakkhaṇaṃ pana saddasatthato pariyesitabba’’nti. Īdise hi ṭhāne ‘‘dhātusambandhe paccayā’’ti iminā lakkhaṇena dhātvatthasambandhe sati ayathākālavihitāpi paccayā sādhavo bhavantīti saddasatthavidū vadanti.
194 “色泽”是指遍满全身的色泽之悦意。“面容明净”是指比全身色泽更为殊胜的面部色泽之悦意。“肤色极净”则是指现有身体色泽的极度明净。因为诸根既无减损,也无满溢,故说“所住处的圆满”。第六根的所住处是心所依处,说五净根的所住处圆满时,即已显示心所依处等全身的圆满,故说“意第六诸根”。“如”在这里只是一个助词。“如迷鹿喻”是说因不知应作与不应作,犹如迷鹿。“四轮”指四种威仪。在这里,威仪以运转的含义而称为“轮”。“九门”是说以九种疮口作为九门。“苦”是指头痛等痛苦。“于一切事务中”是指钵事、煮染、染衣、工作处等事务。“维持”是指承担、运转。所以称为“令去”。显示巴利原文
194.Vaṇṇavāti iminā sakalasarīrānugatavaṇṇassa manāpatā vuttā. Pasannamukhavaṇṇāti iminā sakalasarīravaṇṇatopi adhikataraṃ mukhavaṇṇassa manāpatā vuttā. Vippasannachavivaṇṇāti iminā pana vijjamānasseva sarīravaṇṇassa ativiya pasannatā vuttā. Yasmā indriyānaṃ ūnattaṃ vā pūraṇattaṃ vā natthi, tasmā ‘‘abhiniviṭṭhokāsassa paripuṇṇattā’’ti vuttaṃ. Chaṭṭhassa abhiniviṭṭhokāso hadayavatthu, pañcapasādānaṃ abhiniviṭṭhokāsassa paripuṇṇatāvacaneneva hadayavatthuādisakalasarīrassa paripuṇṇatā dassitāyeva hotīti āha – ‘‘manacchaṭṭhānaṃindriyāna’’nti. Yathā tanti ettha tanti nipātamattaṃ. Bhantamigappaṭibhāgāti kattabbākattabbassa ajānanato bhantamigasadisā. Catucakkanti catuiriyāpathaṃ. Iriyāpatho hi idha pavattanaṭṭhena ‘‘cakka’’nti adhippeto. Navadvāranti navahi vaṇamukhehi navadvāraṃ. Dukkhanti sīsarogādidukkhaṃ. Sabbakiccesūti pattapacanacīvararajanayogaṭṭhānādikiccesu. Yāpetunti vahituṃ pavattetuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘gametu’’nti.
195 “存在”是显示它们实有;“被察觉”则是显示它们可被了知。故说“存在且被察觉”。“被察觉”即被看见、被知道。“拦路杀害之业”指拦路杀害的业。“杀”指亲自杀害。“令杀”指指使他人杀害。或者,“杀”指以捆绑、殴打等方式伤害。“令杀”则指杀害。“断”指截断他人手足等。“烤”指以棍杖压迫。这里“烤”指燃烧、折磨。或者,“烤”指恐吓、威胁。或者,“烤”是指在村庄里放火烧房等,并在其中烤山羊、绵羊等。显示巴利原文
195.Santoti iminā tesaṃ vijjamānataṃ dasseti, saṃvijjamānāti iminā pana tesaṃ upalabbhamānataṃ dasseti. Tenāha – ‘‘atthi ceva upalabbhanti cā’’ti. Upalabbhantīti dissanti, ñāyantīti attho. Panthadūhanakammanti panthaghātanakammaṃ. Hanantoti mārento. Ghātentoti mārāpento. Atha vā hanantoti bandhanatāḷanādīhi hiṃsanto. Ghātentoti mārento. Chindantoti paresaṃ hatthādīni chindanto. Pacantoti daṇḍena uppīḷento. Pacanañhettha dahanaṃ vibādhanaṃ adhippetaṃ. Pacantoti vā tajjento tāsento. Atha vā pacantoti gāmesu aggipātanavasena gehādīni jhāpetvā tattha ajeḷakādīni pacanto.
那些于诸学处不怀多尊重而多行犯戒的人,他们对诸学处极为轻慢。“掉举者”是说:于非净信处作净信想,于净信处作非净信想,于无罪处作有罪想,于有罪处作无罪想,具有掉举本性的人。“高慢者”是说像高耸的芦苇一样,生起虚妄我慢的人。“轻躁者”是指以钵、衣等作装饰而心性轻躁的人。“粗口者”是说话语粗恶、言辞粗涩的人。“散语者”是指言语无有节制、终日说无意义语的人。“忘念者”是指正念已失、已灭,即是无念的人。“不正知者”是指没有慧的人。“根门显露者”是指因无有防护,犹如在家人那样根门敞开的人。“被亲教师、依止师舍弃者”是指不依法与利摄受,因而被亲教师、依止师所舍弃,无救护、无依止的人。“重利养者”是指贪重资具的人。显示巴利原文
Ye sikkhāpadesu bahulagāravā na honti āpattivītikkamabahulā, te sikkhāpadesu atibbagāravā. Uddhateti akappiye kappiyasaññitāya kappiye akappiyasaññitāya avajje vajjasaññitāya vajje avajjasaññitāya ca uddhaccapakatike. Unnaḷeti uggatanaḷe, uṭṭhitatucchamāneti vuttaṃ hoti. Capaleti pattacīvaramaṇḍanādinā cāpallena yutte. Mukhareti mukhakhare , kharavacaneti vuttaṃ hoti. Vikiṇṇavāceti asaṃyatavacane divasampi niratthakavacanappalāpine. Muṭṭhā naṭṭhā sati etesanti muṭṭhassatī, sativirahiteti vuttaṃ hoti. Asampajāneti nippaññe. Pākatindriyeti saṃvarābhāvena gihikāle viya vivaṭaindriye. Ācariyupajjhāyehi pariccattaketi dhammena āmisena ca asaṅgahetvā ācariyupajjhāyehi pariccatte anāthe appatiṭṭhe. Lābhagaruketi paccayagaruke.
“安置威仪等”:此处的“等”字,应知包含了资具受用与周边暗示的摄受。因为在《大义释》中,依威仪安置、资具受用、周边暗示三种方式,提到了三种诈欺事。其中,一个恶欲者,以意在博取尊崇的威仪令人惊叹,这称为威仪安置所摄的诈欺事。同样地,当有人以衣服等物邀请时,他本有需要,却出于恶欲而拒绝,由此让那些居士们知道他对自己有着坚固的信心后,便通过种种方法,对那些怀着“啊,这位尊者少欲,不愿接受任何东西,我们若能让他接受哪怕一点点,那真是太好了”等想法,拿来殊胜衣服等物的人,表露出想要利益他们的意愿,然后接受。从此以后,八十车货物被源源运来,这种令人惊叹的行为,应知称为资具受用所摄的诈欺事。再者,一个恶欲者,以宣说证得上人法的言语,如此这般地令人惊叹,应知称为周边暗示所摄的诈欺事。心山等寺院,名为世间公认的住处。世间公认……以种种方法被赞叹的功德,这是句子的连接。令成熟:即令转向。为了显示那些以清净心经营自己经书等事务的游行者,在受用由此而来的资具时并无过失,所以说“然而那些……”等。当乞食不顺利时:即在行乞的村庄。显示巴利原文
Iriyāpathasaṇṭhapanādīnīti ādi-saddena paccayapaṭisevanasāmantajappānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Mahāniddese (mahāni. 87) hi iriyāpathasaṇṭhapanapaccayapaṭisevanasāmantajappanavasena tividhaṃ kuhakavatthu āgataṃ. Tattha pāpicchasseva sato sambhāvanādhippāyakatena iriyāpathena vimhāpanaṃ iriyāpathasaṇṭhapanasaṅkhātaṃ kuhakavatthu. Tathā cīvarādīhi nimantitassa tadatthikasseva sato pāpicchataṃ nissāya paṭikkhepanena te ca gahapatike attani suppatiṭṭhitasaddhe ñatvā puna tesaṃ ‘‘aho ayyo appiccho, na kiñci paṭiggaṇhituṃ icchati, suladdhaṃ vata no assa, sace appamattakampi kiñci paṭiggaṇheyyā’’ti nānāvidhehi upāyehi paṇītāni cīvarādīni upanentānaṃ tadanuggahakāmataṃyeva āvikatvā paṭiggahaṇena ca tato pabhuti asītisakaṭabhārehi upanāmanahetubhūtaṃ vimhāpanaṃ paccayapaṭisevanasaṅkhātaṃ kuhakavatthūti veditabbaṃ. Pāpicchasseva pana sato uttarimanussadhammādhigamaparidīpanavācāya tathā tathā vimhāpanaṃ sāmantajappanasaṅkhātaṃ kuhakavatthūti veditabbaṃ. Cittalapabbatādivihāro lokasammatasenāsanaṃ nāma. Lokasammata …pe… upāyehi saṃvaṇṇiyamānaguṇoti sambandho. Paripācetunti pariṇāmetuṃ. Suddhacittena attano ganthadhurādikammaṃ katvā vicarantānaṃ tammūlakapaccayaparibhoge dosābhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhikkhācāre asampajjamāneti gocaragāme bhikkhāya caritvā labhitabbapiṇḍapāte asampajjante. Te ca vattasīsena sabbampetaṃ karonti, na lābhanimittaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tantipaveṇighaṭanakā sāsanajotakā’’ti.
“艰难地”:这并非指苦行道。因为诸佛的四道都是乐行道,但这里指的是在圆满波罗蜜时,对于仍有贪嗔痴的乞求者,他割下自己装饰好的头,取出颈血,挖出涂有锑粉的眼睛,献出能延续家族的儿子、言行可爱的妻子等,以及在类似忍辱论者等生中,遭受割截等痛苦时所行的行道,就此而说。“辛苦地”是它的同义词。显示巴利原文
Kicchenāti na dukkhāya paṭipadāya. Buddhānañhi cattāropi maggā sukhāpaṭipadāva honti, pāramīpūraṇakāle pana sarāgadosamohasseva sato āgatānaṃ yācakānaṃ alaṅkatappaṭiyattaṃ sīsaṃ kantitvā galalohitaṃ nīharitvā suañjitāni akkhīni uppāṭetvā kulavaṃsappatiṭṭhāpakaṃ puttaṃ manāpacāriniṃ bhariyanti evamādīni dentassa aññānipi khantivādīsadisesu attabhāvesu chejjabhejjādīni pāpuṇantassa āgamanīyapaṭipadaṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ. Kasirenāti tasseva vevacanaṃ.
因为不能单独给予一人,由于其分量沉重,所以称为“重物”;因为即使分给所有人也不能取用,所以称为“重资具”。以共有资具的性质:即因为是僧团的,所以是一切比丘共有的资具的性质。“摄受、讨好”:这是针对非盗心而说的。因此他说:“由于是那样的状态而偷取”,意思是由于是不可分配、不可分割的状态而偷取。因为为了摄受在家众而分配或分割重物,就偷取了它不可分配、不可分割的性质。犯污家恶作:在此,因为说“若分配者,犯偷兰遮”,所以由于分配的缘故,也不免于偷兰遮。显示巴利原文
Ekasseva dātuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya garubhāvato ‘‘garubhaṇḍānī’’ti vuttaṃ, sabbesaṃ bhājetvāpi gahetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya ‘‘garuparikkhārānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sādhāraṇaparikkhārabhāvenāti saṅghikattā sabbabhikkhusādhāraṇaparikkhārabhāvena. Saṅgaṇhāti upalāpetīti idaṃ atheyyacittaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘tathābhāvato thenetvā’’ti, avissajjiyaavebhaṅgiyabhāvato thenetvāti attho. Garubhaṇḍañhi kulasaṅgahatthāya vissajjento vibhajanto ca tassa avissajjiyaavaebhaṅgiyabhāvaṃ theneti. Kuladūsakadukkaṭaṃ āpajjatīti ettha ‘‘yo vissajjeyya, āpatti thullaccayassā’’ti vuttattā vissajjanapaccayā thullaccayenapi na muccati.
“不存在”即没有;“非真实”即未生起。由于未生起,所以它是不存在的——后句是前句的原因说明。“夸耀”指声称有高寿,因为戒是比丘的寿命,当他这样夸耀时,戒的寿命便立时消失。“以对不存在的称赞”指对自己本来没有的功德加以称赞。因为这样执取……进而偷取而受用:在此,由于以对不存在的称赞而偷取国民的食物,出世间法也被偷取了。“如同赌徒”如同赌徒抓鸟;“欺诈者”即狡诈者。“姓”指通称,“唯”字被省略,因此“沙门”只是受持姓,即只拥有姓,意思是徒有沙门之名。显示巴利原文
Asantanti avijjamānaṃ. Abhūtanti anuppannaṃ. Anuppannattā hi tassa taṃ asantanti. Purimassa pacchimaṃ kāraṇavacanaṃ. Ullapatīti uggatāyuko lapati. Sīlañhi bhikkhuno āyu, taṃ tassa tathālapanasamakālameva vigacchati. Asantasambhāvanāyāti attano avijjamānaguṇehi sambhāvanāya. Evañhi gaṇhatā…pe… thenetvā gahitā hontīti ettha asantasambhāvanāya raṭṭhapiṇḍassa thenetvā gahitattā lokuttaradhammopi thenitoyeva hoti. Kitavassevāti kitavassa sakuṇaggahaṇamiva. Kerāṭikassāti saṭhassa. Gottaṃ vuccati sādhāraṇanāmaṃ, matta-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho, tasmā samaṇāti gottamattaṃ anubhavanti dhārentīti gotrabhuno, nāmamattasamaṇāti vuttaṃ hoti.
增上慢事注释显示巴利原文
Adhimānavatthuvaṇṇanā
196 由于仅依下分道所知的界限而了知,故最高道智称为“了知”;因其果报,最高果智及与之俱起的正思惟等也被称为“了知”。因此说“他们记说了知:即记说了阿罗汉果”。圣弟子暂时不生起:因为已断除了增上慢的缘,所以不生起。持戒者……不生起:因为是无作者的状态。将三相加于上:即以聚观的方式将三相加于上。已开始修观者:即已开始修生灭随观者。纯得止者即使未修观业,由于未见烦恼现行,唯以无知之力而想“我是圣者”,故说“或纯得止者”;想“我是阿罗汉”:如同住在优阇婆朗卡的大那伽长老。显示巴利原文
196. Heṭṭhimamaggehi ñātamariyādāya eva jānanato aññā aggamaggapaññā, tassā phalabhāvato aggaphalapaññā taṃsahagatā sammāsaṅkappādayo ca aññāti vuttāti āha ‘‘aññaṃ byākariṃsūti arahattaṃ byākariṃsū’’ti. Ariyasāvakassa tāva nuppajjatīti pahīnādhimānapaccayattā nuppajjati . Sīlavatopi…pe… nuppajjati akārakabhāvato. Tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvāti kalāpasammasanavasena tilakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā. Āraddhavipassakassāti udayabbayānupassanāya āraddhavipassakassa. Suddhasamathalābhī vipassanāya kammaṃ akatvāpi kilesasamudācāraṃ apassanto kevalaṃ aññāṇabalena ‘‘ariyohamasmī’’ti maññatīti āha ‘‘suddhasamathalābhiṃ vā’’ti. ‘‘Arahā aha’’nti maññati uccavālaṅkavāsī mahānāgatthero viya.
据说,有一位住在塔朗嘎拉寺的达摩定长老,是一位具足无碍解的大漏尽者,曾为广大的比丘僧团担任教诫师。某一天,他坐在自己的日间住处思惟:“我们师父优卡瓦朗卡寺大那嘎长老的沙门本分事业,是否已达究竟?”当他观察时,发现师父仍只是凡夫,便知道:“如果我不去,他将会以凡夫身份死去。”于是以神通腾空而起,飞至正坐于日间住处的长老附近,下降后向长老礼拜,尽诸义务,然后坐于一旁。长老问:“贤友达摩定,你怎么在非时到来?”他回答:“尊者,我是来问问题的。”长老说:“问吧,贤友,我知道的就会告诉你。”于是达摩定问了一千个问题。长老对所问的每一个问题都毫无滞碍地作答。然后达摩定问:“尊者,您的智慧极为锐利,您何时证得此法?”长老答:“贤友,在六十年前。”达摩定说:“尊者,请运用禅定。”长老答:“贤友,这并非难事。”达摩定便说:“那么,尊者,请化作一头象。”长老便化作一头纯白的大象。达摩定又说:“现在,尊者,请让这头象双耳竖起、尾巴伸展、将象鼻放入口中,发出恐怖的号叫,向您迎面冲来。”长老依言而行,随即看见那大象急速冲来。显示巴利原文
Talaṅgaravāsī dhammadinnatthero kira nāma eko pabhinnappaṭisambhido mahākhīṇāsavo mahato bhikkhusaṅghassa ovādadāyako ahosi. So ekadivasaṃ attano divāṭṭhāne nisīditvā ‘‘kinnu kho amhākaṃ ācariyassa uccavālaṅkavāsīmahānāgattherassa samaṇabhāvakiccaṃ matthakappattaṃ, no’’ti āvajjento puthujjanabhāvamevassa disvā ‘‘mayi agacchante puthujjanakālakiriyameva karissatī’’ti ca ñatvā iddhiyā vehāsaṃ uppatitvā divāṭṭhāne nisinnassa therassa samīpe orohitvā vanditvā vattaṃ dassetvā ekamantaṃ nisīdi. ‘‘Kiṃ, āvuso dhammadinna, akāle āgatosī’’ti ca vutto ‘‘pañhaṃ, bhante, pucchituṃ āgatomhī’’ti āha. Tato ‘‘pucchāvuso, jānamānā kathayissāmā’’ti vutto pañhasahassaṃ pucchi. Thero pucchitaṃ pucchitaṃ pañhaṃ asajjamānova kathesi. Tato ‘‘atitikkhaṃ vo, bhante, ñāṇaṃ, kadā tumhehi ayaṃ dhammo adhigato’’ti vutto ‘‘ito saṭṭhivassakāle, āvuso’’ti āha. Samādhimhi, bhante, vaḷañjethāti. Na idaṃ, āvuso, bhāriyanti. Tena hi, bhante, ekaṃ hatthiṃ māpethāti. Thero sabbasetaṃ hatthiṃ māpesi. Idāni, bhante, yathā ayaṃ hatthī añjitakaṇṇo pasāritanaṅguṭṭho soṇḍaṃ mukhe pakkhipitvā bheravaṃ koñcanādaṃ karonto tumhākaṃ abhimukhaṃ āgacchati, tathā naṃ karothāti. Thero tathā katvā vegena āgacchato hatthissa bheravaṃ ākāraṃ disvā uṭṭhāya palāyituṃ āraddho. Tamenaṃ khīṇāsavatthero hatthaṃ pasāretvā cīvarakaṇṇe gahetvā ‘‘bhante, khīṇāsavassa sārajjaṃ nāma hotī’’ti āha. So tasmiṃ kāle attano puthujjanabhāvaṃ ñatvā ‘‘avassayo me, āvuso, dhammadinna hohī’’ti vatvā pādamūle ukkuṭikaṃ nisīdi. ‘‘Bhante, tumhākaṃ avassayo bhavissāmiccevāhaṃ āgato, mā cintayitthā’’ti kammaṭṭhānaṃ kathesi. Thero kammaṭṭhānaṃ gahetvā caṅkamaṃ oruyha tatiye padavāre aggaphalaṃ arahattaṃ pāpuṇi. Thero kira dosacarito ahosi.
具分别学处注释显示巴利原文
Savibhaṅgasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā
197-198 “然而由于……”等句,是对“不存在、不真实、不可得”这些词的原因说明。其中,“那”指增上人法。“不证知”即不知自身中具有。“现行”即声称“我有此法”或令人知晓。“不存在、不真实”的原因说明是“未在相续中生起”。“以智未现证”则是“不可得”的原因说明。超越凡夫的佛陀等最上人所证得之法,称为增上人法,故说“增上人……”等。“那”指增上人法。接着,为何在分别句中用复数说明?因此说“然而在分别句中……”等。虽然增上人法也有无记的,但依无病之义,如同《巴希提迦经》中所说,说为“善法”。“其”指增上人法。刹那、瞬间、须臾这些词在其他地方意义有别,但在此处,仅以同义语的方式,在圣典中说为“彼刹那、彼瞬间、彼须臾”。显示巴利原文
197-198.Yasmā panātiādi ‘‘asantaṃ abhūtaṃ asaṃvijjamāna’’nti etesaṃ kāraṇavacanaṃ. Tattha yanti yaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ. Anabhijānanti attani atthibhāvaṃ ajānanto. Samudācaratīti ‘‘atthi mayhaṃ esa dhammo’’ti katheti jānāpeti vā. ‘‘Asantaṃ abhūta’’nti imassa kāraṇavacanaṃ santāne anuppannoti. Ñāṇena ca asacchikatoti idaṃ pana ‘‘asaṃvijjamāna’’nti etassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Pakatimanussehi uttaritarānaṃ buddhādiuttamapurisānaṃ adhigamadhammo uttarimanussadhammoti āha ‘‘uttarimanussāna’’ntiādi. Tanti uttarimanussadhammaṃ. Atha padabhājane bahuvacananiddeso kasmā katoti āha ‘‘padabhājane panā’’tiādi. Kiñcāpi uttarimanussadhammo abyākatopi hoti, ārogyaṭṭhena pana bāhitikasutte viya ‘‘kusale dhamme’’ti vuttaṃ. Assāti uttarimanussadhammassa. Khaṇalayamuhutta-saddā aññattha bhinnatthāpi honti, idha pana khaṇapariyāyavaseneva ‘‘taṃ khaṇaṃ taṃ layaṃ taṃ muhutta’’nti pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ.
因为应当证得,所以称为“证得”,即禅那等。关于证得的询问,名为“证得问”。因此说“于禅那、解脱等……”等。“方便问”即关于证得之方便的询问。“如何”意为依何种方式、依何种方法。“你获得哪些法?”此句则是显示:先前以“你证得了什么?”未加区分地询问禅那等殊胜类别,而现在则是加以区分后的询问方式。显示巴利原文
Adhigantabbato adhigamo, jhānādi, adhigamassa pucchā adhigamapucchā. Tenāha ‘‘jhānavimokkhādīsū’’tiādi. Upāyapucchāti adhigamupāyapucchā. Kintīti kena pakārena, kena vidhināti attho. Katamesaṃ tvaṃ dhammānaṃ lābhīti idaṃ pana pubbe ‘‘kiṃ te adhigata’’nti aniddhāritabhedā jhānādivisesā pucchitāti idāni tesaṃ niddhāretvā pucchanākāradassanaṃ.
“因此”即由于应当依上述六种方式对证得的记说进行净检,所以这样说。“仅凭此量”即不能仅凭这点记说就予以崇敬,因为有些人的记说可能不真实。而应在这六方面为了净检而说:正如似金的假金也看似真金,真金需通过摩擦、加热、切割来检验;同样,应将其放入刚才所说的这六方面中,为了净检而说。“于解脱等”中,“等”字包含了定、等至、智见、道修习、果现证等。之所以说“明显”,是因为证得殊胜者无有失念。在其余问中,“明显”一词也依此理而用。显示巴利原文
Tasmāti yasmā yathāvuttehi chahākārehi adhigamabyākaraṇaṃ sodhetabbaṃ, tasmā. Ettāvatāvāti ettakena byākaraṇamatteneva na sakkātabbo. Byākaraṇañhi ekaccassa ayāthāvatopi hotīti. Imesu pana chasu ṭhānesu sodhanatthaṃ vattabboti yathā nāma jātarūpapatirūpakampi jātarūpaṃ viya khāyatīti jātarūpaṃ nighaṃsanatāpanacchedanehi sodhetabbaṃ, evameva imesu idāneva vuttesu chasu ṭhānesu pakkhipitvā sodhanatthaṃ vattabbo. Vimokkhādīsūti ādi-saddena samādhisamāpattiñāṇadassanamaggabhāvanāphalasacchikiriyādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Pākaṭo hotīti adhigatavisesassa satisammosābhāvato. Sesapucchāsupi pākaṭo hotīti pade eseva nayo.
因为通常而言,由自己证得的道所断除的烦恼是明显的,但这只是依多数而说。然而,对于某些人而言,对自己所证得道应断的烦恼确实会生起疑惑,正如摩诃男释迦(Mahānāma Sakka)的疑惑那样。他虽然已是斯陀含,却问世尊:‘尊者,我心中这样想:“我的心中到底有什么法未被断除,使得有时贪法现起并持续占据我的心,嗔法现起并持续占据我的心,痴法现起并持续占据我的心?”’(中部1.175)据传,这位国王以为凭斯陀含道便能无余断除贪嗔痴。圣弟子会生起这样的疑惑吗?会的。何以故?因为不精通于施设。圣弟子若不精通‘此烦恼由某道所应断’这一施设,便会这样想。难道他没有省察吗?有,但那省察并非对所有人都是圆满的。因为有人只省察已断的烦恼,有人只省察剩余的烦恼,有人只省察道,有人只省察果,有人只省察涅槃。然而,在这五种省察中,缺少一种或两种是不圆满的。因此,省察不圆满者,由于对道所应断烦恼的施设不精通,便会这样想。而精通于诵习与遍问者,则于诵经、道与注释中善巧。显示巴利原文
Sabbesañhi attanā adhigatamaggena pahīnakilesā pākaṭā hontīti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ. Kassaci hi attanā adhigatamaggavajjhakilesesu sandeho uppajjatiyeva mahānāmassa sakkassa viya. So hi sakadāgāmī samānopi ‘‘tassa mayhaṃ, bhante, evaṃ hoti ‘ko su nāma me dhammo ajjhattaṃ appahīno, yena me ekadā lobhadhammāpi cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti, dosadhammāpi cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhanti, mohadhammāpi cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭhantī’’’ti (ma. ni. 1.175) bhagavantaṃ pucchi. Ayaṃ kira rājā sakadāgāmimaggena lobhadosamohā niravasesā pahīyantīti saññī ahosi. Kiṃ ariyasāvakassa evaṃ sandeho uppajjatīti? Āma uppajjati. Kasmā? Paṇṇattiyaṃ akovidattā. ‘‘Ayaṃ kileso asukamaggavajjho’’ti imissā paṇṇattiyā akovidassa hi ariyasāvakassa evaṃ hoti. Kiṃ tassa paccavekkhaṇā natthīti? Atthi, sā pana na sabbesaṃ paripuṇṇā hoti. Eko hi pahīnakilesameva paccavekkhati, eko avasiṭṭhakilesameva, eko maggameva, eko phalameva, eko nibbānameva. Imāsu pana pañcasu paccavekkhaṇāsu ekaṃ vā dve vā no laddhuṃ na vaṭṭati. Iti yassa paccavekkhaṇā na paripuṇṇā, tassa maggavajjhakilesapaṇṇattiyaṃ akovidattā evaṃ hoti. Uggahaparipucchākusalāti sajjhāyamaggasaṃvaṇṇanāsu nipuṇā.
凡由某种行道证得圣道者,其前分的修习即是令其证得的行道。‘应净化’是说,通过审察‘是清净还是不清净’来净化。‘不清净’,是因为在各方面仍有放逸的修行。‘应除去’,是说应从自己的声称中将之除去。说过‘清净’之后,为显示清净的方式,接着宣说‘长时’等语。此处‘被了知’也是与‘如果’一词结合,构成‘如果那位比丘通过那种行道而被了知’的关联。由于对四种资具无所执著,故说‘以如虚空中手印的心’。‘与所说相似’是指那位比丘的回答与本经中所说相似,即意思相同。显示巴利原文
Yāya paṭipadāya yassa ariyamaggo āgacchati, sā pubbabhāgapaṭipatti āgamanapaṭipadā. Sodhetabbāti suddhā udāhu na suddhāti vicāraṇavasena sodhetabbā. Na sujjhatīti tattha tattha pamādapaṭipattisabbhāvato. Apanetabboti attano paṭiññāya apanetabbo. ‘‘Sujjhatī’’ti vatvā sujjhanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dīgharatta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Paññāyatīti etthāpi ‘‘yadī’’ti padaṃ ānetvā yadi so bhikkhu tāya paṭipadāya paññāyatīti sambandho . Catūsu paccayesu alaggattā ‘‘ākāse pāṇisamena cetasā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vuttasadisanti tassa bhikkhuno byākaraṇaṃ imasmiṃ sutte vuttena sadisaṃ, samanti attho.
‘其修行与漏尽者相似’,是由于长时善于镇伏烦恼的缘故。‘对于漏尽者……不会发生’,是因为已断除颠倒,且无生命贪爱,故不会发生。然而凡夫由于未断颠倒,尚有生命贪爱,即使因微小之事也会发生。显示巴利原文
Khīṇāsavapaṭipattisadisā paṭipadā hotīti dīgharattaṃ suvikkhambhitakilesattā. Khīṇāsavassa nāma…pe… na hotīti pahīnavipallāsattā jīvitanikantiyā ca abhāvato na hoti. Puthujjanassa pana appahīnavipallāsattā jīvitanikantisabbhāvato ca appamattakenapi hoti.
此处有这样的案例:据说,长部诵者无畏长老为了考验一位乞食比丘,未能成功,便给一位年少沙弥暗示。那沙弥在善河门潜入水中,抓住了一位正在沐浴的乞食者的脚。乞食者以为是鳄鱼,大声惊叫,众人由此知道他是凡夫。而在月面提须王时期,大寺有一位僧团长老是漏尽者,视力微弱,只住在寺内。国王心想‘我要考察这位长老’,便在比丘们外出乞食时,悄悄靠近,像蛇一样抓住长老的脚。长老如石柱般不动,问道:‘谁在那里?’‘是我,尊者,提须。’‘你散发着香气,提须。’如此,漏尽者没有恐惧。然而有些凡夫也非常勇敢无畏,应以可染的所缘来考察。因为瓦萨巴王在考察一位长老时,让他坐在家中,自己坐在他身旁揉搓枣子酱。大长老的口水动了,凡夫的本性便显露了。因为漏尽者对味的渴爱确实已善断除,即使对天界的味道也没有欲求。因此,通过这些方法考察后,如果他生起恐惧、颤抖或味欲,就应……显示巴利原文
Tatrimāni vatthūni – dīghabhāṇakaabhayatthero kira ekaṃ piṇḍapātikaṃ pariggahetuṃ asakkonto daharassa saññaṃ adāsi. So taṃ nahāyamānaṃ kalyāṇīnadīmukhadvāre nimujjitvā pāde aggahesi. Piṇḍapātiko ‘‘kumbhīlo’’ti saññāya mahāsaddaṃ akāsi, tadā naṃ ‘‘puthujjano’’ti jāniṃsu. Candamukhatissarājakāle pana mahāvihāre saṅghatthero khīṇāsavo dubbalacakkhuko vihāreyeva acchati. Taṃ rājā ‘‘theraṃ pariggaṇhissāmī’’ti bhikkhūsu bhikkhācāraṃ gatesu appasaddo upasaṅkamitvā sappo viya pāde aggahesi. Thero silāthambho viya niccalo hutvā ‘‘ko etthā’’ti āha. Ahaṃ, bhante, tissoti. Sugandhaṃ vāyasi no tissāti. Evaṃ khīṇāsavassa bhayaṃ nāma natthi. Ekacco pana puthujjanopi atisūro hoti nibbhayo, so rajanīyena ārammaṇena pariggaṇhitabbo. Vasabharājāpi hi ekaṃ theraṃ pariggaṇhamāno ghare nisīdāpetvā tassa santike badarasāḷavaṃ maddamāno nisīdi. Mahātherassa kheḷo calito, therassa puthujjanabhāvo āvibhūto. Khīṇāsavassa hi rasataṇhā nāma suppahīnā, dibbesupi rasesu nikanti nāma na hoti. Tasmā imehi upāyehi pariggahetvā sacassa bhayaṃ vā chambhitattaṃ vā rasataṇhā vā uppajjati, ‘‘na tvaṃ arahā’’ti apanetabbo.
恶欲的特征是表彰不存在的功德,所以说:‘在此,有某一类人……’等等。以‘等’字收录了如是的巴利文段:‘无信者却希望“愿人们知道我是有信者”,寡闻者却希望“愿人们知道我是多闻者”,乐于群聚者却希望“愿人们知道我是独处者”,懈怠者却希望“愿人们知道我是精进者”,失念者却希望“愿人们知道我是正念现前者”,无定者却希望“愿人们知道我是有定者”,劣慧者却希望“愿人们知道我是有慧者”,非漏尽者却希望“愿人们知道我是漏尽者”——凡如此类的欲求、欲求状态、恶欲性、贪染、极贪染、心的极贪染,这称为恶欲性。’(《分别论》851)‘以恶的’即低劣的欲求。‘被除去’即从正命被除去,因恶欲而离去,故说因欲求而被除去。而如此被邪命制伏、败亡者,称为‘被制伏、败亡’,故说‘被制伏、败亡’。显示巴利原文
Asantaguṇasambhāvanalakkhaṇā pāpicchāti āha – ‘‘yā sā idhekacco…pe… ādinā nayenā’’ti. Ādi-saddena ‘‘assaddho samāno ‘saddhoti maṃ jano jānātū’ti icchati, appassutova samāno ‘bahussutoti maṃ jano jānātū’ti icchati, saṅgaṇikārāmova samāno ‘pavivittoti maṃ jano jānātū’ti icchati, kusītova samāno ‘āraddhavīriyoti maṃ jano jānātū’ti icchati, muṭṭhassatīva samāno ‘upaṭṭhitassatīti maṃ jano jānātū’ti icchati, asamāhitova samāno ‘samāhitoti maṃ jano jānātū’ti icchati, duppaññova samāno ‘paññavāti maṃ jano jānātū’ti icchati, akhīṇāsavova samāno ‘khīṇāsavoti maṃ jano jānātū’ti icchati, yā evarūpā icchā icchāgatā pāpicchatā rāgo sārāgo cittassa sārāgo, ayaṃ vuccati pāpicchatā’’ti (vibha. 851) evaṃ vuttaṃ pāḷipadesaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Pāpikāyāti lāmikāya icchāya. Apakatoti pāpikāya icchāya sammāājīvato apeto katoti icchāya apakato. Tathābhūto ca micchājīvena abhibhūto parājito nāma hotīti āha ‘‘abhibhūto parājito’’ti.
“沙门性被错误执取,则拖向地狱”:正如茅草,若被错误地抓取,就会割伤、撕裂那人的手;同样地,被称为沙门法的沙门性,若以戒行破损等方式被错误执取,就会拖向地狱,即令生于地狱中,这是其义。“松弛”:指因懈怠而行,以松懈的执持所作。“游方”:指已陷入破损等状态的沙门法。“更扬起尘垢”:指这样的沙门法不能去除内心存在的贪欲尘垢等,反而在其上更增添贪欲尘垢等,这是其义。“比丘身份”:指犯了波罗夷戒后,仅凭声称“我是沙门”而成立的、仅属名义上的比丘身份。“无智者”:在“ajānameva”的读法中,“eva”是表示限定意义的助词。而在“ajānamevaṃ”的读法中,则应连接为“我如此知,我如此见”等语。显示巴利原文
Sāmaññaṃ dupparāmaṭṭhaṃ nirayāyupakaḍḍhatīti yathā kuso yena duggahito, tassa hatthaṃ anukantati phāleti, evameva samaṇadhammasaṅkhātaṃ sāmaññampi khaṇḍasīlāditāya dupparāmaṭṭhaṃ nirayāya upakaḍḍhati, niraye nibbattāpetīti attho. Sithiloti olīyitvā karaṇena sithilaggāhena kato. Paribbājoti khaṇḍādibhāvappatto samaṇadhammo. Bhiyyo ākirate rajanti abbhantare vijjamānaṃ rāgarajādiṃ evarūpo samaṇadhammo apanetuṃ na sakkoti, atha kho tassa upari aparampi rāgarajādiṃ ākiratīti attho. Bhikkhubhāvoti pārājikaṃ āpajjitvā ‘‘samaṇo aha’’nti paṭijānanato vohāramattasiddho bhikkhubhāvo. Ajānamevāti pāṭhe evāti avadhāraṇatthe nipāto. Ajānamevanti pāṭhe pana evaṃ jānāmi evaṃ passāmīti avacanti yojetabbaṃ.
词句解析注释显示巴利原文
Padabhājanīyavaṇṇanā
199 “不净禅等”:此处的“等”字包含了身至念禅和遍禅。由此应知,即使说“我入身至念禅、地遍禅”等,也构成波罗夷。“解脱”:为显示前缀“vi”有殊胜或种种义,故说“善解脱”等。此中的“解脱”指四圣道。为说明其依功德而得“空”等名称,才说“然而此”等。确实,道由五种理由得名:或依自性,或依对治,或依功德,或依所缘,或依来由。若从无常随观诸行后,由行舍智出起,便依无相解脱而解脱;若从苦随观后出起,便依无愿解脱而解脱;若从无我随观后出起,便依空解脱而解脱——这是依自性得名。然而,此道因以无常随观破除了诸行的密集,舍弃常相、恒相、永恒相而来,故为无相;因以苦随观舍弃乐想,令愿求与希求干涸而来,故为无愿;因以无我随观舍弃我、有情、补特伽罗想,见诸行为空而来,故为空——这是依对治得名。显示巴利原文
199.Asubhajjhānādīnīti ādi-saddena kāyagatāsatijjhānañca kasiṇajjhānañca saṅgaṇhāti. Tena ‘‘kāyagatāsatijjhānaṃ pathavīkasiṇajjhānaṃ samāpajji’’ntiādiṃ vadantopi pārājikova hotīti veditabbaṃ. Vimokkhoti ettha vi-saddo visesattho vividhattho vāti dassento āha ‘‘suṭṭhu mutto’’tiādi. Vimokkhoti cattāro ariyamaggā. Tassa saguṇato suññatādināmalābhaṃ dassento āha ‘‘so panāya’’ ntiādi. Maggo hi nāma pañcahi kāraṇehi nāmaṃ labhati sarasena vā paccanīkena vā saguṇena vā ārammaṇena vā āgamanena vā. Sace hi saṅkhārupekkhā aniccato saṅkhāre sammasitvā vuṭṭhāti, animittavimokkhena vimuccati, sace dukkhato sammasitvā vuṭṭhāti, appaṇihitavimokkhena vimuccati, sace anattato sammasitvā vuṭṭhāti, suññatavimokkhena vimuccati, idaṃ sarasato nāmaṃ nāma. Yasmā panesa aniccānupassanāya saṅkhārānaṃ ghanavinibbhogaṃ katvā niccanimittadhuvanimittasassatanimittāni pajahanto āgato, tasmā animitto. Dukkhānupassanāya pana sukhasaññaṃ pahāya paṇidhiṃ patthanaṃ sukkhāpetvā āgatattā appaṇihito. Anattānupassanāya attasattapuggalasaññaṃ pahāya saṅkhārānaṃ suññato diṭṭhattā suññatoti idaṃ paccanīkato nāmaṃ nāma.
然而,此道因无贪等而空,故为空;因无色相、无贪相等相——或者说无贪等之相,故为无相;因无贪等愿求等,故为无愿——这是依功德得名。此道以空、无相、无愿的涅槃为所缘,故被称为空、无相、无愿——这是依所缘得名。来由则有两种:观之来由与道之来由。其中,于道可得知观之来由,于果可得道之来由。确实,无我随观名为空,由空观而生之道为空;无常随观名为无相,由无相观而生之道为无相。不过,此名称并非依阿毗达摩的理趣而得,因为那并非完全无相,未能舍离诸行之相;但依经教的理趣则可得。在那里,据说种姓智以无相涅槃为所缘,获得无相之名,并立于应来之处,将此名赋予道,因此道被称为无相。而依道之来由,果为无相,这完全合理。苦随观因令对诸行的愿求干涸而来,故名为无愿;由无愿观而生之道为无愿;无愿道之果为无愿。如此,观将其名赋予道,道将其名赋予果——这是依来由得名。“空”:即远离。道中无有贪等,又因贪等是更上生起之贪等的原因,故贪等被称为“相”,所以说“以贪嗔痴为相”。此处“相”也指如有身见者般现起。贪等本身因为是转起之处而被称为“愿”,所以说“以贪嗔痴为愿”。显示巴利原文
Rāgādīhi panesa suññatattā suññato. Rūpanimittādīnaṃ rāganimittādīnaṃyeva vā abhāvena animitto. Rāgādipaṇidhiādīnaṃ abhāvato appaṇihitoti idamassa saguṇato nāmaṃ. Svāyaṃ suññataṃ animittaṃ appaṇihitañca nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karotīti suññato animitto appaṇihitoti vuccati, idamassa ārammaṇato nāmaṃ. Āgamanaṃ pana duvidhaṃ vipassanāgamanaṃ maggāgamanañca. Tattha magge vipassanāgamanaṃ labbhati, phale maggāgamanaṃ. Anattānupassanā hi suññatā nāma, suññatavipassanāya maggo suññato. Aniccānupassanā animittā nāma, animittavipassanāya maggo animitto. Idaṃ pana nāmaṃ na abhidhammapariyāyena labbhati. Tathā hi taṃ saṅkhāranimittassa avijahanato na nippariyāyena animittaṃ, suttantapariyāyena pana labbhati. Tatra hi gotrabhuñāṇaṃ animittaṃ nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā animittanāmakaṃ hutvā sayaṃ āgamaniyaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā maggassa nāmaṃ detīti vadanti, tena maggo animittoti vutto. Maggāgamanena pana phalaṃ animittanti yujjatiyeva. Dukkhānupassanā saṅkhāresu paṇidhiṃ sukkhāpetvā āgatattā appaṇihitā nāma, appaṇihitavipassanāya maggo appaṇihito, appaṇihitamaggassa phalaṃ appaṇihitaṃ. Evaṃ vipassanā attano nāmaṃ maggassa deti, maggo phalassāti idaṃ āgamanato nāmaṃ. Suññattāti vivittattā. Na hi magge rāgādayo santi, uparūpari uppajjanakarāgādīnaṃ kāraṇattā rāgādayo nimittanti āha ‘‘rāgadosamohanimittehī’’ti. Saviggahānaṃ viya upaṭṭhānampettha nimittanti vadanti. Rāgādayova pavattiṭṭhānaṭṭhena paṇidhīti āha ‘‘rāgadosamohapaṇidhīna’’nti.
关于方术等,因未说“我获得诸明”等语,即使那样说也构成波罗夷。依一一类别:即依四念处等的一一类别。虽然《大注疏》中也依一一类别来显示,但在那里,是结合“出世间念处”等,对每一项配以“出世间”一词,依一一类别而说;在此处则无“出世间”一词,这便是此处的差别。“在那里”:指在那些类别当中。显示巴利原文
Vatthuvijjādiṃ sandhāya avacanato ‘‘vijjānaṃ lābhīmhī’’ti vuttepi hoti. Ekekakoṭṭhāsavasenāti satipaṭṭhānacatukkādiekekakoṭṭhāsavasena. Kiñcāpi mahāaṭṭhakathāyampi ekekakoṭṭhāsavaseneva dassitaṃ, tattha pana ‘‘lokuttarānaṃ satipaṭṭhānāna’’ntiādinā paccekaṃ lokuttara-saddaṃ yojetvā ekekakoṭṭhāsavaseneva vuttaṃ, idha lokuttara-saddena vināti ayamettha viseso. Tatthāti tesu koṭṭhāsesu.
难道不是说了“唯是烦恼之断”吗?为何这样说?因为仅仅断除烦恼并非上人法。若有人这样认为,为说明“烦恼之断是道的作用,依作用而说道”,所以说了“然而此”等。说到欲贪时,说“以第三道断贪嗔”,而非色贪、无色贪,因为那些不是由此道所断,而应由第四道所断。显示巴利原文
Nanu ca ‘‘kilesappahānamevā’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ. Na hi kilesānaṃ pahānamattaṃ uttarimanussadhammo hotīti yo vadeyya, taṃ sandhāya kilesappahānassa maggakiccattā kiccavasena maggo dīpitoti dassetuṃ ‘‘taṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kāmarāgaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tatiyamaggena hi rāgadosānaṃ pahāna’’nti vuttaṃ, na pana rūparāgaarūparāge sandhāya. Na hi te tena pahīyanti catutthamaggena pahātabbattā.
“心离贪之离盖”:意思是心因离贪而离盖。应知此义:心已离贪,由于没有那个贪盖,所以是离盖,这就是离盖性。此理也适用于其余诸盖。显示巴利原文
Rāgācittaṃ vinīvaraṇatāti rāgā cittassa vinīvaraṇatāti vuttaṃ hoti. Rāgā vimuttassa cittassa tasseva rāganīvaraṇassa abhāvena vigatanīvaraṇattā vinīvaraṇatāti attho veditabbo. Esa nayo sesesupi.
而“五种明”应这样结合。“已离世间而出世间”:即是单独成为“离世间”,因为已从世间脱离而出。正如即使未用“出世间”一词,说“我是念处等的获得者”也会犯波罗夷罪,同样,此处即使说“我是义无碍解的获得者”,也应当说同样犯。虽然可以这样说,但为了显示“在《大注疏》中已详细解明,故不能以其他为准”,而说“然而在《大注疏》中……不能以其他为量”。其关联为:那也在那里被否定了。显示巴利原文
Yā ca pañca vijjāti yojetabbaṃ. Nibbaṭṭitalokuttarattāti visuṃyeva lokato apagatalokuttarattā. Yathā vinā lokuttara-saddena ‘‘satipaṭṭhānādīnaṃ lābhīmhī’’ti vuttepi pārājikaṃ hoti, evamidhāpi ‘‘atthapaṭisambhidāya lābhīmhīti vuttepi hotiyevā’’ti vattuṃ yujjati. Kiñcāpi yujjati, atha kho mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vibhāgena vuttattā na sakkā evamidaṃ vattunti dassetuṃ ‘‘mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana…pe… na sakkā aññaṃ pamāṇaṃ kātu’’nti vuttaṃ. Tampi tattheva paṭikkhittanti sambandho.
《单纯章论释》显示巴利原文
Suddhikavārakathāvaṇṇanā
200 “示现之相”等,指“我入定”等示现之相。“罪之类别”,指“对不解者,犯粗罪”等罪之分类。关于“再引述后,不与初禅等结合”,此处《绳结注》指出,“以初禅”才是正确原文,那方为合理。显示巴利原文
200.Ullapanākāranti samāpajjintiādiullapanākāraṃ. Āpattibhedanti ‘‘na paṭivijānantassa āpatti thullaccayassā’’tiādiāpattibhedaṃ. Puna ānetvā paṭhamajjhānādīhi na yojitanti ettha ‘‘paṭhamajjhānenā’’ti pāṭhoti gaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ, tadeva yuttaṃ.
由于“说”一词亦可用作“作者成就”,故说“或者”等。以妄语之心,无法以同一心了知“我在说妄语”;但于中间以另一心了知“我在说妄语”,因此说“说者心中生起‘我在说妄语’”。此处即显示此义——具足三支的妄语。“不可能不存在”:因从加行阶段即已生起作意而说,故不可能不存在。“不应以罪处罚”:于加行刹那,若未作意“我将说妄语”而突然说出,在说出刹那虽了知“这是妄语”,然因无法制止、不属其范围,故不应以罪处罚。“突然”即猝然。“喧哗”指想说此事而误说彼事。显示巴利原文
Kattusādhanopi bhaṇita-saddo hotīti āha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi. Yena cittena musā bhaṇati, teneva cittena na sakkā ‘‘musā bhaṇāmī’’ti jānituṃ, antarantarā pana aññena cittena ‘‘musā bhaṇāmī’’ti jānātīti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhaṇantassa hoti musā bhaṇāmī’’ti. Ayamettha attho dassitoti tīhi aṅgehi samannāgato musāvādoti ayamettha attho dassito. Na sakkā na bhavitunti pubbabhāgato paṭṭhāya ābhogaṃ katvā bhaṇitattā na sakkā na bhavituṃ. Āpattiyā na kāretabboti pubbabhāgakkhaṇe ‘‘musā bhaṇissāmī’’ti ābhogaṃ vinā sahasā bhaṇantassa vacanakkhaṇe ‘‘musā eta’’nti upaṭṭhitepi nivattetumasakkuṇeyyatāya avisayabhāvato āpattiyā na kāretabbo. Davāti sahasā. Ravāti aññaṃ vattukāmassa khalitvā aññabhaṇanaṃ.
“知彼”即彼智,彼智之状态为彼智性,意指智对义之领受。“智之集合”即智之众多,意指于一心中有多智。因不可……知,此乃依无所缘而说。而如是智并无无痴之觉了。“我将说”之心作为“我说”之心的缘而灭,彼又作为“已说”之心的缘,故说“然而前前……灭”。当有彼加行时,“其余两者将不存在”之事绝无,必然存在,意即:当有“我将说”之加行时,“我说”与“已说”两者并非不存在,而必然存在。“显现为一”:即便多刹那生起之心,亦显现如同于一刹那生起。“我入定”等,以“等”字含摄“我入定”与“我已入定”两者。其中,“我入定”与“我已入定”二者,纵无时间差别,亦为显示说法之差别而分别施设。显示巴利原文
Taṃ jānātīti taṃñāṇaṃ, tassa bhāvo taṃñāṇatā, ñāṇassa atthasaṃvedananti attho. Ñāṇasamodhānanti ñāṇassa bahubhāvo, ekacittuppāde anekañāṇatāti attho. Na hi sakkā…pe… jānitunti ārammaṇakaraṇassa abhāvato vuttaṃ. Asammohāvabodho ca īdisassa ñāṇassa natthi, ‘‘bhaṇissāmī’’ti pavattacittaṃ ‘‘bhaṇāmī’’ti pavattacittassa paccayo hutvā nirujjhati, tañca ‘‘bhaṇita’’nti pavattacittassa paccayo hutvāti āha – ‘‘purimaṃ purimaṃ pana…pe… nirujjhatī’’ti. Tasmiṃ pubbabhāge sati ‘‘sesadvayaṃ na hessatī’’ti etaṃ natthi, avassaṃ hotiyevāti vuttaṃ hoti, bhaṇissāmīti pubbabhāge sati ‘‘bhaṇāmi bhaṇita’’nti etaṃ dvayaṃ na na hoti, hotiyevāti adhippāyo. Ekaṃ viya pakāsatīti anekakkhaṇe uppannampi cittaṃ ekakkhaṇe uppannasadisaṃ hutvā pakāsati. Samāpajjintiādīnīti ādi-saddena samāpajjāmi, samāpannoti imāni dve saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha samāpajjiṃ, samāpannoti imesaṃ asatipi kālanānatte vacanavisesaṃ sandhāya visuṃ gahaṇaṃ.
207 “舍弃自身状态”,即舍弃属于自己的状态。为显示并非如证道之前那样可被称为“有贪、有嗔”,有些人执取这四种,但实际并非如此,故说“已吐出”。因为被某人吐出的东西,他决不会再取回。因此说“为显示不取的状态”。即使已吐出,或许还有些许残留,但并非如此,故说“已解脱”。因此说“为从相续中解脱”。即使已解脱,可能像解脱的束缚那样,果报还留在某处,但并非如此,故说“已断除”。因此说“为显示不在任何处安住”。如同某些未彻底舍弃的东西,再取回后,才称彻底舍弃为“已彻底舍弃”;同样地,为显示由观智所舍弃、如同被取回的东西已由道断除,故说“已彻底舍弃”。因此说“为显示对曾执取者的彻底舍弃”。“被驱逐”即被恐吓,意思是恐吓后赶走。而被恐吓赶走者,不会再回到那个地方,故说“为显示不再依附的状态”,即显示不再回来、不再生起于相续中的状态。精通音声论者将“khiṭa”一词解释为恐吓义,故说“此义应从音声论中寻求”。“极微”即伴随微细,意思是极其微小。显示巴利原文
207.Sakabhāvapariccajanavasenāti attano santakabhāvassa pariccajanavasena. Magguppattito pubbe viya ‘‘sarāgo sadoso’’ti vattabbatābhāvato cattampi keci gaṇhanti, nayidamevanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vanto’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi yaṃ yena vantaṃ, so puna taṃ ādiyati. Tenāha ‘‘anādiyanabhāvadassanavasenā’’ti. Vantampi kiñci santatilaggaṃ siyā, nayidamevanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘mutto’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘santatito vimocanavasenā’’ti. Muttampi kiñci muttabandhanaṃ viya phalaṃ kuhiñci tiṭṭhati, na evamidanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘pahīno’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘kvaci anavaṭṭhānadassanavasenā’’ti. Yathā kiñci dunnissaṭṭhaṃ puna ādāya sammadeva nissaṭṭhaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhanti vuccati, evaṃ vipassanāya nissaṭṭhaṃ ādinnasadisaṃ maggena pahīnaṃ paṭinissaṭṭhaṃ nāma hotīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭinissaṭṭho’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ādinnapubbassa paṭinissaggadassanavasenā’’ti. Ukkheṭitoti uttāsito, uttāsetvā palāpitoti vuttaṃ hoti. Yo ca uttāsetvā palāpito, na puna so taṃ ṭhānaṃ āgacchatīti āha ‘‘puna anallīyanabhāvadassanavasenā’’ti, puna āgantvā santāne anuppattibhāvadassanavasenāti attho. Khiṭa-saddaṃ saddasatthavidū uttāsatthe paṭhantīti āha – ‘‘svāyamattho saddasatthato pariyesitabbo’’ti. Aṇuyeva aṇusahagataṃ, atikhuddakanti vuttaṃ hoti.
《欲说章论释》显示巴利原文
Vattukāmavārakathāvaṇṇanā
215 “kevalañhiyaṃ”即“kevalañhi ayaṃ”。应补充“章”字。“即刻便知”,这是指在说出“我入了初禅”等时,其含义自然被了知的特相。然而,若未作如此言说,如“某比丘为让人知‘我是阿罗汉’而从住处先离去”的引例,即使当时不知,一旦离去即犯巴拉基卡罪。“了知的特相”,即所谓“即刻了知,即是如此”所说明的特相。“在表识的范围内”,即在身表、语表可被执取的适当处所,也就是以天眼、天耳可见可闻的适当处所。由此显示:若有人超越表识的范围而住,以天眼、天耳界见闻后而知,则不犯巴拉基卡罪。对于未曾听闻者,会有“这是说什么”的疑惑生起,故说“已听闻”。即便只是最初的话语,对于未曾听闻者,当说“我入了初禅”时,即使未生起“这是什么”的疑惑,而仅知“据说此人入了禅那”,也犯巴拉基卡罪。显示巴利原文
215.Kevalañhiyanti kevalañhi ayaṃ. ‘‘Vāro’’ti ajjhāharitabbaṃ. Taṅkhaṇaññeva jānātīti ‘‘paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajji’’ntiādimhi vutte tadatthassa pakatiyā vijānanalakkhaṇaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evaṃ pana vacībhedaṃ akatvā pakkamanādīsu aññataro bhikkhu ‘‘maṃ arahāti jānātū’’ti tamhā āvāsā paṭhamaṃ pakkamatīti āgatavatthumhi viya tasmiṃ khaṇe aviditepi nikkhantamatte pārājikaṃ. Jānanalakkhaṇanti ‘‘taṅkhaṇe jānanaṃ nāma īdisa’’nti vuttalakkhaṇaṃ . Viññattipatheti kāyavacīviññattīnaṃ gahaṇayogge padese, pakaticakkhunā pakatisotena ca daṭṭhuṃ sotuñca arahaṭṭhāneti vuttaṃ hoti. Tena viññattipathaṃ atikkamitvā ṭhito ce koci dibbena cakkhunā dibbāya ca sotadhātuyā disvā sutvā ca jānāti, na pārājikanti dīpeti. Assutapubbassa ‘‘kimidaṃ vutta’’nti saṃsayuppattisabbhāvato ‘‘sutaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭhamaṃ vacanamattaṃ assutapubbenapi ‘‘paṭhamajjhānaṃ samāpajji’’nti vutte ‘‘kimida’’nti sandehaṃ anuppādetvā ‘‘jhānaṃ nāma kiresa samāpajjī’’ti ettakamattepi ñāte pārājikaṃ hotiyeva.
《无犯差别论释》显示巴利原文
Anāpattibhedakathāvaṇṇanā
222 无犯的分别解说显示巴利原文
222.Anullapanādhippāyassāti atikkamitvā avattukāmassa, ‘‘uttarimanussadhammo aya’’nti asallakkhentassāti adhippāyo. Sarūpato pana ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhu anullapanādhippāyassā’’ti vinītavatthūsu tattha tattha āgatavatthuvasena veditabbo. ‘‘Uttarimanussadhammo aya’’nti asallakkhetvā vadantopi vohārato aññaṃ byākaronto nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘aññaṃ byākarontassā’’ti.
“恐惧者”也指:因想“对于我已不存在这一事,是否还有他人知晓?”而恐惧者。显示巴利原文
Bhāyantopīti ‘‘imassa mayi natthibhāvaṃ aññepi jānantā atthi nu kho’’ti bhāyantopi.
调伏事释显示巴利原文
Vinītavatthuvaṇṇanā
223 “有学地”以此也包含了禅那地。“三种远离”即身远离、心远离与依远离。显示巴利原文
223.Sekkhabhūmiyanti iminā jhānabhūmimpi saṅgaṇhāti. Tiṇṇaṃ vivekānanti kāyacittaupadhivivekānaṃ.
因为乞食之行以用餐结束为终点,所以称为“乃至食毕”。若是食后归来者,也如前所述,出于恭敬之意,去做整理袈裟等事,同样犯恶作。显示巴利原文
Piṇḍāya caraṇassa bhojanapariyosānattā vuttaṃ ‘‘yāva bhojanapariyosāna’’nti. Bhutvā āgacchantassapi puna vuttanayeneva sambhāvanicchāya cīvarasaṇṭhapanādīni karontassa dukkaṭameva.
225 “贤友,‘法应被恭敬,由已发勤精进者’——此二事虽相似,但因两位比丘各自禀告,由世尊判定后,一切皆应摄入调伏事中,故载于圣典。”显示巴利原文
225.Ārādhanīyo, āvuso, dhammo āraddhavīriyenāti vatthudvayaṃ ekasadisampi dvīhi bhikkhūhi visuṃ visuṃ ārocitattā bhagavatā vinicchinitaṃ sabbampi vinītavatthūsu āropetabbanti pāḷiyaṃ āropitaṃ.
226 “净信之说”指仅凭净信而说,并非经过“他们自性即是阿罗汉”的思惟。因此,此处判为无犯。然而,若有人执认“他们自性即是阿罗汉”,而说出“诸位阿罗汉尊者,请来”等语,则不应接受。显示巴利原文
226.Pasādabhaññanti kevalaṃ pasādamattena bhaṇanaṃ, na pana ‘‘sabhāvato ete arahantoyevā’’ti cintetvā. Tenevettha anāpatti vuttā. Yadi pana ‘‘ete sabhāvato arahantoyevā’’ti maññamāno ‘‘āyantu bhonto arahanto’’tiādīni vadati, na sampaṭicchitabbaṃ.
227 因为步行而制立了规约,所以说了“以车乘等”。其中,就明通力而说“以神通”。他们这样相互守护:由于制定了这样的规约——“谁最先离开此住处,我们便知他是阿罗汉”,因为这样制定了规约,即使以不清净心前后而行,也因同时出发而彼此守护。然而,也有这样的说法:“不舍手距,如同手牵着手而行,或者这样说:‘起身,我们走;来吧,我们行’,这样共同商议而行,即使前后而行,也不犯。”但这是非法的规约,所以《小结文》中说:“若比丘制定规约:‘唯有阿罗汉可住此处’,这是非法规约。”而前面所说的一切规约,都是针对此而说的,这是我们的见解,应当审察而接受。“种种方域者”指各个地方的居民。“僧伽利得”指依腊次第自己应得的份额。这里的拒绝是这样作出的:为了让界外之人无差别地成为僧伽利得的所有者。然而,特别而言,即使对界外之人,也可以划分各别的份额,以白二甘马:“僧伽同意施此量,或施如是物,或施这些人,或施如是者”,然后施与,这是允许的。显示巴利原文
227. Padasā gamanaṃ sandhāya katikāya katattā ‘‘yānena vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha vijjāmayiddhiṃ sandhāya ‘‘iddhiyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aññamaññaṃ rakkhantīti ‘‘yo imamhā āvāsā paṭhamaṃ pakkamissati, taṃ mayaṃ ‘arahā’ti jānissāmā’’ti evaṃ katikāya katattā apubbācarimaṃ asuddhacittena gacchantāpi saha nikkhantabhāvato aññamaññaṃ rakkhanti. Keci pana ‘‘hatthapāsaṃ avijahitvā aññamaññassa hatthaṃ gaṇhanto viya gacchantopi ‘uṭṭhetha gacchāma, etha gacchāmā’ti evaṃ saṃvidahitvā gamane pubbāparaṃ gacchantopi nāpajjatī’’ti vadanti. Etaṃ pana adhammikaṃ katikavattanti ‘‘idha arahantoyeva vasantūti yadi bhikkhū katikaṃ karonti, etaṃ adhammikaṃ katikavatta’’nti cūḷagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ. Heṭṭhā vuttaṃ pana sabbampi katikavattaṃ sandhāya etaṃ vuttanti amhākaṃ khanti, vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ. Nānāverajjakāti nānājanapadavāsino. Saṅghalābhoti yathāvuḍḍhaṃ attano pāpuṇanakoṭṭhāso. Ayañca paṭikkhepo imināva nīhārena bahisīmaṭṭhānaṃ avisesena saṅghalābhassa sāmibhāvāpādanaṃ sandhāya kato. Visesato pana bahisīmaṭṭhānampi paricchinditvā ekekakoṭṭhāsato ‘‘ettakaṃ dātuṃ, īdisaṃ vā dātuṃ, ettakānaṃ vā dātuṃ, īdisassa vā dātuṃ ruccati saṅghassā’’ti apalokanakammaṃ katvā dātuṃ vaṭṭati.
228 在“具寿相”等句中,谁是这位具寿相?他又为何取名为“相”?谁是具寿大目犍连?他又为何显现微笑?为了阐明这一切,所以开始“他”等文句。“具足相”即具足丈夫之相。“如梵天”即如同梵天之身。“微微之笑名为微笑”,故说“微笑”。“骨锁”者,这并非只是无知的骨锁而已,实为一饿鬼,故说“生于饿鬼界的有情”。“这些自体”即饿鬼的自体。“不现前”者,如同天界的自体,通常并不现前,但会随他们的意乐而现前。见到人类为苦所迫、无所依怙的相状,成为怜悯的近因,故说“应起悲悯”。再者,自己的成就与佛智的成就,应当各自连接“成就”一词。为了显示这两者,所以有“彼”等文句。其中,应当引出“忆念自己的成就而现微笑”这一句来连接。“法界”者,指一切知智而言,或者说“法界”即是法的自性。“生起”即出生。是以生起为首,而说如此的自体。“他们难信”,这对于他们长夜是不利、是苦的。“难信”者,这不是就相长老而言,而是就闻者“听闻如是”而说的。然而,相长老为何不见?难道他没有天眼吗?并非没有,而是大目犍连作意方才得见,另一位则因未作意而不见。显示巴利原文
228.Āyasmā ca lakkhaṇotiādīsu ko panāyasmā lakkhaṇo, kasmā cassa lakkhaṇoti nāmaṃ ahosi, ko cāyasmā mahāmoggallāno, kasmā ca sitaṃ pātvākāsīti taṃ sabbaṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘yvāya’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ. Lakkhaṇasampannenāti purisalakkhaṇasampannena. Brahmasamenāti brahmattabhāvasamena. Īsakaṃ hasitaṃ sitanti vuccatīti āha ‘‘mandahasita’’nti. Aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikanti nayidaṃ aviññāṇakaṃ aṭṭhisaṅkhalikamattaṃ, atha kho eko petoti āha ‘‘petaloke nibbattaṃ satta’’nti. Ete attabhāvāti petattabhāvā. Na āpāthaṃ āgacchantīti devattabhāvā viya pakatiyā āpāthaṃ na āgacchanti. Tesaṃ pana ruciyā āpāthaṃ āgaccheyyuṃ. Manussānaṃ dukkhābhibhūtānaṃ anāthabhāvadassanapadaṭṭhānā karuṇāti āha ‘‘kāruññe kattabbe’’ti. Attano ca sampattiṃ buddhañāṇassa ca sampattinti paccekaṃ sampatti-saddo yojetabbo. Tadubhayaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘attano ca sampattiṃ anussaritvā sitaṃ pātvākāsī’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Dhammadhātūti sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ sandhāya vadati, dhammadhātūti vā dhammānaṃ sabhāvo. Upapattīti jāti. Upapattisīsena hi tathārūpaṃ attabhāvaṃ vadati. Dussaddhāpayā honti, tadassa tesaṃ dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya. Dussaddhāpayāti idañca na lakkhaṇattheraṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, ye pana suṇanti ‘‘evaṃ kira vutta’’nti, te sandhāya. Atha lakkhaṇatthero kasmā na addasa, kimassa dibbacakkhu natthīti? No natthi, mahāmoggallāno pana āvajjento addasa, itaro anāvajjanena na addasa.
“刺”者,即穿透而疾飞,以如剑刃般锋利的铁喙,一刺再刺,往各处去,这是其义。故说“穿透而行”。或有读作“Vitudantī”。“于肋间”者,是处格用作从格。“以铁喙”者,即以如同铁签般、或纯由黑铁所制成的喙。“净色增盛”以此显示,虽然仅现为骨聚,但身净色之力依然强盛。“如熟痈”以此显示其极为柔软的特性。“实为稀有”者,这是表示谴责的稀有。显示巴利原文
Vituḍentīti vinivijjhitvā ḍenti, asidhārūpamehi tikhiṇehi lohatuṇḍakehi vijjhitvā vijjhitvā ito cito ca gacchantīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘vinivijjhitvā gacchantī’’ti. ‘‘Vitudantī’’ti vā pāṭho. Phāsuḷantarikāhīti bhummatthe nissakkavacanaṃ. Lohatuṇḍakehīti lohasalākāsadisehi, kāḷalohamayeheva vā tuṇḍakehi. Pasādussadāti iminā aṭṭhisaṅghātamattaṃ hutvā paññāyamānānampi kāyappasādassa balavabhāvaṃ dasseti. Pakkagaṇḍasadisāti iminā pana ativiya mudusabhāvataṃ dasseti. Acchariyaṃ vatāti garahanacchariyaṃ nāmetaṃ.
“成为眼者”是指已获得天眼者,或者可以理解为“成为世间之眼”,此处应如此看待其含义。“Yatra”是表示原因的介词,因此说“yatra 是表示原因的词”。在无量的众生群体中,那些众生又依其类别,分为欲有等不同的有、地狱等不同的趣、异身异想等不同的识住,以及类似的众生居;而我为了将这一切与一切知智现前作证,令它们悉数呈现在我的面前。显示巴利原文
Cakkhubhūtāti sampattadibbacakkhukā, lokassa cakkhubhūtāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Yatrāti hetuatthe nipātoti āha ‘‘yatrāti kāraṇavacana’’nti. Appamāṇe sattanikāye, te ca kho vibhāgena kāmabhavādibhede bhave, nirayādibhedā gatiyo, nānattakāyanānattasaññīādiviññāṇaṭṭhitiyo, tathārūpe sattāvāse ca sabbaññutaññāṇañca me upanetuṃ paccakkhaṃ karontena.
“杀牛者”指经常杀害牛只的人,因此说“杀了又杀”。“他的”指杀牛这一业。“后后受业”指后后受报的业。当强大的杀牛业正在给出果报时,后后受报业未得机会;当那个果报已经成熟,现在获得了机会,便称为“残余业”。“业的同类性”指业以同类、相似的方式生起。“所缘的同类性”指所缘以同类、相似的方式生起。因为先前那个业及其果报在怎样的所缘中生起,这个业及其果报也就在同样的所缘中生起,所以说“以那个业的残余果报”。诚然,对于相似的事物,也有共用同一名称的情况,譬如“那就是那只鹧鸪”“那就是那些草药”。由于在与业相似的境中,只说了“业或业相”两者,又由于业和业相并不像趣相那样与业分离而独立存在,因此论师们说:在应当以相似果报受生之处,因为它是给出相似果报的因,所以取业或业相为所缘而生起结生。于是他说:“据说他的……成为相”。其中,“成为相”的意思是:先前造作累积的、已通过令饿鬼生起而获得机会的那个业,其相状现在如此显现,成为那个果报的相、所缘。“他”指杀牛者。显示巴利原文
Goghātakoti gunnaṃ abhiṇhaṃ hananako. Tenāha ‘‘vadhitvā vadhitvā’’ti. Tassāti gunnaṃ hananakammassa. Aparāpariyakammassāti aparāpariyavedanīyakammassa. Balavatā goghātakakammena vipāke dīyamāne aladdhokāsaṃ aparāpariyavedanīyaṃ, tasmiṃ vipakkavipāke idāni laddhokāsaṃ ‘‘avasesakamma’’nti vuttaṃ. Kammasabhāgatāyāti kammassa sabhāgabhāvena sadisabhāvena. Ārammaṇasabhāgatāyāti ārammaṇassa sabhāgabhāvena sadisabhāvena. Yādise hi ārammaṇe pubbe taṃ kammaṃ tassa ca vipāko pavatto, tādiseyeva ārammaṇe idaṃ kammaṃ imassa vipāko ca pavattoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘tasseva kammassa vipākāvasesenā’’ti. Bhavati hi taṃsadisepi tabbohāro yathā so eva tittiro, tāniyeva osadhānīti. Yasmā kammasarikkhakavisaye ‘‘kammaṃ vā kammanimittaṃ vā’’ti dvayameva vuttaṃ, yasmā ca gatinimittaṃ viya kammaṃ kammanimittañca kammato bhinnaṃ visuṃ hutvā na tiṭṭhati, tasmā sarikkhakavipākadānassa kāraṇabhāvato yattha kammasarikkhakena vipākena bhavitabbaṃ, tattha kammaṃ vā kammanimittaṃ vā gahetvā paṭisandhi hotīti vadanti. Tenevāha – ‘‘tassa kira…pe… nimittaṃ ahosī’’ti. Tattha nimittaṃ ahosīti pubbe katūpacitassa petūpapattinibbattanavasena katokāsassa tassa kammassa nimittabhūtaṃ idāni tathā upaṭṭhahantaṃ tassa vipākassa nimittaṃ ārammaṇaṃ ahosi. Soti goghātako. Aṭṭhikasaṅkhalikapeto jāto kammasarikkhakavipākavasena.
229 “切成肉片”指杀死母牛后,将牛肉剖开切成肉片。“晒干”指为了长时间保存而晒干,因为晒干的肉片被称为“干肉”。“无毛的皮”指没有毛的皮。“杀羊者”指杀害羊只的人。“山羊”即羊。“以所施谷物养肥”指用自己给的谷物养肥后,用刀杀了又杀并售卖。“一只鹿”指豹鹿。“以刑罚”指以折磨。“了知”指了知业处。“离间语者”指通过传播离间语,将此处所闻传至彼处,或将彼处所闻传至此处的人。“将人引向不幸与灾难”是句子的连接。显示巴利原文
229.Pesiyo katvāti gāviṃ vadhitvā vadhitvā gomaṃsaṃ phāletvā pesiyo katvā. Sukkhāpetvāti kālantaraṃ ṭhapanatthaṃ sukkhāpetvā. Sukkhāpitamaṃsapesīnañhi vallūrasamaññāti. Nippakkhacammeti vigatapakkhacamme. Urabbhe hantīti orabbhiko. Eḷaketi aje. Nivāpapuṭṭheti attanā dinnanivāpena posite asinā vadhitvā vadhitvā vikkiṇanto. Ekaṃ miganti dīpakamigaṃ. Kāraṇāhīti yātanāhi. Ñatvāti kammaṭṭhānaṃ ñatvā. Pesuññupasaṃhāravasena ito sutaṃ amutra, amutra vā sutaṃ idha sūcetīti sūcako. Anayabyasanaṃ pāpesi manusseti sambandho.
“审判官”指国王任命在法庭上负责审判的大臣。他因以欺诈手段欺骗村民,故被称为“村骗子”。有些人说:“那样的村长就是村骗子。”因为应当说“依法而住者应公平正直”。由于以隐秘姿势而坐,故成不正当的坐姿。“触”指以偷盗而触犯。显示巴利原文
Vinicchayāmaccoti raññā aḍḍakaraṇe ṭhapito vinicchayamahāmatto. So hi gāmajanakāyaṃ kūṭaṭṭhena vañcetīti ‘‘gāmakūṭo’’ti vuccati. Keci ‘‘tādisoyeva gāmajeṭṭhako gāmakūṭo’’ti vadanti. Samena bhavitabbaṃ dhammaṭṭhoti vattabbato. Rahassaṅge nisīdanavasena visamā nisajjā ahosi. Phusantoti theyyāya phusanto.
230 “无自主”指妇女虽有丈夫,于自身的触受却无自主权。“毁坏”即坏灭、离去之意。“因扭曲而蜷起”称为“扭曲”,意在表现其畸形可厌之貌。故说“畸形、难看、可厌”。显示巴利原文
230.Anissaroti mātugāmo sasāmiko attano phasse anissaro. Dhaṃsitvāti bhassitvā apagantvā. Maṅganavasena ulatīti maṅguli, virūpabībhacchabhāvena pavattatīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘virūpaṃ duddasikaṃ bībhaccha’’nti.
身体被火从上方烧灼,故名“上烧”;从下方流漏而身体湿烂,故名“下湿”;炭火又四处散布,故名“散炭”。因此说“据说她……”等语。“炭堆”指炭火的积聚。从身体流出的,是不净、恶臭且令人厌离的汗液。“据说那位国王”指迦陵伽国王。“舞女”即从事舞蹈之女子。“汗”即流汗,意为灼热。显示巴利原文
Uddhaṃ uddhaṃ agginā pakkasarīratāya uppakkaṃ, heṭṭhato paggharaṇavasena kilinnasarīratāya okilinī, ito cito ca aṅgārasamparikiṇṇatāya okirinī. Tenāha ‘‘sā kirā’’tiādi. Aṅgāracitaketi aṅgārasañcaye. Sarīrato paggharanti asuciduggandhajegucchāni sedagatāni. Tassa kira raññoti kāliṅgassa rañño. Nāṭakinīti naccanakicce adhigatā itthī. Sedanti sedanaṃ, tāpananti attho.
因造业之时对相状的执取与串习,他生为无头躯干。“低劣比丘”指因其卑劣行径而称低劣,因其现比丘相、以比丘食维生而称比丘。“心之游戏”指随心所欲地嬉戏于种种游戏之中。“此即”之义,即如比丘事中所说之理。显示巴利原文
Asīsakaṃ kabandhaṃ hutvā nibbatti kammāyūhanakāle tathā nimittaggahaṇaparicayato. Lāmakabhikkhūti hīnācāratāya lāmako, bhikkhuvesatāya bhikkhāhārena jīvanato ca bhikkhu. Cittakeḷinti cittaruciyaṃ taṃ taṃ kīḷanto. Ayamevāti bhikkhuvatthusmiṃ vuttanayo eva.
231 “无苔藓与泥泞”,指既没有如芝麻籽等种类的苔藓、也没有如蓝蛙背色般覆盖水面而生的苔藓,亦无泥泞。“美好的渡口”,指因适宜入浴、无泥泞等过患而称为美好的渡口。“从彼水池”——即以此为因、以此为近缘的意思。尽管那湖位于龙宫,但它与上方人间的蓄水池相连,故说“从此处流出热泉”。或者,“从彼处”指从龙宫的水池流出此热泉。由于此水上升到上方地面,以热性而烧煮,所以有“热”之义,依词源而得名“热泉”。“饿鬼界”指饿鬼的住处。有些人说:“所谓饿鬼界,这里是指铜锅地狱。”然而,在城市周围的山脚林间,也有许多饿鬼的住处。此义应依《饿鬼事》经文及与此相关的《律藏·犍度·小品》之经文来阐明。显示巴利原文
231.Nissevālapaṇakakaddamoti tilabījakādibhedena sevālena nīlamaṇḍūkapiṭṭhivaṇṇena udakapiṭṭhaṃ chādetvā nibbattapaṇakena kaddamena ca virahito. Sundarehi titthehīti sukhāvagāhaṇaṭṭhānatāya kaddamādidosavirahato ca sundarehi titthehi. Tato udakadahato taṃhetu, taṃ upanissāyāti attho. Nāgabhavanagatopi hi so rahado tato uparimanussaloke jalāsayena sambandho hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tato ayaṃ tapodā sandatī’’ti. Atha vā tatoti nāgabhavane udakadahato ayaṃ tapodā sandati. Tañhi uparibhūmitalaṃ ārohati, uṇhabhāvena tapanato tapaṃ udakaṃ etissāti anvatthanāmavasena tapodāti vuccati. Petalokoti petānaṃ āvāsaṭṭhānaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘petalokoti lohakumbhīnirayā idhādhippetā’’ti vadanti, nagarassa pana parito pabbatapādavanantaresu bahū petāvāsāpi santeva. Svāyamattho petavatthupāḷiyā lakkhaṇasaṃyuttena imāya ca vinītavatthupāḷiyā dīpetabbo.
“善巧者”,指在射靶中极为稳固、从不失误的射手。然而,唯有于此处达到自在者,才称为善巧者。因此,仅仅学习技艺的人并不名为善巧者;而这些人乃是善巧者,意思是已修习至熟练自在。他们以展示技艺的方式前往王宫等处,以射箭为业,故称“以技艺为生者”,即指在王宫等处展示技艺者。“被击败”,指被战胜。显示巴利原文
Katahatthāti thirataraṃ lakkhesu avirajjhanasarakkhepā. Īdisā pana tattha vasībhūtā katahatthā nāma honti, tasmā yo sippameva uggaṇhāti, so katahattho nāma na hoti, ime pana katahatthā, ciṇṇavasībhāvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Sippadassanavasena kataṃ rājakulāni upecca asanaṃ sarakkhepo etehīti katupāsanā, rājakulādīsu dassitasippāti vuttaṃ hoti. Pabhaggoti parājito.
232 232. 以先前的色离欲修习——即依观见过患而修对治——为基础,由于嗔恚想已被彻底断除,纵有大声音亦不从无色定出定;然而,因为并非如此彻底断除,从一切色界定出定则是可能的。因此,这里所说的“不动定”是指第四禅定,故说“无动、不动、远离身语躁动的第四禅定”。但在其他处,因远离定之敌对法而称为“不动”的,是指无色界定。在说到定的障碍法时,即指寻、伺等。所谓“未能善加净化”,是针对未能善加观察寻等过患的状态而说的。显示巴利原文
232. Dosadassana pubbaka rūpa virāga bhāvanā saṅkhāta paṭipakkha bhāvanāvasena paṭighasaññānaṃ suppahīnattā mahatāpi saddena arūpasamāpattito na vuṭṭhāti, tathā pana na suppahīnattā sabbarūpāvacarasamāpattito vuṭṭhānaṃ siyāti idha āneñjasamādhīti catutthajjhānasamāpatti adhippetāti āha ‘‘anejaṃ acalaṃ kāyavācāvipphandavirahitaṃ catutthajjhānasamādhi’’nti. Aññattha pana samādhipaccanīkānaṃ atidūratāya na iñjatīti āneñjoti arūpāvacarasamādhi vuccati. Samādhiparipanthake dhammeti vitakkavicārādike sandhāya vadati. Vitakkādīsu ādīnavasallakkhaṇassa na suṭṭhukatabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘na suṭṭhu parisodhetvā’’ti.
这位具寿大目犍连,不是在世尊教法的第一年就新证得阿拉汉的吗?而这条关于上人法的波罗夷学处,是在二十年后才制定的。既然如此,为何说世尊在这条波罗夷中,对此事做出了判定?这并非过失。在此,这是诸师长的说法传承:即便在学处尚未制定时,比丘们听闻长老所说,认为“他在宣说不相应的上人法”,便对长老生起指责与讥嫌。世尊则说明了长老这样说的缘由,显示其并无过失,说道:“诸比丘,目犍连无犯。”而结集者因为此事与上人法相关,便将此事也引来,归入此处。显示巴利原文
Nanu cāyamāyasmā mahāmoggallāno bhagavato paṭhamavasseva abhinavappattaarahatto, idañca uttarimanussadhammapārājikaṃ vīsatimavassato upari paññattaṃ, kathaṃ imassa vatthuno imasmiṃ pārājike bhagavatā vinicchitabhāvo vuttoti? Nāyaṃ doso. Ayañhettha ācariyānaṃ kathāmaggo – apaññattepi sikkhāpade therassa vacanaṃ sutvā ‘‘attano appatirūpaṃ uttarimanussadhammaṃ esa vadatī’’ti maññamānā bhikkhū therassa dosaṃ āropentā ujjhāyiṃsu. Bhagavā ca therassa tathāvacane kāraṇaṃ dassetvā niddosabhāvaṃ karonto ‘‘anāpatti, bhikkhave, moggallānassā’’ti āha. Saṅgītikārakā pana uttarimanussadhammādhikārattā tampi vatthuṃ ānetvā idha āropesunti.
为了表明声闻不能按顺序随念,而说“不按顺序”。所谓“无想定”,是指由想离欲的修习所生起的、以风遍为所缘的第四禅定。宿住随念智,即便能把握死与结生,也是依无间缘而有次第的无色法而把握的,故说:“在第三生中,只见到了死。”他从理路上作了观察:在轮回中流转的有情,其诸蕴没有不存在之时,然而在无想有中,成为无心之后,流转五百劫。依此理路而观察。他作了难行之事:意思是,除了正自觉者之外,其他人无法对无蕴者作宿住随念。即便从理路上观察,这也是作了难行之事。所谓“通达”,即如同通达一般。譬如有一位善巧箭术的人,将一根毫毛劈成百份,取其中一丝,系在茄子果的中央,再将另一丝系在箭的尖端,使那丝超出箭尖,犹如虱子或虮子般细微。如此系缚后,立于约一牛距之处,用系在箭上的毫毛之端,射穿系在茄子上的毫毛之端。同样地,这便说为“作了难行之事”。“此为最上”,即此为最胜。“所谓”,即此。“这是依性别的颠倒而说”。显示巴利原文
Sāvakānaṃ uppaṭipāṭiyā anussaraṇaṃ natthīti dassetuṃ ‘‘na uppaṭipāṭiyā’’ti āha. Asaññasamāpattinti saññāvirāgabhāvanāya vāyokasiṇanibbattitaṃ catutthajjhānasamāpattiṃ vadati. Pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ cutipaṭisandhiṃ gaṇhantampi anantarapaccayakkamavantānaṃ arūpadhammānaṃ vaseneva gaṇhātīti āha – ‘‘tatiye attabhāve cutimeva addasā’’ti. Nayato sallakkhesīti vaṭṭe saṃsaraṇakasattānaṃ khandhānaṃ abhāvakālo nāma natthi, asaññabhave pana acittakā hutvā pañca kappasatāni pavattanti, iminā nayena sallakkhesi. Dukkaraṃ katanti khandhavikalassa pubbenivāsassa anussaraṇaṃ ṭhapetvā sammāsambuddhaṃ na sakkā aññehi kātunti nayato sallakkhentenapi dukkaraṃ katanti adhippāyo. Paṭividdhāti paṭividdhasadisā. Yathā nāma koci dhanusippe katahattho ekaṃ kesasaṅkhātaṃ vālaṃ satakkhattuṃ vidāletvā tato ekaṃ aṃsuṃ gahetvā vātiṅgaṇaphalassa majjhaṭṭhāne bandhitvā aparaṃ aṃsuṃ kaṇḍassa aggakoṭiyaṃ yathā tassa aṃsussa ūkāmattaṃ vā likkhāmattaṃ vā kaṇḍassa aggakoṭito adhikaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati, evaṃ bandhitvā usabhamatte ṭhāne ṭhito kaṇḍabaddhāya vālakoṭiyā vātiṅgaṇabaddhaṃ vālassa koṭiṃ paṭivijjheyya , evameva imināpi kataṃ dukkaranti vuttaṃ hoti. Etadagganti eso aggo. Yadidanti yo ayaṃ. Liṅgavipallāsavasenetaṃ vuttaṃ.
233 233.“此处”,指在此比丘分别中。“已诵出”,应理解为:由于在此并非依巴帝摩卡而诵出,因此唯独诵出、说明了四波罗夷。既然如此,下文也宣说了偷兰遮、恶作,为何只说“波罗夷已诵出”呢?因为以波罗夷为主,所以虽然也有偷兰遮、恶作,但此处只说是波罗夷。或者,为了阐明“对于他们……不共住”这一意义,而依其关联说道:“已诵出四波罗夷。”而“于此,诸具寿”等,则是为了显示允准:巴帝摩卡的诵出次第即是如此,而非其他。比丘尼不共的四条,即:膝上触、覆藏罪、随逐被举者、八事。其中,“膝上触”是指:以身体接触的贪欲而心染污,以同样的贪欲,对心染污的男人,在其锁骨以下、膝盖以上、肘部以上,以任何身体部分接受触摸等。这是其名称。“覆藏罪”是指:比丘尼知道其他比丘尼的波罗夷罪而予以覆藏。“随逐被举者”是指:比丘尼依从被和合僧团所举的比丘,执取其邪见而随逐。“八事”,应知为:以身体接触的贪欲而湿润,对同样的男人接受捉手或捉僧伽帝衣的一角;为了行属身体接触所摄的非梵行,立于男人伸手可及之处,或立于该处而交谈,或赴约,或接受男人的来近,或由某种隐蔽处进入;或显示巴利原文
233.Idhāti imasmiṃ bhikkhuvibhaṅge. Uddiṭṭhāti idha pātimokkhavasena anosāritattā cattāro pārājikāva uddiṭṭhā kathitāti attho gahetabbo. Yadi evaṃ heṭṭhā thullaccayadukkaṭānampi vuttattā pārājikāva uddiṭṭhāti kasmā vuttāti? Pārājikādhikārattā santesupi thullaccayadukkaṭesu idha pārājikāva vuttā. Yesaṃ…pe… asaṃvāsoti imamatthaṃ vā dīpetukāmo taṃsambandhena ‘‘uddiṭṭhā cattāro pārājikā’’ti āha. Tatthāyasmantetiādikaṃ pana anuññātapātimokkhuddesakkamopi ayameva, nāññoti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Bhikkhunīnaṃ asādhāraṇāni cattārīti ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā vajjapaṭicchādikā ukkhittānuvattikā aṭṭhavatthukāti imāni cattāri bhikkhunīnaṃ bhikkhūhi asādhāraṇāni nāma. Etesu ubbhajāṇumaṇḍalikā nāma yā kāyasaṃsaggarāgena avassutā teneva rāgena avassutassa manussapurisassa akkhakānaṃ adho jāṇumaṇḍalānaṃ kapparānañca upari yena kenaci sarīrāvayavena āmasanādiṃ sādiyati, tassā adhivacanaṃ. Yā pana bhikkhunī aññissā bhikkhuniyā pārājikasaṅkhātaṃ vajjaṃ jānaṃ paṭicchādeti, sā vajjapaṭicchādikā nāma. Samaggena pana saṅghena ukkhittaṃ bhikkhuṃ yā bhikkhunī yaṃdiṭṭhiko so hoti, tassā diṭṭhiyā gahaṇavasena anuvattati, sā ukkhittānuvattikā nāma. Yā pana kāyasaṃsaggarāgena tintā tathāvidhasseva purisassa hatthaggahaṇaṃ vā saṅghāṭikaṇṇaggahaṇaṃ vā sādiyati, kāyasaṃsaggasaṅkhātassa asaddhammassa paṭisevanatthāya purisassa hatthapāse santiṭṭhati vā, tattha ṭhatvā sallapati vā, saṅketaṃ vā gacchati, purisassa āgamanaṃ vā sādiyati, kenaci vā paṭicchannokāsaṃ pavisati, hatthapāse vā ṭhatvā kāyaṃ upasaṃharati, ayaṃ aṭṭhavatthukā nāmāti veditabbaṃ.
“事坏”指由于在出家、受具足戒方面不成事而事坏。因为他们已被世尊禁止出家、受具足戒,如说:“诸比丘,黄门不得出家,若令出家者,犯恶作。”因此,他们由于不能成为比丘,与犯波罗夷者相似,故说为“波罗夷”。由于比丘性的存在,故称为“事”,即诸人堪能成为比丘之性。而此性,是于远离出家具戒品中所说,具足远离一切过失的圆满成就。那些因黄门性等而此事坏失者,称为“事坏”。“无因结生者”——以此显示他们具足异熟障,说明其道障的原因。由于与犯波罗夷者相似,故为波罗夷。贼住者等之业,如杀母等,并非无间业,故说“此三种人,于天趣无障碍”。显示巴利原文
Vatthuvipannāti pabbajjupasampadāya avatthubhāvato vatthuvipannā. Nesañhi ‘‘na, bhikkhave, paṇḍako pabbājetabbo, yo pabbājeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’tiādinā pabbajjā upasampadā ca paṭikkhittā. Tasmā te bhikkhubhāvāya abhabbattā pārājikāpannasadisatāya ‘‘pārājikā’’ti vuttā. Tabbhāvabhāvitāya bhikkhubhāvo vasati etthāti vatthu, puggalānaṃ bhikkhubhāvārahatā. Sā pana pabbajjakkhandhakāgatasabbadosavirahitasampattiyuttatā. Taṃ vipannaṃ paṇḍakabhāvādiyogena yesaṃ te vatthuvipannā. Ahetukapaṭisandhikāti iminā tesaṃ vipākāvaraṇena samannāgatabhāvaṃ dassento maggāvaraṇe kāraṇamāha. Pārājikāpannasadisattā pārājikā. Theyyasaṃvāsakādikammaṃ mātughātādikaṃ viya ānantariyaṃ na hotīti āha ‘‘imesaṃ tiṇṇaṃ saggo avārito’’ti.
因其男根长而下垂,故称为“垂者”。仅此程度,他尚未犯波罗夷。然而,当他因不乐而受逼迫,将自己的男根放入自己或他人的口或大便道时,便犯波罗夷。因其背部柔软,故称为“软背者”,即具备经过处理而柔软的背部之人。当他因不乐而受逼迫,将自己的男根放入自己口或大便道中的任何一个时,也犯波罗夷。“以自口含他人男根”,是指因不乐而受逼迫,以自口含住他人——无论是睡着者或放逸者——的男根。“坐于他人男根上”,是指因不乐而受逼迫,见他人男根堪用时,以自己大便道坐于其上,将其纳入自己大便道中,此即是义。显示巴利原文
Dīghatāya lambamānaṃ aṅgajātametassāti lambī. So ettāvatā na pārājiko, atha kho yadā anabhiratiyā pīḷito attano aṅgajātaṃ mukhe vā vaccamagge vā paveseti, tadā pārājiko hoti. Mudu piṭṭhi etassāti mudupiṭṭhiko, kataparikammāya mudukāya piṭṭhiyā samannāgato. Sopi yadā anabhiratiyā pīḷito attano aṅgajātaṃ attano mukhavaccamaggesu aññataraṃ paveseti, tadā pārājiko hoti. Parassa aṅgajātaṃ attano mukhena gaṇhātīti yo anabhiratiyā pīḷito parassa suttassa vā pamattassa vā aṅgajātaṃ attano mukhena gaṇhāti. Parassa aṅgajāte abhinisīdatīti yo anabhiratiyā pīḷito parassa aṅgajātaṃ kammaniyaṃ disvā attano vaccamaggena tassūpari nisīdati, taṃ attano vaccamaggaṃ pavesetīti attho.
于此有问:“杀母者、杀父者、杀阿拉汉者犯第三波罗夷,污比丘尼者、垂者等四种犯第一波罗夷,如此如何成为二十四种?”答曰:“杀母者等四种,在此处实指未受具足戒者;垂者等四种,虽被第一波罗夷所摄,然因这些以这种方式并未实际行淫欲法,故各别而说。”“以此方式”是指以两者贪欲现起的方式。于第二选项“是否有”中,应知是分解为“是否有义”。显示巴利原文
Etthāha – mātughātakapitughātakaarahantaghātakā tatiyapārājikaṃ āpannā, bhikkhunīdūsako lambīādayo cattāro paṭhamapārājikaṃ āpannā evāti kathaṃ catuvīsatīti? Vuccate – mātughātakādayo hi cattāro idha anupasampannā eva adhippetā, lambīādayo cattāro kiñcāpi paṭhamapārājikena saṅgahitā, yasmā pana etena pariyāyena methunaṃ dhammaṃ appaṭisevino honti, tasmā visuṃ vuttāti. Etena pariyāyenāti ubhinnaṃ rāgapariyuṭṭhānasaṅkhātena pariyāyena. Dutiyavikappe kaccitthāti ettha kacci atthāti padacchedo veditabbo.